[transcriber's note: references to page numbers in table of contents and index removed, as well as the numbers themselves.] [illustration: alexander graham bell the inventor of the telephone.] cyclopedia of telephony and telegraphy _a general reference work on_ telephony, substations, party-line systems, protection, manual switchboards, automatic systems, power plants, special service features, construction, engineering, operation, maintenance, telegraphy, wireless telegraphy and telephony, etc. _prepared by a corps of_ telephone and telegraph experts, and electrical engineers of the highest professional standing _illustrated with over two thousand engravings_ four volumes chicago american school of correspondence authors and collaborators * * * * * kempster b. miller. m.e. consulting engineer and telephone expert of the firm of mcmeen and miller, electrical engineers and patent experts, chicago american institute of electrical engineers western society of engineers * * * * * george w. patterson, s.b., ph.d. head, department of electrical engineering, university of michigan * * * * * charles thom chief of quadruplex department, western union main office, new york city * * * * * robert andrews millikan, ph.d. associate professor of physics, university of chicago member, executive council, american physical society * * * * * samuel g. mcmeen consulting engineer and telephone expert of the firm of mcmeen and miller, electrical engineers and patent experts, chicago american institute of electrical engineers western society of engineers * * * * * lawrence k. sager, s.b., m.p.l. patent attorney and electrical expert formerly assistant examiner, u.s. patent office * * * * * glenn m. hobbs, ph.d. secretary, american school of correspondence formerly instructor in physics, university of chicago american physical society * * * * * charles g. ashley electrical engineer and expert in wireless telegraphy and telephony * * * * * a. frederick collins editor, _collins wireless bulletin_ author of "wireless telegraphy, its history, theory, and practice" * * * * * francis b. crocker, e.m., ph.d. head, department of electrical engineering, columbia university past-president, american institute of electrical engineers * * * * * morton arendt, e.e. instructor in electrical engineering, columbia university, new york * * * * * edward b. waite head, instruction department, american school of correspondence american society of mechanical engineers western society of engineers * * * * * david p. moreton, b.s., e.e. associate professor of electrical engineering, armour institute of technology american institute of electrical engineers, * * * * * leigh s. keith, b.s. managing engineer with mcmeen and miller, electrical engineers and patent experts chicago associate member, american institute of electrical engineers * * * * * jessie m. shepherd, a.b. associate editor, textbook department, american school of correspondence * * * * * ernest l. wallace, b.s. assistant examiner, united states patent office, washington, d. c. * * * * * george r. metcalfe, m.e. editor, _american institute of electrical engineers_ formerly head of publication department, westinghouse elec. & mfg. co. * * * * * j.p. schroeter graduate, munich technical school instructor in electrical engineering, american school of correspondence * * * * * james dixon, e.e. american institute of electrical engineers * * * * * harris c. trow, s.b., _managing editor_ editor-in-chief, textbook department, american school of correspondence authorities consulted the editors have freely consulted the standard technical literature of america and europe in the preparation of these volumes. they desire to express their indebtedness particularly to the following eminent authorities, whose well-known works should be in the library of every telephone and telegraph engineer. grateful acknowledgment is here made also for the invaluable co-operation of the foremost engineering firms and manufacturers in making these volumes thoroughly representative of the very best and latest practice in the transmission of intelligence, also for the valuable drawings, data, suggestions, criticisms, and other courtesies. * * * * * arthur e. kennely, d.sc. professor of electrical engineering, harvard university. joint author of "the electric telephone." "the electric telegraph," "alternating currents," "arc lighting," "electric heating," "electric motors," "electric railways," "incandescent lighting," etc. * * * * * henry smith carhart, a.m., ll.d. professor of physics and director of the physical laboratory, university of michigan. author of "primary batteries," "elements of physics," "university physics," "electrical measurements," "high school physics," etc. * * * * * francis b. crocker, m.e., ph.d. head of department of electrical engineering, columbia university, new york; past-president, american institute of electrical engineers. author of "electric lighting;" joint author of "management of electrical machinery." * * * * * horatio a. foster consulting engineer; member of american institute of electrical engineers; member of american society of mechanical engineers. author of "electrical engineer's pocket-book." * * * * * william s. franklin, m.s., d.sc. professor of physics, lehigh university. joint author of "the elements of electrical engineering," "the elements of alternating currents." * * * * * lamar lyndon, b.e., m.e. consulting electrical engineer; associate member of american institute of electrical engineers; member, american electro-chemical society. author of "storage battery engineering." * * * * * robert andrews millikan, ph.d. professor of physics, university of chicago. joint author of "a first course in physics," "electricity, sound and light," etc. * * * * * kempster b. miller, m.e. consulting engineer and telephone expert; of the firm of mcmeen and miller, electrical engineers and patent experts, chicago. author of "american telephone practice." * * * * * william h. preece chief of the british postal telegraph. joint author of "telegraphy," "a manual of telephony," etc.-- * * * * * louis bell, ph.d. consulting electrical engineer; lecturer on power transmission, massachusetts institute of technology. author of "electric power transmission," "power distribution for electric railways," "the art of illumination," "wireless telephony," etc. * * * * * oliver heaviside, f.r.s. author of "electro-magnetic theory," "electrical papers," etc. * * * * * silvanus p. thompson, d.sc, b.a., f.r.s., f.r.a.s. principal and professor of physics in the city and guilds of london technical college. author of "electricity and magnetism," "dynamo-electric machinery," "polyphase electric currents and alternate-current motors," "the electromagnet," etc. * * * * * andrew gray, m.a., f.r.s.e. author of "absolute measurements in electricity and magnetism." * * * * * albert cushing crehore, a.b., ph.d. electrical engineer; assistant professor of physics, dartmouth college; formerly instructor in physics, cornell university. author of "synchronous and other multiple telegraphs;" joint author of "alternating currents." * * * * * j. j. thomson, d.sc, ll.d., ph.d., f.r.s. fellow of trinity college, cambridge university; cavendish professor of experimental physics, cambridge university. author of "the conduction of electricity through gases," "electricity and matter." * * * * * frederick bedell, ph. d. professor of applied electricity, cornell university. author of "the principles of the transformer;" joint author of "alternating currents." * * * * * dugald c. jackson, c.e. head of department of electrical engineering, massachusetts institute of technology; member, american institute of electrical engineers, etc. author of "a textbook on electromagnetism and the construction of dynamos;" joint author of "alternating currents and alternating-current machinery." * * * * * michael idvorsky pupin, a.b., sc.d., ph.d. professor of electro-mechanics, columbia university, new york. author of "propagation of long electric waves," and "wave-transmission over non-uniform cables and long-distance air lines." * * * * * frank baldwin jewett, a.b., ph.d. transmission and protection engineer, with american telephone & telegraph co. author of "modern telephone cable," "effect of pressure on insulation resistance." * * * * * arthur crotch formerly lecturer on telegraphy and telephony at the municipal technical schools, norwich, eng. author of "telegraphy and telephony." * * * * * james erskine-murray, d.sc. fellow of the royal society of edinburgh; member of the institution of electrical engineers. author of "a handbook of wireless telegraphy." * * * * * a.h. mcmillan, a.b., ll.b. author of "telephone law, a manual on the organization and operation of telephone companies." * * * * * william esty, s.b., m.a. head of department of electrical engineering, lehigh university. joint author of "the elements of electrical engineering." * * * * * george w. wilder, ph.d. formerly professor of telephone engineering, armour institute of technology. author of "telephone principles and practice," "simultaneous telegraphy and telephony," etc. * * * * * william l. hooper, ph.d. head of department of electrical engineering, tufts college. joint author of "electrical problems for engineering students." * * * * * david s. hulfish technical editor, _the nickelodeon_; telephone and motion-picture expert; solicitor of patents. author of "how to read telephone circuit diagrams." * * * * * j.a. fleming, m.a., d.sc. (lond.), f.r.s. professor of electrical engineering in university college, london; late fellow and scholar of st. john's college, cambridge; fellow of university college, london. author of "the alternate-current transformer," "radiotelegraphy and radiotelephony," "principles of electric wave telegraphy," "cantor lectures on electrical oscillations and electric waves," "hertzian wave wireless telegraphy," etc. * * * * * f.a.c. perrine, a.m., d.sc. consulting engineer: formerly president, stanley electric manufacturing company; formerly professor of electrical engineering, leland stanford, jr. university. author of "conductors for electrical distribution." * * * * * a. frederick collins editor, _collins wireless bulletin_. author of "wireless telegraphy, its history, theory and practice," "manual of wireless telegraphy," "design and construction of induction coils," etc. * * * * * schuyler s. wheeler, d.sc. president, crocker-wheeler co.; past-president, american institute of electrical engineers. joint author of "management of electrical machinery." * * * * * charles proteus steinmetz consulting engineer, with the general electric co.; professor of electrical engineering, union college. author of "the theory and calculation of alternating-current phenomena," "theoretical elements of electrical engineering", etc. * * * * * george w. patterson, s.b., ph.d. head of department of electrical engineering, university of michigan. joint author of "electrical measurements." * * * * * william maver, jr. ex-electrician baltimore and ohio telegraph company; member of the american institute of electrical engineers. author of "american telegraphy and encyclopedia of the telegraph," "wireless telegraphy." * * * * * john price jackson, m.e. professor of electrical engineering, pennsylvania state college. joint author of "alternating currents and alternating-current machinery." * * * * * augustus treadwell, jr., e.e. associate member, american institute of electrical engineers. author of "the storage battery, a practical treatise on secondary batteries." * * * * * edwin j. houston, ph.d. professor of physics, franklin institute, pennsylvania; joint inventor of thomson-houston system of arc lighting; electrical expert and consulting engineer. joint author of "the electric telephone," "the electric telegraph," "alternating currents," "arc lighting," "electric heating," "electric motors," "electric railways," "incandescent lighting," etc. * * * * * william j. hopkins professor of physics in the drexel institute of art, science, and industry, philadelphia. author of "telephone lines and their properties." [illustration: a typical small magneto switchboard installation] [illustration: a typical central office for rural exchange line protectors on wall at left.] foreword the present day development of the "talking wire" has annihilated both time and space, and has enabled men thousands of miles apart to get into almost instant communication. the user of the telephone and the telegraph forgets the tremendousness of the feat in the simplicity of its accomplishment; but the man who has made the feat possible knows that its very simplicity is due to the complexity of the principles and appliances involved; and he realizes his need of a practical, working understanding of each principle and its application. the cyclopedia of telephony and telegraphy presents a comprehensive and authoritative treatment of the whole art of the electrical transmission of intelligence. the communication engineer--if so he may be called--requires a knowledge both of the mechanism of his instruments and of the vagaries of the current that makes them talk. he requires as well a knowledge of plants and buildings, of office equipment, of poles and wires and conduits, of office system and time-saving methods, for the transmission of intelligence is a business as well as an art. and to each of these subjects, and to all others pertinent, the cyclopedia gives proper space and treatment. the sections on telephony cover the installation, maintenance, and operation of all standard types of telephone systems; they present without prejudice the respective merits of manual and automatic exchanges; and they give special attention to the prevention and handling of operating "troubles." the sections on telegraphy cover both commercial service and train dispatching. practical methods of wireless communication--both by telephone and by telegraph--are thoroughly treated. the drawings, diagrams, and photographs incorporated into the cyclopedia have been prepared especially for this work; and their instructive value is as great as that of the text itself. they have been used to illustrate and illuminate the text, and not as a medium around which to build the text. both drawings and diagrams have been simplified so far as is compatible with their correctness, with the result that they tell their own story and always in the same language. the cyclopedia is a compilation of many of the most valuable instruction papers of the american school of correspondence, and the method adopted in its preparation is that which this school has developed and employed so successfully for many years. this method is not an experiment, but has stood the severest of all tests--that of practical use--which has demonstrated it to be the best yet devised for the education of the busy, practical man. in conclusion, grateful acknowledgment is due to the staff of authors and collaborators, without whose hearty co-operation this work would have been impossible. table of contents volume i fundamental principles _by k. b. miller and s. g. mcmeen_[a] acoustics--characteristics of sound--loudness--pitch--vibration of diaphragms--timbre--human voice--human ear--speech--magneto telephones--loose-contact principle--induction coils--simple telephone circuit--capacity--telephone currents--audible and visible signals--telephone lines--conductors--inductance--insulation substation equipment _by k. b. miller and s. g. mcmeen_ transmitters--variable resistance--materials--single and multiple electrodes--solid-back transmitter--types of transmitters--electrodes--packing--acousticon transmitter--switchboard transmitter--receivers--types of receivers--operator's receiver--primary cells--series and multiple connections--types of primary cells--magneto signaling apparatus--battery bell--magneto bell--magneto generator--armature--automatic shunt--polarized ringer--hook switch--electromagnets--impedance, induction, and repeating coils--non-inductive resistance devices--differentially-wound unit--condensers--materials--current supply to transmitters--local battery--common battery--diagrams of common-battery systems--telephone sets: magneto, series and bridging, common-battery party-line systems _by k. b. miller and s. g. mcmeen_ non-selective party-line systems--series and bridging--signal code--selective party-line systems: polarity, harmonic, step-by-step, and broken-line--lock-out party-line systems: poole, step-by-step, and broken-line protection _by k. b. miller and s. g. mcmeen_ electrical hazards--high potentials--air-gap arrester--discharge across gaps--types of arrester--vacuum arrester--strong currents--fuses--sneak currents--line protection--central-office and subscribers' station protectors--city exchange requirements--electrolysis manual switchboards _by k. b. miller and s. g. mcmeen_ the telephone exchange--subscribers', trunk, and toll lines--districts--switchboards--simple magneto switchboard--operation--commercial types of drops and jacks--manual vs. automatic restoration--switchboard plugs and cords--ringing and listening keys--operator's telephone equipment--circuits of complete switchboard--night-alarm circuits--grounded and metallic circuit line--cord circuit--switchboard assembly review questions index [footnote a: for professional standing of authors, see list of authors and collaborators at front of volume.] [illustration: old branch-terminal multiple board, paris, france] telephony introduction the telephone was invented in by alexander graham bell, a resident of the united states, a native of scotland, and by profession a teacher of deaf mutes in the art of vocal speech. in that year, professor bell was engaged in the experimental development of a system of multiplex telegraphy, based on the use of rapidly varying currents. during those experiments, he observed an iron reed to vibrate before an electromagnet as a result of another iron reed vibrating before a distant electromagnet connected to the nearer one by wires. the telephone resulted from this observation with great promptness. in the instrument first made, sound vibrated a membrane diaphragm supporting a bit of iron near an electromagnet; a line joined this simple device of three elements to another like it; a battery in the line magnetized both electromagnet cores; the vibration of the iron in the sending device caused the current in the line to undulate and to vary the magnetism of the receiving device. the diaphragm of the latter was vibrated in consequence of the varying pull upon its bit of iron, and these vibrations reproduced the sound that vibrated the sending diaphragm. the first public use of the electric telephone was at the centennial exposition in philadelphia in . it was there tested by many interested observers, among them sir william thomson, later lord kelvin, the eminent scotch authority on matters of electrical communication. it was he who contributed so largely to the success of the early telegraph cable system between england and america. two of his comments which are characteristic are as follows: to-day i have seen that which yesterday i should have deemed impossible. soon lovers will whisper their secrets over an electric wire. * * * * * who can but admire the hardihood of invention which devised such slight means to realize the mathematical conception that if electricity is to convey all the delicacies of sound which distinguish articulate speech, the strength of its current must vary continuously as nearly as may be in simple proportion to the velocity of a particle of the air engaged in constituting the sound. contrary to usual methods of improving a new art, the earliest improvement of the telephone simplified it. the diaphragms became thin iron disks, instead of membranes carrying iron; the electromagnet cores were made of permanently magnetized steel instead of temporarily magnetized soft iron, and the battery was omitted from the line. the undulatory current in a system of two such telephones joined by a line is _produced_ in the sending telephone by the vibration of the iron diaphragm. the vibration of the diaphragm in the receiving telephone is _produced_ by the undulatory current. sound is _produced_ by the vibration of the diaphragm of the receiving telephone. such a telephone is at once the simplest known form of electric generator or motor for alternating currents. it is capable of translating motion into current or current into motion through a wide range of frequencies. it is not known that there is any frequency of alternating current which it is not capable of producing and translating. it can produce and translate currents of greater complexity than any other existing electrical machine. though possessing these admirable qualities as an electrical machine, the simple electromagnetic telephone had not the ability to transmit speech loudly enough for all practical uses. transmitters producing stronger telephonic currents were developed soon after the fundamental invention. some forms of these were invented by professor bell himself. other inventors contributed devices embodying the use of carbon as a resistance to be varied by the motions of the diaphragm. this general form of transmitting telephone has prevailed and at present is the standard type. it is interesting to note that the earliest incandescent lamps, as invented by mr. edison, had a resistance material composed of carbon, and that such a lamp retained its position as the most efficient small electric illuminant until the recent introduction of metal filament lamps. it is possible that some form of metal may be introduced as the resistance medium for telephone transmitters, and that such a change as has taken place in incandescent lamps may increase the efficiency of telephone transmitting devices. at the time of the invention of the telephone, there were in existence two distinct types of telegraph, working in regular commercial service. in the more general type, many telegraph stations were connected to a line and whatever was telegraphed between two stations could be read by all the stations of that line. in the other and less general type, many lines, each having a single telegraph station, were centered in an office or "exchange," and at the desire of a user his line could be connected to another and later disconnected from it. both of these types of telegraph service were imitated at once in telephone practice. lines carrying many telephones each, were established with great rapidity. telephones actually displaced telegraphic apparatus in the exchange method of working in america. the fundamental principle on which telegraph or telephone exchanges operate, being that of placing any line in communication with any other in the system, gave to each line an ultimate scope so great as to make this form of communication more popular than any arrangement of telephones on a single line. beginning in , telephone exchanges were developed with great rapidity in all of the larger communities of the united states. telegraph switching devices were utilized at the outset or were modified in such minor particulars as were necessary to fit them to the new task. in its simplest form, a telephone system is, of course, a single line permanently joining two telephones. in its next simplest form, it is a line permanently joining more than two telephones. in its most useful form, it is a line joining a telephone to some means of connecting it at will to another. a telephone exchange central office contains means for connecting lines at will in that useful way. the least complicated machine for that purpose is a switchboard to be operated by hand, having some way of letting the operator know that a connection is wished and a way of making it. the customary way of connecting the lines always has been by means of flexible conductors fitted with plugs to be inserted in sockets. if the switchboard be small enough so that all the lines are within arm's reach of the operator, the whole process is individual, and may be said to be at its best and simplest. there are but few communities, however, in which the number of lines to be served and calls to be answered is small enough so that the entire traffic of the exchange can be handled by a single person. an obvious way, therefore, is to provide as many operators in a central office as may be required by the number of calls to be answered, and to terminate before each of the operators enough of the lines to bring enough work to keep that operator economically occupied. this presents the additional problem, how to connect a line terminating before one operator to a line normally terminating before another operator. the obvious answer is to provide lines from each operator's place of work to each other operator's place, connecting a calling line to some one of these lines which are local within the central office, and, in turn, connecting that chosen local line to the line which is called. such lines between operators have come to be known as _trunk lines_, because of the obvious analogy to trunk lines of railways between common centers, and such a system of telephone lines may be called a _trunking system_. very good service has been given and can be given by such an arrangement of local trunks, but the growth in lines and in traffic has developed in most instances certain weaknesses which make it advisable to find speedier, more accurate, and more reliable means. for the serving of a large traffic from a large number of lines, as is required in practically every city of the world, a very great contribution to the practical art was made by the development of the multiple switchboard. such a switchboard is merely such a device as has been described for the simpler cases, with the further refinement that within reach of each operator in the central office appears _every line which enters that office_, and this without regard to what point in the switchboard the lines may terminate for the _answering_ of calls. in other words, while each operator answers a certain subordinate group of the total number of lines, each operator may reach, for calling purposes, every line which enters that office. it is probable that the invention and development of the multiple switchboard was the first great impetus toward the wide-spread use of telephone service. coincident with the development of the multiple switchboard for manually operated, central-office mechanisms was the beginning of the development of automatic apparatus under the control of the calling subscriber for finding and connecting with a called line. it is interesting to note the general trend of the early development of automatic apparatus in comparison with the development, to that time, of manual telephone apparatus. while the manual apparatus on the one hand attempted to meet its problem by providing local trunks between the various operators of a central office, and failing of success in that, finally developed a means which placed all the lines of a central office within connecting reach of each operator, automatic telephony, beginning at that point, failed of success in attempting to bring each line in the central office within connecting reach of each connecting mechanism. in other terms, the first automatic switching equipment consisted of a machine for each line, which machine was so organized as to be able to find and connect its calling line with any called line of the entire central-office group. it may be said that an attempt to develop this plan was the fundamental reason for the repeated failure of automatic apparatus to solve the problem it attacked. all that the earlier automatic system did was to prove more or less successfully that automatic apparatus had a right to exist, and that to demand of the subscriber that he manipulate from his station a distant machine to make the connection without human aid was not fallacious. when it had been recognized that the entire multiple switchboard idea could not be carried into automatic telephony with success, the first dawn of hope in that art may be said to have come. success in automatic telephony did come by the re-adoption of the trunking method. as adopted for automatic telephony, the method contemplates that the calling line shall be extended, link by link, until it finds itself lengthened and directed so as to be able to seize the called line in a very much smaller multiple than the total group of one office of the exchange. a similar curious reversion has taken place in the development of telephone lines. the earliest telephone lines were merely telegraph lines equipped with telephone instruments, and the earliest telegraph lines were planned by professor morse to be insulated wires laid in the earth. a lack of skill in preparing the wires for putting in the earth caused these early underground lines to be failures. at the urging of one of his associates, professor morse consented to place his earliest telegraph lines on poles in the air. each such line originally consisted of two wires, one for the going and one for the returning current, as was then considered the action. upon its being discovered that a single wire, using the earth as a return, would serve as a satisfactory telegraph line, such practice became universal. upon the arrival of the telephone, all lines obviously were built in the same way, and until force of newer circumstances compelled it, the present metallic circuit without an earth connection did not come into general use. the extraordinary growth of the number of telephone lines in a community and the development of other methods of electrical utilization, as well as the growth in the knowledge of telephony itself, ultimately forced the wires underground again. at the same time and for the same causes, a telephone line became one of two wires, so that it becomes again the counterpart of the earliest telegraph line of professor morse. another curious and interesting example of this reversion to type exists in the simple telephone receiver. an early improvement in telephone receivers after professor bell's original invention was to provide the necessary magnetism of the receiver core by making it of steel and permanently magnetizing it, whereas professor bell's instrument provided its magnetism by means of direct current flowing in the line. in later days the telephone receiver has returned almost to the original form in which professor bell produced it and this change has simplified other elements of telephone-exchange apparatus in a very interesting and gratifying way. by reason of improvements in methods of line construction and apparatus arrangement, the radius of communication steadily has increased. commercial speech now is possible between points several thousand miles apart, and there is no theoretical reason why communication might not be established between any two points on the earth's surface. the practical reasons of demand and cost may prevent so great an accomplishment as talking half around the earth. so far as science is concerned there would seem to be no reason why this might not be done today, by the careful application of what already is known. in the united states, telephone service from its beginning has been supplied to users by private enterprise. in other countries, it is supplied by means of governmentally-owned equipment. in general, it may be said that the adequacy and the amount, as well as the quality of telephone service, is best in countries where the service is provided by private enterprise. telephone systems in the united states were under the control of the bell telephone company from the invention of the device in until . the fundamental telephone patent expired in . this opened the telephone art to the general public, because it no longer was necessary to secure telephones solely from the patent-holding company nor to pay royalty for the right to use them, if secured at all. manufacturers of electrical apparatus generally then began to make and sell telephones and telephone apparatus, and operating companies, also independent of the bell organization, began to install and use telephones. at the end of seventeen years of patent monopoly in the united states, there were in operation a little over , telephones. in the seventeen years since the expiration of the fundamental patent, independent telephone companies throughout the united states have installed and now have in daily successful use over , , telephones. in other words, since its first beginnings, independent telephony has brought into continuous daily use nearly sixteen times as many telephones as were brought into use in the equal time of the complete monopoly of the bell organization. at the beginning of , there were in service by the bell organization about , , telephones. these with the , , independent telephones, make a total of , , , or about one-twelfth as many telephones as there are inhabitants of the united states. the influence of this development upon the lives of the people has been profound. whether the influence has been wholly for good may not be so conclusively apparent. lord bacon has declared that, excepting only the alphabet and the art of printing, those inventions abridging distance are of the greatest service to mankind. if this be true, it may be said that the invention of telephony deserves high place among the civilizing influences. there is no industrial art in which the advancement of the times has been followed more closely by practical application than in telephony. commercial speech by telephone is possible by means of currents which so far are practically unmeasurable. in other words, it is possible to speak clearly and satisfactorily over a line by means of currents which cannot be read, with certainty as to their amount, by any electrical measuring device so far known. in this regard, telephony is less well fortified than are any of the arts utilizing electrical power in larger quantities. the real wonder is that with so little knowledge of what takes place, particularly as to amount, those working in the art have been able to do as well as they have. when an exact knowledge of quantity is easily obtainable, very striking advances may be looked for. the student of these phases of physical science and industrial art will do well to combine three processes: study of the words of others; personal experimentation; and digestive thought. the last mentioned is the process of profoundest value. on it finally depends mastery. it is not of so much importance how soon the concept shall finally be gained as _that it is gained_. a statement by another may seem lifeless and inert and the meaning of an observation may be obscure. digestive thought is the only assimilative process. the whole art of telephony hangs on taking thought of things. judge r.f. taylor of indiana said of professor bell, "it has been said that no man by taking thought may add a cubit to his stature, yet here is a man who, by taking thought, has added not cubits but miles to the lengths of men's tongues and ears." in observations of many students, it is found that the notion of each must pass through a certain period of incubation before his private and personal knowledge of ohm's law is hatched. once hatched, however, it is his. by just such a process must come each principal addition to his stock of concepts. the periods may vary and practice in the uses of the mind may train it in alertness in its work. if time is required, time should be given, the object always being to keep thinking or re-reading or re-trying until the thought is wholly encompassed and possessed. chapter i acoustics telephony is the art of reproducing at a distant point, usually by the agency of electricity, sounds produced at a sending point. in this art the elements of two general divisions of physical science are concerned, sound and electricity. sound is the effect of vibrations of matter upon the ear. the vibrations may be those of air or other matter. various forms of matter transmit sound vibrations in varying degrees, at different specific speeds, and with different effects upon the vibrations. any form of matter may serve as a transmitting medium for sound vibrations. sound itself is an effect of sound vibrations upon the ear. propagation of sound. since human beings communicate with each other by means of speech and hearing through the air, it is with air that the acoustics of telephony principally is concerned. in air, sound vibrations consist of successive condensations and rarefactions tending to proceed outwardly from the source in all directions. the source is the center of a sphere of sound vibrations. whatever may be the nature of the sounds or of the medium transmitting them, they consist of waves emitted by the source and observed by the ear. a sound wave is one complete condensation and rarefaction of the transmitting medium. it is produced by one complete vibration of the sound-producing thing. sound waves in air travel at a rate of about , feet per second. the rate of propagation of sound waves in other materials varies with the density of the material. for example, the speed of transmission is much greater in water than in air, and is much less in highly rarefied air than in air at ordinary density. the propagation of sound waves in a vacuum may be said not to take place at all. characteristics of sound. three qualities distinguish sound: loudness, pitch, and timbre. _loudness._ loudness depends upon the violence of the effect upon the ear; sounds may be alike in their other qualities and differ in loudness, the louder sounds being produced by the stronger vibrations of the air or other medium at the ear. other things being equal, the louder sound is produced by the source radiating the greater energy and so producing the greater _degree_ of condensation and rarefaction of the medium. _pitch._ pitch depends upon the frequency at which the sound waves strike the ear. pitches are referred to as _high_ or _low_ as the frequency of waves reaching the ear are greater or fewer. familiar low pitches are the left-hand strings of a piano; the larger ones of stringed instruments generally; bass voices; and large bells. familiar high pitches are right-hand piano strings; smaller ones of other stringed instruments; soprano voices; small bells; and the voices of most birds and insects. doppler's principle:--as pitch depends upon the frequency at which sound waves strike the ear, an object may emit sound waves at a constant frequency, yet may produce different pitches in ears differently situated. such a case is not usual, but an example of it will serve a useful purpose in fixing certain facts as to pitch. conceive two railroad trains to pass each other, running in opposite directions, the engine bells of both trains ringing. passengers on each train will hear the bell of the other, first as a _rising_ pitch, then as a _falling_ one. passengers on each train will hear the bell of their own train at a _constant_ pitch. the difference in the observations in such a case is due to relative positions between the ear and the source of the sound. as to the bell of their own train, the passengers are a fixed distance from it, whether the train moves or stands; as to the bell of the other train, the passengers first rapidly approach it, then pass it, then recede from it. the distances at which it is heard vary as the secants of a circle, the radius in this case being a length which is the closest approach of the ear to the bell. if the bell have a constant intrinsic fundamental pitch of waves per second (a wave-length of about . feet), it first will be heard at a pitch of about waves per second. but this pitch rises rapidly, as if the bell were changing its own pitch, which bells do not do. the rising pitch is heard because the ear is rushing down the wave-train, every instant nearer to the source. at a speed of miles an hour, the pitch rises rapidly, about vibrations per second. if the _rate of approach_ between the ear and the bell were constant, the pitch of the bell would be heard at waves per second. but suddenly the ear passes the bell, hears the pitch stop rising and begin to fall; and the tone drops waves per second as it had risen. such a circumflex is an excellent example of the bearing of wavelengths and frequencies upon pitch. vibration of diaphragms:--sound waves in air have the power to move other diaphragms than that of the ear. sound waves constantly vibrate such diaphragms as panes of windows and the walls of houses. the recording diaphragm of a phonograph is a window pane bearing a stylus adapted to engrave a groove in a record blank. in the cylinder form of record, the groove varies in depth with the vibrations of the diaphragm. in the disk type of phonograph, the groove varies sidewise from its normal true spiral. if the disk record be dusted with talcum powder, wiped, and examined with a magnifying glass, the waving spiral line may be seen. its variations are the result of the blows struck upon the diaphragm by a train of sound waves. in reproducing a phonograph record, increasing the speed of the record rotation causes the pitch to rise, because the blows upon the air are increased in frequency and the wave-lengths shortened. a transitory decrease in speed in recording will cause a transitory rise in pitch when that record is reproduced at uniform speed. _timbre._ character of sound denotes that difference of effect produced upon the ear by sounds otherwise alike in pitch and loudness. this characteristic is called timbre. it is extraordinarily useful in human affairs, human voices being distinguished from each other by it, and a great part of the joy of music lying in it. a bell, a stretched string, a reed, or other sound-producing body, emits a certain lowest possible tone when vibrated. this is called its _fundamental tone_. the pitch, loudness, and timbre of this tone depend upon various controlling causes. usually this fundamental tone is accompanied by a number of others of higher pitch, blending with it to form the general tone of that object. these higher tones are called _harmonics_. the germans call them _overtones_. they are always of a frequency which is some multiple of the fundamental frequency. that is, the rate of vibration of a harmonic is , , , , or some other integral number, times as great as the fundamental itself. a tone having no harmonics is rare in nature and is not an attractive one. the tones of the human voice are rich in harmonics. in any tone having a fundamental and harmonics (multiples), the wave-train consists of a complex series of condensations and rarefactions of the air or other transmitting medium. in the case of mere noises the train of vibrations is irregular and follows no definite order. this is the difference between vowel sounds and other musical tones on the one hand and all unmusical sounds (or noises) on the other. human voice. human beings communicate with each other in various ways. the chief method is by speech. voice is sound vibration produced by the vocal cords, these being two ligaments in the larynx. the vocal cords in man are actuated by the air from the lungs. the size and tension of the vocal cords and the volume and the velocity of the air from the lungs control the tones of the voice. the more tightly the vocal cords be drawn, other things being equal, the higher will be the pitch of the sound; that is, the higher the frequency of vibration produced by the voice. the pitches of the human voice lie, in general, between the frequencies of and per second. these are the extremes of pitch, and it is not to be understood that any such range of pitch is utilized in ordinary speech. an average man speaks mostly between the fundamental frequencies of and per second. many female speaking voices use fundamental frequencies between and vibrations per second. it is obvious from what has been said that in all cases these speaking fundamentals are accompanied by their multiples, giving complexity to the resulting wave-trains and character to the speaking voice. speech-sounds result from shocks given to the air by the organs of speech; these organs are principally the mouth cavity, the tongue, and the teeth. the vocal cords are _voice-organs_; that is, man only truly speaks, yet the lower animals have voice. speech may be whispered, using no voice. note the distinction between speech and voice, and the organs of both. the speech of adults has a mean pitch lower than that of children; of adult males, lower than that of females. there is no close analogue for the voice-organ in artificial mechanism, but the use of the lips in playing a bugle, trumpet, cornet, or trombone is a fairly close one. here the lips, in contact with each other, are stretched across one end of a tube (the mouthpiece) while the air is blown between the lips by the lungs. a musical tone results; if the instrument be a bugle or a trumpet of fixed tube length, the pitch will be some one of several certain tones, depending on the tension on the lips. the loudness depends on the force of the blast of air; the character depends largely on the bugle. human ear. the human ear, the organ of hearing in man, is a complex mechanism of three general parts, relative to sound waves: a wave-collecting part; a wave-observing part, and a wave-interpreting part. the outer ear collects and reflects the waves inwardly to beat upon the tympanum, or ear drum, a membrane diaphragm. the uses of the rolls or convolutions of the outer ear are not conclusively known, but it is observed that when they are filled up evenly with a wax or its equivalent, the sense of direction of sound is impaired, and usually of loudness also. the diaphragm of the ear vibrates when struck by sound waves, as does any other diaphragm. by means of bone and nerve mechanism, the vibration of the diaphragm finally is made known to the brain and is interpretable therein. the human ear can appreciate and interpret sound waves at frequencies from to about , vibrations per second. below the lesser-number, the tendency is to appreciate the separate vibrations as separate sounds. above the higher number, the vibrations are inaudible to the human ear. the most acute perception of sound differences lies at about , vibrations per second. it may be that the range of hearing of organisms other than man lies far above the range with which human beings are familiar. some trained musicians are able to discriminate between two sounds as differing one from the other when the difference in frequency is less than one-thousandth of either number. other ears are unable to detect a difference in two sounds when they differ by as much as one full step of the chromatic scale. whatever faculty an individual may possess as to tone discrimination, it can be improved by training and practice. chapter ii electrical reproduction of speech the art of telephony in its present form has for its problem so to relate two diaphragms and an electrical system that one diaphragm will respond to all the fundamental and harmonic vibrations beating upon it and cause the other to vibrate in exact consonance, producing just such vibrations, which beat upon an ear. the art does not do all this today; it falls short of it in every phase. many of the harmonics are lost in one or another stage of the process; new harmonics are inserted by the operations of the system itself and much of the volume originally available fails to reappear. the art, however, has been able to change commercial and social affairs in a profound degree. conversion from sound waves to vibration of diaphragm. however produced, by the voice or otherwise, sounds to be transmitted by telephone consist of vibrations of the air. these vibrations, upon reaching a diaphragm, cause it to move. the greatest amplitude of motion of a diaphragm is, or is wished to be, at its center, and its edge ordinarily is fixed. the diaphragm thus serves as a translating device, changing the energy carried by the molecules of the air into localized oscillations of the matter of the diaphragm. the waves of sound in the air advance; the vibrations of the molecules are localized. the agency of the air as a medium for sound transmission should be understood to be one in which its general volume has no need to move from place to place. what occurs is that the vibrations of the sound-producer cause alternate condensations and rarefactions of the air. each molecule of the air concerned merely oscillates through a small amplitude, producing, by joint action, shells of waves, each traveling outward from the sound-producing center like rapidly growing coverings of a ball. conversion from vibration to voice currents. fig. illustrates a simple machine adapted to translate motion of a diaphragm into an alternating electrical current. the device is merely one form of magneto telephone chosen to illustrate the point of immediate conversion. _ _ is a diaphragm adapted to vibrate in response to the sounds reaching it. _ _ is a permanent magnet and _ _ is its armature. the armature is in contact with one pole of the permanent magnet and nearly in contact with the other. the effort of the armature to touch the pole it nearly touches places the diaphragm under tension. the free arm of the magnet is surrounded by a coil _ _, whose ends extend to form the line. [illustration: fig. . type of magneto telephone] when sound vibrates the diaphragm, it vibrates the armature also, increasing and decreasing the distance from the free pole of the magnet. the lines of force threading the coil _ _ are varied as the gap between the magnet and the armature is varied. the result of varying the lines of force through the turns of the coil is to produce an electromotive force in them, and if a closed path is provided by the line, a current will flow. this current is an alternating one having a frequency the same as the sound causing it. as in speech the frequencies vary constantly, many pitches constituting even a single spoken word, so the alternating voice currents are of great varying complexity, and every fundamental frequency has its harmonics superposed. conversion from voice currents to vibration. the best knowledge of the action of such a telephone as is shown in fig. leads to the conclusion that a half-cycle of alternating current is produced by an inward stroke of the diaphragm and a second half-cycle of alternating current by the succeeding outward stroke, these half-cycles flowing in opposite directions. assume one complete cycle of current to pass through the line and also through another such device as in fig. and that the first half-cycle is of such direction as to increase the permanent magnetism of the core. the effort of this increase is to narrow the gap between the armature and pole piece. the diaphragm will throb inward during the half-cycle of current. the succeeding half-cycle being of opposite direction will tend to oppose the magnetism of the core. in practice, the flow of opposing current never would be great enough wholly to nullify and reverse the magnetism of the core, so that the opposition results in a mere decrease, causing the armature's gap to increase and the diaphragm to respond by an outward blow. complete cycle of conversion. the cycle of actions thus is complete; one complete sound-wave in air has produced a cycle of motion in a diaphragm, a cycle of current in a line, a cycle of magnetic change in a core, a cycle of motion in another diaphragm, and a resulting wave of sound. it is to be observed that the chain of operation involves the expenditure of energy only by the speaker, the only function of any of the parts being that of _translating_ this energy from one form to another. in every stage of these translations, there are losses; the devising of means of limiting these losses as greatly as possible is a problem of telephone engineering. [illustration: fig. . magneto telephones and line] magneto telephones. the device in fig. is a practical magneto receiver and transmitter. it is chosen as best picturing the idea to be proposed. fig. illustrates a pair of magneto telephones of the early bell type; _ - _ are diaphragms; _ - _ are permanent magnets with a free end of each brought as near as possible, without touching, to the diaphragm. each magnet bears on its end nearest the diaphragm a winding of fine wire, the two ends of each of these windings being joined by means of a two-wire line. all that has been said concerning fig. is true also of the electrical and magnetic actions of the devices of fig. . in the latter, the flux which threads the fine wire winding is disturbed by motions of the transmitting diaphragm. this disturbance of the flux creates electromotive forces in those windings. similarly, a variation of the electromotive forces in the windings varies the pull of the permanent magnet of the receiving instrument upon its diaphragm. [illustration: no. series multiple switchboard _monarch telephone mfg. co._] [illustration: fig. . magneto telephones without permanent magnets] fig. illustrates a similar arrangement, but it is to be understood that the cores about which the windings are carried in this case are of soft iron and not of hard magnetized steel. the necessary magnetism which constantly enables the cores to exert a pull upon the diaphragm is provided by the battery which is inserted serially in the line. such an arrangement in action differs in no particular from that of fig. , for the reason that it matters not at all whether the magnetism of the core be produced by electromagnetic or by permanently magnetic conditions. the arrangement of fig. is a fundamental counterpart of the original telephone of professor bell, and it is of particular interest in the present stage of the art for the reason that a tendency lately is shown to revert to the early type, abandoning the use of the permanent magnet. the modifications which have been made in the original magneto telephone, practically as shown in fig. , have been many. thirty-five years' experimentation upon and daily use of the instrument has resulted in its refinement to a point where it is a most successful receiver and a most unsuccessful transmitter. its use for the latter purpose may be said to be nothing. as a receiver, it is not only wholly satisfactory for commercial use in its regular function, but it is, in addition, one of the most sensitive electrical detecting devices known to the art. loose contact principle. early experimenters upon bell's device, all using in their first work the arrangement utilizing current from a battery in series with the line, noticed that sound was given out by disturbing loose contacts in the line circuit. this observation led to the arrangement of circuits in such a way that some imperfect contacts could be shaken by means of the diaphragm, and the resistance of the line circuit varied in this manner. an early and interesting form of such imperfect contact transmitter device consisted merely of metal conductors laid loosely in contact. a simple example is that of three wire nails, the third lying across the other two, the two loose contacts thus formed being arranged in series with a battery, the line, and the receiving instrument. such a device when slightly jarred, by the voice or other means, causes abrupt variation in the resistance of the line, and will transmit speech. early conceptions. the conception of the possibility and desirability of transmitting speech by electricity may have occurred to many, long prior to its accomplishment. it is certain that one person, at least, had a clear idea of the general problem. in , charles bourseul, a frenchman, wrote: "i have asked myself, for example, if the spoken word itself could not be transmitted by electricity; in a word, if what was spoken in vienna might not be heard in paris? the thing is practicable in this way: [illustration: fig. . reis transmitter] "suppose that a man speaks near a movable disk sufficiently flexible to lose none of the vibrations of the voice; that this disk _alternately makes and breaks_ the connection from a battery; you may have at a distance another disk which will simultaneously execute the same vibrations." the idea so expressed is weak in only one particular. this particular is shown by the words italicized by ourselves. it is impossible to transmit a complex series of waves by any simple series of makes and breaks. philipp reis, a german, devised the arrangement shown in fig. for the transmission of sound, letting the make and break of the contact between the diaphragm _ _ and the point _ _ interrupt the line circuit. his receiver took several forms, all electromagnetic. his success was limited to the transmission of musical sounds, and it is not believed that articulate speech ever was transmitted by such an arrangement. it must be remembered that the art of telegraphy, particularly in america, was well established long before the invention of the telephone, and that an arrangement of keys, relays, and a battery, as shown in fig. , was well known to a great many persons. attaching the armatures of the relays of such a line to diaphragms, as in fig. , at any time after , would have produced the telephone. "the hardihood of invention" to conceive such a change was the quality required. [illustration: fig. . typical telegraph line] limitations of magneto transmitter. for reasons not finally established, the ability of the magneto telephone to produce large currents from large sounds is not equal to its ability to produce large sounds from large currents. as a receiving device, it is unexcelled, and but slight improvement has been made since its first invention. it is inadequate as a transmitter, and as early as , professor bell exhibited other means than electromagnetic action for producing the varying currents as a consequence of diaphragm motion. much other inventive effort was addressed to this problem, the aim of all being to send out more robust voice currents. [illustration: fig. . telegraph equipment converted into telephone equipment] other methods of producing voice currents. some of these means are the variation of resistance in the path of direct current, variation in the pressure of the source of that current, and variation in the electrostatic capacity of some part of the circuit. _electrostatic telephone._ the latter method is principally that of dolbear and edison. dolbear's thought is illustrated in fig. . two conducting plates are brought close together. one is free to vibrate as a diaphragm, while the other is fixed. the element _ _ in fig. is merely a stud to hold rigid the plate it bears against. each of two instruments connected by a line contains such a pair of plates, and a battery in the line keeps them charged to its potential. the two diaphragms of each instrument are kept drawn towards each other because their unlike charges attract each other. the vibration of one of the diaphragms changes the potential of the other pair; the degree of attraction thus is varied, so that vibration of the diaphragm and sound waves result. examples of this method of telephone transmission are more familiar to later practice in the form of condenser receivers. a condenser, in usual present practice, being a pair of closely adjacent conductors of considerable surface insulated from each other, a rapidly varying current actually may move one or both of the conductors. ordinarily these are of thin sheet metal (foil) interleaved with an insulating material, such as paper or mica. voice currents can vibrate the metal sheets in a degree to cause the condenser to speak. these condenser methods of telephony have not become commercial. [illustration: fig. . electrostatic telephone] _variation of electrical pressure._ variation of the pressure of the source is a conceivable way of transmitting speech. to utilize it, would require that the vibrations of the diaphragm cause the electromotive force of a battery or machine to vary in harmony with the sound waves. so far as we are informed this method never has come into practical use. _variation of resistance._ variation of resistance proportional to the vibrations of the diaphragm is the method which has produced the present prevailing form of transmission. professor bell's centennial exhibit contained a water-resistance transmitter. dr. elisha gray also devised one. in both, the diaphragm acted to increase and diminish the distance between two conductors immersed in water, lowering and raising the resistance of the line. it later was discovered by edison that carbon possesses a peculiarly great property of varying its resistance under pressure. professor david e. hughes discovered that two conducting bodies, preferably of rather poor conductivity, when laid together so as to form a _loose contact_ between them, possessed, in remarkable degree, the ability to vary the resistance of the path through them when subject to such vibrations as would alter the _intimacy of contact_. he thus discovered and formulated the principles of _loose contact_ upon which the operation of all modern transmitters rests. hughes' device was named by him a "microphone," indicating a magnification of sound or an ability to respond to and make audible minute sounds. it is shown in fig. . firmly attached to a board are two carbon blocks, shown in section in the figure. a rod of carbon with cone-shaped ends is supported loosely between the two blocks, conical depressions in the blocks receiving the ends of the rod. a battery and magneto receiver are connected in series with the device. under certain conditions of contact, the arrangement is extraordinarily sensitive to small sounds and approaches an ability indicated by its name. its practical usefulness has been not as a serviceable speech transmitter, but as a stimulus to the devising of transmitters using carbon in other ways. variation of the resistance of metal conductors and of contact between metals has served to transmit voice currents, but no material approaches carbon in this property. [illustration: fig. . hughes' microphone] carbon. _adaptability._ the application of carbon to use in transmitters has taken many forms. they may be classified as those having a single contact and those having a plurality of contacts; in all cases, the _intimacy of contact_ is varied by the diaphragm excursions. an example of the single-contact type is the blake transmitter, long familiar in america. an example of the multiple-contact type is the loose-carbon type universal now. other types popular at other times and in particular places use solid rods or blocks of carbon having many points of contact, though not in a powdered or granular form. fig. shows an example of each of the general forms of transmitters. the use of granular carbon as a transmitter material has extended greatly the radius of speech, and has been a principal contributing cause for the great spread of the telephone industry. [illustration: fig. . general types of transmitters] _superiority._ the superiority of carbon over other resistance-varying materials for transmitters is well recognized, but the reason for it is not well known. various theories have been proposed to explain why, for example, the resistance of a mass of carbon granules varies with the vibrations or compressions to which they are subjected. four principal theories respectively allege: first, that change in pressure actually changes the specific resistance of carbon. second, that upon the surface of carbon bodies exists some gas in some form of attachment or combination, variations of pressure causing variations of resistance merely by reducing the thickness of this intervening gas. third, that the change of resistance is caused by variations in the length of electrical arcs between the particles. fourth, that change of pressure changes the area of contact, as is true of solids generally. one may take his choice. a solid carbon block or rod is not found to decrease its resistance by being subjected to pressure. the gas theory lacks experimental proof also. the existence of arcs between the granules never has been seen or otherwise observed under normal working conditions of a transmitter; when arcs surely are experimentally established between the granules the usefulness of the transmitter ceases. the final theory, that change of pressure changes area of surface contact, does not explain why other conductors than carbon are not good materials for transmitters. this, it may be noticed, is just what the theories set out to make clear. there are many who feel that more experimental data is required before a conclusive and satisfactory theory can be set up. there is need of one, for a proper theory often points the way for effective advance in practice. carbon and magneto transmitters differ wholly in their methods of action. the magneto transmitter _produces_ current; the carbon transmitter _controls_ current. the former is an alternating-current generator; the latter is a rheostat. the magneto transmitter produces alternating current without input of any electricity at all; the carbon transmitter merely controls a direct current, supplied by an external source, and varies its amount without changing its direction. the carbon transmitter, however, may be associated with other devices in a circuit in such a way as to _transform_ direct currents into alternating ones, or it may be used merely to change constant direct currents into _undulating_ ones, which _never_ reverse direction, as alternating currents _always_ do. these distinctions are important. [illustration: fig. . battery in line circuit] _limitations._ a carbon transmitter being merely a resistance-varying device, its usefulness depends on how much its resistance can vary in response to motions of air molecules. a granular-carbon transmitter may vary between resistances of to ohms while transmitting a particular tone, having the lower resistance when its diaphragm is driven inward. conceive this transmitter to be in a line as shown in fig. , the line, distant receiver, and battery together having a resistance of , ohms. the minimum resistance then is , ohms and the maximum , ohms. the variation is limited to about . per cent. the greater the resistance of the line and other elements than the transmitter, the less relative change the transmitter can produce, and the less loudly the distant receiver can speak. [illustration: fig . battery in local circuit] induction coil. mr. edison realized this limitation to the use of the carbon transmitter direct in the line, and contributed the means of removing it. his method is to introduce an induction coil between the line and the transmitter, its function being to translate the variation of the direct current controlled by the transmitter into true alternating currents. an induction coil is merely a transformer, and for the use under discussion consists of two insulated wires wound around an iron core. change in the current carried by one of the windings _produces_ a current in the other. if direct current be flowing in one of the windings, and remains constant, no current whatever is produced in the other. it is important to note that it is change, and change only, which produces that alternating current. fig. shows an induction coil related to a carbon transmitter, a battery, and a receiver. fig. shows exactly the same arrangement, using conventional signs. the winding of the induction coil which is in series with the transmitter and the battery is called the primary winding; the other is called the secondary winding. in the arrangement of figs. and the battery has no metallic connection with the line, so that it is called a _local battery_. the circuit containing the battery, transmitter, and primary winding of the induction coil is called the _local circuit_. let us observe what is the advantage of this arrangement over the case of fig. . using the same values of resistance in the transmitter and line, assume the local circuit apart from the transmitter to have a fixed resistance of ohms. the limits of variations in the local circuit, therefore, are and ohms, thus making the maximum . times the minimum, or an increase of per cent as against . per cent in the case of fig. . the changes, therefore, are times as great. [illustration: fig. . conventional diagram of talking circuit] the relation between the windings of the induction coil in this practice are such that the secondary winding contains many more turns than the primary winding. changes in the circuit of the primary winding produce potentials in the secondary winding correspondingly higher than the potentials producing them. these secondary potentials depend upon the _ratio_ of turns in the two windings and therefore, within close limits, may be chosen as wished. high potentials in the secondary winding are admirably adapted to transmit currents in a high-resistance line, for exactly the same reason that long-distance power transmission meets with but one-quarter of one kind of loss when the sending potential is doubled, one-hundredth of that loss when it is raised tenfold, and similarly. the induction coil, therefore, serves the double purpose of a step-up transformer to limit line losses and a device for vastly increasing the range of change in the transmitter circuit. fig. is offered to remind the student of the action of an induction coil or transformer in whose primary circuit a direct current is increased and decreased. an increase of current in the local winding produces an impulse of _opposite_ direction in the turns of the secondary winding; a decrease of current in the local winding produces an impulse of _the same_ direction in the turns of the secondary winding. the key of fig. being closed, current flows upward in the primary winding as drawn in the figure, inducing a downward impulse of current in the secondary winding and its circuit as noted at the right of the figure. on the key being opened, current ceases in the primary circuit, inducing an upward impulse of current in the secondary winding and circuit as shown. during other than instants of opening and closing (changing) the local circuit, no current whatever flows in the secondary circuit. [illustration: fig. . induction-coil action] it is by these means that telephone transmitters draw direct current from primary batteries and send high-potential alternating currents over lines; the same process produces what in therapeutics are called "faradic currents," and enables also a simple vibrating contact-maker to produce alternating currents for operating polarized ringers of telephone sets. detrimental effects of capacity. electrostatic capacity plays an important part in the transmission of speech. its presence between the wires of a line and between them and the earth causes one of the losses from which long-distance telephony suffers. its presence in condensers assists in the solution of many circuit and apparatus problems. a condenser is a device composed of two or more conductors insulated from each other by a medium called the _dielectric_. a pair of metal plates separated by glass, a pair of wires separated by air, or a pair of sheets of foil separated by paper or mica may constitute a condenser. the use of condensers as pieces of apparatus and the problems presented by electrostatic capacity in lines are discussed in other chapters. measurements of telephone currents. it has been recognized in all branches of engineering that a definite advance is possible only when quantitative data exists. the lack of reliable means of measuring telephone currents has been a principal cause of the difficulty in solving many of its problems. it is only in very recent times that accurate and reliable means have been worked out for measuring the small currents which flow in telephone lines. these ways are of two general kinds: by thermal and by electromagnetic means. _thermal method_. the thermal methods simply measure, in some way, the amount of heat which is produced by a received telephone current. when this current is allowed to pass through a conductor the effect of the heat generated in that conductor, is observed in one of three ways: by the expansion of the conductor, by its change in resistance, or by the production of an electromotive force in a thermo-electric couple heated by the conductor. any one of these three ways can be used to get some idea of the amount of current which is received. none of them gives an accurate knowledge of the forms of the waves which cause the reproduction of speech in the telephone receiver. [illustration: fig. . oscillogram of telephone currents] _electromagnetic method_. an electromagnetic device adapted to tell something of the magnitude of the telephone current and also something of its form, _i.e._, something of its various increases and decreases and also of its changes in direction is the oscillograph. an oscillograph is composed of a magnetic field formed by direct currents or by a permanent magnet, a turn of wire under mechanical tension in that field, and a mirror borne by the turn of wire, adapted to reflect a beam of light to a photographic film or to a rotating mirror. when a current is to be measured by the oscillograph, it is passed through the turn of wire in the magnetic field. while no current is passing, the wire does not move in the magnetic field and its mirror reflects a stationary beam of light. a photographic film moved in a direction normal to the axis of the turn of wire will have drawn upon it a straight line by the beam of light. if the beam of light, however, is moved by a current, from side to side at right angles to this axis, it will draw a wavy line on the photographic film and this wavy line will picture the alternations of that current and the oscillations of the molecules of air which carried the originating sound. fig. is a photograph of nine different vowel sounds which have caused the oscillograph to take their pictures. they are copies of records made by mr. bela gati, assisted by mr. tolnai. the measuring instrument consisted of an oscillograph of the type described, the transmitter being of the carbon type actuated by a -volt battery. the primary current was transformed by an induction coil of the ordinary type and the transformed current was sent through a non-inductive resistance of , ohms. no condensers were placed in the circuit. it will be seen that the integral values of the curves, starting from zero, are variable. the positive and the negative portions of the curves are not equal, so that the solution of the individual harmonic motion is difficult and laborious. these photographs point out several facts very clearly. one is that the alternations of currents in the telephone line, like the motions of the molecules of air of the original sound, are highly complex and are not, as musical tones are, regular recurrences of equal vibrations. they show also that any vowel sound may be considered to be a regular recurrence of certain groups of vibrations of different amplitudes and of different frequencies. chapter iii electrical signals electric calls or signals are of two kinds: audible and visible. [illustration: fig. . telegraph sounder and key] [illustration: fig. . vibrating bell] audible signals. _telegraph sounder._ the earliest electric signal was an audible one, being the telegraph sounder, or the morse register considered apart from its registering function. each telegraph sounder serves as an audible electric signal and is capable of signifying more than that the call is being made. such a signal is operated by the making and breaking of current from a battery. an arrangement of this kind is shown in fig. , in which pressure upon the key causes the current from the battery to energize the sounder and give one sharp audible rap of the lever upon the striking post. _vibrating bell_. the vibrating bell, so widely used as a door bell, is a device consequent to the telegraph. its action is to give a series of blows on its gong when its key or push button closes the battery circuit. at the risk of describing a trite though not trivial thing, it may be said that when the contact _ _ of fig. is closed, current from the battery energizes the armature _ _, causing the latter to strike a blow on the gong and to break the line circuit as well, by opening the contact back of the armature. so de-energized, the armature falls back and the cycle is repeated until the button contact is released. a comparison of this action with that of the polarized ringer (to be described later) will be found of interest. [illustration: fig. . elemental magneto-generator] _magneto-bell._ the magneto-bell came into wide use with the spread of telephone service. its two fundamental parts are an alternating-current generator and a polarized bell-ringing device. each had its counterpart long before the invention of the telephone, though made familiar by the latter. the alternating-current generator of the magneto-bell consists of a rotatable armature composed of a coil of insulated wire and usually a core of soft iron, its rotation taking place in a magnetic field. this field is usually provided by a permanent magnet, hence the name "magneto-generator." the purist in terms may well say, however, that every form whatever of the dynamo-electric generator is a magneto-generator, as magnetism is one link in every such conversion of mechanical power into electricity. the terms magneto-electric, magneto-generator, etc., involving the term "magneto," have come to imply the presence of _permanently_ magnetized steel as an element of the construction. in its early form, the magneto-generator consisted of the arrangement shown in fig. , wherein a permanent magnet can rotate on an axis before an electromagnet having soft iron cores and a winding. reversals of magnetism produce current in alternately reversing half-cycles, one complete rotation of the magnet producing one such cycle. obviously the result would be the same if the magnet were stationary and the coils should rotate, which is the construction of more modern devices. the turning of the crank of a magneto-bell rotates the armature in the magnetic field by some form of gearing at a rate usually of the order of twenty turns per second, producing an alternating current of that frequency. this current is caused by an effective electromotive force which may be as great as volts, produced immediately by the energy of the user. in an equipment using a magneto-telephone as both receiver and transmitter and a magneto-bell as its signal-sending machine, as was usual in , it is interesting to note that the entire motive power for signals and speech transmission was supplied by the muscular tissues of the user--a case of working one's passage. [illustration: fig. . extension of a permanent magnet] the alternating current from the generator is received and converted into sound by means of the _polarized ringer_, a device which is interesting as depending upon several of the electrical, mechanical, and magnetic actions which are the foundations of telephone engineering. [illustration: fig. . extension of a permanent magnet] "why the ringer rings" may be gathered from a study of figs. to . a permanent magnet will impart temporary magnetism to pieces of iron near it. in fig. two pieces of iron are so energized. the ends of these pieces which are nearest to the permanent magnet _ _ are of the opposite polarity to the end they approach, the free ends being of opposite polarity. in the figure, these free ends are marked _n_, meaning they are of a polarity to point north if free to point at all. english-speaking persons call this _north polarity_. similarly, as in fig. , any arrangement of iron near a permanent magnet always will have free poles of the same polarity as the end of the permanent magnet nearest them. a permanent magnet so related to iron forms part of a polarized ringer. so does an electromagnet composed of windings and iron cores. fig. reminds us of the law of electromagnets. if current flows from the plus towards the minus side, with the windings as drawn, polarities will be induced as marked. [illustration: fig. . electromagnet] [illustration: fig. . polarized ringer] if, now, such an electromagnet, a permanent magnet, and a pivoted armature be related to a pair of gongs as shown in fig. , a polarized ringer results. it should be noted that a permanent magnet has both its poles presented (though one of the poles is not actually attached) to two parts of the iron of the _electro_-magnet. the result is that the ends of the armature are of south polarity and those of the core are of north polarity. all the markings of fig. relate to the polarity produced by the permanent magnet. if, now, a current flow in the ringer winding from plus to minus, obviously the right-hand pole will be additively magnetized, the current tending to produce north magnetism there; also the left-hand pole will be subtractively magnetized, the current tending to produce south magnetism there. if the current be of a certain strength, relative to the certain ringer under study, magnetism in the left pole will be neutralized and that in the right pole doubled. hence the armature will be attracted more by the right pole than by the left and will strike the right-hand gong. a reversal of current produces an opposite action, the left-hand gong being struck. the current ceasing, the armature remains where last thrown. [illustration: operator's equipment clement automanual system.] it is important to note that the strength of action depends upon the strength of the current up to a certain point only. that depends upon the strength of the permanent magnet. whenever the current is great enough just to neutralize the normal magnetism of one pole and to double that of the other, no increase in current will cause the device to ring any louder. this makes obvious the importance of a proper permanent magnetism and displays the fallacy of some effort to increase the output of various devices depending upon these principles. this discussion of magneto-electric signaling is introduced here because of a belief in its being fundamental. chapter viii treats of such a signaling in further detail. _telephone receiver._ the telephone receiver itself serves a useful purpose as an audible signal. an interrupted or alternating current of proper frequency and amount will produce in it a musical tone which can be heard throughout a large room. this fact enables a telephone central office to signal a subscriber who has left his receiver off the switch hook, so that normal conditions may be restored. visible signals. _electromagnetic signal._ practical visual signals are of two general kinds: electromagnetic devices for moving a target or pointer, and incandescent lamps. the earliest and most widely used visible signal in telephone practice was the annunciator, having a shutter adapted to fall when the magnet is energized. fig. is such a signal. shutter _ _ is held by the catch _ _ from dropping to the right by its own gravity. the name "gravity-drop" is thus obvious. current energizing the core attracts the armature _ _, lifts the catch _ _, and the shutter falls. a simple modification of the gravity-drop produces the visible signal shown in fig. . energizing the core lifts a target so as to render it visible through an opening in the plate _ _. a contrast of color between the plate and the target heightens the effect. [illustration: fig. . gravity-drop] the gravity-drop is principally adapted to the magneto-bell system of signaling, where an alternating current is sent over the line to a central office by the operation of a bell crank at the subscriber's station, this current, lasting only as long as the crank is turned, energizes the drop, which may be restored by hand or otherwise and will remain latched. the visible signal is better adapted to lines in which the signaling is done by means of direct current, as, for example, in systems where the removal of the receiver from the hook at the subscriber's station closes the line circuit, causing current to flow through the winding of the visible signal and so displaying it until the receiver has been hung upon the hook or the circuit opened by some operation at the central office. visible signals of the magnetic type of fig. have been widely used in connection with common-battery systems, both for line signals and for supervisory purposes, indicating the state and the progress of the connection and conversation. [illustration: fig. . electromagnetic visible signal] [illustration: fig. . lamp signal and lens] _electric-lamp signal._ incandescent electric lamps appeared in telephony as a considerable element about . they are better than either form of mechanical visible signals because of three principal qualities: simplicity and ease of restoring them to normal as compared with drops; their compactness; and their greater prominence when displayed. of the latter quality, one may say that they are more _insistent_, as they give out light instead of reflecting it, as do all other visible signals. in its best form, the lamp signal is mounted behind a hemispherical lens, either slightly clouded or cut in facets. this lens serves to distribute the rays of light from the lamp, with the result that the signal may be seen from a wide angle with the axis of the lens, as shown in fig. . this is of particular advantage in connection with manual-switchboard connecting cords, as it enables the signals to be mounted close to and even among the cords, their great visible prominence when shining saving them from being hidden. the influence of the lamp signal was one of the potent ones in the development of the type of multiple switchboard which is now universal as the mechanism of large manual exchanges. the first large trial of such an equipment was in in worcester, mass. no large and successful multiple switchboard with any other type of signal has been built since that time. any electric signal has upper and lower limits of current between which it is to be actuated. it must receive current enough to operate but not enough to become damaged by overheating. the magnetic types of visible signals have a wider range between these limits than have lamp signals. if current in a lamp is too little, its filament either will not glow at all or merely at a dull red, insufficient for a proper signal. if the current is too great, the filament is heated beyond its strength and parts at the weakest place. this range between current limits in magnetic visible signals is great enough to enable them to be used direct in telephone lines, the operating current through the line and signal in series with a fixed voltage at the central office being not harmfully great when the entire line resistance is shunted out at or near the central office. the increase of current may be as great as ten times without damage to the winding of such a signal. in lamps, the safe margin is much less. the current which just gives a sufficient lighting of the signal may be about doubled with safety to the filament of the lamp. consequently it is not feasible to place the lamp directly in series with long exposed lines. a short circuit of such a line near the central office will burn it out. [illustration: fig. . lamp signal controlled by relay] the qualities of electromagnets and lamps in these respects are used to advantage by the lamp signal arrangement shown in fig. . a relay is in series with the line and provides a large range of sensibility. it is able to carry any current the central-office current source can pass through it. the local circuit of the relay includes the lamp. energizing the relay lights the lamp, and the reverse; the lamp is thus isolated from danger and receives the current best adapted to its needs. all lines are not long and when enclosed in cable or in well-insulated interior wire, may be only remotely in danger of being short-circuited. such conditions exist in private-branch exchanges, which are groups of telephones, usually local to limited premises, connected to a switchboard on those premises. such a situation permits the omission of the line relay, the lamp being directly in the line. fig. shows the extreme simplicity of the arrangement, containing no moving parts or costly elements. lamps for such service have improved greatly since the demand began to grow. the small bulk permitted by the need of compactness, the high filament resistance required for simplicity of the general power scheme of the system, and the need of considerable sturdiness in the completed thing have made the task a hard one. the practical result, however, is a signal lamp which is highly satisfactory. [illustration: fig. . lamp signal directly in line] [illustration: fig. . lamp signal and ballast] the nature of carbon and certain earths being that their conductivity _rises_ with the temperature and that of metals being that their conductivity _falls_ with the temperature, has enabled the nernst lamp to be successful. the same relation of properties has enabled incandescent-lamp signals to be connected direct to lines without relays, but compensated against too great a current by causing the resistance in series with the lamp to be increased inversely as the resistance of the filament. employment of a "ballast" resistance in this way is referred to in chapter xi. in fig. is shown its relation to a signal lamp directly in the line. _ _ is the carbon-filament lamp; _ _ is the ballast. the latter's conductor is fine iron wire in a vacuum. the resistance of the lamp falls as that of the ballast rises. within certain limits, these changes balance each other, widening the range of allowable change in the total resistance of the line. chapter iv telephone lines _the line is a path over which the telephone current passes from telephone to telephone._ the term "telephone line circuit" is equivalent. "line" and "line circuit" mean slightly different things to some persons, "line" meaning the out-of-doors portion of the line and "line circuit" meaning the indoor portion, composed of apparatus and associated wiring. such shades of meaning are inevitable and serve useful purposes. the opening definition hereof is accurate. a telephone line consists of two conductors. one of these conductors may be the earth; the other always is some conducting material other than the earth--almost universally it is of metal and in the form of a wire. a line using one wire and the earth as its pair of conductors has several defects, to be discussed later herein. both conductors of a line may be wires, the earth serving as no part of the circuit, and this is the best practice. a line composed of one wire and the earth is called a _grounded line_; a line composed of two wires not needing the earth as a conductor is called a _metallic circuit_. in the earliest telephone practice, all lines were grounded ones. the wires were of iron, supported by poles and insulated from them by glass, earthenware, or rubber insulators. for certain uses, such lines still represent good practice. for telegraph service, they represent the present standard practice. copper is a better conductor than iron, does not rust, and when drawn into wire in such a way as to have a sufficient tensile strength to support itself is the best available conductor for telephone lines. only one metal surpasses it in any quality for the purpose: silver is a better conductor by or per cent. copper is better than silver in strength and price. in the open country, telephone lines consist of bare wires of copper, of iron, of steel, or of copper-covered steel supported on insulators borne by poles. if the wires on the poles be many, cross-arms carry four to ten wires each and the insulators are mounted on pins in the cross-arms. if the wires on the poles be few, the insulators are mounted on brackets nailed to the poles. wires so carried are called _open wires_. in towns and cities where many wires are to be carried along the same route, the wires are reduced in size, insulated by a covering over each, and assembled into a group. such a bundle of insulated wires is called a _cable_. it may be drawn into a duct in the earth and be called an _underground cable_; it may be laid on the bottom of the sea or other water and be called a _submarine cable_; or it may be suspended on poles and be called an _aërial cable_. in the most general practice each wire is insulated from all others by a wrapping of paper ribbon, which covering is only adequate when very dry. cables formed of paper-insulated wires, therefore, are covered by a seamless, continuous lead sheath, no part of the paper insulation of the wires being exposed to the atmosphere during the cable's entire life in service. telephone cables for certain uses are formed of wires insulated with such materials as soft rubber, gutta-percha, and cotton or jute saturated with mineral compounds. when insulated with rubber or gutta-percha, no continuous lead sheath is essential for insulation, as those materials, if continuous upon the wire, insulate even when the cable is immersed in water. sheaths and other armors can assist in protecting these insulating materials from mechanical injury, and often are used for that purpose. the uses to which such cables are suitable in telephony are not many, as will be shown. a wire supported on poles requires that it be large enough to support its own weight. the smaller the wire, the weaker it is, and with poles a given distance apart, the strength of the wire must be above a certain minimum. in regions where freezing occurs, wires in the open air can collect ice in winter and everywhere open wires are subject to wind pressure; for these reasons additional strength is required. speaking generally, the practical and economical spacing of poles requires that wires, to be strong enough to meet the above conditions, shall have a diameter not less than . inch, if of hard-drawn copper, and . inch, if of iron or steel. the honor of developing ways of drawing copper wire with sufficient tensile strength for open-air uses belongs to mr. thomas b. doolittle of massachusetts. lines whose lengths are limited to a few miles do not require a conductivity as great as that of copper wire of . -inch diameter. a wire of that size weighs approximately pounds per mile. less than pounds of copper per mile of wire will not give strength enough for use on poles; but as little as pounds per mile of wire gives the necessary conductivity for the lines of the thousands of telephone stations in towns and cities. open wires, being exposed to the elements, suffer damage from storms; their insulation is injured by contact with trees; they may make contact with electric power circuits, perhaps injuring apparatus, themselves, and persons; they endanger life and property by the possibility of falling; they and their cross-arm supports are less sightly than a more compact arrangement. grouping small wires of telephone lines into cables has, therefore, the advantage of allowing less copper to be used, of reducing the space required, of improving appearance, and of increasing safety. on the other hand, this same grouping introduces negative advantages as well as the foregoing positive ones. it is not possible to talk as far or as well over a line in an ordinary cable as over a line of two open wires. long-distance telephone circuits, therefore, have not yet been placed in cables for lengths greater than or miles, and special treatment of cable circuits is required to talk through them for even miles. one may talk , miles over open wires. the reasons for the superiority of the open wires have to do with position rather than material. obviously it is possible to insulate and bury any wire which can be carried in the air. the differences in the properties of lines whose wires are differently situated with reference to each other and surrounding things are interesting and important. a telephone line composed of two conductors always possesses four principal properties in some amount: ( ) conductivity of the conductors; ( ) electrostatic capacity between the conductors; ( ) inductance of the circuit; ( ) insulation of each conductor from other things. conductivity of conductors. the conductivity of a wire depends upon its material, its cross-section, its length, and its temperature. conductivity of a copper wire, for example, increases in direct ratio to its weight, in inverse ratio to its length, and its conductivity falls as the temperature rises. resistance is the reciprocal of conductivity and the properties, conductivity and resistance, are more often expressed in terms of resistance. the unit of the latter is the _ohm_; of the former the _mho_. a conductor having a resistance of ohms has a conductivity of . mho. the exact correlative terms are _resistance_ and _conductance_, _resistivity_ and _conductivity_. the use of the terms as in the foregoing is in accordance with colloquial practice. current in a circuit having resistance only, varies inversely as the resistance. electromotive force being a cause, and resistance a state, current is the result. the formula of this relation, ohm's law, is c = e/r _c_ being the current which results from _e_, the electromotive force, acting upon _r_, the resistance. the units are: of current, the ampere; of electromotive force, the volt; of resistance, the ohm. as the conductivity or resistance of a line is the property of controlling importance in telegraphy, a similar relation was expected in early telephony. as the current in the telephone line varies rapidly, certain other properties of the line assume an importance they do not have in telegraphy in any such degree. the importance that these properties assume is, that if they did not act and the resistance of the conductors alone limited speech, transmission would be possible direct from europe to america over a pair of wires weighing pounds per mile of wire, which is less than half the weight of the wire of the best long-distance land lines now in service. the distance from europe to america is about twice as great as the present commercial radius by land lines of -pound wire. in other words, good speech is possible through a mere resistance twenty times greater than the resistance of the longest actual open-wire line it is possible to talk through. the talking ratio between a mere resistance and the resistance of a regular telephone cable is still greater. electrostatic capacity. it is the possession of electrostatic capacity which enables the condenser, of which the leyden jar is a good example, to be useful in a telephone line. the simplest form of a condenser is illustrated in fig. , in which two conducting surfaces are separated by an insulating material. the larger the surfaces, the closer they are together; and the higher the specific inductive capacity of the insulator, the greater the capacity of the device. an insulator used in this relation to two conducting surfaces is called the _dielectric_. [illustration: fig. . simple condenser] [illustration: fig. . condenser symbols] two conventional signs are used to illustrate condensers, the upper one of fig. growing out of the original condenser of two metal plates, the lower one suggesting the thought of interleaved conductors of tin foil, as for many years was the practice in condenser construction. with relation to this property, a telephone line is just as truly a condenser as is any other arrangement of conductors and insulators. assume such a line to be open at the distant end and its wires to be well insulated from each other and the earth. telegraphy through such a line by ordinary means would be impossible. all that the battery or other source could do would be to cause current to flow into the line for an infinitesimal time, raising the wires to its potential, after which no current would flow. but, by virtue of electrostatic capacity, the condition is much as shown in fig. . the condensers which that figure shows bridged across the line from wire to wire are intended merely to fix in the mind that there is a path for the transfer of electrical energy from wire to wire. [illustration: fig. . line with shunt capacity] a simple test will enable two of the results of a short-circuiting capacity to be appreciated. conceive a very short line of two wires to connect two local battery telephones. such a line possesses negligible resistance, inductance, and shunt capacity. its insulation is practically infinite. let condensers be bridged across the line, one by one, while conversation goes on. the listening observer will notice that the sounds reaching his ear steadily grow less loud as the capacity across the line increases. the speaking observer will notice that the sounds he hears through the receiver in series with the line steadily grow louder as the capacity across the line increases. fig. illustrates the test. the speaker's observation in this test shows that increasing the capacity across the line increased the amount of current entering it. the hearer's observation in this test shows that increasing the capacity across the line decreased the amount of energy turned into sound at his receiver. [illustration: fig. . test of line with varying shunt capacity] the unit of electrostatic capacity is the _farad_. as this unit is inconveniently large, for practical applications the unit _microfarad_--millionth of a farad--is employed. if quantities are known in microfarads and are to be used in calculations in which the values of the capacity require to be farads, care should be taken to introduce the proper corrective factor. the electrostatic capacity between the conductors of a telephone line depends upon their surface area, their length, their position, and the nature of the materials separating them from each other and from other things. for instance, in an open wire line of two wires, the electrostatic capacity depends upon the diameter of the wires, upon the length of the line, upon their distance apart, upon their distance above the earth, and upon the specific inductive capacity of the air. air being so common an insulating medium, it is taken as a convenient material whose specific inductive capacity may be used as a basis of reference. therefore, the specific inductive capacity of air is taken as unity. all solid matter has higher specific inductive capacity than air. the electrostatic capacity of two open wires . inch diameter, ft. apart, and ft. above the earth, is of the order of . microfarads per mile. this quantity would be higher if the wires were closer together; or nearer the earth; or if they were surrounded by a gas other than the air or hydrogen; or if the wires were insulated not by a gas but by any solid covering. as another example, a line composed of two wires of a diameter of . inch, if wrapped with paper and twisted into a pair as a part of a telephone-cable, has a mutual electrostatic capacity of approximately . microfarads per mile, this quantity being greater if the cable be more tightly compressed. the use of paper as an insulator for wires in telephone cables is due to its low specific inductive capacity. this is because the insulation of the wires is so largely dry air. rubber and similar insulating materials give capacities as great as twice that of dry paper. the condenser or other capacity acts as an effective barrier to the steady flow of direct currents. applying a fixed potential causes a mere rush of current to charge its surface to a definite degree, dependent upon the particular conditions. the condenser does not act as such a barrier to alternating currents, for it is possible to talk through a condenser by means of the alternating voice currents of telephony, or to pass through it alternating currents of much lower frequency. a condenser is used in series with a polarized ringer for the purpose of letting through alternating current for ringing the bell, and of preventing the flow of direct current. the degree to which the condenser allows alternating currents to pass while stopping direct currents, depends on the capacity of the condenser and on the frequencies of alternating current. the larger the condenser capacity or the higher the frequency of the alternations, the greater will be the current passing through the circuit. the degree to which the current is opposed by the capacity is the reactance of that capacity for that frequency. the formula is capacity reactance = /_c_[omega] wherein _c_ is the capacity in farads and [omega] is [pi]_n_, or twice . times the frequency. all the foregoing leads to the generalization that the higher the frequency, the less the opposition of a capacity to an alternating current. if the frequency be zero, the reactance is infinite, _i.e._, the circuit is open to direct current. if the frequency be infinite, the reactance is zero, _i.e._, the circuit is as if the condenser were replaced by a solid conductor of no resistance. compare this statement with the correlative generalization which follows the next thought upon inductance. inductance of the circuit. inductance is the property of a circuit by which change of current in it tends to produce in itself and other conductors an electromotive force other than that which causes the current. its unit is the _henry_. the inductance of a circuit is one henry when a change of one ampere per second produces an electromotive force of one volt. induction _between_ circuits occurs because the circuits possess inductance; it is called _mutual induction_. induction _within_ a circuit occurs because the circuit possesses inductance; it is called _self-induction_. lenz' law says: _in all cases of electromagnetic induction, the induced currents have such a direction that their reaction tends to stop the motion which produced them_. [illustration: fig. . spiral of wire] [illustration: fig. . spiral of wire around iron core] all conductors possess inductance, but straight wires used in lines have negligible inductance in most actual cases. all wires which are wound into coils, such as electromagnets, possess inductance in a greatly increased degree. a wire wound into a spiral, as indicated in fig. , possesses much greater inductance than when drawn out straight. if iron be inserted into the spiral, as shown in fig. , the inductance is still further increased. it is for the purpose of eliminating inductance that resistance coils are wound with double wires, so that current passing through such coils turns in one direction half the way and in the other direction the other half. a simple test will enable the results of a series inductance in a line to be appreciated. conceive a very short line of two wires to connect two local battery telephones. such a line possesses negligible resistance, inductance, and shunt capacity. its insulation is practically infinite. let inductive coils such as electromagnets be inserted serially in the wires of the line one by one, while conversation goes on. the listening observer will notice that the sounds reaching his ear steadily grow faint as the inductance in the line increases and the speaking observer will notice the same thing through the receiver in series with the line. both observations in this test show that the amount of current entering and emerging from the line decreased as the inductance increased. compare this with the test with bridged capacity and the loading of lines described later herein, observing the curious beneficial result when both hurtful properties are present in a line. the test is illustrated in fig. . the degree in which any current is opposed by inductance is termed the reactance of that inductance. its formula is inductive reactance = _l_[omega] wherein _l_ is the inductance in henrys and [omega] is _ _[pi]_n_, or twice . times the frequency. to distinguish the two kinds of reactance, that due to the capacity is called _capacity reactance_ and that due to inductance is called _inductive reactance_. all the foregoing leads to the generalization that the higher the frequency, the greater the opposition of an inductance to an alternating current. if the frequency be zero, the reactance is zero, _i.e._, the circuit conducts direct current as mere resistance. if the frequency be infinite, the reactance is infinite, _i.e._, the circuit is "open" to the alternating current and that current cannot pass through it. compare this with the correlative generalization following the preceding thought upon capacity. [illustration: fig. . test of line with varying serial inductance] capacity and inductance depend only on states of matter. their reactances depend on states of matter and actions of energy. in circuits having both resistance and capacity or resistance and inductance, both properties affect the passage of current. the joint reaction is expressed in ohms and is called _impedance_. its value is the square root of the sum of the squares of the resistance and reactance, or, z being impedance, ------------------------- / z = / r^{ } + ---------------- \/ c^{ }[omega]^{ } and -------------------------- z = / r^{ } + l^{ }[omega]^{ } \/ the symbols meaning as before. in words, these formulas mean that, knowing the frequency of the current and the capacity of a condenser, or the frequency of the current and the inductance of a circuit (a line or piece of apparatus), and in either case the resistance of the circuit, one may learn the impedance by calculation. insulation of conductors. the fourth property of telephone lines, insulation of the conductors, usually is expressed in ohms as an insulation resistance. in practice, this property needs to be intrinsically high, and usually is measured by millions of ohms resistance from the wire of a line to its mate or to the earth. it is a convenience to employ a large unit. a million ohms, therefore, is called a _megohm_. in telephone cables, an insulation resistance of megohms per mile at ° fahrenheit is the usual specification. so high an insulation resistance in a paper-insulated conductor is only attained by applying the lead sheath to the cable when its core is made practically anhydrous and kept so during the splicing and terminating of the cable. insulation resistance varies inversely as the length of the conductor. if a piece of cable feet long has an insulation resistance of , megohms, a mile (ten times as much) of such cable, will have an insulation resistance of megohms, or one-tenth as great. inductance vs. capacity. the mutual capacity of a telephone line is greater as its wires are closer together. the self-induction of a telephone line is smaller as its wires are closer together. the electromotive force induced by the capacity of a line leads the impressed electromotive force by degrees. the inductive electromotive force lags degrees behind the impressed electromotive force. and so, in general, the natures of these two properties are opposite. in a cable, the wires are so close together that their induction is negligible, while their capacity is so great as to limit commercial transmission through a cable having . microfarads per mile capacity and ohms loop resistance per mile, to a distance of about miles. in the case of open wires spaced inches apart, the limit of commercial transmission is greater, not only because the wires are larger, but because the capacity is lower and the inductance higher. table i shows-the practical limiting conversation distance over uniform lines with present standard telephone apparatus. table i limiting transmission distances +-----------------------------+----------------------+ | size and gauge of wire | limiting distance | +-----------------------------+----------------------+ | no. b. w. g. copper | miles | | b. w. g. copper | miles | | b. & s. copper | miles | | n. b. s. copper | miles | | b. & s. copper | miles | | n. b. s. copper | miles | | b. w. g. iron | miles | | b. w. g. iron | miles | | b. w. g. iron | miles | | b. & s. cable, copper | miles | | b. & s. cable, copper | miles | | b. & s. cable, copper | miles | +-----------------------------+----------------------+ in , oliver heaviside proposed that the inductance of telephone lines be increased above the amount natural for the inter-axial spacing, with a view to counteracting the hurtful effects of the capacity. his meaning was that the increased inductance--a harmful quality in a circuit not having also a harmfully great capacity--would act oppositely to the capacity, and if properly chosen and applied, should decrease or eliminate distortion by making the line's effect on fundamentals and harmonics more nearly uniform, and as well should reduce the attenuation by neutralizing the action of the capacity in dissipating energy. there are two ways in which inductance might be introduced into a telephone line. as the capacity whose effects are to be neutralized is distributed uniformly throughout the line, the counteracting inductance must also be distributed throughout the line. mere increase of distance between two wires of the line very happily acts both to increase the inductance and to lower the capacity; unhappily for practical results, the increase of separation to bring the qualities into useful neutralizing relation is beyond practical limits. the wires would need to be so far above the earth and so far apart as to make the arrangement commercially impossible. practical results have been secured in increasing the distributed inductance by wrapping fine iron wire over each conductor of the line. such a treatment increases the inductance and improves transmission. the most marked success has come as a result of the studies of professor michael idvorsky pupin. he inserts inductances in series with the wires of the line, so adapting them to the constants of the circuit that attenuation and distortion are diminished in a gratifying degree. this method of counteracting the effects of a distributed capacity by the insertion of localized inductance requires not only that the requisite total amount of inductance be known, but that the proper subdivision and spacing of the local portions of that inductance be known. professor pupin's method is described in a paper entitled "wave transmission over non-uniform cables and long-distance air lines," read by him at a meeting of the american institute of electrical engineers in philadelphia, may , . note. united states letters patent were issued to professor pupin on june , , upon his practical method of reducing attenuation of electrical waves. a paper upon "propagation of long electric waves" was read by professor pupin before the american institute of electrical engineers on march , , and appears in vol. of the transactions of that society. the student will find these documents useful in his studies on the subject. he is referred also to "electrical papers" and "electromagnetic theory" of oliver heaviside. professor pupin likens the transmission of electric waves over long-distance circuits to the transmission of mechanical waves over a string. conceive an ordinary light string to be fixed at one end and shaken by the hand at the other; waves will pass over the string from the shaken to the fixed end. certain reflections will occur from the fixed end. the amount of energy which can be sent in this case from the shaken to the fixed point is small, but if the string be loaded by attaching bullets to it, uniformly throughout its length, it now may transmit much more energy to the fixed end. [illustration: main entrance and public office, san francisco home telephone company contract department on left. accounting department on right.] the addition of inductance to a telephone line is analogous to the addition of bullets to the string, so that a telephone line is said to be _loaded_ when inductances are inserted in it, and the inductances themselves are known as _loading coils_. fig. shows the general relation of pupin loading coils to the capacity of the line. the condensers of the figure are merely conventionals to represent the condenser which the line itself forms. the inductances of the figure are the actual loading coils. [illustration: fig. . loaded line] the loading of open wires is not as successful in practice as is that of cables. the fundamental reason lies in the fact that two of the properties of open wires--insulation and capacity--vary with atmospheric change. the inserted inductance remaining constant, its benefits may become detriments when the other two "constants" change. the loading of cable circuits is not subject to these defects. such loading improves transmission; saves copper; permits the use of longer underground cables than are usable when not loaded; lowers maintenance costs by placing interurban cables underground; and permits submarine telephone cables to join places not otherwise able to speak with each other. underground long-distance lines now join or are joining boston and new york, philadelphia and new york, milwaukee and chicago. england and france are connected by a loaded submarine cable. there is no theoretical reason why europe and america should not speak to each other. the student wishing to determine for himself what are the effects of the properties of lines upon open or cable circuits will find most of the subject in the following equation. it tells the value of _a_ in terms of the four properties, _a_ being the attenuation constant of the line. that is, the larger _a_ is, the more the voice current is reduced in passing over the line. the equation is ----------------------------------------------------------------------- / ----------------------------------------------- a= /½ /(r^{ }+l^{ }[omega]^{ })(s^{ }+c^{ }[omega]^{ } + ½(rs-lc[omega]^{ } \/ \/ the quantities are r = resistance in ohms l = inductance in henrys c = mutual (shunt) capacity in farads [omega] = [pi]_n_ = . times the frequency s = shunt leakage in mhos the quantity _s_ is a measure of the combined direct-current conductance (reciprocal of insulation resistance) and the apparent conductance due to dielectric hysteresis. note. an excellent paper, assisting such study, and of immediate practical value as helping the understanding of cables and their reasons, is that of mr. frank b. jewett, presented at the thousand islands convention of the american institute of electrical engineers, july , . chapter treats cables in further detail. they form a most important part of telephone wire-plant practice, and their uses are becoming wider and more valuable. possible ways of improving transmission. practical ways of improving telephone transmission are of two kinds: to improve the lines and to improve the apparatus. the foregoing shows what are the qualities of lines and the ways they require to be treated. apparatus treatment, in the present state of the art, is addressed largely to the reduction of losses. theoretical considerations seem to show, however, that great advance in apparatus effectiveness still is possible. more powerful transmitters--and more _faithful_ ones--more sensitive and accurate receivers, and more efficient translating devices surely are possible. discovery may need to intervene, to enable invention to restimulate. in both telegraphy and telephony, the longer the line the weaker the current which is received at the distant end. in both telegraphy and telephony, there is a length of line with a given kind and size of wire and method of construction over which it is just possible to send intelligible speech or intelligible signals. a repeater, in telegraphy, is a device in the form of a relay which is adapted to receive these highly attenuated signal impulses and to re-transmit them with fresh power over a new length of line. an arrangement of two such relays makes it possible to telegraph both ways over a pair of lines united by such a repeater. it is practically possible to join up several such links of lines to repeating devices and, if need be, even submarine cables can be joined to land lines within practical limits. if it were necessary, it probably would be possible to telegraph around the world in this way. if it were possible to imitate the telegraph repeater in telephony, attenuated voice currents might be caused to actuate it so as to send on those voice currents with renewed power over a length of line, section by section. such a device has been sought for many years, and it once was quoted in the public press that a reward of one million dollars had been offered by charles j. glidden for a successful device of that kind. the records of the patent offices of the world show what effort has been made in that direction and many more devices have been invented than have been patented in all the countries together. like some other problems in telephony, this one seems simpler at first sight than it proves to be after more exhaustive study. it is possible for any amateur to produce at once a repeating device which will relay telephone circuits in one direction. it is required, however, that in practice the voice currents be relayed in both directions, and further, that the relay actually augment the energy which passes through it; that is, that it will send on a more powerful current than it receives. most of the devices so far invented fail in one or the other of these particulars. several ways have been shown of assembling repeating devices which will talk both ways, but not many assembling repeating devices have been shown that will talk both ways and augment in both directions. [illustration: fig. . shreeve repeater and circuit] practical repeaters have been produced, however, and at least one type is in daily successful use. it is not conclusively shown even of it that it augments in the same degree all of the voice waves which reach it, or even that it augments some of them at all. its action, however, is distinctly an improvement in commercial practice. it is the invention of mr. herbert e. shreeve and is shown in fig. . primarily it consists of a telephone receiver, of a particular type devised by gundlach, associated with a granular carbon transmitter button. it is further associated with an arrangement of induction coils or repeating coils, the object of these being to accomplish the two-way action, that is, of speaking in both directions and of preventing reactive interference between the receiving and transmitting elements. the battery _ _ energizes the field of the receiving element; the received line current varies that field; the resulting motion varies the resistance of the carbon button and transforms current from battery _ _ into a new alternating line current. by reactive interference is meant action whereby the transmitter element, in emitting a wave, affects its own controlling receiver element, thus setting up an action similar to that which occurs when the receiver of a telephone is held close to its transmitter and humming or singing ensues. no repeater is successful unless it is free from this reactive interference. [illustration: fig. . mercury-arc telephone relay] enough has been accomplished by practical tests of the shreeve device and others like it to show that the search for a method of relaying telephone voice currents is not looking for a pot of gold at the end of the rainbow. the most remarkable truth established by the success of repeaters of the shreeve type is that a device embodying so large inertia of moving parts can succeed at all. if this mean anything, it is that a device in which inertia is absolutely eliminated might do very much better. many of the methods already proposed by inventors attack the problem in this way and one of the most recent and most promising ways is that of mr. j.b. taylor, the circuit of whose telephone-relay patent is shown in fig. . in it, _ _ is an electromagnet energized by voice currents; its varying field varies an arc between the electrodes _ - _ and _ _ in a vacuum tube. these fluctuations are transformed into line currents by the coil _ _. chapter v transmitters variable resistance. as already pointed out in chapter ii, the variable-resistance method of producing current waves, corresponding to sound waves for telephonic transmission, is the one that lends itself most readily to practical purposes. practically all telephone transmitters of today employ this variable-resistance principle. the reason for the adoption of this method instead of the other possible ones is that the devices acting on this principle are capable, with great simplicity of construction, of producing much more powerful results than the others. their simplicity is such as to make them capable of being manufactured at low cost and of being used successfully by unskilled persons. materials. of all the materials available for the variable-resistance element in telephone transmitters, carbon is by far the most suitable, and its use is well nigh universal. sometimes one of the rarer metals, such as platinum or gold, is to be found in commercial transmitters as part of the resistance-varying device, but, even when this is so, it is always used in combination with carbon in some form or other. most of the transmitters in use, however, depend solely upon carbon as the conductive material of the variable-resistance element. arrangement of electrodes. following the principles pointed out by hughes, the transmitters of today always employ as their variable-resistance elements one or more loose contacts between one or more pairs of electrodes, which electrodes, as just stated, are usually of carbon. always the arrangement is such that the sound waves will vary the intimacy of contact between the electrodes and, therefore, the resistance of the path through the electrodes. a multitude of arrangements have been proposed and tried. sometimes a single pair of electrodes has been employed having a single point of loose contact between them. these may be termed single-contact transmitters. sometimes the variable-resistance element has included a greater number of electrodes arranged in multiple, or in series, or in series-multiple, and these have been termed multiple-electrode transmitters, signifying a plurality of electrodes. a later development, an outgrowth of the multiple-electrode transmitter, makes use of a pair of principal electrodes, between which is included a mass of finely divided carbon in the form of granules or small spheres or pellets. these, regardless of the exact form of the carbon particles, are called granular-carbon transmitters. [illustration: fig. . blake transmitter] single electrode. _blake_. the most notable example of the single-contact transmitter is the once familiar blake instrument. at one time this formed a part of the standard equipment of almost every telephone in the united states, and it was also largely used abroad. probably no transmitter has ever exceeded it in clearness of articulation, but it was decidedly deficient in power in comparison with the modern transmitters. in this instrument, which is shown in fig. , the variable-resistance contact was that between a carbon and a platinum electrode. the diaphragm _ _ was of sheet iron mounted, as usual in later transmitters, in a soft rubber gasket _ _. the whole diaphragm was mounted in a cast-iron ring _ _, supported on the inside of the box containing the entire instrument. the front electrode _ _ was mounted on a light spring _ _, the upper end of which was supported by a movable bar or lever _ _, flexibly supported on a spring _ _ secured to the casting which supported the diaphragm. the tension of this spring _ _ was such as to cause the platinum point to press lightly away from the center of the diaphragm. the rear electrode was of carbon in the form of a small block _ _, secured in a heavy brass button _ _. the entire rear electrode structure was supported on a heavier spring _ _ carried on the same lever as the spring _ _. the tension of this latter spring was such as to press against the front electrode and, by its greater strength, press this against the center of the diaphragm. the adjustment of the instrument was secured by means of the screw _ _, carried in a lug extending rearwardly from the diaphragm supporting casting, this screw, by its position, determining the strength with which the rear electrode pressed against the front electrode and that against the diaphragm. this instrument was ordinarily mounted in a wooden box together with the induction coil, which is shown in the upper portion of the figure. the blake transmitter has passed almost entirely out of use in this country, being superseded by the various forms of granular instruments, which, while much more powerful, are not perhaps capable of producing quite such clear and distinct articulation. the great trouble with the single-contact transmitters, such as the blake, was that it was impossible to pass enough current through the single point of contact to secure the desired power of transmission without overheating the contact. if too much current is sent through such transmitters, an undue amount of heat is generated at the point of contact and a vibration is set up which causes a peculiar humming or squealing sound which interferes with the transmission of other sounds. multiple electrode. to remedy this difficulty the so-called multiple-electrode transmitter was brought out. this took a very great number of forms, of which the one shown in fig. is typical. the diaphragm shown at _ _, in this particular form, was made of thin pine wood. on the rear side of this, suspended from a rod _ _ carried in a bracket _ _, were a number of carbon rods or pendants _ _, loosely resting against a rod _ _, carried on a bracket _ _ also mounted on the rear of the diaphragm. the pivotal rod _ _ and the rod _ _, against which the pendants rested, were sometimes, like the pendant rods, made of carbon and sometimes of metal, such as brass. when the diaphragm vibrated, the intimacy of contact between the pendant rod _ _ and the rod _ _ was altered, and thus the resistance of the path through all of the pendant rods in multiple was changed. [illustration: fig. . multiple-electrode transmitter] a multitude of forms of such transmitters came into use in the early eighties, and while they in some measure remedied the difficulty encountered with the blake transmitter, _i.e._, of not being able to carry a sufficiently large current, they were all subject to the effects of extreme sensitiveness, and would rattle or break when called upon to transmit sounds of more than ordinary loudness. furthermore, the presence of such large masses of material, which it was necessary to throw into vibration by the sound waves, was distinctly against this form of transmitter. the inertia of the moving parts was so great that clearness of articulation was interfered with. granular carbon. the idea of employing a mass of granular carbon, supported between two electrodes, one of which vibrated with the sound waves and the other was stationary, was proposed by henry hunnings in the early eighties. while this idea forms the basis of all modern telephone transmitters, yet it did not prevent the almost universal adoption of the single-contact form of instrument during the next decade. western electric solid-back transmitter. in the early nineties, however, the granular-carbon transmitter came into its own with the advent and wide adoption of the transmitter designed by anthony c. white, known as the _white_, or _solid-back_, transmitter. this has for many years been the standard instrument of the bell companies operating throughout the united states, and has found large use abroad. a horizontal cross-section of this instrument is shown in fig. , and a rear view of the working parts in fig. . the working parts are all mounted on the front casting _ _. this is supported in a cup _ _, in turn supported on the lug _ _, which is pivoted on the transmitter arm or other support. the front and rear electrodes of this instrument are formed of thin carbon disks shown in solid black. the rear electrode, the larger one of these disks, is securely attached by solder to the face of a brass disk having a rearwardly projecting screw-threaded shank, which serves to hold it and the rear electrode in place in the bottom of a heavy brass cup _ _. the front electrode is mounted on the rear face of a stud. clamped against the head of this stud, by a screw-threaded clamping ring _ _, is a mica washer, or disk _ _. the center portion of this mica washer is therefore rigid with respect to the front electrode and partakes of its movements. the outer edge of this mica washer is similarly clamped against the front edge of the cup _ _, a screw-threaded ring _ _ serving to hold the edge of the mica rigidly against the front of the cup. the outer edge of this washer is, therefore, rigid with respect to the rear electrode, which is fixed. whatever relative movement there is between the two electrodes must, therefore, be permitted by the flexing of the mica washer. this mica washer not only serves to maintain the electrodes in their normal relative positions, but also serves to close the chamber which contains the electrodes, and, therefore, to prevent the granular carbon, with which the space between the electrodes is filled, from falling out. [illustration: fig. . white solid-back transmitter] the cup _ _, containing the electrode chamber, is rigidly fastened with respect to the body of the transmitter by a rearwardly projecting shank held in a bridge piece _ _ which is secured at its ends to the front block. the needed rigidity of the rear electrode is thus obtained and this is probably the reason for calling the instrument the _solid-back_. the front electrode, on the other hand, is fastened to the center of the diaphragm by means of a shank on the stud, which passes through a hole in the diaphragm and is clamped thereto by two small nuts. against the rear face of the diaphragm of this transmitter there rest two damping springs. these are not shown in fig. but are in fig. . they are secured at one end to the rear flange of the front casting _ _, and bear with their other or free ends against the rear face of the diaphragm. the damping springs are prevented from coming into actual contact with the diaphragm by small insulating pads. the purpose of the damping springs is to reduce the sensitiveness of the diaphragm to extraneous sounds. as a result, the white transmitter does not pick up all of the sounds in its vicinity as readily as do the more sensitive transmitters, and thus the transmission is not interfered with by extraneous noises. on the other hand, the provision of these heavy damping springs makes it necessary that this transmitter shall be spoken into directly by the user. [illustration: fig. . white solid-back transmitter] the action of this transmitter is as follows: sound waves are concentrated against the center of the diaphragm by the mouth-piece, which is of the familiar form. these waves impinge against the diaphragm, causing it to vibrate, and this, in turn, produces similar vibrations in the front electrode. the vibrations of the front electrode are permitted by the elasticity of the mica washer _ _. the rear electrode is, however, held stationary within the heavy chambered block _ _ and which in turn is held immovable by its rigid mounting. as a result, the front electrode approaches and recedes from the rear electrode, thus compressing and decompressing the mass of granular carbon between them. as a result, the intimacy of contact between the electrode plates and the granules and also between the granules themselves is altered, and the resistance of the path from one electrode to the other through the mass of granules is varied. new western electric transmitter. the white transmitter was the prototype of a large number of others embodying the same features of having the rear electrode mounted in a stationary cup or chamber and the front electrode movable with the diaphragm, a washer of mica or other flexible insulating material serving to close the front of the electrode chamber and at the same time to permit the necessary vibration of the front electrode with the diaphragm. [illustration: fig. . new western electric transmitter] one of these transmitters, embodying these same features but with modified details, is shown in fig. , this being the new transmitter manufactured by the western electric company. in this the bridge of the original white transmitter is dispensed with, the electrode chamber being supported by a pressed metal cup _ _, which supports the chamber as a whole. the electrode cup, instead of being made of a solid block as in the white instrument, is composed of two portions, a cylindrical or tubular portion _ _ and a back _ _. the cylindrical portion is externally screw-threaded so as to engage an internal screw thread in a flanged opening in the center of the cup _ _. by this means the electrode chamber is held in place in the cup _ _, and by the same means the mica washer _ _ is clamped between the flange in this opening and the tubular portion _ _ of the electrode chamber. the front electrode is carried, as in the white transmitter, on the mica washer and is rigidly attached to the center of the diaphragm so as to partake of the movement thereof. it will be seen, therefore, that this is essentially a white transmitter, but with a modified mounting for the electrode chamber. a feature in this transmitter that is not found in the white transmitter is that both the front and the rear electrodes, in fact, the entire working portions of the transmitter, are insulated from the exposed metal parts of the instrument. this is accomplished by insulating the diaphragm and the supporting cup _ _ from the transmitter front. the terminal _ _ on the cup _ _ forms the electrical connection for the rear electrode, while the terminal _ _, which is mounted _on_ but insulated _from_ the cup _ _ and is connected with the front electrode by a thin flexible connecting strip, forms the electrical connection for the front electrode. kellogg transmitter. the transmitter of the kellogg switchboard and supply company, originally developed by mr. w.w. dean and modified by his successors in the kellogg company, is shown in fig. . in this, the electrode chamber, instead of being mounted in a stationary and rigid position, as in the case of the white instrument, is mounted on, and, in fact, forms a part of the diaphragm. the electrode which is associated with the mica washer instead of moving with the diaphragm, as in the white instrument, is rigidly connected to a bridge so as to be as free as possible from all vibrations. referring to fig. , which is a horizontal cross-section of the instrument, _ _ indicates the diaphragm. this is of aluminum and it has in its center a forwardly deflected portion forming a chamber for the electrodes. the front electrode _ _ of carbon is backed by a disk of brass and rigidly secured in the front of this chamber, as clearly indicated. the rear electrode _ _, also of carbon, is backed by a disk of brass, and is clamped against the central portion of a mica disk by means of the enlarged head of stud _ _. a nut _ _, engaging the end of a screw-threaded shank from the back of the rear electrode, serves to bind these two parts together securely, clamping the mica washer between them. the outer edge of the mica washer is clamped to the main diaphragm _ _ by an aluminum ring and rivets, as clearly indicated. it is seen, therefore, that the diaphragm itself contains the electrode chamber as an integral part thereof. the entire structure of the diaphragm, the front and back electrodes, and the granular carbon within are permanently assembled in the factory and cannot be dissociated without destroying some of the parts. the rear electrode is held rigidly in place by the bridge _ _ and the stud _ _, this stud passing through a block _ _ mounted on the bridge but insulated from it. the stud _ _ is clamped in the block _ _ by means of the set screw _ _, so as to hold the rear electrode in proper position after this position has been determined. [illustration: fig. . kellogg transmitter] in this transmitter, as in the transmitter shown in fig. , all of the working parts are insulated from the exposed metal casing. the diaphragm is insulated from the front of the instrument by means of a washer _ _ of impregnated cloth, as indicated. the rear electrode is insulated from the other portions of the instrument by means of the mica washer and by means of the insulation between the block _ _ and the bridge _ _. the terminal for the rear electrode is mounted on the block _ _, while the terminal for the front electrode, shown at _ _, is mounted on, but insulated from, the bridge. this terminal _ _ is connected with the diaphragm and therefore with the front electrode by means of a thin, flexible metallic connection. this transmitter is provided with damping springs similar to those of the white instrument. it is claimed by advocates of this type of instrument that, in addition to the ordinary action due to the compression and decompression of the granular carbon between the electrodes, there exists another action due to the agitation of the granules as the chamber is caused to vibrate by the sound waves. in other words, in addition to the ordinary action, which may be termed _the piston action between the electrodes_, it is claimed that the general shaking-up effect of the granules when the chamber vibrates produces an added effect. certain it is, however, that transmitters of this general type are very efficient and have proven their capability of giving satisfactory service through long periods of time. another interesting feature of this instrument as it is now manufactured is the use of a transmitter front that is struck up from sheet metal rather than the employment of a casting as has ordinarily been the practice. the formation of the supporting lug for the transmitter from the sheet metal which forms the rear casing or shell of the instrument is also an interesting feature. automatic electric company transmitter. the transmitter of the automatic electric company, of chicago, shown in fig. , is of the same general type as the one just discussed, in that the electrode chamber is mounted on and vibrates with the diaphragm instead of being rigidly supported on the bridge as in the case of the white or solid-back type of instrument. in this instrument the transmitter front _ _ is struck up from sheet metal and contains a rearwardly projecting flange, carrying an internal screw thread. a heavy inner cup _ _, together with the diaphragm _ _, form an enclosure containing the electrode chamber. the diaphragm is, in this case, permanently secured at its edge to the periphery of the inner cup _ _ by a band of metal _ _ so formed as to embrace the edges of both the cup and the diaphragm and permanently lock them together. this inner chamber is held in place in the transmitter front _ _ by means of a lock ring _ _ externally screw-threaded to engage the internal screw-thread on the flange on the front. the electrode chamber proper is made in the form of a cup, rigidly secured to the diaphragm so as to move therewith, as clearly indicated. the rear electrode is mounted on a screw-threaded stud carried in a block which is fitted to a close central opening in the cup _ _. this transmitter does not make use of a mica washer or diaphragm, but employs a felt washer which surrounds the shank of the rear electrode and serves to close and seal the carbon containing cup. by this means the granular carbon is retained in the chamber and the necessary flexibility or freedom of motion is permitted between the front and the rear electrodes. as in the kellogg and the later bell instruments, the entire working parts of this transmitter are insulated from the metal containing case, the inner chamber, formed by the cup _ _ and the diaphragm _ _, being insulated from the transmitter front and its locking ring by means of insulating washers, as shown. fig. . automatic electric company transmitter monarch transmitter. the transmitter of the monarch telephone manufacturing company, shown in fig. , differs from both the stationary-cup and the vibrating-cup types, although it has the characteristics of both. it might be said that it differs from each of these two types of transmitters in that it has the characteristics of both. this transmitter, it will be seen, has two flexible mica washers between the electrodes and the walls of the electrode cup. the front and the back electrodes are attached to the diaphragm and the bridge, respectively, by a method similar to that employed in the solid-back transmitters, while the carbon chamber itself is free to vibrate with the diaphragm as is characteristic of the kellogg transmitter. [illustration: fig. . monarch transmitter] an aluminum diaphragm is employed, the circumferential edge of which is forwardly deflected to form a seat. the edge of the diaphragm rests _against_ and is separated _from_ the brass front by means of a one-piece gasket of specially treated linen. this forms an insulator which is not affected by heat or moisture. as in the transmitters previously described, the electrodes are firmly soldered to brass disks which have solid studs extending from their centers. in the case of both the front and the rear electrodes, a mica disk is placed over the supporting stud and held in place by a brass hub which has a base of the same size as the electrode. the carbon-chamber wall consists of a brass ring to which are fastened the mica disks of the front and the back electrodes by means of brass collars clamped over the edge of the mica and around the rim of the brass ring forming the chamber. [illustration: main office building, berkeley, california containing automatic equipment, forming part of larger system operating in san francisco and vicinity. bay cities home telephone company.] electrodes. the electrode plates of nearly all modern transmitters are of specially treated carbon. these are first copper-plated and soldered to their brass supporting disks. after this they are turned and ground so as to be truly circular in form and to present absolutely flat faces toward each other. these faces are then highly polished and the utmost effort is made to keep them absolutely clean. great pains are taken to remove from the pores of the carbon, as well as from the surface, all of the acids or other chemicals that may have entered them during the process of electroplating them or of soldering them to the brass supporting disk. that the two electrodes, when mounted in a transmitter, should be parallel with each other, is an item of great importance as will be pointed out later. in a few cases, as previously stated, gold or platinum has been substituted for the carbon electrodes in transmitters. these are capable of giving good results when used in connection with the proper form of granular carbon, but, on the whole, the tendency has been to abandon all forms of electrode material except carbon, and its use is now well nigh universal. _preparation of carbon_. the granular carbon is prepared from carefully selected anthracite coal, which is specially treated by roasting or "re-carbonizing" and is then crushed to approximately the proper fineness. the crushed carbon is then screened with extreme care to eliminate all dust and to retain only granules of uniform size. packing. in the earlier forms of granular-carbon transmitters a great deal of trouble was experienced due to the so-called packing of the instrument. this, as the term indicates, was a trouble due to the tendency of the carbon granules to settle into a compact mass and thus not respond to the variable pressure. this was sometimes due to the presence of moisture in the electrode chamber; sometimes to the employment of granules of varying sizes, so that they would finally arrange themselves under the vibration of the diaphragm into a fairly compact mass; or sometimes, and more frequently, to the granules in some way wedging the two electrodes apart and holding them at a greater distance from each other than their normal distance. the trouble due to moisture has been entirely eliminated by so sealing the granule chambers as to prevent the entrance of moisture. the trouble due to the lack of uniformity in size of the granules has been entirely eliminated by making them all of one size and by making them of sufficient hardness so that they would not break up into granules of smaller size. the trouble due to the settling of the granules and wedging the electrodes apart has been practically eliminated in well-designed instruments, by great mechanical nicety in manufacture. almost any transmitter may be packed by drawing the diaphragm forward so as to widely separate the electrodes. this allows the granules to settle to a lower level than they normally occupy and when the diaphragm is released and attempts to resume its normal position it is prevented from doing so by the mass of granules between. transmitters of the early types could be packed by placing the lips against the mouthpiece and drawing in the breath. the slots now provided at the base of standard mouthpieces effectually prevent this. in general it may be said that the packing difficulty has been almost entirely eliminated, not by the employment of remedial devices, such as those often proposed for stirring up the carbon, but by preventing the trouble by the design and manufacture of the instruments in such forms that they will not be subject to the evil. carrying capacity. obviously, the power of a transmitter is dependent on the amount of current that it may carry, as well as on the amount of variation that it may make in the resistance of the path through it. granular carbon transmitters are capable of carrying much heavier current than the old blake or other single or multiple electrode types. if forced to carry too much current, however, the same frying or sizzling sound is noticeable as in the earlier types. this is due to the heating of the electrodes and to small arcs that occur between the electrodes and the granules. one way to increase the current-carrying capacity of a transmitter is to increase the area of its electrodes, but a limit is soon reached in this direction owing to the increased inertia of the moving electrode, which necessarily comes with its larger size. the carrying capacity of transmitters may also be increased by providing special means for carrying away the heat generated in the variable-resistance medium. several schemes have been proposed for this. one is to employ unusually heavy metal for the electrode chamber, and this practice is best exemplified in the white solid-back instrument. it has also been proposed by others to water-jacket the electrode chamber, and also to keep it cool by placing it in close proximity to the relatively cool joints of a thermopile. neither of these two latter schemes seems to be warranted in ordinary commercial practice. sensitiveness. in all the transmitters so far discussed damping springs of one form or another have been employed to reduce the sensitiveness of the instrument. for ordinary commercial use too great a degree of sensitiveness is a fault, as has already been pointed out. there are, however, certain adaptations of the telephone transmitter which make a maximum degree of sensitiveness desirable. one of these adaptations is found in the telephone equipments for assisting partially deaf people to hear. in these the transmitter is carried on some portion of the body of the deaf person, the receiver is strapped or otherwise held at his ear, and a battery for furnishing the current is carried in his pocket. it is not feasible, for this sort of use, that the sound which this transmitter is to reproduce shall always occur immediately in front of the transmitter. it more often occurs at a distance of several feet. for this reason the transmitter is made as sensitive as possible, and yet is so constructed that it will not be caused to produce too loud or unduly harsh sounds in response to a loud sound taking place immediately in front of it. another adaptation of such highly sensitive transmitters is found in the special intercommunicating telephone systems for use between the various departments or desks in business offices. in these it is desirable that the transmitter shall be able to respond adequately to sounds occurring anywhere in a small-sized room, for instance. acousticon transmitter. in fig. is shown a transmitter adapted for such use. this has been termed by its makers the _acousticon transmitter_. like all the transmitters previously discussed, this is of the variable-resistance type, but it differs from them all in that it has no damping springs; in that carbon balls are substituted for carbon granules; and in that the diaphragm itself serves as the front electrode. this transmitter consists of a cup _ _, into which is set a cylindrical block _ _, in one face of which are a number of hemispherical recesses. the diaphragm _ _ is made of thin carbon and is so placed in the transmitter as to cover the openings of the recesses in the carbon block, and lie close enough to the carbon block, without engaging it, to prevent the carbon particles from falling out. the diaphragm thus serves as the front electrode and the carbon block as the rear electrode. the recesses in the carbon block are about two-thirds filled with small carbon balls, which are about the size of fine sand. the front piece _ _ of the transmitter is of sheet metal and serves to hold the diaphragm in place. to admit the sound waves it is provided with a circular opening opposite to and about the size of the rear electrode block. on this front piece are mounted the two terminals of the transmitter, connected respectively to the two electrodes, terminal _ _ being insulated from the front piece and connected by a thin metal strip with the diaphragm, while terminal _ _ is mounted directly on the front piece and connected through the cup _ _ with the carbon block _ _, or back electrode of the transmitter. [illustration: fig . acousticon transmitter] when this transmitter is used in connection with outfits for the deaf, it is placed in a hard rubber containing case, consisting of a hollow cylindrical piece _ _, which has fastened to it a cover _ _. this cover has a circular row of openings or holes near its outer edge, as shown at _ _, through which the sound waves may pass to the chamber within, and thence find their way through the round hole in the center of the front plate _ _ to the diaphragm _ _. it is probable also that the front face of the cover _ _ of the outer case vibrates, and in this way also causes sound waves to impinge against the diaphragm. this arrangement provides a large receiving surface for the sound waves, but, owing to the fact that the openings in the containing case are not opposite the opening in the transmitter proper, the sound waves do not impinge directly against the diaphragm. this peculiar arrangement is probably the result of an endeavor to prevent the transmitter from being too strongly actuated by violent sounds close to it. instruments of this kind are very sensitive and under proper conditions are readily responsive to words spoken in an ordinary tone ten feet away. [illustration: fig. . switchboard transmitter] switchboard transmitter. another special adaptation of the telephone transmitter is that for use of telephone operators at central-office switchboards. the requirements in this case are such that the operator must always be able to speak into the transmitter while seated before the switchboard, and yet allow both of her hands to be free for use. this was formerly accomplished by suspending an ordinary granular-carbon transmitter in front of the operator, but a later development has resulted in the adoption of the so-called breast transmitter, shown in fig. . this is merely an ordinary granular-carbon transmitter mounted on a plate which is strapped on the breast of the operator, the transmitter being provided with a long curved mouthpiece which projects in such a manner as to lie just in front of the operator's lips. this device has the advantage of automatically following the operator in her movements. the breast transmitter shown in fig. , is that of the dean electric company. [illustration: fig. . transmitter symbols] conventional diagram. there are several common ways of illustrating transmitters in diagrams of circuits in which they are employed. the three most common ways are shown in fig. . the one at the left is supposed to be a side view of an ordinary instrument, the one in the center a front view, and the one at the right to be merely a suggestive arrangement of the diaphragm and the rear electrode. the one at the right is best and perhaps most common; the center one is the poorest and least used. chapter vi receivers the telephone receiver is the device which translates the energy of the voice currents into the energy of corresponding sound waves. all telephone receivers today are of the electromagnetic type, the voice currents causing a varying magnetic pull on an armature or diaphragm, which in turn produces the sound waves corresponding to the undulations of the voice currents. early receivers. the early forms of telephone receivers were of the _single-pole_ type; that is, the type wherein but one pole of the electromagnet was presented to the diaphragm. the single-pole receiver that formed the companion piece to the old blake transmitter and that was the standard of the bell companies for many years, is shown in fig. . while this has almost completely passed out of use, it may be profitably studied in order that a comparison may be made between certain features of its construction and those of the later forms of receivers. the coil of this receiver was wound on a round iron core _ _, flattened at one end to afford means for attaching the permanent magnet. the permanent magnet was of laminated construction, consisting of four hard steel bars _ _, extending nearly the entire length of the receiver shell. these steel bars were all magnetized separately and placed with like poles together so as to form a single bar magnet. they were laid together in pairs so as to include between the pairs the flattened end of the pole piece _ _ at one end and the flattened portion of the tail piece _ _ at the other end. this whole magnet structure, including the core, the tail piece, and the permanently magnetized steel bars, was clamped together by screws as shown. the containing shell was of hard rubber consisting of three pieces, the barrel _ _, the ear-piece _ _, and the tail cap _ _. the barrel and the ear piece engaged each other by means of a screw thread and served to clamp the diaphragm between them. the compound bar magnet was held in place within the shell by means of a screw _ _ passing through the hard rubber tail cap _ _ and into the tail block _ _ of the magnet. external binding posts mounted on the tail cap, as shown, were connected by heavy leading-in wires to the terminals of the electromagnet. a casual consideration of the magnetic circuit of this instrument will show that it was inefficient, since the return path for the lines of force set up by the bar magnet was necessarily through a very long air path. notwithstanding this, these receivers were capable of giving excellent articulation and were of marvelous delicacy of action. a very grave fault was that the magnet was supported in the shell at the end farthest removed from the diaphragm. as a result it was difficult to maintain a permanent adjustment between the pole piece and the diaphragm. one reason for this was that hard rubber and steel contract and expand under changes of temperature at very different rates, and therefore the distance between the pole piece and the diaphragm changed with changes of temperature. another grave defect, brought about by this tying together of the permanent magnet and the shell which supported the diaphragm at the end farthest from the diaphragm, was that any mechanical shocks were thus given a good chance to alter the adjustment. [illustration: fig. . single-pole receiver] modern receivers. receivers of today differ from this old single-pole receiver in two radical respects. in the first place, the modern receiver is of the bi-polar type, consisting essentially of a horseshoe magnet presenting both of its poles to the diaphragm. in the second place, the modern practice is to either support all of the working parts of the receiver, _i.e._, the magnet, the coils, and the diaphragm, by an inner metallic frame entirely independent of the shell; or, if the shell is used as a part of the structure, to rigidly fasten the several parts close to the diaphragm rather than at the end farthest removed from the diaphragm. western electric receiver. the standard bi-polar receiver of the western electric company, in use by practically all of the bell operating companies throughout this country and in large use abroad, is shown in fig. . in this the shell is of three pieces, consisting of the barrel _ _, the ear cap _ _, and the tail cap _ _. the tail cap and the barrel are permanently fastened together to form substantially a single piece. two permanently magnetized bar magnets _ - _ are employed, these being clamped together at their upper ends, as shown, so as to include the soft iron block _ _ between them. the north pole of one of these magnets is clamped to the south pole of the other, so that in reality a horseshoe magnet is formed. at their lower ends, these two permanent magnets are clamped against the soft iron pole pieces _ - _, a threaded block _ _ also being clamped rigidly between these pole pieces at this point. on the ends of the pole pieces the bobbins are wound. the whole magnet structure is secured within the shell _ _ by means of a screw thread on the block _ _ which engages a corresponding internal screw thread in the shell _ _. as a result of this construction the whole magnet structure is bound rigidly to the shell structure at a point close to the diaphragm, comparatively speaking, and as a result of this close coupling, the relation between the diaphragm and the pole piece is very much more rigid and substantial than in the case where the magnet structure and the shell were secured together at the end farthest removed from the diaphragm. [illustration: fig. . western electric receiver] although this receiver shown in fig. is the standard in use by the bell companies throughout this country, its numbers running well into the millions, it cannot be said to be a strictly modern receiver, because of at least one rather antiquated feature. the binding posts, by which the circuit conductors are led to the coils of this instrument, are mounted on the outside of the receiver shell, as indicated, and are thus subject to danger of mechanical injury and they are also exposed to the touch of the user, so that he may, in case of the wires being charged to an abnormal potential, receive a shock. probably a more serious feature than either one of these is that the terminals of the flexible cords which attach to these binding posts are attached outside of the receiver shell, and are therefore exposed to the wear and tear of use, rather than being protected as they should be within the shell. notwithstanding this undesirable feature, this receiver is a very efficient one and is excellently constructed. [illustration: fig. . kellogg receiver] kellogg receiver. in fig. is shown a bi-polar receiver with internal or concealed binding posts. this particular receiver is typical of a large number of similar kinds and is manufactured by the kellogg switchboard and supply company. two straight permanently magnetized bar magnets _ - _ are clamped together at their opposite ends so as to form a horseshoe magnet. at the end opposite the diaphragm these bars clamp between them a cylindrical piece of iron _ _, so as to complete the magnetic circuit at the end. at the end nearest the diaphragm they clamp between them the ends of the soft iron pole pieces _ - _, and also a block of composite metal _ _ having a large circular flange _ '_ which serves as a means for supporting the magnet structure within the shell. the screws by means of which the disk _ '_ is clamped to the shouldered seat in the shell do not enter the shell directly, but rather enter screw-threaded brass blocks which are moulded into the structure of the shell. it is seen from this construction that the diaphragm and the pole pieces and the magnet structure itself are all rigidly secured together through the medium of the shell at a point as close as possible to the diaphragm. between the magnets _ - _ there is clamped an insulating block _ _, to which are fastened the terminal plates _ _, one on each side of the receiver. these terminal plates are thoroughly insulated from the magnets themselves and from all other metallic parts by means of sheets of fiber, as indicated by the heavy black lines. on these plates _ _ are carried the binding posts for the receiver cord terminals. a long tongue extends from each of the plates _ _ through a hole in the disk _ '_, into the coil chamber of the receiver, at which point the terminal of the magnet winding is secured to it. this tongue is insulated from the disk _ '_, where it passes through it, by means of insulating bushing, as shown. the other terminal of the magnet coils is brought out to the other plate _ _ by means of a similar tongue on the other side. in order that the receiver terminals proper may not be subjected to any strain in case the receiver is dropped and its weight caught on the receiver cord, a strain loop is formed as a continuation of the braided covering of the receiver cord, and this is tied to the permanent magnet structure, as shown. by making this strain loop short, it is obvious that whatever pull the cord receives will not be taken by the cord conductors leading to the binding posts or by the binding posts or the cord terminals themselves. a number of other manufacturers have gone even a step further than this in securing permanency of adjustment between the receiver diaphragm and pole pieces. they have done this by not depending at all on the hard rubber shell as a part of the structure, but by enclosing the magnet coil in a cup of metal upon which the diaphragm is mounted, so that the permanency of relation between the diaphragm and the pole pieces is dependent only upon the metallic structure and not at all upon the less durable shell. direct-current receiver. until about the middle of the year , it was the universal practice to employ permanent magnets for giving the initial polarization to the magnet cores of telephone receivers. this is still done, and necessarily so, in receivers employed in connection with magneto telephones. in common-battery systems, however, where the direct transmitter current is fed from the central office to the local stations, it has been found that this current which must flow at any rate through the line may be made to serve the additional purpose of energizing the receiver magnets so as to give them the necessary initial polarity. a type of receiver has come into wide use as a result, which is commonly called the _direct-current receiver_, deriving its name from the fact that it employs the direct current that is flowing in the common-battery line to magnetize the receiver cores. the automatic electric company, of chicago, was probably the first company to adopt this form of receiver as its standard type. their receiver is shown in cross-section in fig. , and a photograph of the same instrument partially disassembled is given in fig. . the most noticeable thing about the construction of this receiver is the absence of permanent magnets. the entire working parts are contained within the brass cup _ _, which serves not only as a container for the magnet, but also as a seat for the diaphragm. this receiver is therefore illustrative of the type mentioned above, wherein the relation between the diaphragm and the pole pieces is not dependent upon any connection through the shell. [illustration: fig. . automatic electric company direct-current receiver] [illustration: fig. . automatic electric company direct-current receiver] the coil of this instrument consists of a single cylindrical spool _ _, mounted on a cylindrical core. this bobbin lies within a soft iron-punching _ _, the form of which is most clearly shown in fig. , and this punching affords a return path to the diaphragm for the lines of force set up in the magnet core. obviously a magnetizing current passing through the winding of the coil will cause the end of the core toward the diaphragm to be polarized, say positively, while the end of the enclosing shell will be polarized in the other polarity, negatively. both poles of the magnet are therefore presented to the diaphragm and the only air gap in the magnetic circuit is that between the diaphragm and these poles. the magnetic circuit is therefore one of great efficiency, since it consists almost entirely of iron, the only air gap being that across which the attraction of the diaphragm is to take place. the action of this receiver will be understood when it is stated that in common-battery practice, as will be shown in later chapters, a steady current flows over the line for energizing the transmitter. on this current is superposed the incoming voice currents from a distant station. the steady current flowing in the line will, in the case of this receiver, pass through the magnet winding and establish a normal magnetic field in the same way as if a permanent magnet were employed. the superposed incoming voice currents will then be able to vary this magnetic field in exactly the same way as in the ordinary receiver. an astonishing feature of this recent development of the so-called direct-current receiver is that it did not come into use until after about twenty years of common-battery practice. there is nothing new in the principles involved, as all of them were already understood and some of them were employed by bell in his original telephone; in fact, the idea had been advanced time and again, and thrown aside as not being worth consideration. this is an illustration of a frequent occurrence in the development of almost any rapidly growing art. ideas that are discarded as worthless in the early stages of the art are finally picked up and made use of. the reason for this is that in some cases the ideas come in advance of the art, or they are proposed before the art is ready to use them. in other cases the idea as originally proposed lacked some small but essential detail, or, as is more often the case, the experimenter in the early days did not have sufficient skill or knowledge to make it fit the requirements as he saw them. monarch receiver. the receiver of the automatic electric company just discussed employs but a single electromagnet by which the initial magnetization of the cores and also the variable magnetization necessary for speech reproduction is secured. the problem of the direct-current receiver has been attacked in another way by ernest e. yaxley, of the monarch telephone manufacturing company, with the result shown in fig. . the construction in this case is not unlike that of an ordinary permanent-magnet receiver, except that in the place of the permanent magnets two soft iron cores _ - _ are employed. on these are wound two long bobbins of insulated wire so that the direct current flowing over the telephone line will pass through these and magnetize the cores to the same degree and for the same purpose as in the case of permanent magnets. these soft iron magnet cores _ - _ continue to a point near the coil chamber, where they join the two soft iron pole pieces _ - _, upon which the ordinary voice-current coils are wound. the two long coils _ - _, which may be termed the direct-current coils, are of somewhat lower resistance than the two voice-current coils _ - _. they are, however, by virtue of their greater number of turns and the greater amount of iron that is included in their cores, of much higher impedance than the voice-current coils _ - _. these two sets of coils _ - _ and _ - _ are connected in multiple. as a result of their lower ohmic resistance the coils _ - _ will take a greater amount of the steady current which comes over the line, and therefore the greater proportion of the steady current will be employed in magnetizing the bar magnets. on account of their higher impedance to alternating currents, however, nearly all of the voice currents which are superposed on the steady currents, flowing in the line will pass through the voice-current coils _ - _, and, being near the diaphragm, these currents will so vary the steady magnetism in the cores _ - _ as to produce the necessary vibration of the diaphragm. [illustration: fig. . monarch direct-current receiver] this receiver, like the one of the automatic electric company, does not rely on the shell in any respect to maintain the permanency of relation between the pole pieces and the diaphragm. the cup _ _, which is of pressed brass, contains the voice-current coils and also acts as a seat for the diaphragm. the entire working parts of this receiver may be removed by merely unscrewing the ear piece from the hard rubber shell, thus permitting the whole works to be withdrawn in an obvious manner. dean receiver. of such decided novelty as to be almost revolutionary in character is the receiver recently put on the market by the dean electric company and shown in fig. . this receiver is of the direct-current type and employs but a single cylindrical bobbin of wire. the core of this bobbin and the return path for the magnetic lines of force set up in it are composed of soft iron punchings of substantially =e= shape. these punchings are laid together so as to form a laminated soft-iron field, the limbs of which are about square in cross-section. the coil is wound on the center portion of this _e_ as a core, the core being, as stated, approximately square in cross-section. the general form of magnetic circuit in this instrument is therefore similar to that of the automatic electric company's receiver, shown in figs. and , but the core is laminated instead of being solid as in that instrument. [illustration: fig. . dean steel shell receiver] the most unusual feature of this dean receiver is that the use of hard rubber or composition does not enter into the formation of the shell, but instead a shell composed entirely of steel stampings has been substituted therefor. the main portion of this shell is the barrel _ _. great skill has evidently been exercised in the forming of this by the cold-drawn process, it presenting neither seams nor welds. the ear piece _ _ is also formed of steel of about the same gauge as the barrel _ _. instead of screw-threading the steel parts, so that they would directly engage each other, the ingenious device has been employed of swaging a brass ring _ _ in the barrel portion and a similar brass ring _ _ in the ear cap portion, these two being slotted and keyed, as shown at _ _, so as to prevent their turning in their respective seats. the ring _ _ is provided with an external screw thread and the ring _ _ with an internal screw thread, so that the receiver cap is screwed on to the barrel in the same way as in the ordinary rubber shell. by the employment of these brass screw-threaded rings, the rusting together of the parts so that they could not be separated when required--a difficulty heretofore encountered in steel construction of similar parts--has been remedied. [illustration: fig. . working parts of dean receiver] the entire working parts of this receiver are contained within the cup _ _, the edge of which is flanged outwardly to afford a seat for the diaphragm. the diaphragm is locked in place on the shell by a screw-threaded ring _ _, as is clearly indicated. a ring _ _ of insulating material is seated within the enlarged portion of the barrel _ _, and against this the flange of the cup _ _ rests and is held in place by the cap _ _ when it is screwed home. the working parts of this receiver partially disassembled are shown in fig. , which gives a clear idea of some of the features not clearly illustrated in fig. . it cannot be denied that one of the principal items of maintenance of subscribers' station equipment has been due to the breakage of receiver shells. the users frequently allow their receiver to fall and strike heavily against the wall or floor, thus not only subjecting the cords to great strain, but sometimes cracking or entirely breaking the receiver shell. the innovation thus proposed by the dean company of making the entire receiver shell of steel is of great interest. the shell, as will be seen, is entirely insulated from the circuit of the receiver so that no contact exists by which a user could receive a shock. the shell is enameled inside and out with a heavy black insulating enamel baked on, and said to be of great durability. how this enamel will wear remains to be seen. the insulation of the interior portions of the receiver is further guarded by providing a lining of fiber within the shell at all points where it seems possible that a cross could occur between some of the working parts and the metal of the shell. this type of receiver has not been on the market long enough to draw definite conclusions, based on experience in use, as to what its permanent performance will be. thus far in this chapter only those receivers which are commonly called _hand receivers_ have been discussed. these are the receivers that are ordinarily employed by the general public. [illustration: fig. . operator's receiver] operator's receiver. at the central office in telephone exchanges the operators are provided with receivers in order that they may communicate with the subscribers or with other operators. in order that they may have both of their hands free to set up and take down the connections and to perform all of the switching operations required, a special form of receiver is employed for this purpose, which is worn as a part of a head-gear and is commonly termed a _head receiver_. these are necessarily of very light construction, in order not to be burdensome to the operators, and obviously they must be efficient. they are ordinarily held in place at the ear by a metallic head band fitting over the head of the operator. [illustration: grant avenue office of home telephone company, san francisco, cal. a type of central-office buildings in down-town districts of large cities.] such a receiver is shown in cross-section in fig. , and completely assembled with its head band in fig. . referring to fig. the shell _ _ of the receiver is of aluminum and the magnets are formed of steel rings _ _, cross-magnetized so as to present a north pole on one side of the ring and a south pole on the other. the two l-shaped pole pieces _ _ are secured by screws to the poles of these ring magnets, and these pole pieces carry the magnet coils, as is clearly indicated. these poles are presented to a soft iron diaphragm in exactly the same way as in the larger hand receivers, the diaphragm being clamped in place by a hard rubber ear piece, as shown. the head bands are frequently of steel covered with leather. they have assumed numerous forms, but the general form shown in fig. is the one commonly adopted. [illustration: fig. . operator's receiver and cord] [illustration: fig. . receiver symbols] conventional symbols. the usual diagrammatic symbols for hand and head receivers are shown in fig. . they are self-explanatory. the symbol at the left in this figure, showing the general outline of the receiver, is the one most commonly used where any sort of a receiver is to be indicated in a circuit diagram, but where it becomes desirable to indicate in the diagram the actual connections with the coil or coils of the receiver, the symbol shown at the right is to be preferred, and obviously it may be modified as to number of windings and form of core as desired. chapter vii primary cells galvani, an italian physician, discovered, in , that a current of electricity could be produced by chemical action. in , volta, a physicist, also an italian, threw further light on galvani's discovery and produced what we know as the _voltaic_, or _galvanic_, cell. in honor of these two discoverers we have the words volt, galvanic, and the various words and terms derived therefrom. simple voltaic cell. a very simple voltaic cell may be made by placing two plates, one of copper and one of zinc, in a glass vessel partly filled with dilute sulphuric acid, as shown in fig. . when the two plates are not connected by a wire or other conductor, experiment shows that the copper plate bears a positive charge with respect to the zinc plate, and the zinc plate bears a negative charge with respect to the copper. when the two plates are connected by a wire, a current flows from the copper to the zinc plate through the metallic path of the wire, just as is to be expected when any conductor of relatively high electrical potential is joined to one of relatively low electrical potential. ordinarily, when one charged body is connected to another of different potential, the resulting current is of but momentary duration, due to the redistribution of the charges and consequent equalization of potential. in the case of the simple cell, however, the current is continuous, showing that some action is maintaining the charges on the two plates and therefore maintaining the difference of potential between them. the energy of this current is derived from the chemical action of the acid on the zinc. the cell is in reality a sort of a zinc-burning furnace. in the action of the cell, when the two plates are joined by a wire, it may be noticed that the zinc plate is consumed and that bubbles of hydrogen gas are formed on the surface of the copper plate. _theory_. just why or how chemical action in a voltaic cell results in the production of a negative charge on the consumed plate is not known. modern theory has it that when an acid is diluted in water the molecules of the acid are split up or _dissociated_ into two oppositely charged atoms, or groups of atoms, one bearing a positive charge and the other a negative charge of electricity. such charged atoms or groups of atoms are called _ions_. this separation of the molecules of a chemical compound into positively and negatively charged ions is called _dissociation_. thus, in the simple cell under consideration the sulphuric acid, by dissociation, splits up into hydrogen ions bearing positive charges, and so_{ } ions bearing negative charges. the solution as a whole is neutral in potential, having an equal number of equal and opposite charges. [illustration: fig. . simple voltaic cell] it is known that when a metal is being dissolved by an acid, each atom of the metal which is torn off by the solution leaves the metal as a positively charged ion. the carrying away of positive charges from a hitherto neutral body leaves that body with a negative charge. hence the zinc, or _consumed_ plate, becomes negatively charged. in the chemical attack of the sulphuric acid on the zinc, the positive hydrogen ions are liberated, due to the affinity of the negative so_{ } ions for the positive zinc ions, this resulting in the formation of zinc sulphate in the solution. now the solution itself becomes positively charged, due to the positive charges leaving the zinc plate with the zinc ions, and the free positively charged hydrogen ions liberated in the solution as just described are repelled to the copper plate, carrying their positive charges thereto. hence the copper plate, or the _unconsumed_ plate, becomes positively charged and also coated with hydrogen bubbles. the plates or electrodes of a voltaic cell need not consist of zinc and copper, nor need the fluid, called the _electrolyte_, be of sulphuric acid; any two dissimilar elements immersed in an electrolyte that attacks one of them more readily than the other will form a voltaic cell. in every such cell it will be found that one of the plates is consumed, and that on the other plate some element is deposited, this element being sometimes a gas and sometimes a solid. the plate which is consumed is always the negative plate, and the one on which the element is deposited is always the positive, the current through the connecting wire always being, therefore, from the unconsumed to the consumed plate. thus, in the simple copper-zinc cell just considered, the zinc is consumed, the element hydrogen is deposited on the copper, and the current flow through the external circuit is from the copper to the zinc. the positive charges, leaving the zinc, or consumed, plate, and passing through the electrolyte to the copper, or unconsumed, plate, constitute in effect a current of electricity flowing within the electrolyte. the current within the cell passes, therefore, from the zinc plate to the copper plate. the zinc is, therefore, said to be positive with respect to the copper. _difference of potential._ the amount of electromotive force, that is generated between two dissimilar elements immersed in an electrolyte is different for different pairs of elements and for different electrolytes. for a given electrolyte each element bears a certain relation to another; _i.e._, they are either electro-positive or electro-negative relative to each other. in the following list a group of elements are arranged with respect to the potentials which they assume with respect to each other with dilute sulphuric acid as the electrolyte. the most electro-positive elements are at the top and the most electro-negative at the bottom. +sodium lead copper magnesium iron silver zinc nickel gold cadmium bismuth platinum tin antimony -graphite (carbon) any two elements selected from this list and immersed in dilute sulphuric acid will form a voltaic cell, the amount of difference of potential, or electromotive force, depending on the distance apart in this series of the two elements chosen. the current within the cell will always flow from the one nearest the top of the list to the one nearest the bottom, _i.e._, from the most electro-positive to the most electro-negative; and, therefore, the current in the wire joining the two plates will flow from the one lowest down in the list to the one highest up. from this series it is easy to see why zinc and copper, and also zinc and carbon, are often chosen as elements of voltaic cells. they are widely separated in the series and comparatively cheap. this series may not be taken as correct for all electrolytes, for different electrolytes alter somewhat the order of the elements in the series. thus, if two plates, one of iron and the other of copper, are immersed in dilute sulphuric acid, a current is set up which proceeds through the liquid from the iron to the copper; but, if the plates after being carefully washed are placed in a solution of potassium sulphide, a current is produced in the opposite direction. the copper is now the positive element. table ii shows the electrical deportment of the principal metals in three different liquids. it is arranged like the preceding one, each metal being electro-positive to any one lower in the list. table ii behavior of metals in different electrolytes +------------------+-------------------+--------------------+ | caustic potash | hydrochloric acid | potassium sulphide | +------------------+-------------------+--------------------+ | + zinc | + zinc | + zinc | | tin | cadmium | copper | | cadmium | tin | cadmium | | antimony | lead | tin | | lead | iron | silver | | bismuth | copper | antimony | | iron | bismuth | lead | | copper | nickel | bismuth | | nickel | silver | nickel | | - silver | - antimony | - iron | +------------------+-------------------+--------------------+ it is important to remember that in all cells, no matter what elements or what electrolyte are used, the electrode _which is consumed_ is the one that becomes _negatively charged_ and its terminal, therefore, becomes the _negative terminal_ or _pole_, while the electrode _which is not consumed_ is the one that becomes _positively charged_, and its terminal is, therefore, the _positive terminal_ or _pole of the cell_. however, because the current in the electrolyte flows from the _consumed_ plate to the _unconsumed_ plate, the consumed plate is called the _positive_ plate and the unconsumed, the _negative_. this is likely to become confusing, but if one remembers that the _active_ plate is the _positive_ plate, because it sends forth _positive_ ions in the electrolyte, and, therefore, itself becomes _negatively_ charged, one will have the proper basis always to determine the direction of the current flow, which is the important thing. _polarization._ if the simple cell already described have its terminals connected by a wire for some time, it will be found that the current rapidly weakens until it ceases to be manifest. this weakening results from two causes: first, the hydrogen gas which is liberated in the action of the cell is deposited in a layer on the copper plate, thereby covering the plate and reducing the area of contact with the liquid. this increases the internal resistance of the cell, since hydrogen is a non-conductor. second, the plate so covered becomes in effect a hydrogen electrode, and hydrogen stands high as an electro-positive element. there is, therefore, actual reduction in the electromotive force of the cell, as well as an increase in internal resistance. this phenomenon is known as polarization, and in commercial cells means must be taken to prevent such action as far as possible. the means by which polarization of cells is prevented or reduced in practice may be divided into three general classes: first--_mechanical means_. if the hydrogen bubbles be simply brushed away from the surface of the electrode the resistance and the counter polarity which they cause will be diminished. the same result may be secured if air be blown into the solution through a tube, or if the liquid be kept agitated. if the surface of the electrode be roughened or covered with points, the bubbles collect more freely at the points and are more quickly carried away to the surface of the liquid. these means are, however, hardly practical except in cells for laboratory use. second--_chemical means_. if a highly oxidizing substance be added to the electrolyte, it will destroy the hydrogen bubbles by combining with them while they are in a nascent state, and this will prevent the increase in internal resistance and the opposing electromotive force. such substances are bichromate of potash, nitric acid, and chlorine, and are largely used. third--_electro-chemical means_. double cells, arranged to separate the elements and liquids by means of porous partitions or by gravity, may be so arranged that solid copper is liberated instead of hydrogen at a point where the current leaves the liquid, thereby entirely obviating polarization. this method also is largely used. _local action._ when a simple cell stands idle, _i.e._, with its circuit open, small hydrogen bubbles may be noticed rising from the zinc electrode instead of from copper, as is the case where the circuit is closed. this is due to impurities in the zinc plate, such as particles of iron, tin, arsenic, carbon, etc. each of these particles acts with the surrounding zinc just as might be expected of any pair of dissimilar elements opposed to each other in an electrolyte; in other words, they constitute small voltaic cells. local currents, therefore, are generated, circulating between the two adjacent metals, and, as a result, the zinc plate and the electrolyte are needlessly wasted and the general condition of the cell is impaired. this is called _local action_. _amalgamated zincs._ local action might be prevented by the use of chemically pure zinc, but this, on account of its expense, cannot be employed commercially. local action, however, may be overcome to a great extent by amalgamating the zinc, _i.e._, coating it with mercury. the iron particles or other impurities do not dissolve in the mercury, as does the zinc, but they float to the surface, whence the hydrogen bubbles which may form speedily carry them off, and, in other cases, the impurities fall to the bottom of the cell. as the zinc in the pasty amalgam dissolves in the acid, the film of mercury unites with fresh zinc, and so always presents a clear, bright, homogeneous surface to the action of the electrolyte. the process of amalgamating the zinc may be performed by dipping it in a solution composed of nitric acid lb. muriatic acid lbs. mercury oz. the acids should be first mixed and then the mercury slowly added until dissolved. clean the zinc with lye and then dip it in the solution for a second or two. rinse in clean water and rub with a brush. another method of amalgamating zincs is to clean them by dipping them in dilute sulphuric acid and then in mercury, allowing the surplus to drain off. commercial zincs, for use in voltaic cells as now manufactured, usually have about per cent of mercury added to the molten zinc before casting into the form of plates or rods. series and multiple connections. when a number of voltaic cells are joined in series, the positive pole of one being connected to the negative pole of the next one, and so on throughout the series, the _electromotive forces_ of all the cells are added, and the electromotive force of the group, therefore, becomes the sum of the electromotive forces of the component cells. the currents through all the cells in this case will be equal to that of one cell. if the cells be joined in multiple, the positive poles all being connected by one wire and the negative poles by another, then the _currents_ of all the cells will be added while the electromotive force of the combination remains the same as that of a single cell, assuming all the cells to be alike in electromotive force. obviously combinations of these two arrangements may be made, as by forming strings of cells connected in series, and connecting the strings in multiple or parallel. the term battery is frequently applied to a single voltaic cell, but this term is more properly used to designate a plurality of cells joined together in series, or in multiple, or in series multiple so as to combine their actions in causing current to flow through an external circuit. we may therefore refer to a battery of so many cells. it has, however, become common, though technically improper, to refer to a single cell as a battery, so that the term battery, as indicating necessarily more than one cell, has largely lost its significance. cells may be of two types, primary and secondary. primary cells are those consisting of electrodes of dissimilar elements which, when placed in an electrolyte, become immediately ready for action. secondary cells, commonly called _storage cells_ and _accumulators_, consist always of two inert plates of metal, or metallic oxide, immersed in an electrolyte which is incapable of acting on either of them until a current has first been passed through the electrolyte from one plate to the other. on the passage of a current in this way, the decomposition of the electrolyte is effected and the composition of the plates is so changed that one of them becomes electro-positive and the other electro-negative. the cell is then, when the _charging_ current ceases, capable of acting as a voltaic cell. this chapter is devoted to the primary cell or battery alone. types of primary cells. primary cells may be divided into two general classes: first, those adapted to furnish constant current; and second, those adapted to furnish only intermittent currents. the difference between cells in this respect rests largely in the means employed for preventing or lessening polarization. obviously in a cell in which polarization is entirely prevented the current may be allowed to flow constantly until the cell is completely exhausted; that is, until the zinc is all eaten up or until the hydrogen is exhausted from the electrolyte or both. on the other hand some cells are so constituted that polarization takes place faster than the means intended to prevent it can act. in other words, the polarization gradually gains on the preventive means and so gradually reduces the current by increasing the resistance of the cell and lowering its electromotive force. in cells of this kind, however, the arrangement is such that if the cell is allowed to rest, that is, if the external circuit is opened, the depolarizing agency will gradually act to remove the hydrogen from the unattacked electrode and thus place the cell in good condition for use again. of these two types of primary cells the intermittent-current cell is of far greater use in telephony than the constant-current cell. this is because the use of primary batteries in telephony is, in the great majority of cases, intermittent, and for that reason a cell which will give a strong current for a few minutes and which after such use will regain practically all of its initial strength and be ready for use again, is more desirable than one which will give a weaker current continuously throughout a long period of time. since the cells which are adapted to give constant current are commonly used in connection with circuits that are continuously closed, they are called _closed-circuit cells_. the other cells, which are better adapted for intermittent current, are commonly used on circuits which stand open most of the time and are closed only occasionally when their current is desired. for this reason these are termed _open-circuit cells_. _open-circuit cells_. leclanché cell:--by far the most important primary cell for telephone work is the so-called leclanché cell. this assumes a large variety of forms, but always employs zinc as the negatively charged element, carbon as the positively charged element, and a solution of sal ammoniac as the electrolyte. this cell employs a chemical method of taking care of polarization, the depolarizing agent being peroxide of manganese, which is closely associated with the carbon element. the original form of the leclanché cell, a form in which it was very largely used up to within a short time ago, is shown in fig. . in this the carbon element is placed within a cylindrical jar of porous clay, the walls of this jar being of such consistency as to allow moisture slowly to permeate through it. within this porous cup, as it is called, a plate or disk of carbon is placed, and around this the depolarizing agent, consisting of black oxide of manganese. this is usually mixed with, broken carbon, so as to increase the effective area of the carbon element in contact with the depolarizing agent, and also to reduce the total internal resistance of the cell. the zinc electrode usually consisted merely in a rod of zinc, as shown, with a suitable terminal at its upper end. [illustration: fig. . leclanché cell] the chemical action taking place within the leclanché cell is, briefly, as follows: sal ammoniac is chemically known as chloride of ammonium and is a combination of chlorine and ammonia. in the action which is assumed to accompany the passage of current in this cell, the sal ammoniac is decomposed, the chlorine leaving the ammonia to unite with an atom of the zinc plate, forming chloride of zinc and setting free ammonia and hydrogen. the ammonia is immediately dissolved in the water of the cell, and the hydrogen enters the porous cup and would speedily polarize the cell by adhering to the carbon plate but for the fact that it encounters the peroxide of manganese. this material is exceedingly rich in oxygen and it therefore readily gives up a part of its oxygen, which forms water by combination with the already liberated hydrogen and leaves what is termed a _sesquioxide_ of manganese. this absorption or combination of the hydrogen prevents immediate polarization, but hydrogen is evolved during the operation of the cell more rapidly than it can combine with[typo was 'wth'] the oxygen of the manganese, thereby leading to polarization more rapidly than the depolarizer can prevent it when the cell is heavily worked. when, however, the cell is left with its external circuit open for a time, depolarization ensues by the gradual combination of the hydrogen with the oxygen of the peroxide of manganese, and as a result the cell recuperates and in a short time attains its normal electromotive force. the electromotive force of this cell when new is about . volts. the internal resistance of the cell of the type shown in fig. is approximately ohm, ordinarily less rather than more. a more recent form of leclanché cell is shown in cross-section in fig. . this uses practically the same materials and has the same chemical action as the old disk leclanché cell shown in fig. . it dispenses, however, with the porous cup and instead employs a carbon electrode, which in itself forms a cup for the depolarizing agent. [illustration: fig. . carbon cylinder leclanché cell] the carbon electrode is in the form of a corrugated hollow cylinder which engages by means of an internal screw thread a corresponding screw thread on the outer side of the carbon cover. within this cylinder is contained a mixture of broken carbon and peroxide of manganese. the zinc electrode is in the form of a hollow cylinder almost surrounding the carbon electrode and separated therefrom by means of heavy rubber bands stretched around the carbon. the rod, forming the terminal of the zinc, passes through a porcelain bushing on the cover plate to obviate short circuits. this type of cell has an electromotive force of about . volts and recuperates very quickly after severe use. it also has considerably lower internal resistance than the type of leclanché cell employing a porous cup, and, therefore, is capable of generating a considerably larger current. cells of this general type have assumed a variety of forms. in some the carbon electrode, together with the broken carbon and peroxide of manganese, were packed into a canvas bag which was suspended in the electrolyte and usually surrounded by the zinc electrode. in other forms the carbon electrode has moulded with it the manganese depolarizer. in order to prevent the salts within the cell from creeping over the edge of the containing glass jar and also over the upper portion of the carbon electrode, it is common practice to immerse the upper end of the carbon element and also the upper edge of the glass jar in hot paraffin. in setting up the leclanché cell, place not more than four ounces of white sal ammoniac in the jar, fill the jar one-third full of water, and stir until the sal ammoniac is all dissolved. then put the carbon and zinc elements in place. a little water poured in the vent hole of the porous jar or carbon cylinder will tend to hasten the action. an excess of sal ammoniac should not be used, as a saturated solution tends to deposit crystals on the zinc; on the other hand, the solution should not be allowed to become too weak, as in that case the chloride of zinc will form on the zinc. both of these causes materially increase the resistance of the cell. a great advantage of the leclanché cell is that when not in use there is but little material waste. it contains no highly corrosive chemicals. such cells require little attention, and the addition of water now and then to replace the loss due to evaporation is about all that is required until the elements become exhausted. they give a relatively high electromotive force and have a moderately low internal resistance, so that they are capable of giving rather large currents for short intervals of time. if properly made, they recuperate quickly after polarization due to heavy use. _dry cell_. all the forms of cells so far considered may be quite properly termed _wet cells_ because of the fact that a free liquid electrolyte is used. this term is employed in contradistinction to the later developed cell, commonly termed the _dry cell_. this term "dry cell" is in some respects a misnomer, since it is not dry and if it were dry it would not work. it is essential to the operation of these cells that they shall be moist within, and when such moisture is dissipated the cell is no longer usable, as there is no further useful chemical action. the dry cells are all of the leclanché type, the liquid electrolyte of that type being replaced by a semi-solid substance that is capable of retaining moisture for a considerable period. as in the ordinary wet leclanché cell, the electrodes are of carbon and zinc, the zinc element being in the form of a cylindrical cup and forming the retaining vessel of the cell, while the carbon element is in the form of a rod or plate and occupies a central position with regard to the zinc, being held out of contact with the zinc, however, at all points. a cross-section of an excellent form of dry cell is shown in fig. . the outer casing is of zinc, formed in the shape of a cylindrical cup, and serves not only as the retaining vessel, but as the negatively charged electrode. the outer surface of the zinc is completely covered on its sides and bottom with heavy pasteboard so as to insulate it from bodies with which it may come in contact, and particularly from the zinc cups of other cells used in the same battery. the positively charged electrode is a carbon rod corrugated longitudinally, as shown, in order to obtain greater surface. this rod is held in the center of the zinc cup out of contact therewith, and the intervening space is filled with a mixture of peroxide of manganese, powdered carbon, and sal ammoniac. several thicknesses of blotting paper constitute a lining for the inner portion of the zinc electrode and serve to prevent the manganese mixture from coming directly into contact therewith. the cell is sealed with pitch, which is placed on a layer of sand and sawdust mixed in about equal parts. [illustration: fig. . dry cell] the electrolyte in such cells varies largely as to quantities and proportions of the materials employed in various types of cells, and also varies in the method in which the elements are introduced into the container. the following list and approximate proportions of material will serve as a fair example of the filling mixture in well-known types of cells. manganese dioxide per cent carbon or graphite, or both per cent sal ammoniac per cent zinc chloride per cent water is added to the above and a sufficient amount of mixture is taken for each cell to fill the zinc cup about seven-eighths full when the carbon is in place. the most suitable quantity of water depends upon the original dryness and fineness of material and upon the quality of the paper lining. in some forms of dry batteries, starch or other paste is added to improve the contact of the electrolyte with the zinc and promote a more even distribution of action throughout the electrolyte. mercury, too, is often added to effect amalgamation of the zinc. as in the ordinary wet type of leclanché cell, the purpose of the manganese is to act as a depolarizer; the carbon or graphite being added to give conductivity to the manganese and to form a large electrode surface. it is important that the sal ammoniac, which is the active agent of the cell, should be free from lumps in order to mix properly with the manganese and carbon. a small local action takes place in the dry cell, caused by the dissimilar metals necessarily employed in soldering up the zinc cup and in soldering the terminal rod of zinc to the zinc cup proper. this action, however, is slight in the better grades of cells. as a result of this, and also of the gradual drying out of the moisture within the cell, these cells gradually deteriorate even when not in use--this is commonly called _shelf-wear_. shelf-wear is much more serious in the very small sizes of dry cells than in the larger ones. dry cells are made in a large number of shapes and sizes. the most useful form, however, is the ordinary cylindrical type. these are made in sizes varying from one and one-half inches high and three-quarters inch in diameter to eight inches high and three and three-quarters inches in diameter. the most used and standard size of dry cell is of cylindrical form six inches high and two and three-quarters inches in diameter. the dry cell when new and in good condition has an open-circuit voltage of from . to . volts. perhaps . represents the usual average. a cell of the two and three-quarters by six-inch size will give throughout its useful life probably thirty ampere hours as a maximum, but this varies greatly with the condition of use and the make of cell. its effective voltage during its useful life averages about one volt, and if during this life it gives a total discharge of thirty ampere hours, the fair energy rating of the cell will be thirty watt-hours. this may not be taken as an accurate figure, however, as the watt-hour capacity of a cell depends very largely, not only on the make of the cell, but on the rate of its discharge. an examination of fig. shows that the dry cell has all of the essential elements of the leclanché cell. the materials of which the electrodes are made are the same and the porous cup of the disk leclanché cell is represented in the dry cell by the blotting-paper cylinder, which separates the zinc from the carbon electrode. the positively charged electrode must not be considered as merely the carbon plate or rod alone, but rather the carbon rod with its surrounding mixture of peroxide of manganese and broken carbon. such being the case, it is obvious that the separation between the electrodes is very small, while the surface presented by both electrodes is very large. as a result, the internal resistance of the cell is small and the current which it will give on a short circuit is correspondingly large. a good cell of the two and three-quarters by six-inch size will give eighteen or twenty amperes on short-circuit, when new. as the action of the cell proceeds, zinc chloride and ammonia are formed, and there being insufficient water to dissolve the ammonia, there results the formation of double chlorides of zinc and ammonium. these double chlorides are less soluble than the chlorides and finally occupy the pores of the paper lining between the electrolyte and the zinc and greatly increase the internal resistance of the cell. this increase of resistance is further contributed to by the gradual drying out of the cell as its age increases. within the last few years dry batteries have been so perfected mechanically, chemically, and electrically that they have far greater outputs and better recuperative power than any of the other types of leclanché batteries, while in point of convenience and economy, resulting from their small size and non-breakable, non-spillable features and low cost, they leave no room for comparison. _closed-circuit cells_. gravity-cell:--coming now to the consideration of closed-circuit or constant-current cells, the most important is the well-known gravity, or blue-stone, cell, devised by daniell. it is largely used in telegraphy, and often in telephony in such cases as require a constantly flowing current of small quantity. such a cell is shown in fig. . the elements of the gravity cell are electrodes of copper and zinc. the solution in which the copper plate is immersed is primarily a solution of copper sulphate, commonly known as blue-stone, in water. the zinc plate after the cell is in action is immersed in a solution of sulphate of zinc which is formed around it. the glass jar is usually cylindrical, the standard sizes being inches diameter and inches deep; and also inches diameter and inches deep. the copper electrode is of sheet copper of the form shown, and it is partly covered with crystals of blue-stone or copper sulphate. frequently, in later forms of cells, the copper electrode consists merely of a straight, thick, rectangular bar of copper laid horizontally, directly on top of the blue-stone crystals. in all cases a rubber-insulated wire is attached by riveting to the copper electrode, and passes up through the electrolyte to form the positive terminal. [illustration: fig. . gravity cell] the zinc is, as a rule, of crowfoot form, as shown, whence this cell derives the commonly applied name of _crowfoot cell_. this is essentially a two-fluid cell, for in its action zinc sulphate is formed, and this being lighter than copper sulphate rises to the top of the jar and surrounds the zinc. gravity, therefore, serves to keep the two fluids separate. [illustration: interior of warehouse for telephone construction material] in the action of the cell, when the external circuit is closed, sulphuric acid is formed which attacks the zinc to form sulphate of zinc and to liberate hydrogen, which follows its tendency to attach itself to the copper plate. but in so doing the hydrogen necessarily passes through the solution of sulphate of copper surrounding the copper plate. the hydrogen immediately combines with the so_{ } radical, forming therewith sulphuric acid, and liberating metallic copper. this sulphuric acid, being lighter than the copper sulphate, rises to the surface of the zinc and attacks the zinc, thus forming more sulphate of zinc. the metallic copper so formed is deposited on the copper plate, thereby keeping the surface bright and clean. since hydrogen is thus diverted from the copper plate, polarization does not ensue. the zinc sulphate being colorless, while the copper sulphate is of a dark blue color, the separating line of the two liquids is easily distinguishable. this line is called the _blue line_ and care should be taken that it does not reach the zinc and cause a deposit of copper to be placed thereon. as has been stated, these two liquids do not mix readily, but they will eventually mingle unless the action of the cell is sufficient to use up the copper sulphate as speedily as it is dissolved. thus it will be seen that while the cell is free from polarization and local action, there is, nevertheless, a deteriorating effect if the cell is allowed to remain long on open circuit. therefore, it should be used when a constant current is required. prevention of creeping:--much trouble has been experienced in gravity cells due to the creeping of the salts over the edge of the jar. frequently the upper edges of the jars are coated by dipping in hot paraffin wax in the hope of preventing this. sometimes oil is poured on top of the fluid in the jar to prevent the creeping of the salts and the evaporation of the electrolyte. the following account of experiments performed by mr. william reid, of chicago, throws light on the relative advantages of these and other methods of preventing creeping. the experiment was made with gravity cells having -inch by -inch glass jars. four cells were made up and operated in a rather dry, warm place, although perhaps under no more severe local conditions than would be found in most telephone exchanges. cell no. was a plain cell as ordinarily used. cell no. had the top of the rim of the jar treated with paraffin wax by dipping the rim to about one inch in depth in melted paraffin wax. cell no. had melted paraffin wax poured over the surface of the liquid forming a seal about / inch in thickness. after cooling, a few small holes were bored through the seal to let gases escape. cell no. had a layer of heavy paraffin oil nearly / inch in thickness (about oz. being used) on top of the solutions. these cells were all run on a load of . to . amperes for - / hours per day for thirty days, after which the following results were noted: (_a_) the plain cell, or cell no. , had to have ounces of water added to it to replace that which had evaporated. the creeping of zinc sulphate salts was very bad. (_b_) the waxed rim cell, or cell no. , evaporated ounces of water and the creeping of zinc sulphate salts was not prevented by the waxed rim. the wax proved of no value. (_c_) the wax sealed cell, or cell no. , showed practically no evaporation and only very slight creeping of zinc sulphate salts. the creeping of salts that took place was only around spots where the edges of the seal were loose from the jar. (_d_) the paraffin oil sealed cell, or cell no. , showed no evaporation and no creeping of salts. it was concluded by mr. reid from the above experiments that the wax applied to the rim of the jar is totally ineffective and has no merits. the wax seal loosens around the edges and does not totally prevent creeping of the zinc sulphate salts, although nearly so. the wax-sealed jar must have holes drilled in it to allow the gases to escape. the method is hardly commercial, as it is difficult to make a neat appearing cell, besides making it almost impossible to manipulate its contents. a coat of paraffin oil approximately / inch in thickness (about ounces) gives perfect protection against evaporation and creeping of the zinc sulphate salts. the cell, having the paraffin-oil seal, had a very neat, clean appearance as compared with cells no. and no. . it was found that the zinc could be drawn out through the oil, cleaned, and replaced with no appreciable effect on voltage or current. setting up:--in setting up the battery the copper electrode is first unfolded to form a cross and placed in the bottom of the jar. enough copper sulphate, or blue-stone crystals, is then dropped into the jar to almost cover the copper. the zinc crowfoot is then hung in place, occupying a position about inches above the top of the copper. clear water is then poured in sufficient to fill the jar within about an inch of the top. if it is not required to use the cell at once, it may be placed on short circuit for a time and allowed to form its own zinc sulphate. the cell may, however, be made immediately available for use by drawing about one-half pint of a solution of zinc sulphate from a cell already in use and pouring it into the jar, or, when this is not convenient, by putting into the liquid four or five ounces of pulverized sulphate of zinc, or by adding about ten drops of sulphuric acid. when the cell is in proper working condition, one-half inch in thickness of heavy paraffin oil of good quality may be added. if the blue line gets too low, and if there is in the bottom of the cell a sufficient quantity of sulphate of copper, it may be raised by drawing off a portion of the zinc sulphate with a battery syringe and replacing this with water. if the blue line gets too high, it may be lowered by short-circuiting the cell for a time, or by the addition of more sulphate of zinc solution from another battery. if the copper sulphate becomes exhausted, it should be replenished by dropping in more crystals. care should be taken in cold weather to maintain the temperature of the battery above ° or ° fahrenheit. if below this temperature, the internal resistance of a cell increases very rapidly, so much so that even at ° fahrenheit the action becomes very much impaired. this follows from the facts that the resistance of a liquid decreases as its temperature rises, and that chemical action is much slower at lower temperatures. the gravity cell has a practically constant voltage of . volts. its internal resistance is comparatively high, seldom falling below ohm and often rising to ohms. at best, therefore, it is only capable of producing about ampere. the gravity cell is perhaps the most common type of cell wherein depolarization is affected by electro-chemical means. fuller cell:--a form of cell that is adapted to very heavy open-circuit work and also closed-circuit work where heavier currents are required than can be supplied by the gravity battery is the fuller. in this the electrodes are of zinc and carbon, respectively, the zinc usually being in the form of a heavy cone and placed within a porous cup. the electrolyte of the fuller cell is known as _electropoion fluid_, and consists of a mixture of sodium or potassium bichromate, sulphuric acid, and water. the various parts of the standard fuller cell, as once largely employed by the various bell operating companies, are shown in fig. . in this the jar was made of flint glass, cylindrical in form, six inches in diameter and eight inches deep. it is important that a good grade of glass be used for the jar in this cell, because, on account of the nature of the electrolyte, breakage is disastrous in the effects it may produce on adjacent property. the carbon plate is rectangular in form, about four inches wide, eight and three-quarters inches long, and one-quarter inch thick. the metal terminal at the top of the carbon block is of bronze, both it and the lock nuts and bolts being nickel-plated to minimize corrosion. the upper end of the carbon block is soaked in paraffin so hot as to drive all of the moisture out of the paraffin and out of the pores of the block itself. the zinc, as is noted from the cut, is in the form of a truncated cone. it is about two and one-eighth inches in diameter at the base and two and one-half inches high. cast into the zinc is a soft copper wire about no. b. & s. gauge. this wire extends above the top of the jar so as to form a convenient terminal for the cell. the porous cup is cylindrical in form, about three inches in diameter and seven inches deep. the wooden cover is of kiln-dried white wood thoroughly coated with two coats of asphalt paint. it is provided with a slot for the carbon and a hole for the copper wire extending to the zinc. the electrolyte for this cell is made as follows: sodium bichromate oz. sulphuric acid oz. soft water oz. this solution is mixed by dissolving the bichromate of sodium in the water and then adding slowly the sulphuric acid. potassium bichromate may be substituted for the sodium bichromate. in setting up this cell, the amalgamated zinc is placed within the porous cup, in the bottom of which are about two teaspoonfuls of mercury, the latter serving to keep the zinc well amalgamated. the porous cup is then placed in the glass jar and a sufficient quantity of the electrolyte is placed in the outer jar to come within about one and one-half inches of the top of the porous cup. about two teaspoonfuls of salt are then placed in the porous cup and sufficient soft water added to bring the level of the liquid within the porous cup even with the level of the electrolyte in the jar surrounding the cup. the carbon is then placed through the slot in the cover, and the wire from the zinc is passed through the hole in the cover provided for it, and the cover is allowed to fall in place. the cell is now ready for immediate use. the action of this cell is as follows: the sulphuric acid attacks the zinc and forms zinc sulphate, liberating hydrogen. the hydrogen attempts to pass to the carbon plate as usual, but in so doing it meets with the oxygen of the chromic acid and forms water therewith. the remainder of the chromic acid combines with the sulphuric acid to form chromium sulphate. [illustration: fig . fuller cell] the mercury placed in the bottom of the porous cup with the zinc keeps the zinc in a state of perpetual amalgamation. this it does by capillary action, as the mercury spreads over the entire surface of the zinc. the initial amalgamation, while not absolutely essential, helps in a measure this capillary action. in another well-known type of the fuller battery the carbon is a hollow cylinder, surrounding the porous cup. in this type the zinc usually took the form of a long bar having a cross-shaped section, the length of this bar being sufficient to extend the entire depth of the porous cup. this type of cell has the advantage of a somewhat lower internal resistance than the standard form just described. should the electrolyte become supersaturated by virtue of the battery being neglected or too heavily overworked, a set of secondary reactions will occur in the cell, resulting in the formation of the yellow crystals upon the carbon. this seriously affects the e.m.f. of the cell and also its internal resistance. should this occur, some of the solution should be withdrawn and dilute sulphuric acid inserted in its place and the crystals which have formed on the carbon should be carefully washed off. should the solution lose its orange tint and turn blue, it indicates that more bichromate of potash or bichromate of sodium is needed. this cell gives an electromotive force of . volts and a very large current when it is in good condition, since its internal resistance is low. the fuller cell was once largely used for supplying current to telephone transmitters at subscribers' stations, where very heavy service was demanded, but the advent of the so-called common-battery systems, in some cases, and of the high-resistance transmitter, in other cases, has caused a great lessening in its use. this is fortunate as the cell is a "dirty" one to handle and is expensive to maintain. the fuller cell still warrants attention, however, as an available source of current, which may be found useful in certain cases of emergency work, and in supplying special but temporary needs for heavier current than the leclanché or gravity cell can furnish. lalande cell:--a type of cell, specially adapted to constant-current work, and sometimes used as a central source of current in very small common-battery exchanges is the so-called _copper oxide_, or _lalande cell_, of which the edison and the gordon are types. in all of these the negatively charged element is of zinc, the positively charged element a mass of copper oxide, and the electrolyte a solution of caustic potash in water. in the edison cell the copper oxide is in the form of a compressed slab which with its connecting copper support forms the electrode. in the gordon and other cells of this type the copper oxide is contained loosely in a perforated cylinder of sheet copper. the copper oxide serves not only as an electrode, but also as a depolarizing agent, the liberated hydrogen in the electrolyte uniting with the oxygen of the copper oxide to form water, and leaving free metallic copper. on open circuit the elements are not attacked, therefore there is no waste of material while the cell is not in use. this important feature, and the fact that the internal resistance is low, make this cell well adapted for all forms of heavy open-circuit work. the fact that there is no polarizing action within the cell makes it further adaptable to heavy closed-circuit service. these cells are intended to be so proportioned that all of their parts become exhausted at once so that when the cell fails, complete renewals are necessary. therefore, there is never a question as to which of the elements should be renewed. after the elements and solution are in place about one-fourth of an inch of heavy paraffin oil is poured upon the surface of the solution in order to prevent evaporation. this cell requires little attention and will maintain a constant e.m.f. of about two-thirds of a volt until completely exhausted. it is non-freezable at all ordinary temperatures. its low voltage is its principal disadvantage. _standard cell_. chloride of silver cell:--the chloride of silver cell is largely used as a standard for testing purposes. its compactness and portability and its freedom from local action make it particularly adaptable to use in portable testing outfits where constant electromotive force and very small currents are required. [illustration: fig. . chloride of silver cell] a cross-section of one form of the cell is shown in fig. . its elements are a rod of chemically-pure zinc and a rod of chloride of silver immersed in a water solution of sal ammoniac. as ordinarily constructed, the glass jar or tube is usually about - / inches long by inch in diameter. after the solution is poured in and the elements are in place the glass tube is hermetically sealed with a plug of paraffin wax. the e.m.f. of a cell of this type is . volts and the external resistance varies with the age of the cell, being about ohms at first. care should be taken not to short-circuit these cells, or use them in any but high-resistance circuits, as they have but little energy and become quickly exhausted if compelled to work in low-resistance circuits. conventional symbol. the conventional symbol for a cell, either of the primary or the secondary type, consists of a long thin line and a short heavy line side by side and parallel. a battery is represented by a number of pairs of such lines, as in fig. . the two lines of each pair are supposed to represent the two electrodes of a cell. where any significance is to be placed on the polarity of the cell or battery the long thin line is supposed to represent the positively charged plate and the short thick line the negatively charged plate. the number of pairs may indicate the number of cells in the battery. frequently, however, a few pairs of such lines are employed merely for the purpose of indicating a battery without regard to its polarity or its number of cells. [illustration: fig. . battery symbols] in fig. the representation at _a_ is that of a battery of a number of cells connected in parallel; that at _b_ of a battery with the cells connected in series; and that at _c_ of a battery with one of its poles grounded. chapter viii magneto signaling apparatus method of signaling. the ordinary apparatus, by which speech is received telephonically, is not capable of making sufficiently loud sounds to attract the attention of people at a distance from the instrument. for this reason it is necessary to employ auxiliary apparatus for the purpose of signaling between stations. in central offices where an attendant is always on hand, the sense of sight is usually appealed to by the use of signals which give a visual indication, but in the case of telephone instruments for use by the public, the sense of hearing is appealed to by employing an audible rather than a visual signal. battery bell. the ordinary vibrating or battery bell, such as is employed for door bells, is sometimes, though not often, employed in telephony. it derives its current from primary batteries or from any direct-current source. the reason why they are not employed to a greater extent in telephony is that telephone signals usually have to be sent over lines of considerable length and the voltage that would be required to furnish current to operate such bells over such lengths of line is higher than would ordinarily be found in the batteries commonly employed in telephone work. besides this the make-and-break contacts on which the, ordinary battery bell depends for its operation are an objectionable feature from the standpoint of maintenance. magneto bell. fortunately, however, there has been developed a simpler type of electric bell, which operates on smaller currents, and which requires no make-and-break contacts whatever. this simpler form of bell is commonly known as the _polarized_, or _magneto_, bell or _ringer_. it requires for its operation, in its ordinary form, an alternating current, though in its modified forms it may be used with pulsating currents, that is, with periodically recurring impulses of current always in the same direction. magneto generator. in the early days of telephony there was nearly always associated with each polarized bell a magneto generator for furnishing the proper kind of current to ring such bells. each telephone was therefore equipped, in addition to the transmitter and receiver, with a signal-receiving device in the form of a polarized bell, and with a current generator by which the user was enabled to develop his own currents of suitable kind and voltage for ringing the bells of other stations. considering the signaling apparatus of the telephones alone, therefore, each telephone was equipped with a power plant for generating currents used by that station in signaling other stations, the prime mover being the muscles of the user applied to the turning of a crank on the side of the instrument; and also with a current-consuming device in the form of a polarized electromagnetic bell adapted to receive the currents generated at other stations and to convert a portion of their energy into audible signals. the magneto generator is about the simplest type of dynamo-electric machine, and it depends upon the same principles of operation as the much larger generators, employed in electric-lighting and street-railway power plants, for instance. instead of developing the necessary magnetic field by means of electromagnets, as in the case of the ordinary dynamo, the field of the magneto generator is developed by permanent magnets, usually of the horseshoe form. hence the name _magneto_. [illustration: fig. . principles of magneto generator] in order to concentrate the magnetic field within the space in which the armature revolves, pole pieces of iron are so arranged in connection with the poles of the permanent magnet as to afford a substantially cylindrical space in which the armature conductors may revolve and through which practically all the magnetic lines of force set up by the permanent magnets will pass. in fig. there is shown, diagrammatically, a horseshoe magnet with such a pair of pole pieces, between which a loop of wire is adapted to rotate. the magnet _ _ is of hardened steel and permanently magnetized. the pole pieces are shown at _ _ and _ _, each being of soft iron adapted to make good magnetic contact on its flat side with the inner flat surface of the bar magnet, and being bored out so as to form a cylindrical recess between them as indicated. the direction of the magnetic lines of force set up by the bar magnet through the interpolar space is indicated by the long horizontal arrows, this flow being from the north pole (n) to the south pole (s) of the magnet. at _ _ there is shown a loop of wire supposed to revolve in the magnetic field of force on the axis _ - _. theory. in order to understand how currents will be generated in this loop of wire _ _, it is only necessary to remember that if a conductor is so moved as to cut across magnetic lines of force, an electromotive force will be set up in the conductor which will tend to make the current flow through it. the magnitude of the electromotive force will depend on the rate at which the conductor cuts through the lines of force, or, in other words, on the number of lines of force that are cut through by the conductor in a given unit of time. again, the direction of the electromotive force depends on the direction of the cutting, so that if the conductor be moved in one direction across the lines of force, the electromotive force and the current will be in one direction; while if it moves in the opposite direction across the lines of force, the electromotive force and the current will be in the reverse direction. it is, evident that as the loop of wire _ _ revolves in the field of force about the axis _ - _, the portions of the conductor parallel to the axis will cut through the lines of force, first in one direction and then in the other, thus producing electromotive forces therein, first in one direction and then in the other. referring now to fig. , and supposing that the loop _ _ is revolving in the direction of the curved arrow shown between the upper edges of the pole pieces, it will be evident that just as the loop stands in the vertical position, its horizontal members will be moving in a horizontal direction, parallel with the lines of force and, therefore, not cutting them at all. the electromotive force and the current will, therefore, be zero at this time. as the loop advances toward the position shown in dotted lines, the upper portion of the loop that is parallel with the axis will begin to cut downwardly through the lines of force, and likewise the lower portion of the loop that is parallel with the axis will begin to cut upwardly through the lines of force. this will cause electromotive forces in opposite directions to be generated in these portions of the loop, and these will tend to aid each other in causing a current to circulate in the loop in the direction shown by the arrows associated with the dotted representation of the loop. it is evident that as the motion of the loop progresses, the rate of cutting the lines of force will increase and will be a maximum when the loop reaches a horizontal position, or at that time the two portions of the loop that are parallel with the axis will be traveling at right angles to the lines of force. at this point, therefore, the electromotive force and the current will be a maximum. from this point until the loop again assumes a vertical position, the cutting of the lines of force will still be in the same direction, but at a constantly decreasing rate, until, finally, when the loop is vertical the movement of the parts of the loop that are parallel with the axis will be in the direction of the lines of force and, therefore, no cutting will take place. at this point, therefore, the electromotive force and the current in the loop again will be zero. we have seen, therefore, that in this half revolution of the loop from the time when it was in a vertical position to a time when it was again in a vertical position but upside down, the electromotive force varied from zero to a maximum and back to zero, and the current did the same. it is easy to see that, as the loop moves through the next half revolution, an exactly similar rise and fall of electromotive force and current will take place; but this will be in the opposite direction, since that portion of the loop which was going down through the lines of force is now going up, and the portion which was previously going up is now going down. the law concerning the generation of electromotive force and current in a conductor that is cutting through lines of magnetic force, may be stated in another way, when the conductor is bent into the form of a loop, as in the case under consideration: thus, _if the number of lines of force which pass through a conducting loop be varied, electromotive forces will be generated in the loop_. this will be true whether the number of lines passing through the loop be varied by moving the loop within the field of force or by varying the field of force itself. in any case, _if the number of lines of force be increased, the current will flow in one way, and if it be diminished the current will flow in the other way_. the amount of the current will depend, other things being equal, on the rate at which the lines of force through the loop are being varied, regardless of the method by which the variation is made to take place. one revolution of the loop, therefore, results in a complete cycle of alternating current consisting of one positive followed by one negative impulse. the diagram of fig. is merely intended to illustrate the principle involved. in the practical construction of magneto generators more than one bar magnet is used, and, in addition, the conductors in the armature are so arranged as to include a great many loops of wire. furthermore, the conductors in the armature are wound around an iron core so that the path through the armature loops or turns, may present such low reluctance to the passage of lines of force as to greatly increase the number of such lines and also to cause practically all of them to go through the loops in the armature conductor. armature. the iron upon which the armature conductors are wound is called the _core_. the core of an ordinary armature is shown in fig. . this is usually made of soft gray cast iron, turned so as to form bearing surfaces at _ _ and _ _, upon which the entire armature may rotate, and also turned so that the surfaces _ _ will be truly cylindrical with respect to the axis through the center of the shaft. the armature conductors are put on by winding the space between the two parallel faces _ _ as full of insulated wire as space will admit. one end of the armature winding is soldered to the pin _ _ and, therefore, makes contact with the frame of the generator, while the other end of the winding is soldered to the pin _ _, which engages the stud _ _, carried in an insulating bushing in a longitudinal hole in the end of the armature shaft. it is thus seen that the frame of the machine will form one terminal of the armature winding, while the insulated stud _ _ will form the other terminal. [illustration: fig. . generator armature] another form of armature largely employed in recent magneto generators is illustrated in fig. . in this the shaft on which the armature revolves does not form an integral part of the armature core but consists of two cylindrical studs _ _ and _ _ projecting from the centers of disks _ _ and _ _, which are screwed to the ends of the core _ _. this =h= type of armature core, as it is called, while containing somewhat more parts than the simpler type shown in fig. , possesses distinct advantages in the matter of winding. by virtue of its simpler form of winding space, it is easier to insulate and easier to wind, and furthermore, since the shaft does not run through the winding space, it is capable of holding a considerably greater number of turns of wire. the ends of the armature winding are connected, one directly to the frame and the other to an insulated pin, as is shown in the illustration. [illustration: fig. . generator armature] [illustration: fig. . generator field and armature] the method commonly employed of associating the pole pieces with each other and with the permanent magnets is shown in fig. . it is very important that the space in which the armature revolves shall be truly cylindrical, and that the bearings for the armature shall be so aligned as to make the axis of rotation of the armature coincide with the axis of the cylindrical surface of the pole pieces. a rigid structure is, therefore, required and this is frequently secured, as shown in fig. , by joining the two pole pieces _ _ and _ _ together by means of heavy brass rods _ _ and _ _, the rods being shouldered and their reduced ends passed through holes in flanges extending from the pole pieces, and riveted. the bearing plates in which the armature is journaled are then secured to the ends of these pole pieces, as will be shown in subsequent illustrations. this assures proper rigidity between the pole pieces and also between the pole pieces and the armature bearings. the reason why this degree of rigidity is required is that it is necessary to work with very small air gaps between the armature core and its pole pieces and unless these generators are mechanically well made they are likely to alter their adjustment and thus allow the armature faces to scrape or rub against the pole pieces. in fig. one of the permanent horseshoe magnets is shown, its ends resting in grooves on the outer faces of the pole pieces and usually clamped thereto by means of heavy iron machine screws. with this structure in mind, the theory of the magneto generator developed in connection with fig. may be carried a little further. when the armature lies in the position shown at the left of fig. , so that the center position of the core is horizontal, a good path is afforded for the lines of force passing from one pole to the other. practically all of these lines will pass through the iron of the core rather than through the air, and, therefore, practically all of them will pass through the convolutions of the armature winding. when the armature has advanced, say degrees, in its rotation in the direction of the curved arrow, the lower right-hand portion of the armature flange will still lie opposite the lower face of the right-hand pole piece and the upper left-hand portion of the armature flange will still lie opposite the upper face of the left-hand pole piece. as a result there will still be a good path for the lines of force through the iron of the core and comparatively little change in the number of lines passing through the armature winding. as the corners of the armature flange pass away from the corners of the pole pieces, however, there is a sudden change in condition which may be best understood by reference to the right-hand portion of fig. . the lines of force now no longer find path through the center portion of the armature core--that lying at right angles to their direction of flow. two other paths are at this time provided through the now horizontal armature flanges which serve almost to connect the two pole pieces. the lines of force are thus shunted out of the path through the armature coils and there is a sudden decrease from a large number of lines through the turns of the winding to almost none. as the armature continues in its rotation the two paths through the flanges are broken, and the path through the center of the armature core and, therefore, through the coils themselves, is reëstablished. as a result of this consideration it will be seen that in actual practice the change in the number of lines passing through the armature winding is not of the gradual nature that would be indicated by a consideration of fig. alone, but rather, is abrupt, as the corners of the armature flanges leave the corners of the pole pieces. this abrupt change produces a sudden rise in electromotive force just at these points in the rotation, and, therefore, the electromotive force and the current curves of these magneto generators is not usually of the smooth sine-wave type but rather of a form resembling the sine wave with distinct humps added to each half cycle. [illustration: fig. . generator with magnets removed] as is to be expected from any two-pole alternating generator, there is one cycle of current for each revolution of the armature. under ordinary conditions a person is able to turn the generator handle at the rate of about two hundred revolutions a minute, and as the ratio of gearing is about five to one, this results in about one thousand revolutions per minute of the generator, and, therefore, in a current of about one thousand cycles per minute, this varying widely according to the person who is doing the turning. [illustration: howard office of home telephone company, san francisco an all-concrete building serving the district south of market street.] the end plates which support the bearings for the armature are usually extended upwardly, as shown in fig. , so as to afford bearings for the crank shaft. the crank shaft carries a large spur gear which meshes with a pinion in the end of the armature shaft, so that the user may cause the armature to revolve rapidly. the construction shown in fig. is typical of that of a modern magneto generator, it being understood that the permanent magnets are removed for clearness of illustration. fig. is a view of a completely assembled generator such as is used for service requiring a comparatively heavy output. other types of generators having two, three, or four permanent magnets instead of five, as shown in this figure, are also standard. [illustration: fig. . five-bar generator] referring again to fig. , it will be remembered that one end of the armature winding shown diagrammatically in that figure, is terminated in the pin _ _, while the other terminates in the pin _ _. when the armature is assembled in the frame of the generator it is evident that the frame itself is in metallic connection with one end of the armature winding, since the pin _ _ is in metallic contact with the armature casting and this is in contact with the frame of the generator through the bearings. the frame of the machine is, therefore, one terminal of the generator. when the generator is assembled a spring of one form or another always rests against the terminal pin _ _ of the armature so as to form a terminal for the armature winding of such a nature as to permit the armature to rotate freely. such spring, therefore, forms the other terminal of the generator. automatic shunt. under nearly all conditions of practice it is desirable to have the generator automatically perform some switching function when it is operated. as an example, when the generator is connected so that its armature is in series in a telephone line, it is quite obvious that the presence of the resistance and the impedance of the armature winding would be objectionable if left in the circuit through which the voice currents had to pass. for this reason, what is termed an _automatic shunt_ is employed on generators designed for series work; this shunt is so arranged that it will automatically shunt or short-circuit the armature winding when it is at rest and also break this shunt when the generator is operated, so as to allow the current to pass to line. [illustration: fig . generator shunt switch] a simple and much-used arrangement for this purpose is shown in fig. , where _ _ is the armature; _ _ is a wire leading from the frame of the generator and forming one terminal of the generator circuit; and _ _ is a wire forming the other terminal of the generator circuit, this wire being attached to the spring _ _, which rests against the center pin of the armature so as to make contact with the opposite end of the armature winding to that which is connected with the frame. the circuit through the armature may be traced from the terminal wire _ _ through the frame; thence through the bearings to the armature _ _ and through the pin to the right-hand side of the armature winding. continuing the circuit through the winding itself, it passes to the center pin projecting from the left-hand end of the armature shaft; thence to the spring _ _ which rests against this pin; and thence to the terminal wire _ _. normally, this path is shunted by what is practically a short circuit, which may be traced from the terminal _ _ through the frame of the generator to the crank shaft _ _; thence to the upper end of the spring _ _ and out by the terminal wire _ _. this is the condition which ordinarily exists and which results in the removal of the resistance and the impedance on the armature winding from any circuit in which the generator is placed, as long as the generator is not operated. an arrangement is provided, however, whereby the crank shaft _ _ will be withdrawn automatically from engaging with the upper end of the spring _ _, thus breaking the shunt around the armature circuit, whenever the generator crank is turned. in order to accomplish this the crank shaft _ _ is capable of partial rotation and of slight longitudinal movement within the hub of the large gear wheel. a spring usually presses the crank shaft toward the left and into engagement with the spring _ _. a pin _ _ carried by the crank shaft, rests in a v-shaped notch in the end of the hub _ _ and as a result, when the crank is turned the pin rides on the surface of this notch before the large gear wheel starts to turn, and thus moves the crank shaft _ _ to the right and breaks the contact between it and the spring _ _. thus, as long as the generator is being operated, its armature is connected in the circuit of the line, but as soon as it becomes idle the armature is automatically short-circuited. such devices as this are termed _automatic shunts_. in still other cases it is desirable to have the generator circuit normally open so that it will not affect in any way the electrical characteristics of the line while the line is being used for talking. in this case the arrangement is made so that the generator will automatically be placed in proper circuit relation with the line when it is operated. [illustration: fig. . generator cut-in switch] a common arrangement for doing this is shown in fig. , wherein the spring _ _ normally rests against the contact pin of the armature and forms one terminal of the armature circuit. the spring _ _ is adapted to form the other terminal of the armature circuit but it is normally insulated from everything. the circuit of the generator is, therefore, open between the spring _ _ and the shaft _ _, but as soon as the generator is operated the crank shaft is bodily moved to the left by means of the =v=-shaped notch in the driving collar _ _ and is thus made to engage the spring _ _. the circuit of the generator is then completed from the spring _ _ through the armature pin to the armature winding; thence to the frame of the machine and through shaft _ _ to the spring _ _. such devices as this are largely used in connection with so-called "bridging" telephones in which the generators and bells are adapted to be connected in multiple across the line. a better arrangement for accomplishing the automatic switching on the part of the generator is to make no use of the crank shaft as a part of the conducting path as is the case in both figs. and , but to make the crank shaft, by its longitudinal movement, impart the necessary motion to a switch spring which, in turn, is made to engage or disengage a corresponding contact spring. an arrangement of this kind that is in common use is shown in fig. . this needs no further explanation than to say that the crank shaft is provided on its end with an insulating stud _ _, against which a switching spring _ _ bears. this spring normally rests against another switch spring _ _, but when the generator crank shaft moves to the right upon the turning of the crank, the spring _ _ disengages spring _ _ and engages spring _ _, thus completing the circuit of the generator armature. it is seen that this operation accomplishes the breaking of one circuit and the making of another, a function that will be referred to later on in this work. [illustration: fig. . generator cut-in switch] pulsating current. sometimes it is desirable to have a generator capable of developing a pulsating current instead of an alternating current; that is, a current which will consist of impulses all in one direction rather than of impulses alternating in direction. it is obvious that this may be accomplished if the circuit of the generator be broken during each half revolution so that its circuit is completed only when current is being generated in one direction. such an arrangement is indicated diagrammatically in fig. . instead of having one terminal of the armature winding brought out through the frame of the generator as is ordinarily done, both terminals are brought out to a commuting device carried on the end of the armature shaft. thus, one end of the loop representing the armature winding is shown connected directly to the armature pin _ _, against which bears a spring _ _, in the usual manner. the other end of the armature winding is carried directly to a disk _ _, mounted _on_ but insulated _from_ the shaft and revolving therewith. one-half of the circumferential surface of this disk is of insulating material _ _ and a spring _ _ rests against this disk and bears alternately upon the conducting portion _ _ or the insulating portion _ _, according to the position of the armature in its revolution. it is obvious that when the generator armature is in the position shown the circuit through it is from the spring _ _ to the pin _ _; thence to one terminal of the armature loop; thence through the loop and back to the disk _ _ and out by the spring _ _. if, however, the armature were turned slightly, the spring _ _ would rest on the insulating portion _ _ and the circuit would be broken. [illustration: fig. . pulsating-current commutator] [illustration: fig. . generator symbols] it is obvious that if the brush _ _ is so disposed as to make contact with the disk _ _ only during that portion of the revolution while positive current is being generated, the generator will produce positive pulsations of current, all the negative ones being cut out. if, on the other hand, the spring _ _ may be made to bear on the opposite side of the disk, then it is evident that the positive impulses would all be cut out and the generator would develop only negative impulses. such a generator is termed a "direct-current" generator or a "pulsating-current" generator. the symbols for magneto or hand generators usually embody a simplified side view, showing the crank and the gears on one side and the shunting or other switching device on the other. thus in fig. are shown three such symbols, differing from each other only in the details of the switching device. the one at the left shows the simple shunt, adapted to short-circuit the generator at all times save when it is in operation. the one in the center shows the cut-in, of which another form is described in connection with fig. ; while the symbol at the right of fig. is of the make-and-break device, discussed in connection with fig. . in such diagrammatic representations of generators it is usual to somewhat exaggerate the size of the switching springs, in order to make clear their action in respect to the circuit connections in which the generator is used. polarized ringer. the polarized bell or ringer is, as has been stated, the device which is adapted to respond to the currents sent out by the magneto generator. in order that the alternately opposite currents may cause the armature to move alternately in opposite directions, these bells are polarized, _i.e._, given a definite magnetic set, so to speak; so the effect of the currents in the coils is not to create magnetism in normally neutral iron, but rather to alter the magnetism in iron already magnetized. _western electric ringer._ a typical form of polarized bell is shown in fig. , this being the standard bell or ringer of the western electric company. the two electromagnets are mounted side by side, as shown, by attaching their cores to a yoke piece _ _ of soft iron. this yoke piece also carries the standards _ _ upon which the gongs are mounted. the method of mounting is such that the standards may be adjusted slightly so as to bring the gongs closer _to_ or farther _from_, the tapper. the soft iron yoke piece _ _ also carries two brass posts _ _ which, in turn, carry another yoke _ _ of brass. in this yoke _ _ is pivoted, by means of trunnion screws, the armature _ _, this extending on each side of the pivot so that its ends lie opposite the free poles of the electromagnets. from the center of the armature projects the tapper rod carrying the ball or striker which plays between the two gongs. in order that the armature and cores may be normally polarized, a permanent magnet _ _ is secured to the center of the yoke piece _ _. this bends around back of the electromagnets and comes into close proximity to the armature _ _. by this means one end of each of the electromagnet cores is given one polarity--say north--while the armature is given the other polarity--say south. the two coils of the electromagnet are connected together in series in such a way that current in a given direction will act to produce a north pole in one of the free poles and a south pole in the other. if it be assumed that the permanent magnet maintains the armature normally of south polarity and that the current through the coils is of such direction as to make the left-hand core north and the right-hand core south, then it is evident that the left-hand end of the armature will be attracted and the right-hand end repelled. this will throw the tapper rod to the right and sound the right-hand bell. a reversal in current will obviously produce the opposite effect and cause the tapper to strike the left-hand bell. an important feature in polarized bells is the adjustment between the armature and the pole pieces. this is secured in the western electric bell by means of the nuts _ _, by which the yoke _ _ is secured to the standards _ _. by moving these nuts up or down on the standards the armature may be brought closer _to_ or farther _from_ the poles, and the device affords ready means for clamping the parts into any position to which they may have been adjusted. [illustration: fig. . polarized bell] _kellogg ringer._ another typical ringer is that of the kellogg switchboard and supply company, shown in fig. . this differs from that of the western electric company mainly in the details by which the armature adjustment is obtained. the armature supporting yoke _ _ is attached directly to the cores of the magnets, no supporting side rods being employed. instead of providing means whereby the armature may be adjusted toward or from the poles, the reverse practice is employed, that is, of making the poles themselves extensible. this is done by means of the iron screws _ _ which form extensions of the cores and which may be made to approach or recede from the armature by turning them in such direction as to screw them in or out of the core ends. [illustration: fig. . polarized bell] [illustration: fig. . biased bell] _biased bell._ the pulsating-current generator has already been discussed and its principle of operation pointed out in connection with fig. . the companion piece to this generator is the so-called biased ringer. this is really nothing but a common alternating-current polarized ringer with a light spring so arranged as to hold the armature normally in one of its extreme positions so that the tapper will rest against one of the gongs. such a ringer is shown in fig. and needs no further explanation. it is obvious that if a current flows in the coils of such a ringer in a direction tending to move the tapper toward the left, then no sound will result because the tapper is already moved as far as it can be in that direction. if, however, currents in the opposite direction are caused to flow through the windings, then the electromagnetic attraction on the armature will overcome the pull of the spring and the tapper will move over and strike the right-hand gong. a cessation of the current will allow the spring to exert itself and throw the tapper back into engagement with the left-hand gong. a series of such pulsations in the proper direction will, therefore, cause the tapper to play between the two gongs and ring the bell as usual. a series of currents in a wrong direction will, however, produce no effect. conventional symbols. in fig. are shown six conventional symbols of polarized bells. the three at the top, consisting merely of two circles representing the magnets in plan view, are perhaps to be preferred as they are well standardized, easy to draw, and rather suggestive. the three at the bottom, showing the ringer as a whole in side elevation, are somewhat more specific, but are objectionable in that they take more space and are not so easily drawn. [illustration: fig. . ringer symbols] symbols _a_ or _b_ may be used for designating any ordinary polarized ringer. symbols _c_ and _d_ are interchangeably used to indicate a biased ringer. if the bell is designed to operate only on positive impulses, then the plus sign is placed opposite the symbol, while a minus sign so placed indicates that the bell is to be operated only by negative impulses. some specific types of ringers are designed to operate only on a given frequency of current. that is, they are so designed as to be responsive to currents having a frequency of sixty cycles per second, for instance, and to be unresponsive to currents of any other frequency. either symbols _e_ or _f_ may be used to designate such ringers, and if it is desired to indicate the particular frequency of the ringer this is done by adding the proper numeral followed by a short reversed curve sign indicating frequency. thus ~ would indicate a frequency of fifty cycles per second. chapter ix the hook switch purpose. in complete telephone instruments, comprising both talking and signaling apparatus, it is obviously desirable that the two sets of apparatus, for talking and signaling respectively, shall not be connected with the line at the same time. a certain switching device is, therefore, necessary in order that the signaling apparatus alone may be left operatively connected with the line while the instrument is not being used in the transmission of speech, and in order that the signaling apparatus may be cut out when the talking apparatus is brought into play. in instruments employing batteries for the supply of transmitter current, another switching function is the closing of the battery circuit through the transmitter and the induction coil when the instrument is in use for talking, since to leave the battery circuit closed all the time would be an obvious waste of battery energy. in the early forms of telephones these switching operations were performed by a manually operated switch, the position of which the user was obliged to change before and after each use of the telephone. the objection to this was not so much in the manual labor imposed on the user as in the tax on his memory. it was found to be practically a necessity to make this switching function automatic, principally because of the liability of the user to forget to move the switch to the proper position after using the telephone, resulting not only in the rapid waste of the battery elements but also in the inoperative condition of the signal-receiving bell. the solution of this problem, a vexing one at first, was found in the so-called automatic hook switch or switch hook, by which the circuits of the instrument were made automatically to assume their proper conditions by the mere act, on the part of the user, of removing the receiver from, or placing it upon, a conveniently arranged hook or fork projecting from the side of the telephone casing. automatic operation. it may be taken as a fundamental principle in the design of any piece of telephone apparatus that is to be generally used by the public, that the necessary acts which a person must perform in order to use the device must, as far as possible, follow as a natural result from some other act which it is perfectly obvious to the user that he must perform. so in the case of the switch hook, the user of a telephone knows that he must take the receiver from its normal support and hold it to his ear; and likewise, when he is through with it, that he must dispose of it by hanging it upon a support obviously provided for that purpose. in its usual form a forked hook is provided for supporting the receiver in a convenient place. this hook is at the free end of a pivoted lever, which is normally pressed upward by a spring when the receiver is not supported on it. when, however, the receiver is supported on it, the lever is depressed by its weight. the motion of the lever is mechanically imparted to the members of the switch proper, the contacts of which are usually enclosed so as to be out of reach of the user. this switch is so arranged that when the hook is depressed the circuits are held in such condition that the talking apparatus will be cut out, the battery circuit opened, and the signaling apparatus connected with the line. on the other hand, when the hook is in its raised position, the signaling apparatus is cut out, the talking apparatus switched into proper working relation with the line, and the battery circuit closed through the transmitter. in the so-called common-battery telephones, where no magneto generator or local battery is included in the equipment at the subscriber's station, the mere raising of the hook serves another important function. it acts, not only to complete the circuit through the substation talking apparatus, but, by virtue of the closure of the line circuit, permits a current to flow over the line from the central-office battery which energizes a signal associated with the line at the central office. this use of the hook switch in the case of the common-battery telephone is a good illustration of the principle just laid down as to making all the functions which the subscriber has to perform depend, as far as possible, on acts which his common sense alone tells him he must do. thus, in the common-battery telephone the subscriber has only to place the receiver at his ear and ask for what he wants. this operation automatically displays a signal at the central office and he does nothing further until the operator inquires for the number that he wants. he has then nothing to do but wait until the called-for party responds, and after the conversation his own personal convenience demands that he shall dispose of the receiver in some way, so he hangs it up on the most convenient object, the hook switch, and thereby not only places the apparatus at his telephone in proper condition to receive another call, but also conveys to the central office the signal for disconnection. likewise in the case of telephones operating in connection with automatic exchanges, the hook switch performs a number of functions automatically, of which the subscriber has no conception; and while, in automatic telephones, there are more acts required of the user than in the manual, yet a study of these acts will show that they all follow in a way naturally suggested to the user, so that he need have but the barest fundamental knowledge in order to properly make use of the instrument. in all cases, in properly designed apparatus, the arrangement is such that the failure of the subscriber to do a certain required act will do no damage to the apparatus or to the system, and, therefore, will inconvenience only himself. design. the hook switch is in reality a two-position switch, and while at present it is a simple affair, yet its development to its high state of perfection has been slow, and its imperfections in the past have been the cause of much annoyance. several important points must be borne in mind in the design of the hook switch. the spring provided to lift the hook must be sufficiently strong to accomplish this purpose and yet must not be strong enough to prevent the weight of the receiver from moving the switch to its other position. the movement of this spring must be somewhat limited in order that it will not break when used a great many times, and also it must be of such material and shape that it will not lose its elasticity with use. the shape and material of the restoring spring are, of course, determined to a considerable extent by the length of the lever arm which acts on the spring, and on the space which is available for the spring. the various contacts by which the circuit changes are brought about upon the movement of the hook-switch lever usually take the form of springs of german silver or phosphor-bronze, hard rolled so as to have the necessary resiliency, and these are usually tipped with platinum at the points of contact so as to assure the necessary character of surface at the points where the electric circuits are made or broken. a slight sliding movement between each pair of contacts as they are brought together is considered desirable, in that it tends to rub off any dirt that may have accumulated, yet this sliding movement should not be great, as the surfaces will then cut each other and, therefore, reduce the life of the switch. contact material. on account of the high cost of platinum, much experimental work has been done to find a substitute metal suitable for the contact points in hook switches and similar uses in the manufacture of telephone apparatus. platinum is unquestionably the best known material, on account of its non-corrosive and heat-resisting qualities. hard silver is the next best and is found in some first-class apparatus. the various cheap alloys intended as substitutes for platinum or silver in contact points may be dismissed as worthless, so far as the writers' somewhat extensive investigations have shown. in the more recent forms of hook switches, the switch lever itself does not form a part of the electrical circuit, but serves merely as the means by which the springs that are concerned in the switching functions are moved into their alternate cooperative relations. one advantage in thus insulating the switch lever from the current-carrying portions of the apparatus and circuits is that, since it necessarily projects from the box or cabinet, it is thus liable to come in contact with the person of the user. by insulating it, all liability of the user receiving shocks by contact with it is eliminated. wall telephone hooks. _kellogg._ a typical form of hook switch, as employed in the ordinary wall telephone sets, is shown in fig. , this being the standard hook of the kellogg switchboard and supply company. in this the lever _ _ is pivoted at the point _ _ in a bracket _ _ that forms the base of all the working parts and the means of securing the entire hook switch to the box or framework of the telephone. this switch lever is normally pressed upward by a spring _ _, mounted on the bracket _ _, and engaging the under side of the hook lever at the point _ _. attached to the lever arm _ _ is an insulated pin _ _. the contact springs by which the various electrical circuits are made and broken are shown at _ _, _ _, _ _, _ _, and _ _, these being mounted in one group with insulated bushings between them; the entire group is secured by machine screws to a lug projecting horizontally from the bracket _ _. the center spring _ _ is provided with a forked extension which embraces the pin _ _ on the hook lever. it is obvious that an up-and-down motion of the hook lever will move the long spring _ _ in such manner as to cause electrical contact either between it and the two upper springs _ _ and _ _, or between it and the two lower springs _ _ and _ _. the hook is shown in its raised position, which is the position required for talking. when lowered the two springs _ _ and _ _ are disengaged from the long spring _ _ and from each other, and the three springs _ _, _ _, and _ _ are brought into electrical engagement, thus establishing the necessary signaling conditions. [illustration: fig. . long lever hook switch] the right-hand ends of the contact springs are shown projecting beyond the insulating supports. this is for the purpose of facilitating making electrical joints between these springs and the various wires which lead from them. these projecting ends are commonly referred to as ears, and are usually provided with holes or notches into which the connecting wire is fastened by soldering. _western electric._ fig. shows the type of hook switch quite extensively employed by the western electric company in wall telephone sets where the space is somewhat limited and a compact arrangement is desired. it will readily be seen that the principle on which this hook switch operates is similar to that employed in fig. , although the mechanical arrangement of the parts differs radically. the hook lever _ _ is pivoted at _ _ on a bracket _ _, which serves to support all the other parts of the switch. the contact springs are shown at _ _, _ _, and _ _, and this latter spring _ _ is so designed as to make it serve as an actuating spring for the hook. this is accomplished by having the curved end of this spring press against the lug _ _ of the hook and thus tend to raise the hook when it is relieved of the weight of the receiver. the two shorter springs _ _ and _ _ have no electrical function but merely serve as supports against which the springs _ _ and _ _ may rest, when the receiver is on the hook, these springs _ _ and _ _ being given a light normal tension toward the stop springs _ _ and _ _. it is obvious that in the particular arrangement of the springs in this switch no contacts are closed when the receiver is on the hook. [illustration: fig. . short lever hook switch] concerning this latter feature, it will be noted that the particular form of kellogg hook switch, shown in fig. , makes two contacts and breaks two when it is raised. similarly the western electric company's makes two contacts but does not break any when raised. from such considerations it is customary to speak of a hook such as that shown in fig. as having two make and two break contacts, and such a hook as that shown in fig. as having two make contacts. it will be seen from either of these switches that the modification of the spring arrangement, so as to make them include a varying number of make-and-break contacts, is a simple matter, and switches of almost any type are readily modified in this respect. [illustration: fig. . removable lever hook switch] _dean_. in fig. is shown a decidedly unique hook switch for wall telephone sets which forms the standard equipment of the dean electric company. the hook lever _ _ is pivoted at _ _, an auxiliary lever _ _ also being pivoted at the same point. the auxiliary lever _ _ carries at its rear end a slotted lug _ _, which engages the long contact spring _ _, and serves to move it up and down so as to engage and disengage the spring _ _, these two springs being mounted on a base lug extending from the base plate _ _, upon which the entire hook-switch mechanism is mounted. the curved spring _ _, also mounted on this same base, engages the auxiliary lever _ _ at the point _ _ and normally serves to press this up so as to maintain the contact springs _ _ in engagement with contact spring _ _. the switch springs are moved entirely by the auxiliary lever _ _, but in order that this lever _ _ may be moved as required by the hook lever _ _, this lever is provided with a notched lug _ _ on its lower side, which notch is engaged by a forwardly projecting lug _ _ that is integral with the auxiliary lever _ _. the switch lever may be bodily removed from the remaining parts of the hook switch by depressing the lug _ _ with the finger, so that it disengages the notch in lug _ _, and then drawing the hook lever out of engagement with the pivot stud _ _, as shown in the lower portion of the figure. it will be noted that the pivotal end of the hook lever is made with a slot instead of a hole as is the customary practice. the advantage of being able to remove the hook switch bodily from the other portions arises mainly in connection with the shipment or transportation of instruments. the projecting hooks cause the instruments to take up more room and thus make larger packing boxes necessary than would otherwise be used. moreover, in handling the telephones in store houses or transporting them to the places where they are to be used, the projecting hook switch is particularly liable to become damaged. it is for convenience under such conditions that the dean hook switch is made so that the switch lever may be removed bodily and placed, for instance, inside the telephone box for transportation. desk-stand hooks. the problem of hook-switch design for portable desk telephones, while presenting the same general characteristics, differs in the details of construction on account of the necessarily restricted space available for the switch contacts in the desk telephone. [illustration: west office of home telephone company, san francisco serving the general western business and residence districts.] _western electric._ in fig. is shown an excellent example of hook-switch design as applied to the requirements of the ordinary portable desk set. this figure is a cross-sectional view of the base and standard of a familiar type of desk telephone. the base itself is of stamped metal construction, as indicated, and the standard which supports the transmitter and the switch hook for the receiver is composed of a black enameled or nickel-plated brass tube _ _, attached to the base by a screw-threaded joint, as shown. the switch lever _ _ is pivoted at _ _ in a brass plug _ _, closing the upper end of the tube forming the standard. this brass plug supports also the transmitter, which is not shown in this figure. attached to the plug _ _ by the screw _ _ is a heavy strip _ _, which reaches down through the tube to the base plate of the standard and is held therein by a screw _ _. the plug _ _, carrying with it the switch-hook lever _ _ and the brass strip _ _, may be lifted bodily out of the standard _ _ by taking out the screw _ _ which holds the strip _ _ in place, as is clearly indicated. on the strip _ _ there is mounted the group of switch springs by which the circuit changes of the instrument are brought about when the hook is raised or lowered. the spring _ _ is longer than the others, and projects upwardly far enough to engage the lug on the switch-hook lever _ _. this spring, which is so bent as to close the contacts at the right when not prevented by the switch lever, also serves as an actuating spring to raise the lever _ _ when the receiver is removed from it. this spring, when the receiver is removed from the hook, engages the two springs at the right, as shown, or when the receiver is placed on the hook, breaks contact with the two right-hand springs and makes contact respectively with the left-hand spring and also with the contact _ _ which forms the transmitter terminal. [illustration: fig. . desk-stand hook switch] it is seen from an inspection of this switch hook that it has two make and two break contacts. the various contact springs are connected with the several binding posts shown, these forming the connectors for the flexible cord conductors leading into the base and up through the standard of the desk stand. by means of the conductors in this cord the circuits are led to the other parts of the instrument, such as the induction coil, call bell, and generator, if there is one, which, in the case of the western electric company's desk set, are all mounted separately from the portable desk stand proper. this hook switch is accessible in an easy manner and yet not subject to the tampering of idle or mischievous persons. by taking out the screw _ _ the entire hook switch may be lifted out of the tube forming the standard, the cords leading to the various binding posts being slid along through the tube. by this means the connections to the hook switch, as well as the contact of the switch itself, are readily inspected or repaired by those whose duty it is to perform such operations. _kellogg._ in fig. is shown a sectional view of the desk-stand hook switch of the kellogg switchboard and supply company. in this it will be seen that instead of placing the switch-hook springs within the standard or tube, as in the case of the western electric company, they are mounted in the base where they are readily accessible by merely taking off the base plate from the bottom of the stand. the hook lever operates on the long spring of the group of switch springs by means of a toggle joint in an obvious manner. this switch spring itself serves by its own strength to raise the hook lever when released from the weight of the receiver. [illustration: fig. . desk-stand hook switch] in this switch, the hook lever, and in fact the entire exposed metal portions of the instrument, are insulated from all of the contact springs and, therefore, there is little liability of shocks on the part of the person using the instrument. conventional symbols. the hook switch plays a very important part in the operation of telephone circuits; for this reason readily understood conventional symbols, by which they may be conveniently represented in drawings of circuits, are desirable. in fig. are shown several symbols such as would apply to almost any circuit, regardless of the actual mechanical details of the particular hook switch which happened to be employed. thus diagram _a_ in fig. shows a hook switch having a single make contact and this diagram might be used to refer to the hook switch of the dean electric company shown in fig. , in which only a single contact is made when the receiver is removed, and none is made when it is on the hook. similarly, diagram _b_ might be used to represent the hook switch of the kellogg company, shown in fig. , the arrangement being for two make and two break contacts. likewise diagram _c_ might be used to represent the hook switch of the western electric company, shown in fig. , which, as before stated, has two make contacts only. diagram _d_ shows another modification in which contacts made by the hook switch, when the receiver is removed, control two separate circuits. assuming that the solid black portion represents insulation, it is obvious that the contacts are divided into two groups, one insulated from the other. [illustration: fig. . hook switch symbols] [illustration: compressed air wagon for pneumatic drilling and chipping in manholes] chapter x electromagnets and inductive coils electromagnet. the physical thing which we call an electromagnet, consisting of a coil or helix of wire, the turns of which are insulated from each other, and within which is usually included an iron core, is by far the most useful of all the so-called translating devices employed in telephony. in performing the ordinary functions of an electromagnet it translates the energy of an electrical current into the energy of mechanical motion. an almost equally important function is the converse of this, that is, the translation of the energy of mechanical motion into that of an electrical current. in addition to these primary functions which underlie the art of telephony, the electromagnetic coil or helix serves a wide field of usefulness in cases where no mechanical motion is involved. as impedance coils, they serve to exert important influences on the flow of currents in circuits, and as induction coils, they serve to translate the energy of a current flowing in one circuit into the energy of a current flowing in another circuit, the translation usually, but not always, being accompanied by a change in voltage. when a current flows through the convolutions of an ordinary helix, the helix will exhibit the properties of a magnet even though the substance forming the core of the helix is of non-magnetic material, such as air, or wood, or brass. if, however, a mass of iron, such as a rod or a bundle of soft iron wires, for instance, is substituted as a core, the magnetic properties will be enormously increased. the reason for this is, that a given magnetizing force will set up in iron a vastly greater number of lines of magnetic force than in air or in any other non-magnetic material. magnetizing force. the magnetizing force of a given helix is that force which tends to drive magnetic lines of force through the magnetic circuit interlinked with the helix. it is called _magnetomotive force_ and is analogous to electromotive force, that is, the force which tends to drive an electric current through a circuit. the magnetizing force of a given helix depends on the product of the current strength and the number of turns of wire in the helix. thus, when the current strength is measured in amperes, this magnetizing force is expressed as ampere-turns, being the product of the number of amperes flowing by the number of turns. the magnetizing force exerted by a given current, therefore, is independent of anything except the number of turns, and the material within the core or the shape of the core has no effect upon it. magnetic flux. the total magnetization resulting from a magnetizing force is called the magnetic flux, and is analogous to current. the intensity of a magnetic flux is expressed by the number of magnetic lines of force in a square centimeter or square inch. while the magnetomotive force or magnetizing force of a given helix is independent of the material of the core, the flux which it sets up is largely dependent on the material and shape of the core--not only upon this but on the material that lies in the return path for the flux outside of the core. we may say, therefore, that the amount of flux set up by a given current in a given coil or helix is dependent on the material in the magnetic path or magnetic circuit, and on the shape and length of that circuit. if the magnetic circuit be of air or brass or wood or any other non-magnetic material, the amount of flux set up by a given magnetizing force will be relatively small, while it will be very much greater if the magnetic circuit be composed in part or wholly of iron or steel, which are highly magnetic substances. permeability. the quality of material, which permits of a given magnetizing force setting up a greater or less number of lines of force within it, is called its permeability. more accurately, the permeability is the ratio existing between the amount of magnetization and the magnetizing force which produces such magnetization. the permeability of a substance is usually represented by the greek letter µ (pronounced _mu_). the intensity of the magnetizing force is commonly symbolized by h, and since the permeability of air is always taken as unity, we may express the intensity of magnetizing force by the number of lines of force per square centimeter which it sets up in air. now, if the space on which the given magnetizing force h were acting were filled with iron instead of air, then, owing to the greater permeability of iron, there would be set up a very much greater number of lines of force per square centimeter, and this number of lines of force per square centimeter in the iron is the measure of the magnetization produced and is commonly expressed by the letter =b=. from this we have µ = b/h thus, when we say that the permeability of a given specimen of wrought iron under given conditions is , , we mean that , times as many lines of force would be induced in a unit cross-section of this sample as would be induced by the same magnetizing force in a corresponding unit cross-section of air. evidently for air b = h, hence µ becomes unity. the permeability of air is always a constant. this means that whether the magnetic density of the lines of force through the air be great or small the number of lines will always be proportional to the magnetizing force. unfortunately for easy calculations in electromagnetic work, however, this is not true of the permeability of iron. for small magnetic densities the permeability is very great, but for large densities, that is, under conditions where the number of lines of force existing in the iron is great, the permeability becomes smaller, and an increase in the magnetizing force does not produce a corresponding increase in the total flux through the iron. magnetization curves. this quality of iron is best shown by the curves of fig. , which illustrate the degree of magnetization set up in various kinds of iron by different magnetizing forces. in these curves the ordinates represent the total magnetization =b=, while the abscissas represent the magnetizing force =h=. it is seen from an inspection of these curves that as the magnetizing force =h= increases, the intensity of flux also increases, but at a gradually lessening rate, indicating a reduction in permeability at the higher densities. these curves are also instructive as showing the great differences that exist between the permeability of the different kinds of iron; and also as showing how, when the magnetizing force becomes very great, the iron approaches what is called _saturation_, that is, a point at which the further increase in magnetizing force will result in no further magnetization of the core. from the data of the curves of fig. , which are commonly called _magnetization curves_, it is easy to determine other data from which so-called permeability curves may be plotted. in permeability curves the total magnetization of the given pieces of iron are plotted as abscissas, while the corresponding permeabilities are plotted as ordinates. [illustration: fig. . magnetization curve] direction of lines of force. the lines of force set up within the core of a helix always have a certain direction. this direction always depends upon the direction of the flow of current around the core. an easy way to remember the direction is to consider the helix as grasped in the right hand with the fingers partially encircling it and the thumb pointing along its axis. then, if the current through the convolutions of the helix be in the direction in which the fingers of the hand are pointed around the helix, the magnetic lines of force will proceed through the core of the helix along the direction in which the thumb is pointed. in the case of a simple bar electromagnet, such as is shown in fig. , the lines of force emerging from one end of the bar must pass back through the air to the other end of the bar, as indicated by dotted lines and arrows. the path followed by the magnetic lines of force is called the _magnetic circuit_, and, therefore, the magnetic circuit of the magnet shown in fig. is composed partly of iron and partly of air. from what has been said concerning the relative permeability of air and of iron, it will be obvious that the presence of such a long air path in the magnetic circuit will greatly reduce the number of lines of force that a given magnetizing force can set up. the presence of an air gap in a magnetic circuit has much the same effect on the total flow of lines of force as the presence of a piece of bad conductor in a circuit composed otherwise of good conductor, in the case of the flow of electric current. reluctance. as the property which opposes the flow of electric current in an electrical circuit is called _resistance_, so the property which opposes the flow of magnetic lines of force in a magnetic circuit is called _reluctance_. in the case of the electric circuit, the resistance is the reciprocal of the conductivity; in the case of the magnetic circuit, the reluctance is the reciprocal of the permeability. as in the case of an electrical circuit, the amount of flow of current is equal to the electromotive force divided by the resistance; so in a magnetic circuit, the magnetic flux is equal to the magnetizing force or magnetomotive force divided by the reluctance. [illustration: fig. . bar electromagnet] types of low-reluctance circuits. as the pull of an electromagnet upon its armature depends on the total number of lines of force passing from the core to the armature--that is, on the total flux--and as the total flux depends for a given magnetizing force on the reluctance of the magnetic circuit, it is obvious that the design of the electromagnetic circuit is of great importance in influencing the action of the magnet. obviously, anything that will reduce the amount of air or other non-magnetic material that is in the magnetic circuit will tend to reduce the reluctance, and, therefore, to increase the total magnetization resulting from a given magnetizing force. _horseshoe form._ one of the easiest and most common ways of reducing reluctance in a circuit is to bend the ordinary bar electromagnet into horseshoe form. in order to make clear the direction of current flow, attention is called to fig. . this is intended to represent a simple bar of iron with a winding of one direction throughout its length. the gap in the middle of the bar, which divides the winding into two parts, is intended merely to mark the fact that the winding need not cover the whole length of the bar and still will be able to magnetize the bar when the current passes through it. in fig. a similar bar is shown with similar winding upon it, but bent into =u=-form, exactly as if it had been grasped in the hand and bent without further change. the magnetic polarity of the two ends of the bar remain the same as before for the same direction of current, and it is obvious that the portion of the magnetic circuit which extends through air has been very greatly shortened by the bending. as a result, the magnetic reluctance of the circuit has been greatly decreased and the strength of the magnet correspondingly increased. [illustration: fig. . bar electromagnet] [illustration: fig. . horseshoe electromagnet] [illustration: fig. . horseshoe electromagnet] if the armature of the electromagnet shown in fig. is long enough to extend entirely across the air gap from the south to the north pole, then the air gap in the magnetic circuit is still further shortened, and is now represented only by the small gap between the ends of the armature and the ends of the core. such a magnet, with an armature closely approaching the poles, is called a _closed-circuit magnet_, since the only gap in the iron of the magnetic circuit is that across which the magnet pulls in attracting its armature. in fig. is shown the electrical and magnetic counterpart of fig. . the fact that the magnetic circuit is not a single iron bar but is made up of two cores and one backpiece rigidly secured together, has no bearing upon the principle, but only shows that a modification of construction is possible. in the construction of fig. the armature _ _ is shown as being pulled directly against the two cores _ _ and _ _, these two cores being joined by a yoke _ _, which, like the armature and the core, is of magnetic material. the path of the lines of force is indicated by dotted lines. this is a very important form of electromagnet and is largely used in telephony. _iron-clad form_. another way of forming a closed-circuit magnet that is widely used in telephony is to enclose the helix or winding in a shell of magnetic material which joins the core at one end. this construction results in what is known as the _tubular_ or _iron-clad_ electromagnet, which is shown in section and in end view in fig. . in this the core _ _ is a straight bar of iron and it lies centrally within a cylindrical shell _ _, also of iron. the bar is usually held in place within the shell by a screw, as shown. the lines of force set up in the core by the current flowing through the coil, pass to the center of the bottom of the iron shell and thence return through the metal of the shell, through the air gap between the edges of the shell and the armature, and then concentrate at the center of the armature and pass back to the end of the core. this is a highly efficient form of closed-circuit magnet, since the magnetic circuit is of low reluctance. [illustration: fig. . iron-clad electromagnet] such forms of magnets are frequently used where it is necessary to mount a large number of them closely together and where it is desired that the current flowing in one magnet shall produce no inductive effect in the coils of the adjacent magnets. the reason why mutual induction between adjacent magnets is obviated in the case of the iron-clad or tubular magnet is that practically all stray field is eliminated, since the return path for the magnetic lines is so completely provided for by the presence of the iron shell. _special horseshoe form._ in fig. is shown a type of relay commonly employed in telephone circuits. the purpose of illustrating it in this chapter is not to discuss relays, but rather to show an adaptation of an electromagnet wherein low reluctance of the magnetic circuit is secured by providing a return leg for the magnetic lines developed in the core, thus forming in effect a horseshoe magnet with a winding on one of its limbs only. to the end of the core _ _ there is secured an =l=-shaped piece of soft iron _ _. this extends upwardly and then forwardly throughout the entire length of the magnet core. an =l=-shaped armature _ _ rests on the front edge of the piece _ _ so that a slight rocking motion will be permitted on the "knife-edge" bearing thus afforded. it is seen from the dotted lines that the magnetic circuit is almost a closed one. the only gap is that between the lower end of the armature _ _ and the front end of the core. when the coil is energized, this gap is closed by the attraction of the armature. as a result, the rearwardly projecting end of the armature _ _ is raised and this raises the spring _ _ and causes it to break the normally existing contact with the spring _ _ and to establish another contact with the spring _ _. thus the energy developed within the coil of the magnet is made to move certain parts which in turn operate the switching devices to produce changes in electrical circuits. these relays and other adaptations of the electromagnet will be discussed more fully later on. [illustration: fig. . electromagnet of relay] there are almost numberless forms of electromagnets, but we have illustrated here examples of the principal types employed in telephony, and the modifications of these types will be readily understood in view of the general principles laid down. direction of armature motion. it may be said in general that the armature of an electromagnet always moves or tends to move, when the coil is energized, in such a way as to reduce the reluctance of the magnetic circuit through the coil. thus, in all of the forms of electromagnets discussed, the armature, when attracted, moves in such a direction as to shorten the air gap and to introduce the iron of the armature as much as possible into the path of the magnetic lines, thus reducing the reluctance. in the case of a solenoid type of electromagnet, or the coil and plunger type, which is a better name than solenoid, the coil, when energized, acts in effect to suck the iron core or plunger within itself so as to include more and more of the iron within the most densely occupied portion of the magnetic circuit. [illustration: fig. . parallel differential electromagnet] differential electromagnet. frequently in telephony, the electromagnets are provided with more than one winding. one purpose of the double-wound electromagnet is to produce the so-called differential action between the two windings, _i.e._, making one of the windings develop magnetization in the opposite direction from that of the other, so that the two will neutralize each other, or at least exert different and opposite influences. the principle of the differential electromagnet may be illustrated in connection with fig. . here two wires _ _ and _ _ are shown wrapped in the same direction about an iron core, the ends of the wire being joined together at _ _. obviously, if one of these windings only is employed and a current sent through it, as by connecting the terminals of a battery with the points _ _ and _ _, for instance, the core will be magnetized as in an ordinary magnet. likewise, the core will be energized if a current be sent from _ _ to _ _. assuming that the two windings are of equal resistance and number of turns, the effects so produced, when either the coil _ _ or the coil _ _ is energized, will be equal. if the battery be connected between the terminals _ _ and _ _ with the positive pole, say, at _ _, then the current will proceed through the winding _ _ and tend to generate magnetism in the core in the direction of the arrow. after traversing the winding _ _, however, it will then begin to traverse the other winding _ _ and will pass around the core in the opposite direction throughout the length of that winding. this will tend to set up magnetism in the core in the opposite direction to that indicated by the arrow. since the two currents are equal and also the number of turns in each winding, it is obvious that the two magnetizing influences will be exactly equal and opposite and no magnetic effect will be produced. such a winding, as is shown in fig. , where the two wires are laid on side by side, is called a _parallel differential winding_. another way of winding magnets differentially is to put one winding on one end of the core and the other winding on the other end of the core and connect these so as to cause the currents through them to flow around the core in opposite directions. such a construction is shown in fig. and is called a _tandem differential winding_. the tandem arrangement, while often good enough for practical purposes, cannot result in the complete neutralization of magnetic effect. this is true because of the leakage of some of the lines of force from intermediate points in the length of the core through the air, resulting in some of the lines passing through more of the turns of one coil than of the other. complete neutralization can only be attained by first twisting the two wires together with a uniform lay and then winding them simultaneously on the core. [illustration: fig. . tandem differential electromagnet] mechanical details. we will now consider the actual mechanical construction of the electromagnet. this is a very important feature of telephone work, because, not only must the proper electrical and magnetic effects be produced, but also the whole structure of the magnet must be such that it will not easily get out of order and not be affected by moisture, heat, careless handling, or other adverse conditions. the most usual form of magnet construction employed in telephony is shown in fig. . on the core, which is of soft norway iron, usually cylindrical in form, are forced two washers of either fiber or hard rubber. fiber is ordinarily to be preferred because it is tougher and less liable to breakage. around the core, between the two heads, are then wrapped several layers of paper or specially prepared cloth in order that the wire forming the winding may be thoroughly insulated from the core. one end of the wire is then passed through a hole in one of the spool heads or washers, near the core, and the wire is then wound on in layers. sometimes a thickness of paper is placed around each layer of wire in order to further guard against the breaking down of the insulation between layers. when the last layer is wound on, the end of the wire is passed out through a hole in the head, thus leaving both ends projecting. [illustration: fig. construction of electromagnet] magnet wire. the wire used in winding magnets is, of course, an important part of the electromagnet. it is always necessary that the adjacent turns of the wire be insulated from each other so that the current shall be forced to pass around the core through all the length of wire in each turn rather than allowing it to take the shorter and easier path from one turn to the next, as would be the case if the turns were not insulated. for this purpose the wire is usually covered with a coating of some insulating material. there are, however, methods of winding magnet coils with bare wire and taking care of the insulation between the turns in another way, as will be pointed out. insulated wire for the purpose of winding magnet coils is termed _magnet wire_. copper is the material almost universally employed for the conductor. its high conductivity, great ductility, and low cost are the factors which make it superior to all other metals. however, in special cases, where exceedingly high conductivity is required with a limited winding space, silver wire is sometimes employed, and on the other hand, where very high resistance is desired within a limited winding space, either iron or german silver or some other high-resistance alloy is used. _wire gauges_. wire for electrical purposes is drawn to a number of different standard gauges. each of the so-called wire gauges consists of a series of graded sizes of wire, ranging from approximately one-half an inch in diameter down to about the fineness of a lady's hair. in certain branches of telephone work, such as line construction, the existence of the several wire gauges or standards is very likely to lead to confusion. fortunately, however, so far as magnet wire is concerned, the so-called brown and sharpe, or american, wire gauge is almost universally employed in this country. the abbreviations for this gauge are b.&s. or a.w.g. table iii copper wire table giving weights, lengths, and resistances of wire @ ° f., of matthiessen's standard conductivity. +-------+----------+----------+-----------------------+--------------------+-----------------------+ | | | | resistance | length | weight | | a.w.g.| diameter | area +-----------------------+--------------------+-----------------------+ | b.&s. | mils | circular | ohms per | ohms per | feet per | feet per| pounds per |pounds per| | | | mils | pound | foot | pound | ohm | foot | ohm | +-------+----------+----------+-----------+-----------+----------+---------+------------+----------+ | | . | , . | . | . | . | , . | . | , . | | | . | , . | . | . | . | , . | . | , . | | | . | , . | . | . | . | , . | . | , . | | | . | , . | . | . | . | , . | . | , . | +-------+----------+----------+-----------+-----------+----------+---------+------------+----------+ | | . | , . | . | . | . | , . | . | , . | | | . | , . | . | . | . | , . | . | , . | | | . | , . | . | . | . | , . | . | . | | | . | , . | . | . | . | , . | . | . | | | . | , . | . | . | . | , . | . | . | | | . | , . | . | . | . | , . | . | . | | | . | , . | . | . | . | , . | . | . | | | . | , . | . | . | . | , . | . | . | | | . | , . | . | . | . | , . | . | . | | | . | , . | . | . | . | , . | . | . | +-------+----------+----------+-----------+-----------+----------+---------+------------+----------+ | | . | , . | . | . | . | . | . | . | | | . | , . | . | . | . | . | . | . | | | . | , . | . | . | . | . | . | . | | | . | , . | . | . | . | . | . | . | | | . | , . | . | . | . | . | . | . | | | . | , . | . | . | . | . | . | . | | | . | , . | . | . | . | . | . | . | | | . | , . | . | . | . | . | . | . | | | . | , . | . | . | . | . | . | . | | | . | , . | . | . | . | . | . | . | +-------+----------+----------+-----------+-----------+----------+---------+------------+----------+ | | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | , . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | , . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | , . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | , . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | , . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | , . | . | . | . | +-------+----------+----------+-----------+-----------+----------+---------+------------+----------+ | | . | . | . | . | , . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | , . | . | . | . | | | . | . | , . | . | , . | . | . | . | | | . | . | , . | . | , . | . | . | . | | | . | . | , . | . | , . | . | . | . | | | . | . | , . | . | , . | . | . | . | | | . | . | , . | . | , . | . | . | . | | | . | . | , . | . | , . | . | . | . | | | . | . | , . | . | , . | . | . | . | | | . | . | , . | . | , . | . | . | . | +-------+----------+----------+-----------+-----------+----------+---------+------------+----------+ [illustration: south office of home telephone company, san francisco] in the brown and sharpe gauge the sizes, beginning with the largest, are numbered , , , , , , and so on up to . sizes larger than about no. b.&s. gauge are seldom used as magnet wire in telephony, but for the purpose of making the list complete, table iii is given, including all of the sizes of the b.&s. gauge. in table iii there is given for each gauge number the diameter of the wire in mils (thousandths of an inch); the cross-sectional area in circular mils (a unit area equal to that of a circle having a diameter of one one-thousandth of an inch); the resistance of the wire in various units of length and weight; the length of the wire in terms of resistance and of weight; and the weight of the wire in terms of its length and resistance. it is to be understood that in table iii the wire referred to is bare wire and is of pure copper. it is not commercially practicable to use absolutely pure copper, and the ordinary magnet wire has a conductivity equal to about per cent of that of pure copper. the figures given in this table are sufficiently accurate for all ordinary practical purposes. _silk and cotton insulation_. the insulating material usually employed for covering magnet wire is of silk or cotton. of these, silk is by far the better material for all ordinary purposes, since it has a much higher insulating property than cotton, and is very much thinner. cotton, however, is largely employed, particularly in the larger sizes of magnet wire. both of these materials possess the disadvantage of being hygroscopic, that is, of readily absorbing moisture. this disadvantage is overcome in many cases by saturating the coil after it is wound in some melted insulating compound, such as wax or varnish or asphaltum, which will solidify on cooling. where the coils are to be so saturated the best practice is to place them in a vacuum chamber and exhaust the air, after which the hot insulating compound is admitted and is thus drawn into the innermost recesses of the winding space. silk-insulated wire, as regularly produced, has either one or two layers of silk. this is referred to commercially as single silk wire or as double silk wire. the single silk has a single layer of silk fibers wrapped about it, while the double silk has a double layer, the two layers being put on in reverse direction. the same holds true of cotton insulated wire. frequently, also, there is a combination of the two, consisting of a single or a double wrapping of silk next to the wire with an outer wrapping of cotton. where this is done the cotton serves principally as a mechanical protection for the silk, the principal insulating properties residing in the silk. _enamel_. a later development in the insulation of magnet wire has resulted in the so-called enamel wire. in this, instead of coating the wire with some fibrous material such as silk or cotton, the wire is heated and run through a bath of fluid insulating material or liquid enamel, which adheres to the wire in a very thin coating. the wire is then run through baking ovens, so that the enamel is baked on. this process is repeated several times so that a number of these thin layers of the enamel are laid on and baked in succession. the characteristics sought in good enamel insulation for magnet wire may be thus briefly set forth: it is desirable for the insulation to possess the highest insulating qualities; to have a glossy, flawless surface; to be hard without being brittle; to adhere tenaciously and stand all reasonable handling without cracking or flaking; to have a coefficient of elasticity greater than the wire itself; to withstand high temperatures; to be moisture-proof and inert to corrosive agencies; and not to "dry out" or become brittle over a long period of time. _space utilization_. the utilization of the winding space in an electromagnet is an important factor in design, since obviously the copper or other conductor is the only part of the winding that is effective in setting up magnetizing force. the space occupied by the insulation is, in this sense, waste space. an ideally perfect winding may be conceived as one in which the space is all occupied by wire; and this would necessarily involve the conception of wire of square cross-section and insulation of infinite thinness. in such a winding there would be no waste of space and a maximum amount of metal employed as a conductor. of course, such a condition is not possible to attain and in practice some insulating material must be introduced between the layers of wire and between the adjacent convolutions of wire. the ratio of the space occupied by the conductor to the total space occupied by the winding, that is, by the conductor and the insulation, is called the _coefficient of space utilization of the coil_. for the ideal coil just conceived the coefficient of space utilization would be . ordinarily the coefficient of space utilization is greater for coarse wire than for fine wire, since obviously the ratio of the diameter of the wire to the thickness of the insulation increases as the size of the wire grows larger. the chief advantage of enamel insulation for magnet wire is its thinness, and the high coefficient of space utilization which may be secured by its use. in good enamel wire the insulation will average about one-quarter the thickness of the standard single silk insulation, and the dielectric strength is equal or greater. where economy of winding space is desirable the advantages of this may readily be seen. for instance, in a given coil wound with no. single silk wire about one-half of the winding space is taken up with the insulation, whereas when the same coil is wound with no. enameled wire only about one-fifth of the winding space is taken up by the insulation. thus the coefficient of space utilization is increased from . to . . the practical result of this is that, in the case of any given winding space where no. wire is used, about per cent more turns can be put on with enameled wire than with single silk insulation, and of course this ratio greatly increases when the comparison is made with double silk insulation or with cotton insulation. again, where it is desired to reduce the winding space and keep the same number of turns, an equal number of turns may be had with a corresponding reduction of winding space where enameled wire is used in place of silk or cotton. in the matter of heat-resisting properties the enameled wire possesses a great advantage over silk and cotton. cotton or silk insulation will char at about ° fahrenheit, while good enameled wire will stand ° to ° fahrenheit without deterioration of the insulation. it is in the matter of liability to injury in rough or careless handling, or in winding coils having irregular shapes, that enamel wire is decidedly inferior to silk or cotton-covered wire. it is likely to be damaged if it is allowed to strike against the sharp corners of the magnet spool during winding, or run over the edge of a hard surface while it is being fed on to the spool. coils having other than round cores, or having sharp corners on their spool heads, should not ordinarily be wound with enamel wire. the dielectric strength of enamel insulation is much greater than that of either silk or cotton insulation of equal thickness. this is a distinct advantage and frequently a combination of the two kinds of insulation results in a superior wire. if wire insulated with enamel is given a single wrapping of silk or of cotton, the insulating and dielectric properties of the enamel is secured, while the presence of the silk and cotton affords not only an additional safeguard against bare spots in the enamel but also a certain degree of mechanical protection to the enamel. winding methods. in winding a coil, the spool, after being properly prepared, is placed upon a spindle which may be made to revolve rapidly. ordinarily the wire is guided on by hand; sometimes, however, machinery is used, the wire being run over a tool which moves to and fro along the length of the spool, just fast enough to lay the wire on at the proper rate. the movement of this tool is much the same as that of the tool in a screw cutting lathe. unless high voltages are to be encountered, it is ordinarily not necessary to separate the layers of wire with paper, in the case of silk-or cotton-insulated magnet wire; although where especially high insulation resistance is needed this is often done. it is necessary to separate the successive layers of a magnet that is wound with enamel wire, by sheets of paper or thin oiled cloth. [illustration: fig. . electromagnet with bare wire] in fig. is shown a method, that has been used with some success, of winding magnets with bare wire. in this the various adjacent turns are separated from each other by a fine thread of silk or cotton wound on beside the wire. each layer of wire and thread as it is placed on the core is completely insulated from the subsequent layer by a layer of paper. this is essentially a machine-wound coil, and machines for winding it have been so perfected that several coils are wound simultaneously, the paper being fed in automatically at the end of each layer. another method of winding the bare wire omits the silk thread and depends on the permanent positioning of the wire as it is placed on the coil, due to the slight sinking into the layer of paper on which it is wound. in this case the feed of the wire at each turn of the spool is slightly greater than the diameter of the wire, so that a small distance will be left between each pair of adjacent turns. upon the completion of the winding of a coil, regardless of what method is used, it is customary to place a layer of bookbinders' cloth over the coil so as to afford a certain mechanical protection for the insulated wire. _winding terminals_. the matter of bringing out the terminal ends of the winding is one that has received a great deal of attention in the construction of electromagnets and coils for various purposes. where the winding is of fine wire, it is always well to reinforce its ends by a short piece of larger wire. where this is done the larger wire is given several turns around the body of the coil, so that the finer wire with which it connects may be relieved of all strain which may be exerted upon it from the protruding ends of the wire. great care is necessary in the bringing out of the inner terminal--_i.e._, the terminal which connects with the inner layer--that the terminal wire shall not come in contact with any of the subsequent layers that are wound on. [illustration fig. . electromagnet with terminals] where economy of space is necessary, a convenient method of terminating the winding of the coil consists in fastening rigid terminals to the spool head. this, in the case of a fiber spool head, may be done by driving heavy metal terminals into the fiber. the connections of the two wires leading from the winding are then made with these heavy rigid terminals by means of solder. a coil having such terminals is shown in its finished condition in fig. . _winding data_. the two things principally affecting the manufacture of electromagnets for telephone purposes are _the number of turns in a winding_ and _the resistance of the wound wire_. the latter governs the amount of current which may flow through the coil with a given difference of potential at its end, while the former control the amount of magnetism produced in the core by the current flowing. while a coil is being wound, it is a simple matter to count the turns by any simple form of revolution counter. when the coil has been completed it is a simple matter to measure its resistance. but it is not so simple to determine in advance how many turns of a given size wire may be placed on a given spool, and still less simple to know what the resistance of the wire on that spool will be when the desired turns shall have been wound. table iv winding data for insulated wires--silk and cotton covering a.w.g. b & s | --------------------------------------------------------------------- diameter | mils | . . . . . . --------------------------------------------------------------------- area | circular mils | . . . . . . --------------------------------------------------------------------- diameter over | insulation | single | cotton | . . . . . . | double | cotton | . . . . . . | single silk | . . . , . . | double silk | . . . . . . --------------------------------------------------------------------- turns per | linear inch | single | cotton | . . . . . . | double | . . . . . . cotton | | single silk | . . . . . . | double silk | . . . . . . --------------------------------------------------------------------- turns per | square inch | single | cotton | . . . . . . | double | cotton | . . . . . . | single silk | . . . . . . | double silk | . . . . . . --------------------------------------------------------------------- ohms per | cubic inch | single | cotton | . . . . . . | double | cotton | . . . . . . | single silk | . . . . . . --------------------------------------------------------------------- a.w.g. b & s | --------------------------------------------------------------------- diameter | mils | . . . . . . --------------------------------------------------------------------- area | circular mils | . . . . . . --------------------------------------------------------------------- diameter over | insulation | single | cotton | . . . . . . | double | cotton | . . . . . . | single silk | . . . . . . | double silk | . . . . . . --------------------------------------------------------------------- turns per | linear inch | single | cotton | . . . . . . | double | cotton | . . . . . . | single silk | . . . . . . | double silk | . . . . . . --------------------------------------------------------------------- turns per | square inch | single | cotton | . . . . . . | double | cotton | . . . . . . | single silk | . . . . . . | double silk | . . . . . . --------------------------------------------------------------------- ohms per | cubic inch | single | cotton | . . . . . . | double | cotton | . . . . . . | single silk | . . . . . . --------------------------------------------------------------------- a.w.g. b & s | ---------------------------------------------------------------------- diameter | mils | . . . . . . ---------------------------------------------------------------------- area | circular mils | . . . . . . ---------------------------------------------------------------------- diameter over | insulation | single | cotton | . . . . . . | double | cotton | . . . . . . | single silk | . . . . . . | double silk | . . . . . . ---------------------------------------------------------------------- turns per | linear inch | single | cotton | . . . . . . | double | cotton | . . . . . . | single silk | . . . . . . | double silk | . . . . . . ---------------------------------------------------------------------- turns per | square inch | single | . . . . . . cotton | | double | cotton | . . . . . . | single silk | . . . . . . | double silk | . . . . . . --------------------------------------------------------------------- ohms per | cubic inch | single | cotton | . . . . . . | double | cotton | . . . . . . | single silk | . . . . . . --------------------------------------------------------------------- a.w.g. b & s | -------------------------------------------- diameter | mils | . . . -------------------------------------------- area | circular mils | . . . -------------------------------------------- diameter over | insulation | single | cotton | . . . | double | cotton | . . . | single silk | . . . | double silk | . . . -------------------------------------------- turns per | linear inch | single | cotton | . . . | double | cotton | . . . | single silk | . . . | double silk | . . . -------------------------------------------- turns per | square inch | single | cotton | . . . | double | . . . cotton | | single silk | . . . | double silk | . . . -------------------------------------------- ohms per | cubic inch | single | cotton | . . . | double | . . . cotton | | single silk | . . . ------------------------------------------- if the length and the depth of the winding space of the coil as well as the diameter of the core are known, it is not difficult to determine how much bare copper wire of a given size may be wound on it, but it is more difficult to know these facts concerning copper wire which has been covered with cotton or silk. yet something may be done, and tables have been prepared for standard wire sizes with definite thicknesses of silk and cotton insulation. as a result of facts collected from a large number of actually wound coils, the number of turns per linear inch and per square inch of b.&s. gauge wires from no. to no. have been tabulated, and these, supplemented by a tabulation of the number of ohms per cubic inch of winding space for wires of three different kinds of insulation, are given in table iv. bearing in mind that the calculations of table iv are all based upon the "diameter over insulation," which it states at the outset for each of four different kinds of covering, it is evident what is meant by "turns per linear inch." the columns referring to "turns per square inch" mean the number of turns, the ends of which would be exposed in one square inch if the wound coil were cut in a plane passing through the axis of the core. knowing the distance between the head, and the depth to which the coil is to be wound, it is easy to select a size of wire which will give the required number of turns in the provided space. it is to be noted that the depth of winding space is one-half of the difference between the core diameter and the complete diameter of the wound coil. the resistance of the entire volume of wound wire may be determined in advance by knowing the total cubic contents of the winding space and multiplying this by the ohms per cubic inch of the selected wire; that is, one must multiply in inches the distance between the heads of the spool by the difference between the squares of the diameters of the core and the winding space, and this in turn by . . this result, times the ohms per cubic inch, as given in the table, gives the resistance of the winding. there is a considerable variation in the method of applying silk insulation to the finer wires, and it is in the finer sizes that the errors, if any, pile up most rapidly. yet the table throughout is based on data taken from many samples of actual coil winding by the present process of winding small coils. it should be said further that the table does not take into account the placing of any layers of paper between the successive layers of the wires. this table has been compared with many examples and has been used in calculating windings in advance, and is found to be as close an approximation as is afforded by any of the formulas on the subject, and with the further advantage that it is not so cumbersome to apply. _winding calculations._ in experimental work, involving the winding of coils, it is frequently necessary to try one winding to determine its effect in a given circuit arrangement, and from the knowledge so gained to substitute another just fitted to the conditions. it is in such a substitution that the table is of most value. assume a case in which are required a spool and core of a given size with a winding of, say no. single silk-covered wire, of a resistance of ohms. assume also that the circuit regulations required that this spool should be rewound so as to have a resistance of, say , ohms. what size single silk-covered wire shall be used? manifestly, the winding space remains the same, or nearly so. the resistance is to be increased from to , ohms, or twenty times its first value. therefore, the wire to be used must show in the table twenty times as many ohms per cubic inch as are shown in no. , the known first size. this amount would be twenty times . , which is . , but there is no size giving this exact resistance. no. , however, is very nearly of that resistance and if wound to exactly the same depth would give about ohms. a few turns more would provide the additional thirty ohms. similarly, in a coil known to possess a certain number of turns, the table will give the size to be selected for rewinding to a greater or smaller number of turns. in this case, as in the case of substituting a winding of different resistance, it is unnecessary to measure and calculate upon the dimensions of the spool and core. assume a spool wound with no. double silk-covered wire, which requires to be wound with a size to double the number of turns. the exact size to do this would have . turns per square inch and would be between no. and no. . a choice of these two wires may be made, using an increased winding depth with the smaller wire and a shallower winding depth for the larger wire. impedance coils. in telephony electromagnets frequently serve, as already stated, to perform other functions than the producing of motion by attracting or releasing their armatures. they are required to act as impedance coils to present a barrier to the passage of alternating or other rapidly fluctuating currents, and at the same time to allow the comparatively free passage of steady currents. where it is desired that an electromagnet coil shall possess high impedance, it is usual to employ a laminated instead of a solid core. this is done by building up a core of suitable size by laying together thin sheets of soft iron, or by forming a bundle of soft iron wires. the use of laminated cores is for the purpose of preventing eddy currents, which, if allowed to flow, would not only be wasteful of energy but would also tend to defeat the desired high impedance. sometimes in iron-clad impedance coils, the iron shell is slotted longitudinally to break up the flow of eddy currents in the shell. frequently electromagnetic coils have only the function of offering impedance, where no requirements exist for converting any part of the electric energy into mechanical work. where this is the case, such coils are termed _impedance_, or _retardation_, or _choke coils_, since they are employed to impede or to retard or to choke back the flow of rapidly varying current. the distinction, therefore, between an impedance coil and the coil of an ordinary electromagnet is one of function, since structurally they may be the same, and the same principles of design and construction apply largely to each. _number of turns_. it should be remembered that an impedance coil obstructs the passage of fluctuating current, not so much by ohmic resistance as by offering an opposing or counter-electromotive force. other things being equal, the counter-electromotive force of self-induction increases directly as the number of turns on a coil and directly as the number of lines of force threading the coil, and this latter factor depends also on the reluctance of the magnetic circuit. therefore, to secure high impedance we need many turns or low reluctance, or both. often, owing to requirements for direct-current carrying capacity and limitations of space, a very large number of turns is not permissible, in which case sufficiently high impedance to such rapid fluctuations as those of voice currents may be had by employing a magnetic circuit of very low reluctance, usually a completely closed circuit. _kind of iron. _an important factor in the design of impedance coils is the grade of iron used in the magnetic circuit. obviously, it should be of the highest permeability and, furthermore, there should be ample cross-section of core to prevent even an approach to saturation. the iron should, if possible, be worked at that density of magnetization at which it has the highest permeability in order to obtain the maximum impedance effects. _types._ open-circuit:--where very feeble currents are being dealt with, and particularly where there is no flow of direct current, an open magnetic circuit is much used. an impedance coil having an open magnetic circuit is shown in section in fig. , fig. showing its external appearance and illustrating particularly the method of bringing out the terminals of the winding. [illustration: fig. . section of open-circuit impedance coil] [illustration: fig. . open-circuit impedance coil] [illustration: fig. . closed-circuit impedance coil] closed-circuit:--a type of retardation coil which is largely used in systems of simultaneous telegraphy and telephony, known as _composite systems_, is shown in fig. . in the construction of this coil the core is made of a bundle of fine iron wires first bent into u-shape, and then after the coils are in place, the free ends of the core are brought together to form a closed magnetic circuit. the coils have a large number of turns of rather coarse wire. the conditions surrounding the use of this coil are those which require very high impedance and rather large current-carrying capacity, and fortunately the added requirement, that it shall be placed in a very small space, does not exist. toroidal:--another type of retardation coil, called the toroidal type due to the fact that its core is a torus formed by winding a continuous length of fine iron wire, is shown in diagram in fig. . the two windings of this coil may be connected in series to form in effect a single winding, or it may be used as a "split-winding" coil, the two windings being in series but having some other element, such as a battery, connected between them in the circuit. evidently such a coil, however connected, is well adapted for high impedance, on account of the low reluctance of its core. [illustration: fig. . symbol of toroidal impedance coil] this coil is usually mounted on a base-board, the coil being enclosed in a protecting iron case, as shown in fig. . the terminal wires of both windings of each coil are brought out to terminal punchings on one end of the base-board to facilitate the making of the necessary circuit connections. [illustration: fig. . toroidal impedance coil] the usual diagrammatic symbol for an impedance coil is shown in fig. . this is the same as for an ordinary bar magnet, except that the parallel lines through the core may be taken as indicating that the core is laminated, thus conveying the idea of high impedance. the symbol of fig. is a good one for the toroidal type of impedance coil. [illustration: fig. . symbol of impedance coil] induction coil. an induction coil consists of two or more windings of wire interlinked by a common magnetic circuit. in an induction coil having two windings, any change in the strength of the current flowing in one of the windings, called the _primary_, will cause corresponding changes in the magnetic flux threading the magnetic circuit, and, therefore, changes in flux through the other winding, called the _secondary_. this, by the laws of electromagnetic induction, will produce corresponding electromotive forces in the secondary winding and, therefore, corresponding currents in that winding if its circuit be closed. _current and voltage ratios._ in a well-designed induction coil the energy in the secondary, _i.e._, the induced current, is for all practical purposes equal to that of the primary current, yet the values of the voltage and the amperage of the induced current may vary widely from the values of the voltage and the amperage of the primary current. with simple periodic currents, such as the commercial alternating lighting currents, the ratio between the voltage in the primary and that in the secondary will be equal to the ratio of the number of turns in the primary to the number of turns in the secondary. since the energy in the two circuits will be practically the same, it follows _that the ratio between the current in the primary and that in the secondary will be equal to the ratio of the number of turns in the secondary to the number of turns in the primary_. in telephony, where the currents are not simple periodic currents, and where the variations in current strength take place at different rates, such a law as that just stated does not hold for all cases; but it may be stated in general that _the induced currents will be of higher voltage and smaller current strength than those of the primary in all coils where the secondary winding has a greater number of turns than the primary_, and _vice versâ_. _functions._ the function of the induction coil in telephony is, therefore, mainly one of transformation, that is, either of stepping up the voltage of a current, or in other cases stepping it down. the induction coil, however, does serve another purpose in cases where no change in voltage and current strength is desired, that is, it serves as a means for electrically separating two circuits so far as any conductive relation exists, and yet of allowing the free transmission by induction from one of these circuits to the other. this is a function that in telephony is scarcely of less importance than the purely transforming function. _design._ induction coils, as employed in telephony, may be divided into two general types: first, those having an open magnetic circuit; and, second, those having a closed magnetic circuit. in the design of either type it is important that the core should be thoroughly laminated, and this is done usually by forming it of a bundle of soft swedish or norway iron wire about . of an inch in diameter. the diameter and the length of the coil, and the relation between the number of turns in the primary and in the secondary, and the mechanical construction of the coil, are all matters which are subject to very wide variation in practice. while the proper relationship of these factors is of great importance, yet they may not be readily determined except by actual experiment with various coils, owing to the extreme complexity of the action which takes place in them and to the difficulty of obtaining fundamental data as to the existing facts. it may be stated, therefore, that the design of induction coils is nearly always carried out by "cut-and-try" methods, bringing to bear, of course, such scientific and practical knowledge as the experimenter may possess. [illustration: fig. . induction coil] [illustration: fig. . section of induction coil] _use and advantage._ the use and advantages of the induction coil in so-called local-battery telephone sets have already been explained in previous chapters. such induction coils are nearly always of the open magnetic circuit type, consisting of a long, straight core comprised of a bundle of small annealed iron wires, on which is wound a primary of comparatively coarse wire and having a small number of turns, and over which is wound a secondary of comparatively fine wire and having a very much larger number of turns. a view of such a coil mounted on a base is shown in fig. , and a sectional view of a similar coil is shown in fig. . the method of bringing out the winding terminals is clearly indicated in this figure, the terminal wires _ _ and _ _ being those of the primary winding and _ _ and _ _ those of the secondary winding. it is customary to bring out these wires and attach them by solder to suitable terminal clips. in the case of the coil shown in fig. these clips are mounted on the wooden heads of the coil, while in the design shown in fig. they are mounted on the base, as is clearly indicated. repeating coil. the so-called repeating coil used in telephony is really nothing but an induction coil. it is used in a variety of ways and usually has for its purpose the inductive association of two circuits that are conductively separated. usually the repeating coil has a one to one ratio of turns, that is, there are the same number of turns in the primary as in the secondary. however, this is not always the case, since sometimes they are made to have an unequal number of turns, in which case they are called _step-up _or _step-down_ repeating coils, according to whether the primary has a smaller or a greater number of turns than the secondary. repeating coils are almost universally of the closed magnetic circuit type. _ringing and talking considerations._ since repeating coils often serve to connect two telephones, it follows that it is sometimes necessary to ring through them as well as talk through them. by this is meant that it is necessary that the coil shall be so designed as to be capable of transforming the heavy ringing currents as well as the very much smaller telephone or voice currents. ringing currents ordinarily have a frequency ranging from about to cycles per second, while voice currents have frequencies ranging from a few hundred up to perhaps ten thousand per second. ordinarily, therefore, the best form of repeating coil for transforming voice currents is not the best for transforming the heavy ringing currents and _vice versâ_. if the comparatively heavy ringing currents alone were to be considered, the repeating coil might well be of heavy construction with a large amount of iron in its magnetic circuit. on the other hand, for carrying voice currents alone it is usually made with a small amount of iron and with small windings, in order to prevent waste of energy in the core, and to give a high degree of responsiveness with the least amount of distortion of wave form, so that the voice currents will retain as far as possible their original characteristics. when, therefore, a coil is required to carry both ringing and talking currents, a compromise must be effected. _types._ the form of repeating coil largely used for both ringing and talking through is shown in fig. . this coil comprises a soft iron core made up of a bundle of wires about . inch in diameter, the ends of which are left of sufficient length to be bent back around the windings after they are in place and thus form a completely closed magnetic path for the core. the windings of this particular coil are four in number, and contain about , turns each, and have a resistance of about ohms. in this coil, when connected for local battery work, the windings are connected in pairs in series, thus forming effectively two windings having about ohms resistance each. the whole coil is enclosed in a protecting case of iron. the terminals are brought out to suitable clips on the wooden base, as shown. an external perspective view of this coil is shown in fig. . by bringing out each terminal of each winding, eight in all, as shown in this figure, great latitude of connection is provided for, since the windings may be connected in circuit in any desirable way, either by connecting them together in pairs to form virtually a primary and a secondary, or, as is frequently the case, to split the primary and the secondary, connecting a battery between each pair of windings. [illustration: fig. . repeating coil] [illustration: fig. . repeating coil] fig. illustrates in section a commercial type of coil designed for talking through only. this coil is provided with four windings of , turns each, and when used for local battery work the coils are connected in pairs in series, thus giving a resistance of about ohms in each half of the repeating coil. the core of this coil consists of a bundle of soft iron wires, and the shell which forms the return path for the magnetic lines is of very soft sheet iron. this shell is drawn into cup shape and its open end is closed, after the coil is inserted, by the insertion of a soft iron head, as indicated. as in the case of the coil shown in figs. and , eight terminals are brought out on this coil, thus providing the necessary flexibility of connection. [illustration: fig. . repeating coil] [illustration: fig. . diagram of toroidal repeating coil] [illustration: fig. . toroidal repeating coil] still another type of repeating coil is illustrated in diagram in fig. , and in view in fig. . this coil, like the impedance coil shown in fig. , comprises a core made up of a bundle of soft iron wires wound into the form of a ring. it is usually provided with two primary windings placed opposite each other upon the core, and with two secondary windings, one over each primary. in practice these two primary windings are connected in one circuit and the two secondaries in another. this is the standard repeating coil now used by the bell companies in their common-battery cord circuits. [illustration: the operating room of the exchange at webb city, missouri] [illustration: fig. . symbol of induction coil] conventional symbols. the ordinary symbol for the induction coil used in local battery work is shown in fig. . this consists merely of a pair of parallel zig-zag lines. the primary winding is usually indicated by a heavy line having a fewer number of zig-zags, and the secondary by a finer line having a greater number of zig-zags. in this way the fact that the primary is of large wire and of comparatively few turns is indicated. this diagrammatic symbol may be modified to suit almost any conditions, and where a tertiary as well as a secondary winding is provided it may be shown by merely adding another zig-zag line. [illustration: fig. . repeating-coil symbols] the repeating coil is indicated symbolically in the two diagrams of fig. . where there is no necessity for indicating the internal connections of the coil, the symbol shown in the left of this figure is usually employed. where, however, the coil consists of four windings rather than two and the method of connecting them is to be indicated, the symbol at the right hand is employed. in fig. another way of indicating a four-winding repeating coil or induction coil is shown. sometimes such windings may be combined by connection to form merely a primary and a secondary winding, and in other cases the four windings all act separately, in which case one may be considered the primary and the others, respectively, the secondary, tertiary, and quaternary. [illustration: fig. . symbol of four-winding repeating coil] where the toroidal type of repeating coil is employed, the diagram of fig. , already referred to, is a good symbolic representation. chapter xi non-inductive resistance devices it is often desired to introduce simple ohmic resistance into telephone circuits, in order to limit the current flow, or to create specific differences of potential at given points in the circuit. temperature coefficient. the design or selection of resistance devices for various purposes frequently involves the consideration of the effect of temperature on the resistance of the conductor employed. the resistance of conductors is subject to change by changes in temperature. while nearly all metals show an increase, carbon shows a decrease in its resistance when heated. the temperature coefficient of a conductor is a factor by which the resistance of the conductor at a given temperature must be multiplied in order to determine the change in resistance of that conductor brought about by a rise in temperature of one degree. table v temperature coefficients +---------------------------+-----------------------------+ | pure metals | temperature coefficients | +---------------------------+--------------+--------------+ | | centigrade | fahrenheit | +---------------------------+--------------+--------------+ | silver (annealed) | . | . | | copper (annealed) | . | . | | gold ( . %) | . | . | | aluminum ( %) | . | . | | zinc | . | . | | platinum (annealed) | . | . | | iron | . | . | | nickel | . | . | | tin | . | . | | lead | . | . | | antimony | . | . | | mercury | . | . | | bismuth | . | . | +---------------------------+--------------+--------------+ _positive and negative coefficients._ those conductors, in which a rise in temperature produces an increase in resistance, are said to have positive temperature coefficients, while those in which a rise in temperature produces a lowering of resistance are said to have negative temperature coefficients. the temperature coefficients of pure metals are always positive and for some of the more familiar metals, have values, according to foster, as in table v. iron, it will be noticed, has the highest temperature coefficient of all. carbon, on the other hand, has a large negative coefficient, as proved by the fact that the filament of an ordinary incandescent lamp has nearly twice the resistance when cold as when heated to full candle-power. certain alloys have been produced which have very low temperature coefficients, and these are of value in producing resistance units which have practically the same resistance for all ordinary temperatures. some of these alloys also have very high resistance as compared with copper and are of value in enabling one to obtain a high resistance in small space. one of the most valuable resistance wires is of an alloy known as _german silver_. the so-called eighteen per cent alloy has approximately . times the resistance of copper and a temperature coefficient of . per degree fahrenheit. the thirty per cent alloy has approximately times the resistance of copper and a temperature coefficient of . per degree fahrenheit. for facilitating the design of resistance coils of german silver wire, tables vi and vii are given, containing information as to length, resistance, and weight of the eighteen per cent and the thirty per cent alloys, respectively, for all sizes of wire smaller than no. b. & s. gauge. special resistance alloys may be obtained having temperature coefficients as low as . per degree fahrenheit. other alloys of nickel and steel are adapted for use where the wire must carry heavy currents and be raised to comparatively high temperatures thereby; for such use non-corrosive properties are specially to be desired. such wire may be obtained having a resistance of about fifty times that of copper. table vi per cent german silver wire +---------+----------+-----------------+----------------+---------------+ | no. | | | | | | b. & s. | diameter | weight | length | resistance | | gauge | inches | pounds per foot | feet per pound | ohms per foot | +---------+----------+-----------------+----------------+---------------+ | | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | +---------+----------+-----------------+----------------+---------------+ inductive neutrality. where the resistance unit is required to be strictly non-inductive, and is to be in the form of a coil, special designs must be employed to give the desired inductive neutrality. provisions against heating. in cases where a considerable amount of heat is to be generated in the resistance, due to the necessity of carrying large currents, special precautions must be taken as to the heat-resisting properties of the structure, and also as to the provision of sufficient radiating surface or its equivalent to provide for the dissipation of the heat generated. types. _mica card unit._ one of the most common resistance coils used in practice is shown in fig. . this comprises a coil of fine, bare german silver wire wound on a card of mica, the windings being so spaced that the loops are not in contact with each other. the winding is protected by two cards of mica and the whole is bound in place by metal strips, to which the ends of the winding are attached. binding posts are provided on the extended portions of the terminals to assist in mounting the resistance on a supporting frame, and the posts terminate in soldering terminals by which the resistance is connected into the circuit. table vii per cent german silver wire +---------+----------+-----------------+----------------+---------------+ | no. | | | | | | b. & s. | diameter | weight | length | resistance | | gauge | inches | pounds per foot | feet per pound | ohms per foot | +---------+----------+-----------------+----------------+---------------+ | | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | | | . | . | . | . | +---------+----------+-----------------+----------------+---------------+ _differentially-wound unit._ another type of resistance coil is that in which the winding is placed upon an insulating core of heat-resisting material and wound so as to overcome inductive effects. in order to accomplish this, the wire to be bound on the core is doubled back on itself at its middle portion to form two strands, and these are wound simultaneously on the core, thus forming two spirals of equal number of turns. the current in traversing the entire coil must flow through one spiral in one direction with relation to the core, and in the opposite direction in the other spiral, thereby nullifying the inductive effects of one spiral by those of the other. this is called a _non-inductive winding_ and is in reality an example of differential winding. _lamp filament._ an excellent type of non-inductive resistance is the ordinary carbon-filament incandescent lamp. this is used largely in the circuits of batteries, generators, and other sources of supply to prevent overload in case of short circuits on the line. these are cheap, durable, have large current-carrying capacities, and are not likely to set things afire when overheated. an additional advantage incident to their use for this purpose is that an overload on a circuit in which they are placed is visibly indicated by the glowing of the lamp. [illustration: fig. . mica card resistance] [illustration: fig. . iron-wire ballast] obviously, the carbon-filament incandescent lamp, when used as a resistance, has, on account of the negative temperature coefficient of carbon, the property of presenting the highest resistance to the circuit when carrying no current, and of presenting a lower and lower resistance as the current and consequent heating increases. for some conditions of practice this is not to be desired, and the opposite characteristic of presenting low resistance to small currents and comparatively high resistance to large currents would best meet the conditions of practice. _iron-wire ballast._ claude d. enochs took advantage of the very high positive temperature coefficient of iron to produce a resistance device having these characteristics. his arrangement possesses the compactness of the carbon-filament lamp and is shown in fig. . the resistance element proper is an iron wire, wound on a central stem of glass, and this is included in an exhausted bulb so as to avoid oxidation. such a resistance is comparatively low when cold, but when traversed by currents sufficient to heat it considerably will offer a very large increase of resistance to oppose the further increase of current. in a sense, it is a self-adjusting resistance, tending towards the equalization of the flow of current in the circuit in which it is placed. chapter xii condensers charge. a conducting body insulated from all other bodies will receive and hold a certain amount of electricity (a charge), if subjected to an electrical potential. thus, referring to fig. , if a metal plate, insulated from other bodies, be connected with, say, the positive pole of a battery, the negative pole of which is grounded, a current will flow into the plate until the plate is raised to the same potential as that of the battery pole to which it is connected. the amount of electricity that will flow into the plate will depend, other things being equal, on the potential of the source from which it is charged; in fact, it is proportional to the potential of the source from which it is charged. this amount of electricity is a measure of the capacity of the plate, just as the amount of water that a bath-tub will hold is a measure of the capacity of the bath-tub. capacity. instead of measuring the amount of electricity by the quart or pound, as in the case of material things, the unit of electrical quantity is the _coulomb_. the unit of capacity of an insulated conductor is the _farad_, and a given insulated conductor is said to have unit capacity, that is, the capacity of one farad, when it will receive a charge of one coulomb of electricity at a potential of one volt. referring to fig. , the potential of the negative terminal of the battery may be said to be zero, since it is connected to the earth. if the battery shown be supposed to have exactly one volt potential, then the plate would be said to have the capacity of one farad if one coulomb of electricity flowed from the battery to the plate before the plate was raised to the same potential as that of the positive pole, that is, to a potential of one volt above the potential of the earth; it being assumed that the plate was also at zero potential before the connection was made. another conception of this quantity may be had by remembering that a coulomb is such a quantity of current as will result from one ampere flowing one second. the capacity of a conductor depends, among other things, on its area. if the plate of fig. should be made twice as large in area, other things remaining the same, it would have twice the capacity. but there are other factors governing the capacity of a conductor. consider the diagram of fig. , which is supposed to represent two such plates as are shown in fig. , placed opposite each other and connected respectively with the positive and the negative poles of the battery. when the connection between the plates and the battery is made, the two plates become charged to a difference of potential equal to the electromotive force of the battery. in order to obtain these charges, assume that the plates were each at zero potential before the connection was made; then current flows from the battery into the plates until they each assume the potential of the corresponding battery terminal. if the two plates be brought closer together, it will be found that more current will now flow into each of them, although the difference of potential between the two plates must obviously remain the same, since each of them is still connected to the battery. [illustration: fig. . condenser plate] theory. due to the proximity of the plates, the positive electricity on plate _a_ is drawn by the negative charge on plate _b_ towards plate _b_, and likewise the negative electricity on plate _b_ is drawn to the side towards plate _a_ by the positive charge on that plate. these two charges so drawn towards each other will, so to speak, bind each other, and they are referred to as _bound charges_. the charge on the right-hand side of plate _a_ and on the left-hand side of plate _b_ will, however, be free charges, since there is nothing to attract them, and these are, therefore, neutralized by a further flow of electricity from the battery to the plate. [illustration: fig. . theory of condenser] obviously, the closer together the plates are the stronger will be the attractive influence of the two charges on each other. from this it follows that in the case of plate _a_, when the two plates are being moved closer together, more positive electricity will flow into plate _a_ to neutralize the increasing free negative charges on the right-hand side of the plate. as the plates are moved closer together still, a new distribution of charges will take place, resulting in more positive electricity flowing into plate _a_ and more negative electricity flowing into plate _b_. the closer proximity of the plates, therefore, increases the capacity of the plates for holding charges, due to the increased inductive action across the dielectric separating the plates. condenser defined. a condenser is a device consisting of two adjacent plates of conducting material, separated by an insulating material, called a _dielectric_. the purpose is to increase by the proximity of the plates, each to the other, the amount of electricity which each plate will receive and hold when subjected to a given potential. dielectric. we have already seen that the capacity of a condenser depends upon the area of its plates, and also upon their distance apart. there is still another factor on which the capacity of a condenser depends, _i.e._, on the character of the insulating medium separating its plates. the inductive action which takes place between a charged conductor and other conductors nearby it, as between plate _a_ and plate _b_ of fig. , is called _electrostatic induction_, and it plays an important part in telephony. it is found that the ability of a given charged conductor to induce charges on other neighboring conductors varies largely with the insulating medium or dielectric that separates them. this quality of a dielectric, by which it enables inductive action to take place between two separated conductors, is called _inductive capacity_. usually this quality of dielectrics is measured in terms of the same quality in dry air, this being taken as unity. when so expressed, it is termed _specific inductive capacity_. to be more accurate the specific inductive capacity of a dielectric is the ratio between the capacity of a condenser having that substance as a dielectric, to the capacity of the same condenser using dry air at zero degrees centigrade and at a pressure of . pounds per square inch as the dielectric. to illustrate, if two condensers having plates of equal size and equal distance apart are constructed, one using air as the dielectric and the other using hard crown glass as the dielectric, the one using glass will have a capacity of . times that of the one using air. from this we say that crown glass has a specific inductive capacity of . . various authorities differ rather widely as to the specific inductive capacity of many common substances. the values given in table viii have been chosen from the smithsonian physical tables. table viii specific inductive capacities +-----------------------+------------------------+ |dielectric | referred to air as | +-----------------------+------------------------+ |vacuum | . | |hydrogen | . | |carbonic acid | . | |dry paper | . to . | |paraffin | . to . | |ebonite | . to . | |sulphur | . to . | |shellac | . to . | |gutta-percha | . to . | |plate glass | . to . | |porcelain | . | |mica | . to . | |glass--light flint | . | |glass--hard crown | . | |selenium | . | +-----------------------+------------------------+ this data is interesting as showing the wide divergence in specific inductive capacities of various materials, and also showing the wide divergence in different observations of the same material. undoubtedly, this latter is due mainly to the fact that various materials differ largely in themselves, as in the case of paraffin, for instance, which exhibits widely different specific inductive capacities according to the difference in rapidity with which it is cooled in changing from a liquid to a solid state. we see then that the capacity of a condenser varies as the area of its plates, as the specific inductive capacity of the dielectric employed, and also inversely as the distance between the plates. obviously, therefore, in making a condenser of large capacity, it is important to have as large an area of the plate as possible; to have them as close together as possible; to have the dielectric a good insulating medium so that there will be practically no leakage between the plates; and to have the dielectric of as high a specific inductive capacity as economy and suitability of material in other respects will permit. dielectric materials. _mica_. of all dielectrics mica is the most suitable for condensers, since it has very high insulation resistance and also high specific inductive capacity, and furthermore may be obtained in very thin sheets. high-grade condensers, such as are used for measurements and standardization purposes, usually have mica for the dielectric. [illustration: fig. . rolled condenser] _dry paper. _the demands of telephonic practice are, however, such as to require condensers of very cheap construction with large capacity in a small space. for this purpose thin bond paper, saturated with paraffin, has been found to be the best dielectric. the conductors in condensers are almost always of tinfoil, this being an ideal material on account of its cheapness and its thinness. before telephony made such urgent demands for a cheap compact condenser, the customary way of making them was to lay up alternate sheets of dielectric material, either of oiled paper or mica and tinfoil, the sheets of tinfoil being cut somewhat smaller than the sheets of dielectric material in order that the proper insulation might be secured at the edges. after a sufficient number of such plates were built up the alternate sheets of tinfoil were connected together to form one composite plate of the condenser, while the other sheets were similarly connected together to form the other plate. obviously, in this way a very large area of plates could be secured with a minimum degree of separation. [illustration: fig. . rolled condenser] there has been developed for use in telephony, however, and its use has since extended into other arts requiring condensers, what is called the _rolled condenser_. this is formed by rolling together in a flat roll four sheets of thin bond paper, _ _, _ _, _ _, and _ _, and two somewhat narrower strips of tinfoil, _ _ and _ _, fig. . the strips of tinfoil and paper are fed on to the roll in continuous lengths and in such manner that two sheets of paper will lie between the two strips of tinfoil in all cases. thin sheet metal terminals _ _ and _ _ are rolled into the condenser as it is being wound, and as these project beyond the edges of the paper they form convenient terminals for the condenser after it is finished. after it is rolled, the roll is boiled in hot paraffin so as to thoroughly impregnate it and expel all moisture. it is then squeezed in a press and allowed to cool while under pressure. in this way the surplus paraffin is expelled and the plates are brought very close together. it then appears as in fig. . the condenser is now sealed in a metallic case, usually rectangular in form, and presents the appearance shown in fig. . [illustration: fig. . rolled condenser] a later method of condenser making which has not yet been thoroughly proven in practice, but which bids fair to produce good results, varies from the method just described in that a paper is used which in itself is coated with a very thin conducting material. this conducting material is of metallic nature and in reality forms a part of the paper. to form a condenser of this the sheets are merely rolled together and then boiled in paraffin and compressed as before. sizes. the condensers ordinarily used in telephone practice range in capacity from about / microfarad to microfarads. when larger capacities than microfarads are desired, they may be obtained by connecting several of the smaller size condensers in multiple. table ix gives the capacity, shape, and dimensions of a variety of condensers selected from those regularly on the market. table ix condenser data +------------+---------------+---------------------------------+ | | | dimensions in inches | | capacity | shape |----------+----------+-----------+ | | | height | width | thickness | +------------+---------------+----------+----------+-----------+ | m. f. | rectangular | - / | - / | / | | m. f. | " | - / | - / | / | | m. f. | " | - / | - / | / | | / m. f. | " | - / | - / | / | | m. f. | " | - / | - / | / | | / m. f. | " | - / | - / | / | | / m. f. | " | - / | - / | / | | m. f. | " | - / | | l | +------------+---------------+----------+----------+-----------+ conventional symbols. the conventional symbols usually employed to represent condensers in telephone diagrams are shown in fig. . these all convey the idea of the adjacent conducting plates separated by insulating material. [illustration: fig. . condenser symbols] functions. obviously, when placed in a circuit a condenser offers a complete barrier to the flow of direct current, since no conducting path exists between its terminals, the dielectric offering a very high insulation resistance. if, however, the condenser is connected across the terminals of a source of alternating current, this current flows first in one direction and then in the other, the electromotive force in the circuit increasing from zero to a maximum in one direction, and then decreasing back to zero and to a maximum in the other direction, and so on. with a condenser connected so as to be subjected to such alternating electromotive forces, as the electromotive force begins to rise the electromotive force at the condenser terminals will also rise and a current will, therefore, flow into the condenser. when the electromotive force reaches its maximum, the condenser will have received its full charge for that potential, and the current flow into it will cease. when the electromotive force begins to fall, the condenser can no longer retain its charge and a current will, therefore, flow out of it. apparently, therefore, there is a flow of current through the condenser the same as if it were a conductor. means for assorting currents. in conclusion, it is obvious that the telephone engineer has within his reach in the various coils--whether non-inductive or inductive, or whether having one or several windings--and in the condenser, a variety of tools by which he may achieve a great many useful ends in his circuit work. obviously, the condenser affords a means for transmitting voice currents or fluctuating currents, and for excluding steady currents. likewise the impedance coil affords a means for readily transmitting steady currents but practically excluding voice currents or fluctuating currents. by the use of these very simple devices it is possible to sift out the voice currents from a circuit containing both steady and fluctuating currents, or it is possible in the same manner to sift out the steady currents and to leave the voice currents alone to traverse the circuit. great use is made in the design of telephone circuits of the fact that the electromagnets, which accomplish the useful mechanical results in causing the movement of parts, possess the quality of impedance. thus, the magnets which operate various signaling relays at the central office are often used also as impedance coils in portions of the circuit through which it is desired to have only steady currents pass. if, on the other hand, it is necessary to place a relay magnet, having considerable impedance, directly in a talking circuit, the bad effects of this on the voice currents may be eliminated by shunting this coil with a condenser, or with a comparatively high non-inductive resistance. the voice currents will flow around the high impedance of the relay coil through the condenser or resistance, while the steady currents, which are the ones which must be depended upon to operate the relay, are still forced in whole or in part to pass through the relay coil where they belong. in a similar way the induction coil affords a means for keeping two circuits completely isolated so far as the direct flow of current between them is concerned, and yet of readily transmitting, by electromagnetic induction, currents from one of these circuits to the other. here is a means of isolation so far as direct current is concerned, with complete communication for alternating current. chapter xiii current supply to transmitters the methods by which current is supplied to the transmitter of a telephone for energizing it, may be classified under two divisions: first, those where the battery or other source of current is located at the station with the transmitter which it supplies; and second, those where the battery or other source of current is located at a distant point from the transmitter, the battery in such cases serving as a common source of current for the supply of transmitters at a number of stations. the advantages of putting the transmitter and the battery which supplies it with current in a local circuit with the primary of an induction coil, and placing the secondary of the induction coil in the line, have already been pointed out but may be briefly summarized as follows: when the transmitter is placed directly in the _line circuit_ and the line is of considerable length, the current which passes through the transmitter is necessarily rather small unless a battery of high potential is used; and, furthermore, the total change in resistance which the transmitter is capable of producing is but a small proportion of the total resistance of the line, and, therefore, the current changes produced by the transmitter are relatively small. on the other hand, when the transmitter is placed in a _local circuit_ with the battery, this circuit may be of small resistance and the current relatively large, even though supplied by a low-voltage battery; so that the transmitter is capable of producing relatively large changes in a relatively large current. to draw a comparison between these two general classes of transmitter current supply, a number of cases will be considered in connection with the following figures, in each of which two stations connected by a telephone line are shown. brief reference to the local battery method of supplying current will be made in order to make this chapter contain, as far as possible, all of the commonly used methods of current supply to transmitters. [illustration: a typical medium-sized multiple switchboard equipment] local battery. in fig. two stations are shown connected by a grounded line wire. the transmitter of each station is included in a low-resistance primary circuit including a battery and the primary winding of an induction coil, the relation between the primary circuits and the line circuits being established by the inductive action between the primary and the secondary windings of induction coils, the secondary in each case being in the line circuits with the receivers. [illustration: fig. . local-battery stations with grounded circuit] fig. shows exactly the same arrangement but with a metallic circuit rather than a grounded circuit. the student should become accustomed to the replacing of one of the line wires of a metallic circuit by the earth, and to the method, employed in figs. and , of indicating a grounded circuit as distinguished from a metallic circuit. [illustration: fig. . local-battery stations with metallic circuit] in fig. is shown a slight modification of the circuit shown in fig. , which consists of connecting one end of the primary winding to one end of the secondary winding of the induction coil, thus linking together the primary circuit and the line circuit, a portion of each of these circuits being common to a short piece of the local wiring. there is no difference whatever in the action of the circuits shown in figs. and , the latter being shown merely for the purpose of bringing out this fact. it is very common, particularly in local-battery circuits, to connect one end of the primary and the secondary windings, as by doing so it is often possible to save a contact point in the hook switch and also to simplify the wiring. [illustration: fig. . local-battery stations with metallic circuit] the advantages to be gained by employing a local battery at each subscriber's station associated with the transmitter in the primary circuit of an induction coil are attended by certain disadvantages from a commercial standpoint. the primary battery is not an economical way to generate electric energy. in all its commercial forms it involves the consumption of zinc and zinc is an expensive fuel. the actual amount of current in watts required by a telephone is small, however, and this disadvantage due to the inexpensive method of generating current would not in itself be of great importance. a more serious objection to the use of local batteries at subscribers' stations appears when the subject is considered from the standpoint of maintenance. batteries, whether of the so-called "dry" or "wet" type, gradually deteriorate, even when not used, and in cases where the telephone is used many times a day the deterioration is comparatively rapid. this makes necessary the occasional renewals of the batteries with the attendant expense for new batteries or new material, and of labor and transportation in visiting the station. the labor item becomes more serious when the stations are scattered in a sparsely settled community, in which case the visiting of the stations, even for the performance of a task that would require but a few minutes' time, may consume some hours on the part of the employes in getting there and back. common battery. _advantages._ it would be more economical if all of the current for the subscribers' transmitters could be supplied from a single comparatively efficient generating source instead of from a multitude of inefficient small sources scattered throughout the community served by the exchange. the advantage of such centralization lies not only in more economic generating means, but also in having the common source of current located at one place, where it may be cared for with a minimum amount of expense. such considerations have resulted in the so-called "common-battery system," wherein the current for all the subscribers' transmitters is furnished from a source located at the central office. where such a method of supplying current is practiced, the result has also been, in nearly all cases, the doing away with the subscriber's magneto generators, relying on the central-office source of current to furnish the energy for enabling the subscriber to signal the operator. such systems, therefore, concentrate all of the sources of energy at the central office and for that reason they are frequently referred to as central-energy systems. note. in this chapter the central-energy or common-battery system will be considered only in so far as the supply of current for energizing the subscribers' transmitters is concerned, the discussion of the action of signaling being reserved for subsequent chapters. _series battery._ if but a single pair of lines had to be considered, the arrangement shown in fig. might be employed. in this the battery is located at the central office and placed in series with the two grounded lines leading from the central office to the two subscribers' stations. the voltage of this battery is made sufficient to furnish the required current over the resistance of the entire line circuit with its included instruments. obviously, changes in resistance in the transmitter at station a will affect the flow of current in the entire line and the fluctuations resulting from the vibration of the transmitter diaphragm will, therefore, reproduce these sounds in the receiver at station b, as well as in that at station a. [illustration: fig. . battery in series with two lines] an exactly similar arrangement applied to a metallic circuit is shown in fig. . in thus placing the battery in series in the circuit between the two stations, as shown in figs. and , it is obvious that the transmitter at each station is compelled to vary the resistance of the entire circuit comprising the two lines in series, in order to affect the receiver at distant stations. this is in effect making the transmitter circuit twice as long as is necessary, as will be shown in the subsequent systems considered. furthermore, the placing of the battery in series in the circuit of the two combined lines does not lend itself readily to the supply of current from a common source to more than a single pair of lines. [illustration: fig. . battery in series with two lines] _series substation circuit._ the arrangement at the substations--consisting in placing the transmitter and the receiver in series in the line circuit, as shown in figs. and --is the simplest possible one, and has been used to a considerable extent, but it has been subject to the serious objection, where receivers having permanent magnets were used, of making it necessary to so connect the receiver in the line circuit that the steady current from the battery would not set up a magnetization in the cores of the receiver in such a direction as to neutralize or oppose the magnetization of the permanent magnets. as long as the current flowed through the receiver coils in such a direction as to supplement the magnetization of the permanent magnets, no harm was usually done, but when the current flowed through the receiver coils in such a way as to neutralize or oppose the magnetizing force of the permanent magnets, the action of the receiver was greatly interfered with. as a result, it was necessary to always connect the receivers in the line circuit in a certain way, and this operation was called _poling_. in order to obviate the necessity for poling and also to bring about other desirable features, it has been, until recently, almost universal practice to so arrange the receiver that it would be in the circuit of the voice currents passing over the line, but would not be traversed by direct currents, this condition being brought about by various arrangements of condensers, impedance coils, or induction coils, as will be shown later. during the year , however, the adoption by several concerns of the so-called "direct-current" receiver has made it necessary for the direct current to flow through the receiver coils in order to give the proper magnetization to the receiver cores, and this has brought about a return to the very simple form of substation circuit, which includes the receiver and the transmitter directly in the circuit of the line. this illustrates well an occurrence that is frequently observed by those who have opportunity to watch closely the development of an art. at one time the conditions will be such as to call for complicated arrangements, and for years the aim of inventors will be to perfect these arrangements; then, after they are perfected, adopted, and standardized, a new idea, or a slight alteration in the practice in some other respect, will demand a return to the first principles and wipe out the necessity for the things that have been so arduously striven for. [illustration: fig. . bridging battery with repeating coil] _bridging battery with repeating coil._ as pointed out, the placing of the battery in series in the line circuit in the central office is not desirable, and, so far as we are aware, has never been extensively used. the universal practice, therefore, is to place it in a bridge path across the line circuit, and a number of arrangements employing this basic idea are in wide use. in fig. is shown the standard arrangement of the western electric company, employed by practically all the bell operating companies. in this the battery at the central office is connected in the middle of the two sides of a repeating coil so that the current from the battery is fed out to the two connected lines in multiple. referring to the middle portion of this figure showing the central-office apparatus, _ _ and _ _ may be considered as the two halves of one side of a repeating coil divided so that the battery may be cut into their circuit. likewise, _ _ and _ _ may be considered as the two halves of the other side of the repeating coil similarly divided for the same purpose. the windings of this repeating coil are ordinarily alike; that is, _ _ and _ _ combined have the same resistance, number of turns, and impedance as _ _ and _ _ combined. the two sides of this coil are alternately used as primary and secondary, _ _ and _ _ forming the primary when station a is talking, and _ _ and _ _, the secondary; and _vice versâ_ when station b is talking. as will be seen, the current flowing from the positive pole of the battery will divide and flow through the windings _ _ and _ _; thence over the upper limb of each line, through the transmitter at each station, and back over the lower limbs of the line, through the windings _ _ and _ _, where the two paths reunite and pass to the negative pole of the battery. it is evident that when neither transmitter is being used the current flowing through both lines will be a steady current and that, therefore, neither line will have an inductive effect on the other. when, however, the transmitter at station a is used the variations in the resistance caused by it will cause undulations in the current. these undulations, passing through the windings _ _ and _ _ of the repeating coil, will cause, by electromagnetic induction, alternating currents to flow in the windings _ _ and _ _, and these alternating currents will be superimposed on the steady currents flowing in that line and will affect the receiver at station b, as will be pointed out. the reverse conditions exist when station b is talking. _bell substation arrangement._ the substation circuits at the stations in fig. are illustrative of one of the commonly employed methods of preventing the steady current from the battery from flowing through the receiver coil. this particular arrangement is that employed by the common-battery instruments of the various bell companies. considering the action at station b, it is evident that the steady current will pass through the transmitter and through the secondary winding of the induction coil, and that as long as this current is steady no current will flow through the telephone receiver. the receiver, transmitter, and primary winding of the induction coil are, however, included in a local circuit with the condenser. the presence of the condenser precludes the possibility of direct current flowing in this path. considering station a as a receiving station, it is evident that the voice currents coming to the station over the line will pass through the secondary winding and will induce alternating currents in the primary winding which will circulate through the local circuit containing the receiver and the condenser, and thus actuate the receiver. the considerations are not so simple when the station is being treated as a transmitting station. under this condition the steady current passes through the transmitter in an obvious manner. it is clear that if the local circuit containing the receiver did not exist, the circuit would be operative as a transmitting circuit because the transmitter would produce fluctuations in the steady current flowing in the line and thus be able to affect the distant station. the transmitter, therefore, has a direct action on the currents flowing in the line by the variation in resistance which it produces in the line circuit. there is, however, a subsidiary action in this circuit. obviously, there is a drop of potential across the transmitter terminals due to the flow of steady current. this means that the upper terminal of the condenser will be charged to the same potential as the upper terminal of the transmitter, while the lower terminal of the condenser will be of the same potential as the lower terminal of the transmitter. when, now, the transmitter varies its resistance, a variation in the potential across its terminals will occur; and as a result, a variation in potential across the terminals of the condenser will occur, and this means that alternating currents will flow through the primary winding of the induction coil. the transmitter, therefore, by its action, causes alternating currents to flow through the primary of this induction coil and it causes, by direct action on the circuit of the line, fluctuations in the steady current flowing in the line. the alternating currents flowing in the primary of the coil induce currents in the secondary of the coil which supplement and augment the fluctuations produced by the direct action of the transmitter. this circuit may be looked at, therefore, in the light of combining the direct action which the transmitter produces in the current in the line with the action which the transmitter produces in the local circuit containing the primary of the induction coil, this action being repeated in the line circuit through the secondary of the induction coil. the receiver in this circuit is placed in the local circuit, and is thus not traversed by the steady currents flowing in the line. there is thus no necessity for poling it. this circuit is very efficient, but is subject to the objection of producing a heavy side tone in the receiver of the transmitting station. by "side tone" is meant the noises which are produced in the receiver at a station by virtue of the action of the transmitter at that station. side tone is objectionable for several reasons: first, it is sometimes annoying to the subscriber; second, and of more importance, the subscriber who is talking, hearing a very loud noise in his own receiver, unconsciously assumes that he is talking too loud and, therefore, lowers his voice, sometimes to such an extent that it will not properly reach the distant station. [illustration: fig. . bridging battery with impedance coils] _bridging battery with impedance coils._ the method of feeding current to the line from the common battery, shown in fig. , is called the "split repeating-coil" method. as distinguished from this is the impedance-coil method which is shown in fig. . in this the battery is bridged across the circuit of the combined lines in series with two impedance coils, _ _ and _ _, one on each side of the battery. the steady currents from the battery find ready path through these impedance coils which are of comparatively low ohmic resistance, and the current divides and passes in multiple over the circuits of the two lines. voice currents, however, originating at either one of the stations, will not pass through the shunt across the line at the central office on account of the high impedance offered by these coils, and as a result they are compelled to pass on to the distant station and affect the receiver there, as desired. this impedance-coil method seems to present the advantage of greater simplicity over the repeating-coil method shown in fig. , and so far as talking efficiency is concerned, there is little to choose between the two. the repeating-coil method, however, has the advantage over this impedance-coil method, because by it the two lines are practically divided except by the inductive connection between the two windings, and as a result an unbalanced condition of one of the connected lines is not as likely to produce an unbalanced condition in the other as where the two lines are connected straight through, as with the impedance-coil method. the substation arrangement of fig. is the same as that of fig. . [illustration: fig. . double-battery kellogg system] _double battery with impedance coils._ a modification of the impedance-coil method is used in all of the central-office work of the kellogg switchboard and supply company. this employs a combination of impedance coils and condensers, and in effect isolates the lines conductively from each other as completely as the repeating-coil method. it is characteristic of all the kellogg common-battery systems that they employ two batteries instead of one, one of these being connected in all cases with the calling line of a pair of connected lines and the other in all cases with the called line. as shown in fig. , the left-hand battery is connected with the line leading to station a through the impedance coils _ _ and _ _. likewise, the right-hand battery is connected to the line of station b through the impedance coils _ _ and _ _. these four impedance coils are wound on separate cores and do not have any inductive relation whatsoever with each other. condensers _ _ and _ _ are employed to completely isolate the lines conductively. current from the left-hand battery, therefore, passes only to station a, and current from the right-hand battery to station b. whenever the transmitter at station a is actuated the undulations of current which it produces in the line cause a varying difference of potential across the outside terminals of the two impedance coils _ _ and _ _. this means that the two left-hand terminals of condensers _ _ and _ _ are subjected to a varying difference of potential and these, of course, by electrostatic induction, cause the right-hand terminals of these condensers to be subject to a correspondingly varying difference of potential. from this it follows that alternating currents will be impressed upon the right-hand line and these will affect the receiver at station b. a rough way of expressing the action of this circuit is to consider it in the same light as that of the impedance-coil circuit shown in fig. , and to consider that the voice currents originating in one line are prevented from passing through the bridge paths at the central office on account of the impedance, and are, therefore, forced to continue on the line, being allowed to pass readily by the condensers in series between the two lines. _kellogg substation arrangement._ an interesting form of substation circuit which is employed by the kellogg company in all of its common-battery telephones is shown in fig. . in passing, it may be well to state that almost any of the substation circuits shown in this chapter are capable of working with any of the central-office circuits. the different ones are shown for the purpose of giving a knowledge of the various substation circuits that are employed, and, as far as possible, to associate them with the particular central-office arrangements with which they are commonly used. in this kellogg substation arrangement the line circuit passes first through the transmitter and then divides, one branch passing through an impedance coil _ _ and the other through the receiver and the condenser _ _, in series. the steady current from the central-office battery finds ready path through the transmitter and the impedance coil, but is prevented from passing through the receiver by the barrier set up by the condenser _ _. voice currents, however, coming over the line to the station, find ready path through the receiver and the condenser but are barred from passing through the impedance coil by virtue of its high impedance. in considering the action of the station as a transmitting station, the variations set up by the transmitter pass through the condenser and the receiver at the same station, while the steady current which supplies the transmitter passes through the impedance coil. impedance coils used for this purpose are made of low ohmic resistance but of a comparatively great number of turns, and, therefore, present a good path for steady currents and a difficult path for voice currents. this divided circuit arrangement employed by the kellogg company is one of the very simple ways of eliminating direct currents from the receiver path, at the same time allowing the free passage of voice currents. [illustration: fig. . dean system] _dean substation arrangement._ in marked contrast to the scheme for keeping steady current out of the receiver circuit employed by the kellogg company, is that shown in fig. , which has been largely used by the dean electric company, of elyria, ohio. the central-office arrangement in this case is that using the split repeating coil, which needs no further description. the substation arrangement, however, is unique and is a beautiful example of what can be done in the way of preventing a flow of current through a path without in any way insulating that path or placing any barrier in the way of the current. it is an example of the prevention of the direct flow of current through the receiver by so arranging the circuits that there will always be an equal potential on each side of it, and, therefore, no tendency for current to flow through it. in this substation arrangement four coils of wire--_ _, _ _, _ _, and _ _--are so arranged as to be connected in the circuit of the line, two in series and two in multiple. the current flowing from the battery at the central office, after passing through the transmitter, divides between the two paths containing, respectively, the coils _ _ and _ _ and the coils _ _ and _ _. the receiver is connected between the junction of the coils _ _ and _ _ and that of _ _ and _ _. the resistances of the coils are so chosen that the drop of potential through the coil _ _ will be equal to that through the coil _ _, and likewise that through the coil _ _ will be equal to that through the coil _ _. as a result, the receiver will be connected between two points of equal potential, and no direct current will flow through it. how, then, do voice currents find their way through the receiver, as they evidently must, if the circuit is to fulfill any useful function? the coils _ _ and _ _ are made to have high impedance, while _ _ and _ _ are so wound as to be non-inductive and, therefore, offer no impedance save that of their ohmic resistance. what is true, therefore, of direct currents does not hold for voice currents, and as a result, the voice currents, instead of taking the divided path which the direct currents pursued, are debarred from the coils _ _ and _ _ by their high impedance and thus pass through the non-inductive coil _ _, the receiver, and the non-inductive coil _ _. this circuit employs a wheatstone-bridge arrangement, adjusted to a state of balance with respect to direct currents, such currents being excluded from the receiver, not because the receiver circuit is in any sense opaque to such direct currents, but because there is no difference of potential between the terminals of the receiver circuit, and, therefore, no tendency for current to flow through the receiver. in order that fluctuating currents may not, for the same reason, be caused to pass by, rather than through, the receiver circuit, the diametrically-opposed arms of the wheatstone bridge are made to possess, in large degree, self-induction, thereby giving these two arms a high impedance to fluctuating currents. the conditions which exist for direct currents do not, therefore, exist for fluctuating currents, and it is this distinction which allows alternating currents to pass through the receiver and at the same time excludes direct currents therefrom. in practice, the coils _ _, _ _, _ _, and _ _ of the dean substation circuit are wound on the same core, but coils _ _ and _ _--the non-inductive ones--are wound by doubling the wire back on itself so as to neutralize their self-induction. _stromberg-carlson._ another modification of the central-office arrangement and also of the subscribers' station circuits, is shown in fig. , this being a simplified representation of the circuits commonly employed by the stromberg-carlson telephone manufacturing company. the battery feed at the central office differs only from that shown in fig. , in that a single battery rather than two batteries is used, the current being supplied to one of the lines through the impedance coils _ _ and _ _, and to the other line through the impedance coils _ _ and _ _; condensers _ _ and _ _ serve conductively to isolate the two lines. at the subscriber's station the line circuit passes through the secondary of an induction coil and the transmitter. the receiver is kept entirely in a local circuit so that there is no tendency for direct current to flow through it, but it is receptive to voice currents through the electromagnetic induction between the primary and the secondary of the induction coil. [illustration: fig. . stromberg-carlson system] [illustration: fig. . north electric company system] _north._ another arrangement of central-office battery feed is employed by the north electric company, and is shown in fig. . in this two batteries are used which supply current respectively to the two connected lines, condensers being employed to conductively isolate the lines. this differs from the kellogg arrangement shown in fig. in that the two coils _ _ and _ _ are wound on the same core, while the coils _ _ and _ _ are wound together upon another core. in this case, in order that the inductive action of one of the coils may not neutralize that of the other coil on the same core, the two coils are wound in such relative direction that their magnetizing influence will always be cumulative rather than differential. the central-office arrangements discussed in figs. to , inclusive, are those which are in principal use in commercial practice in common-battery exchanges. _current supply over limbs of line in parallel._ as indicating further interesting possibilities in the method of supplying current from a common source to a number of substations, several other systems will be briefly referred to as being of interest, although these have not gone into wide commercial use. the system shown in fig. is one proposed by dean in the early days of common-battery working, and this arrangement was put into actual service and gave satisfactory results, but was afterwards supplanted by the bell equipment operating under the system shown in fig. , which became standardized by that company. in this the current from the common battery at the central office is not fed over the two line wires in series, but in multiple, using a ground return from the subscriber's station to the central office. across the metallic circuit formed by two connected lines there is bridged, at the central office, an impedance coil _ _, and between the center point of this impedance coil and the ground is connected the common battery. at the subscriber's station is placed an impedance coil _ _, also bridged across the two limbs of the line, and between the center point of this impedance coil and the ground is connected the transmitter, which is shunted by the primary winding of an induction coil. connected between the two limbs of the line at the substation there is also the receiver and the secondary of an induction coil in series. [illustration: fig. . current supply over parallel limbs of line] the action of this circuit at first seems a little complex, but if taken step by step may readily be understood. the transmitter supply circuit may be traced from the central-office battery through the two halves of the impedance coil _ _ in multiple; thence over the two limbs of the line in multiple to station a, for instance; thence in multiple through the two halves of impedance coil _ _, to the center point of that coil; thence through the two paths offered respectively by the primary of the induction coil and by the transmitter; then to ground and back to the other pole of the central-office battery. by this circuit the transmitter at the substation is supplied with current. variations in the resistance of the transmitter when in action, cause complementary variations in the supply current flowing through the primary of the induction coil. these variations induce similar alternating currents in the secondary of this coil, which is in series in the line circuit. the currents, so induced in this secondary, flow in series through one side of the line to the distant station; thence through the secondary and the receiver at that station to the other side of the line and back through that side of the line to the receiver. these currents are not permitted to pass through the bridged paths across the metallic circuit that are offered by the impedance coils _ _ and _ _, because they are voice currents and are, therefore, debarred from these paths by virtue of the impedance. [illustration: fig. . current supply over parallel limbs of line] an objection to this form of current supply and to other similar forms, wherein the transmitter current is fed over the two sides of the line in multiple with a ground return, is that the ground-return circuit formed by the two sides of the line in multiple is subject to inductive disturbances from other lines in the same way as an ordinary grounded line is subject to inductive disturbance. the current-supply circuit is thus subject to external disturbances and such disturbances find their way into the metallic circuit and, therefore, through the instruments by means of the electromagnetic induction between the primary and the secondary coils at the substations. another interesting method of current supply from a central-office battery is shown in fig. . this, like the circuit just considered, feeds the energy to the subscriber's station over the two sides of the line in multiple with a ground return. in this case, however, a local circuit is provided at the substation, in which is placed a storage battery _ _ and the primary _ _ of an induction coil, together with the transmitter. the idea in this is that the current supply from the central office will pass through the storage battery and charge it. upon the use of the transmitter, this storage battery acts to supply current to the local circuit containing the transmitter and the primary coil _ _ in exactly the same manner as in a local battery system. the fluctuating current so produced by the action of the transmitter in this local circuit acts on the secondary winding _ _ of the induction coil, and produces therein alternating currents which pass to the central office and are in turn repeated to the distant station. _supply many lines from common source._ we come now to the consideration of the arrangement by which a single battery may be made to supply current at the central office to a large number of pairs of connected lines simultaneously. up to this point in this discussion it has been shown only how each battery served a single pair of connected lines and no others. repeating coil:--in fig. is shown how a single battery supplies current simultaneously to four different pairs of lines, the lines of each pair being connected for conversation. it is seen that the pairs of lines shown in this figure are arranged in each case in accordance with the system shown in fig. . let us inquire why it is that, although all of these four pairs of lines are connected with a common source of energy and are, therefore, all conductively joined, the stations will be able to communicate in pairs without interference between the pairs. in other words, why is it that voice currents originating at station a will pass only to the receiver at station b and not to the receivers at station c or station h, for instance? the reason is that separate supply conductors lead from the points such as _ _ and _ _ at the junctions of the repeating-coil windings on each pair of circuits to the battery terminals, and the resistance and impedance of the battery itself and of the common leads to it are so small that although the feeble voice currents originating in the pair of lines connecting station a and station b pass through the battery, they are not able to alter the potential of the battery in any appreciable degree. as a result, therefore, the supply wires leading from the common-battery terminals to the points _ _ and _ _, for instance, cannot be subjected to any variations in potential by virtue of currents flowing through the battery from the points _ _ and _ _ of the lines joining station a and station b. [illustration: main office, keystone telephone company, philadelphia, pa.] [illustration: fig. . common source for many lines] [illustration: fig. . common source for many lines] retardation coil--single battery:--in fig. is shown in similar manner the current supply from a single battery to four different pairs of lines, the battery being associated with the lines by the combined impedance coil and condenser method, which was specifically dealt with in connection with fig. . the reasons why there will be no interference between the conversations carried on in the various pairs of connected lines in this case are the same as those just considered in connection with the system shown in fig. . the impedance coils in this case serve to keep the telephone currents confined to their respective pairs of lines in which they originate, and this same consideration applies to the system of fig. , for each of the separate repeating-coil windings of fig. is in itself an impedance coil with respect to such currents as might leak away from one pair of lines on to another. retardation coil--double battery:--the arrangement of feeding a number of pairs of lines according to the kellogg two-battery system is indicated in fig. , which needs no further explanation in view of the description of the preceding figures. it is interesting to note in this case that the left-hand battery serves only the left-hand lines and the right-hand battery only the right-hand lines. as this is worked out in practice, the left-hand battery is always connected to those lines which originate a call and the right-hand battery always to those lines that are called for. the energy supplied to a calling line is always, therefore, from a different source than that which supplies a called line. [illustration: fig. . two sources for many lines] [illustration: fig. . current supply from distant point] _current supply from distant point._ sometimes it is convenient to supply current to a group of lines centering at a certain point from a source of current located at a distant point. this is often the case in the so-called private branch exchange, where a given business house or other institution is provided with its own switchboard for interconnecting the lines leading to the various telephones of that concern or institution among themselves, and also for connecting them with lines leading to the city exchange. it is not always easy or convenient to maintain at such private switchboards a separate battery for supplying the current needed by the local exchange. in such cases the arrangement shown in fig. is sometimes employed. this shows two pairs of lines connected by the impedance-coil system with common terminals _ _ and _ _, between which ordinarily the common battery would be connected. instead of putting a battery between these terminals, however, at the local exchange, a condenser of large capacity is connected between them and from these terminals circuit wires _ _ and _ _ are led to a battery of suitable voltage at a distant central office. the condenser in this case is used to afford a short-circuit path for the voice currents that leak from one side of one pair of lines to the other, through the impedance coils bridged across the line. in this way the effect of the necessarily high resistance in the common leads _ _ and _ _, leading to the storage battery, is overcome and the tendency to cross-talk between the various pairs of connected lines is eliminated. frequently, instead of employing this arrangement, a storage battery of small capacity will be connected between the terminals _ _ and _ _, instead of the condenser, and these will be charged over the wires _ _ and _ _ from a source of current at a distant point. a consideration of the various methods of supplying current from a common source to a number of lines will show that it is essential that the resistance of the battery itself be very low. it is also necessary that the resistance and the impedance of the common leads from the battery to the point of distribution to the various pairs of lines be very low, in order that the voice currents which flow through them, by virtue of the conversations going on in the different pairs of lines, shall not produce any appreciable alteration in the difference of potential between the battery terminals. chapter xiv the telephone set we have considered what may be called the elemental parts of a complete telephone; that is, the receiver, transmitter, hook switch, battery, generator, call bell, condenser, and the various kinds of coils which go to make up the apparatus by which one is enabled to transmit and receive speech and signals. we will now consider the grouping of these various elements into a complete working organization known as a telephone. before considering the various types it is well to state that the term telephone is often rather loosely used. we sometimes hear the receiver proper called a telephone or a hand telephone. since this was the original speaking telephone, there is some reason for so calling the receiver. the modern custom more often applies the term telephone to the complete organization of talking and signaling apparatus, together with the associated wiring and cabinet or standard on which it is mounted. the name telephone set is perhaps to be preferred to the word telephone, since it tends to avoid misunderstanding as to exactly what is meant. frequently, also, the telephone or telephone set is referred to as a subscriber's station equipment, indicating the equipment that is to be found at a subscriber's station. this, as applying to a telephone alone, is not proper, since the subscriber's station equipment includes more than a telephone. it includes the local wiring within the premises of the subscriber and also the lightning arrester and other protective devices, if such exist. to avoid confusion, therefore, the collection of talking and signaling apparatus with its wiring and containing cabinet or standard will be referred to in this work as a telephone or telephone set. the receiver will, as a rule, be designated as such, rather than as a telephone. the term subscriber's station equipment will refer to the complete equipment at a subscriber's station, and will include the telephone set, the interior wiring, and the protective devices, together with any other apparatus that may be associated with the telephone line and be located within the subscriber's premises. classification of sets. telephones may be classified under two general headings, magneto telephones and common-battery telephones, according to the character of the systems in which they are adapted to work. _magneto telephone._ the term magneto telephone, as it was originally employed in telephony, referred to the type of instrument now known as a receiver, particularly when this was used also as a transmitter. as the use of this instrument as a transmitter has practically ceased, the term magneto telephone has lost its significance as applying to the receiver, and, since many telephones are equipped with magneto generators for calling purposes, the term magneto telephone has, by common consent, come to be used to designate any telephone including, as a part of its equipment, a magneto generator. magneto telephones usually, also, include local batteries for furnishing the transmitter with current, and this has led to these telephones being frequently called local battery telephones. however, a local battery telephone is not necessarily a magneto telephone and _vice versâ_, since sometimes magneto telephones have no local batteries and sometimes local battery telephones have no magnetos. nearly all of the telephones which are equipped with magneto generators are, however, also equipped with local batteries for talking purposes, and, therefore, the terms magneto telephone and local battery telephone usually refer to the same thing. _common-battery telephone._ common-battery telephones, on the other hand, are those which have no local battery and no magneto generator, all the current for both talking and signaling being furnished from a common source of current at the central office. _wall and desk telephones._ again we may classify telephones or telephone sets in accordance with the manner in which their various parts are associated with each other for use, regardless of what parts are contained in the set. we may refer to all sets adapted to be mounted on a wall or partition as _wall telephones_, and to all in which the receiver, transmitter, and hook are provided with a standard of their own to enable them to rest on any flat surface, such as a desk or table, as _desk telephones_. these latter are also referred to as portable telephones and as portable desk telephones. in general, magneto or local battery telephones differ from common-battery telephones in their component parts, the difference residing principally in the fact that the magneto telephone always has a magneto generator and usually a local battery, while the common-battery telephone has no local source of current whatever. on the other hand, the differences between wall telephones and desk telephones are principally structural, and obviously either of these types of telephones may be for common-battery or magneto work. the same component parts go to make up a desk telephone as a wall telephone, provided the two instruments are adapted for the same class of service, but the difference between the two lies in the structural features by which these same parts are associated with each other and protected from exposure. [illustration: fig. . magneto wall set] [illustration: fig. . magneto wall set] magneto-telephone sets. _wall._ in fig. is shown a familiar type of wall set. the containing box includes within it all of the working parts of the apparatus except that which is necessarily left outside in order to be within the reach of the user. fig. shows the same set with the door open. this gives a good idea of the ordinary arrangement of the apparatus within. it is seen that the polarized bell or ringer has its working parts mounted on the inside of the door or cover of the box, the tapper projecting through so as to play between the gongs on the outside. likewise the transmitter arm, which supports the transmitter and allows its adjustment up and down to accommodate itself to the height of the user, is mounted on the front of the door, and the conductors leading to it may be seen fastened to the rear of the door in fig. . in some wall sets the wires leading to the bell and transmitter are connected to the wiring of the rest of the set through the hinges of the door, thus allowing the door to be opened and closed repeatedly without breaking off the wires. in order to always insure positive electrical contact between the stationary and movable parts of the hinge a small wire is wound around the hinge pin, one end being soldered to the stationary part and the other end to the movable part of the hinge. in other forms of wall set the wires to the bell and the transmitter lead directly from the stationary portion of the cabinet to the back of the door, the wires being left long enough to have sufficient flexibility to allow the door to be opened and closed without injuring the wires. at the upper portion of the box there is mounted the hook switch, this being, in this case, of the short lever type. the lever of the hook projects through the side of the box so as to make the hook available as a support for the receiver. immediately at the right of the hook switch is mounted the induction coil, and immediately below this the generator, its crank handle projecting through the right-hand side of the box so as to be available for use there. the generator is usually mounted on a transverse shelf across the middle of the cabinet, this shelf serving to form a compartment below it in which the dry battery of two or three cells is placed. the wall telephone-set cabinets have assumed a multitude of forms. when wet cells rather than dry cells were ordinarily employed, as was the case up to about the year , the magneto generator, polarized bell, and hook switch were usually mounted in a rectangular box placed at the top of a long backboard. immediately below this on the backboard was mounted the transmitter arm, and sometimes the base of this included the induction coil. below this was the battery box, this being a large affair usually adapted to accommodate two and sometimes three ordinary leclanché cells side by side. the dry cell has almost completely replaced the wet cell in this country, and as a result, the general type of wall set as shown in figs. and , has gradually replaced the old wet-cell type, which was more cumbrous and unsightly. it is usual on wall sets to provide some sort of a shelf, as indicated in fig. , for the convenience of the user in making notes and memoranda. _desk._ in the magneto desk-telephone sets, the so-called desk stand, containing the transmitter, the receiver, and the hook switch, with the standard upon which they are mounted, is shown in fig. . this desk stand evidently does not comprise the complete equipment for a magneto desk-telephone set, since the generator, polarized bell, and battery are lacking. the generator and bell are usually mounted together in a box, either on the under side of the desk of the user or on the wall within easy reach of his chair. connections are made between the apparatus in the desk stand proper and the battery, generator, and bell by means of flexible conducting cords, these carrying a plurality of conductors, as required by the particular circuit of the telephone in question. such a complete magneto desk-telephone set is shown in fig. , this being one of the types manufactured by the stromberg-carlson manufacturing company. [illustration: fig. . desk stand] a great variety of arrangements of the various parts of magneto desk-telephone apparatus is employed in practice. sometimes, as shown in fig. , the magneto bell box is equipped with binding posts for terminating all of the conductors in the cord, the line wires also running to some of these binding posts. in the magneto-telephone set illustrated the box is made large enough to accommodate only the generator and call bell, and the batteries are mounted elsewhere, as in a drawer of the desk, while in other cases there is no other equipment but that shown in the cut, the batteries being mounted within the magneto bell box itself. in still other cases, the polarized bell is contained in one box, the generator in another, the batteries in the drawer of the desk, the induction coil being mounted either in the base of the desk stand, in the bell box, or in the generator box. in such cases all of the circuits of the various scattered parts are wired to a terminal strip, located at some convenient point, this strip containing terminals for all the wires leading from the various parts and for the line wires themselves. by combining the various wires on the terminals of this terminal strip, the complete circuits of the telephone are built up. in still other cases the induction coil is mounted on the terminal strip and separate wires or sets of wires are run to the polarized bell and generator, to the desk stand itself, and to the batteries. these various arrangements are subject largely to the desire or personal ideas of the manufacturer or user. all of them work on the same principle so far as the operation of the talking and signaling circuits is concerned. [illustration: fig. . magneto desk set] circuits of magneto-telephone sets. magneto telephones, whether of the wall or desk type, may be divided into two general classes, series and bridging, according to whether the magnet of the bell is included in series or bridge relation with the telephone line when the hook is down. _series._ in the so-called series telephone line, where several telephones are placed in series in a single line circuit, the employment of the series type of telephone results in all of the telephone bells being in series in the line circuit. this means that the voice currents originating in the telephones that are in use at a given time must pass in series through the magnets of the bells of the stations that are not in use. in order that these magnets, through which the voice currents must pass, may interfere to as small a degree as possible with the voice currents, it is common to employ low-resistance magnets in series telephones, these magnets being wound with comparatively few turns and on rather short cores so that the impedance will be as small as possible. likewise, since the generators are required to ring all of the bells in series, they need not have a large current output, but must have sufficient voltage to ring through all of the bells in series and through the resistance of the line. for this reason the generators are usually of the three-bar type and sometimes have only two bars. in fig. are shown, in simplified form, the circuits of an ordinary series telephone. the receiver in this is shown as being removed from the hook and thus the talking apparatus is brought into play. the line wires _ _ and _ _ connect respectively to the binding posts _ _ and _ _ which form the terminals of the instrument. when the hook is up, the circuit between the binding posts _ _ and _ _ includes the receiver and the secondary winding of the induction coil, together with one of the upper contacts _ _ of the switch hook and the hook lever itself. this completes the circuit for receiving speech. the hook switch is provided with another upper contact _ _, between which and the contact _ _ is connected the local circuit containing the transmitter, the battery, and the primary of the induction coil in series. the primary and the secondary windings are connected together at one end and connected with the switch contact _ _, as shown. it is thus seen that when the hook is up the circuit through the receiver is automatically closed and also the local circuit containing the primary, the battery, and the transmitter. thus, all the conditions for transmitting and receiving speech are fulfilled. [fig. . circuit of series magneto set] when the hook is down, however, the receiving and transmitting circuits are broken, but another circuit is completed by the engagement of the hook-switch lever with the lower hook contact _ _. between this contact and one side of the line is connected the polarized ringer and the generator. with the hook down, therefore, the circuit may be traced from the line wire _ _ to binding post _ _, thence through the generator shunt to the call bell, and thence through the lower switching contact _ _ to the binding post _ _ and line wire _ _. the generator shunt, as already described in chapter viii, normally keeps the generator shunted out of circuit. when, however, the generator is operated the shunt is broken, which allows the armature of the generator to come into the circuit in series with the winding of the polarized bell. the normal shunting of the generator armature from the circuit of the line is advantageous in several ways. in the first place, the impedance of the generator winding is normally cut out of the circuit so that in the case of a line with several stations the talking or voice currents do not have to flow through the generator armatures at the stations which are not in use. again, the normal shunting of the generator tends to save the generator armature from injury by lightning. [illustration: fig. . circuit of series magneto set.] the more complete circuits of a series magneto telephone are shown in fig. . in this the line binding posts are shown as _ _ and _ _. at the bottom of the telephone cabinet are four other binding posts marked _ _, _ _, _ _, and _ _. of these _ _ and _ _ serve for the receiver terminals and _ _ and _ _ for the transmitter and battery terminals. the circuits of this diagram will be found to be essentially the same as those of fig. , except that they are shown in greater detail. this particular type of circuit is one commonly employed where the generator, ringer, hook switch, and induction coil are all mounted in a so-called magneto bell box at the top of the instrument, and where the transmitter is mounted on an arm just below this box, and the battery in a separate compartment below the transmitter. the only wiring that has to be done between the bell box and the other parts of the instrument in assembling the complete telephone is to connect the receiver to the binding posts _ _ and _ _ and to connect the battery and transmitter circuit to the binding posts _ _ and _ _. _bridging._ in other cases, where several telephones are placed on a single-line circuit, the bells are arranged in multiple across the line. for this reason their magnets are wound with a very great number of turns and consequently to a high resistance. in order to further increase the impedance, the cores are made long and heavy. since the generators on these lines must be capable of giving out a sufficient volume of current to divide up between all of the bells in multiple, it follows that these generators must have a large current output, and at the same time a sufficient voltage to ring the bells at the farthest end of the line. such instruments are commonly called bridging instruments, on account of the method of connecting their bells across the circuit of the line. [illustration: fig. . circuit of bridging magneto set] the fundamental characteristic of the bridging telephone is that it contains three possible bridge paths across the line wires. the first of these bridge paths is through the talking apparatus, the second through the generator, and the third through the ringer. this is shown in simplified form in fig. . the talking apparatus is associated with the two upper contacts of the hook switch in the usual manner and needs no further description. the generator is the second separate bridge path, normally open, but adapted to be closed when the generator is operated, this automatic closure being performed by the movement of the crank shaft. the third bridge contains the polarized bell, and this, as a rule, is permanently closed. sometimes, however, the arrangement is such that the bell path is normally closed through the switch which is operated by the generator crank shaft, and this path is automatically broken when the generator is operated, at which time, also, the generator path is automatically closed. this arrangement brings about the result that the generator never can ring its own bell, because its switch always operates to cut out the bell at its own station just before the generator itself is cut into the circuit. in fig. is shown the complete circuit of a bridging telephone. the circuit given in this figure is for a local-battery wall set similar in type to that shown in figs. and . a simplified diagrammatic arrangement is shown in the lower left-hand corner of this figure, and from a consideration of this it will be seen that the bell circuit across the line is normally completed through the two right-hand normally closed contacts of the switch on the generator. when, however, the generator is operated these two contacts are made to disengage each other while the long spring of the generator switch engages the left-hand spring and thus brings the generator itself into the circuit. [illustration: fig. . circuit of bridging magneto set] of the three binding posts, _ _, _ _, and _ _, at the top of fig. , _ _ and _ _ are for connecting with the line wires, while _ _ is for a ground connection, acting in conjunction with the lightning arrester mounted at the top of the telephone and indicated at _ _ in fig. . this has no function in talking or ringing, and will be referred to more fully in chapter xix. suffice it to say at this point that these arresters usually consist of two conducting bodies, one connected permanently to each of the line binding posts, and a third conducting body connected to the ground binding post. these three conducting bodies are in close proximity but carefully insulated from each other; the idea being that when the line wires are struck by lightning or subjected otherwise to a dangerous potential, the charge on the line will jump across the space between the conducting bodies and pass harmlessly to ground. note. the student should practice making simplified diagrams from actual wiring diagrams. the difference between the two is that one is laid out for ease in understanding it, while the other is laid out to show the actual course of the wires as installed. if the large detailed circuit of fig. be compared with the small theoretical circuit in the same figure, the various conducting paths will be found to be the same. such a simplified circuit does more to enable one to grasp the fundamental scheme of a complex circuit than much description, since it shows at a glance the general arrangement. the more detailed circuits are, however, necessary to show the actual paths followed by the wiring. the circuits of desk stands do not differ from those of wall sets in any material degree, except as may be necessitated by the fact that the various parts of the telephone set are not all mounted in the same cabinet or on the same standard. to provide for the necessary relative movement between the desk stand and the other portions of the set, flexible conductors are run from the desk stand itself to the stationary portions of the equipment, such as the battery and the parts contained in the generator and bell box. [illustration: fig. . circuit of bridging magneto desk set] in fig. is shown the circuit of the stromberg-carlson magneto desk-telephone set, illustrated in fig. . this diagram needs no explanation in view of what has already been said. the conductors, leading from the desk-stand group of apparatus to the bell-box group of apparatus, are grouped together in a flexible cord, as shown in fig. , and are connected respectively to the various binding posts or contact points within the desk stand at one end and at the base of the bell box at the other end. these flexible conductors are insulated individually and covered by a common braided covering. they usually are individualized by having a colored thread woven into their insulating braid, so that it is an easy matter to identify the two ends of the same conductor at either end of the flexible cord or cable. [illustration: fig. . common-battery wall set] [illustration: fig. . common-battery wall set] common-battery telephone sets. owing to the fact that common-battery telephones contain no sources of current, they are usually somewhat simpler than the magneto type. the component parts of a common-battery telephone, whether of the wall or desk type, are the transmitter, receiver, hook switch, polarized bell, condenser, and sometimes an induction coil. the purpose of the condenser is to prevent direct or steady currents from passing through the windings of the ringer while the ringer is connected across the circuit of the line during the time when the telephone is not in use. the requirements of common-battery signaling demand that the ringer shall be connected with the line so as to be receptive of a call at any time while the telephone is not in use. the requirements also demand that no conducting path shall normally exist between the two sides of the line. these two apparently contradictory requirements are met by placing a condenser in series with the ringer so that the ringer will be in a path that will readily transmit the alternating ringing currents sent out from the central-office generator, while at the same time the condenser will afford a complete bar to the passage of steady currents. sometimes the condenser is also used as a portion of the talking apparatus, as will be pointed out. [illustration: main office, kansas city home telephone co., kansas city, mo.] _wall._ in figs. and are given two views of a characteristic form of common-battery wall-telephone set, made by the stromberg-carlson manufacturing company. the common-battery wall set has usually taken this general form. in it the transmitter is mounted on an adjustable arm at the top of the backboard, while the box containing the bell and all working parts of the instrument is placed below the transmitter, the top of the box affording a shelf for writing purposes. in fig. are shown the hook switch and the receiver; just below these may be seen the magnets of the polarized bell, back of which is shown a rectangular box containing the condenser. immediately in front of the ringer magnets is the induction coil. [illustration: fig. . stromberg-carlson common-battery wall set] in fig. are shown the details of the circuit of this instrument. this figure also includes a simplified circuit arrangement from which the principles involved may be more readily understood. it is seen that the primary of the induction coil and the transmitter are included in series across the line. the secondary of the induction coil, in series with the receiver, is connected also across the line in series with a condenser and the transmitter. _hotel._ sometimes, in order to economize space, the shelf of common-battery wall sets is omitted and the entire apparatus mounted in a small rectangular box, the front of which carries the transmitter mounted on the short arm or on no arm at all. such instruments are commonly termed hotel sets, because of the fact that their use was first confined largely to the rooms in hotels. later, however, these instruments have become very popular in general use, particularly in residences. sometimes the boxes or cabinets of these sets are made of wood, but of recent years the tendency has been growing to make them of pressed steel. the steel box is usually finished in black enamel, baked on, the color being sometimes varied to match the color of the surrounding woodwork. in figs. and are shown two views of a common-battery hotel set manufactured by the dean electric company. such sets are extremely neat in appearance and have the advantage of taking up little room on the wall and the commercial advantage of being light and compact for shipping purposes. a possible disadvantage of this type of instrument is the somewhat crowded condition which necessarily follows from the placing of all the parts in so confined a space. this interferes somewhat with the accessibility of the various parts, but great ingenuity has been manifested in making the parts readily get-at-able in case of necessity for repairs or alterations. [illustration: fig. . steel box hotel] [illustration: fig. . steel box hotel set] _desk_. the common-battery desk telephone presents a somewhat simpler problem than the magneto desk telephone for the reason that the generator and local battery, the two most bulky parts of a magneto telephone, do not have to be provided for. some companies, in manufacturing desk stands for common-battery purposes, mount the condenser and the induction coil or impedance coil, or whatever device is used in connection with the talking circuit, in the base of the desk stand itself, and mount the polarized ringer and the condenser used for ringing purposes in a separate bell box adapted to be mounted on the wall or some portion of the desk. other companies mount only the transmitter, receiver, and hook switch on the desk stand proper and put the condenser or induction coil, or other device associated with the talking circuit, in the bell box. there is little to choose between the two general practices. the number of conducting strands in the flexible cord is somewhat dependent on the arrangement of the circuit employed. [illustration: fig. . common-battery desk set] [illustration: fig. . bell for common-battery desk set.] the kellogg switchboard and supply company is one which places all the parts, except the polarized ringer and the associated condenser, in the desk stand itself. in fig. is shown a bottom view of the desk stand with the bottom plate removed. in the upper portion of the circle of the base is shown a small condenser which is placed in the talking circuit in series with the receiver. in the right-hand portion of the circle of the base is shown a small impedance coil, which is placed in series with the transmitter but in shunt relation with the condenser and the receiver. [illustration: fig. . bell for common-battery desk set] in figs. and are shown two views of the type of bell box employed by the kellogg company in connection with the common-battery desk sets, this box being of pressed-steel construction and having a removable lid, as shown in fig. , by which the working parts of the ringer are made readily accessible, as are also the terminals for the cord leading from the desk stand and for the wires of the line circuit. the condenser that is placed in series with the ringer is also mounted in this same box. by employing two condensers, one in the bell box large enough to transmit ringing currents and the other in the base of the desk stand large enough only to transmit voice currents, a duplication of condensers is involved, but it has the corresponding advantages of requiring only two strands to the flexible cord leading from the bell box to the desk stand proper. [illustration: fig. . microtelephone set] a form of desk-telephone set that is used largely abroad, but that has found very little use in this country, is shown in fig. . in this the transmitter and the receiver are permanently attached together, the receiver being of the watch-case variety and so positioned relatively to the transmitter that when the receiver is held at the ear, the mouthpiece of the transmitter will be just in front of the lips of the user. in order to maintain the transmitter in a vertical position during use, this necessitates the use of a curved mouthpiece as shown. this transmitter and receiver so combined is commonly called, in this country, the _microtelephone set_, although there seems to be no logical reason for this name. the combined transmitter and receiver, instead of being supported on an ordinary form of hook switch, are supported on a forked bracket as shown, this bracket serving to operate the switch springs which are held in one position when the bracket is subjected to the weight of the microtelephone, and in the alternate position when relieved therefrom. this particular microtelephone set is the product of the l.m. ericsson telephone manufacturing company, of buffalo, new york. the circuits of such sets do not differ materially from those of the ordinary desk telephone set. [illustration: fig. . kellogg common-battery desk set] [illustration: fig. . dean common-battery set] circuits of common-battery telephone sets. the complete circuits of the kellogg desk-stand arrangement are shown in fig. , the desk-stand parts being shown at the left and the bell-box parts at the right. as is seen, but two conductors extend from the former to the latter. a simplified theoretical sketch is also shown in the upper right-hand corner of this figure. the details of the common-battery telephone circuits of the dean electric company are shown in fig. . this involves the use of the balanced wheatstone bridge. the only other thing about this circuit that needs description, in view of what has previously been said about it, is that the polarized bell is placed in series with a condenser so that the two sides of the circuit may be insulated from each other while the telephone is not in use, and yet permit the passage of ringing current through the bell. [illustration: fig. . monarch common-battery wall set] the use of the so-called direct-current receiver has brought about a great simplification in the common-battery telephone circuits of several of the manufacturing companies. by this use the transmitter and the receiver are placed in series across the line, this path being normally opened by the hook-switch contacts. the polarized bell and condenser are placed in another bridge path across the line, this path not being affected by the hook-switch contacts. all that there is to such a complete common-battery telephone set, therefore, is a receiver, transmitter, hook switch, bell, condenser, and cabinet, or other support. the extreme simplicity of the circuits of such a set is illustrated in fig. , which shows how the monarch telephone manufacturing company connect up the various parts of their telephone set, using the direct-current receiver already described in connection with fig. . [illustration: ventilating plant for large telephone office building] chapter xv non-selective party-line systems a party line is a line that is for the joint use of several stations. it is, therefore, a line that connects a central office with two or more subscribers' stations, or where no central office is involved, a line that connects three or more isolated stations with each other. the distinguishing feature of a party line, therefore, is that it serves more than two stations, counting the central office, if there is one, as a station. strictly speaking, the term _party_ line should be used in contradistinction to the term _private_ line. companies operating telephone exchanges, however, frequently lease their wires to individuals for private use, with no central-office switchboard connections, and such lines are, by common usage, referred to as "private lines." such lines may be used to connect two or more isolated stations. a _private_ line, in the parlance of telephone exchange working, may, therefore, be a _party_ line, as inconsistent as this may seem. a telephone line that is connected with an exchange is an exchange line, and it is a party line if it has more than one station on it. it is an individual line or a single party line if it has but a single station on it. a line which has no central-office connection is called an "isolated line," and it is a party line if it has more than two stations on it. the problem of mere speech transmission on party lines is comparatively easy, being scarcely more complex than that involved in private or single party lines. this is not true, however, of the problem of signaling the various stations. this is because the line is for the common use of all its patrons or subscribers, as they are termed, and the necessity therefore exists that the person sending a signal, whether operator or subscriber, shall be able in some way to inform a person at the desired station that the call is intended for that station. there are two general ways of accomplishing this purpose. (_ _) the first and simplest of these ways is to make no provision for ringing any one bell on the line to the exclusion of the others, and thus allow all bells to ring at once whenever any station on the line is wanted. where this is done, in order to prevent all stations from answering, it is necessary, in some way, to convey to the desired station the information that the call is intended for that station, and to all of the other stations the information that the call is not intended for them. this is done on such lines by what is called "code ringing," the code consisting of various combinations of long and short rings. (_ _) the other and more complex way is to arrange for selective ringing, so that the person sending the call may ring the bell at the station desired, allowing the bells at all the other stations to remain quiet. [illustration: fig. . grounded-circuit series line] these two general classes of party-line systems may, therefore, be termed "non-selective" and "selective" systems. non-selective party lines are largely used both on lines having connection with a central office, and through the central office the privilege of connection with other lines, and on isolated lines having no central-office connection. the greatest field of usefulness of non-selective lines is in rural districts and in connection with exchanges in serving rather sparsely settled districts where the cost of individual lines or even lines serving but a few subscribers, is prohibitive. non-selective telephone party lines most often employ magneto telephones. the early forms of party lines employed the ordinary series magneto telephone, the bells being of low resistance and comparatively low impedance, while the generators were provided with automatic shunting devices, so that their resistance would normally be removed from the circuit of the line. series systems. the general arrangement of a series party line employing a ground return is shown in fig. . in this three ordinary series instruments are connected together in series, the end stations being grounded, in order to afford a return path for the ringing and voice currents. [illustration: fig. . metallic-circuit series line] in fig. there is shown a metallic-circuit series line on which five ordinary series telephones are placed in series. in this no ground is employed, the return being through a line wire, thus making the circuit entirely metallic. [illustration: fig. . series party line] the limitations of the ordinary series party line may be best understood by reference to fig. , in which the circuits of three series telephones are shown connected with a single line. the receiver of station a is represented as being on its hook, while the receivers of stations b and c are removed from their hooks, as when the subscribers at those two stations are carrying on a conversation. the hook switches of stations b and c being in raised positions, the generators and ringers of those stations are cut out of the circuit, and only the telephone apparatus proper is included, but the hook switch of station a being depressed by the weight of its receiver, includes the ringer of that station in circuit, and through this ringer, therefore, the voice currents of stations b and c must pass. the generator of station a is not in the circuit of voice currents, however, because of the automatic shunt with which the generator is provided, as described in chapter viii. a slight consideration of the series system as shown in this figure, indicates that the voice currents of any two stations that are in use, must pass (as indicated by the heavy lines) through the ringers of all the stations that are not in use; and when a great number of stations are placed upon a single line, as has been frequently the case, the impedance offered by these ringers becomes a serious barrier to the passage of the voice currents. this defect in the series party line is fundamental, as it is obvious that the ringers must be left in the circuit of the stations which are not in use, in order that those stations may always be in such condition as to be able to receive a call. this defect may in some measure be reduced by making the ringers of low impedance. this is the general practice with series telephones, the ringers ordinarily having short cores and a comparatively small number of turns, the resistance being as a rule about ohms. bridging systems. very much better than the series plan of party-line connections, is the arrangement by which the instruments are placed in bridges across the line, such lines being commonly known as bridged or bridging lines. this was first strongly advocated and put into wide practical use by j.j. carty, now the chief engineer of the american telephone and telegraph company. a simple illustration of a bridging telephone line is shown in fig. , where the three telephones shown are each connected in a bridge path from the line wire to ground, a type known as a "grounded bridging line." its use is very common in rural districts. a better arrangement is shown in fig. , which represents a metallic-circuit bridging line, three telephone instruments being shown in parallel or bridge paths across the two line wires. the actual circuit arrangements of a bridging party line are better shown in fig. . there are three stations and it will be seen that at each station there are three possible bridges, or bridge paths, across the two limbs of the line. the first of these bridges is controlled by the hook switch and is normally open. when the hook is raised, however, this path is closed through the receiver and secondary of the induction coil, the primary circuit being also closed so as to include the battery and transmitter. this constitutes an ordinary local-battery talking set. [illustration: fig. . grounded bridging line] [illustration: fig. . metallic bridging line] [illustration: fig. . metallic bridging line] a second bridge at each station is led through the ringer or call-bell, and this, in most bridging telephones, is permanently closed, the continuity of this path between the two limbs of the line not being affected either by the hook switch or by the automatic switch in connection with the generator. a third bridge path at each station is led through the generator. this, as indicated, is normally open, but the automatic cut-in switch of the generator serves, when the generator is operated, to close its path across the line, so that it may send its currents to the line and ring the bells of all the stations. when any generator is operated, its current divides and passes over the line wires and through all of the ringers in multiple. it is seen, therefore, that the requirements for a bridging generator are that it shall be capable of generating a large current, sufficient when divided up amongst all the bells to ring each of them; and that it shall be capable of producing a sufficient voltage to send the required current not only to the near-by stations, but to the stations at the distant end of the line. it might seem at first that the bridging system avoided one difficulty only to encounter another. it clearly avoids the difficulty of the series system in that the voice currents, in order to reach distant stations, do not have to pass through all of the bells of the idle stations in series. there is, however, presented at each station a leakage path through the bell bridged across the line, through which it would appear the voice currents might leak uselessly from one side of the line to the other and not pass on in sufficient volume to the distant station. this difficulty is, however, more apparent than real. it is found that, by making the ringers of high impedance, the leakage of voice currents through them from one side of the line to the other is practically negligible. it is obvious that in a heavily loaded bridged line, the bell at the home station, that is at the station from which the call is being sent, will take slightly more than its share of the current, and it is also obvious that the ringing of the home bell performs no useful function. the plan is frequently adopted, therefore, of having the operation of the generator serve to cut its own bell out of the circuit. the arrangement by which this is done is clearly shown in fig. . the circuit of the bell is normally complete across the line, while the circuit of the generator is normally open. when, however, the generator crank is turned these conditions are reversed, the bell circuit being broken and the generator circuit closed, so as to allow its current all to pass the line. this feature of having the local bell remain silent upon the operation of its own generator is also of advantage because other parties at the same station are not disturbed by the ringing of the bell when a call is being made by that station. a difficulty encountered on non-selective bridging party lines, which at first seems amusing rather than serious, but which nevertheless is often a vexatious trouble, is that due to the propensity of some people to "listen in" on the line on hearing calls intended for other than their own stations. people whose ethical standards would not permit them to listen at, or peep through, a keyhole, often engage in this telephonic eavesdropping. frequently, not only one but many subscribers will respond to a call intended for others and will listen to the ensuing conversation. this is disadvantageous in several respects: it destroys the privacy of conversation between any two parties; it subjects the local batteries to an unnecessary and useless drain; and it greatly impairs the ringing efficiency of the line. the reason for this interference with ringing is that the presence of the low-resistance receivers across the line allows the current sent out by any of the generators to pass in large measure through the receivers, thus depriving the ringers, which are of comparatively high resistance and impedance, of the energy necessary to operate them. as a result of this it is frequently impossible for one party to repeat the call for another because, during the interval between the first and second call, a number of parties remove their receivers from their hooks in order to listen. ring-off or clearing-out signals are likewise interfered with. [illustration: fig. . circuits of bridging station] a partial remedy for this interference with ringing, due to eavesdropping, is to introduce a low-capacity condenser into the receiver circuit at each station, as shown in fig. . this does not seriously interfere with the speech transmission since the condensers will readily transmit the high-frequency voice currents. such condensers, however, have not sufficient capacity to enable them readily to transmit the low-frequency ringing currents and hence these are forced, in large measure, to pass through the bells for which they are intended rather than leaking through the low-resistance receiver paths. the best condenser for this use is of about / -microfarad capacity, which is ample for voice-transmitting purposes, while it serves to effectively bar the major portion of the generator currents. a higher capacity condenser would carry the generator currents much more readily and thus defeat the purpose for which it was intended. in order that the requisite impedance may be given to the ringers employed for bridging party lines, it is customary to make the cores rather long and of somewhat larger diameter than in series ringers and at the same time to wind the coils with rather fine wire so as to secure the requisite number of turns. bridging bells are ordinarily wound to a resistance of , or , ohms, these two figures having become standard practice. it is not, however, the high resistance so much as the high impedance that is striven for in bridging bells; it is the number of turns that is of principal importance. as has already been stated, the generators used for bridging lines are made capable of giving a greater current output than is necessary in series instruments, and for this purpose they are usually provided with at least four, and usually five, bar magnets. the armature is made correspondingly long and is wound, as a rule, with about no. wire. sometimes where a bridged party line terminates in a central-office switchboard it is desired to so operate the line that the subscribers shall not be able to call up each other, but shall, instead, be able to signal only the central-office operator, who, in turn, will be enabled to call the party desired, designating his station by a suitable code ring. one common way to do this is to use biased bells instead of the ordinary polarized bells. in order that the bells may not be rung by the subscribers' generators, these generators are made of the direct-current type and these are so associated with the line that the currents which they send out will be in the wrong direction to actuate the bells. on the other hand, the central-office generator is of direct-current type and is associated with the line in the right direction to energize the bells. thus any subscriber on the line may call the central office by merely turning his generator crank, which action will not ring the bells of the subscribers on the line. the operator will then be able to receive the call and in turn send out currents of the proper direction to ring all the bells and, by code, call the desired party to the telephone. [illustration: one wing of operating room, berlin, germany ultimate capacity , subscribers' lines and , trunk lines. siemens-halske equipment. note horizontal disposal of multiple] signal code. the code by which stations are designated on non-selective party lines usually consists in combinations of long and short rings similar to the dots and dashes in the morse code. thus, one short ring may indicate station no. ; two short rings station no. ; and so on up to, say, five short rings, indicating station no. . it is not good practice to employ more than five successive short rings because of the confusion which often arises in people's minds as to the number of rings that they hear. when, therefore, the number of stations to be rung by code exceeds five, it is better to employ combinations of long and short rings, and a good way is to adopt a partial decimal system, omitting the numbers higher than five in each ten, and employing long rings to indicate the tens digits and short rings to indicate the units digit, table x. table x signal code +--------------+---------------+--------------+---------------+ |station number|ring |station number|ring | | | short | | long, short| | | short | | long, short| | | short | | long, short| | | short | | long, short| | | short | | long, short| | | long, short| | long, short| +--------------+---------------+--------------+---------------+ other arrangements are often employed and by almost any of them a great variety of readily distinguishable signals may be secured. the patrons of such lines learn to distinguish, with comparatively few errors, between the calls intended for them and those intended for others, but frequently they do not observe the distinction, as has already been pointed out. limitations. with good telephones the limit as to the number of stations that it is possible to operate upon a single line is usually due more to limitations in ringing than in talking. as the number of stations is increased indefinitely a condition will be reached at which the generators will not be able to generate sufficient current to ring all of the bells, and this condition is likely to occur before the talking efficiency is seriously impaired by the number of bridges across the line. neither of these considerations, however, should determine the maximum number of stations to be placed on a line. the proper limit as to the number of stations is not the number that can be rung by a single generator, or the number with which it is possible to transmit speech properly, but rather the number of stations that may be employed without causing undue interference between the various parties who may desire to use the line. overloaded party lines cause much annoyance, not only for the reason that the subscribers are often not able to use the line when they want it, but also, in non-selective lines, because of the incessant ringing of the bells, and the liability of confusion in the interpretation of the signaling code, which of course becomes more complex as the number of stations increases. the amount of business that is done over a telephone line is usually referred to as the "traffic." it will be understood, however, in considering party-line working that the number of calls per day or per hour, or per shorter unit, is not the true measure of the traffic and, therefore, not the true measure of the amount of possible interference between the various subscribers on the line. an almost equally great factor is the average length of the conversation. in city lines, that is, in lines in city exchanges, the conversation is usually short and averages perhaps two minutes in duration. in country lines, however, serving people in rural districts, who have poor facilities for seeing each other, particularly during the winter time, the conversations will average very much longer. in rural communities the people often do much of their visiting by telephone, and conversations of half an hour in length are not unusual. it is obvious that under such conditions a party line having a great many stations will be subject to very grave interference between the parties, people desiring to use the line for business purposes often being compelled to wait an undue time before they may secure the use of the line. it is obvious, therefore, that the amount of traffic on the line, whether due to many short conversations or to a comparatively few long ones, is the main factor that should determine the number of stations that, economically, may be placed on a line. the facilities also for building lines enter as a factor in this respect, since it is obvious that in comparatively poor communities the money may not be forthcoming to build as many lines as are needed to properly take care of the traffic. a compromise is, therefore, often necessary, and the only rule that may be safely laid down is to place as few parties on a given line as conditions will admit. no definite limit may be set to apply to all conditions but it may be safely stated that under ordinary circumstances no more than ten stations should be placed on a non-selective line. twenty stations are, however, common, and sometimes forty and even fifty have been connected to a single line. in such cases the confusion which results, even if the talking and the ringing efficiency are tolerable, makes the service over such overloaded lines unsatisfactory to all concerned. chapter xvi selective party-line systems the problem which confronts one in the production of a system of selective ringing on party lines is that of causing the bell of any chosen one of the several parties on a circuit to respond to a signal sent out from the central office without sounding any of the other bells. this, of course, must be accomplished without interfering with the regular functions of the telephone line and apparatus. by this is meant that the subscribers must be able to call the central office and to signal for disconnection when desired, and also that the association of the selective-signaling devices with the line shall not interfere with the transmission of speech over the line. a great many ways of accomplishing selective ringing on party lines have been proposed, and a large number of them have been used. all of these ways may be classified under four different classes according to the underlying principle involved. classification. (_ _) _polarity_ systems are so called because they depend for their operation on the use of bells or other responsive devices so polarized that they will respond to one direction of current only. these bells or other devices are so arranged in connection with the line that the one to be rung will be traversed by current in the proper direction to actuate it, while all of the others will either not be traversed by any current at all, or by current in the wrong direction to cause their operation. (_ _) the _harmonic_ systems have for their underlying principle the fact that a pendulum or elastic reed, so supported as to be capable of vibrating freely, will have one particular rate of vibration which it may easily be made to assume. this pendulum or reed is placed under the influence of an electromagnet associated with the line, and owing to the fact that it will vibrate easily at one particular rate of vibration and with extreme difficulty at any other rate, it is clear that for current impulses of a frequency corresponding to its natural rate the reed will take up the vibration, while for other frequencies it will fail to respond. selection on party lines by means of this system is provided for by tuning all of the reeds on the line at different rates of vibration and is accomplished by sending out on the line ringing currents of proper frequency to ring the desired bell. the current-generating devices for ringing these bells are capable of sending out different frequencies corresponding respectively to the rates of vibration of each of the vibrating reed tongues. to select any one station, therefore, the current frequency corresponding to the rate of vibration of the reed tongue at that station is sent and this, being out of tune with the reed tongues at all of the other stations, operates the tongue of the desired station, but fails to operate those at all of the other stations. (_ _) in the _step-by-step_ system the bells on the line are normally not in operative relation with the line and the bell of the desired party on the line is made responsive by sending over the line a certain number of impulses preliminary to ringing it. these impulses move step-by-step mechanisms at each of the stations in unison, the arrangement being such that the bells at the several stations are each made operative after the sending of a certain number of preliminary impulses, this number being different for all the stations. (_ _) the _broken-line_ systems are new in telephony and for certain fields of work look promising. in these the line circuit is normally broken up into sections, the first section terminating at the first station out from the central office, the second section at the second station, and so on. when the line is in its normal or inactive condition only the bell at the first station is so connected with the line circuit as to enable it to be rung, the line being open beyond. sending a single preliminary impulse will, however, operate a switching device so as to disconnect the bell at the first station and to connect the line through to the second station. this may be carried out, by sending the proper number of preliminary impulses, so as to build up the line circuit to the desired station, after which the sending of the ringing current will cause the bell to ring at that station only. polarity method. the polarity method of selective signaling on party lines is probably the most extensively used. the standard selective system of the american telephone and telegraph company operates on this principle. _two-party line._ it is obvious that selection may be had between two parties on a single metallic-circuit line without the use of biased bells or current of different polarities. thus, one limb of a metallic circuit may be used as one grounded line to ring the bell at one of the stations, and the other limb of the metallic circuit may be used as another grounded line to ring the bell of the other station; and the two limbs may be used together as a metallic circuit for talking purposes as usual. this is shown in fig. , where the ringing keys at the central office are diagrammatically shown in the left-hand portion of the figure as _k_^{ } and _k_^{ }. the operation of these keys will be more fully pointed out in a subsequent chapter, but a correct understanding will be had if it be remembered that the circuits are normally maintained by these keys in the position shown. when, however, either one of the keys is operated, the two long springs may be considered as pressed apart so as to disengage the normal contacts between the springs and to engage the two outer contacts, with which they are shown in the cut to be disengaged. the two outer contacts are connected respectively to an ordinary alternating-current ringing generator and to ground, but the connection is reversed on the two keys. [illustration: fig. . simple two-party line selection] at station a the ordinary talking set is shown in simplified form, consisting merely of a receiver, transmitter, and hook switch in a single bridge circuit across the line. an ordinary polarized bell is shown connected in series with a condenser between the lower limb of the line and ground. at station b the same talking circuit is shown, but the polarized bell and condenser are bridged between the upper limb of the line and ground. if the operator desires to call station a, she will press key _k_^{ } which will ground the upper side of the line and connect the lower side of the line with the generator _g_^{ }, and this, obviously, will cause the bell at station a to ring. the bell at station b will not ring because it is not in the circuit. if, on the other hand, the operator desires to ring the bell at station b, she will depress key _k_^{ }, which will allow the current from generator _g_^{ } to pass over the upper side of the line through the bell and condenser at station b and return by the path through the ground. the object of grounding the opposite sides of the keys at the central office is to prevent cross-ringing, that is, ringing the wrong bell. were the keys not grounded this might occur when a ringing current was being sent out while the receiver at one of the stations was off its hook; the ringing current from, say, generator _g_^{ } then passing not only through the bell at station a as intended, but also through the bell at station b by way of the bridge path through the receiver that happened to be connected across the line. with the ringing keys grounded as shown, it is obvious that this will not occur, since the path for the ringing current through the wrong bell will always be shunted by a direct path to ground on the same side of the line. in such a two-party-line selective system the two generators _g_^{ } and _g_^{ } may be the same generator and may be of the ordinary alternating-current type. the bells likewise may be of the ordinary alternating-current type. the two-party selective line just described virtually employs two separate circuits for ringing. now each of these circuits alone may be employed to accomplish selective ringing between two stations by using two biased bells oppositely polarized, and employing pulsating ringing currents of one direction or the other according to which bell it is desired to ring. one side of a circuit so equipped is shown in fig. . in this the two biased bells are at station a and station b, these being bridged to ground in each case and adapted to respond only to positive and negative impulses respectively. at the central office the two keys _k_^{ } and _k_^{ } are shown. a single alternating-current generator _g_ is shown, having its brush _ _ grounded and brush _ _ connected to a commutator disk _ _ mounted on the generator shaft so as to revolve therewith. one-half of the periphery of this disk is of insulating material so that the brushes _ _ and _ _, which bear against the disk, will be alternately connected with the disk and, therefore, with the brush _ _ of the generator. now the brush _ _, being one terminal of an alternating-current machine, is alternately positive and negative, and the arrangement of the commutator is such that the disk, which is always at the potential of the brush _ _, will be connected to the brush _ _ only while it is positively charged and with the brush _ _ only while it is negatively charged. as a result, brush _ _ has a succession of positive impulses and brush _ _ a succession of negative ones. obviously, therefore, when key _k_^{ } is depressed only the bell at station a will be rung, and likewise the depression of key _k_^{ } will result only in the ringing of the bell at station b. [illustration: fig. . principle of selection by polarity] _four-party line._ from the two foregoing two-party line systems it is evident that a four-party line system may be readily obtained, that is, by employing two oppositely polarized biased bells on each side of the metallic circuit. the selection of any of the four bells may be obtained, choosing between the pairs connected, respectively, with the two limbs of the line, by choosing the limb on which the current is to be sent, and choosing between the two bells of the pair on that side of the line by choosing which polarity of current to send. such a four-party line system is shown in fig. . in this the generators are not shown, but the wires leading from the four keys are shown marked plus or minus, according to the terminal of the generator to which they are supposed to be connected. likewise the two bells connected with the lower side of the line are marked positive and negative, as are the two bells connected with the upper side of the line. from the foregoing description of figs. and , it is clear that if key _k_^{ } is pressed the bell at station a will be rung, and that bell only, since the bells at station c and station _d_ are not in the circuit and the positive current sent over the lower side of the line is not of the proper polarity to ring the bell at station b. the system shown in fig. is subject to one rather grave defect. in subsequent chapters it will be pointed out that in common-battery systems the display of the line signal at the central office is affected by any one of the subscribers merely taking his receiver off its hook and thus establishing a connection between the two limbs of the metallic circuit. such common-battery systems should have the two limbs of the line, normally, entirely insulated from each other. it is seen that this is not the case in the system just described, since there is a conducting path from one limb of the line through the two bells on that side to ground, and thence through the other pair of bells to the other limb of the line. this means that unless the resistance of the bell windings is made very high, the path of the signaling circuit will be of sufficiently low resistance to actuate the line signal at the central office. [illustration: fig. . four-party polarity selection] it is not feasible to overcome this objection by the use of condensers in series with the bells, as was done in the system shown in fig. , since the bells are necessarily biased and such bells, as may readily be seen, will not work properly through condensers, since the placing of a condenser in their circuit means that the current which passes through the bell is alternating rather than pulsating, although the original source may have been of pulsating nature only. [illustration: fig . standard polarity system] the remedy for this difficulty, therefore, has been to place in series with each bell a very high non-inductive resistance of about , or , ohms, and also to make the windings of the bells of comparatively high resistance, usually about , ohms. even with this precaution there is a considerable leakage of the central-office battery current from one side of the line to the other through the two paths to ground in series. this method of selective signaling has, therefore, been more frequently used with magneto systems. an endeavor to apply this principle to common-battery systems without the objections noted above has led to the adoption of a modification, wherein a relay at each station normally holds the ground connection open. this is shown in fig. and is the standard four-party line ringing circuit employed by the american telephone and telegraph company and their licensees. in this system the biased bells are normally disconnected from the line, and, therefore, the leakage path through them from one side of the line to the other does not exist. at each station there is a relay winding adapted to be operated by the ringing current bridged across the line in series with a condenser. as a result, when ringing current is sent out on the line all of the relays, _i.e._, one at each station, are energized and attract their armatures. this establishes the connection of all the bells to line and really brings about temporarily a condition equivalent to that of fig. . as a result, the sending of a positive current on the lower line with a ground return will cause the operation of the bell at station a. it will not ring the bell at station b because of the wrong polarity. it will not ring the bells of station c and station d because they are in the circuit between the other side of the line and ground. as soon as the ringing current ceases all of the relays release their armatures and disconnect all the bells from the line. by this very simple device the trouble, due to marginal working of the line signal, is done away with, since normally there is no leakage from one side of the line to the other on account of the presence of the condensers in the bridge at each station. [illustration: fig. . ringing-key arrangement] in fig. , the more complete connections of the central-office ringing keys are shown, by means of which the proper positive or negative ringing currents are sent to line in the proper way to cause the ringing of any one of the four bells on a party line of either of the types shown in figs. and . in this the generator _g_ and its commutator disk _ _, with the various brushes, _ _, _ _, _ _, and _ _, are arranged in the same manner as is shown in fig. . it is evident from what has been said that wire _ _ leading from generator brush _ _ and commutator disk _ _ will carry alternating potential; that wire _ _ will carry positive pulsations of potential; and that wire _ _ will carry negative pulsations of potential. there are five keys in the set illustrated in fig. , of which four, viz, _k_^{ }, _k_^{ }, _k_^{ }, and _k_^{ }, are connected in the same manner as diagrammatically indicated in figs. and , and will, obviously, serve to send the proper current over the proper limb of the line to ring one of the bells. key _k_^{ }, the fifth one in the set, is added so as to enable the operator to ring an ordinary unbiased bell on a single party line when connection is made with such line. as the two outside contacts of this key are connected respectively to the two brushes of the alternating-current dynamo _g_, it is clear that it will impress an alternating current on the line when its contacts are closed. _circuits of two-party line telephones._ in fig. is shown in detail the wiring of the telephone set usually employed in connection with the party-line selective-ringing system illustrated in fig. . in the wiring of this set and the two following, it must be borne in mind that the portion of the circuit used during conversation might be wired in a number of ways without affecting the principle of selective ringing employed; however, the circuits shown are those most commonly employed with the respective selective ringing systems which they are intended to illustrate. in connecting the circuits of this telephone instrument to the line, the two line conductors are connected to binding posts _ _ and _ _ and a ground connection is made to binding post _ _. in practice, in order to avoid the necessity of changing the permanent wiring of the telephone set in connecting it as an a or b station (fig. ), the line conductors are connected to the binding posts in reverse order at the two stations; that is, for station a the upper conductor, fig. , is connected to binding post _ _ and the lower conductor to binding post _ _, while at station b the upper conductor is connected to binding post _ _ and the lower conductor to binding post _ _. the permanent wiring of this telephone set is the same as that frequently used for a set connected to a line having only one station, the proper ringing circuit being made by the method of connecting up the binding posts. for example, if this telephone set were to be used on a single station line, the binding posts _ _ and _ _ would be connected to the two conductors of the line as before, while binding post _ _ would be connected to post _ _ instead of being grounded. [illustration: fig. . circuit of two-party station] _circuits of four-party-line telephones._ the wiring of the telephone set used with the system illustrated in fig. is shown in detail in fig. . the wiring of this set is arranged for local battery or magneto working, as this method of selective ringing is more frequently employed with magneto systems, on account of the objectionable features which arise when applied to common-battery systems. in this figure the line conductors are connected to binding posts _ _ and _ _, and a ground connection is made to binding post _ _. in order that all sets may be wired alike and yet permit the instrument to be connected for any one of the various stations, the bell is not permanently wired to any portion of the circuit but has flexible connections which will allow of the set being properly connected for any desired station. the terminals of the bell are connected to binding posts _ _ and _ _, to which are connected flexible conductors terminating in terminals _ _ and _ _. these terminals may be connected to the binding posts _ _, _ _, and _ _ in the proper manner to connect the set as an a, b, c, or d station, as required. for example, in connecting the set for station a, fig. , terminal _ _ is connected to binding post _ _ and _ _ to _ _. for connecting the set for station b terminal _ _ is connected to binding post _ _ and _ _ to _ _. for connecting the set for station c terminal _ _ is connected to binding post _ _ and _ _ to _ _. for connecting the set for station d terminal _ _ is connected to binding post _ _ and _ _ to _ _. [illustration: fig. . circuit of four-party station without relay] [illustration: fig. . circuit of four-party station with relay] the detailed wiring of the telephone set employed in connection with the system illustrated in fig. is shown in fig. . the wiring of this set is arranged for a common-battery system, inasmuch as this arrangement of signaling circuit is more especially adapted for common-battery working. however, this arrangement is frequently adapted to magneto systems as even with magneto systems a permanent ground connection at a subscriber's station is objectionable inasmuch as it increases the difficulty of determining the existence or location of an accidental ground on one of the line conductors. the wiring of this set is also arranged so that one standard type of wiring may be employed and yet allow any telephone set to be connected as an a, b, c, or d station. harmonic method. _principles._ to best understand the principle of operation of the harmonic party-line signaling systems, it is to be remembered that a flexible reed, mounted rigidly at one end and having its other end free to vibrate, will, like a violin string, have a certain natural period of vibration; that is, if it be started in vibration, as by snapping it with the fingers, it will take up a certain rate of vibration which will continue at a uniform rate until the vibration ceases altogether. such a reed will be most easily thrown into vibration by a series of impulses having a frequency corresponding exactly to the natural rate of vibration of the reed itself; it may be thrown into vibration by very slight impulses if they occur at exactly the proper times. it is familiar to all that a person pushing another in a swing may cause a considerable amplitude of vibration with the exertion of but a small amount of force, if he will so time his pushes as to conform exactly to the natural rate of vibration of the swing. it is of course possible, however, to make the swing take up other rates of vibrations by the application of sufficient force. as another example, consider a clock pendulum beating seconds. by gentle blows furnished by the escapement at exactly the proper times, the heavy pendulum is kept in motion. however, if a person grasps the pendulum weight and shakes it, it may be made to vibrate at almost any desired rate, dependent on the strength and agility of the individual. the conclusion is, therefore, that a reed or pendulum may be made to start and vibrate easily by the application of impulses at proper intervals, and only with great difficulty by the application of impulses at other than the proper intervals; and these facts form the basis on which harmonic-ringing systems rest. the father of harmonic ringing in telephony was jacob b. currier, an undertaker of lowell, mass. his harmonic bells were placed in series in the telephone line, and were considerably used in new england in commercial practice in the early eighties. somewhat later james a. lighthipe of san francisco independently invented a harmonic-ringing system, which was put in successful commercial use at sacramento and a few other smaller california towns. lighthipe polarized his bells and bridged them across the line in series with condensers, as in modern practice, and save for some crudities in design, his apparatus closely resembled, both in principle and construction, some of that in successful use today. lighthipe's system went out of use and was almost forgotten, when about , wm. w. dean again independently redeveloped the harmonic system, and produced a bell astonishingly like that of lighthipe, but of more refined design, thus starting the development which has resulted in the present wide use of this system. the signal-receiving device in harmonic-ringing systems takes the form of a ringer, having its armature and striker mounted on a rather stiff spring rather than on trunnions. by this means the moving parts of the bell constitute in effect a reed tongue, which has a natural rate of vibration at which it may easily be made to vibrate with sufficient amplitude to strike the gongs. the harmonic ringer differs from the ordinary polarized bell or ringer, therefore, in that its armature will vibrate most easily at one particular rate, while the armature of the ordinary ringer is almost indifferent, between rather wide limits, as to the rate at which it vibrates. as a rule harmonic party-line systems are limited to four stations on a line. the frequencies employed are usually - / , - / , , and - / cycles per second, this corresponding to , , , , , , and , cycles per minute. the reason why this particular set of frequencies was chosen is that they represent approximately the range of desirable frequencies, and that the first ringing-current machines in such systems were made by mounting the armatures of four different generators on a single shaft, these having, respectively, two poles, four poles, six poles, and eight poles each. the two-pole generator gave one cycle per revolution, the four-pole two, the six-pole three, and the eight-pole four, so that by running the shaft of the machine at exactly , revolutions per minute the frequencies before mentioned were attained. this range of frequencies having proved about right for general practice and the early ringers all having been attuned so as to operate on this basis, the practice of adhering to these numbers of vibrations has been kept up with one exception by all the manufacturers who make this type of ringer. _tuning._ the process of adjusting the armature of a ringer to a certain rate of vibration is called tuning, and it is customary to refer to a ringer as being tuned to a certain rate of vibration, just as it is customary to refer to a violin string as being tuned to a certain pitch or rate of vibration. the physical difference between the ringers of the various frequencies consists mainly in the size of the weights at the end of the vibrating reed, that is, of the weights which form the tapper for the bell. the low-frequency ringers have the largest weights and the high-frequency the smallest, of course. the ringers are roughly tuned to the desired frequencies by merely placing on the tapper rod the desired weight and then a more refined tuning is given them by slightly altering the positions of the weights on the tapper rod. to make the reed have a slightly lower natural rate of vibration, the weight is moved further from the stationary end of the reed, while to give it a slightly higher natural rate of vibration the weight is moved toward the stationary. in this way very nice adjustments may be made, and the aim of the various factories manufacturing these bells is to make the adjustment permanent so that it will never have to be altered by the operating companies. several years of experience with these bells has shown that when once properly assembled they maintain the same rate of vibration with great constancy. there are two general methods of operating harmonic bells. one of these may be called the in-tune system and the other the under-tune system. the under-tune system was the first employed. [illustration: operating room at tokyo, japan] _under-tune system._ the early workers in the field of harmonic-selective signaling discovered that when the tapper of the reed struck against gongs the natural rate of vibration of the reed was changed, or more properly, the reed was made to have a different rate of vibration from its natural rate. this was caused by the fact that the elasticity of the gongs proved another factor in the set of conditions causing the reeds to take up a certain rate of vibration, and the effect of this added factor was always to accelerate the rate of vibration which the reed had when it was not striking the gongs. the rebound of the hammer from the gongs tended, in other words, to accelerate the rate of vibration, which, as might be expected, caused a serious difficulty in the practical operation of the bells. to illustrate: if a reed were to have a natural rate of vibration, when not striking the gongs, of per second and a current of cycles per second were impressed on the line, the reed would take up this rate of vibration easily, but when a sufficient amplitude of vibration was attained to cause the tapper to strike the gongs, the reed would be thrown out of tune, on account of the tendency of the gongs to make the reed vibrate at a higher rate. this caused irregular ringing and was frequently sufficient to make the bells cease ringing altogether or to ring in an entirely unsatisfactory manner. in order to provide for this difficulty the early bells of currier and lighthipe were made on what has since been called the "under-tuned" principle. the first bells of the kellogg switchboard and supply company, developed by dean, were based on this idea as their cardinal principle. the reeds were all given a natural rate of vibration, when not striking the gongs, somewhat below that of the current frequencies to be employed; and yet not sufficiently below the corresponding current frequency to make the bell so far out of tune that the current frequency would not be able to start it. this was done so that when the tapper began to strike the gongs the tapper would be accelerated and brought practically into tune with the current frequency, and the ringing would continue regularly as long as the current flowed. it will be seen that the under-tuned system was, therefore, one involving some difficulty in starting in order to provide for proper regularity while actually ringing. ringers of this kind were always made with but a single gong, it being found difficult to secure uniformity of ringing and uniformity of adjustment when two gongs were employed. although no ringers of this type are being made at present, yet a large number of them are in use and they will consequently be described. their action is interesting in throwing better light on the more improved types, if for no other reason. figs. and show, respectively, side and front views of the original kellogg bell. the entire mechanism is self-contained, all parts being mounted on the base plate _ _. the electromagnet is of the two-coil type, and is supported on the brackets _ _ and _ _. the bracket _ _ is of iron so as to afford a magnetic yoke for the field of the electromagnet, while the bracket _ _ is of brass so as not to short-circuit the magnetic lines across the air-gap. the reed tongue--consisting of the steel spring _ _, the soft-iron armature pieces _ _, the auxiliary spring _ _, and the tapper ball _ _, all of which are riveted together, as shown in fig. --constitutes the only moving part of the bell. the steel spring _ _ is rigidly mounted in the clamping piece _ _ at the upper part of the bracket _ _, and the reed tongue is permitted to vibrate only by the flexibility of this spring. the auxiliary spring _ _ is much lighter than the spring _ _ and has for its purpose the provision of a certain small amount of flexibility between the tapper ball and the more rigid portion of the armature formed by the iron strips _ - _. the front ends of the magnet pole pieces extend through the bracket _ _ and are there provided with square soft-iron pole pieces _ _ set at right angles to the magnet cores so as to form a rather narrow air-gap in which the armature may vibrate. [illustration: fig. . under-tuned ringer] the cores of the magnet and also the reed tongue are polarized by means of the =l=-shaped bar magnet _ _, mounted on the iron yoke _ _ at one end in such manner that its other end will lie quite close to the end of the spring _ _, which, being of steel, will afford a path for the lines of force to the armature proper. we see, therefore, that the two magnet cores are, by this permanent magnet, given one polarity, while the reed tongue itself is given the other polarity, this being exactly the condition that has already been described in connection with the regular polarized bell or ringer. the electromagnetic action by which this reed tongue is made to vibrate is, therefore, exactly the same as that of an ordinary polarized ringer, but the difference between the two is that, in this harmonic ringer, the reed tongue will respond only to one particular rate of vibrations, while the regular polarized ringer will respond to almost any. as shown in fig. , the tapper ball strikes on the inside surface of the single gong. the function of the auxiliary spring _ _ between the ball and the main portion of the armature is to allow some resilience between the ball and the balance of the armature so as to counteract in some measure the accelerating influence of the gong on the armature. in these bells, as already stated, the natural rate of vibration of the reed tongue was made somewhat lower than the rate at which the bell was to be operated, so that the reed tongue had to be started by a current slightly out of tune with it, and then, as the tapper struck the gong, the acceleration due to the gong would bring the vibration of the reed tongue, as modified by the gong, into tune with the current that was operating it. in ether words, in this system the ringing currents that were applied to the line had frequencies corresponding to what may be called the _operative rates of vibration_ of the reed tongues, which operative rates of vibration were in each case the resultant of the natural pitch of the reed as modified by the action of the bell gong when struck. [illustration: fig. . under-tuned ringer] _in-tune system._ the more modern method of tuning is to make the natural rate of vibration of the reed tongue, that is, the rate at which it naturally vibrates when not striking the gongs, such as to accurately correspond to the rate of vibration at which the bells are to be operated--that is, the natural rate of vibration of the reed tongues is made the same as the operative rate. thus the bells are attuned for easy starting, a great advantage over the under-tuned system. in the under-tuned system, the reeds being out of tune in starting require heavier starting current, and this is obviously conducive to cross-ringing, that is, to the response of bells to other than the intended frequency. again, easy starting is desirable because when the armature is at rest, or in very slight vibration, it is at a maximum distance from the poles of the electromagnet, and, therefore, subject to the weakest influence of the poles. a current, therefore, which is strong enough to start the vibration, will be strong enough to keep the bell ringing properly. [illustration: fig. . dean in-tune ringer] when with this "in-tune" mode of operation, the armature is thrown into sufficiently wide vibration to cause the tapper to strike the gong, the gong may tend to accelerate the vibration of the reed tongue, but the current impulses through the electromagnet coils continue at precisely the same rates as before. under this condition of vibration, when the reed tongue has an amplitude of vibration wide enough to cause the tapper to strike the gongs, the ends of the armature come closest to the pole pieces, so that the pole pieces have their maximum magnetic effect on the armature, with the result that even if the accelerating tendency of the gongs were considerable, the comparatively large magnetic attractive impulses occurring at the same rate as the natural rate of vibration of the reed tongue, serve wholly to prevent any actual acceleration of the reed tongue. the magnetic attractions upon the ends of the armature, continuing at the initial rate, serve, therefore, as a check to offset any accelerating tendency which the striking of the gong may have upon the vibrating reed tongue. it is obvious, therefore, that in the "in-tune" system the electromagnetic effect on the armature should, when the armature is closest to the pole pieces, be of such an overpowering nature as to prevent whatever accelerating tendency the gongs may have from throwing the armature out of its "stride" in step with the current. for this reason it is usual in this type to so adjust the armature that its ends will actually strike against the pole pieces of the electromagnet when thrown into vibration. sufficient flexibility is given to the tapper rod to allow it to continue slightly beyond the point at which it would be brought to rest by the striking of the armature ends against the pole pieces and thus exert a whipping action so as to allow the ball to continue in its movement far enough to strike against the gongs. the rebound of the gong is then taken up by the elasticity of the tapper rod, which returns to an unflexed position, and at about this time the pole piece releases the armature so that it may swing over in the other direction to cause the tapper to strike the other gong. [illustration: fig. . tappers for dean ringers] the construction of the "in-tune" harmonic ringer employed by the dean electric company, of elyria, ohio, is illustrated in figs. , , and . it will be seen from fig. that the general arrangement of the magnet and armature is the same as that of the ordinary polarized ringer; the essential difference is that the armature is spring-mounted instead of pivoted. the armature and the tapper rod normally stand in the normal central position with reference to the pole pieces of the magnet and the gongs. fig. shows the complete vibrating parts of four ringers, adapted, respectively, to the four different frequencies of the system. the assembled armature, tapper rod, and tapper are all riveted together and are non-adjustable. all of the adjustment that is done upon them is done in the factory and is accomplished, first, by choosing the proper size of weight, and second, by forcing this weight into the proper position on the tapper rod to give exactly the rate of vibration that is desired. [illustration: fig. . dean in-tune ringer] an interesting feature of this dean harmonic ringer is the gong adjustment. as will be seen, the gongs are mounted on posts which are carried on levers pivoted to the ringer frame. these levers have at their outer end a curved rack provided with gear teeth adapted to engage a worm or screw thread mounted on the ringer frame. obviously, by turning this worm screw in one direction or the other, the gongs are moved slightly toward or from the armature or tapper. this affords a very delicate means of adjusting the gongs, and at the same time one which has no tendency to work loose or to get out of adjustment. [illustration: fig. . kellogg in-tune ringer] in fig. is shown a drawing of the "in-tune" harmonic ringer manufactured by the kellogg switchboard and supply company. this differs in no essential respect from that of the dean company, except in the gong adjustment, this latter being affected by a screw passing through a nut in the gong post, as clearly indicated. in both the kellogg and the dean in-tune ringers, on account of the comparative stiffness of the armature springs and on account of the normal position of the armature with maximum air gaps and consequent minimum magnetic pull, the armature will practically not be affected unless the energizing current is accurately attuned to its own natural rate. when the proper current is thrown on to the line, the ball will be thrown into violent vibration, and the ends of the armature brought into actual contact with the pole pieces, which are of bare iron and shielded in no way. the armature in this position is very strongly attracted and comes to a sudden stop on the pole pieces. the gongs are so adjusted that the tapper ball will have to spring about one thirty-second of an inch in order to hit them. the armature is held against the pole piece while the tapper ball is engaged in striking the gong and in partially returning therefrom, and so strong is the pull of the pole piece on the armature in this position that the accelerating influence of the gong has no effect in accelerating the rate of vibration of the reed. [illustration: fig. . circuits of dean harmonic system] _circuits_. in fig. are shown in simplified form the circuits of a four-station harmonic party line. it is seen that at the central office there are four ringing keys, adapted, respectively, to impress on the line ringing currents of four different frequencies. at the four stations on the line, lettered a, b, c, and d, there are four harmonic bells tuned accordingly. at station a there is shown the talking apparatus employing the wheatstone bridge arrangement. the talking apparatus at all of the other stations is exactly the same, but is omitted for the sake of simplicity. a condenser is placed in series with each of the bells in order that there may be no direct-current path from one side of the line to the other when all of the receivers are on their hooks at the several stations. in fig. is shown exactly the same arrangement, with the exception that the talking apparatus illustrated in detail at station a is that of the kellogg switchboard and supply company. otherwise the circuits of the dean and the kellogg company, and in fact of all the other companies manufacturing harmonic ringing systems, are the same. _advantages_. a great advantage of the harmonic party-line system is the simplicity of the apparatus at the subscriber's station. the harmonic bell is scarcely more complex than the ordinary polarized ringer, and the only difference between the harmonic-ringing telephone and the ordinary telephone is in the ringer itself. the absence of all relays and other mechanism and also the absence of the necessity for ground connections at the telephone are all points in favor of the harmonic system. [illustration: fig. . circuits of kellogg harmonic system] _limitations_. as already stated, the harmonic systems of the various companies, with one exception, are limited to four frequencies. the exception is in the case of the north electric company, which sometimes employs four and sometimes five frequencies and thus gets a selection between five stations. in the four-party north system, the frequencies, unlike those in the dean and kellogg systems, wherein the higher frequencies are multiples of the lower, are arranged so as to be proportional to the whole numbers , , , and , which, of course, have no common denominator. the frequencies thus employed in the north system are, in cycles per second, . , . , . , and . . in the five-party system, the frequency of . is arbitrarily added. while all of the commercial harmonic systems on the market are limited to four or five frequencies, it does not follow that a greater number than four or five stations may not be selectively rung. double these numbers may be placed on a party line and selectively actuated, if the first set of four or five is bridged across the line and the second set of four or five is connected between one limb of the line and ground. the first set of these is selectively rung, as already described, by sending the ringing currents over the metallic circuit, while the second set may be likewise selectively rung by sending the ringing currents over one limb of the line with a ground return. this method is frequently employed with success on country lines, where it is desired to place a greater number of instruments on a line than four or five. step-by-step method. a very large number of step-by-step systems have been proposed and reduced to practice, but as yet they have not met with great success in commercial telephone work, and are nowhere near as commonly used as are the polarity and harmonic systems. _principles_. an idea of the general features of the step-by-step systems may be had by conceiving at each station on the line a ratchet wheel, having a pawl adapted to drive it one step at a time, this pawl being associated with the armature of an electromagnet which receives current impulses from the line circuit. there is thus one of these driving magnets at each station, each bridged across the line so that when a single impulse of current is sent out from the central office all of the ratchet wheels will be moved one step. another impulse will move all of the ratchet wheels another step, and so on throughout any desired number of impulses. the ratchet wheels, therefore, are all stepped in unison. let us further conceive that all of these ratchet wheels are provided with a notch or a hole or a projection, alike in all respects at all stations save in the position which this notch or hole or projection occupies on the wheel. the thing to get clear in this part of the conception is that all of these notches, holes, or projections are alike on all of the wheels, but they occupy a different position on the wheel for each one of the stations. consider further that the bell circuit at each of the stations is normally open, but that in each case it is adapted to be closed when the notch, hole, or projection is brought to a certain point by the revolution of the wheel. let us conceive further that this distinguishing notch, hole, or projection is so arranged on the wheel of the first station as to close the bell circuit when one impulse has been sent, that that on the second station will close the bell circuit after the second impulse has been sent, and so on throughout the entire number of stations. it will, therefore, be apparent that the bell circuits at the various stations will, as the wheels are rotated in unison, be closed one after the other. in order to call a given station, therefore, it is only necessary to rotate all of the wheels in unison, by sending out the proper stepping impulses until they all occupy such a position that the one at the desired station is in such position as to close the bell circuit at that station. since all of the notches, holes, or projections are arranged to close the bell circuits at their respective stations at different times, it follows that when the bell circuit at the desired station is closed those at all of the other stations will be open. if, therefore, after the proper number of stepping impulses has been sent to the line to close the bell circuit of the desired station, ringing current be applied to the line, it is obvious that the bell of that one station will be rung to the exclusion of all others. it is, of course, necessary that provision be made whereby the magnets which furnish the energy for stepping the wheels will not be energized by the ringing current. this is accomplished in one of several ways, the most common of which is to have the stepping magnets polarized or biased in one direction and the bells at the various stations oppositely biased, so that the ringing current will not affect the stepping magnet and the stepping current will not affect the ringer magnets. after a conversation is finished, the line may be restored to its normal position in one of several ways. usually so-called release magnets are employed, for operating on the releasing device at each station. these, when energized, will withdraw the holding pawls from the ratchets and allow them all to return to their normal positions. sometimes these release magnets are operated by a long impulse of current, being made too sluggish in their action to respond to the quick-stepping impulses; sometimes the release magnets are tapped from one limb of the line to ground, so as not to be affected by the stepping or ringing currents sent over the metallic circuit; and sometimes other expedients are used for obtaining the release of the ratchets at the proper time, a large amount of ingenuity having been spent to this end. as practically all step-by-step party-line systems in commercial use have also certain other features intended to assure privacy of conversation to the users, and, therefore, come under the general heading of lock-out party-line systems, the discussion of commercial examples of these systems will be left for the next chapter, which is devoted to such lock-out systems. broken-line method. the broken-line system, like the step-by-step system, is also essentially a lock-out system and for that reason only its general features, by which the selective ringing is accomplished, will be dealt with here. _principles_. in this system there are no tuned bells, no positively and negatively polarized bells bridged to ground on each side of the line, and no step-by-step devices in the ordinary sense, by which selective signaling has ordinarily been accomplished on party lines. instead of this, each instrument on the line is exclusively brought into operative relation with the line, and then removed from such operative relation until the subscriber wanted is connected, at which time all of the other instruments are locked out and the line is not encumbered by any bridge circuits at any of the instruments that are not engaged in the conversation. furthermore, in the selecting of a subscriber or the ringing of his bell there is no splitting up of current among the magnets at the various stations as in ordinary practice, but the operating current goes straight to the station desired and to that station alone where its entire strength is available for performing its proper work. in order to make the system clear it may be stated at the outset that one side of the metallic circuit line is continued as in ordinary practice, passing through all of the stations as a continuous conductor. the other side of the line, however, is divided into sections, its continuity being broken at each of the subscriber's stations. fig. is intended to show in the simplest possible way how the circuit of the line may be extended from station to station in such manner that only the ringer of one station is in circuit at a time. the two sides of the line are shown in this figure, and it will be seen that limb _l_ extends from the central office on the left to the last station on the right without a break. the limb _r_, however, extends to the first station, at which point it is cut off from the extension _r_{x}_ by the open contacts of a switch. for the purpose of simplicity this switch is shown as an ordinary hand switch, but as a matter of fact it is a part of a relay, the operating coil of which is shown at _ _, just above it, in series with the ringer. [illustration: fig. . principle of broken-line system] obviously, if a proper ringing current is sent over the metallic circuit from the central office, only the bell at station a will operate, since the bells at the other stations are not in the circuit. if by any means the switch lever _ _ at station a were moved out of engagement with contact _ _ and into engagement with contact _ _, it is obvious that the bell of station a would no longer be in circuit, but the limb _r_ of the line would be continued to the extension _r_{x}_ and the bell of station b would be in circuit. any current then sent over the circuit of the line from the central office would ring the bell of this station. in fig. the switches of both station a and station b have been thus operated, and station c is thus placed in circuit. inspection of this figure will show that the bells of station a, station b, and station d are all cut out of circuit, and that, therefore, no current from the central office can affect them. this general scheme of selection is a new-comer in the field, and for certain classes of work it is of undoubted promise. [illustration: fig. . principle of broken-line system] chapter xvii lock-out party-line systems the party-line problem in rural districts is somewhat different from that within urban limits. in the latter cases, owing to the closer grouping of the subscribers, it is not now generally considered desirable, even from the standpoint of economy, to place more than four subscribers on a single line. for such a line selective ringing is simple, both from the standpoint of apparatus and operation; and moreover owing to the small number of stations on a line, and the small amount of traffic to and from such subscribers as usually take party-line service, the interference between parties on the same line is not a very serious matter. for rural districts, particularly those tributary to small towns, these conditions do not exist. owing to the remoteness of the stations from each other it is not feasible from the standpoint of line cost to limit the number of stations to four. a much greater number of stations is employed and the confusion resulting is distressing not only to the subscribers themselves but also to the management of the company. there exists then the need of a party-line system which will give the limited user in rural districts a service, at least approaching that which he would get if served by an individual line. the principal investment necessary to provide facilities for telephone service is that required to produce the telephone line. in many cases the cost of instruments and apparatus is small in comparison with the cost of the line. by far the greater number of subscribers in rural districts are those who use their instruments a comparatively small number of times a day, and to maintain an expensive telephone line for the exclusive use of one such subscriber who will use it but a few minutes each day is on its face an economic waste. as a result, where individual line service is practiced exclusively one of two things must be true: either the average subscriber pays more for his service than he should, or else the operating company sells the service for less than it costs, or at best for an insufficient profit. both of these conditions are unnatural and cannot be permanent. the party-line method of giving service, by which a single line is made to serve a number of subscribers, offers a solution to this difficulty, but the ordinary non-selective or even selective party line has many undesirable features if the attempt is made to place on it such a large number of stations as is considered economically necessary in rural work. these undesirable features work to the detriment of both the user of the telephone and the operating company. many attempts have been made to overcome these disadvantages of the party line in sparsely settled communities, by producing what are commonly called lock-out systems. these, as their name implies, employ such an arrangement of parts that when the line is in use by any two parties, all other parties are locked out from the circuit and cannot gain access to it until the parties who are using it are through. system after system for accomplishing this purpose has been announced but for the most part these have involved such a degree of complexity and have introduced so many undesirable features as to seriously affect the smooth operation of the system and the reliability of the service. we believe, however, in spite of numerous failures, that the lock-out selective-signaling party line has a real field of usefulness and that operating companies as well as manufacturing companies are beginning to appreciate this need, and as a result that the relief of the rural subscriber from the almost intolerable service he has often had to endure is at hand. a few of the most promising lock-out party-line systems now before the public will, therefore, be described in some detail. poole system. the poole system is a lock-out system pure and simple, its devices being in the nature of a lock-out attachment for selective-signaling lines, either of the polarity or of the harmonic type wherein common-battery transmission is employed. it will be here described as employed in connection with an ordinary harmonic-ringing system. in fig. there is shown a four-station party line equipped with poole lock-out devices, it being assumed that the ringers at each station are harmonic and that the keys at the central office are the ordinary keys adapted to impress the proper frequency on the line for ringing any one of the stations. in addition to the ordinary talking and ringing apparatus at each subscriber's station, there is a relay of special form and also a push-button key. [illustration: fig. . poole lock-out system] each of the relays has two windings, one of high resistance and the other of low resistance. remembering that the system to which this device is applied is always a common-battery system, and that, therefore, the normal condition of the line will be one in which there is a difference of potential between the two limbs, it will be evident that whenever any subscriber on a line that is not in use raises his receiver from its hook, a circuit will be established from the upper contact of the hook through the lever of the hook to the high-resistance winding _ _ of the relay and thence to the other side of the line by way of wire _ _. this will result in current passing through the high-resistance winding of the relay and the relay will pull up its armature. as soon as it does so it establishes two other circuits by the closure of the relay armature against the contacts _ _ and _ _. the closing of the contact _ _ establishes a circuit from the upper side of the line through the upper contact of the switch hook, thence through the contacts of the push button _ _, thence through the low-resistance winding _ _ of the relay to the terminal _ _, thence through the relay armature and the transmitter to the lower side of the line. this low-resistance path across the line serves to hold the relay armature attracted and also to furnish current to the transmitter for talking. the establishment of this low-resistance path across the line does another important thing, however; it practically short-circuits the line with respect to all the high-resistance relay windings, and thus prevents any of the other high-resistance relay windings from receiving enough current to actuate them, should the subscriber at any other station remove his receiver from the hook in an attempt to listen in or to make a call while the line is in use. as a subscriber can only establish the proper conditions for talking and listening by the attraction of this relay armature at his station, it is obvious that unless he can cause the pulling up of his relay armature he can not place himself in communication with the line. the second thing that is accomplished by the pulling up of the relay armature is the closure of the contacts _ _, and that completes the talking circuit through the condenser and receiver across the line in an obvious fashion. the result of this arrangement is that it is the first party who raises his receiver from its hook who is enabled to successfully establish a connection with the line, all subsequent efforts, by other subscribers, failing to do so because of the fact that the line is short-circuited by the path through the low-resistance winding and the transmitter of the station that is already connected with the line. a little target is moved by the action of the relay so that a visual indication is given to the subscriber in making a call to show whether or not he is successful in getting the use of the line. if the relay operates and he secures control of the line, the target indicates the fact by its movement, while if someone else is using the line and the relay does not operate, the target, by its failure to move, indicates that fact. when one party desires to converse with another on the same line, he depresses the button _ _ at his station until after the called party has been rung and has responded. this holds the circuit of his low-resistance winding open, and thus prevents the lock-out from becoming effective until the called party is connected with the line. the relay armature of the calling party does not fall back with the establishment of the low-resistance path at the called station, because, even though shunted, it still receives sufficient current to hold its armature in its attracted position. after the called party has responded, the button at the calling station is released and both low-resistance holding coils act in multiple. [illustration: one wing of operating room, berlin, germany ultimate capacity , subscribers' lines and , trunk lines. siemens-halske equipment. note horizontal disposal of multiple jack field.] no induction coil is used in this system and the impedance of the holding coil is such that incoming voice currents flow through the condenser and the receiver, which, by reference to the figure, will be seen to be in shunt with the holding coil. the holding coil is in series with the local transmitter, thus making a circuit similar to that of the kellogg common-battery talking circuit already discussed. a possible defect in the use of this system is one that has been common to a great many other lock-out systems, depending for their operation on the same general plan of action. this appears when the instruments are used on a comparatively long line. since the locking-out of all the instruments that are not in use by the one that is in use depends on the low-resistance shunt that is placed across the line by the instrument that is in use, it is obvious that, in the case of a long line, the resistance of the line wire will enter into the problem in such a way as to tend to defeat the locking-out function in some cases. thus, where the first instrument to use the line is at the remote end of the line, the shunting effect that this instrument can exert with respect to another instrument near the central office is that due to the resistance of the line plus the resistance of the holding coil at the end instrument. the resistance of the line wire may be so high as to still allow a sufficient current to flow through the high-resistance coil at the nearer station to allow its operation, even though the more remote instrument is already in use. coming now to a consideration of the complete selective-signaling lock-out systems, wherein the selection of the party and the locking out of the others are both inherent features, a single example of the step-by-step, and of the broken-line selective lock-out systems will be discussed. step-by-step system. the so-called k.b. system, manufactured by the dayton telephone lock-out manufacturing company of dayton, ohio, operates on the step-by-step principle. the essential feature of the subscriber's telephone equipment in this system is the step-by-step actuating mechanism which performs also the functions of a relay. this device consists of an electromagnet having two cores, with a permanent polarizing magnet therebetween, the arrangement in this respect being the same as in an ordinary polarized bell. the armature of this magnet works a rocker arm, which, besides stepping the selector segment around, also, under certain conditions, closes the bell circuit and the talking circuit, as will be described. [illustration: fig. . k.b. lock-out system] referring first to fig. , which shows in simplified form a four-station k.b. lock-out line, the electromagnet is shown at _ _ and the rocker arm at _ _. the ratchet _ _ in this case is not a complete wheel but rather a segment thereof, and it is provided with a series of notches of different depths. it is obvious that the depth of the notches will determine the degree of movement which the upper end of the rocker arm may have toward the left, this being dependent on the extent to which the pawl _ _ is permitted to enter into the segment. the first or normal notch, _i.e._, the top notch, is always of such a depth that it will allow the rocker-arm lever _ _ to engage the contact lever _ _, but will not permit the rocker arm to swing far enough to the left to cause that contact to engage the bell contact _ _. as will be shown later, the condition for the talking circuit to be closed is that the rocker arm _ _ shall rest against the contact _ _; and from this we see that the normal notch of each of the segments _ _ is of such a depth as to allow the talking circuit at each station to be closed. the next notch, _i.e._, the second one in each disk, is always shallow, as are all of the other notches except one. a deep notch is placed on each disk anywhere from the third to the next to the last on the segment. this deep notch is called the _selective notch_, and it is the one that allows of contact being made with the ringer circuit of that station when the pawl _ _ drops into it. the position of this notch differs on all of the segments on a line, and obviously, therefore, the ringer circuit at any station may be closed to the exclusion of all the others by stepping all of the segments in unison until the deep notch on the segment of the desired station lies opposite to the pawl _ _, which will permit the rocker arm _ _ to swing so far to the left as to close not only the circuit between _ _ and _ _, but also between _ _, _ _, and _ _. in this position the talking and the ringing circuits are both closed. the position of the deepest notch, _i.e._, the selective notch, on the circumference of the segment at any station depends upon the number of that station; thus, the segment of station will have a deep notch in the sixth position; the segment for station will have a deep notch in the eleventh position; the segment for any station will have a deep notch in the position corresponding to the number of that station plus two. from what has been said, therefore, it is evident that the first, or normal, notch on each segment is of such a depth as to allow the moving pawl _ _ to fall to such a depth in the segment as to permit the rocker arm _ _ to close the talking circuit only. all of the other notches, except one, are comparatively shallow, and while they permit the moving pawl _ _ under the influence of the rocker arm _ _ to move the segment _ _, yet they do not permit the rocker arm _ _ to move so far to the left as to close even the talking circuit. the exception is the deep notch, or selective notch, which is of such depth as to permit the pawl _ _ to fall so far into the segment as to allow the rocker arm _ _ to close both the talking and the ringing circuits. besides the moving pawl _ _ there is a detent pawl _ _. this always holds the segment _ _ in the position to which it has been last moved by the moving pawl _ _. the actuating magnet _ _, as has been stated, is polarized and when energized by currents in one direction, the rocker arm moves the pawl _ _ so as to step the segment one notch. when this relay is energized by current in the opposite direction, the operation is such that both the moving pawl _ _ and the detent pawl _ _ will be pulled away from the segment, thus allowing the segment to return to its normal position by gravity. this is accomplished by the following mechanism: an armature stop is pivoted upon the face of the rocker arm so as to swing in a plane parallel to the pole faces of the relay, and is adapted, when the relay is actuated by selective impulses of one polarity, to be pulled towards one of the pole faces where it acts, through impact with a plate attached to the pole face of the relay, as a limiting means for the motion of the rocker arm when the rocker arm is actuated by the magnet. when, however, the relay is energized by current in the opposite direction, as on a releasing impulse, the armature stop swings upon its pivot towards the opposite pole face, in which position the lug on the end of the armature stop registers with a hole in the plate on the relay, thus allowing the full motion of the rocker arm when it is attracted by the magnet. this motion of the rocker arm withdraws the detent pawl from engagement with the segment as well as the moving pawl, and thereby permits the segment to return to its normal position. as will be seen from fig. , each of the relay magnets _ _ is permanently bridged across the two limbs of the line. each station is provided with a push button, not shown, by means of which the subscriber who makes a call may prevent the rocker arm of his instrument from being actuated while selective impulses are being sent over the line. the purpose of this is to enable one party to make a call for another on the same line, depressing his push button while the operator is selecting and ringing the called party. the segment at his own station, therefore, remains in its normal position, in which position, as we have already seen, his talking circuit is closed; all of the other segments are, however, stepped up until the ringing and talking circuits of the desired station are in proper position, at which time ringing current is sent over the line. the segments in fig. , except at station c, are shown as having been stepped up to the sixth position, which corresponds to the ringing position of the fourth station, or station d. the condition shown in this figure corresponds to that in which the subscriber at station c originated the call and pressed his button, thus retaining his own segment in its normal position so that the talking circuits would be established with station d. when the line is in normal position any subscriber may call central by his magneto generator, not shown in fig. , which will operate the drop at central, but will not operate any of the subscribers' bells, because all bell circuits are normally open. when a subscriber desires connection with another line, the operator sends an impulse back on the line which steps up and locks out all instruments except that of the calling subscriber. [illustration: fig. . k.b. lock-out station] a complete k.b. lock-out telephone is shown in fig. . this is the type of instrument that is usually furnished when new equipment is ordered. if, however, it is desired to use the k.b. system in connection with telephones of the ordinary bridging type that are already in service, the lock-out and selective mechanism, which is shown on the upper inner face of the door in fig. , is furnished separately in a box that may be mounted close to the regular telephone and connected thereto by suitable wires, as shown in fig. . it is seen that this instrument employs a local battery for talking and also a magneto generator for calling the central office. the central-office equipment consists of a dial connected with an impulse wheel, together with suitable keys by which the various circuits may be manipulated. this dial and its associated mechanism may be mounted in the regular switchboard cabinet, or it may be furnished in a separate box and mounted alongside of the cabinet in either of the positions shown at _ _ or _ _ of fig. . in order to send the proper number of impulses to the line to call a given party, the operator places her finger in the hole in the dial that bears the number corresponding to the station wanted and rotates the dial until the finger is brought into engagement with the fixed stop shown at the bottom of the dial in fig. . the dial is then allowed to return by the action of a spring to its normal position, and in doing so it operates a switch within the box to make and break the battery circuit the proper number of times. _operation._ a complete description of the operation may now be had in connection with fig. , which is similar to fig. , but contains the details of the calling arrangement at the central office and also of the talking circuits at the various subscribers' stations. [illustration: fig. . k.b. lock-out station] referring to the central-office apparatus the usual ringing key is shown, the inside contacts of which lead to the listening key and to the operator's telephone set as in ordinary switchboard practice. between the outside contact of this ringing key and the ringing generator there is interposed a pair of contact springs _ - _ and another pair _ - _. the contact springs _ _ are adapted to be moved backward and forward by the impulse wheel which is directly controlled by the dial under the manipulation of the operator. when these springs _ _ are in their normal position, the ringing circuit is continued through the release-key springs _ _ to the ringing generator. these springs _ _ occupy their normal position only when the dial is in its normal position, this being due to the notch _ _ in the contact wheel. at all other times, _i.e._, while the impulse wheel is out of its normal position, the springs _ - _ are either depressed so as to engage the lower battery contacts, or else held in an intermediate position so as to engage neither the battery contacts nor the generator contacts. [illustration: fig. . calling apparatus k.b. system] when it is desired to call a given station, the operator pulls the subscriber's number on the dial and holds the ringing key closed, allowing the dial to return to normal. this connects the impulse battery to the subscriber's line as many times as is required to move the subscriber's sectors to the proper position, and in such direction as to cause the stepping movement of the various relays. as the impulse wheel comes to its normal position, the springs _ _, associated with it, again engage their upper contacts, by virtue of the notch _ _ in the impulse wheel, and this establishes the connection between the ringing generator and the subscriber's line, the ringing key being still held closed. the pulling of the transmitter dial and holding the ringing key closed, therefore, not only sends the stepping impulses to line, but also follows it by the ringing current. the sending of five impulses to line moves all of the sectors to the sixth notch, and this corresponds to the position necessary to make the fourth station operative. such a condition is shown in fig. , it being assumed that the subscriber at station c originated the call and pressed his own button so as to prevent his sector from being moved out of its normal position. as a result of this, the talking circuit at station c is left closed, and the talking and the ringing circuit of station d, the called station, are closed, while both the talking and the ringing circuits of all the other stations are left open. station d may, therefore, be rung and may communicate with station c, while all of the other stations on the line are locked out, because of the fact that both their talking and ringing circuits are left open. [illustration: fig. . circuit k.b. system] when conversation is ended, the operator is notified by the usual clearing-out signal, and she then depresses the release button, which brings the springs _ _ out of engagement with the generator contact but into engagement with the battery contact in such relation as to send a battery current on the line in the reverse direction from that sent out by the impulse wheel. this sends current through all of the relays in such direction as to withdraw both the moving and the holding pawls from the segments and thus allow all of the segments to return to their normal positions. of course, in thus establishing the release current, it is necessary for the operator to depress the ringing key as well as the release key. a one-half microfarad condenser is placed in the receiver circuit at each station so that the line will not be tied up should some subscriber inadvertently leave his receiver off its hook. this permits the passage of voice currents, but not of the direct currents used in stepping the relays or in releasing them. the circuit of fig. is somewhat simplified from that in actual practice, and it should be remembered that the hook switch, which is not shown in this figure, controls in the usual way the continuity of the receiver and the transmitter circuits as well as of the generator circuits, the generator being attached to the line as in an ordinary telephone. broken-line system. the broken-line method of accomplishing selective signaling and locking-out on telephone party lines is due to homer roberts and his associates. [illustration: fig. . roberts latching relay] to understand just how the principles illustrated in figs. and are put into effect, it will be necessary to understand the latching relay shown diagrammatically in its two possible positions in fig. , and in perspective in fig. . referring to fig. , the left-hand cut of which shows the line relay in its normal position, it is seen that the framework of the device resembles that of an ordinary polarized ringer. under the influence of current in one direction flowing through the left-hand coil, the armature of this device depresses the hard rubber stud _ _, and the springs _ _, _ _, and _ _ are forced downwardly until the spring _ _ has passed under the latch carried on the spring _ _. when the operating current through the coil _ _ ceases, the pressure of the armature on the spring _ _ is relieved, allowing this spring to resume its normal position and spring _ _ to engage with spring _ _. the spring _ _ cannot rise, since it is held by the latch _ _, and the condition shown in the right-hand cut of fig. exists. it will be seen that the spring _ _ has in this operation carried out just the same function as the switch lever performed as described in connection with figs. and . an analysis of this action will show that the normal contact between the springs _ _ and _ _, which contact controls the circuit through the relay coil and the bell, is not broken until the coil _ _ is de-energized, which means that the magnet is effective until it has accomplished its work. it is impossible, therefore, for this relay to cut itself out of circuit before it has caused the spring _ _ to engage under the latch _ _. if current of the proper direction were sent through the coil _ _ of the relay, the opposite end of the armature would be pulled down and the hard rubber stud at the left-hand end of the armature would bear against the bent portion of the spring _ _ in such manner as to cause the latch of this spring to release the spring _ _ and thus allow the relay to assume its normal, or unlatched, position. a good idea of the mechanical construction of this relay may be obtained from fig. . the entire selecting function of the roberts system is performed by this simple piece of apparatus at each station. [illustration: fig. . roberts latching relay] the diagram of fig. shows, in simplified form, a four-station line, the circuits being given more in detail than in the diagrams of chapter xvi. it will be noticed that the ringer and the relay coil _ _ at the first station are bridged across the sides of the line leading to the central office. in like manner the bell and the relay magnets are bridged across the two limbs of the line leading into each succeeding station, but this bridge at each of the stations beyond station a is ineffective because the line extension _r__{x} is open at the next station nearest the central office. [illustration: fig. . simplified circuits of roberts system] in order to ring station a it is only necessary to send out ringing current from the central office. this current is in such direction as not to cause the operation of the relay, although it passes through the coil _ _. if, on the other hand, it is desired to ring station b, a preliminary impulse would be sent over the metallic circuit from the central office, which impulse would be of such direction as to operate the relay at station a, but not to operate the bell at that station. the operation of the relay at station a causes the spring _ _ of this relay to engage the spring _ _, thus extending the line on to the second station. after the spring _ _ at station a has been forced into contact with the spring _ _, it is caught by the latch of the spring _ _ and held mechanically. when the impulse from the central office ceases, the spring _ _ resumes its normal position, thus breaking the bridge circuit through the bell at that station. it is apparent now that the action of coil _ _ at station a has made the relay powerless to perform any further action, and at the same time the line has been extended on to the second station. a second similar impulse from the central office will cause the relay at station b to extend the line on to station c, and at the same time break the circuit through the operating coil and the bell at station b. in this way any station may be picked out by sending the proper number of impulses to operate the line relays of all the stations between the station desired and the central office, and having picked out a station it is only necessary to send out ringing current, which current is in such direction as to ring the bell but not to operate the relay magnet at that station. in fig. , a four-station line, such as is shown in fig. , is illustrated, but the condition shown in this is that existing when two preliminary impulses have been sent over the line, which caused the line relays at station a and station b to be operated. the bell at station c is, therefore, the only one susceptible to ringing current from the central office. [illustration: fig. . simplified circuits of roberts system] since only one bell and one relay are in circuit at any one time, it is obvious that all of the current that passes over the line is effective in operating a single bell or relay only. there is no splitting up of the current among a large number of bells as in the bridging system of operating step-by-step devices, which method sometimes so greatly reduces the effective current for each bell that it is with great difficulty made to respond. all the energy available is applied directly to the piece of apparatus at the time it is being operated. this has a tendency toward greater surety of action, and the adjustment of the various pieces of apparatus may be made with less delicacy than is required where many pieces of apparatus, each having considerable work to do, must necessarily be operated in multiple. the method of unlatching the relays has been briefly referred to. after a connection has been established with a station in the manner already described, the operator may clear the line when it is proper to do so by sending impulses of such a nature as to cause the line relays of the stations beyond the one chosen to operate, thus continuing the circuit to the end of the line. the operation of the line relay at the last station brings into circuit the coil _ _, figs. and , of a grounding device. this is similar to the line relay, but it holds its operating spring in a normally latched position so as to maintain the two limbs of the line disconnected from the ground. the next impulse following over the metallic circuit passes through the coil _ _ and causes the operation of this grounding device which, by becoming unlatched, grounds the limb _l_ of the line through the coil _ _. this temporary ground at the end of the line makes it possible to send an unlocking or restoring current from the central office over the limb _l_, which current passes through all of the unlocking coils _ _, shown in figs. , , and , thus causing the simultaneous unlocking of all of the line relays and the restoration of the line to its normal condition, as shown in fig. . [illustration: fig. . details of latching relay connections] as has been stated, the windings _ _ on the line relays are the unlatching windings. in figs. and , for the purpose of simplicity, these windings are not shown connected, but as a matter of fact each of them is included in series in the continuous limb _l_ of the line. this would introduce a highly objectionable feature from the standpoint of talking over the line were it not for the balancing coils _ _^{ }, each wound on the same core as the corresponding winding _ _, and each included in series in the limb _r_ of the line, and in such direction as to be differential thereto with respect to currents passing in series over the two limbs of the line. the windings _ _ are the true unlocking windings, while the windings _ _^{ } have no other function than to neutralize the inductive effects of these unlocking windings necessarily placed in series in the talking circuit. all of these windings are of low ohmic resistance, a construction which, as has previously been noted, brings about the desired effect without introducing any self-induction in the line, and without producing any appreciable effect upon the transmission. a study of fig. will make clear the connections of these unlocking and balancing windings at each station. the statement of operation so far given discloses the general method of building up the line in sections in order to choose any party and of again breaking it up into sections when the conversation is finished. it has been stated that the same operation which selects the party wanted also serves to give that party the use of the line and to lock the others off. that this is true will be understood when it is stated that the ringer is of such construction that when operated to ring the subscriber wanted, it also operates to unlatch a set of springs similar to those shown in fig. , this unlatching causing the proper connection of the subscriber's talking circuit across the limbs of the line, and also closing the local circuit through his transmitter. the very first motion of the bell armature performs this unlatching operation after which the bell behaves exactly as an ordinary polarized biased ringer. [illustration: fig. . broken-back ringer] the construction of this ringer is interesting and is shown in its two possible positions in fig. . the group of springs carried on its frame is entirely independent of the movement of the armature during the ringing operation. with reversed currents, however, the armature is moved in the opposite direction from that necessary to ring the bells, and this causes the latching of the springs into their normal position. in order that this device may perform the double function of ringer and relay the tapper rod of the bell is hinged on the armature so as to partake of the movements of the armature in one direction only. this has been called by the inventor and engineers of the roberts system a _broken-back ringer_, a name suggestive of the movable relation between the armature and the tapper rod. the construction of the ringer is of the same nature as that of the standard polarized ringer universally employed, but a hinge action between the armature and the tapper rod, of such nature as to make the tapper partake positively of the movements of the armature in one direction, but to remain perfectly quiescent when the armature moves in the other direction, is provided. [illustration: fig. . details of ringer connection] how this broken-back ringer controls the talking and the locking-out conditions may best be understood in connection with fig. . the ringer springs are normally latched at all stations. under these conditions the receiver is short-circuited by the engagement of springs _ _ and _ _, the receiver circuit is open between springs _ _ and _ _, and the local-battery circuit is open between springs _ _ and _ _. the subscribers whose ringers are latched are, therefore, locked out in more ways than one. when the bell is rung, the first stroke it makes unlatches the springs, which assume the position shown in the right-hand cut of fig. , and this, it will be seen from fig. , establishes proper conditions for enabling the subscriber to transmit and to receive speech. the hook switch breaks both transmitter and receiver circuits when down and in raising it establishes a momentary circuit between the ground and the limb _l_ of the line, both upper and lower hook contacts engaging the hook lever simultaneously during the rising of the hook. the mechanism at the central office by which selection of the proper station is made in a rapid manner is shown in fig. . it has already been stated that the selection of the proper subscriber is brought about by the sending of a predetermined number of impulses from the central office, these impulses passing in one direction only and over the metallic circuit. after the proper party has been reached, the ringing current is put on in the reverse direction. [illustration: fig. . central-office impulse transmitter] the operator establishes the number of impulses to be sent by placing the pointer opposite the number on the dial corresponding to the station wanted. the ratchet wheel is stepped around automatically by each impulse of current from an ordinary pole changer such as is employed in ringing biased bells. when the required number of impulses has been sent, a projection, carried on a group of springs, drops into a notch on the drum of the selector shaft, which operation instantly stops the selecting current impulses and at the same time throws on the ringing current which consists of impulses in the reverse direction. so rapidly does this device operate that it will readily follow the impulses of an ordinary pole changer, even when this is adjusted to its maximum rate of vibration. [illustration: view of a large foreign multiple switchboard] _operation._ space will not permit a full discussion of the details of the central-office selective apparatus, but a general resumé of the operation of the system may now be given, with the aid of fig. , which shows a four-station line with the circuits of three of the stations somewhat simplified. in this figure station a, station b, and station d are shown in their locked-out positions, a and b having been passed by the selection and ringing of station c, while station d is inoperative because it was not reached in the selection and the line is still broken at station c. station c, therefore, has possession of the line. when the subscriber at station c raised his receiver in order to call central, a "flash" contact was made as the hook moved up, which momentarily grounded the limb _l_ of the line. (see fig. .) this "flash" contact is produced by the arrangement of the hook which assures that the lower contact shall, by virtue of its flexibility, follow up the hook lever until the hook lever engages the upper contact, after which the lower contact breaks. this results in the momentary connection of both the upper and the lower contacts of the hook with the lever, and, therefore, the momentary grounding of the limb _l_ of the line. this limb always being continuous serves, when this "flash" contact is made, to actuate the line signal at the central office. [illustration: fig. . circuits of roberts line] since, however, all parties on the line are normally locked out of talking circuits, some means must be provided whereby the operator may place the signaling party in talking connection and leave all the other instruments on the line in their normally locked-out position. in fact, the operator must be able automatically to pick out the station that signaled in, and operate the ringer to unlatch the springs controlling the talking circuit of that station. accordingly the operator sends impulses on the line, from a grounded battery, which are in the direction to operate the line relays and to continue the line circuit to the station calling. when, after a sufficient number of impulses, this current reaches that station it finds a path to ground from the limb _l_. this path is made possible by the fact that the subscriber's receiver is off its hook at that station. in order to understand just how this ground connection is made, it must be remembered that each of the ringer magnets is energized with each selecting impulse, but in such a direction as not to ring the bells, it being understood that all of the ringer mechanisms are normally latched. when the selecting impulse for station c arrives, it passes through the ringer and the selecting relay coils at that station and starts to operate the remainder of the ringers sufficiently to cause the spring _ _ to engage the spring _ _. this establishes the ground connection from the limb _l_ of the line, the circuit being traced through limb _l_ through the upper contact of the switch, thence through springs _ _ and _ _ to ground, and this, before the line relay has time to latch, operates the quick-acting relay at the central office, which acts to cut off further impulses, and thus automatically stops at the calling station. ringing current in the opposite direction is then sent to line; this unlatches the ringer springs and places the calling subscriber in talking circuit. when the operator has communicated with the calling subscriber, and found, for example, that another party on another similar line is desired, she turns the dial pointer on the selector to the number corresponding to the called-for party's number on that line, and presses the signal key. pressing this key causes impulses to "run down the line," selecting the proper party and ringing his bell in the manner already described. the connection between the two parties is then established, and no one else can in any possible way, except by permission of the operator, obtain access to the line. it is obvious that some means must be provided for restoring the selecting relays to normal after a conversation is finished. by referring to fig. it will be seen that the upper end of the latch spring _ _ is bent over in such a manner that when the armature is attracted by current flowing through the coil _ _, the knob on the left-hand end of the armature on rising engages with the bent cam surface and forces back the latch, permitting spring _ _ to return to its normal position. to restore the line the operator sends out sufficient additional selective impulses to extend the circuit to the end of the line, and thus brings the grounder into circuit. the winding of the grounder is connected in such a manner that the next passing impulse throws off its latch, permitting the long spring to contact with the ground spring. the operator now sends a grounded impulse over the continuous limb _l_ of the line which passes through the restoring coils _ _ at all the stations and through the right-hand coil of the grounding device to ground. the selecting relays are, therefore, simultaneously restored to normal. the grounder is also energized and restored to its normal position by the same current. if a party in calling finds that his own line is busy and he cannot get central, he may leave his receiver off its hook. when the party who is using the line hangs up his receiver the fact that another party desires a connection is automatically indicated to the operator, who then locks out the instrument of the party who has just finished conversation and passes his station by. when the operator again throws the key, the waiting subscriber is automatically selected in the same manner as was the first party. if there are no subscribers waiting for service, the stop relay at central will not operate until the grounder end of the line is unlatched, the selecting relays being then restored automatically to normal. the circuits are so organized that at all times whether the line is busy or not, the movement up and down of the switch hook, at any sub-station, operates a signal before the operator. such a movement, when made slowly and repeatedly, indicates to the operator that the subscriber has an emergency call and she may use her judgment as to taking the line away from the parties who are using it, and finding out what the emergency call is for. if the operator finds that the subscriber has misused this privilege of making the emergency call, she may restore the connection to the parties previously engaged in conversation. one of the salient points of this roberts system is that the operator always has control of the line. a subscriber is not able even to use his own battery till permitted to do so. a subscriber who leaves his receiver off its hook in order that he may be signaled by the operator when the line is free, causes no deterioration of the local battery because the battery circuit is held open by the switch contacts carried on the ringer. it cannot be denied, however, that this system is complicated, and that it has other faults. for instance, as described herein, both sides of the line must be looped into each subscriber's station, thus requiring four drop, or service, wires instead of two. it is possible to overcome this objection by placing the line relays on the pole in a suitably protected casing, in which case it is sufficient to run but two drop wires from the nearer line to station. there are undoubtedly other objections to this system, and yet with all its faults it is of great interest, and although radical in many respects, it teaches lessons of undoubted value. chapter xviii electrical hazards all telephone systems are exposed to certain electrical hazards. when these hazards become actively operative as causes, harmful results ensue. the harmful results are of two kinds: those causing damage to property and those causing damage to persons. the damage to persons may be so serious as to result in death. damage to property may destroy the usefulness of a piece of apparatus or of some portion of the wire plant. or the property damage may initiate itself as a harm to apparatus or wiring and may result in greater and extending damage by starting a fire. electrical currents which endanger life and property may be furnished by natural or artificial causes. natural electricity which does such damage usually displays itself as lightning. in rare cases, currents tending to flow over grounded lines because of extraordinary differences of potential between sections of the earth's surface have damaged apparatus in such lines, or only have been prevented from causing such damage by the operation of protective devices. telegraph and telephone systems have been threatened by natural electrical hazards since the beginning of the arts and by artificial electrical hazards since the development of electric light and power systems. at the present time, contrary to the general supposition, it is in the artificial, and not in the natural electrical hazards that the greater variety and degree of danger lies. of the ways in which artificial electricity may injure a telephone system, the entrance of current from an external electrical power system is a greater menace than an abnormal flow of current from a source belonging to the telephone system itself. yet modern practice provides opportunities for a telephone system to inflict damage upon itself in that way. telephone engineering designs need to provide means for protecting _all_ parts of a system against damage, from external ("foreign") as well as internal ("domestic") hazards, and to cause this protection to be inclusive enough to protect persons against injury and property from damage by any form of overheating or electrolytic action. a part of a telephone system for which there is even a remote possibility of contact with an external source of electrical power, whether natural or artificial, is said to be _exposed_ to electrical hazard. the degree or character of possible contact or other interference often is referred to in relative terms of _exposure_. the same terms are used concerning inductive relations between circuits. the whole tendency of design, particularly of wire plants, is to arrange the circuits in such a way as to limit the exposure as greatly as possible, the intent being to produce a condition in which all parts of the system will be _unexposed_ to hazards. methods of design are not yet sufficiently advanced for any plant to be formed of circuits wholly unexposed, so that protective means are required to safeguard apparatus and circuits in case the hazard, however remote, becomes operative. lightning discharges between the clouds and earth frequently charge open wires to potentials sufficiently high to damage apparatus; and less frequently, to destroy the wires of the lines themselves. lightning discharges between clouds frequently induce charges in lines sufficient to damage apparatus connected with the lines. heavy rushes of current in lines, from lightning causes, occasionally induce damaging currents in adjacent lines not sufficiently exposed to the original cause to have been injured without this induction. the lightning hazard is least where the most lines are exposed. in a small city with all of the lines formed of exposed wires and all of them used as grounded circuits, a single lightning discharge may damage many switchboard signals and telephone ringers if there be but or lines, while the damage might have been nothing had there been to , lines in the same area. means of protecting lines and apparatus against damage by lightning are little more elaborate than in the earliest days of telegraph working. they are adequate for the almost entire protection of life and of apparatus. power circuits are classified by the rules of various governing bodies as high-potential and low-potential circuits. the classification of the national board of fire underwriters in the united states defines low-potential circuits as having pressures below volts; high-potential circuits as having pressures from to , volts, and extra high-potential circuits as having pressures above , volts. pressures of , volts are becoming more common. where power is valuable and the distance over which it is to be transmitted is great, such high voltages are justified by the economics of the power problem. they are a great hazard to telephone systems, however. an unprotected telephone system meeting such a hazard by contact will endanger life and property with great certainty. a very common form of distribution for lighting and power purposes is the three-wire system having a grounded neutral wire, the maximum potential above the earth being about volts. telephone lines and apparatus are subject to damage by any power circuit whether of high or low potential. the cause of property damage in all cases is the flow of current. personal damage, if it be death from shock, ordinarily is the result of a high potential between two parts of the body. the best knowledge indicates that death uniformly results from shock to the heart. it is believed that death has occurred from shock due to pressure as low as volts. the critical minimum voltage which can not cause death is not known. a good rule is never willingly to subject another person to personal contact with any electrical pressure whatever. electricity can produce actions of four principal kinds: physiological, thermal, chemical, and magnetic. viewing electricity as establishing hazards, the physiological action may injure or kill living things; the thermal action may produce heat enough to melt metals, to char things which can be burned, or to cause them actually to burn, perhaps with a fire which can spread; the chemical action may destroy property values by changing the state of metals, as by dissolving them from a solid state where they are needed into a state of solution where they are not needed; the magnetic action introduces no direct hazard. the greatest hazard to which property values are exposed is the electro-thermal action; that is, the same useful properties by which electric lighting and electric heating thrive may produce heat where it is not wanted and in an amount greater than can safely be borne. the tendency of design is to make all apparatus capable of carrying without overheating any current to which voltage within the telephone system may subject it, and to provide the system so designed with specific devices adapted to isolate it from currents originating without. apparatus which is designed in this way, adapted not only to carry its own normal working currents but to carry the current which would result if a given piece of apparatus were connected directly across the maximum pressure within the telephone system itself, is said to be self-protecting. apparatus amply able to carry its maximum working current but likely to be overheated, to be injured, or perhaps to destroy itself and set fire to other things if subjected to the maximum pressure within the system, is not self-protecting apparatus. to make all electrical devices self-protecting by surrounding them with special arrangements for warding off abnormal currents from external sources, is not as simple as might appear. a lamp, for example, which can bear the entire pressure of a central-office battery, is not suitable for direct use in a line several miles long because it would not give a practical signal in series with that line and with the telephone set, as it is required to do. a lamp suitable for use in series with such a line and a telephone set would burn out by current from its own normal source if the line should become short-circuited in or near the central office. the ballast referred to in the chapter on "signals" was designed for the very purpose of providing rapidly-rising resistance to offset the tendency toward rapidly-rising current which could burn out the lamp. as another example, a very small direct-current electric motor can be turned on at a snap switch and will gain speed quickly enough so that its armature winding will not be overheated. a larger motor of that kind can not be started safely without introducing resistance into the armature circuit on starting, and cutting it out gradually as the armature gains speed. such a motor could be made self-protecting by having the armature winding of much larger wire than really is required for mere running, choosing its size great enough to carry the large starting current without overheating itself and its insulation. it is better, and for long has been standard practice, to use starting boxes, frankly admitting that such motors are not self-protecting until started, though they are self-protecting while running at normal speeds. such a motor, once started, may be overloaded so as to be slowed down. so much more current now can pass through the armature that its winding is again in danger. overload circuit-breakers are provided for the very purpose of taking motors out of circuit in cases where, once up to speed, they are mechanically brought down again and into danger. such a circuit-breaker is a device for protecting against an _internal_ hazard; that is, internal to the power system of which the motor is a part. another example: in certain situations, apparatus intended to operate under impulses of large current may be capable of carrying its normal impulses successfully but incapable of carrying currents from the same pressure continuously. protective means may be provided for detaching such apparatus from the circuit whenever the period in which the current acts is not short enough to insure safety. this is cited as a case wherein a current, normal in amount but abnormal in duration, becomes a hazard. the last mentioned example of damage from internal hazards brings us to the law of the electrical generation of heat. _the greater the current or the greater the resistance of the conductor heated or the longer the time, the greater will he the heat generated in that conductor._ but this generated heat varies directly as the resistance and as the time and as the square of the current, that is, the law is heat generated = _c^{ }rt_ in which _c_ = the current; _r_=the resistance of the conductor; and _t_ = the time. it is obvious that a protective device, such as an overload circuit-breaker for a motor, or a protector for telephone apparatus, needs to operate more quickly for a large current than for a small one, and this is just what all well-designed protective devices are intended to do. the general problem which these heating hazards present with relation to telephone apparatus and circuits is: _to cause all parts of the telephone system to be made so as to carry successfully all currents which may flow in them because of any internal or external pressure, or to supplement them by devices which will stop or divert currents which could overheat them._ electrolytic hazards depend not on the heating effects of currents but on their chemical effects. the same natural law which enables primary and secondary batteries to be useful provides a hazard which menaces telephone-cable sheaths and other conductors. when a current leaves a metal in contact with an electrolyte, the metal tends to dissolve into the electrolyte. in the processes of electroplating and electrotyping, current enters the bath at the anode, passes from the anode through the solution to the cathode, removing metal from the former and depositing it upon the latter. in a primary battery using zinc as the positive element and the negative terminal, current is caused to pass, within the cell, from the zinc to the negative element and zinc is dissolved. following the same law, any pipe buried in the earth may serve to carry current from one region to another. as single-trolley traction systems with positive trolley wires constantly are sending large currents through the earth toward their power stations, such a pipe may be of positive potential with relation to moist earth at some point in its length. current leaving it at such a point may cause its metal to dissolve enough to destroy the usefulness of the pipe for its intended purpose. lead-sheathed telephone cables in the earth are particularly exposed to such damage by electrolysis. the reasons are that such cables often are long, have a good conductor as the sheath-metal, and that metal dissolves readily in the presence of most aqueous solutions when electrolytic differences of potential exist. the length of the cables enables them to connect between points of considerable difference of potential. it is lack of this length which prevents electrolytic damage to masses of structural metal in the earth. electrical power is supplied to single-trolley railroads principally in the form of direct current. usually all the trolley wires of a city are so connected to the generating units as to be positive to the rails. this causes current to flow from the cars toward the power stations, the return path being made up jointly of the rails, the earth itself, actual return wires which may supplement the rails, and also all other conducting things in the earth, these being principally lead-covered cables and other pipes. these conditions establish definite areas in which the currents tend to leave the cables and pipes, _i.e._, in which the latter are positive to other things. these positive areas usually are much smaller than the negative areas, that is, the regions in which currents tend _to enter_ the cables form a larger total than the regions in which the currents tend _to leave_ the cables. these facts simplify the ways in which the cables may be protected against damage by direct currents leaving them and also they reduce the amount, complication, and cost of applying the corrective and preventive measures. all electric roads do not use direct current. certain simplifications in the use of single-phase alternating currents in traction motors have increased the number of roads using a system of alternating-current power supply. where alternating current is used, the electrolytic conditions are different and a new problem is set, for, as the current flows in recurrently different directions, an area which at one instant is positive to others, is changed the next instant into a negative area. the protective means, therefore, must be adapted to the changed requirements. chapter xix protective means any of the heating hazards described in the foregoing chapter may cause currents which will damage apparatus. all devices for the protection of apparatus from such damage, operate either to stop the flow of the dangerous current, or to send that flow over some other path. protection against high potentials. lightning is the most nearly universal hazard. all open wires are exposed to it in some degree. damaging currents from lightning are caused by extraordinarily high potentials. furthermore, a lightning discharge is oscillatory; that is, alternating, and of very high frequency. drops, ringers, receivers, and other devices subject to lightning damage suffer by having their windings burned by the discharge. the impedance these windings offer to the high frequency of lightning oscillations is great. the impedance of a few turns of heavy wire may be negligible to alternating currents of ordinary frequencies because the resistance of the wire is low, its inductance small, and the frequency finite. on the other hand, the impedance of such a coil to a lightning discharge is much higher, due to the very high frequency of the discharge. were it not for the extremely high pressure of lightning discharges, their high frequency of oscillation would enable ordinary coils to be self-protecting against them. but a discharge of electricity can take place through the air or other insulating medium if its pressure be high enough. a pressure of , volts can strike across a gap in air of one inch, and lower pressures can strike across smaller distances. when lightning encounters an impedance, the discharge seldom takes place through the entire winding, as an ordinary current would flow, usually striking across whatever short paths may exist. very often these paths are across the insulation between the outer turns of a coil. it is not unusual for a lightning discharge to plow its way across the outer layer of a wound spool, melting the copper of the turns as it goes. often the discharge will take place from inner turns directly to the core of the magnet. this is more likely when the core is grounded. _air-gap arrester_. the tendency of a winding to oppose lightning discharges and the ease with which such discharge may strike across insulating gaps, points the way to protection against them. such devices consist of two conductors separated by an air space or other insulator and are variously known as lightning arresters, spark gaps, open-space cutouts, or air-gap arresters. the conductors between which the gap exists may be both of metal, may be one of metal and one of carbon, or both of carbon. one combination consists of carbon and mercury, a liquid metal. the space between the conductors may be filled with either air or solid matter, or it may be a vacuum. speaking generally, the conductors are separated by some insulator. two conductors separated by an insulator form a condenser. the insulator of an open-space arrester often is called the dielectric. [illustration fig. . saw tooth arrester] discharge across gaps:--electrical discharges across a given distance occur at lower potentials if the discharge be between points than if between smooth surfaces. arresters, therefore, are provided with points. fig. shows a device known as a "saw-tooth" arrester because of its metal plates being provided with teeth. such an arrester brings a ground connection close to plates connected with the line and is adapted to protect apparatus either connected across a metallic circuit or in series with a single wire circuit. fig. shows another form of metal plate air-gap arrester having the further possibility of a discharge taking place from one line wire to the other. inserting a plug in the hole between the two line plates connects the line wires directly together at the arrester. this practice was designed for use with series lines, the plug short-circuiting the telephone set when in place. a defect of most ordinary types of metal air-gap lightning arresters is that heavy discharges tend to melt the teeth or edges of the plates and often to weld them together, requiring special attention to re-establish the necessary gap. advantages of carbon:--solid carbon is found to be a much better material than metal for the reasons that a discharge will not melt it and that its surface is composed of multitudes of points from which discharges take place more readily than from metals. [illustration fig. . saw-tooth arrester] [illustration fig. . carbon block arrester] carbon arresters now are widely used in the general form shown in fig. . a carbon block connected with a wire of the line is separated from a carbon block connected to ground by some form of insulating separator. mica is widely used as such a separator, and holes of some form in a mica slip enable the discharge to strike freely from block to block, while preventing the blocks from touching each other. celluloid with many holes is used as a separator between carbon blocks. silk and various special compositions also have their uses. [illustration fig. . arrester separators] dust between carbons:--discharges between the carbon blocks tend to throw off particles of carbon from them. the separation between the blocks being small--from . to . inch--the carbon particles may lodge in the air-gap, on the edges of the separator, or otherwise, so as to leave a conducting path between the two blocks. slight moisture on the separator may help to collect this dust, thus placing a ground on that wire of the line. this ground may be of very high resistance, but is probably one of many such--one at each arrester connected to the line. in special forms of carbon arresters an attempt has been made to limit this danger of grounding by the deposit of carbon dust. the object of the u-shaped separator of fig. is to enable the arrester to be mounted so that this opening in the separator is downward, in the hope that loosened carbon particles may fall out of the space between the blocks. the deposit of carbon on the inside edges of the u-shaped separator often is so fine and clings so tightly as not to fall out. the separator projects beyond the blocks so as to avoid the collection of carbon on the outer edges. commercial types:--fig. is a commercial form of the arrangement shown in fig. and is one of the many forms made by the american electric fuse company. line wires are attached to outside binding posts shown in the figure and the ground wire to the metal binding post at the front. the carbon blocks with their separator slide between clips and a ground plate. the air-gap is determined by the thickness of the separator between the carbon blocks. [illustration: fig. . carbon block arrester] [illustration: fig. roberts "self-cleaning" arrester] the roberts carbon arrester is designed with particular reference to the disposal of carbon dust and is termed self-cleaning for that reason. the arrangement of carbons and dielectric in this device is shown in fig. ; mica is cemented to the line carbon and is large enough to provide a projecting margin all around. the spark gap is not uniform over the entire surface of the block but is made wedge-shaped by grinding away the line carbon as shown. it is claimed that a continuous arcing fills the wedge-shaped chamber with heated air or gas, converting the whole of the space into a field of low resistance to ground, and that this gas in expanding drives out every particle of carbon that may be thrown off. it seems obvious that the wedge-shaped space offers greater freedom for carbon dust to fall out than in the case of the parallel arrangement of the block faces. an outdoor arrester for metallic circuits, designed by f.b. cook, is shown in fig. . the device is adapted to mount on a pole or elsewhere and to be covered by a protecting cap. the carbons are large and are separated by a special compound intended to assist the self-cleaning feature. the three carbons being grouped together as a unit, the device has the ability to care for discharges from one terminal to either of the others direct, without having to pass through two gaps. in this particular, the arrangement is the same as that of fig. . [illustration: fig. . cook air-gap arrester] a form of western electric arrester particularly adapted for outside use on railway lines is shown with its cover in fig. . [illustration: fig. . western electric air-gap arrester] the kellogg company regularly equips its magneto telephones with air-gap arresters of the type shown in fig. . the two line plates are semicircular and of metal. the ground plate is of carbon, circular in form, covering both line plates with a mica separator. this is mounted on the back board of the telephone and permanently wired to the line and ground binding posts. [illustration: old switchboard of bell exchange serving chinatown, san francisco, california] [illustration: fig. . kellogg air-gap arrester] vacuum arresters:--all of the carbon arresters so far mentioned depend on the discharge taking place through air. a given pressure will discharge further in a fairly good vacuum than in air. the national electric specialty company mounts three conductors in a vacuum of the incandescent lamp type, fig. . a greater separation and less likelihood of short-circuiting can be provided in this way. either carbon or metal plates are adapted for use in such vacuum devices. the plates may be further apart for a given discharge pressure if the surfaces are of carbon. [illustration: fig. . vacuum arrester] introduction of impedance:--it has been noted that the existence of impedance tends to choke back the passage of lightning discharge through a coil. fig. suggests the relation between such an impedance and air-gap arrester. if the coil shown therein be considered an arrangement of conductors having inductance, it will be seen that a favorable place for an air-gap arrester is between that impedance and the line. this fact is made known in practice by frequent damage to aërial cables by electricity brought into them over long open wires, the discharge taking place at the first turn or bend in the aërial cable; this discharge often damages both core and sheath. it is well to have such bends as near the end of the cable as possible, and turns or goosenecks at entrances to terminals have that advantage. [illustration: fig. . impedance and air-gap] this same principle is utilized in some forms of arresters, such as the one shown in fig. , which provides an impedance of its own directly in the arrester element. in this device an insulating base carries a grounded carbon rod and two impedance coils. the impedance coils are wound on insulating rods, which hold them near, but not touching, the ground carbon. the coils are arranged so that they may be turned when discharges roughen the surfaces of the wires. [illustration: fig. . holtzer-cabot arrester] metallic electrodes:--copper or other metal blocks with roughened surfaces separated by an insulating slip may be substituted for the carbon blocks of most of the arresters previously described. metal blocks lack the advantage of carbon in that the latter allows discharges at lower potentials for a given separation, but they have the advantage that a conducting dust is not thrown off from them. [illustration: fig. . carbon air-gap arrester] provision against continuous arc:--for the purpose of short-circuiting an arc, a globule of low-melting alloy may be placed in one carbon block of an arrester. this feature is not essential in an arrester intended solely to divert lightning discharges. its purpose is to provide an immediate path to ground if an arc arising from artificial electricity has been maintained between the blocks long enough to melt the globule. fig. is a plan and section of the western electric company's arrester used as the high potential element in conjunction with others for abnormal currents and sneak currents; the latter are currents too small to operate air-gap arresters or substantial fuses. protection against strong currents. _fuses._ a fuse is a metal conductor of lower carrying capacity than the circuit with which it is in series at the time it is required to operate. fuses in use in electrical circuits generally are composed of some alloy of lead, which melts at a reasonably low temperature. alloys of lead have lower conductivity than copper. a small copper wire, however, may fuse at the same volume of current as a larger lead alloy wire. proper functions:--a fuse is not a good lightning arrester. as lightning damage is caused by current and as it is current which destroys a fuse, a lightning discharge _can_ open a circuit over which it passes by melting the fuse metal. but lightning may destroy a fuse and at the same discharge destroy apparatus in series with the fuse. there are two reasons for this: one is that lightning discharges act very quickly and may have destroyed apparatus before heating the fuse enough to melt it; the other reason is that when a fuse is operated with enough current even to vaporize it, the vapor serves as a conducting path for an instant after being formed. this conducting path may be of high resistance and still allow currents to flow through it, because of the extremely high pressure of the lightning discharge. a comprehensive protective system may include fuses, but it is not to be expected that they always will arrest lightning or even assist other things in arresting lightning. they should be considered as of no value for that purpose. furthermore, fuses are best adapted to be a part of a general protective system when they do all that they must do in stopping abnormal currents and yet withstand lightning discharges which may pass through them. other things being equal, that system of protection is best in which all lightning discharges are arrested by gap arresters and in which no fuses ever are operated by lightning discharges. mica fuse:--a convenient and widely used form of fuse is that shown in fig. . a mica slip has metal terminals at its ends and a fuse wire joins these terminals. the fuse is inserted in the circuit by clamping the terminals under screws or sliding them between clips as in figs. and . advantages of this method of fuse mounting for protecting circuits needing small currents are that the fuse wire can be seen, the fuses are readily replaced when blown, and their mountings may be made compact. as elements of a comprehensive protective system, however, the ordinary types of mica-slip fuses are objectionable because too short, and because they have no means of their own for extinguishing an arc which may follow the blowing of the fuses. as protectors for use in distributing low potential currents from central-office power plants they are admirable. by simple means, they may be made to announce audibly or visibly that they have operated. [illustration: fig. . mica slip fuse] [illustration: fig. . postal type mica fuse] [illustration: fig. . western union type mica fuse] enclosed fuses:--if a fuse wire within an insulating tube be made to connect metal caps on that tube and the space around the tube be filled with a non-conducting powder, the gases of the vaporized fuse metal will be absorbed more quickly than when formed without such imbedding in a powder. the filling of such a tubular fuse also muffles the explosion which occurs when the fuse is vaporized. [illustration: fig. . pair of enclosed fuses] fuses of the enclosed type, with or without filling, are widely used in power circuits generally and are recommended by fire insurance bodies. fig. illustrates an arrester having a fuse of the enclosed type, this example being that of the h. w. johns-manville company. [illustration fig. . bank of enclosed fuses] in telephony it is frequently necessary to mount a large number of fuses or other protective devices together in a restricted space. in fig. a group of western electric tubular fuses, so mounted, is shown. these fuses have ordinarily a carrying capacity of or amperes. it is not expected that this arrester will blow because or amperes of abnormal currents are flowing through it and the apparatus to be protected. what is intended is that the fuse shall withstand lightning discharges and when a foreign current passes through it, other apparatus will increase that current enough to blow the fuse. it will be noticed that the fuses of fig. are open at the upper end, which is the end connected to the exposed wire of the line the fuses are closed at the lower end, which is the end connected to the apparatus. when the fuse blows, its discharge is somewhat muffled by the lining of the tube, but enough explosion remains so that the heated gases, in driving outward, tend to break the arc which is established through the vaporized metal. a pair of cook tubular fuses in an individual mounting is shown in fig. . fuses of this type are not open at one end like a gun, but opportunity for the heated gases to escape exists at the caps. the tubes are made of wood, of lava, or of porcelain. fig. is another tubular fuse, the section showing the arrangement of asbestos lining which serves the two purposes of muffling the sound of the discharge and absorbing and cooling the resulting gases. [illustration: fig. . pair of wooden tube fuses] _air-gap vs. fuse arresters._ it is hoped that the student grasps clearly the distinction between the purposes of air-gap and fuse arresters. the air-gap arrester acts in response to high voltages, either of lightning or of high-tension power circuits. the fuse acts in response to a certain current value flowing through it and this minimum current in well-designed protectors for telephone lines is not very small. usually it is several times larger than the maximum current apparatus in the line can safely carry. fuses _can_ be made so delicate as to operate on the very smallest current which could injure apparatus and the earlier protective systems depended on such an arrangement. the difficulty with such delicate fuses is that they are not robust enough to be reliable, and, worse still, they change their carrying capacity with age and are not uniform in operation in different surroundings and at different temperatures. they are also sensitive to lightning discharges, which they have no power to stop or to divert. protection against sneak currents. for these reasons, a system containing fuses and air-gap arresters only, does not protect against abnormal currents which are continuous and small, though large enough to injure apparatus _because_ continuous. these currents have come to be known as sneak currents, a term more descriptive than elegant. sneak currents though small, may, when allowed to flow for a long time through the winding of an electromagnet for instance, develop enough heat to char or injure the insulation. they are the more dangerous because insidious. [illustration: fig. . tubular fuse with asbestos filling] _sneak-current arresters._ as typical of sneak-current arresters, fig. shows the principle, though not the exact form, of an arrester once widely used in telephone and signal lines. the normal path from the line to the apparatus is through a small coil of fine wire imbedded in sealing wax. a spring forms a branch path from the line and has a tension which would cause it to bear against the ground contact if it were allowed to do so. it is prevented from touching that contact normally by a string between itself and a rigid support. the string is cut at its middle and the knotted ends as thus cut are imbedded in the sealing wax which contains the coil. [illustration: fig. . principle of sneak-current arrester] a small current through the little coil will warm the wax enough to allow the string to part. the spring then will ground the line. even so simple an apparatus as this operates with considerable accuracy. all currents below a certain critical amount may flow through the heating coil indefinitely, the heat being radiated rapidly enough to keep the wax from softening and the string from parting. all currents above this critical amount will operate the arrester; the larger the current, the shorter the time of operating. it will be remembered that the law of these heating effects is that the heat generated = _c^{ }rt_, so that if a certain current operates the arrester in, say seconds, twice as great a current should operate the arrester in seconds. in other words, the time of operation varies inversely as the square of the current and inversely as the resistance. to make the arrester more sensitive for a given current--_i.e._, to operate in a shorter time--one would increase the resistance of the coil in the wax either by using more turns or finer wire, or by making the wire of a metal having higher specific resistance. the present standard sneak-current arrester embodies the two elements of the devices of fig. : a _resistance_ material to transform the dangerous sneak current into localized heat; and a _fusible_ material softened by this heat to release some switching mechanism. the resistance material is either a resistance wire or a bit of carbon, the latter being the better material, although both are good. the fusible material is some alloy melting at a low temperature. lead, tin, bismuth, and cadmium can be combined in such proportions as will enable the alloy to melt at temperatures from ° to ° f. such an alloy is a solder which, at ordinary temperatures, is firm enough to resist the force of powerful springs; yet it will melt so as to be entirely fluid at a temperature much less than that of boiling water. [illustration: fig. . heat coil] _heat coil._ fig. shows a practical way of bringing the heating and to-be-heated elements together. a copper spool is wound with resistance wire. a metal pin is soldered in the bore of the spool by an easily melting alloy. when current heats the spool enough, the pin may slide or turn in the spool. it may slide or turn in many ways and this happily enables many types of arresters to result. for example, the pin may pull out, or push in, or push through, or rotate like a shaft in a bearing, or the spool may turn on it like a hub on an axle. messrs. hayes, rolfe, cook, mcberty, kaisling, and many other inventors have utilized these combinations and motions in the production of sneak-current arresters. all of them depend on one action: the softening of a low-melting alloy by heat generated in a resistance. when a heat coil is associated with the proper switching springs, it becomes a sneak-current arrester. the switching springs always are arranged to ground the line wire. in some arresters, the line wire is cut off from the wire leading toward the apparatus by the same movement which grounds it. in others, the line is not broken at all, but merely grounded. each method has its advantages. complete line protection. fig. shows the entire scheme of protectors in an exposed line and their relation to apparatus in the central-office equipment and at the subscriber's telephone. the central-office equipment contains heat coils, springs, and carbon arresters. at some point between the central office and the subscriber's premises, each wire contains a fuse. at the subscriber's premises each wire contains other fuses and these are associated with carbon arresters. the figure shows a central battery equipment, in which the ringer of the telephone is in series with a condenser. a sneak-current arrester is not required at the subscriber's station with such equipment. assume the line to meet an electrical hazard at the point _x_. if this be lightning, it will discharge to ground at the central office or at the subscriber's instrument or at both through the carbon arresters connected to that side of the line. if it be a high potential from a power circuit and of more than volts, it will strike an arc at the carbon arrester connected to that wire of the line in the central office or at the subscriber's telephone or at both, if the separation of the carbons in those arresters is . inch or less. if the carbon arresters are separated by celluloid, it will burn away and allow the carbons to come together, extinguishing the arc. if they are separated by mica and one of the carbons is equipped with a globule of low-melting alloy, the heat of the arc will melt this, short-circuiting the gap and extinguishing the arc. the passage of current to ground at the arrester, however, will be over a path containing nothing but wire and the arrester. the resulting current, therefore, may be very large. the voltage at the arrester having been volts or more, in order to establish the arc, short-circuiting the gap will make the current amperes or more, unless the applied voltage miraculously falls to volts or less. the current through the fuse being more than amperes, it will blow promptly, opening the line and isolating the apparatus. it will be noted that this explanation applies to equipment at either end of the line, as the fuse lies between the point of contact and the carbon arrester. [illustration: fig. . complete line protection] assume, on the other hand, that the contact is made at the point _y_. the central-office carbon arrester will operate, grounding the line and increasing the amount of current flowing. there being no fuse to blow, a worse thing will befall, in the overheating of the line wire and the probable starting of a fire in the central office. it is obvious, therefore, that a fuse must be located between the carbon arrester and any part of the line which is subject to contact with a potential which can give an abnormal current when the carbon arrester acts. assume, as a third case, that the contact at the point _x_ either is with a low foreign potential or is so poor a contact that the difference of potential across the gap of the carbon arrester is lower than its arcing point. current will tend to flow by the carbon arrester without operating it, but such a current must pass through the winding of the heat coil if it is to enter the apparatus. the sneak current may be large enough to overheat the apparatus if allowed to flow long enough, but before it has flowed long enough it will have warmed the heat-coil winding enough to soften its fusible alloy and to release springs which ground the line, just as did the carbon arrester in the case last assumed. again the current will become large and will blow the fuse which lies between the sneak-current arrester and the point of contact with the source of foreign current. in this case, also, contact at the point _y_ would have operated mechanism to ground the line at the central office, and, no fuse interposing, the wiring would have been overheated. _exposed and unexposed wiring._ underground cables, cables formed of rubber insulated wires, and interior wiring which is properly done, all may be considered to be wiring which is unexposed, that is, not exposed to foreign high potentials, discharges, sneak, or abnormal currents. _all other wiring_, such as bare wires, aërial cables, etc., should be considered as _exposed_ to such hazards and a fuse should exist in each wire between its exposed portion and the central office or subscriber's instrument. the rule of action, therefore, becomes: _the proper position of the fuse is between exposed and unexposed wiring._ it may appear to the student that wires in an aërial cable with a lead sheath--that sheath being either grounded or ungrounded--are not exposed to electrical hazards; in the case of the grounded sheath, this would presume that a contact between the cable and a high potential wire would result merely in the foreign currents going to ground through the cable sheath, the arc burning off the high-potential wire and allowing the contact to clear itself by the falling of the wire. if the assumption be that the sheath is not grounded, then the student may say that no current at all would flow from the high-potential wire. both assumptions are wrong. in the case of the grounded sheath, the current flows to it at the contact with the high-potential wire; the lead sheath is melted, arcs strike to the wires within, and currents are led directly to the central office and to subscribers' premises. in the case of the ungrounded sheath, the latter charges at once through all its length to the voltage of the high-potential wire; at some point, a wire within the cable is close enough to the sheath for an arc to strike across, and the trouble begins. all the wires in the cable are endangered if the cross be with a wire of the primary circuit of a high-tension transmission line. any series arc-light circuit is a high-potential menace. even a -volt trolley wire or feeder can burn a lead-covered cable entirely in two in a few seconds. the authors have seen this done by the wayward trolley pole of a street car, one side of the pole touching the trolley wire and the extreme end just touching the telephone cable. the answer lies in the foregoing rule. place the fuse between the wires which _can_ and the wires which _can not_ get into contact with high potentials. in application, the rule has some flexibility. in the case of a cable which is aërial as soon as it leaves the central office, place the fuses in the central office; in a cable wholly underground, from central office to subscriber--as, for example, the feed for an office building--use no fuses at all; in a cable which leaves the central office underground and becomes aërial, fuse the wires just where they change from underground to aërial. the several branches of an underground cable into aërial ones should be fused as they branch. wires properly installed in subscribers' premises are considered unexposed. the position of the fuse thus is at or near the point of entrance of the wires into that building if the wires of the subscriber's line outside the premises are exposed, as determined by the definitions given. if the line is unexposed, by those definitions, no protector is required. if one is indicated, it should be used, as compliance with the best-known practice is a clear duty. less than what is known to be best is not honest practice in a matter which involves life, limb, and indefinite degrees of property values. protectors in central-battery subscribers' equipments need no sneak-current arresters, as the condenser reduces that hazard to a negligible amount. magneto subscribers' equipments usually lack condensers in ringer circuits, though they may have them in talking circuits on party lines. the ringer circuit is the only path through the telephone set for about per cent of the time. sneak-current arresters, therefore, should be a part of subscribers' station protectors in magneto equipment, except in such rural districts as may have no lighting or power wires. when sneak-current arresters are so used the arrangement of the parts then is the same as in the central-office portion of fig. . types of central-office protectors. a form of combined heat coil and air-gap arrester, widely used by bell companies for central-office protection, is shown in fig. . the two inner springs form the terminals for the two limbs of the metallic-circuit line, while the two outside springs are terminals for the continuation of the line leading to the switchboard. the heat coils, one on each side, are supported between the inner and outer springs. high-tension currents jump to ground through the air-gap arrester, while sneak currents permit the pin of the heat coil to slide within the sleeve, thus grounding the outside line and the line to the switchboard. [illustration: fig. . sneak-current and air-gap arrester] _self-soldering heat coils._ another form designed by kaisling and manufactured by the american electric fuse company is shown in fig. . in this the pin in the heat coil projects unequally from the ends of the coil, and under the action of a sneak current the melting of the solder which holds it allows the outer spring to push the pin through the coil until it presses the line spring against the ground plate and at the same time opens the path to the switchboard. when the heat-coil pin assumes this new position it cools off, due to the cessation of the current, and _resolders_ itself, and need only be turned end for end by the attendant to be reset. many are the variations that have been made on this self-soldering idea, and there has been much controversy as to its desirability. it is certainly a feature of convenience. [illustration: fig. . self-soldering heat-coil arrester] instead of using a wire-wound resistance element in heat-coil construction some manufacturers employ a mass of high-resistance material, interposed in the path of the current. the kellogg company has long employed for its sneak-current arrester a short graphite rod, which forms the resistance element. the ends of this rod are electroplated with copper to which the brass terminal heads are soldered. these heads afford means for making the connection with the proper retaining springs. [illustration: fig. . cook arrester] another central-office protector, which uses a mass of special metal composition for its heat producing element is that designed by frank b. cook and shown in fig. . in this the carbon blocks are cylindrical in form and specially treated to make them "self-cleaning." instead of employing a self-soldering feature in the sneak-current arrester of this device, cook provides for electrically resoldering them after operation, a clip being designed for holding the elements in proper position and passing a battery current through them to remelt the solder. in small magneto exchanges it is not uncommon to employ combined fuse and air-gap arresters for central-office line protection, the fuses being of the mica-mounted type already referred to. a group of such arresters, as manufactured by the dean electric company, is shown in fig. . [illustration: fig. . mica fuse and air-gap arresters] types of subscribers' station protectors. figs. and show types of subscribers' station protectors adapted to the requirements of central-battery and magneto systems. these, as has been said, should be mounted at or near the point of entrance of the subscriber's line into the premises, if the line is exposed outside of the premises. it is possible to arrange the fuses so that they will be safe and suitable for their purposes if they are mounted out-of-doors near the point of entrance to the premises. the sneak-current arrester, if one exists, and the carbon arrester also, must be mounted inside of the premises or in a protecting case, if outside, on account of the necessity of shielding both of these devices from the weather. speaking generally, the wider practice is to put all the elements of the subscriber's station protector inside of the house. it is nearer to the ideal arrangement of conditions if the protector be placed immediately at the point of entrance of the outside wires into the building. [illustration: fig. . western electric station arrester] [illustration: fig. . cook arrester for magneto stations] _ribbon fuses_. a point of interest with relation to tubular fuses is that in some of the best types of such fuses, the resistance material is not in the form of a round wire but in the form of a flat ribbon. this arrangement disposes the necessary amount of fusible metal in a form to give the greatest amount of surface, while a round wire offers the least surface for a given weight of metal--a circle encloses its area with less periphery than any other figure. the reason for giving the fuse the largest possible surface area is to decrease the likelihood of the fuse being ruptured by lightning. the fact that such fuses do withstand lightning discharges much more thoroughly than round fuses of the same rating is an interesting proof of the oscillating nature of lightning discharges, for the density of the current of those discharges is greater on and near the surface of the conductor than within the metal and, therefore, flattening the fuse increases its carrying capacity for high-frequency currents, without appreciably changing its carrying capacity for direct currents. the reason its capacity for direct currents is increased at all by flattening it, is that the surface for the radiation of heat is increased. however, when enclosed in a tube, radiation of heat is limited, so that for direct currents the carrying capacity of fuses varies closely with the area of cross-section. city-exchange requirements. the foregoing has set down the requirements of good practice in an average city-exchange system. nothing short of the general arrangement shown in fig. meets the usual assortment of hazards of such an exchange. it is good modern practice to distribute lines by means of cables, supplemented in part by short insulated drop wires twisted in pairs. absence of bare wires reduces electrical hazards enormously. nevertheless, hazards remain. though no less than the spirit of this plan of protection should be followed, additional hazards may exist, which may require additional elements of protection. at the end of a cable, either aërial or underground, long open wires may extend into the open country as rural or long-distance circuits. if these be longer than a mile or two, in most regions they will be subjected to lightning discharges. these may be subjected to high-potential contacts as well. if a specific case of such exposure indicates that the cables may be in danger, the long open lines then are equipped with additional air-gap arresters at the point of junction of those open lines with the cable. practice varies as to the type. maintenance charges are increased if carbon arresters separated . inch are used, because of the cost of sending to the end of the long cable to clear the blocks from carbon dust after each slight discharge. roughened metal blocks do not become grounded as readily as do carbon blocks. the occasions of visit to the arresters, therefore, usually follow actual heavy discharges through them. the recommendations and the practice of the american telephone and telegraph company differ on this point, while the practice of other companies varies with the temperaments of the engineers. the american company specifies copper-block arresters where long country lines enter cables, if those lines are exposed to lightning discharges only. the exposed line is called _long_ if more than one-half mile in length. if it is exposed to high-potential hazards, carbon blocks are specified instead of copper. other specifications of that company have called for the use of copper-block arresters on lines exposed to hazards above , volts. [illustration: one of the four wings of the old kellogg divided multiple board of the cuyahoga telephone company, cleveland, ohio ultimate capacity, , lines. one of the two examples in the united states of a multiple switchboard having an ultimate capacity over , lines. replaced recently by a kellogg straight multiple board having an ultimate capacity of , lines and a present capacity of , lines.] the freedom of metal-block arresters from dust troubles gives them a large economical advantage over carbon. for similar separations, the ratio of striking voltages between carbon blocks and metal blocks respectively is as to . in certain regions of the pacific coast where the lightning hazard is negligible and the high tension hazard is great, metal-block arresters at the outer ends of cables give acceptable protection. high winds which drive snow or dust against bare wires of a long line, create upon or place upon those wires a charge of static electricity which makes its way from the line in such ways as it can. usually it discharges across arresters and when this discharge takes place, the line is disturbed in its balance and loud noises are heard in the telephones upon it. [fig. . drainage coils] a telephone line which for a long distance is near a high-tension transmission line may have electrostatic or electromagnetic potentials, or both, induced upon it. if the line be balanced in its properties, including balance by transposition of its wires, the electrostatic induction may neutralize itself. the electromagnetic induction still may disturb it. _drainage coils_. the device shown in fig. , which amounts merely to an inductive leak to earth, is intended to cure both the snowstorm and electromagnetic induction difficulties. it is required that its impedance be high enough to keep voice-current losses low, while being low enough to drain the line effectively of the disturbing charges. such devices are termed "drainage coils." electrolysis. the means of protection against the danger due to chemical action, set forth in the preceding chapter, form such a distinct phase of the subject of guarding property against electrical hazards as to warrant treatment in a separate chapter devoted to the subject of electrolysis. [illustration: main exchange, cleveland, ohio. largest four-party selective ringing switchboard in the world. kellogg switchboard and supply co.] chapter xx general features of the telephone exchange up to this point only those classes of telephone service which could be given between two or more stations on a single line have been considered. very soon after the practical conception of the telephone, came the conception of the telephone exchange; that is, the conception of centering a number of lines at a common point and there terminating them in apparatus to facilitate their interconnection, so that any subscriber on any line could talk with any subscriber on any other line. the complete equipment of lines, telephone instruments, and switching facilities by which the telephone stations of the community are given telephone service is called a telephone exchange. the building where a group of telephone lines center for interconnection is called a central office, and its telephonic equipment the central-office equipment. the terms telephone office and telephone exchange are frequently confused. although a telephone office building may be properly referred to as a telephone exchange building, it is hardly proper to refer to the telephone office as a telephone exchange, as is frequently done. in modern parlance the telephone exchange refers not only to the central office and its equipment but to the lines and instruments connected therewith as well; furthermore, a telephone exchange may embrace a number of telephone offices that are interconnected by means of so-called trunk lines for permitting the communication of subscribers whose lines terminate in one office with those subscribers whose lines terminate in any other office. since a given telephone exchange may contain one or more central offices, it is proper to distinguish between them by referring to an exchange which contains but a single central office as a single office exchange, and to an exchange which contains a plurality of central offices as a multi-office exchange. in telephone exchange working, three classes of lines are dealt with--subscribers' lines, trunk lines, and toll lines. subscribers' lines. the term subscriber is commonly applied to the patron of the telephone service. his station is, therefore, referred to as a subscriber's station, and the telephone equipment at any subscriber's station is referred to as a subscriber's station equipment. likewise, a line leading from a central office to one or more subscribers' stations is called a subscriber's line. a subscriber's line may, as has been shown in a previous chapter, be an individual line if it serves but one station, or a party line if it serves to connect more than one station with the central office. trunk lines. a trunk line is a line which is not devoted to the service of any particular subscriber, but which may form a connecting link between any one of a group of subscribers' lines which terminate in one place and any one of a group of subscribers' lines which terminate in another place. if the two groups of subscribers' lines terminate in the same building or in the same switchboard, so that the trunk line forming the connecting link between them is entirely within the central-office building, it is called a local trunk line, or a local trunk. if, on the other hand, the trunk line is for connecting groups of subscribers' lines which terminate in different central offices, it is called an inter-office trunk. toll lines. a toll line is a telephone line for the use of which a special fee or toll is charged; that is, a fee that is not included in the charges made to the subscriber for his regular local exchange service. toll lines extend from one exchange district to another, more or less remote, and they are commonly termed _local_ toll and _long-distance_ toll lines according to the degree of remoteness. a toll line, whether local or long-distance, may be looked upon in the nature of an inter-exchange trunk. districts. the district in a given community which is served by a single central office is called an office district. likewise, the district which is served by a complete exchange is called an exchange district. an exchange district may, therefore, consist of a number of central-office districts, just as an exchange may comprise a number of central offices. to illustrate, the entire area served by the exchange of the chicago telephone company in chicago, embracing the entire city and some of its suburbs, is the chicago exchange district. the area served by one of the central offices, such as the hyde park office, the oakland office, the harrison office, or any of the others, is an office district. switchboards. the apparatus at the central office by which the telephone lines are connected for conversation and afterwards disconnected, and by which the various other functions necessary to the giving of complete telephone service are performed, is called a switchboard. this may be simple in the case of small exchanges, or of vast complexity in the case of the larger exchanges. sometimes the switchboards are of such nature as to require the presence of operators, usually girls, to connect and disconnect the line and perform the other necessary functions, and such switchboards, whether large or small, are termed _manual_. sometimes the switchboards are of such a nature as not to require the presence of operators, the various functions of connection, disconnection, and signaling being performed by the aid of special forms of apparatus which are under the control of the subscriber who makes the call. such switchboards are termed _automatic_. of recent years there has appeared another class of switchboards, employing in some measure the features of the automatic and in some measure those of the manual switchboard. these boards are commonly referred to as _semi-automatic_ switchboards, presumably because they are supposed to be half automatic and half manual. _manual_. manual switchboards may be subdivided into two classes according to the method of distributing energy for talking purposes. thus we may have _magneto_ switchboards, which are those capable of serving lines equipped with magneto telephones, local batteries being used for talking purposes. on the other hand, we may have _common-battery_ switchboards, adapted to connect lines employing common-battery telephones in which all the current for both talking and signaling is furnished from the central office. in still another way we may classify manual switchboards if the method of distributing the energy for talking and signaling purposes is ignored. thus, entirely irrespective of whether the switchboards are adapted to serve common-battery or local-battery lines, we may have non-multiple switchboards and multiple switchboards. the term _multiple_ switchboard is applied to that class of switchboards in which the connection terminals or jacks for all the lines are repeated at intervals along the face of the switchboard, so that each operator may have within her reach a terminal for each line and may thus be able to complete by herself any connection between two lines terminating in the switchboard. the term _non-multiple_ switchboard is applied to that class of boards where the provision for repeating the line terminals at intervals along the face of the board is not employed, but where, as a consequence, each line has but a single terminal on the face of the board. non-multiple switchboards have their main use in small exchanges where not more than a few hundred lines terminate. where such is the case, it is an easy matter to handle all the traffic by one, two, or three operators, and as all of these operators may reach all over the face of the switchboard, there is no need for giving any line any more than one connection terminal. such boards may be called _simple_ switchboards. there is another type of non-multiple switchboard adaptable for use in larger exchanges than the simple switchboard. a correct idea of the fundamental principle involved in these may be had by imagining a row of simple switchboards each containing terminals or jacks for its own group of lines. in order to provide for the connection of a line in one of these simple switchboards with a line in another one, out of reach of the operator at the first, short connecting lines extending between the two switchboards are provided, these being called _transfer_ or _trunk_ lines. in order that connections may be made between any two of the simple boards, a group of transfer lines is run from each board to every other one. in such switchboards an operator at one of the boards or positions may complete the connection herself between any two lines terminating at her own board. if, however, the line called for terminates at another one of the boards, the operator makes use of the transfer or trunk line extending to that board, and the operator at this latter board completes the connection, so that the two subscribers' lines are connected through the trunk or transfer line. a distinguishing feature, therefore, in the operation of so-called transfer switchboards, is that an operator can not always complete a connection herself, the connection frequently requiring the attention of two operators. transfer systems are not now largely used, the multiple switchboard having almost entirely supplanted them in manual exchanges of such size as to be beyond the limitation of the simple switchboard. at multi-office manual exchanges, however, where there are a number of multiple switchboards employed at various central offices, the same sort of a requirement exists as that which was met by the provision of trunk lines between the various simple switchboards in a transfer system. obviously, the lines in one central office must be connected to those of another in order to give universal service in the community in which the exchange operates. for this purpose inter-office trunk lines are used, the arrangement being such that when an operator at one office receives a call for a subscriber in another office, she will proceed to connect the calling subscriber's line, not directly with the line of the called subscriber because that particular line is not within her reach, but rather with a trunk line leading to the office in which the called-for subscriber's line terminates; having done this she will then inform an operator at that second office of the connection desired, usually by means of a so-called order-wire circuit. the connection between the trunk line so used and the line of the called-for subscriber will then be completed by the connecting link or trunk line extending between the two offices. in such cases the multiple switchboard at each office is divided into two portions, termed respectively the _a_ board and the _b_ board. each of these boards, with the exception that will be pointed out in a subsequent chapter, is provided with a full complement of multiple jacks for all of the lines entering that office. at the _a_ board are located operators, called _a_ operators, who answer all the calls from the subscribers whose lines terminate in that office. in the case of calls for lines in that same office, they complete the connection themselves without the assistance of the other operators. on the other hand, the calls for lines in another office are handled through trunk lines leading to that other office, as before described, and these trunk lines always terminate in the _b_ board at that office. the _b_ operators are, therefore, those operators who receive the calls over trunk lines and complete the connection with the line of the subscriber desired. to define these terms more specifically, an _a_ board is a multiple switchboard in which the subscriber's lines of a given office district terminate. for this reason the _a_ board is frequently referred to as a subscribers' board, and the operators who work at these boards and who answer the calls of the subscribers are called _a_ operators or subscribers' operators. _b_ boards are switchboards in which terminate the incoming ends of the trunk lines leading from other offices in the same exchange. these boards are frequently called incoming trunk boards, or merely trunk boards, and the operators who work at them and who receive the directions from the _a_ operators at the other boards are called _b_ operators, or incoming trunk operators. the circuits which are confined wholly to the use of operators and over which the instructions from one operator to another are sent, as in the case of the _a_ operator giving an order for a connection to a _b_ operator at another switchboard, are designated _call circuits_ or _order wire circuits_. sometimes trunk lines are so arranged that connections may be originated at either of their ends. in other cases they are so arranged that one group of trunk lines connecting two offices is for the traffic in one direction only, while another group leading between the same two offices is for handling only the traffic in the other direction. trunk lines are called _one-way_ or _two-way_ trunks, according to whether they handle the traffic in one direction or in two. a trunking system, where the same trunks handle traffic both ways, is called a _single-track system_; and, on the other hand, a system in which there are two groups of trunks, one handling traffic in one direction and the other in the other, is called a _double-track system_. this nomenclature is obviously borrowed from railroad practice. there is still another class of manual switchboards called the _toll board_ of which it will be necessary to treat. telephone calls made by one person for another within the limits of the same exchange district are usually charged for either by a flat rate per month, or by a certain charge for each call. this is usually regardless of the duration of the conversation following the call. on the other hand, where a call is made by one party for another outside of the limits of the exchange district and, therefore, in some other exchange district, a charge is usually made, based on the time that the connecting long-distance line is employed. such calls and their ensuing conversations are charged for at a very much higher rate than the purely local calls, this rate depending on the distance between the stations involved. the making up of connections between a long-distance and a local line is usually done by means of operators other than those employed in handling the local calls, who work either by means of special equipment located on the local board, or by means of a separate board. such equipments for handling long-distance or toll traffic are commonly termed toll switchboards. they differ from local boards (a) in that they are arranged for a very much smaller number of lines; (b) in that they have facilities by which the toll operator may make up the connections with a minimum amount of labor on the part of the assisting local operators; and (c) in that they have facilities for recording the identification of the parties and timing the conversations taking place over the toll lines, so that the proper charge may be made to the proper subscriber. chapter xxi the simple magneto switchboard definitions. as already stated those switchboards which are adapted to work in conjunction with magneto telephones are called magneto switchboards. the signals on such switchboards are electromagnetic devices capable of responding to the currents of the magneto generators at the subscribers' stations. since, as a rule, magneto telephones are equipped with local batteries, it follows that the magneto switchboard does not need to be arranged for supplying the subscribers' stations with talking current. this fact is accountable for magneto switchboards often being referred to as local-battery switchboards, in contradistinction to common-battery switchboards which are equipped so as to supply the connected subscribers' stations with talking current. the term _simple_ as applied in the headings of this and the next chapter, is employed to designate switchboards adapted for so small a number of lines that they may be served by a single or a very small group of operators; each line is provided with but a single connection terminal and all of them, without special provision, are placed directly within the reach of the operator, or operators if there are more than one. this distinction will be more apparent under the discussion of transfer and multiple switchboards. mode of operation. the cycle of operation of any simple manual switchboard may be briefly outlined as follows: the subscriber desiring a connection transmits a signal to the central office, the operator seeing the signal makes connection with the calling line and places herself in telephonic communication with the calling subscriber to receive his orders; the operator then completes the connection with the line of the called subscriber and sends ringing current out on that line so as to ring the bell of that subscriber; the two subscribers then converse over the connected lines and when the conversation is finished either one or both of them may send a signal to the central office for disconnection, this signal being called a clearing-out signal; upon receipt of the clearing-out signal, the operator disconnects the two lines and restores all of the central-office apparatus involved in the connection to its normal position. component parts. before considering further the operation of manual switchboards it will be well to refer briefly to the component pieces of apparatus which go to make up a switchboard. _line signal._ the line signal in magneto switchboards is practically always in the form of an electromagnetic annunciator or drop. it consists in an electromagnet adapted to be included in the line circuit, its armature controlling a latch, which serves to hold the drop or shutter or target in its raised position when the magnet is not energized, and to release the drop or shutter or target so as to permit the display of the signal when the magnet is energized. the symbolic representation of such an electromagnetic drop is shown in fig. . [illustration: fig. . drop symbol] _jacks and plugs._ each line is also provided with a connection terminal in the form of a switch socket. this assumes many forms, but always consists in a cylindrical opening behind which are arranged one or more spring contacts. the opening forms a receptacle for plugs which have one or more metallic terminals for the conductors in the flexible cord in which the plug terminates. the arrangement is such that when a plug is inserted into a jack the contacts on the plug will register with certain of the contacts in the jack and thus continue the line conductors, which terminate in the jack contacts, to the cord conductors, which terminate in the plug contacts. usually also when a plug is inserted certain of the spring contacts in the jack are made to engage with or disengage other contacts in the jack so as to make or break auxiliary circuits. [illustration: fig. . spring jack] a simple form of spring jack is shown in section in fig. . in fig. is shown a sectional view of a plug adapted to co-operate with the jack of fig. . in fig. the plug is shown inserted into the jack. the cylindrical portion of the jack is commonly called the _sleeve_ or _thimble_ and it usually forms one of the main terminals of the jack; the spring, forming the other principal terminal, is called the _tip spring_, since it engages the tip of the plug. the tip spring usually rests on another contact which may be termed the _anvil_. when the plug is inserted into the jack as shown in fig. , the tip spring is raised from contact with this anvil and thus breaks the circuit leading through it. it will be understood that spring jacks are not limited to three contacts such as shown in these figures nor are plugs limited to two contacts. sometimes the plugs have three, and even more, contacts, and frequently the jacks corresponding to such plugs have not only a contact spring adapted to register with each of the contacts of the plug, but several other auxiliary contacts also, which will be made or broken according to whether the plug is inserted or withdrawn from the jack. symbolic representations of plugs and jacks are shown in fig. . these are employed in diagrammatic representations of circuits and are supposed to represent the essential elements of the plugs and jacks in such a way as to be suggestive of their operation. it will be understood that such symbols may be greatly modified to express the various peculiarities of the plugs and jacks which they represent. [illustration: fig. . plug] [illustration: fig. . plug and jack] [illustration: fig. . jack and plug symbols] _keys_. other important elements of manual switchboards are ringing and listening keys. these are the devices by means of which the operator may switch the central-office generator or her telephone set into or out of the circuit of the connected lines. the details of a simple ringing and listening key are shown in fig. . this consists of two groups of springs, one of four and one of six, the springs in each group being insulated from each other at their points of mounting. two of these springs _ _ and _ _ in one group--the ringing group--are longer than the others, and act as movable levers engaging the inner pair of springs _ _ and _ _ when in their normal positions, and the outer pair _ _ and _ _ when forced into their alternate positions. movement is imparted to these springs by the action of a cam which is mounted on a lever, manipulated by the operator. when this lever is moved in one direction the cam presses the two springs _ _ and _ _ apart, thus causing them to disengage the springs _ _ and _ _ and to engage the springs _ _ and _ _. [illustration: fig. . ringing and listening key] the springs of the other group constitute the switching element of the listening key and are very similar in their action to those of the ringing key, differing in the fact that they have no inner pair of springs such as _ _ and _ _. the two long springs _ _ and _ _, therefore, normally do not rest against anything, but when the key lever is pressed, so as to force the cam between them, they are made to engage the two outer springs _ _ and _ _. [illustration: fig. . ringing-and listening-key symbols] the design and construction of ringing and listening keys assume many different forms. in general, however, they are adapted to do exactly the same sort of switching operations as that of which the device of fig. is capable. easily understood symbols of ringing and listening keys are shown in fig. ; the cam member which operates on the two long springs is usually omitted for ease of illustration. it will be understood in considering these symbols, therefore, that the two long curved springs usually rest against a pair of inner contacts in case of the ringing key or against nothing at all in case of the listening key, and that when the key is operated the two springs are assumed to be spread apart so as to engage the outer pair of contacts with which they are respectively normally disconnected. _line and cord equipments._ the parts of the switchboard that are individual to the subscriber's line are termed the _line equipment;_ this, in the case of a magneto switchboard, consists of the line drop and the jack together with the associated wiring necessary to connect them properly in the line circuit. the parts of the switchboard that are associated with a connecting link--consisting of a pair of plugs and associated cords with their ringing and listening keys and clearing-out drop--are referred to as a _cord equipment_. the circuit of a complete pair of cords and plugs with their associated apparatus is called a _cord circuit_. in order that there may be a number of simultaneous connections between different pairs of lines terminating in a switchboard, a number of cord circuits are provided, this number depending on the amount of traffic at the busiest time of the day. _operator's equipment._ a part of the equipment that is not individual to the lines or to the cord circuits, but which may, as occasion requires, be associated with any of them is called the _operator's equipment_. this consists of the operator's transmitter and receiver, induction coil, and battery connections together with the wiring and other associated parts necessary to co-ordinate them with the rest of the apparatus. still another part of the equipment that is not individual to the lines nor to the cord circuits is the calling-current generator. this may be common to the entire office or a separate one may be provided for each operator's position. operation in detail. with these general statements in mind we may take up in some detail the various operations of a telephone system wherein the lines center in a magneto switchboard. this may best be done by considering the circuits involved, without special regard to the details of the apparatus. the series of figures showing the cycle of operations of the magneto switchboard about to be discussed are typical of this type of switchboard almost regardless of make. the apparatus is in each case represented symbolically, the representations indicating type rather than any particular kind of apparatus within the general class to which it belongs. _normal condition of line._ in fig. is shown the circuit of an ordinary magneto line. the subscriber's sub-station apparatus, shown at the left, consists of the ordinary bridging telephone but might with equal propriety be indicated as a series telephone. the subscriber's station is shown connected with the central office by the two limbs of a metallic-circuit line. one limb of the line terminates in the spring _ _ of the jack, and the other limb in the sleeve or thimble _ _ of the jack. the spring _ _ normally rests on the third contact or anvil _ _ in the jack, its construction being such that when a plug is inserted this spring will be raised by the plug so as to break contact with the anvil _ _. it is understood, of course, that the plug associated with this jack has two contacts, referred to respectively as the tip and the sleeve; the tip makes contact with the tip spring _ _ and the sleeve with the sleeve or thimble _ _. [illustration: fig. . normal condition of line] the drop or line signal is permanently connected between the jack sleeve and the anvil _ _. as a result, the drop is normally bridged across the circuit of the line so as to be in a receptive condition to signaling current sent out by the subscriber. it is evident, however, that when the plug is inserted into the jack this connection between the line and the drop will be broken. in this normal condition of the line, therefore, the drop stands ready at the central office to receive the signal from the subscriber and the generator at the sub-station stands ready to be bridged across the circuit of the line as soon as the subscriber turns its handle. similarly the ringer--the call-receiving device at the sub-station--is permanently bridged across the line so as to be responsive to any signal that may be sent out from the central office in order to call the subscriber. the subscriber's talking apparatus is, in this normal condition of the line, cut out of the circuit by the switch hook. _subscriber calling._ fig. shows the condition of the line when the subscriber at the sub-station is making a call. in turning his generator the two springs which control the connection of the generator with the line are brought into engagement with each other so that the generator currents may pass out over the line. the condition at the central office is the same as that of fig. except that the drop is shown with its shutter fallen so as to indicate a call. [illustration: fig. . subscriber calling] [illustration: a specially formed cable for key shelf of monarch switchboard] _operator answering._ the next step is for the operator to answer the call and this is shown in fig. . the subscriber has released the handle of his generator and the generator has, therefore, been automatically cut out of the circuit. he also has removed his receiver from its hook, thus bringing his talking apparatus into the line circuit. the operator on the other hand has inserted one of the plugs _p__{a} into the jack. this action has resulted in the breaking of the circuit through the drop by the raising of the spring _ _ from the anvil _ _, and also in the continuance of the line circuit through the conductors of the cord circuits. thus, the upper limb of the line is continued by means of the engagement of the tip spring _ _ with the tip _ _ of the plug to the conducting strand _ _ of the cord circuit; likewise the lower limb of the line is continued by the engagement of the thimble _ _ of the jack with the sleeve contact _ _ of the plug _p__{a} to the strand _ _ of the cord circuit. the operator has also closed her listening key _l.k._ in doing so she has brought the springs _ _ and _ _ into engagement with the anvils _ _ and _ _ and has thus bridged her head telephone receiver with the secondary of her induction coil across the two strands _ _ and _ _ of the cord. associated with the secondary winding of her receiver is a primary circuit containing a transmitter, battery, and the primary of the induction coil. it will be seen that the conditions are now such as to permit the subscriber at the calling station to converse with the operator and this conversation consists in the familiar "number please" on the part of the operator and the response of the subscriber giving the number of the line that is desired. neither the plug _p__{c}, nor the ringing key _r.k._, shown in fig. , is used in this operation. the clearing-out drop _c.o._ is bridged permanently across the strands _ - _ of the cord, but is without function at this time; the fact that it is wound to a high resistance and impedance prevents its having a harmful effect on the transmission. [illustration: fig. . operator answering] it may be stated at this point that the two plugs of an associated pair are commonly referred to as the answering and calling plugs. the answering plug is the one which the operator always uses in answering a call as just described in connection with fig. . the calling plug is the one which she next uses in connecting with the line of the called subscriber. it lies idle during the answering of a call and is only brought into play after the order of the calling subscriber has been given, in which case it is used in establishing connection with the called subscriber. [illustration: fig. . operator calling] _operator calling._ we may now consider how the operator calls the called subscriber. the condition existing for this operation is shown in fig. . the operator after receiving the order from the calling subscriber inserts the calling plug _p__{c} into the jack of the line of the called station. this act at once connects the limbs of the line with the strands _ _ and _ _ of the cord circuit, and also cuts out the line drop of the called station, as already explained. the operator is shown in this figure as having opened her listening key _l.k._ and closed her ringing key _r.k._ as a result, ringing current from the central-office generator will flow out over the two ringing key springs _ _ and _ _ to the tip and sleeve contacts of the calling plug _p__{c}, then to the tip spring _ _ and the sleeve or thimble _ _ of the jack, and then to the two sides of the metallic-circuit line to the sub-station and through the bell there. this causes the ringing of the called subscriber's bell, after which the operator releases the ringing key and thereby allows the two springs _ _ and _ _ of that key to again engage their normal contacts _ _ and _ _, thus making the two strands _ _ and _ _ of the cord circuit continuous from the contacts of the answering plug _p__{a} to the contacts of the calling plug _p__{c}. this establishes the condition at the central office for conversation between the two subscribers. [illustration: fig. . subscribers connected for conversation.] _subscribers conversing._ the only other thing necessary to establish a complete set of talking conditions between the two subscribers is for the called subscriber to remove his receiver from its hook, which he does as soon as he responds to the call. the conditions for conversation between the two subscribers are shown in fig. . it is seen that the two limbs of the calling line are connected respectively to the two limbs of the called line by the two strands of the cord circuit, both the operator's receiver and the central-office generator being cut out by the listening and ringing keys, respectively. likewise the two line drops are cut out of circuit and the only thing left associated with the circuit at the central office is the clearing-out drop _c. o._, which remains bridged across the cord circuit. this, like the two ringers at the respective connected stations, which also remain bridged across the circuit when bridging instruments are used, is of such high resistance and impedance that it offers practically no path to the rapidly fluctuating voice currents to leak from one side of the line circuit to the other. fluctuating currents generated by the transmitter at the calling station, for instance, are converted by means of the induction coil into alternating currents flowing in the secondary of the induction coil at that station. considering a momentary current as passing up through the secondary winding of the induction coil at the calling station, it passes through the receiver of that station through the upper limb of the line to the spring _ _ of the line jack belonging to that line at the central office; thence through the tip _ _ of the answering plug to the conductor _ _ of the cord; thence through the pair of contacts _ _ and _ _ forming one side of the ringing key to the tip _ _ of the calling plug; thence to the tip spring _ _ of the jack of the called subscriber's line; thence over the upper limb of his line through his receiver and through the secondary of the induction to one of the upper switch-hook contacts; thence through the hook lever to the lower side of the line, back to the central office and through the sleeve contact _ _ of the jack and the sleeve contact _ _ of the plug; thence through the other ringing key contacts _ _ and _ _; thence through the strand _ _ of the cord to the sleeve contact _ _ and the sleeve contact _ _ of the answering plug and jack, respectively; thence through the lower limb of the calling subscriber's line to the hook lever at his station; thence through one of the upper contacts of this hook to the secondary of the induction coil, from which point the current started. [illustration: fig. . clearing-out signal] obviously, when the called subscriber is talking to the calling subscriber the same path is followed. it will be seen that at any time the operator may press her listening key _l.k._, bridge her telephone set across the circuit of the two connected lines, and listen to the conversation or converse with either of the subscribers in case of necessity. _clearing out_. at the close of the conversation, either one or both of the subscribers may send a clearing-out signal by turning their generators after hanging up their receivers. this condition is shown in fig. . the apparatus at the central office remains in exactly the same position during conversation as that of fig. , except that the clearing-out drop shutter is shown as having fallen. the two subscribers are shown as having hung up their receivers, thus cutting out their talking apparatus, and as operating their generators for the purpose of sending the clearing-out signals. in response to this act the operator pulls down both the calling and the answering plug, thus restoring them to their normal seats, and bringing both lines to the normal condition as shown in fig. . the line drops are again brought into operative relation with their respective lines so as to be receptive to subsequent calls and the calling generators at the sub-stations are removed from the bridge circuits across the line by the opening of the automatic switch contacts associated with those generators. _essentials of operation_. the foregoing sequence of operations while described particularly with respect to magneto switchboards is, with certain modifications, typical of the operation of nearly all manual switchboards. in the more advanced types of manual switchboards, certain of the functions described are sometimes done automatically, and certain other functions, not necessary in connection with the simple switchboard, are added. the essential mode of operation, however, remains the same in practically all manual switchboards, and for this reason the student should thoroughly familiarize himself with the operation and circuits of the simple switchboard as a foundation for the more complex and consequently more-difficult-to-understand switchboards that will be described later on. commercial types of drops and jacks. _early drops_. coming now to the commercial types of switchboard apparatus, the first subject that presents itself is that of magneto line signals or drops. the very early forms of switchboard drops had, in most cases, two-coil magnets, the cores of which were connected at their forward ends by an iron yoke and the armature of which was pivoted opposite the rear end of the two cores. to the armature was attached a latch rod which projected forwardly to the front of the device and was there adapted to engage the upper edge of the hinged shutter, so as to hold it in its raised or undisplayed position when the armature was unattracted. such a drop, of western electric manufacture, is shown in fig. . [illustration: fig. old-style drop] liability to cross-talk:--this type of drop is suitable for use only on small switchboards where space is not an important consideration, and even then only when the drop is entirely cut out of the circuit during conversation. the reason for this latter requirement will be obvious when it is considered that there is no magnetic shield around the winding of the magnet and no means for preventing the stray field set up by the talking currents in one of the magnets from affecting by induction the windings of adjacent magnets contained in other talking circuits. unless the drops are entirely cut out of the talking circuit, therefore, they are very likely to produce cross-talk between adjacent circuits. furthermore, such form of drop is obviously not economical of space, two coils placed side by side consuming practically twice as much room as in the case of later drops wherein single magnet coils have been made to answer the purpose. _tubular drops._ in the case of line drops, which usually can readily be cut out of the circuit during conversation, this cross-talk feature is not serious, but sometimes the line drops, and always the clearing-out drops must be left in connection with the talking circuit. on account of economy in space and also on account of this cross-talk feature, there has come into existence the so-called tubular or iron-clad drop, one of which is shown in section in fig. . this was developed a good many years ago by mr. e.p. warner of the western electric company, and has since, with modifications, become standard with practically all the manufacturing companies. in this there is but a single bobbin, and this is enclosed in a shell of soft norway iron, which is closed at its front end and joined to the end of the core as indicated, so as to form a complete return magnetic path for the lines of force generated in the coil. the rear end of the shell and core are both cut off in the same plane and the armature is made in such form as to practically close this end of the shell. the armature carries a latch rod extending the entire length of the shell to the front portion of the structure, where it engages the upper edge of the pivoted shutter; this, when released by the latch upon the attraction of the armature, falls so as to display a target behind it. [illustration: fig. . tubular drop] [illustration: fig. . strip of tubular drops] these drops may be mounted individually on the face of the switchboard, but it is more usual to mount them in strips of five or ten. a strip of five drops, as manufactured by the kellogg switchboard and supply company, is shown in fig. . the front strip on which these drops are mounted is usually of brass or steel, copper plated, and is sufficiently heavy to provide a rigid support for the entire group of drops that are mounted on it. this construction greatly facilitates the assembling of the switchboard and also serves to economize space--obviously, the thing to economize on the face of a switchboard is space as defined by vertical and horizontal dimensions. these tubular drops, having but one coil, are readily mounted on -inch centers, both vertically and horizontally. sometimes even smaller dimensions than this are secured. the greatest advantage of this form of construction, however, is in the absolute freedom from cross-talk between two adjacent drops. so completely is the magnetic field of force kept within the material of the shell, that there is practically no stray field and two such drops may be included in two different talking circuits and the drops mounted immediately adjacent to each other without producing any cross-talk whatever. _night alarm._ switchboard drops in falling make but little noise, and during the day time, while the operator is supposed to be needed continually at the board, the visual signal which they display is sufficient to attract her attention. in small exchanges, however, it is frequently not practicable to keep an operator at the switchboard at night or during other comparatively idle periods, and yet calls that do arrive during such periods must be attended to. for this reason some other than a visual signal is necessary, and this need is met by the so-called night-alarm attachment. this is merely an arrangement by which the shutter in falling closes a pair of contacts and thus completes the circuit of an ordinary vibrating bell or buzzer which will sound until the shutter is restored to its normal position. such contacts are shown in fig. at _ _ and _ _. night-alarm contacts have assumed a variety of forms, some of which will be referred to in the discussion of other types of drops and jacks. [illustration: fig. . drop with night-alarm contacts] _jack mounting._ jacks, like drops, though frequently individually mounted are more often mounted in strips. an individually mounted jack is shown in fig. , and a strip of ten jacks in fig. . in such a strip of jacks, the strips supporting the metallic parts of the various jacks are usually of hard rubber reinforced by brass so as to give sufficient strength. various forms of supports for these strips are used by different manufacturers, the means for fastening them in the switchboard frame usually consisting of brass lugs on the end of the jack strip adapted to be engaged by screws entering the stationary portion of the iron framework; or sometimes pins are fixed in the framework, and the jack is held in place by nuts engaging screw-threaded ends on such pins. [illustration: fig. . individual jack] [illustration: fig. . strip of jacks] _methods of associating jacks and drops._ there are two general methods of arranging the drops and jacks in a switchboard. one of these is to place all of the jacks in a group together at the lower portion of the panel in front of the operator and all of the drops together in another group above the group of jacks. the other way is to locate each jack in immediate proximity to the drop belonging to the same line so that the operator's attention will always be called immediately to the jack into which she must insert her plug in response to the display of a drop. this latter practice has several advantages over the former. where the drops are all mounted in one group and the jacks in another, an operator seeing a drop fall must make mental note of it and pick out the corresponding jack in the group of jacks. on the other hand, where the jacks and drops are mounted immediately adjacent to each other, the falling of a drop attracts the attention of the operator to the corresponding jack without further mental effort on her part. the immediate association of the drops and jacks has another advantage--it makes possible such a mechanical relation between the drop and its associated jack that the act of inserting the plug into the jack in making the connection will automatically and mechanically restore the drop to its raised position. such drops are termed _self-restoring drops_, and, since a drop and jack are often made structurally a unitary piece of apparatus, they are frequently called _combined_ drops and jacks. _manual vs. automatic restoration._. there has been much difference of opinion on the question of manual versus automatic restoration of drops. some have contended that there is no advantage in having the drops restored automatically, claiming that the operator has plenty of time to restore the drops by hand while receiving the order from the calling subscriber or performing some of her other work. those who think this way have claimed that the only place where an automatically restored drop is really desirable is where, on account of the lack of space on the front of the switchboard, the drops are placed on such a portion of the board as to be not readily reached by the operator. this resulted in the electrically restored drop, mention of which will be made later. others have contended that even though the drop is mounted within easy reach of the operator, it is advantageous that the operator should be relieved of the burden of restoring it, claiming that even though there are times in the regular performance of the operator's duties when she may without interfering with other work restore the drops manually, such requirement results in a double use of her attention and in a useless strain on her which might better be devoted to the actual making of connections. until recently the various bell operating companies have adhered, in their small exchange work, to the manual restoring method, while most of the so-called independent operating companies have adhered to the automatic self-restoring drops. methods of automatic restoration. two general methods present themselves for bringing about the automatic restoration of the drop. first, the mechanical method, which is accomplished by having some moving part of the jack or of the plug as it enters the jack force the drop mechanically into its restored position. this usually means the mounting of the drop and the corresponding jack in juxtaposition, and this, in turn, has usually resulted in the unitary structure containing both the drop and the jack. second, the electrical method wherein the plug in entering the jack controls a restoring circuit, which includes a battery or other source of energy and a restoring coil on the drop, the result being that the insertion of the plug into the jack closes this auxiliary circuit and thus energizes the restoring magnet, the armature of which pulls the shutter back into its restored position. this practice has been followed by bell operating companies whenever conditions require the drop to be mounted out of easy reach of the operator; not otherwise. _mechanical--direct contact with plug._ one widely used method of mechanical restoration of drops, once employed by the western telephone construction company with considerable success, was to hang the shutter in such position that it would fall immediately in front of the jack so that the operator in order to reach the jack with the plug would have to push the plug directly against the shutter and thus restore it to its normal or raised position. in this construction the coil of the drop magnet was mounted directly behind the jack, the latch rod controlled by the armature reaching forward, parallel with the jack, to the shutter, which, as stated, was hung in front of the jack. this resulted in a most compact arrangement so far as the space utilization on the front of the board was concerned and such combined drops and jacks were mounted on about -inch centers, so that a bank of one hundred combined drops and jacks occupied a space only a little over inches square. a modification of this scheme, as used by the american electric telephone company, was to mount the drop immediately over the jack so that its shutter, when down, occupied a position almost in front of, but above, the jack opening. the plug was provided with a collar, which, as it entered the jack, engaged a cam on the base of the shutter and forced the latter mechanically into its raised position. neither of these methods of restoring--_i.e._, by direct contact between the shutter or part of it and the plug or part of it--is now as widely used as formerly. it has been found that there is no real need in magneto switchboards for the very great compactness which the hanging of the shutter directly in front of the drop resulted in, and the tendency in later years has been to make the combined drops and jacks more substantial in construction at the expense of some space on the face of the switchboard. [illustration: fig. . kellogg drop and jack] kellogg type:--a very widely used scheme of mechanical restoration is that employed in the miller drop and jack manufactured by the kellogg switchboard and supply company, the principles of which may be understood in connection with fig. . in this figure views of one of these combined drops and jacks in three different positions are shown. the jack is composed of the framework _b_ and the hollow screw _a_, the latter forming the sleeve or thimble of the jack and being externally screw-threaded so as to engage and bind in place the front end of the framework _b_. the jack is mounted on the lower part of the brass mounting strip _c_ but insulated therefrom. the tip spring of the jack is bent down as usual to engage the tip of the plug, as better shown in the lower cut of fig. , and then continues in an extension _d_, which passes through a hole in the mounting plate _c_. this tip spring in its normal position rests against another spring as shown, which latter spring forms one terminal of the drop winding. the drop or annunciator is of tubular form, and the shutter is so arranged on the front of the mounting strip _c_ as to fall directly above the extension _d_ of the tip spring. as a result, when the plug is inserted into the jack, the upward motion of the tip spring forces the drop into its restored position, as indicated in the lower cut of the figure. these drops and jacks are usually mounted in banks of five, as shown in fig. . [illustration: fig. . strip of kellogg drops and jacks] western electric type:--the combined drop and jack of the western electric company recently put on the market to meet the demands of the independent trade, differs from others principally in that it employs a spherical drop or target instead of the ordinary flat shutter. this piece of apparatus is shown in its three possible positions in fig. . the shutter or target normally displays a black surface through a hole in the mounting plate. the sphere forming the target is out of balance, and when the latch is withdrawn from it by the action of the electromagnet it falls into the position shown in the middle cut of fig. , thus displaying a red instead of a black surface to the view of the operator. when the operator plugs in, the plug engages the lower part of an =s=-shaped lever which acts on the pivoted sphere to restore it to its normal position. a perspective view of one of these combined line signals and jacks is shown in fig. . a feature that is made much of in recently designed drops and jacks for magneto service is that which provides for the ready removal of the drop coil, from the rest of the structure, for repair. the drop and jack of the western electric company, just described, embodies this feature, a single screw being so arranged that its removal will permit the withdrawal of the coil without disturbing any of the other parts or connections. the coil windings terminate in two projections on the front head of the spool, and these register with spring clips on the inside of the shell so that the proper connections for the coil are automatically made by the mere insertion of the coil into the shell. [illustration: fig. . western electric drop and jack] [illustration: fig. . western electric drop and jack] dean type:--the combined drop and jack of the dean electric company is illustrated in figs. and . the two perspective views show the general features of the drop and jack and the method by which the magnet coil may be withdrawn from the shell. as will be seen the magnet is wound on a hollow core which slides over the iron core, the latter remaining permanently fixed in the shell, even though the coil be withdrawn. fig. shows the structural details of the jack employed in this combination and it will be seen that the restoring spring for the drop is not the tip spring itself, but another spring located above and insulated from it and mechanically connected therewith. [illustration: fig. . dean drop and jack] [illustration: fig. . dean drop and jack] [illustration: fig. . details of dean jack] monarch type:--still another combined drop and jack is that of the monarch telephone manufacturing company of chicago, shown in sectional view in fig. . this differs from the usual type in that the armature is mounted on the front end of the electromagnet, its latch arm retaining the shutter in its normal position when raised, and releasing it when depressed by the attraction of the armature. as is shown, there is within the core of the magnet an adjustable spiral spring which presses forward against the armature and which spring is compressed by the attraction of the armature of the magnet. the night-alarm contact is clearly shown immediately below the strip which supports the drop, this consisting of a spring adapted to be engaged by a lug on the shutter and pressed upwardly against a stationary contact when the shutter falls. the method of restoration of the shutter in this case is by means of an auxiliary spring bent up so as to engage the shutter and restore it when the spring is raised by the insertion of a plug into the jack. [illustration: fig. . monarch drop and jack] _code signaling._ on bridging party lines, where the subscribers sometimes call other subscribers on the same line and sometimes call the switchboard so as to obtain a connection with another line, it is not always easy for the operator at the switchboard to distinguish whether the call is for her or for some other party on the line. on such lines, of course, code ringing is used and in most cases the operator's only way of distinguishing between calls for her and those for some sub-station parties on the line is by listening to the rattling noise which the drop armature makes. in the case of the monarch drop the adjustable spring tension on the armature is intended to provide for such an adjustment as will permit the armature to give a satisfactory buzz in response to the alternating ringing currents, whether the line be long or short. [illustration: fig. . code signal attachment] the monarch company provides in another way for code signaling at the switchboard. in some cases there is a special attachment, shown in fig. , by means of which the code signals are repeated on the night-alarm bell. this is in the nature of a special attachment placed on the drop, which consists of a light, flat spring attached to the armature and forming one side of a local circuit. the other side of the circuit terminates in a fixture which is mounted on the drop frame and is provided with a screw, having a platinum point forming the other contact point; this allows of considerable adjustment. at the point where the screw comes in contact with the spring there is a platinum rivet. when an operator is not always in attendance, this code-signaling attachment has some advantages over the drop as a signal interpreter, in that it permits the code signals to be heard from a distance. of course, the addition of spring contacts to the drop armature tends to complicate the structure and perhaps to cut down the sensitiveness of the drop, which are offsetting disadvantages. [illustration: fig. . combined drop and ringer] for really long lines, this code signaling by means of the drop is best provided for by employing a combined drop and ringer, although in this case whatever advantages are secured by the mechanical restoration of the shutter upon plugging in are lost. such a device as manufactured by the dean electric company is shown in fig. . in this the ordinary polarized ringer is used, but in addition the tapper rod carries a latch which, when vibrated by the ringing of the bell, releases a shutter and causes it to fall, thus giving a visual as well as an audible signal. _electrical_. coming now to the electrical restoration of drop shutters, reference is made to fig. , which shows in side section the electrical restoring drop employed by the bell companies and manufactured by the western electric company. in this the coil _ _ is a line coil, and it operates on the armature _ _ to raise the latch lever _ _ in just the same manner as in the ordinary tubular drop. the latch lever _ _ acts, however, to release another armature _ _ instead of a shutter. this armature _ _ is pivoted at its lower end at the opposite end of the device from the armature _ _ and, by falling outwardly when released, it serves to raise the light shutter _ _. the restoring coil of this device is shown at _ _, and when energized it attracts the armature _ _ so as to pull it back under the catch of the latch lever _ _ and also so as to allow the shutter _ _ to fall into its normal position. the method of closing the restoring circuit is by placing coil _ _ in circuit with a local battery and with a pair of contacts in the jack, which latter contacts are normally open but are bridged across by the plug when it enters the jack, thus energizing the restoring coil and restoring the shutter. [illustration: fig. . electrically restored drop] a perspective view of this western electric electrical restoring drop is shown in fig. , a more complete mention being made of this feature under the discussion of magneto multiple switchboards, wherein it found its chief use. it is mentioned here to round out the methods that have been employed for accomplishing the automatic restoration of shutters by the insertion of the plug. [illustration: fig. . electrically restored drop] switchboard plugs. a switchboard plug such as is commonly used in simple magneto switchboards is shown in fig. and also in fig. . the tip contact is usually of brass and is connected to a slender steel rod which runs through the center of the plug and terminates near the rear end of the plug in a connector for the tip conductor of the cord. this central core of steel is carefully insulated from the outer shell of the plug by means of hard rubber bushings, the parts being forced tightly together. the outer shell, of course, forms the other conductor of the plug, called the sleeve contact. a handle of tough fiber tubing is fitted over the rear end of the plug and this also serves to close the opening formed by cutting away a portion of the plug shell, thus exposing the connector for the tip conductor. [illustration: fig. . switchboard plug] _cord attachment._ the rear end of the plug shell is usually bored out just about the size of the outer covering of the switchboard cord, and it is provided with a coarse internal screw thread, as shown. the cord is attached by screwing it tightly into this screw-threaded chamber, the screw threads in the brass being sufficiently coarse and of sufficiently small internal diameter to afford a very secure mechanical connection between the outer braiding of the cord and the plug. the connection between the tip conductor of the cord and the tip of the plug is made by a small machine screw connection as shown, while the connection between the sleeve conductor of the plug and the sleeve conductor of the cord is made by bending back the latter over the outer braiding of the cord before it is screwed into the shank of the plug. this results in the close electrical contact between the sleeve conductor of the cord and the inner metal surface of the shank of the plug. switchboard cords. a great deal of ingenuity has been exerted toward the end of producing a reliable and durable switchboard cord. while great improvement has resulted, the fact remains that the cords of manual switchboards are today probably the most troublesome element, and they need constant attention and repairs. while no two manufacturers build their cords exactly alike, descriptions of a few commonly used and successful cords may be here given. _concentric conductors._ in one the core is made from a double strand of strong lock stitch twine, over which is placed a linen braid. then the tip conductor, which is of stranded copper tinsel, is braided on. this is then covered with two layers of tussah silk, laid in reverse wrappings, then there is a heavy cotton braid, and over the latter a linen braid. the sleeve conductor, which is also of copper tinsel, is then braided over the structure so formed, after which two reverse wrappings of tussah silk are served on, and this is covered by a cotton braid and this in turn by a heavy linen or polished cotton braid. the plug end of the cord is reinforced for a length of from to inches by another braiding of linen or polished cotton, and the whole cord is treated with melted beeswax to make it moisture-proof and durable. [illustration: fig. . switchboard cord] _steel spiral conductors._ in another cord that has found much favor the two conductors are formed mainly by two concentric spiral wrappings of steel wire, the conductivity being reinforced by adjacent braidings of tinsel. the structure of such a cord is well shown in fig. . beginning at the right, the different elements shown are, in the order named, a strand of lock stitch twine, a linen braiding, into the strands of which are intermingled tinsel strands, the inner spiral steel wrapping, a braiding of tussah silk, a linen braiding, a loose tinsel braiding, the outer conductor of round spiral steel, a cotton braid, and an outside linen or polished cotton braid. the inner tinsel braiding and the inner spiral together form the tip conductor while the outer braiding and spiral together form the sleeve conductor. the cord is reinforced at the plug end for a length of about inches by another braiding of linen. the tinsel used is, in each case, for the purpose of cutting down the resistance of the main steel conductor. these wrappings of steel wire forming the tip and sleeve conductors respectively, have the advantage of affording great flexibility, and also of making it certain that whatever strain the cord is subjected to will fall on the insulated braiding rather than on the spiral steel which has in itself no power to resist tensile strains. _parallel tinsel conductors._ another standard two-conductor switchboard cord is manufactured as follows: one conductor is of very heavy copper tinsel insulated with one wrapping of sea island cotton, which prevents broken ends of the tinsel or knots from piercing through and short-circuiting with the other conductor. over this is placed one braid of tussah silk and an outer braid of cotton. this combines high insulation with considerable strength. the other conductor is of copper tinsel, not insulated, and this is laid parallel to the thrice insulated conductor already described. around these two conductors is placed an armor of spring brass wire in spiral form, and over this a close, stout braid of glazed cotton. this like the others is reinforced by an extra braid at the plug end. ringing and listening keys. the general principles of the ringing key have already been referred to. ringing keys are of two general types, one having horizontal springs and the other vertical. [illustration: fig. . horizontal-spring listening and ringing key] _horizontal spring type._ various bell operating companies have generally adhered to the horizontal spring type except in individual and four-party-line keys. the construction of a western electric company horizontal spring key is shown in fig. . in this particular key, as illustrated, there are two cam levers operating upon three sets of springs. the cam lever at the left operates the ordinary ringing and listening set of springs according to whether it is pushed one way or the other. in ringing on single-party lines the cam lever at the left is the one to be used; while on two-party lines the lever at the left serves to ring the first party and the ringing key at the right the second party. in order that the operator may have an indication as to which station on a two-party line she has called, a small target _ _ carried on a lever _ _ is provided. this target may display a black or a white field, according to which of its positions it occupies. the lever _ _ is connected by the links _ _ and _ _ with the two key levers and the target is thus moved into one position or the other, according to which lever was last thrown into ringing position. it will be noticed that the springs are mounted horizontally and on edge. this on-edge feature has the advantage of permitting ready inspection of the contacts and of avoiding the liability of dust gathering between the contacts. as will be seen, at the lower end of each switch lever there is a roller of insulating material which serves as a wedge, when forced between the two long springs of any set, to force them apart and into engagement with their respective outer springs. [illustration: fig. . vertical-spring listening and ringing key] _vertical spring type._ the other type of ringing and listening key employing vertical springs is almost universally used by the various independent manufacturing companies. a good example of this is shown in fig. , which shows partly in elevation and partly in section a double key of the monarch company. the operation of this is obvious from its mode of construction. the right-hand set of springs of the right-hand key in this cut are the springs of the listening key, while the left-hand set of the right-hand key are those of the calling-plug ringing key. the left-hand set of the left-hand key may be those of a ring-back key on the answering plug, while the right-hand set of the left-hand key may be for any special purpose. it is obvious that these groups of springs may be grouped in different combinations or omitted in part, as required. this same general form of key is also manufactured by the kellogg company and the dean company, that of the kellogg company being illustrated in perspective, fig. . the keys of this general type have the same advantages as those of the horizontal on-edge arrangement with respect to the gathering of dust, and while perhaps the contacts are not so readily get-at-able for inspection, yet they have the advantage of being somewhat more simple, and of taking up less horizontal space on the key shelf. [illustration: fig. . vertical listening and ringing key] [illustration: fig. . four-party listening and ringing key] _party-line ringing keys._ for party-line ringing the key matter becomes somewhat more complicated. usually the arrangement is such that in connection with each calling plug there are a number of keys, each arranged with respect to the circuits of the plug so as to send out the proper combination and direction of current, if the polarity system is used; or the proper frequency of current if the harmonic system is used; or the proper number of impulses if the step-by-step or broken-line system is used. the number of different kinds of arrangements and combinations is legion, and we will here illustrate only an example of a four-party line ringing key adapted for harmonic ringing. a kellogg party-line listening and ringing key is shown in fig. . in this, besides the regular listening key, are shown four push-button keys, each adapted, when depressed, to break the connection back of the key, and at the same time connect the proper calling generator with the calling plug. _self-indicating keys._ a complication that has given a good deal of trouble in the matter of party-line ringing is due to the fact that it is sometimes necessary to ring a second or a third time on a party-line connection, because the party called may not respond the first time. the operator is not always able to remember which one of the four keys associated with the plug connected with the desired party she has pressed on the first occasion and, therefore, when it becomes necessary to ring again, she may ring the wrong party. this is provided for in a very ingenious way in the key shown in fig. , by making the arrangement such that after a given key has been depressed to its full extent in ringing, and then released, it does not come quite back to its normal position but remains slightly depressed. this always serves as an indication to the operator, therefore, as to which key she depressed last, and in the case of a re-ring, she merely presses the key that is already down a little way. on the next call if she is required to press another one of the four keys, the one which remained down a slight distance on the last call will be released and the one that is fully depressed will be the one that remains down as an indication. such keys, where the key that was last used leaves an indication to that effect, are called _indicating_ ringing keys. in other forms the indication is given by causing the key lever to move a little target which remains exposed until some other key in the same set is moved. the key shown in fig. is an example of this type. note. the matter of automatic ringing and other special forms of ringing will be referred to and discussed at their proper places in this work, but at this point they are not pertinent as they are not employed in simple switchboards. operator's telephone equipment. little need be said concerning the matter of the operator's talking apparatus, _i.e._, the operator's transmitter and receiver, since as transmitters and receivers they are practically the same as those in ordinary use for other purposes. the watch-case receiver is nearly always employed for operators' purposes on account of its lightness and compactness. it is used in connection with a head band so as to be held continually at the operator's ear, allowing both of her hands to be free. the transmitter used by operators does not in itself differ from the transmitters employed by subscribers, but the methods by which it is supported differ, two general practices being followed. one of these is to suspend the transmitter by flexible conducting cords so as to be adjustable in a vertical direction. a good illustration of this is given in fig. . the other method, and one that is coming into more and more favor, is to mount the transmitter on a light bracket suspended by a flexible band from the neck of the operator, a breast plate being furnished so that the transmitter will rest on her breast and be at all times within proper position to receive her speech. to facilitate this, a long curved mouthpiece is commonly employed, as shown clearly in fig. . [illustration: fig. . operator's transmitter suspension] _cut-in jack._ it is common to terminate that portion of the apparatus which is worn on the operator's person--that is, the receiver only if the suspended type of transmitter is employed, and the receiver and transmitter if the breast plate type of transmitter is employed--in a plug, and a flexible cord connecting the plug terminates with the apparatus. the portions of the operator's talking circuit that are located permanently in the switchboard cabinet are in such cases terminated in a jack, called an operator's _cut-in jack_. this is usually mounted on the front rail of the switchboard cabinet just below the key shelf. such a cut-in jack is shown in fig. and it is merely a specialized form of spring jack adapted to receive the short, stout plug in which the operator's transmitter, or transmitter and receiver, terminate. by this arrangement the operator is enabled readily to connect or disconnect her talking apparatus, which is worn on her person, whenever she comes to the board for work or leaves it at the end of her work. a complete operator's telephone set, or that portion that is carried on the person of the operator, together with the cut-in plug, is shown in fig. . [illustration: fig. . operator's cut-in jack] [illustration: fig. . operator's talking set] circuits of complete switchboard. we may now discuss the circuits of a complete simple magneto switchboard. the one shown in fig. is typical. before going into the details of this, it is well to inform the student that this general form of circuit representation is one that is commonly employed in showing the complete circuits of any switchboard. ordinarily two subscribers' lines are shown, these connecting their respective subscribers' stations with two different line equipments at the central office. the jacks and signals of these line equipments are turned around so as to face each other, in order to clearly represent how the connection between them may be made by means of the cord circuit. the elements of the cord circuit are also spread out, so that the various parts occupy relative positions which they do not assume at all in practice. in other words it must be remembered that, in circuit diagrams, the relative positions of the parts are sacrificed in order to make clear the circuit connections. however, this does not mean that it is often not possible to so locate the pieces of apparatus that they will in a certain way indicate relative positions, as may be seen in the case of the drop and jack in fig. , the drop being shown immediately above the jack, which is the position in which these parts are located in practice. [illustration: fig. . circuit of simple magneto switchboard] little need be said concerning this circuit in view of what has already been said in connection with figs. to . it will be seen in the particular sub-station circuit here represented, that the talking apparatus is arranged in the usual manner and that the ringer and generator are so arranged that when the generator is operated the ringer will be cut out of circuit, while the generator will be placed across the circuit; while, when the generator is idle, the ringer is bridged across the circuit and the generator is cut out. the line terminates in each case in the tip and sleeve contacts of the jack, and in the normal condition of the jack the line drop is bridged across the line. the arrangement by which the drop is restored and at the same time cut out of circuit when the operator plugs in the jack, is obvious from the diagrammatic illustration. the cord circuit is the same as that already discussed, with the exception that two ringing keys are provided, one in connection with the calling plug, as is universal practice, and the other in connection with the answering plug as is sometimes practiced in order that the operator may, when occasion requires, ring back the calling subscriber without the necessity of changing the plug in the jack. the outer contacts of these two ringing keys are connected to the terminals of the ringing generator and, when either key is operated, the connection between the plug, on which the ringing is to be done, and the rest of the cord circuit will be broken, while the generator will be connected with the terminals of the plug. the listening key and talking apparatus need no further explanation, it being obvious that when the key is operated the subscriber's telephone set will be bridged across the cord circuit and, therefore, connected with either or both of the talking subscribers. [illustration: fig. . night-alarm circuit] night-alarm circuits. the circuit of fig. , while referred to as a complete circuit, is not quite that. the night-alarm circuit is not shown. in order to clearly indicate how a single battery and bell, or buzzer, may serve in connecting a number of line drops, reference is made to fig. which shows the connection between three different line drops and the night-alarm circuit. the night-alarm apparatus consists in the battery _ _ and the buzzer, or bell, _ _. a switch _ _ adapted to be manually operated is connected in the circuit with the battery and the buzzer so as to open this circuit when the night alarm is not needed, thus making it inoperative. during the portions of the day when the operator is needed constantly at the board it is customary to leave this switch _ _ open, but during the night period when she is not required constantly at the board this switch is closed so that an audible signal will be given whenever a drop falls. the night-alarm contact _ _ on each of the drops will be closed whenever a shutter falls, and as the two members of this contact, in the case of each drop, are connected respectively with the two sides of the night-alarm circuit, any one shutter falling will complete the necessary conditions for causing the buzzer to sound, assuming of course that the switch _ _ is closed. _night alarm with relay._ a good deal of trouble has been caused in the past by uncertainty in the closure of the night-alarm circuit at the drop contact. some of the companies have employed the form of circuit shown in fig. to overcome this. instead of the night-alarm buzzer being placed directly in the circuit that is closed by the drop, a relay _ _ and a high-voltage battery _ _ are placed in this circuit. the buzzer and the battery for operating it are placed in a local circuit controlled by this relay. it will be seen by reference to fig. that when the shutter falls, it will, by closing the contact _ _, complete the circuit from the battery _ _ through the relay _ _--assuming switch _ _ to be closed--and thus cause the operation of the relay. the relay, in turn, by pulling up its armature, will close the circuit of the buzzer _ _ through the battery _ _ and cause the buzzer to sound. [illustration: fig. . night-alarm circuit with relay] the advantage of this method over the direct method of operating the buzzer is that any imperfection in the night-alarm contact at the drop is much less likely to prevent the flow of current of the high-voltage battery _ _ than of the low-voltage battery _ _, shown in connection with fig. . this is because the higher voltage is much more likely to break down any very thin bit of insulation, such as might be caused by a minute particle of dust or oxide between contacts that are supposed to be closed by the falling of the shutter. it has been common to employ for battery _ _ a dry-cell battery giving about or volts, and for the operation of the buzzer itself, a similar battery of about two cells giving approximately volts. _night-alarm contacts._ the night-alarm contact _ _ of the drop shown diagrammatically in figs. and would, if taken literally, indicate that the shutter itself actually forms one terminal of the circuit and the contact against which it falls, the other. this has not been found to be a reliable way of closing the night-alarm contacts and this method is indicated in these figures and in other figures in this work merely as a convenient way of representing the matter diagrammatically. as a matter of fact the night-alarm contacts are ordinarily closed by having the shutter fall against one spring, which is thereby pressed into engagement with another spring or contact, as shown in fig. . this method employs the shutter only as a means for mechanically causing the one spring to press against the other, the shutter itself forming no part of the circuit. the reason why it is not a good plan to have the shutter itself act as one terminal of the circuit is that this necessitates the circuit connections being led to the shutter through the trunnions on which the shutter is pivoted. this is bad because, obviously, the shutter must be loosely supported on its trunnions in order to give it sufficiently free movement, and, as is well known, loose connections are not conducive to good electrical contacts. grounded-and metallic-circuit lines. when grounded circuits were the rule rather than the exception, many of the switchboards were particularly adapted for their use and could not be used with metallic-circuit lines. these grounded-circuit switchboards provided but a single contact in the jack and a single contact on the plug, the cords having but a single strand reaching from one plug to the other. the ringing keys and listening keys were likewise single-contact keys rather than double. the clearing-out drop and the operator's talking circuit and the ringing generator were connected between the single strand of the cord and the ground as was required. the grounded-circuit switchboard has practically passed out of existence, and while a few of them may be in use, they are not manufactured at present. the reason for this is that while many grounded circuits are still in use, there are very few places where there are not some metallic-circuit lines, and while the grounded-circuit switchboard will not serve for metallic-circuit lines, the metallic-circuit switchboard will serve equally well for either metallic-circuit or grounded lines, and will interconnect them with equal facility. this fact will be made clear by a consideration of figs. , , and . [illustration: fig. . connection between metallic lines] [illustration: fig. . connection between grounded lines] _connection between two similar lines._ in fig. a common magneto cord circuit is shown connecting two metallic-circuit lines; in fig. the same cord circuit is shown connecting two grounded lines. in this case the line wire _ _ of the left-hand line is, when the plugs are inserted, continued to the tip of the answering plug, thence through the tip strand of the cord circuit to the tip of the calling plug, then to the tip spring of the right-hand jack and out to the single conductor of that line. the entire sleeve portion of the cord circuit becomes grounded as soon as the plugs are inserted in the jacks of such a line. hence, we see that the sleeve contacts of the plug and the sleeve conductor of the cord are connected to ground through the permanent ground connection of the sleeve conductors of the jack as soon as the plug is inserted into the jack. thus, when the cord circuit of a metallic-circuit switchboard is used to connect two grounded circuits together, the tip strand of the cord is the connecting link between the two conductors, while the sleeve strand of the cord merely serves to ground one side of the clearing-out drop and one side each of the operator's telephone set and the ringing generator when their respective keys are operated. _connection between dissimilar lines._ fig. shows how the same cord circuit and the same arrangement of line equipment may be used for connecting a grounded line to a metallic-circuit line. the metallic circuit line is shown on the left and the grounded line on the right. when the two plugs are inserted into the respective jacks of this figure, the right-hand conductor of the metallic circuit shown on the left will be continued through the tip strand of the cord circuit to the line conductor of the grounded line shown on the right. the left-hand conductor of the metallic-circuit line will be connected to ground because it will be continued through the sleeve strand of the cord circuit to the sleeve contact of the calling plug and thence to the sleeve contact of the jack of the grounded line, which sleeve contact is shown to be grounded. the talking circuit between the two connected lines in this case may be traced as follows: from the subscriber's station at the left through the right-hand limb of the metallic-circuit line, through the tip contact and tip conductor of the cord circuit, to the single limb of the grounded-circuit line, thence to the sub-station of that line and through the talking apparatus there to ground. the return path from the right-hand station is by way of ground to the ground connection at the central office, thence to the sleeve contact of the grounded line jack, through the sleeve conductor of the cord circuit, to the sleeve contact of the metallic-circuit line jack, and thence by the left-hand limb of the metallic-circuit line to the subscriber's station. [illustration: fig. . connection between dissimilar lines] a better way of connecting a metallic-circuit line to a grounded line is by the use of a special cord circuit involving a repeating coil, such a connection being shown in fig. . the cord circuit in this case differs in no respect from those already shown except that a repeating coil is associated with it in such a way as to conductively divide the answering side from the calling side. obviously, whatever currents come over the line connected with the answering plug will pass through the windings _ _ and _ _ of this coil and will induce corresponding currents in the windings _ _ and _ _, which latter currents will pass out over the circuit of the line connected with the calling plug. when a grounded circuit is connected to a metallic circuit in this manner, no ground is thrown onto the metallic circuit. the balance of the metallic circuit is, therefore, maintained. to ground one side of a metallic circuit frequently so unbalances it as to cause it to become noisy, that is, to have currents flowing in it, by induction or from other causes, other than the currents which are supposed to be there for the purpose of conveying speech. [illustration: fig. . connection of dissimilar lines through repeating coil] _convertible cord circuits._ the consideration of fig. brings us to the subject of so-called convertible cord circuits. some switchboards, serving a mixture of metallic and grounded lines, are provided with cord circuits which may be converted at will by the operator from the ordinary type shown in fig. to the type shown in fig. . the advantage of this will be obvious from the following consideration. when a call originates on any line, either grounded or metallic, the operator does not know which kind of a line is to be called for. she, therefore, plugs into this line with any one of her answering plugs and completes the connection in the usual way. if the call is for the same kind of a circuit as that over which the call originated, she places the converting key in such a position as will connect the conductors of the cord circuit straight through; while if the connection is for a different kind of a line than that on which the call originated she throws the converting key into such a position as to include the repeating coil. a study of fig. will show that when the converting key, which is commonly referred to as the repeating-coil key, is in one position, the cord conductors will be cut straight through, the repeating coil being left open in both its windings; and when it is thrown to its other position, the connection between the answering and calling sides of the cord circuit will be severed and the repeating coil inserted so as to bring about the same effects and circuit arrangements as are shown in fig. . [illustration: fig. . convertible cord circuit] cord-circuit considerations. _simple bridging drop type._ the matter of cord circuits in magneto switchboards is deserving of much attention. so far as talking requirements are concerned, the ordinary form of cord circuit with a clearing-out drop bridged across the two strands is adequate for nearly all conditions except those where a grounded-and a metallic-circuit line are connected together, in which case the inclusion of a repeating coil has some advantages. [illustration: fig. . bridging drop-cord circuit] from the standpoint of signaling, however, this type of cord circuit has some disadvantages under certain conditions. in order to simplify the discussion of this and other cord-circuit matters, reference will be made to some diagrams from which the ringing and listening keys and talking apparatus have been entirely omitted. in fig. the regular bridging type of clearing-out drop-cord circuit is shown, this being the type already discussed as standard. for ordinary practice it is all right. certain difficulties are experienced with it, however, where lines of various lengths and various types of sub-station apparatus are connected. for instance, if a long bridging line be connected with one end of this cord circuit and a short line having a low-resistance series ringer be connected with the other end, then a station on the long line may have some difficulty in throwing the clearing-out drop, because of the low-resistance shunt that is placed around it through the short line and the low-resistance ringer. in other words, the clearing-out drop is shunted by a comparatively low-resistance line and ringer and the feeble currents arriving from a distant station over the long line are not sufficient to operate the drop thus handicapped. the advent of the various forms of party-line selective signaling and the use of such systems in connection with magneto switchboards has brought in another difficulty that sometimes manifests itself with this type of cord circuit. if two ordinary magneto telephones are connected to the two ends of this cord circuit, it is obvious that when one of the subscribers has hung up his receiver and the other subscriber rings off, the bell of the other subscriber will very likely be rung even though the clearing-out drop operates properly; it would be better in any event not to have this other subscriber's bell rung, for he may understand it to be a recall to his telephone. when, however, a party line is connected through such a cord circuit to an ordinary line having bridging instruments, for instance, the difficulty due to ringing off becomes even greater. when the subscriber on the magneto line operates his generator to give the clearing-out signal, he is very likely to ring some of the bells on the other line and this, of course, is an undesirable thing. this may happen even in the case of harmonic bells on the party line, since it is possible that the subscriber on the magneto line in turning his generator will, at some phase of the operation, strike just the proper frequency to ring some one of the bells on the harmonic party line. it is obvious, therefore, that there is a real need for a cord circuit that will prevent _through ringing._ one way of eliminating the through-ringing difficulty in the type of cord circuit shown in fig. would be to use such a very low-wound clearing-out drop that it would practically short-circuit the line with respect to ringing currents and prevent them from passing on to the other line. this, however, is not a good thing to do, since a winding sufficiently low to shunt the effective ringing current would also be too low for good telephone transmission. [illustration: fig. . series drop-cord circuit] _series drop type._ another type of cord circuit that was largely used by the stromberg-carlson telephone manufacturing company at one time is shown in fig. . in this the clearing-out drop was not bridged but was placed in series in the tip side of the line and was shunted by a condenser. the resistance of the clearing-out drop was , ohms and the capacity of the condenser was microfarads. it is obvious that this way of connecting the clearing-out drop was subject to the _ringing-through_ difficulty, since the circuit through which the clearing-out current necessarily passed included the telephone instrument of the line that was not sending the clearing-out signal. this form was also objectionable because it was necessary for the subscriber to ring through the combined resistance of two lines, and in case the other line happened to be open, no clearing-out signal would be received. while this circuit, therefore, was perhaps not quite so likely as the other to tie up the subscriber, that is, to leave him connected without the ability to send a clearing-out signal, yet it was sure to ring through, for the clearing-out drop could not be thrown without the current passing through the other subscriber's station. [illustration: fig. . dean non-ring-through cord circuit] _non-ring-through type._ an early attempt at a non-ring-through cord is shown in fig. , this having once been standard with the dean electric company. it made use of two condensers of microfarad each, one in each side of the cord circuit. the clearing-out drop was of ohms resistance and was connected from the answering side of the tip conductor to the calling side of the sleeve conductor. in this way whatever clearing-out current reached the central office passed through at least one of the condensers and the clearing-out drop. in order for the clearing-out current to pass on beyond the central office it was necessary for it to pass through the two condensers in series. this arrangement had the advantage of giving a positive ring-off, regardless of the condition of the connected line. obviously, even if the line was short-circuited, the ringing currents from the other line would still be forced through the clearing-out drop on account of the high effective resistance of the -microfarad condenser connected in series with the short-circuited line. also the clearing-out signal would be properly received if the connected line were open, since the clearing-out drop would still be directly across the cord circuit. this arrangement also largely prevented through ringing, since the currents would pass through the -microfarad condenser and the -ohm drop more readily than through the two condensers connected in series. [illustration: fig. . monarch non-ring-through cord circuit] in fig. is shown the non-ring-through arrangement of cord circuit adopted by the monarch company. in this system the clearing-out drop has two windings, either of which will operate the armature. the two windings are bridged across the cord circuit, with a / -microfarad condenser in series in the tip strand between the two winding connections. while the low-capacity condenser will allow the high-frequency talking current to pass readily without affecting it to any appreciable extent, it offers a high resistance to a low-frequency ringing current, thus preventing it from passing out on a connected line and forcing it through one of the windings of the coil. there is a tendency to transformer action in this arrangement, one of the windings serving as a primary and the other as a secondary, but this has not prevented the device from being highly successful. a modification of this arrangement is shown in fig. , wherein a double-wound clearing-out drop is used, and a / -microfarad condenser is placed in series in each side of the cord circuit between the winding connections of the clearing-out drop. this circuit should give a positive ring-off under all conditions and should prevent through ringing except as it may be provided by the transformer action between the two windings on the same core. [illustration: fig. . non-ring-through cord circuit] another rather ingenious method of securing a positive ring-off and yet of preventing in a certain degree the undesirable ringing-through feature is shown in the cord circuit, fig. . in this two non-inductive coils _ _ and _ _ are shown connected in series in the tip and sleeve strands of the coils, respectively. between the neutral point of these two non-inductive windings is connected the clearing-out drop circuit. voice currents find ready path through these non-inductive windings because of the fact that, being non-inductive, they present only their straight ohmic resistance. the impedance of the clearing-out drop prevents the windings being shunted across the two sides of the cord circuit. with this circuit a positive ring-off is assured even though the line connected with the one sending the clearing-out signal is short-circuited or open. if it is short-circuited, the shunt around the clearing-out drop will still have the resistance of two of the non-inductive windings included in it, and thus the drop will never be short-circuited by a very low-resistance path. obviously, an open circuit in the line will not prevent the clearing-out signal being received. while this is an ingenious scheme, it is not one to be highly recommended since the non-inductive windings, in order to be effective so far as signaling is concerned, must be of considerable resistance and this resistance is in series in the talking circuit. even non-inductive resistance is to be avoided in the talking circuit when it is of considerable magnitude and where there are other ways of solving the problem. [illustration: fig. . cord circuit with differential windings] _double clearing-out type. _some people prefer two clearing-out drops in each cord circuit, so arranged that the one will be responsive to currents sent from the line with which the answering plug is connected and the other responsive only to currents sent from the line with which the calling plug is connected. such a scheme, shown in fig. , is sometimes employed by the dean, the monarch, and the kellogg companies. two -ohm clearing-out drops of ordinary construction are bridged across the cord circuit and in each side of the cord circuit there is included between the drop connections a -microfarad condenser. ringing currents originating on the line with which the answering plug is connected will pass through the clearing-out drop, which is across that side of the cord circuit, without having to pass through any condensers. in order to reach the other clearing-out drop the ringing current must pass through the two -microfarad condensers in series, this making in effect only / -microfarad. as is well known, a / -microfarad condenser not only transmits voice currents with ease but also offers a very high apparent resistance to ringing currents. with the double clearing-out drop system the operator is enabled to tell which subscriber is ringing off. if both shutters fall she knows that both subscribers have sent clearing-out signals and she, therefore, pulls down the connection without the usual precaution of listening to see whether one of the subscribers may be waiting for another connection. this double clearing-out system is analogous to the complete double-lamp supervision that will be referred to more fully in connection with common-battery circuits. there is not the need for double supervision in magneto work, however, that there is in common-battery work because of the fact that in magneto work the subscribers frequently fail to remember to ring off, this act being entirely voluntary on their part, while in common-battery work, the clearing-out signal is given automatically by the subscriber when he hangs up his receiver, thus accomplishing the desired end without the necessity of thoughtfulness on his part. [illustration: fig. . double clearing-out drops] another form of double clearing-out cord circuit is shown in fig. . in this the calling and the answering plugs are separated by repeating coils, a condenser of -microfarad capacity being inserted between each pair of windings on the two ends of the circuit. the clearing-out drops are placed across the calling and answering cords in the usual manner. the condenser in this case prevents the drop being short-circuited with respect to ringing currents and yet permits the voice currents to flow readily through it. the high impedance of the drop forces the voice currents to take the path through the repeating coil rather than through the drop. this circuit has the advantage of a repeating-coil cord circuit in permitting the connection of metallic and grounded lines without causing the unbalancing of the metallic circuits by the connection to them of the grounded circuits. [illustration: fig. . double clearing-out drops] recently there has been a growing tendency on the part of some manufacturers to control their clearing-out signals by means of relays associated with cord circuits, these signals sometimes being ordinary clearing-out drops and sometimes incandescent lamps. [illustration: fig. . relay-controlled clearing-out drop] in fig. is shown the cord circuit sometimes used by the l.m. ericsson telephone manufacturing company. a high-wound relay is normally placed across the cord and this, besides having a high-resistance and impedance winding has a low-resistance locking winding so arranged that when the relay pulls up its armature it will close a local circuit including this locking winding and local battery. when once pulled up the relay will, therefore, stay up due to the energizing of this locking coil. another contact operated by the relay closes the circuit of a low-wound clearing-out drop placed across the line, thus bridging it across the line. the condition of high impedance is maintained across the cord circuit normally while the subscribers are talking; but when either of them rings off, the high-wound relay pulls up and locks, thus completing the circuit of the clearing-out drop across the cords. the subsequent impulses sent from the subscribers' generators operate this drop. the relay is restored or unlocked and the clearing-out drop disconnected from the cord circuit by means of a key which opens the locking circuit of the relay. this key is really a part of the listening key and serves to open this locking circuit whenever the listening key is operated. the clearing-out drop is also automatically restored by the action of the listening key, this connection being mechanical rather than electrical. recall lamp:--the monarch company sometimes furnishes what it terms a recall lamp in connection with the clearing-out drops on its magneto switchboards. the circuit arrangement is shown in fig. , wherein the drop is the regular double-wound clearing-out drop like that of fig. . the armature carries a contact spring adapted to close the local circuit of a lamp whenever it is attracted. the object of this is to give the subscriber, whose line still remains connected by a cord circuit, opportunity to recall the central office if the operator has not restored the clearing-out drop. [illustration: fig. . cord circuit with recall lamp] _lamp-signal type._ there has been a tendency on the part of some manufacturing companies to advocate, instead of drop signals, incandescent lamp signals for the cord circuits, and sometimes for the line circuits on magneto boards. in most cases this may be looked upon as a "frill." where line lamps instead of drops have been used on magneto switchboards, it has been the practice to employ, instead of a drop, a locking relay associated with each lamp, which was so arranged that when the relay was energized by the magneto current from the subscriber's station, it would pull up and lock, thus closing the lamp circuit. the local circuit, or locking circuit, which included the lamp was carried through a pair of contacts in the corresponding jacks so arranged that when the plug was inserted in answer to the call, this locking lamp circuit would be open, thereby extinguishing the lamp and also unlocking the relay. there seems to be absolutely no good reason why lamp signals should be substituted for mechanical drops in magneto switchboards. there is no need for the economy in space which the lamp signal affords, and the complications brought in by the locking relays, and the requirements for maintaining a local battery suitable for energizing the lamps are not warranted for ordinary cases. [illustration: fig. . cord circuit with double lamp signals] in fig. is shown a cord circuit, adaptable to magneto switchboards, provided with double lamp signals instead of clearing-out drops. two high-wound locking relays are bridged across the line, the cord strands being divided by -microfarad condensers. when the high-wound coil of either relay is energized by the magneto current from the subscriber's station, the relay pulls up and closes a locking circuit including a battery and a coil _ _, the contact _ _ of the locking relay, and also the contact _ _ of a restoring key. this circuit may be traced from the ground through battery, coil _ _, contact _ _ controlled by the relay, and contact _ _ controlled by the restoring key, and back to ground. in multiple with the locking coil _ _ is the lamp, which is illuminated, therefore, whenever the locking circuit is closed. pressure on the restoring key breaks the locking circuit of either of the lamps, thereby putting out the lamp and at the same time restoring the locking relay to its normal position. _lamps vs. drops in cord circuits._ so much has been said and written about the advantages of incandescent lamps as signals in switchboards and about the merits of the common-battery method of supplying current to the subscribers, that there has been a tendency for people in charge of the operation of small exchanges to substitute the lamp for the drop in a magneto switchboard in order to give the general appearance of common-battery operations. there has also been a tendency to employ the common-battery system of operation in many places where magneto service should have been used, a mistake which has now been realized and corrected. in places where the simple magneto switchboard is the thing to use, the simpler it is the better, and the employment of locking relays and lamp signals and the complications which they carry with them, is not warranted. switchboard assembly. the assembly of all the parts of a simple magneto switchboard into a complete whole deserves final consideration. the structure in which the various parts are mounted, referred to as the cabinet, is usually of wood. _functions of cabinet._ the purpose of the cabinet is not only to form a support for the various pieces of apparatus but also to protect them from dust and mechanical injury, and to hold those parts that must be manipulated by the operator in such relation that they may be most convenient for use, and thus best adapted for carrying out their various functions. other points to be provided for in the design of the cabinet and the arrangement of the various parts within are: that all the apparatus that is in any way liable to get out of order may be readily accessible for inspection and repairs; and that provision shall be made whereby the wiring of these various pieces of apparatus may be done in a systematic and simple way so as to minimize the danger of crossed, grounded, or open circuits, and so as to provide for ready repair in case any of these injuries do occur. _wall-type switchboards._ the simplest form of switchboard is that for serving small communities in rural districts. ordinarily the telephone industry in such a community begins by a group of farmers along a certain road building a line connecting the houses of several of them and installing their own instruments. this line is liable to be extended to some store at the village or settlement, thus affording communication between these farmers and the center of their community. later on those residing on other roads do the same thing and connect their lines to the same store or central point. then it is that some form of switchboard is established, and perhaps the storekeeper's daughter or wife is paid a small fee for attendance. [illustration: fig. . wall switchboard with telephone] a switchboard well-adapted for this class of service where the number of lines is small, is shown in fig. . in this the operator's talking apparatus and her calling apparatus are embodied in an ordinary magneto wall telephone. the switchboard proper is mounted alongside of this, and the two line binding posts of the telephone are connected by a pair of wires to terminals of the operator's plug, which plug is shown hanging from the left-hand portion of the switchboard. the various lines centering at this point terminate in the combined drops and jacks on the switchboard, of which there are shown in this illustration. beside the operator's plug there are a number of pairs of plugs shown hanging from the switchboard cabinet. these are connected straight through in pairs, there being no clearing-out drops or keys associated with them in the arrangement. each line shown is provided with an extra jack, the purpose of which will be presently understood. the method of operation is as follows: when a subscriber on a certain line desires to get connection through the switchboard he turns his generator and throws the drop. the operator in order to communicate with him inserts the plug in which her telephone terminates into the jack, and removes her receiver from its hook. having learned that it is for a certain subscriber on another line, she withdraws her plug from the jack of the calling line and inserts it into the jack of the called line, then, hanging up her receiver, she turns the generator crank in accordance with the proper code to call that subscriber. when that subscriber responds she connects the two lines by inserting the two plugs of a pair into their respective jacks, and the subscribers are thus placed in communication. the extra jack associated with each line is merely an open jack having its terminals connected respectively with the two sides of the line. whenever an operator desires to listen in on two connected lines she does so by inserting the operator's plug into one of these extra jacks of the connected lines, and she may thus find out whether the subscribers are through talking or whether either one of them desires another connection. the drops in such switchboards are commonly high wound and left permanently bridged across the line so as to serve as clearing-out drops. the usual night-alarm attachment is provided, the buzzer being shown at the upper right-hand portion of the cabinet. [illustration: fig. . combined telephone and switchboard] another type of switchboard commonly employed for this kind of service is shown in fig. , in which the telephone and the switchboard cabinet are combined. the operation of this board is practically the same as that of fig. , although it has manually-restored drops instead of self-restoring drops; the difference between these two types, however, is not material for this class of service. for such work the operator has ample time to attend to the restoring of the drop and the only possible advantage in the combined drop-and-jack for this class of work is that it prevents the operator from forgetting to restore the drops. however, she is not likely to do this with the night-alarm circuit in operation, since the buzzer or bell would continue to ring as long as the drop was down. [illustration: fig. . upright magneto switchboard] [illustration: fig. . upright magneto switchboard--rear view] _upright type switchboard._ by far the most common type of magneto switchboard is the so-called upright type, wherein the drops and jacks are mounted on the face of upright panels rising from a horizontal shelf, which shelf contains the plugs, the keys, and any other apparatus which the operator must manipulate. front and rear views of such a switchboard, as manufactured by the kellogg company, are shown in figs. and . this particular board is provided with fifty combined drops and jacks and, therefore, equipped for fifty subscribers' lines. the drops and jacks are mounted in strips of five, and arranged in two panels. the clearing-out drops, of which there are ten, are arranged at the bottom of the two panels in a single row and may be seen immediately above the switchboard plugs. there are ten pairs of cords and plugs with their associated ringing and listening keys, the plugs being mounted on the rear portion of the shelf, while the ringing and listening keys are mounted on the hinged portion of the shelf in front of the plugs. [illustration: fig. . details of drop, jack, plug, and key arrangement] [illustration: fig. . cross-section of upright switchboard] a better idea of the arrangement of drops, jacks, plugs, and keys may be had from an illustration of a dean magneto switchboard shown in fig. . the clearing-out drops and the arrangement of the plugs and keys are clearly shown. the portion of the switchboard on which the plugs are mounted is always immovable, the plugs being provided with seats through which holes are bored of sufficient size to permit the switchboard cord to pass beneath the shelf. when one of these plugs is raised, the cord is pulled up through this hole thus allowing the plug to be placed in any of the jacks. the key arrangement shown in this particular cut is instructive. it will be noticed that the right-hand five pairs of plugs are provided with ordinary ringing and listening keys, while the left-hand five are provided with party-line ringing keys and listening keys. the listening key in each case is the one in the rear and is alike for all of the cord pairs. the right-hand five ringing keys are so arranged that pressing the lever to the rear will ring on the answering cord, while pressing it toward the front will cause ringing current to flow on the calling plug. in the left-hand five pairs of cords shown in this cut, the pressure of any one of the keys causes a ringing current of a certain frequency to flow on the calling cord, this frequency depending upon which one of the keys is pressed. [illustration: fig. . cord weight] an excellent idea of the grouping of the various pieces of apparatus in a complete simple magneto switchboard may be had from fig. . while the arrangement here shown is applicable particularly to the apparatus of the dean electric company, the structure indicated is none-the-less generally instructive, since it represents good practice in this respect. in this drawing the stationary plug shelf with the plug seat is clearly shown and also the hinged key shelf. the hinge of the key shelf is an important feature and is universally found in all switchboards of this general type. the key shelf may be raised and thus expose all of the wiring leading to the keys, as well as the various contacts of the keys themselves, to inspection. [illustration: fig. . magneto switchboard, target signals] as will be seen, the switchboard cords leading from the plugs extend down to a point near the bottom of the cabinet where they pass through pulley weights and then up to a stationary cord rack. on this cord rack are provided terminals for the various conductors in the cord, and it is at this point that the cord conductors join the other wires leading to the other portions of the apparatus as required. a good form of cord weight is shown in fig. ; and obviously the function of these weights is to keep the cords taut at all times and to prevent their tangling. [illustration: fig. . rear view of target signal, magneto switchboard] the drawing, fig. , also gives a good idea of the method of mounting the hand generator that is ordinarily employed with such magneto switchboards. the shaft of the generator is merely continued out to the front of the key shelf where the usual crank is provided, by means of which the operator is able to generate the necessary ringing current. beside the hand generator at each operator's position, it is quite common in magneto boards, of other than the smallest sizes, to employ some form of ringing generator, either a power-driven generator or a pole changer driven by battery current for furnishing ringing current without effort on the part of the operator. [illustration: fig. . dean two-position switchboard] switchboards as shown in figs. and , are called single-position switchboards because they afford room for a single operator. ordinarily for this class of work a single operator may handle from one to two hundred lines, although of course this depends on the amount of traffic on the line, and this, in turn, depends on the character of the subscribers served, and also on the average number of stations on a line. another single-position switchboard is shown in figs. and , being a front and rear view of the simple magneto switchboard of the western electric company, which is provided with the target signals of that company rather than the usual form of drop. where a switchboard must accommodate more lines than can be handled by a single operator, the cabinet is made wider so as to afford room for more than one operator to be seated before it. sometimes this is accomplished by building the cabinet wider, or by putting two such switchboard sections as are shown in figs. or side by side. a two-position switchboard section is shown in front and rear views in figs. and . [illustration: fig. . rear view of dean two-position switchboard] _sectional switchboards._ the problem of providing for growth in a switchboard is very much the same as that which confronts one in buying a bookcase for his library. the western electric company has met this problem, for very small rural exchanges, in much the same way that the sectional bookcase manufacturers have provided for the possible increase in bookcase capacity. like the sectional bookcase, this sectional switchboard may start with the smallest of equipment--a single sectional unit--and may be added to vertically as the requirements increase, the original equipment being usable in its more extended surroundings. [illustration: fig. . sectional switchboard--wall type] this line of switchboards is illustrated in figs. to . the beginning may be made with either a wall type or an upright type of switchboard, the former being mounted on brackets secured to the wall, and the latter on a table. a good idea of the wall type is shown in fig. . three different kinds of sectional units are involved in this: first, the unit which includes the cords, plugs, clearing-out drops, listening jacks, operator's telephone set and generator; second, the unit containing the line equipment, including a strip of ten magneto line signals and their corresponding jacks; third, the finishing top, which includes no equipment except the support for the operator's talking apparatus. [illustration: fig. . sectional switchboard--wall type] the first of the units in fig. forms the foundation on which the others are built. two of the line-equipment units are shown; these provide for a total of twenty lines. the top rests on the upper line-equipment unit, and when it becomes necessary to add one or more line-equipment units as the switchboard grows, this top is merely taken off, the other line-equipment units put in place on top of those already existing, and the top replaced. the wall type of sectional switchboard is so arranged that the entire structure may be swung out from the wall, as indicated in fig. , exposing all of the apparatus and wiring for inspection. each of the sectional units is provided with a separate door, as indicated, so that the rear door equipment is added to automatically as the sections are added. in the embodiment of the sectional switchboard idea shown in these two figures just referred to, no ringing and listening keys are provided, but the operator's telephone and generator terminate in a special plug--the left-hand one shown in fig. --and when the operator desires to converse with the connected subscribers, she does so by inserting the operator's plug into one of the jacks immediately below the clearing-out drop corresponding to the pair of plugs used in making the connection. the arrangement in this case is exactly the same in principle as that described in fig. . the operator's generator is so arranged in connection with this left-hand operator's plug that the turning of the generator crank automatically switches the operator's telephone set off and switches the generator on, just the same as a switch hook may do in a subscriber's series telephone. [illustration: fig. . sectional switchboard--table type] [illustration: fig. . sectional switchboard--table type] the upright type of sectional switchboard is shown in figs. and , which need no explanation in view of the foregoing, except to say that, in the particular instrument illustrated, ringing and listening keys are provided instead of the jack-and-plug arrangement of the wall type. in this case also, the top section carries an arm for supporting a swinging transmitter instead of the hook support for the combined transmitter and receiver. review questions [blank page] review questions on the subject of telephony pages -- * * * * * . when was the telephone invented and by whom? . state the velocity of sound in air. is it higher in air than in a denser medium? . state and define the characteristics of sound. . make sketch of bell's original magneto telephone without permanent magnets. . describe and sketch hughes' microphone. . which is, at present, the best material for varying the resistance in transmitters? . give the fundamental differences between the magneto transmitter and the carbon transmitter. . what is the function of the induction coil in the telephone circuit? . describe and sketch the different kinds of visible signals. . what should be the diameter of hard drawn copper wire in order to allow economical spacing of poles? . state the four principal properties of a telephone line. . if in testing a line the capacity is changed what are the results found on the receiver and transmitter end? . why is paper used as an insulator of telephone cables? . how does a conductor behave in connection with direct current and how with alternating current? . what influence has inductance on the telephone? . define impedance and give the formula for it. . what is the usual specification for insulation of resistance in telephone cables? . if feet of cable have an insulation resistance of , megohms, how great is the insulation resistance for miles and , feet of cable? . what is the practical limiting conversation distance for no. b. and s. wire? . describe professor pupin's method of inserting inductance into the telephone line. . what does _mho_ denote? . why are pupin's coils not so successful on open wires? . what is a repeater? . define _reactive interference_. . state the frequencies of the pitches of the human voice. . what is the office of a diaphragm in a telephone apparatus? . what transmitter material has greatly increased the ranges of speech? . describe the different methods of measurements of telephone circuits. . what are the two kinds of _electric calls_? . how many conductors has a telephone line? . give formula for capacity reactance and the meaning of the symbols. . which american cities are joined by underground lines at present? . state the two practical ways of improving telephone transmission. review questions on the subject of telephony pages -- * * * * * . on what general principle are most of the telephone transmitters of today constructed? . make sketch of the new western electric transmitter and describe its working. . make sketch and describe the kellogg transmitter. . what troubles were encountered in the earlier forms of granular carbon transmitters and how were they overcome? . what limits the current-carrying capacity of the transmitter? how may this capacity be increased? . state in what kind of transmitters a maximum degree of sensitiveness is desirable. . show the conventional symbols for transmitters. . describe a telephone receiver. . sketch a western electric receiver and point out its deficiencies. . make a diagram of the kellogg receiver. . describe the direct-current receiver of the automatic electric company. . describe and sketch the dean receiver. . show the conventional symbols of a receiver. . describe exactly how, in a cell composed of a tin and a silver plate with dilute sulphuric acid as electrolyte, the current inside and outside of the cell will flow. . describe the phenomenon of polarization. . what is _local action_ of a cell? how may it be prevented? . into how many classes may cells be divided? which class is most used in telephony? . describe the leclanché cell. . sketch and describe an excellent form of dry cell. . show the conventional symbols for batteries. . sketch and describe the generator shunt switch and the generator cut-in switch. . how may a pulsating current be derived from a magneto generator? . show conventional symbols for magneto generators. . sketch and describe the western electric polarized bell. . give conventional ringer symbols. . what is the purpose of the hook switch? . make sketch and give description of kellogg's long lever hook switch. . describe and sketch the western electric short lever hook switch. . point out the principal difference between the desk stand hook switches of the western electric company and of the kellogg switchboard and supply company. . give conventional symbols of hook switches. review questions on the subject of telephony pages -- * * * * * . describe an electromagnet and its function in telephony. . sketch an iron-clad electromagnet. . what is a differential electromagnet? sketch and describe one type. . state the desirable characteristics of good enamel insulation for magnet wire. . if you have a coil of no. double cotton b. and s. wire of ohms resistance and you have to rewind it for , ohms resistance with double cotton wire, what number of wire would you take? show calculation. note. no. d. c wire has res. . ohms per cubic inch; for the core, ohms. there are required in the coil , ohms, that is, . times as much. . x . = . ohms, which must be the resistance per cu. in. this resistance gives, according to table iv, no. wire. . what is an impedance coil? state how it differs from an electromagnet coil. . describe the different kinds of impedance coils. . give symbol of impedance coil. . what are the principal parts of an induction coil? . what is the function of an induction coil in telephony? . what is a repeating coil and how does it differ from an induction coil? . give conventional symbols of induction coils and repeating coils. . enumerate the different types of non-inductive resistance devices and give a short description of each. . define condenser. . what is the meaning of the word _dielectrics_? . state what you understand by the specific inductive capacity of a dielectric. . upon what factors does the capacity of a condenser depend? . what is the usual capacity of condensers in telephone practice? . give conventional condenser symbols. . by what two methods may the current be supplied to a telephone transmitter? . make sketch of local-battery stations with metallic circuit. . sketch common-battery circuit in series with two lines. . state the objections against the preceding arrangement. . make sketch of the standard arrangement of the western electric company in bridging the common battery with repeating coils. . sketch the arrangement of bridging the battery with impedance coils and state the purpose of the coils. . make diagram of a common-source current supply for many lines with repeating coils and point out the travel of the voice currents. . name the different parts which comprise a telephone set. . what is a magneto telephone? . make diagram of the circuit of a series magneto set with receiver on the hook and explain how the different currents are flowing. . show diagram of the stromberg-carlson magneto desk telephone circuit and describe its working. . give sketch of the stromberg-carlson common-battery wall set circuit. . describe briefly the microtelephone set. . make sketch of the monarch common-battery wall set. review questions on the subject of telephony pages -- * * * * * . what is a party line? . what is usually understood by private lines? . what problem is there to overcome in connection with party lines? . state the two general classes of party-line systems. . point out the defects of the series system. . make sketch of a metallic bridging line and show the circuit for the voice currents. . what is a signal code? . give classification of selective party-line systems with short definitions. . describe the principle of selection by polarity and make sketch illustrating this principle. . make diagram of the circuit of a four-party station with relay. . describe the process of tuning in the harmonic system. . what is the difference between the under-tune and in-tune systems? . sketch circuit of kellogg's harmonic system. . illustrate the principle of a broken-line system by a sketch. . in what particulars does the party-line system in rural districts differ from that within urban limits? . describe and sketch pool's lock-out system. . make diagram of the k.b. lock-out system. . what is the object of the ratchet in this system? . make diagram of simplified circuits of roberts system. . sketch and describe roberts latching key and connections. . sketch circuits of bridging station for non-selective party line. . how would you arrange the signal code for six stations on a non-selective party line? . what is the limit of number of stations on a non-selective party line under ordinary circumstances? . state the objections against the party polarity system as shown in fig. . . what are the advantages of the harmonic party-line system? . to how many frequencies is the harmonic system usually limited? . what can you say about the commercial success of the step-by-step method? . state the principles of a lock-out party line. . for what purpose is a condenser placed in the receiver circuit of each station in the k.b. lock-out system? . how are the selecting relays in roberts line restored to their normal position after a conversation is finished? . what are the objections against the roberts system? review questions on the subject of telephony pages -- * * * * * . what are electrical hazards? . when is the lightning hazard least? . what actions can electricity produce? which involves the greater hazard to the value of property? . when is a piece of apparatus called "self-protecting"? . why must a protector for telephone apparatus work more quickly for a large current than for a small one? . state the general problem which heating hazards present with relation to telephone apparatus. . what is the most nearly universal electrical hazard? . sketch and describe the saw-tooth lightning arrester. . make diagram of the carbon-block arrester and state its advantages. . describe a vacuum arrester. . explain the reason for placing an impedance in connection with the lightning arrester. . what is the purpose of the globule of low-melting alloy in the western electric company's arrester? . why are not fuses good lightning arresters? . what is the proper function of a fuse? . make sketch of a mica slip fuse. . define _sneak currents_. . make a diagram of a sneak-current arrester and describe its principles and working. . describe a heat coil. . sketch a complete line protection. . where is the proper position of the fuse? . which wires are considered exposed and which unexposed? . why is it not necessary to install sneak-current arresters in central-battery subscribers' stations? . sketch and describe the action of a combined sneak-current and air-gap arrester, as widely used by bell companies. . describe the self-soldering heat-coil arrester. . what is the purpose of ribbon fuses? . what is a drainage coil? review questions on the subject of telephony pages -- * * * * * . what is a central office? . what are (_a_) subscriber's lines? (_b_) trunk lines? (_c_) toll lines? . for what purpose is the switchboard? . give short descriptions of the different classes of switchboards. . how are manual switchboards subdivided? describe briefly the different types. . define a and b boards. . what is a call circuit? . what kind of calls are handled on a toll switchboard? . give drop symbol and describe its principles. . what is a jack? . make a sketch of a plug inserted into a jack. . give jack and plug symbols. . what are ringing and listening keys? . show symbols for ringing and listening keys. . state the parts of which a cord equipment consists. . show step by step the various operations of a telephone system wherein the lines center in a magneto switchboard. make all the necessary diagrams and give brief descriptions to show that you understand each operation. . on what principle does a drop with night-alarm contact operate? . what is the advantage of associating jacks and drops? . describe the mechanical restoration as employed in the miller drop and jack. . describe the electrical restoration of drop shutters as manufactured by the western electric company. . what complications arise in ringing of party lines and how are they overcome? . give diagram of the complete circuit of a simple magneto switchboard. . sketch night-alarm circuit with relay. . what is a convertible cord circuit? . state what disadvantages may be encountered under certain conditions with a bridging drop-cord circuit. . are lamps in cord circuits to be advocated on magneto switchboards? . what is the function of the cabinet? . give cross-section of upright switchboard as used in the magneto system. . what is the purpose of a sectional switchboard? . give a short description of the essential parts of a sectional switchboard. index index _the page numbers of this volume will be found at the bottom of the pages; the numbers at the top refer only to the section._ a acousticon transmitter acoustics characteristics of sound loudness pitch timbre human ear human voice propagation of sound air-gap vs. fuse arresters amalgamated zincs arrester separators audible signals magneto bell telegraph sounder telephone receiver vibrating bell automatic electric company direct-current receiver transmitter automatic shunt b bar electromagnet battery bell battery symbols blake single electrode brazed bell broken-back ringer broken-line method of selective signaling c capacity reactance carbon adaptability limitations preparation of superiority carbon air-gap arrester carbon-block arrester carrying capacity of transmitter central-office protectors characteristics of sound loudness pitch timbre chloride of silver cell closed-circuit cells closed-circuit impedance coil common-battery telephone sets condensers capacity charge conventional symbols definition of dielectric dielectric materials functions means for assorting current sizes theory conductivity of conductors conductors, conductivity of conventional symbols cook air-gap arrester arrester arrester for magneto stations crowfoot cell current supply to transmitters common battery advantages bell substation arrangement bridging battery with impedance coils bridging battery with repeating coil current supply from distant point current supply over limbs of line in parallel dean substation arrangement double battery with impedance coil kellogg substation arrangement north electric company system series battery series substation arrangement stromberg-carlson system supply many lines from common source repeating coil retardation coil local battery d dean drop and jack receiver wall telephone hook desk stand hooks kellogg western electric dielectric dielectric materials dry paper mica differential electromagnet direct-current receiver drainage coils e electric lamp signal electrical hazards electrical reproduction of speech carbon conversion from sound waves to vibration of diaphragm conversion from vibration to voice currents conversion from voice currents to vibration cycle of conversion detrimental effects of capacity early conceptions electrostatic telephone induction coil limitations of magneto transmitter loose contact principle magneto telephone measurements of telephone currents variation of electrical pressure variation of resistance electrical signals audible magneto-bell telegraph sounder telephone receiver vibrating bell visible electric lamp signal electromagnetic signal electrodes arrangement of carbon preparation multiple single electrolysis electromagnetic method of measuring telephone currents electromagnetic signal electromagnets and inductive coils conventional symbols differential electromagnet direction of armature motion direction of lines of force electromagnets low-resistance circuits horseshoe form iron-clad form special horseshoe form impedance coils kind of iron number of turns types closed-circuit open-circuit toroidal induction coil current and voltage ratios design functions use and advantage magnet wire enamel silk and cotton insulation space utilization wire gauges magnetic flux magnetization curves magnetizing force mechanical details permeability reluctance repeating coil winding methods winding calculations winding data winding terminals electrostatic capacity unit of electrostatic telephone enamel f five-bar generator fuller cell g galvani generator armature generator cut-in switch generator shunt switch generator symbols granular carbon gravity cell h hand receivers harmonic method of selective signaling advantages circuits in-tune system limitations principles tuning under-tune system head receivers heat coil holtzer-cabot arrester hook switch automatic operation contact material design desk stand hooks kellogg western electric purpose symbols wall telephone hooks dean kellogg western electric horseshoe electromagnet human ear human voice i impedance coils kind of iron number of turns symbols of types closed-circuit open-circuit toroidal inductance vs. capacity induction coil current and voltage ratios design functions use and advantage inductive neutrality inductive reactance insulation of conductors introduction to telephony iron-clad electromagnet iron wire ballast k kellogg air-gap arrester desk stand hook drop and jack receiver ringer transmitter wall telephone hook l lalande cell lamp filament le clanché cell lenz law line signals lines of force, direction of loading coils lock-out party-line systems broken-line method operation poole system step-by-step system loudness of sound low-reluctance circuits horseshoe form iron-clad form m magnetic flux magnetization curves magnetizing force magneto bell magneto operator magneto signaling apparatus armature automatic shunt battery bell generator symbols magneto bell magneto generator method of signaling polarized ringer pulsating current ringer symbols theory magneto switchboard automatic restoration mechanical dean type kellogg type monarch type western electric type circuits of complete switchboard code signaling commercial types of drops and jacks early drops jack mounting manual vs. automatic restoration methods of associating night alarm tubular drops component parts jacks and plugs keys line and cord equipments line signal operators' equipment cord-circuit considerations double clearing-out type lamp-signal type non-ring through type series drop type simple bridging drop type definitions electrical restoration grounded and metallic-circuit lines mode of operation night-alarm circuits operation in detail clearing out essentials of operation normal condition of line operator answering operator calling subscriber calling subscribers conversing operator's telephone equipment cut-in jack ringing and listening keys horizontal spring type party-line ringing keys self-indicating keys vertical spring type switchboard assembly functions of cabinet sectional switchboards upright type of switchboard wall type switchboard switchboard cords concentric conductors parallel tinsel conductors steel spiral conductors switchboard plugs magneto telephone magneto telephone sets mica card resistance mica slip fuse microtelephone set monarch drop and jack monarch receiver monarch transmitter multiple electrode mutual induction n non-inductive resistance devices inductive neutrality provisions against heating temperature coefficient types differentially-wound unit iron wire ballast lamp filament mica card unit non-selective party-line systems bridging limitations series signal code o open-circuit cells open-circuit impedance coil operator's receiver p packing of transmitters permeability pitch doppler's principle vibration of diaphragms polarity method of selective signaling polarization of cells polarized ringer brazed bell kellogg western electric poole lock-out system primary cells conventional symbol series and multiple connections simple voltaic types of closed-circuit fuller gravity lalande prevention of creeping setting up open-circuit le clanché standard chloride of silver propagation of sound protective means against high potentials air-gap arrester advantages of carbon commercial types continuous arcs discharge across gaps dust between carbons introduction of impedance metallic electrodes vacuum arresters against sneak currents heat coil sneak-current arresters against strong currents fuses enclosed mica proper functions central-office protectors self-soldering heat coils sneak-current and air-gap arrester city exchange requirements complete line protection electrolysis subscribers' station protectors ribbon fuses pulsating-current commutator r receivers dean direct-current early kellogg modern monarch operator's single-pole symbols western electric reluctance repeating coil ribbon fuses ringer symbols ringing and listening key robert's latching relay robert's self-cleansing arrester rolled condenser s saw-tooth arrester selective party-line systems broken-line method classification broken-line systems harmonic systems polarity systems step-by-step systems harmonic method polarity method step-by-step method self-induction signal code signaling, method of silk and cotton insulation single electrode single-pole receiver sneak-current arresters solid-back transmitter sound characteristics of loudness pitch timbre standard cell step-by-step lock-out system step-by-step method of selective signaling subscribers' station protectors switchboard cords switchboard plugs switchboard transmitter symbols battery condenser generator hook switch impedance coil induction coil receiver repeating coil ringer ringing and listening key transmitter t table condenser data copper wire german silver wire-- per cent german silver wire-- per cent metals, behavior of, in different electrolysis signal code specific inductive capacities temperature coefficients transmission distances, limiting winding data for insulating wires tandem differential electromagnet telegraph sounder telephone currents, measurements of electromagnetic method thermal method telephone exchange, features of districts subscribers' lines switchboards toll lines trunk lines telephone lines conductivity of conductors electrostatic capacity inductance of circuit inductance vs. capacity insulation of conductors transmission telephone sets classification of common-battery telephone magneto telephone wall and desk telephones common-battery desk hotel wall magneto circuits of bridging series desk wall temperature coefficients thermal method of measuring telephone currents timbre toroidal impedance coil toroidal repeating coil transmission, ways of improving transmitters acousticon automatic electric company carrying capacity conventional diagram electrode arrangement of multiple single granular carbon kellogg materials monarch packing sensitiveness switchboard symbols variable resistance western electric solid-back u under-tuned ringer v vacuum arrester variable resistance vibrating bell visible signals electric lamp electromagnetic volta voltaic cell amalgamated zincs difference of potential local action polarization theory w wall telephone hooks dean kellogg western electric western electric air-gap arrester desk stand hook drop and jack receiver ringer solid-back transmitter station arrester wall telephone hook white transmitter wire gauges warning: this book of one hundred years ago describes experiments which are too dangerous to attempt by either adults or children. it is published for historical interest only. the "how-to-do-it" books electricity for boys [illustration: fig. . work bench] the "how-to-do-it" books electricity for boys a working guide, in the successive steps of electricity, described in simple terms with many original illustrations by j. s. zerbe, m.e. author of carpentry for boys practical mechanics for boys [illustration: printer's mark] the new york book company new york copyright, , by the new york book company contents introductory page i. electricity considered. brief historical events page the study of electricity. first historical accounts. bottling electricity. discovery of galvanic electricity. electro-motive force. measuring instruments. rapidity of modern progress. how to acquire the vast knowledge. the means employed. ii. what tools and apparatus are needed page preparing the workshop. uses of our workshop. what to build. what to learn. uses of the electrical devices. tools. magnet-winding reel. iii. magnets, coils, armatures, etc. page the two kinds of magnets. permanent magnets. electro-magnets. magnetism. materials for magnets. non-magnetic material. action of a _second_ magnet. what north and south pole mean. repulsion and attraction. positives and negatives. magnetic lines of force. the earth as a magnet. why the compass points north and south. peculiarity of a magnet. action of the electro-magnet. exterior magnetic influence around a wires carrying a current. parallel wires. iv. frictional, voltaic or galvanic and electro-magnetic electricity page three electrical sources. frictional electricity. leyden jar. voltaic or galvanic electricity. voltaic pile; how made. plus and minus signs. the common primary cell. battery resistance. electrolyte and current. electro-magnetic electricity. magnetic radiation. different kinds of dynamos. direct current dynamos. simple magnet construction. how to wind. the dynamo fields. the armature. armature windings. mounting the armature. the commutator. commutator brushes. dynamo windings. the field. series-wound field. shunt-wound. compound-wound. v. how to detect and measure electricity page measuring instruments. the detector. direction of current. simple current detector. how to place the detector. different ways to measure a current. the sulphuric acid voltameter. the copper voltameter. the galvanoscope electro-magnetic method. the calorimeter. the light method. the preferred method. how to make a sulphuric acid voltameter. how to make a copper voltameter. objections to the calorimeter. vi. volts, amperes, ohms and watts page understanding terms. intensity and quantity. voltage. amperage meaning of watts and kilowatt. a standard of measurement. the ampere standard. the voltage standard. the ohm. calculating the voltage. vii. push buttons, switches, annunciators, bells and like apparatus page simple switches. a two-pole switch. double-pole switch. sliding switch. reversing switch. push buttons. electric bells. how made. how operated. annunciators. burglar alarm. wire circuiting. circuiting system with two bells and push buttons. the push buttons, annunciators and bells. wiring up a house. viii. accumulators, storage or secondary batteries page storing up electricity. the accumulator. accumulator plates. the grid. the negative pole. connecting up the plates. charging the cells. the initial charge. the charging current. ix. the telegraph page mechanism in telegraph circuit. the sending key. the sounder. connecting up the key and sounder. two stations in circuit. the double click. illustrating the dot and the dash. the morse telegraph code. example in use. x. high-tension apparatus, condensers, etc. page induction. low and high tension. elastic property of electricity. the condenser. connecting up a condenser. the interrupter. uses of high-tension coils. xi. wireless telegraphy page telegraphing without wires. surging character of high-tension currents. the coherer. how made. the decoherer. the sending apparatus. the receiving apparatus. how the circuits are formed. xii. the telephone page vibrations. the acoustic telephone. sound waves. hearing electricity. the diaphragm in a magnetic field. a simple telephone circuit. how to make a telephone. telephone connections. complete installation. the microphone. light contact points. how to make a microphone. microphone, the father of the transmitter. automatic cut-outs for telephones. complete circuiting with transmitters. xiii. electrolysis, water purification, electroplating page decomposing liquids. making hydrogen and oxygen. purifying water. rust. oxygen as a purifier. composition of water. common air not a good purifier. pure oxygen a water purifier. the use of hydrogen in purification. aluminum electrodes. electric hand purifier. purification and separation of metals. electroplating. plating iron with copper. direction of current. xiv. electric heating. thermo-electricity page generating heat in a wire. resistance of substances. signs of connectors. comparison of metals. a simple electric heater. how to arrange for quantity of current used. an electric iron. thermo-electricity converting heat directly into electricity metals. electric, positive, negative. thermo-electric coupler. xv. alternating currents, choking coil, transformer page direct current. alternating current. the magnetic field. action of a magnetized wire. the movement of a current in a charged wire. current reversing itself. self-induction. brushes in a direct current dynamo: alternating, positive and negative poles. how an alternating current dynamo is made. the windings. the armature wires. choking coils. the transformer. how the voltage is determined. voltage and amperage in transformers. xvi. electric lighting page early conditions. fuels. reversibility of dynamo. electric arc. mechanism to maintain the arc. resistance coil. parallel carbons for making arc. series current. incandescent system. multiple circuit. subdivision of electric light. the filament. the glass bulb. metallic filaments. vapor lamps. directions for improvements. heat in electric lighting. curious superstitions concerning electricity. magnetism. amber. discovery of the properties of a magnet. electricity in mountain regions. early beliefs as to magnetism and electricity. the lightning rod. protests against using it. pliny's explanation of electricity. xvii. power, and various other electrical manifestations page early beliefs concerning the dynamo. experiments with magnets. physical action of dynamo and motor. electrical influence in windings. comparing motor and dynamo. how the current acts in a dynamo. its force in a motor. loss in power transmission. the four ways in which power is dissipated. disadvantages of electric power. its advantages. transmission of energy. high voltages. the transformer. step-down transformers. electric furnaces. welding by electricity. merging the particles of the joined ends. xviii. x-ray, radium and the like page the camera and the eye. actinic rays. hertzian waves. high-tension apparatus. vacuum tubes. character of the ultra-violet rays. how distinguished. the infra-red rays. their uses. x-rays not capable of reflection. not subject to refraction. transmission through opaque substances. reducing rates of vibration. radium. radio-activity. radio-active materials. pitchblende. a new form of energy. electrical source. healing power. problems for scientists. list of illustrations fig. . work bench frontispiece page . top of magnet-winding reel . side of magnet-winding reel . journal block . plain magnet bar . severed magnet . reversed magnets . horseshoe magnet . earth's magnetic lines . two permanent magnets . magnets in earth's magnetic field . armatures for magnets . magnetized field . magnetized bar . direction of current . direction of induction current . frictional-electricity machine . leyden jar . galvanic electricity. crown of cups . voltaic electricity . primary battery . dynamo field and pole piece . base and fields assembled . details of the armature, core . details of the armature, body . armature journals . commutator . end view of armature, mounted . top view of armature on base . field winding . series-wound . shunt-wound . compound-wound . compass magnet, swing to the right . magnetic compass . magnet, swing to the left . indicating direction of current . the bridge of the detector . details of detector . cross-section of detector . acid voltameter . copper voltameter . two-pole switch . double-pole switch . sliding switch . rheostat form of switch . reversing switch . push button . electric bell . armature of electric bell . vertical section of annunciator . front view of annunciator . horizontal section of annunciator . front plate of annunciator . alarm switch on window . burglar alarm on window . burglar alarm contact . neutral position of contact . circuiting for electric bell . annunciators in circuit . wiring system for a house . accumulator grids . assemblage of accumulator grids . connecting up storage battery in series . parallel series . charging circuit . telegraph sending key . telegraph sounder . a telegraph circuit . induction coil and circuit . illustrating elasticity . condenser . high-tension circuit . current interrupter . wireless-telegraphy coherer . wireless sending-apparatus . wireless receiving-apparatus . acoustic telephone . illustrating vibrations . the magnetic field . section of telephone receiver . the magnet and receiver head . simple telephone connection . telephone stations in circuit . illustrating light contact points . the microphone . the transmitter . complete telephone circuit . device for making hydrogen and oxygen . electric-water purifier . portable electric purifier . section of positive plate . section of negative plate . positive and negative in position . form of the insulator . simple electric heater . side view of resistance device . top view of resistance device . plan view of electric iron . section of electric iron . thermo-electric couple . cutting a magnetic field . alternations, first position . alternations, second position . alternations, third position . alternations, fourth position . increasing alternations, first view . increasing alternations, second view . connection of alternating dynamo armature . direct current dynamo . circuit wires in direct current dynamo . alternating polarity lines . alternating current dynamo . choking coil . a transformer . parallel carbons . arc-lighting circuit . interrupted conductor . incandescent circuit . magnetic action in dynamo, st . magnetic action in dynamo, d . magnetic action in dynamo, d . magnetic action in dynamo, th . magnetic action in motor, st . magnetic action in motor, d . magnetic action in motor, d . magnetic action in motor, th introductory electricity, like every science, presents two phases to the student, one belonging to a theoretical knowledge, and the other which pertains to the practical application of that knowledge. the boy is directly interested in the practical use which he can make of this wonderful phenomenon in nature. it is, in reality, the most successful avenue by which he may obtain the theory, for he learns the abstract more readily from concrete examples. it is an art in which shop practice is a greater educator than can be possible with books. boys are not, generally, inclined to speculate or theorize on phenomena apart from the work itself; but once put them into contact with the mechanism itself, let them become a living part of it, and they will commence to reason and think for themselves. it would be a dry, dull and uninteresting thing to tell a boy that electricity can be generated by riveting together two pieces of dissimilar metals, and applying heat to the juncture. but put into his hands the metals, and set him to perform the actual work of riveting the metals together, then wiring up the ends of the metals, heating them, and, with a galvanometer, watching for results, it will at once make him see something in the experiment which never occurred when the abstract theory was propounded. he will inquire first what metals should be used to get the best results, and finally, he will speculate as to the reasons for the phenomena. when he learns that all metals are positive-negative or negative-positive to each other, he has grasped a new idea in the realm of knowledge, which he unconsciously traces back still further, only to learn that he has entered a field which relates to the constitution of matter itself. as he follows the subject through its various channels he will learn that there is a common source of all things; a manifestation common to all matter, and that all substances in nature are linked together in a most wonderful way. an impulse must be given to a boy's training. the time is past for the rule-and-rote method. the rule can be learned better by a manual application than by committing a sentence to memory. in the preparation of this book, therefore, i have made practice and work the predominating factors. it has been my aim to suggest the best form in which to do the things in a practical way, and from that work, as the boy carries it out, to deduce certain laws and develop the principles which underlie them. wherever it is deemed possible to do so, it is planned to have the boy make these discoveries for himself, so as to encourage him to become a thinker and a reasoner instead of a mere machine. a boy does not develop into a philosopher or a scientist through being told he must learn the principles of this teaching, or the fundamentals of that school of reasoning. he will unconsciously imbibe the spirit and the willingness if we but place before him the tools by which he may build even the simple machinery that displays the various electrical manifestations. chapter i the study of electricity. historical there is no study so profound as electricity. it is a marvel to the scientist as well as to the novice. it is simple in its manifestations, but most complex in its organization and in its ramifications. it has been shown that light, heat, magnetism and electricity are the same, but that they differ merely in their modes of motion. first historical account.--the first historical account of electricity dates back to years b. c. thales of miletus was the first to describe the properties of amber, which, when rubbed, attracted and repelled light bodies. the ancients also described what was probably tourmaline, a mineral which has the same qualities. the torpedo, a fish which has the power of emitting electric impulses, was known in very early times. from that period down to about the year no accounts of any historical value have been given. dr. gilbert, of england, made a number of researches at that time, principally with amber and other materials, and boyle, in , made numerous experiments with frictional electricity. sir isaac newton also took up the subject at about the same period. in hawksbee made numerous experiments; also gray, in , and a welshman, dufay, at about the same time. the germans, from to , made many experiments. in , at leyden, was discovered the jar which bears that name. before that time, all experiments began and ended with frictional electricity. the first attempt to "bottle" electricity was attempted by muschenbr[oe]ck, at leyden, who conceived the idea that electricity in materials might be retained by surrounding them with bodies which did not conduct the current. he electrified some water in a jar, and communication having been established between the water and the prime conductor, his assistant, who was holding the bottle, on trying to disengage the communicating wire, received a sudden shock. in sir william watson fired gunpowder by an electric spark, and, later on, a party from the royal society, in conjunction with watson, conducted a series of experiments to determine the velocity of the electric fluid, as it was then termed. benjamin franklin, in , showed that lightning was electricity, and later on made his interesting experiments with the kite and the key. discovering galvanic electricity.--the great discovery of galvani, in , led to the recognition of a new element in electricity, called galvanic or voltaic (named after the experimenter, volta), and now known to be identical with frictional electricity. in poisson was the first to analyze electricity; and when [oe]rsted of copenhagen, in , discovered the magnetic action of electricity, it offered a great stimulus to the science, and paved the way for investigation in a new direction. ampere was the first to develop the idea that a motor or a dynamo could be made operative by means of the electro-magnetic current; and faraday, about , discovered electro-magnetic rotation. electro-magnetic force.--from this time on the knowledge of electricity grew with amazing rapidity. ohm's definition of electro-motive force, current strength and resistance eventuated into ohm's law. thomson greatly simplified the galvanometer, and wheatstone invented the rheostat, a means of measuring resistance, about . then primary batteries were brought forward by daniels, grove, bunsen and thomson, and electrolysis by faraday. then came the instruments of precision--the electrometer, the resistance bridge, the ammeter, the voltmeter--all of the utmost value in the science. measuring instruments.--the perfection of measuring instruments did more to advance electricity than almost any other field of endeavor; so that after the inventors took up the subject, and by their energy developed and put into practical operation a most wonderful array of mechanism, which has become valuable in the service of man in almost every field of human activity. rapidity of modern progress.--this brief history is given merely to show what wonders have been accomplished in a few years. the art is really less than fifty years old, and yet so rapidly has it gone forward that it is not at all surprising to hear the remark, that the end of the wonders has been reached. less than twenty-five years ago a high official of the united states patent office stated that it was probable the end of electrical research had been reached. the most wonderful developments have been made since that time; and now, as in the past, one discovery is but the prelude to another still more remarkable. we are beginning to learn that we are only on the threshold of that storehouse in which nature has locked her secrets, and that there is no limit to human ingenuity. how to acquire the vast knowledge.--as the boy, with his limited vision, surveys this vast accumulation of tools, instruments and machinery, and sees what has been and is now being accomplished, it is not to be wondered at that he should enter the field with timidity. in his mind the great question is, how to acquire the knowledge. there is so much to learn. how can it be accomplished? the answer to this is, that the student of to-day has the advantage of the knowledge of all who have gone before; and now the pertinent thing is to acquire that knowledge. the means employed.--this brings us definitely down to an examination of the means that we shall employ to instil this knowledge, so that it may become a permanent asset to the student's store of information. the most significant thing in the history of electrical development is the knowledge that of all the great scientists not one of them ever added any knowledge to the science on purely speculative reasoning. all of them were experimenters. they practically applied and developed their theories in the laboratory or the workshop. the natural inference is, therefore, that the boy who starts out to acquire a knowledge of electricity, must not only theorize, but that he shall, primarily, conduct the experiments, and thereby acquire the information in a practical way, one example of which will make a more lasting impression than pages of dry text. throughout these pages, therefore, i shall, as briefly as possible, point out the theories involved, as a foundation for the work, and then illustrate the structural types or samples; and the work is so arranged that what is done to-day is merely a prelude or stepping-stone to the next phase of the art. in reality, we shall travel, to a considerable extent, the course which the great investigators followed when they were groping for the facts and discovering the great manifestations in nature. chapter ii what tools and apparatus are needed preparing the workshop.--before commencing actual experiments we should prepare the workshop and tools. since we are going into this work as pioneers, we shall have to be dependent upon our own efforts for the production of the electrical apparatus, so as to be able, with our home-made factory, to provide the power, the heat and the electricity. then, finding we are successful in these enterprises, we may look forward for "more worlds to conquer." by this time our neighbors will become interested in and solicit work from us. uses of our workshops.--they may want us to test batteries, and it then becomes necessary to construct mechanism to detect and measure electricity; to install new and improved apparatus; and to put in and connect up electric bells in their houses, as well as burglar alarms. to meet the requirements, we put in a telegraph line, having learned, as well as we are able, how they are made and operated. but we find the telegraph too slow and altogether unsuited for our purposes, as well as for the uses of the neighborhood, so we conclude to put in a telephone system. what to build.--it is necessary, therefore, to commence right at the bottom to build a telephone, a transmitter, a receiver and a switch-board for our system. from the telephone we soon see the desirability of getting into touch with the great outside world, and wireless telegraphy absorbs our time and energies. but as we learn more and more of the wonderful things electricity will do, we are brought into contact with problems which directly interest the home. sanitation attracts our attention. why cannot electricity act as an agent to purify our drinking water, to sterilize sewage and to arrest offensive odors? we must, therefore, learn something about the subject of electrolysis. what to learn.--the decomposition of water is not the only thing that we shall describe pertaining to this subject. we go a step further, and find that we can decompose metals as well as liquids, and that we can make a pure metal out of an impure one, as well as make the foulest water pure. but we shall also, in the course of our experiments, find that a cheap metal can be coated with a costly one by means of electricity--that we can electroplate by electrolysis. uses of the electrical devices.--while all this is progressing and our factory is turning out an amazing variety of useful articles, we are led to inquire into the uses to which we may devote our surplus electricity. the current may be diverted for boiling water; for welding metals; for heating sad-irons, as well as for other purposes which are daily required. tools.--to do these things tools are necessary, and for the present they should not be expensive. a small, rigidly built bench is the first requirement. this may be made, as shown in fig. , of three -inch planks, each inches wide and feet long, mounted on legs inches in height. in the front part are three drawers for your material, or the small odds and ends, as well as for such little tools as you may accumulate. then you will need a small vise, say, with a -inch jaw, and you will also require a hand reel for winding magnets. this will be fully described hereafter. you can also, probably, get a small, cheap anvil, which will be of the greatest service in your work. it should be mounted close up to the work bench. two small hammers, one with an a-shaped peon, and the other with a round peon, should be selected, and also a plane and a small wood saw with fine teeth. a bit stock, or a ratchet drill, if you can afford it, with a variety of small drills; two wood chisels, say of / -inch and / -inch widths; small cold chisels; hack saw, -inch blade; small iron square; pair of dividers; tin shears; wire cutters; pairs of pliers, one flat and the other round-nosed; awls, centering punch, wire cutters, and, finally, soldering tools. [illustration: _fig. . top view_ magnet-winding reel] [illustration: _fig. . side view_ magnet-winding reel] if a gas stove is not available, a brazing torch is an essential tool. numerous small torches are being made, which are cheap and easily operated. a small soldering iron, with pointed end, should be provided; also metal shears and a small square; an awl and several sizes of gimlets; a screwdriver; pair of pliers and wire cutters. from the foregoing it will be seen that the cost of tools is not a very expensive item. this entire outfit, not including the anvil and vise, may be purchased new for about $ . , so we have not been extravagant. magnet-winding reel.--some little preparation must be made, so we may be enabled to handle our work by the construction of mechanical aids. [illustration: _fig. . journal block._] first of these is the magnet-winding reel, a plan view of which is shown in fig. . this, for our present work, will be made wholly of wood. select a plank - / inches thick and inches wide, and from this cut off two pieces (a), each inches long, and then trim off the corners (b, b), as shown in fig. . to serve as the mandrel (c, fig. ), select a piece of broomstick inches long. bore a hole (d) in each block (a) a half inch below the upper margin of the block, this hole being of such diameter that the broomstick mandrel will fit and easily turn therein. place a crank (e), inches long, on the outer end of the mandrel, as in fig. . then mount one block on the end of the bench and the other block inches away. affix them to the bench by nails or screws, preferably the latter. on the inner end of the mandrel put a block (f) of hard wood. this is done by boring a hole inch deep in the center of the block, into which the mandrel is driven. on the outer face of the block is a square hole large enough to receive the head of a / -inch bolt, and into the depression thus formed a screw (g) is driven through the block and into the end of the mandrel, so as to hold the block (f) and mandrel firmly together. when these parts are properly put together, the inner side of the block will rest and turn against the inner journal block (a). the tailpiece is made of a " � " scantling (h), inches long, one end of it being nailed to a transverse block (i) " � " � ". the inner face of this block has a depression in which is placed a v-shaped cup (j), to receive the end of the magnet core (k) or bolt, which is to be used for this purpose. the tailpiece (h) has a longitudinal slot (l) inches long adapted to receive a / -inch bolt (m), which passes down through the bench, and is, therefore, adjustable, so it may be moved to and from the journal bearing (a), thereby providing a place for the bolts to be put in. these bolts are the magnet cores (k), inches long, but they may be even longer, if you bore several holes (n) through the bench so you may set over the tailpiece. with a single tool made substantially like this, over a thousand of the finest magnets have been wound. its value will be appreciated after you have had the experience of winding a few magnets. order in the workshop.--select a place for each tool on the rear upright of the bench, and make it a rule to put each tool back into its place after using. this, if persisted in, will soon become a habit, and will save you hours of time. hunting for tools is the unprofitable part of any work. chapter iii magnets, coils, armatures, etc. the two kinds of magnet.--generally speaking, magnets are of two kinds, namely, permanent and electro-magnetic. permanent magnets.--a permanent magnet is a piece of steel in which an electric force is exerted at all times. an electro-magnet is a piece of iron which is magnetized by a winding of wire, and the magnet is energized only while a current of electricity is passing through the wire. electro-magnet.--the electro-magnet, therefore, is the more useful, because the pull of the magnet can be controlled by the current which actuates it. the electro-magnet is the most essential of all contrivances in the operation and use of electricity. it is the piece of mechanism which does the physical work of almost every electrical apparatus or machine. it is the device which has the power to convert the unseen electric current into motion which may be observed by the human eye. without it electricity would be a useless agent to man. while the electro-magnet is, therefore, the form of device which is almost wholly used, it is necessary, first, to understand the principles of the permanent magnet. magnetism.--the curious force exerted by a magnet is called magnetism, but its origin has never been explained. we know its manifestations only, and laws have been formulated to explain its various phases; how to make it more or less intense; how to make its pull more effective; the shape and form of the magnet and the material most useful in its construction. [illustration: _fig ._ plain magnet bar] materials for magnets.--iron and steel are the best materials for magnets. some metals are non-magnetic, this applying to iron if combined with manganese. others, like sulphur, zinc, bismuth, antimony, gold, silver and copper, not only are non-magnetic, but they are actually repelled by magnetism. they are called the diamagnetics. non-magnetic materials.--any non-magnetic body in the path of a magnetic force does not screen or diminish its action, whereas a magnetic substance will. in fig. we show the simplest form of magnet, merely a bar of steel (a) with the magnetic lines of force passing from end to end. it will be understood that these lines extend out on all sides, and not only along two sides, as shown in the drawing. the object is to explain clearly how the lines run. [illustration: _fig. ._ severed magnet] action of a severed magnet.--now, let us suppose that we sever this bar in the middle, as in fig. , or at any other point between the ends. in this case each part becomes a perfect magnet, and a new north pole (n) and a new south pole (s) are made, so that the movement of the magnetic lines of force are still in the same direction in each--that is, the current flows from the north pole to the south pole. what north and south poles mean.--if these two parts are placed close together they will attract each other. but if, on the other hand, one of the pieces is reversed, as in fig. , they will repel each other. from this comes the statement that likes repel and unlikes attract each other. repulsion and attraction.--this physical act of repulsion and attraction is made use of in motors, as we shall see hereinafter. it will be well to bear in mind that in treating of electricity the north pole is always associated with the plus sign (+) and the south pole with the minus sign (-). or the n sign is positive and the s sign negative electricity. [illustration: _fig. ._ reversed magnets] positives and negatives.--there is really no difference between positive and negative electricity, so called, but the foregoing method merely serves as a means of identifying or classifying the opposite ends of a magnet or of a wire. magnetic lines of force.--it will be noticed that the magnetic lines of force pass through the bar and then go from end to end through the atmosphere. air is a poor conductor of electricity, so that if we can find a shorter way to conduct the current from the north pole to the south pole, the efficiency of the magnet is increased. this is accomplished by means of the well-known horseshoe magnet, where the two ends (n, s) are brought close together, as in fig. . the earth as a magnet.--the earth is a huge magnet and the magnetic lines run from the north pole to the south pole around all sides of the globe. [illustration: _fig. ._ horseshoe magnet] the north magnetic pole does not coincide with the true north pole or the pivotal point of the earth's rotation, but it is sufficiently near for all practical purposes. fig. shows the magnetic lines running from the north to the south pole. why the compass points north and south.--now, let us try to ascertain why the compass points north and south. let us assume that we have a large magnet (a, fig. ), and suspend a small magnet (b) above it, so that it is within the magnetic field of the large magnet. this may be done by means of a short pin (c), which is located in the middle of the magnet (b), the upper end of this pin having thereon a loop to which a thread (d) is attached. the pin also carries thereon a pointer (e), which is directed toward the north pole of the bar (b). [illustration: _fig. ._ earth's magnetic lines] you will now take note of the interior magnetic lines (x), and the exterior magnetic lines (z) of the large magnet (a), and compare the direction of their flow with the similar lines in the small magnet (b). the small magnet has both its exterior and its interior lines within the exterior lines (z) of the large magnet (a), so that as the small magnet (b) is capable of swinging around, the n pole of the bar (b) will point toward the s pole of the larger bar (a). the small bar, therefore, is influenced by the exterior magnetic field (z). [illustration: _fig. ._ two permanent magnets] [illustration: _fig. ._ magnets in the earth's magnetic field] let us now take the outline represented by the earth's surface (fig. ), and suspend a magnet (a) at any point, like the needle of a compass, and it will be seen that the needle will arrange itself north and south, within the magnetic field which flows from the north to the south pole. peculiarity of a magnet.--one characteristic of a magnet is that, while apparently the magnetic field flows out at one end of the magnet, and moves inwardly at the other end, the power of attraction is just the same at both ends. in fig. are shown a bar (a) and a horseshoe magnet (b). the bar (a) has metal blocks (c) at each end, and each of these blocks is attracted to and held in contact with the ends by magnetic influence, just the same as the bar (d) is attracted by and held against the two ends of the horseshoe magnet. these blocks (c) or the bar (d) are called armatures. through them is represented the visible motion produced by the magnetic field. [illustration: _fig. ._ armatures for magnets] action of the electro-magnet.--the electro-magnet exerts its force in the same manner as a permanent magnet, so far as attraction and repulsion are concerned, and it has a north and a south pole, as in the case with the permanent magnet. an electro-magnet is simply a bar of iron with a coil or coils of wire around it; when a current of electricity flows through the wire, the bar is magnetized. the moment the current is cut off, the bar is demagnetized. the question that now arises is, why an electric current flowing through a wire, under those conditions, magnetizes the bar, or _core_, as it is called. [illustration: _fig. ._ magnetized field] [illustration: _fig. ._ magnetized bar] in fig. is shown a piece of wire (a). let us assume that a current of electricity is flowing through this wire in the direction of the darts. what actually takes place is that the electricity extends out beyond the surface of the wire in the form of the closed rings (b). if, now, this wire (a) is wound around an iron core (c, fig. ), you will observe that this electric field, as it is called, entirely surrounds the core, or rather, that the core is within the magnetic field or influence of the current flowing through the wire, and the core (c) thereby becomes magnetized, but it is magnetized only when the current passes through the wire coil (a). [illustration: _fig. ._ direction of current] from the foregoing, it will be understood that a wire carrying a current of electricity not only is affected within its body, but that it also has a sphere of influence exteriorly to the body of the wire, at all points; and advantage is taken of this phenomenon in constructing motors, dynamos, electrical measuring devices and almost every kind of electrical mechanism in existence. exterior magnetic influence around a wire carrying a current.--bear in mind that the wire coil (a, fig. ) does not come into contact with the core (c). it is insulated from the core, either by air or by rubber or other insulating substance, and a current passing from a to c under those conditions is a current of _induction_. on the other hand, the current flowing through the wire (a) from end to end is called a _conduction_ current. remember these terms. in this connection there is also another thing which you will do well to bear in mind. in fig. you will notice a core (c) and an insulated wire coil (b) wound around it. the current, through the wire (b), as shown by the darts (d), moves in one direction, and the induced current in the core (c) travels in the opposite direction, as shown by the darts (d). [illustration: _fig. ._ direction of induction current] parallel wires.--in like manner, if two wires (a, b, fig. ) are parallel with each other, and a current of electricity passes along the wire (a) in one direction, the induced current in the wire (b) will move in the opposite direction. these fundamental principles should be thoroughly understood and mastered. chapter iv frictional, voltaic or galvanic, and electro-magnetic electricity three electrical sources.--it has been found that there are three kinds of electricity, or, to be more accurate, there are three ways to generate it. these will now be described. when man first began experimenting, he produced a current by frictional means, and collected the electricity in a bottle or jar. electricity, so stored, could be drawn from the jar, by attaching thereto suitable connection. this could be effected only in one way, and that was by discharging the entire accumulation instantaneously. at that time they knew of no means whereby the current could be made to flow from the jar as from a battery or cell. frictional electricity.--with a view of explaining the principles involved, we show in fig. a machine for producing electricity by friction. [illustration: _fig. ._ friction-electricity machine] this is made up as follows: a represents the base, having thereon a flat member (b), on which is mounted a pair of parallel posts or standards (c, c), which are connected at the top by a cross piece (d). between these two posts is a glass disc (e), mounted upon a shaft (f), which passes through the posts, this shaft having at one end a crank (g). two leather collecting surfaces (h, h), which are in contact with the glass disc (e), are held in position by arms (i, j), the arm (i) being supported by the cross piece (d), and the arm (j) held by the base piece (b). a rod (k), u-shaped in form, passes over the structure here thus described, its ends being secured to the base (b). the arms (i, j) are both electrically connected with this rod, or conductor (k), joined to a main conductor (l), which has a terminating knob (m). on each side and close to the terminal end of each leather collector (h) is a fork-shaped collector (n). these two collectors are also connected electrically with the conductor (k). when the disc is turned electricity is generated by the leather flaps and accumulated by the collectors (n), after which it is ready to be discharged at the knob (m). in order to collect the electricity thus generated a vessel called a leyden jar is used. leyden jar.--this is shown in fig. . the jar (a) is of glass coated exteriorly at its lower end with tinfoil (b), which extends up a little more than halfway from the bottom. this jar has a wooden cover or top (c), provided centrally with a hole (d). the jar is designed to receive within it a tripod and standard (e) of lead. within this lead standard is fitted a metal rod (f), which projects upwardly through the hole (d), its upper end having thereon a terminal knob (g). a sliding cork (h) on the rod (f) serves as a means to close the jar when not in use. when in use this cork is raised so the rod may not come into contact, electrically, with the cover (c). the jar is half filled with sulphuric acid (i), after which, in order to charge the jar, the knob (g) is brought into contact with the knob (m) of the friction generator (fig. ). voltaic or galvanic electricity.--the second method of generating electricity is by chemical means, so called, because a liquid is used as one of the agents. [illustration: _fig. ._ leyden jar] galvani, in , made the experiments which led to the generation of electricity by means of liquids and metals. the first battery was called the "crown of cups," shown in fig. , and consisting of a row of glass cups (a), containing salt water. these cups were electrically connected by means of bent metal strips (b), each strip having at one end a copper plate (c), and at the other end a zinc plate (d). the first plate in the cup at one end is connected with the last plate in the cup at the other end by a conductor (e) to make a complete circuit. [illustration: _fig. ._ galvanic electricity. crown of cups] the cell and battery.--from the foregoing it will be seen that within each cup the current flows from the zinc to the copper plates, and exteriorly from the copper to the zinc plates through the conductors (b and e). a few years afterwards volta devised what is known as the voltaic pile (fig. ). voltaic pile--how made.--this is made of alternate discs of copper and zinc with a piece of cardboard of corresponding size between each zinc and copper plate. the cardboard discs are moistened with acidulated water. the bottom disc of copper has a strip which connects with a cup of acid, and one wire terminal (a) runs therefrom. the upper disc, which is of zinc, is also connected, by a strip, with a cup of acid from which extends the other terminal wire (b). [illustration: _fig. ._ voltaic electricity] _plus and minus signs._--it will be noted that the positive or copper disc has the plus sign (+) while the zinc disc has the minus (-) sign. these signs denote the positive and the negative sides of the current. the liquid in the cells, or in the moistened paper, is called the _electrolyte_ and the plates or discs are called _electrodes_. to define them more clearly, the positive plate is the _anode_, and the negative plate the _cathode_. the current, upon entering the zinc plate, decomposes the water in the electrolyte, thereby forming oxygen. the hydrogen in the water, which has also been formed by the decomposition, is carried to the copper plate, so that the plate finally is so coated with hydrogen that it is difficult for the current to pass through. this condition is called "polarization," and to prevent it has been the aim of all inventors. to it also we may attribute the great variety of primary batteries, each having some distinctive claim of merit. the common primary cell.--the most common form of primary cell contains sulphuric acid, or a sulphuric acid solution, as the electrolyte, with zinc for the _anode_, and carbon, instead of copper, for the _cathode_. the ends of the zinc and copper plates are called _terminals_, and while the zinc is the anode or positive element, its _terminal_ is designated as the positive pole. in like manner, the carbon is the negative element or cathode, and its terminal is designated as negative pole. fig. will show the relative arrangement of the parts. it is customary to term that end or element from which the current flows as positive. a cell is regarded as a whole, and as the current passes out of the cell from the copper element, the copper terminal becomes positive. [illustration: _fig. ._ primary battery] battery resistance, electrolyte and current.--the following should be carefully memorized: a cell has reference to a single vessel. when two or more cells are coupled together they form a _battery_. _resistance_ is opposition to the movement of the current. if it is offered by the electrolyte, it is designated "internal resistance." if, on the other hand, the opposition takes place, for instance, through the wire, it is then called "external resistance." the electrolyte must be either acid, or alkaline, or saline, and the electrodes must be of dissimilar metals, so the electrolyte will attack one of them. the current is measured in amperes, and the force with which it is caused to flow is measured in volts. in practice the word "current" is used to designate ampere flow; and electromotive force, or e. m. f., is used instead of voltage. electro-magnetic electricity.--the third method of generating electricity is by electro-magnets. the value and use of induction will now be seen, and you will be enabled to utilize the lesson concerning magnetic action referred to in the previous chapter. magnetic radiation.--you will remember that every piece of metal which is within the path of an electric current has a space all about its surface from end to end which is electrified. this electrified field extends out a certain distance from the metal, and is supposed to maintain a movement around it. if, now, another piece of metal is brought within range of this electric or magnetic zone and moved across it, so as to cut through this field, a current will be generated thereby, or rather added to the current already exerted, so that if we start with a feeble current, it can be increased by rapidly "cutting the lines of force," as it is called. different kinds of dynamo.--while there are many kinds of dynamo, they all, without exception, are constructed in accordance with this principle. there are also many varieties of current. for instance, a dynamo may be made to produce a high voltage and a low amperage; another with high amperage and low voltage; another which gives a direct current for lighting, heating, power, and electroplating; still another which generates an alternating current for high tension power, or transmission, arc-lighting, etc., all of which will be explained hereafter. in this place, however, a full description of a direct-current dynamo will explain the principle involved in all dynamos--that to generate a current of electricity makes it necessary for us to move a field of force, like an armature, rapidly and continuously through another field of force, like a magnetic field. direct-current dynamo.--we shall now make the simplest form of dynamo, using for this purpose a pair of permanent magnets. [illustration: _fig. ._ dynamo field and pole piece] simple magnet construction.--a simple way to make a pair of magnets for this purpose is shown in fig. . a piece of round / -inch steel core (a), - / inches long, is threaded at both ends to receive at one end a nut (b), which is screwed on a sufficient distance so that the end of the core (a) projects a half inch beyond the nut. the other end of the steel core has a pole piece of iron (c) " � " � ", with a hole midway between the ends, threaded entirely through, and provided along one side with a concave channel, within which the armature is to turn. now, before the pole piece (c) is put on, we will slip on a disc (e), made of hard rubber, then a thin rubber tube (f), and finally a rubber disc (g), so as to provide a positive insulation for the wire coil which is wound on the bobbin thus made. how to wind.--in practice, and as you go further along in this work, you will learn the value, first, of winding one layer of insulated wire on the spool, coating it with shellac, and then putting on the next layer, and so on; when completely wound, the two wire terminals may be brought out at one end; but for our present purpose, and to render the explanation clearer, the wire terminals are at the opposite ends of the spool (h, h'). the dynamo fields.--two of these spools are so made and they are called the _fields_ of the dynamo. we will next prepare an iron bar (i), inches long and / inch thick and - / inches wide, then bore two holes through it so the distance measures inches from center to center. these holes are to be threaded for the / -inch cores (a). this bar holds together the upper ends of the cores, as shown in fig. . [illustration: _fig. ._ base and fields assembled] we then prepare a base (j) of any hard wood, inches thick, inches long and inches wide, and bore two / -inch holes inches apart on a middle line, to receive a pair of / -inch cap screws (k), which pass upwardly through the holes in the base and screw into the pole pieces (c). a wooden bar (l), - / " � - / ", inches long, is placed under each pole piece, which is also provided with holes for the cap screws (k). the lower side of the base (j) should be countersunk, as at m, so the head of the nut will not project. the fields of the dynamo are now secured in position to the base. [illustration: _fig. ._ details of the armature, core _fig. ._ details of the armature, body] the armature.--a bar of iron (fig. ), " � " and - / inches long, is next provided. through this bar ( ) are then bored two / -inch holes - / inches apart, and on the opposite sides of this bar are two half-rounded plates of iron ( ) (fig. ). armature winding.--each plate is / inch thick, - / inches wide and inches long, each plate having holes ( ) to coincide with the holes ( ) of the bar ( ), so that when the two plates are applied to opposite sides of the bar, and riveted together, a cylindrical member is formed, with two channels running longitudinally, and transversely at the ends; and in these channels the insulated wires are wound from end to end around the central block ( ). mounting the armature.--it is now necessary to provide a means for revolving this armature. to this end a brass disc ( , fig. ) is made, inches in diameter, / inch thick. centrally, at one side, is a projecting stem ( ) of round brass, which projects out inches, and the outer end is turned down, as at , to form a small bearing surface. [illustration: _fig. ._ journals _fig. ._ commutator, armature mountings] the other end of the armature has a similar disc ( ), with a central stem ( ), - / inches long, turned down to / -inch diameter up to within / inch of the disc ( ), so as to form a shoulder. the commutator.--in fig. is shown, at , a wooden cylinder, inch long and - / inches in diameter, with a hole ( ) bored through axially, so that it will fit tightly on the stem ( ) of the disc ( ). on this wooden cylinder is driven a brass or copper tube ( ), which has holes ( ) opposite each other. screws are used to hold the tube to the wooden cylinder, and after they are properly secured together, the tube ( ) is cut by a saw, as at , so as to form two independent tubular surfaces. [illustration: _fig. ._ end view armature, mounted] these tubular sections are called the commutator plates. [illustration: _fig. ._ top view of armature on base] in order to mount this armature, two bearings are provided, each comprising a bar of brass ( , fig. ), each / inch thick, / inch wide and - / inches long. two holes, inches apart, are formed through this bar, to receive round-headed wood screws ( ), these screws being inches long, so they will pass through the wooden pieces (i) and enter the base (j). midway between the ends, each bar ( ) has an iron bearing block ( ), / " � / " and - / inches high, the / -inch hole for the journal ( ) being midway between its ends. commutator brushes.--fig. shows the base, armature and commutator assembled in position, and to these parts have been added the commutator brushes. the brush holder ( ) is a horizontal bar made of hard rubber loosely mounted upon the journal pin ( ), which is - / inches long. at each end is a right-angled metal arm ( ) secured to the bar ( ) by screws ( ). to these arms the brushes ( ) are attached, so that their spring ends engage with the commutator ( ). an adjusting screw ( ) in the bearing post ( ), with the head thereof bearing against the brush-holder ( ), serves as a means for revolubly adjusting the brushes with relation to the commutator. dynamo windings.--there are several ways to wind the dynamos. these can be shown better by the following diagrams (figs. , , , ): the field.--if the field (a, fig. ) is not a permanent magnet, it must be excited by a cell or battery, and the wires (b, b') are connected up with a battery, while the wires (c, c') may be connected up to run a motor. this would, therefore, be what is called a "separately excited" dynamo. in this case the battery excites the field and the armature (d), cutting the lines of force at the pole pieces (e), so that the armature gathers the current for the wires (c, c'). [illustration: _fig. ._ field winding] [illustration: _fig. ._ series-wound] series-wound field.--fig. shows a "series-wound" dynamo. the wires of the fields (a) are connected up in series with the brushes of the armature (d), and the wires (g, g') are led out and connected up with a lamp, motor or other mechanism. in this case, as well as in figs. and , both the field and the armature are made of soft gray iron. with this winding and means of connecting the wires, the field is constantly excited by the current passing through the wires. shunt-wound field.--fig. represents what is known as a "shunt-wound" dynamo. here the field wires (h, h) connect with the opposite brushes of the armature, and the wires (i, i') are also connected with the brushes, these two wires being provided to perform the work required. this is a more useful form of winding for electroplating purposes. [illustration: _fig. ._ shunt-wound _fig. ._ compound-wound] compound-wound field.--fig. is a diagram of a "compound-wound" dynamo. the regular field winding (j) has its opposite ends connected directly with the armature brushes. there is also a winding, of a comparatively few turns, of a thicker wire, one terminal (k) of which is connected with one of the brushes and the other terminal (k') forms one side of the lighting circuit. a wire (l) connects with the other armature brush to form a complete lighting circuit. chapter v how to detect and measure electricity measuring instruments.--the production of an electric current would not be of much value unless we had some way by which we might detect and measure it. the pound weight, the foot rule and the quart measure are very simple devices, but without them very little business could be done. there must be a standard of measurement in electricity as well as in dealing with iron or vegetables or fabrics. as electricity cannot be seen by the human eye, some mechanism must be made which will reveal its movements. the detector.--it has been shown in the preceding chapter that a current of electricity passing through a wire will cause a current to pass through a parallel wire, if the two wires are placed close together, but not actually in contact with each other. an instrument which reveals this condition is called a _galvanometer_. it not only detects the presence of a current, but it shows the direction of its flow. we shall now see how this is done. for example, the wire (a, fig. ) is connected up in an electric circuit with a permanent magnet (b) suspended by a fine wire (c), so that the magnet (b) may freely revolve. [illustration: _fig. ._ _fig. ._ _fig. ._ to the right, compass magnet, to the left] for convenience, the magnetic field is shown flowing in the direction of the darts, in which the dart (d) represents the current within the magnet (b) flowing toward the north pole, and the darts (e) showing the exterior current flowing toward the south pole. now, if the wire (a) is brought up close to the magnet (b), and a current passed through a, the magnet (b) will be affected. fig. shows the normal condition of the magnetized bar (b) parallel with the wire (a) when a current is not passing through the latter. direction of current.--if the current should go through the wire (a) from right to left, as shown in fig. , the magnet (b) would swing in the direction taken by the hands of a clock and assume the position shown in fig. . if, on the other hand, the current in the wire (a) should be reversed or flow from left to right, the magnet (b) would swing counter-clock-wise, and assume the position shown in fig. . the little pointer (g) would, in either case, point in the direction of the flow of the current through the wire (a). [illustration: _fig. ._ indicating direction of current] simple current detector.--a simple current detector may be made as follows: prepare a base ' � ' in size and inch thick. at each corner of one end fix a binding post, as at a, a', fig. . then select feet of no. cotton-insulated wire, and make a coil (b) inches in diameter, leaving the ends free, so they may be affixed to the binding posts (a, a'). now glue or nail six blocks (c) to the base, each block being " � " � ", and lay the coil on these blocks. then drive an l-shaped nail (d) down into each block, on the inside of the coil, as shown, so as to hold the latter in place. [illustration: _fig. ._ the bridge] now make a bridge (e, fig. ) of a strip of brass / inch wide, / inch thick and long enough to span the coil, and bend the ends down, as at f, so as to form legs. a screw hole (g) is formed in each foot, so it may be screwed to the base. midway between the ends this bridge has a transverse slot (h) in one edge, to receive therein the pivot pin of the swinging magnet. in order to hold the pivot pin in place, cut out an h-shaped piece of sheet brass (i), which, when laid on the bridge, has its ends bent around the latter, as shown at j, and the crossbar of the h-shaped piece then will prevent the pivot pin from coming out of the slot (h). [illustration: _fig. ._ details of detector] the magnet is made of a bar of steel (k, fig. ) - / inches long, / inch wide and / inch thick, a piece of a clock spring being very serviceable for this purpose. the pivot pin is made of an ordinary pin (l), and as it is difficult to solder the steel magnet (k) to the pin, solder only a small disc (m) to the pin (l). then bore a hole (n) through the middle of the magnet (k), larger in diameter than the pin (l), and, after putting the pin in the hole, pour sealing wax into the hole, and thereby secure the two parts together. near the upper end of the pin (l) solder the end of a pointer (o), this pointer being at right angles to the armature (k). it is better to have a metal socket for the lower end of the pin. when these parts are put together, as shown in fig. , a removable glass top, or cover, should be provided. this is shown in fig. , in which a square, wooden frame (p) is used, and a glass (q) fitted into the frame, the glass being so arranged that when the cover is in position it will be in close proximity to the upper projecting end of the pivot pin (l), and thus prevent the magnet from becoming misplaced. [illustration: _fig. ._ cross section of detector] how to place the detector.--if the detector is placed north and south, as shown by the two markings, n and s (fig. ), the magnet bar will point north and south, being affected by the earth's magnetism; but when a current of electricity flows through the coil (b), the magnet will be deflected to the right or to the left, so that the pointer (o) will then show the direction in which the current is flowing through the wire (r) which you are testing. the next step of importance is to _measure_ the current, that is, to determine its strength or intensity, as well as the flow or quantity. different ways of measuring a current.--there are several ways to measure the properties of a current, which may be defined as follows: . the sulphuric acid voltameter.--by means of an electrolytic action, whereby the current decomposes an acidulated solution--that is, water which has in it a small amount of sulphuric acid--and then measuring the gas generated by the current. . the copper voltameter.--by electro-chemical means, in which the current passes through plates immersed in a solution of copper sulphate. . the galvanoscope.--by having a coil of insulated wire, with a magnet suspended so as to turn freely within the coil, forming what is called a galvanoscope. . electro-magnetic method.--by using a pair of magnets and sending a current through the coils, and then measuring the pull on the armature. . the power or speed method.--by using an electric fan, and noting the revolutions produced by the current. . the calorimeter.--by using a coil of bare wire, immersed in paraffine oil, and then measuring the temperature by means of a thermometer. [illustration: _fig. ._ acid voltameter] [illustration: _fig. ._ copper voltameter] . the light method.--lastly, by means of an electric light, which shows, by its brightness, a greater or less current. the preferred methods.--it has been found that the first and second methods are the only ones which will accurately register current strength, and these methods have this advantage--that the chemical effect produced is not dependent upon the size or shape of the apparatus or the plates used. how to make a sulphuric acid voltameter.--in fig. is shown a simple form of sulphuric acid voltameter, to illustrate the first method. a is a jar, tightly closed by a cover (b). within is a pair of platinum plates (c, c), each having a wire (d) through the cover. the cover has a vertical glass tube (e) through it, which extends down to the bottom of the jar, the electrolyte therein being a weak solution of sulphuric acid. when a current passes through the wires (d), the solution is partially decomposed--that is, converted into gas, which passes up into the vacant space (f) above the liquid, and, as it cannot escape, it presses the liquid downwardly, and causes the latter to flow upwardly into the tube (e). it is then an easy matter, after the current is on for a certain time, to determine its strength by the height of the liquid in the tube. how to make a copper voltameter.--the second, or copper voltameter, is shown in fig. . the glass jar (a) contains a solution of copper sulphate, known in commerce as blue vitriol. a pair of copper plates (b, b') are placed in this solution, each being provided with a connecting wire (c). when a current passes through the wires (c), one copper plate (b) is eaten away and deposited on the other plate (b'). it is then an easy matter to take out the plates and find out how much in weight b' has gained, or how much b has lost. in this way, in comparing the strength of, say, two separate currents, one should have each current pass through the voltameter the same length of time as the other, so as to obtain comparative results. it is not necessary, in the first and second methods, to consider the shapes, the sizes of the plates or the distances between them. in the first method the gas produced, within a given time, will be the same, and in the second method the amount deposited or eaten away will be the same under all conditions. disadvantages of the galvanoscope.--with the third method (using the galvanoscope) it is necessary, in order to get a positively correct reading instrument, to follow an absolutely accurate plan in constructing each part, in every detail, and great care must be exercised, particularly in winding. it is necessary also to be very careful in selecting the sizes of wire used and in the number of turns made in the coils. this is equally true of the fourth method, using the electro-magnet, because the magnetic pull is dependent upon the size of wire from which the coils are made and the number of turns of wire. objections to the calorimeter.--the calorimeter, or sixth method, has the same objection. the galvanoscope and electro-magnet do not respond equally to all currents, and this is also true, even to a greater extent, with the calorimeter. chapter vi volts, amperes, ohms and watts understanding terms.--we must now try to ascertain the meaning of some of the terms so frequently used in connection with electricity. if you intended to sell or measure produce or goods of any kind, it would be essential to know how many pints or quarts are contained in a gallon, or in a bushel, or how many inches there are in a yard, and you also ought to know just what the quantity term _bushel_ or the measurement _yard_ means. intensity and quantity.--electricity, while it has no weight, is capable of being measured by means of its intensity, or by its quantity. light may be measured or tested by its brilliancy. if one light is of less intensity than another and both of them receive their impulses from the same source, there must be something which interferes with that light which shows the least brilliancy. electricity can also be interfered with, and this interference is called _resistance_. voltage.--water may be made to flow with greater or less force, or velocity, through a pipe, the degree of same depending upon the height of the water which supplies the pipe. so with electricity. it may pass over a wire with greater or less force under one condition than another. this force is called voltage. if we have a large pipe, a much greater quantity of water will flow through it than will pass through a small pipe, providing the pressure in each case is alike. this quantity in electricity is called _amperage_. in the case of water, a column " � ", inches in height, weighs pound; so that if a pipe inch square draws water from the bottom it flows with a pressure of pound. if the pipe has a measurement of square inches, double the quantity of water will flow therefrom, at the same pressure. amperage.--if, on the other hand, we have a pipe inch square, and there is a depth of inches of water in the reservoir, we shall get as much water from the reservoir as though we had a pipe of square inches drawing water from a reservoir which is inches deep. meaning of watts.--it is obvious, therefore, that if we multiply the height of the water in inches with the area of the pipe, we shall obtain a factor which will show how much water is flowing. here are two examples: . inches = height of the water in the reservoir. square inches = size of the pipe. multiply � = . . = height of the water in the reservoir. square inch = size of the pipe. multiply � = . thus the two problems are equal. a kilowatt.--now, in electricity, remembering that the height of the water corresponds with _voltage_ in electricity, and the size of the pipe with _amperage_, if we multiply volts by amperes, or amperes by volts, we get a result which is indicated by the term _watts_. one thousand of these watts make a kilowatt, and the latter is the standard of measurement by which a dynamo or motor is judged or rated. thus, if we have amperes and volts, the result of multiplying them would be watts, or volts and amperes would produce watts. a standard of measurement.--but with all this we must have some standard. a bushel measure is of a certain size, and a foot has a definite length, so in electricity there is a recognized force and quantity which are determined as follows: the ampere standard.--it is necessary, first, to determine what an ampere is. for this purpose a standard solution of nitrate of silver is used, and a current of electricity is passed through this solution. in doing so the current deposits silver at the rate of . grains per second for each ampere. the voltage standard.--in order to determine the voltage we must know something of _resistance_. different metals do not transmit a current with equal ease. the size of a conductor, also, is an important factor in the passage of a current. a large conductor will transmit a current much better than a small conductor. we must therefore have a standard for the _ohm_, which is the measure of resistance. the ohm.--it is calculated in this way: there are several standards, but the one most generally employed is the _international ohm_. to determine it, by this system, a column of pure mercury, . millimeters long and weighing . grams, is used. this would make a square tube about inches long, and a little over / of an inch in diameter. the resistance to a current flow in such a column would be equal to ohm. calculating the voltage.--in order to arrive at the voltage we must use a conductor, which, with a resistance of ohm, will produce ampere. it must be remembered that the volt is the practical unit of electro-motive force. while it would be difficult for the boy to conduct these experiments in the absence of suitable apparatus, still, it is well to understand thoroughly how and why these standards are made and used. chapter vii push buttons, switches, annunciators, bells and like apparatus simple switches.--we have now gone over the simpler or elementary outlines of electrical phenomena, and we may commence to do some of the practical work in the art. we need certain apparatus to make connections, which will be constructed first. a two-pole switch.--a simple two-pole switch for a single line is made as follows: a base block (a, fig. ) inches long, inches wide and / inch thick, has on it, at one end, a binding screw (b), which holds a pair of fingers (c) of brass or copper, these fingers being bent upwardly and so arranged as to serve as fingers to hold a switch bar (d) between them. this bar is also of copper or brass and is pivoted to the fingers. near the other end of the base is a similar binding screw (e) and fingers (f) to receive the blade of the switch bar. the bar has a handle (g) of wood. the wires are attached to the respective binding screws (b, e). double-pole switch.--a double-pole switch or a switch for a double line is shown in fig. . this is made similar in all respects to the one shown in fig. , excepting that there are two switch blades (a, a) connected by a cross bar (b) of insulating material, and this bar carries the handle (c). [illustration: _fig. ._ two-pole switch] [illustration: _fig. ._ double-pole switch] other types of switch will be found very useful. in fig. is a simple sliding switch in which the base block has, at one end, a pair of copper plates (a, b), each held at one end to the base by a binding screw (c), and having a bearing or contact surface (d) at its other end. at the other end of the base is a copper plate (e) held by a binding screw (f), to the inner end of which plate is hinged a swinging switch blade (g), the free end of which is adapted to engage with the plates (a, b). [illustration: _fig. ._ sliding switch] sliding switch.--this sliding switch form may have the contact plates (a, b and c, fig. ) circularly arranged and any number may be located on the base, so they may be engaged by a single switching lever (h). it is the form usually adopted for rheostats. reversing switch.--a reversing switch is shown in fig. . the base has two plates (a, b) at one end, to which the parallel switch bars (c, d) are hinged. the other end of the base has three contact plates (e, f, g) to engage the swinging switch bars, these latter being at such distance apart that they will engage with the middle and one of the outer plates. the inlet wires, positive and negative, are attached to the plates (a, b, respectively), and one of the outlet wires (h) is attached to the middle contact plate (f), while the other wire is connected up with both of the outside plates. when the switch bars (c, d) are thrown to the left so as to be in contact with e, f, the outside plate (e) and the middle plate (f) will be positive and negative, respectively; but when the switch is thrown to the right, as shown in the figure, plate f becomes positive and plate e negative, as shown. [illustration: _fig. ._ rheostat form of switch] push buttons.--a push button is but a modified structure of a switch, and they are serviceable because they are operating, or the circuit is formed only while the finger is on the button. [illustration: _fig. ._ reversing switch] in its simplest form (fig. ) the push button has merely a circular base (a) of insulating material, and near one margin, on the flat side, is a rectangular plate (b), intended to serve as a contact plate as well as a means for attaching one of the wires thereto. in line with this plate is a spring finger (c), bent upwardly so that it is normally out of contact with the plate (b), its end being held by a binding screw (d). to effect contact, the spring end of the finger (c) is pressed against the bar (b), as at e. this is enclosed in a suitable casing, such as will readily suggest itself to the novice. electric bell.--one of the first things the boy wants to make, and one which is also an interesting piece of work, is an electric bell. to make this he will be brought, experimentally, in touch with several important features in electrical work. he must make a battery for the production of current, a pair of electro-magnets to be acted upon by the current, a switch to control it, and, finally, he must learn how to connect it up so that it may be operated not only from one, but from two or more push buttons. [illustration: _fig. ._ push button] how made.--in fig. is shown an electric bell, as usually constructed, so modified as to show the structure at a glance, with its connections. a is the base, b, b' the binding posts for the wires, c, c the electro-magnets, c' the bracket for holding the magnets, d the armature, e the thin spring which connects the armature with the post f, g the clapper arm, h the bell, i the adjusting screw on the post j, k the wire lead from the binding post b to the first magnet, l the wire which connects the two magnets, m the wire which runs from the second magnet to the post j, and n a wire leading from the armature post to the binding post b'. [illustration: _fig. ._ electric bell] the principle of the electric bell is this: in looking at fig. , you will note that the armature bar d is held against the end of the adjusting screw by the small spring e. when a current is turned on, it passes through the connections and conduits as follows: wire k to the magnets, wire m to the binding post j, and set screw i, then through the armature to the post f, and from post f to the binding post b'. [illustration: _fig. ._ armature of electric bell] electric bell--how operated.--the moment a current passes through the magnets (c, c), the core is magnetized, and the result is that the armature (d) is attracted to the magnets, as shown by the dotted lines (o), when the clapper strikes the bell. but when the armature moves over to the magnet, the connection is broken between the screw (i) and armature (d), so that the cores of the magnets are demagnetized and lose their pull, and the spring (e) succeeds in drawing back the armature. this operation of vibrating the armature is repeated with great rapidity, alternately breaking and re-establishing the circuit, by the action of the current. in making the bell, you must observe one thing, the binding posts (b, b') must be insulated from each other, and the post j, or the post f, should also be insulated from the base. for convenience we show the post f insulated, so as to necessitate the use of wire (n) from post (f) to binding post (b'). the foregoing assumes that you have used a cast metal base, as most bells are now made; but if you use a wooden base, the binding posts (b, b') and the posts (f, j) are insulated from each other, and the construction is much simplified. it is better, in practice, to have a small spring (p, fig. ) between the armature (d) and the end of the adjusting screw (i), so as to give a return impetus to the clapper. the object of the adjusting screw is to push and hold the armature close up to the ends of the magnets, if it seems necessary. if two bells are placed on the base with the clapper mounted between them, both bells will be struck by the swinging motion of the armature. an easily removable cap or cover is usually placed over the coils and armature, to keep out dust. a very simple annunciator may be attached to the bell, as shown in the following figures: [illustration: _figs. - ._ annunciator] annunciators.--make a box of wood, with a base (a) " � " and / inch thick. on this you can permanently mount the two side pieces (b) and two top and bottom pieces (c), respectively, so they project outwardly - / inches from the base. on the open front place a wood or metal plate (d), provided with a square opening (d), as in fig. , near its lower end. this plate is held to the box by screws (e). within is a magnet (f), screwed into the base (a), as shown in fig. ; and pivoted to the bottom of the box is a vertical armature (g), which extends upwardly and contacts with the core of the magnet. the upper end of the armature has a shoulder (h), which is in such position that it serves as a rest for a v-shaped stirrup (i), which is hinged at j to the base (c). this stirrup carries the number plate (k), and when it is raised to its highest point it is held on the shoulder (h), unless the electro-magnet draws the armature out of range of the stirrup. a spring (l) bearing against the inner side of the armature keeps its upper end normally away from the magnet core. when the magnet draws the armature inwardly, the number plate drops and exposes the numeral through the opening in the front of the box. in order to return the number plate to its original position, as shown in fig. , a vertical trigger (m) passes up through the bottom, its upper end being within range of one of the limbs of the stirrup. this is easily made by the ingenious boy, and will be quite an acquisition to his stock of instruments. in practice, the annunciator may be located in any convenient place and wires run to that point. [illustration: _fig. ._ alarm switch on window] [illustration: _fig. ._ burglar alarm attachment to window] burglar alarm.--in order to make a burglar alarm connection with a bell, push buttons or switches may be put in circuit to connect with the windows and doors, and by means of the annunciators you may locate the door or window which has been opened. the simplest form of switch for a window is shown in the following figures: the base piece (a), which may be of hard rubber or fiber, is / inch thick and " � - / " in size. [illustration: _fig. ._ burglar alarm contact] at one end is a brass plate (b), with a hole for a wood screw (c), this screw being designed to pass through the plate and also into the window-frame, so as to serve as a means of attaching one of the wires thereto. the inner end of the plate has a hole for a round-headed screw (c') that also goes through the base and into the window-frame. it also passes through the lower end of the heart-shaped metal switch-piece (d). the upper end of the base has a brass plate (e), also secured to the base and window by a screw (f) at its upper end. the heart-shaped switch is of such length and width at its upper end that when it is swung to the right with one of the lobes projecting past the edge of the window-frame, the other lobe will be out of contact with the plate (e). [illustration: _fig. ._ neutral position of contact] the window sash (g) has a removable pin (h), which, when the sash moves upwardly, is in the path of the lobe of the heart-shaped switch, as shown in fig. , and in this manner the pin (h) moves the upper end of the switch (d) inwardly, so that the other lobe contacts with the plate (e), and establishes an electric circuit, as shown in fig. . during the daytime the pin (h) may be removed, and in order to protect the switch the heart-shaped piece (d) is swung inwardly, as shown in fig. , so that neither of the lobes is in contact with the plate (e). wire circuiting.--for the purpose of understanding fully the circuiting, diagrams will be shown of the simple electric bell with two push buttons; next in order, the circuiting with an annunciator and then the circuiting necessary for a series of windows and doors, with annunciator attachments. [illustration: _fig. ._ circuiting for electric bell] circuiting system with a bell and two push buttons.--fig. shows a simple circuiting system which has two push buttons, although any number may be used, so that the bell will ring when the circuit is closed by either button. the push buttons and the annunciator bells.--fig. shows three push buttons and an annunciator for each button. these three circuits are indicated by a, b and c, so that when either button makes contact, a complete circuit is formed through the corresponding annunciator. [illustration: _fig. ._ _annunciators_] [illustration: _fig. ._ wiring system for a house] wiring up a house.--the system of wiring up a house so that all doors and windows will be connected to form a burglar alarm outfit, is shown in fig. . it will be understood that, in practice, the bell is mounted on or at the annunciator, and that, for convenience, the annunciator box has also a receptacle for the battery. the circuiting is shown diagramatically, as it is called, so as fully to explain how the lines are run. two windows and a door are connected up with an annunciator having three drops, or numbers , , . the circuit runs from one pole of the battery to the bell and then to one post of the annunciator. from the other post a wire runs to one terminal of the switch at the door or window. the other switch terminal has a wire running to the other pole of the battery. a, b, c represent the circuit wires from the terminals of the window and door switches, to the annunciators. it is entirely immaterial which side of the battery is connected up with the bell. from the foregoing it will readily be understood how to connect up any ordinary apparatus, remembering that in all cases the magnet must be brought into the electric circuit. chapter viii accumulators. storage or secondary batteries storing up electricity.--in the foregoing chapters we have seen that, originally, electricity was confined in a bottle, called the leyden jar, from which it was wholly discharged at a single impulse, as soon as it was connected up by external means. later the primary battery and the dynamo were invented to generate a constant current, and after these came the second form of storing electricity, called the storage or secondary battery, and later still recognized as accumulators. the accumulator.--the term _accumulator_ is, strictly speaking, the more nearly correct, as electricity is, in reality, "_stored_" in an accumulator. but when an accumulator is charged by a current of electricity, a chemical change is gradually produced in the active element of which the accumulator is made. this change or decomposition continues so long as the charging current is on. when the accumulator is disconnected from the charging battery or dynamo, and its terminals are connected up with a lighting system, or with a motor, for instance, a reverse process is set up, or the particles re-form themselves into their original compositions, which causes a current to flow in a direction opposite to that of the charging current. it is immaterial to the purposes of this chapter, as to the charging source, whether it be by batteries or dynamos; the same principles will apply in either case. [illustration: _fig. ._ accumulator grids] accumulator plates.--the elements used for accumulator plates are red lead for the positive plates, and precipitated lead, or the well-known litharge, for the negative plates. experience has shown that the best way to hold this material is by means of lead grids. fig. shows the typical form of one of these grids. it is made of lead, cast or molded in one piece, usually square, as at a, with a wing or projection (b), at one margin, extending upwardly and provided with a hole (c). the grid is about a quarter of an inch thick. the grid.--the open space, called the grid, proper, comprises cross bars, integral with the plate, made in a variety of shapes. fig. shows three forms of constructing these bars or ribs, the object being to provide a form which will hold in the lead paste, which is pressed in so as to make a solid-looking plate when completed. the positive plate.--the positive plate is made in the following manner: make a stiff paste of red lead and sulphuric acid; using a solution, say, of one part of acid to two parts of water. the grid is laid on a flat surface and the paste forced into the perforations with a stiff knife or spatula. turn over the grid so as to get the paste in evenly on both sides. the grid is then stood on its edge, from to hours, to dry, and afterwards immersed in a concentrated solution of chloride of lime, so as to convert it into lead peroxide. when the action is complete it is thoroughly rinsed in cold water, and is ready to use. the negative plate.--the negative plate is filled, in like manner, with precipitated lead. this lead is made by putting a strip of zinc into a standard solution of acetate of lead, and crystals will then form on the zinc. these will be very thin, and will adhere together, firmly, forming a porous mass. this, when saturated and kept under water for a short time, may be put into the openings of the negative plate. [illustration: _fig. ._ assemblage of accumulator plates] connecting up the plates.--the next step is to put these plates in position to form a battery. in fig. is shown a collection of plates connected together. for simplicity in illustrating, the cell is made up of glass, porcelain, or hard rubber, with five plates (a), a, a representing the negative and b, b the positive plates. a base of grooved strips (c, c) is placed in the batteries of the cell to receive the lower ends of the plates. the positive plates are held apart by means of a short section of tubing (d), which is clamped and held within the plates by a bolt (e), this bolt also being designed to hold the terminal strip (f). in like manner, the negative plates are held apart by the two tubular sections (g), each of which is of the same length as the section d of the positives. the bolt (h) holds the negatives together as well as the terminal (i). the terminals should be lead strips, and it would be well, owing to the acid fumes which are formed, to coat all brass work, screws, etc., with paraffine wax. the electrolyte or acid used in the cell, for working purposes, is a pure sulphuric acid, which should be diluted with about four times its weight in water. remember, you should always add the strong acid to the water, and never pour the water into the acid, as the latter method causes a dangerous ebullition, and does not produce a good mixture. put enough of this solution into the cell to cover the tops of the plates, and the cell is ready. [illustration: _fig. ._ connecting up storage battery in series] charging the cells.--the charge of the current must never be less than . volts. each cell has an output, in voltage, of about volts, hence if we have, say, cells, we must have at least volts charging capacity. we may arrange these in one line, or in series, as it is called, so far as the connections are concerned, and charge them with a dynamo, or other electrical source, which shows a pressure of volts, as illustrated in fig. , or, instead of this, we may put them into two parallel sets of cells each, as shown in fig. , and use . volts to charge with. in this case it will take double the time because we are charging with only one-half the voltage used in the first case. the positive pole of the dynamo should be connected with the positive pole of the accumulator cell, and negative with negative. when this has been done run up the machine until it slightly exceeds the voltage of the cells. thus, if we have cells in parallel, like in fig. , at least volts will be required, and the excess necessary should bring up the voltage in the dynamo to or volts. [illustration: _fig. ._ parallel series] [illustration: _fig. ._ charging circuit] the initial charge.--it is usual initially to charge the battery from periods ranging from to hours, and to let it stand for or hours, after which to re-charge, until the positive plates have turned to a chocolate color, and the negative plates to a slate or gray color, and both plates give off large bubbles of gas. in charging, the temperature of the electrolyte should not exceed ° fahrenheit. when using the accumulators they should never be fully discharged. the charging circuit.--the diagram (fig. ) shows how a charging circuit is formed. the lamps are connected up in parallel, as illustrated. each -candle-power -volt lamp will carry / ampere, so that, supposing we have a dynamo which gives volts, and we want to charge a -volt accumulator, there will be -volt surplus to go to the accumulator. if, for instance, you want the cell to have a charge of amperes, four of these lamps should be connected up in parallel. if amperes are required, use lamps, and so on. chapter ix the telegraph the telegraph is a very simple instrument. the key is nothing more or less than a switch which turns the current on and off alternately. the signals sent over the wires are simply the audible sounds made by the armature, as it moves to and from the magnets. mechanism in telegraph circuits.--a telegraph circuit requires three pieces of mechanism at each station, namely, a key used by the sender, a sounder for the receiver, and a battery. the sending key.--the base of the sending instrument is six inches long, four inches wide, and three-quarters of an inch thick, made of wood, or any suitable non-conducting material. the key (a) is a piece of brass three-eighths by one-half inch in thickness and six inches long. midway between its ends is a cross hole, to receive the pivot pin (b), which also passes through a pair of metal brackets (c, d), the bracket c having a screw to hold one of the line wires, and the other bracket having a metal switch (e) hinged thereto. this switch bar, like the brackets, is made of brass, one-half inch wide by one-sixteenth of an inch thick. below the forward end of the key (a) is a cross bar of brass (f), screwed to the base by a screw at one end, to receive the other line wire. directly below the key (a) is a screw (g), so that the key will strike it when moved downwardly. the other end of the bar (f) contacts with the forward end of the switch bar (e) when the latter is moved inwardly. [illustration: _fig. ._ telegraph sending key] the forward end of the key (a) has a knob (h) for the fingers, and the rear end has an elastic (i) attached thereto which is secured to the end of the base, so that, normally, the rear end is held against the base and away from the screw head (g). the head (j) of a screw projects from the base at its rear end. key a contacts with it. when the key a contacts with the screw heads g, j, a click is produced, one when the key is pressed down and the other when the key is released. you will notice that the two plates c, f are connected up in circuit with the battery, so that, as the switch e is thrown, so as to be out of contact, the circuit is open, and may be closed either by the key a or the switch e. the use of the switch will be illustrated in connection with the sounder. [illustration: _fig. ._ telegraph sounder] when the key a is depressed, the circuit of course goes through plate c, key a and plate f to the station signalled. the sounder.--the sounder is the instrument which carries the electro-magnet. in fig. this is shown in perspective. the base is six inches long and four inches wide, being made, preferably, of wood. near the forward end is mounted a pair of electro-magnets (a, a), with their terminal wires connected up with plates b, b', to which the line wires are attached. midway between the magnets and the rear end of the base is a pair of upwardly projecting brackets (c). between these are pivoted a bar (d), the forward end of which rests between the magnets and carries, thereon, a cross bar (e) which is directly above the magnets, and serves as the armature. the rear end of the base has a screw (f) directly beneath the bar d of such height that when the rear end of the bar d is in contact therewith the armature e will be out of contact with the magnet cores (a, a). a spiral spring (g) secured to the rear ends of the arm and to the base, respectively, serves to keep the rear end of the key normally in contact with the screw f. connecting up the key and sounder.--having made these two instruments, we must next connect them up in the circuit, or circuits, formed for them, as there must be a battery, a key, and a sounder at each end of the line. in fig. you will note two groups of those instruments. now observe how the wires connect them together. there are two line wires, one (a) which connects up the two batteries, the wire being attached so that one end connects with the positive terminal of the battery, and the other end with the negative terminal. [illustration: _fig. ._ a telegraph circuit] the other line wire (b), between the two stations, has its opposite ends connected with the terminals of the electro-magnet c of the sounders. the other terminals of each electro-magnet are connected up with one terminal of each key by a wire (d), and to complete the circuit at each station, the other terminal of the key has a wire (e) to its own battery. two stations in circuit.--the illustration shows station telegraphing to station . this is indicated by the fact that the switch f' of that instrument is open, and the switch f of station closed. when, therefore, the key of station is depressed, a complete circuit is formed which transmits the current through wire e' and battery, through line a, then through the battery of station , through wire e to the key, and from the key, through wire d, to the sounder, and finally from the sounder over line wire b back to the sounder of station , completing the circuit at the key through wire d'. when the operator at station closes the switch f', and the operator at station opens the switch f, the reverse operation takes place. in both cases, however, the sounder is in at both ends of the line, and only the circuit through the key is cut out by the switch f, or f'. the double click.--the importance of the double click of the sounder will be understood when it is realized that the receiving operator must have some means of determining if the sounder has transmitted a dot or a dash. whether he depresses the key for a dot or a dash, there must be one click when the key is pressed down on the screw head g (fig. ), and also another click, of a different kind, when the key is raised up so that its rear end strikes the screw head j. this action of the key is instantly duplicated by the bar d (fig. ) of the sounder, so that the sounder as well as the receiver knows the time between the first and the second click, and by that means he learns that a dot or a dash is made. illustrating the dot and the dash.--to illustrate: let us suppose, for convenience, that the downward movement of the lever in the key, and the bar in the sounder, make a sharp click, and the return of the lever and bar make a dull click. in this case the ear, after a little practice, can learn readily how to distinguish the number of downward impulses that have been given to the key. _the morse telegraph code_ a . - n - . & . ... b - ... o .. . - - . c .. . p ..... .. - .. d - . . q .. - . ... - . e . r . .. .... - f . - . s ... - - - g - - . t - ...... h .... u .. - - - .. i .. v ... - - .... j - . - . w . - - - .. - k - . - x . - .. ---- ------ l -- y .. .. m - - z ... . example in use.--let us take an example in the word "electrical." e l e c t r i c a l . -- . .. . - . .. .. .. . . - -- the operator first makes a dot, which means a sharp and a dull click close together; there is then a brief interval, then a lapse, after which there is a sharp click, followed, after a comparatively longer interval, with the dull click. now a dash by itself may be an l, a t, or the figure , dependent upon its length. the short dash is t, and the longest dash the figure . the operator will soon learn whether it is either of these or the letter l, which is intermediate in length. in time the sender as well as receiver will give a uniform length to the dash impulse, so that it may be readily distinguished. in the same way, we find that r, which is indicated by a dot, is followed, after a short interval, by two dots. this might readily be mistaken for the single dot for e and the two dots for i, were it not that the time element in r is not as long between the first and second dots, as it ordinarily is between the single dot of e when followed by the two dots of i. chapter x high tension apparatus, condensers, etc. induction.--one of the most remarkable things in electricity is the action of induction--that property of an electric current which enables it to pass from one conductor to another conductor through the air. another singular and interesting thing is that the current so transmitted across spaces changes its direction of flow, and, furthermore, the tension of such a current may be changed by transmitting it from one conductor to another. low and high tension.--in order to effect this latter change--that is, to convert it from a low tension to a high tension--coils are used, one coil being wound upon the other; one of these coils is called the primary and the other the secondary. the primary coil receives the current from the battery, or source of electrical power, and the secondary coil receives charges, and transmits the current. for an illustration of this examine fig. , in which you will note a coil of heavy wire (a), around which is wound a coil of fine wire (b). if, for instance, the primary coil has a low voltage, the secondary coil will have a high voltage, or tension. advantage is taken of this phase to use a few cells, as a primary battery, and then, by a set of _induction coils_, as they are called, to build up a high-tension electro-motive force, so that the spark will jump across a gap, as shown at c, for the purpose of igniting the charges of gas in a gasoline motor; or the current may be used for medical batteries, and for other purposes. [illustration: _fig. ._ induction coil and circuit] the current passes, by induction, from the primary to the secondary coil. it passes from a large conductor to a small conductor, the small conductor having a much greater resistance than the large one. elastic property of electricity.--while electricity has no resiliency, like a spring, for instance, still it acts in the manner of a cushion under certain conditions. it may be likened to an oscillating spring acted upon by a bar. referring to fig. , we will assume that the bar a in falling down upon the spring b compresses the latter, so that at the time of greatest compression the bar goes down as far as the dotted line c. it is obvious that the spring b will throw the bar upwardly. now, electricity appears to have a kind of elasticity, which characteristic is taken advantage of in order to increase the efficiency of the induction in the coil. [illustration: _fig. ._ illustrating elasticity] the condenser.--to make a condenser, prepare two pine boards like a, say, eight by ten inches and a half inch thick, and shellac thoroughly on all sides. then prepare sheets of tinfoil (b), six by eight inches in size, and also sheets of paraffined paper (c), seven by nine inches in dimensions. also cut out from the waste pieces of tinfoil strips (d), one inch by two inches. to build up the condenser, lay down a sheet of paraffined paper (c), then a sheet of tinfoil (b), and before putting on the next sheet of paraffined paper lay down one of the small strips (d) of tinfoil, as shown in the illustration, so that its end projects over one end of the board a; then on the second sheet of paraffine paper lay another sheet of tinfoil, and on this, at the opposite end, place one of the small strips (d), and so on, using from to of the tinfoil sheets. when the last paraffine sheet is laid on, the other board is placed on top, and the whole bound together, either by wrapping cords around the same or by clamping them together with bolts. [illustration: _fig. ._ condenser] you may now make a hole through the projecting ends of the strips, and you will have two sets of tinfoil sheets, alternately connected together at opposite ends of the condenser. care should be exercised to leave the paraffine sheets perfect or without holes. you can make these sheets yourself by soaking them in melted paraffine wax. connecting up a condenser.--when completed, one end of the condenser is connected up with one terminal of the secondary coil, and the other end of the condenser with the other secondary terminal. [illustration: _fig. ._ high-tension circuit] in fig. a high-tension circuit is shown. two coils, side by side, are always used to show an induction coil, and a condenser is generally shown, as illustrated, by means of a pair of forks, one resting within the other. the interrupter.--one other piece of mechanism is necessary, and that is an _interrupter_, for the purpose of getting the effect of the pulsations given out by the secondary coil. a simple current interrupter is made as follows: prepare a wooden base (a), one inch thick, six inches wide, and twelve inches long. upon this mount a toothed wheel (b), six inches in diameter, of thin sheet metal, or a brass gear wheel will answer the purpose. the standard (c), which supports the wheel, may be of metal bent up to form two posts, between which the crankshaft (d) is journaled. the base of the posts has an extension plate (e), with a binding post for a wire. at the front end of the base is an l-shaped strip (f), with a binding post for a wire connection, and the upwardly projecting part of the strip contacts with the toothed wheel. when the wheel b is rotated the spring finger (f) snaps from one tooth to the next, so that, momentarily, the current is broken, and the frequency is dependent upon the speed imparted to the wheel. [illustration: _fig. ._ current interrupter] uses of high-tension coils.--this high-tension coil is made use of, and is the essential apparatus in wireless telegraphy, as we shall see in the chapter treating upon that subject. chapter xi wireless telegraphy telegraphing without wires.--wireless telegraphy is an outgrowth of the ordinary telegraph system. when maxwell, and, later on, hertz, discovered that electricity, magnetism, and light were transmitted through the ether, and that they differed only in their wave lengths, they laid the foundations for wireless telegraphy. ether is a substance which is millions and millions of times lighter than air, and it pervades all space. it is so unstable that it is constantly in motion, and this phase led some one to suggest that if a proper electrical apparatus could be made, the ether would thereby be disturbed sufficiently so that its impulses would extend out a distance proportioned to the intensity of the electrical agitation thereby created. surging character of high-tension currents.--when a current of electricity is sent through a wire, hundreds of miles in length, the current surges back and forth on the wire many thousands of times a second. light comes to us from the sun, over , , of miles, through the ether. it is as reasonable to suppose, or infer, that the ether can, therefore, convey an electrical impulse as readily as does a wire. it is on this principle that impulses are sent for thousands of miles, and no doubt they extend even farther, if the proper mechanism could be devised to detect movement of the waves so propagated. the coherer.--the instrument for detecting these impulses, or disturbances, in the ether is generally called a _coherer_, although detector is the term which is most satisfactory. the name coherer comes from the first practical instrument made for this purpose. [illustration: _fig. ._ wireless telegraphy coherer] how made.--the coherer is simply a tube, say, of glass, within which is placed iron filings. when the oscillations surge through the secondary coil the pressure or potentiality of the current finally causes it to leap across the small space separating the filings and, as it were, it welds together their edges so that a current freely passes. the bringing together of the particles, under these conditions, is called cohering. fig. shows the simplest form of coherer. the posts (a) are firmly affixed to the base (b), each post having an adjusting screw (c) in its upper end, and these screw downwardly against and serve to bind a pair of horizontal rods (d), the inner ends of which closely approach each other. these may be adjusted so as to be as near together or as far apart as desired. e is a glass tube in which the ends of the rods (d) rest, and between the separated ends of the rods (d) the iron filings (f) are placed. the decoherers.--for the purpose of causing the metal filings to fall apart, or decohere, the tube is tapped lightly, and this is done by a little object like the clapper of an electric bell. in practice, the coils and the parts directly connected with it are put together on one base. the sending apparatus.--fig. shows a section of a coil with its connection in the sending station. the spark gap rods (a) may be swung so as to bring them closer together or farther apart, but they must not at any time contact with each other. the induction coil has one terminal of the primary coil connected up by a wire (b) with one post of a telegraph key, and the other post of the key has a wire connection (c), with one side of a storage battery. the other side of the battery has a wire (d) running to the other terminal of the primary. [illustration: _fig. ._ wireless sending apparatus] the secondary coil has one of its terminals connected with a binding post (e). this binding post has an adjustable rod with a knob (f) on its end, and the other binding post (g), which is connected up with the other terminal of the secondary coil, carries a similar adjusting rod with a knob (h). from the post (e) is a wire (i), which extends upwardly, and is called the aerial wire, or wire for the antennæ, and this wire also connects with one side of the condenser by a conductor (j). the ground wire (k) connects with the other binding post (g), and a branch wire (l) also connects the ground wire (k) with one end of the condenser. [illustration: _fig. ._ wireless receiving apparatus] the receiving apparatus.--the receiving station, on the other hand, has neither condenser, induction coil, nor key. when the apparatus is in operation, the coherer switch is closed, and the instant a current passes through the coherer and operates the telegraph sounder, the galvanometer indicates the current. of course, when the coherer switch is closed, the battery operates the decoherer. how the circuits are formed.--by referring again to fig. , it will be seen that when the key is depressed, a circuit is formed from the battery through wire b to the primary coil, and back again to the battery through wire d. the secondary coil is thereby energized, and, when the full potential is reached, the current leaps across the gap formed between the two knobs (f, h), thereby setting up a disturbance in the ether which is transmitted through space in all directions. it is this impulse, or disturbance, which is received by the coherer at the receiving station, and which is indicated by the telegraph sounder. chapter xii the telephone vibrations.--every manifestation in nature is by way of vibration. the beating of the heart, the action of the legs in walking, the winking of the eyelid; the impulses from the sun, which we call light; sound, taste and color appeal to our senses by vibratory means, and, as we have hereinbefore stated, the manifestations of electricity and magnetism are merely vibrations of different wave lengths. the acoustic telephone.--that sound is merely a product of vibrations may be proven in many ways. one of the earliest forms of telephones was simply a "sound" telephone, called the _acoustic telephone_. the principle of this may be illustrated as follows: take two cups (a, b), as in fig. , punch a small hole through the bottom of each, and run a string or wire (c) from the hole of one cup to that of the other, and secure it at both ends so it may be drawn taut. now, by talking into the cup (a) the bottom of it will vibrate to and fro, as shown by the dotted lines and thereby cause the bottom of the other cup (b) to vibrate in like manner, and in so vibrating it will receive not only the same amplitude, but also the same character of vibrations as the cup (a) gave forth. [illustration: _fig. ._ acoustic telephone] [illustration: _fig. ._ illustrating vibrations] sound waves.--sound waves are long and short; the long waves giving sounds which are low in the musical scale, and the short waves high musical tones. you may easily determine this by the following experiment: stretch a wire, as at b (fig. ), fairly tight, and then vibrate it. the amplitude of the vibration will be as indicated by dotted line a. now, stretch it very tight, as at c, so that the amplitude of vibration will be as shown at e. by putting your ear close to the string you will find that while a has a low pitch, c is very much higher. this is the principle on which stringed instruments are built. you will note that the wave length, which represents the distance between the dotted lines a is much greater than e. hearing electricity.--in electricity, mechanism has been made to enable man to note the action of the current. by means of the armature, vibrating in front of a magnet, we can see its manifestations. it is now but a step to devise some means whereby we may hear it. in this, as in everything else electrically, the magnet comes into play. [illustration: _fig. ._ the magnetic field] in the chapter on magnetism, it was stated that the magnetic field extended out beyond the magnet, so that if we were able to see the magnetism, the end of a magnet would appear to us something like a moving field, represented by the dotted lines in fig. . the magnetic field is shown in fig. at only one end, but its manifestations are alike at both ends. it will be seen that the magnetic field extends out to a considerable distance and has quite a radius of influence. the diaphragm in a magnetic field.--if, now, we put a diaphragm (a) in this magnetic field, close up to the end of the magnet, but not so close as to touch it, and then push it in and out, or talk into it so that the sound waves strike it, the movement or the vibration of the diaphragm (a) will disturb the magnetic field emanating from the magnet, and this disturbance of the magnetic field at one end of the magnet also affects the magnetic field at the other end in the same way, so that the disturbance there will be of the same amplitude. it will also display the same characteristics as did the magnetic field when the diaphragm (a) disturbed it. a simple telephone circuit.--from this simple fact grew the telephone. if two magnets are connected up in the same circuit, so that the magnetic fields of the two magnets have the same source of electric power, the disturbance of one diaphragm will affect the other similarly, just the same as the two magnetic fields of the single magnet are disturbed in unison. how to make a telephone.--for experimental and testing purposes two of these telephones should be made at the same time. the case or holder (a) may be made either of hard wood or hard rubber, so that it is of insulating material. the core (b) is of soft iron, / inch in diameter and inches long, bored and threaded at one end to receive a screw (c) which passes through the end of the case (a). the enlarged end of the case should be, exteriorly, - / inches in diameter, and the body of the case inch in diameter. [illustration: _fig. ._ section of telephone receiver] interiorly, the large end of the case is provided with a circular recess - / inches in diameter and adapted to receive therein a spool which is, diametrically, a little smaller than the recess. the spool fits fairly tight upon the end of the core, and when in position rests against an annular shoulder in the recess. a hollow space (f) is thus provided behind the spool (d), so the two wires from the magnet may have room where they emerge from the spool. the spool is a little shorter than the distance between the shoulder (e) and the end of the casing, at g, and the core projects only a short distance beyond the end of the spool, so that when the diaphragm (h) is put upon the end of the case, and held there by screws (i) it will not touch the end of the core. a wooden or rubber mouthpiece (j) is then turned up to fit over the end of the case. [illustration: _fig. ._ the magnet and receiver head] the spool (d) is made of hard rubber, and is wound with no. silk-covered wire, the windings to be well insulated from each other. the two ends of the wire are brought out, and threaded through holes (k) drilled longitudinally through the walls of the case, and affixed to the end by means of screws (l), so that the two wires may be brought together and connected with a duplex wire (m). as the screw (c), which holds the core in place, has its head hidden within a recess, which can be closed up by wax, the two terminals of the wires are well separated so that short-circuiting cannot take place. telephone connections.--the simplest form of telephone connection is shown in fig. . this has merely the two telephones (a and b), with a single battery (c) to supply electricity for both. one line wire (d) connects the two telephones directly, while the other line (e) has the battery in its circuit. [illustration: _fig. ._ simple telephone connection] complete installation.--to install a more complete system requires, at each end, a switch, a battery and an electro-magneto bell. you may use, for this purpose, a bell, made as shown in the chapter on bells. fig. shows such a circuit. we now dispense with one of the line wires, because it has been found that the ground between the two stations serves as a conductor, so that only one line wire (a) is necessary to connect directly with the telephones of the two stations. the telephones (b, b', respectively) have wires (c, c') running to the pivots of double-throw switches (d, d'), one terminal of the switches having wires (e, e'), which go to electric bells (f, f'), and from the bells are other wires (g, g'), which go to the ground. the ground wires also have wires (h, h'), which go to the other terminals of the switch (d, d'). the double-throw switch (d, d'), in the two stations, is thrown over so the current, if any should pass through, will go through the bell to the ground, through the wires (e, g or e', g'). [illustration: _fig. ._ telephone stations in circuit] now, supposing the switch (d'), in station , should be thrown over so it contacts with the wire (h'). it is obvious that the current will then flow from the battery (i') through wires (h', c') and line (a) to station ; then through wire c, switch d, wire e to the bell f, to the ground through wire g. from wire g the current returns through the ground to station , where it flows up wire g' to the battery, thereby completing the circuit. [illustration: _fig. ._ illustrating light contact points] the operator at station , having given the signal, again throws his switch (d') back to the position shown in fig. , and the operator at station throws on his switch (d), so as to ring the bell in station , thereby answering the signal, which means that both switches are again to be thrown over so they contact with the battery wires (h and h'), respectively. when both are thus thrown over, the bells (g, g') are cut out of the circuit, and the batteries are both thrown in, so that the telephones are now ready for talking purposes. microphone.--originally this form of telephone system was generally employed, but it was found that for long distances a more sensitive instrument was necessary. light contact points.--in professor hughes discovered, accidentally, that a light contact point in an electric circuit augmented the sound in a telephone circuit. if, for instance, a light pin, or a nail (a, fig. ) should be used to connect the severed ends of a wire (b), the sounds in the telephone not only would be louder, but they would be more distinct, and the first instrument made practically, to demonstrate this, is shown in fig. . [illustration: _fig. ._ microphone] [illustration: _fig. ._ transmitter] how to make a microphone.--this instrument has simply a base (a) of wood, and near one end is a perpendicular sounding-board (b) of wood, to one side of which is attached, by wax or otherwise, a pair of carbon blocks (c, d). the lower carbon block (c) has a cup-shaped depression in its upper side, and the upper block has a similar depression in its lower side. a carbon pencil (e) is lightly held within these cups, so that the lightest contact of the upper end of the pencil with the carbon block, makes the instrument so sensitive that a fly, walking upon the sounding-board, may be distinctly heard through the telephone which is in the circuit. microphone the father of the transmitter.--this instrument has been greatly modified, and is now used as a transmitter, the latter thereby taking the place of the pin (a), shown in fig. . automatic cut-outs for telephones.--in the operation of the telephone, the great drawback originally was in inducing users of the lines to replace or adjust their instruments carefully. when switches were used, they would forget to throw them back, and all sorts of trouble resulted. it was found necessary to provide an automatic means for throwing in and cutting out an instrument, this being done by hanging the telephone on the hook, so that the act merely of leaving the telephone made it necessary, in replacing the instrument, to cut out the apparatus. before describing the circuiting required for these improvements, we show, in fig. , a section of a transmitter. a cup-shaped case (a) is provided, made of some insulating material, which has a diaphragm (b) secured at its open side. this diaphragm carries the carbon pencil (c) on one side and from the blocks which support the carbon pencil the wires run to binding posts on the case. of course the carbon supporting posts must be insulated from each other, so the current will go through the carbon pencil (c). complete circuiting with transmitter.--in showing the circuiting (fig. ) it will not be possible to illustrate the boxes, or casings, which receive the various instruments. for instance, the hook which carries the telephone or the receiver, is hinged within the transmitter box. the circuiting is all that it is intended to show. [illustration: _fig. ._ complete telephonic circuit] the batteries of the two stations are connected up by a wire (a), unless a ground circuit is used. the other side of each battery has a wire connection (b, b') with one terminal of the transmitter, and the other terminal of the transmitter has a wire (c, c') which goes to the receiver. from the other terminal of the receiver is a wire (d, d') which leads to the upper stop contact (e, e') of the telephone hook. a wire (f, f') from the lower stop contact (g, g') of the hook goes to one terminal of the bell, and from the other terminal of the bell is a wire (h, h') which makes connection with the line wire (a). in order to make a complete circuit between the two stations, a line wire (i) is run from the pivot of the hook in station to the pivot of the hook in station . in the diagram, it is assumed that the receivers are on the hooks, and that both hooks are, therefore, in circuit with the lower contacts (g, g'), so that the transmitter and receiver are both out of circuit with the batteries, and the bell in circuit; but the moment the receiver, for instance, in station is taken off the hook, the latter springs up so that it contacts with the stop (e), thus establishing a circuit through the line wire (i) to the hook of station , and from the hook through line (f') to the bell. from the bell, the line (a) carries the current back to the battery of station (a), thence through the wire (b) to the transmitter wire (c) to receiver and wire (d) to the post (e), thereby completing the circuit. when, at station , the receiver is taken off the hook, and the latter contacts with the post (e'), the transmitter and receiver of both stations are in circuit with each other, but both bells are cut out. chapter xiii electrolysis, water purification, electroplating decomposing liquids.--during the earlier experiments in the field of electricity, after the battery or cell was discovered, it was noted that when a current was formed in the cell, the electrolyte was charged and gases evolved from it. a similar action takes place when a current of electricity passes through a liquid, with the result that the liquid is decomposed--that is, the liquid is broken up into its original compounds. thus, water is composed of two parts, by bulk, of hydrogen and of oxygen, so that if two electrodes are placed in water, and a current is sent through the electrodes in either direction, all the water will finally disappear in the form of hydrogen and oxygen gases. making hydrogen and oxygen.--during this electrical action, the hydrogen is set free at the negative pole and the oxygen at the positive pole. a simple apparatus, which any boy can make, to generate pure oxygen and pure hydrogen, is shown in fig. . it is constructed of a glass or earthen jar (a), preferably square, to which is fitted a wooden top (b), this top being provided with a packing ring (c), so as to make it air-tight. within is a vertical partition (d), the edges of which, below the cap, fit tightly against the inner walls of the jar. this partition extends down into the jar a sufficient distance so it will terminate below the water level. a pipe is fitted through the top on each side of the partition, and each pipe has a valve. an electrode, of any convenient metal, is secured at its upper end to the top of the cap, on each side of the partition. these electrodes extend down to the bottom of the jar, and an electric wire connects with each of them at the top. [illustration: _fig. ._ device for making hydrogen and oxygen] if a current of electricity is passed through the wires and the electrodes, in the direction shown by the darts, hydrogen will form at the negative pole, and oxygen at the positive pole. these gases will escape upwardly, so that they will be trapped in their respective compartments, and may be drawn off by means of the pipes. purifying water.--advantage is taken of this electrolytic action, to purify water. oxygen is the most wonderful chemical in nature. it is called the acid-maker of the universe. the name is derived from two words, _oxy_ and _gen_; one denoting oxydation, and the other that it generates. in other words, it is the _generator of oxides_. it is the element which, when united with any other element, produces an acid, an alkali or a neutral compound. rust.--for instance, iron is largely composed of ferric acid. when oxygen, in a free or gaseous state, comes into contact with iron, it produces ferrous oxide, which is recognized as rust. oxygen as a purifier.--but oxygen is also a purifier. all low forms of animal life, like bacteria or germs in water, succumb to free oxygen. by _free oxygen_ is meant oxygen in the form of gas. composition of water.--now, water, in which harmful germs live, is one-third oxygen. nevertheless, the germs thrive in water, because the oxygen is in a compound state, and, therefore, not an active agent. but if oxygen, in the form of gas, can be forced through water, it will attack the germs, and destroy them. common air not a good purifier.--water may be purified, to a certain extent, by forcing common air through it, and the foulest water, if run over rocks, will be purified, in a measure, because air is intermingled with it. but common air is composed of four-fifths nitrogen, and only one-fifth oxygen, and, as nitrogen is the staple article of food for bacteria, the purifying method by air is not effectual. pure oxygen.--when, however, oxygen is generated from water, by means of electrolysis, it is pure; hence is more active and is not tainted by a life-giving substance for germs, such as nitrogen. the mechanism usually employed for purifying water is shown in fig. . a water purifier.--the case (a, fig. ) may be made of metal or of an insulating material. if made of metal it must be insulated within with slate, glass, marble or hard rubber, as shown at b. the case is provided with exterior flanges (c, d), with upper and lower ends, and it is mounted upon a base plate (e) and affixed thereto by bolts. the upper end has a conically-formed cap (f) bolted to the flanges (c), and this has an outlet to which a pipe (g) is attached. the water inlet pipe (h) passes through the lower end of the case (a). the electrodes (i, j) are secured, vertically, within the case, separated from each other equidistant, each alternate electrode being connected up with one wire (k), and the alternate electrodes with a wire (l). [illustration: _fig. ._ electric water purifier] when the water passes upwardly, the decomposed or gaseous oxygen percolates through the water and thus attacks the germs and destroys them. the use of hydrogen in purification.--on the other hand, the hydrogen also plays an important part in purifying the water. this depends upon the material of which the electrodes are made. aluminum is by far the best material, as it is one of nature's most active purifiers. all clay contains aluminum, in what is known as the sulphate form, and water passing through the clay of the earth thereby becomes purified, because of this element. aluminum electrodes.--when this material is used as the electrodes in water, hydrate of aluminum is formed, or a compound of hydrogen and oxygen with aluminum. the product of decomposition is a flocculent matter which moves upwardly through the water, giving it a milky appearance. this substance is like gelatine, so that it entangles or enmeshes the germ life and prevents it from passing through a filter. if no filter is used, this flocculent matter, as soon as it has given off the gases, will settle to the bottom and carry with it all decomposed matter, such as germs and other organic matter attacked by the oxygen, which has become entangled in the aluminum hydrate. electric hand purifier.--an interesting and serviceable little purifier may be made by any boy with the simplest tools, by cutting out three pieces of sheet aluminum. hard rolled is best for the purpose. it is better to have one of the sheets (a), the middle one, thicker than the two outer plates (b). [illustration: _fig. ._ portable electric purifier] let each sheet be - / inches wide and - / inches thick. one-half inch from the upper ends of the two outside plates (b, b) bore bolt holes (c), each of these holes being a quarter of an inch from the edge of the plate. the inside plate (a) has two large holes (d) corresponding with the small holes (c) in the outside plates. at the upper end of this plate form a wing (e), / inch wide and / inch long, provided with a small hole for a bolt. next cut out two hard-rubber blocks (f), each - / inches long, inch wide and / inch thick, and then bore a hole (g) through each, corresponding with the small holes (c) in the plates (b). the machine is now ready to be assembled. if the inner plate is / inch thick and the outer plates each / inch thick, use two small eighth-inch bolts - / inches long, and clamp together the three plates with these bolts. one of the bolts may be used to attach thereto one of the electric wires (h), and the other wire (i) is attached by a bolt to the wing (e). [illustration: _figs. - ._ details of portable purifier] such a device will answer for a -volt circuit, in ordinary water. now fill a glass nearly full of water, and stand the purifier in the glass. within a few minutes the action of electrolysis will be apparent by the formation of numerous bubbles on the plates, followed by the decomposition of the organic matter in the water. at first the flocculent decomposed matter will rise to the surface of the water, but before many minutes it will settle to the bottom of the glass and leave clear water above. purification and separation of metals.--this electrolytic action is utilized in metallurgy for the purpose of producing pure metals, but it is more largely used to separate copper from its base. in order to utilize a current for this purpose, a high ampere flow and low voltage are required. the sheets of copper, containing all of its impurities, are placed within a tank, parallel with a thin copper sheet. the impure sheet is connected with the positive pole of an electroplating dynamo, and the thin sheet of copper is connected with the negative pole. the electrolyte in the tank is a solution of sulphate of copper. the action of the current will cause the pure copper in the impure sheet to disintegrate and it is then carried over and deposited upon the thin sheet, this action continuing until the impure sheet is entirely eaten away. all the impurities which were in the sheet fall to the bottom of the tank. other metals are treated in the same way, and this treatment has a very wide range of usefulness. electroplating.--the next feature to be considered in electrolysis is a most interesting and useful one, because a cheap or inferior metal may be coated by a more expensive metal. silver and nickel plating are brought about by this action of a current passing through metals, which are immersed in an electrolyte. plating iron with copper.--we have room in this chapter for only one concrete example of this work, which, with suitable modifications, is an example of the art as practiced commercially. iron, to a considerable extent, is now being coated with copper to preserve it from rust. to carry out this work, however, an electroplating dynamo, of large amperage, is required, the amperage, of course, depending upon the surface to be treated at one time. the pressure should not exceed volts. the iron surface to be treated should first be thoroughly cleansed, and then immediately put into a tank containing a cyanide of copper solution. two forms of copper solution are used, namely, the cyanide, which is a salt solution of copper, and the sulphate, which is an acid solution of copper. cyanide is first used because it does not attack the iron, as would be the case if the sulphate solution should first come into contact with the iron. a sheet of copper, termed the anode, is then placed within the tank, parallel with the surface to be plated, known as the cathode, and so mounted that it may be adjusted to or from the iron surface, or cathode. a direct current of electricity is then caused to flow through the copper plate and into the iron plate or surface, and the plating proceeded with until the iron surface has a thin film of copper deposited thereon. this is a slow process with the cyanide solution, so it is discontinued as soon as possible, after the iron surface has been completely covered with copper. this copper surface is thoroughly cleaned off to remove therefrom the saline or alkaline solution, and it is then immersed within a bath, containing a solution of sulphate of copper. the current is then thrown on and allowed so to remain until it has deposited the proper thickness of copper. direction of current.--if a copper and an iron plate are put into a copper solution and connected up in circuit with each other, a primary battery is thereby formed, which will generate electricity. in this case, the iron will be positive and the copper negative, so that the current within such a cell would flow from the iron (in this instance, the anode) to the negative, or cathode. the action of electroplating reverses this process and causes the current to flow from the copper to the iron (in this instance, the cathode). chapter xiv electric heating, thermo electricity generating heat in a wire.--when a current of electricity passes through a conductor, like a wire, more or less heat is developed in the conductor. this heat may be so small that it cannot be measured, but it is, nevertheless, present in a greater or less degree. conductors offer a resistance to the passage of a current, just the same as water finds a resistance in pipes through which it passes. this resistance is measured in ohms, as explained in a preceding chapter, and it is this resistance which is utilized for electric heating. resistance of substances.--silver offers less resistance to the passage of a current than any other metal, the next in order is copper, while iron is, comparatively, a poor conductor. the following is a partial list of metals, showing their relative conductivity: silver . copper . to . gold . to . aluminum . zinc . nickel . iron . tin . lead . german silver . to from this table it will be seen that, for instance, iron offers six and a half times the resistance of silver, and that german silver has fifteen times the resistance of silver. this table is made up of strands of the different metals of the same diameters and lengths, so as to obtain their relative values. sizes of conductors.--another thing, however, must be understood. if two conductors of the same metal, having different diameters, receive the same current of electricity, the small conductor will offer a greater resistance than the large conductor, hence will generate more heat. this can be offset by increasing the diameter of the conductor. the metal used is, therefore, of importance, on account of the cost involved. comparison of metals.--a conductor of aluminum, say, feet long and of the same weight as copper, has a diameter two and a quarter times greater than copper; but as the resistance of aluminum is per cent. more than that of silver, it will be seen that, weight for weight, copper is the cheaper, particularly as aluminum costs fully three times as much as copper. [illustration: _fig. ._ simple electric heater] the table shows that german silver has the highest resistance. of course, there are other metals, like antimony, platinum and the like, which have still higher resistance. german silver, however, is most commonly used, although there are various alloys of metal made which have high resistance and are cheaper. the principle of all electric heaters is the same, namely, the resistance of a conductor to the passage of a current, and an illustration of a water heater will show the elementary principles in all of these devices. a simple electric heater.--in fig. the illustration shows a cup or holder (a) for the wire, made of hard rubber. this may be of such diameter as to fit upon and form the cover for a glass (b). the rubber should be / inch thick. two holes are bored through the rubber cup, and through them are screwed two round-headed screws (c, d), each screw being - / inches long, so they will project an inch below the cap. each screw should have a small hole in its lower end to receive a pin (e) which will prevent the resistance wire from slipping off. the resistance wire (f) is coiled for a suitable length, dependent upon the current used, one end being fastened by wrapping it around the screw (c). the other end of the wire is then brought upwardly through the interior of the coil and secured in like manner to the other screw (d). caution must be used to prevent the different coils or turns from touching each other. when completed, the coil may be immersed in water, the current turned on, and left so until the water is sufficiently heated. [illustration: _figs. - ._ resistance device] how to arrange for quantity of current used.--it is difficult to determine just the proper length the coil should be, or the sizes of the wire, unless you know what kind of current you have. you may, however, rig up your own apparatus for the purpose of making it fit your heater, by preparing a base of wood (a) inches long, inches wide and inch thick. on this mount four electric lamp sockets (b). then connect the inlet wire (c) by means of short pieces of wire (d) with all the sockets on one side. the outlet wire (e) should then be connected up with the other sides of the sockets by the short wires (f). if, now, we have one -candlepower lamp in one of the sockets, there is a half ampere going through the wires (c, f). if there are two lamps on the board you will have ampere, and so on. by this means you may readily determine how much current you are using and it will also afford you a means of finding out whether you have too much or too little wire in your coil to do the work. [illustration: _fig. ._ plan view of electric iron] an electric iron.--an electric iron is made in the same way. the upper side of a flatiron has a circular or oval depression (a) cast therein, and a spool of slate (b) is made so it will fit into the depression and the high resistance wire (c) is wound around this spool, and insulating material, such as asbestos, must be used to pack around it. centrally, the slate spool has an upwardly projecting circular extension (d) which passes through the cap or cover (e) of the iron. the wires of the resistance coil are then brought through this circular extension and are connected up with the source of electrical supply. wires are now sold for this purpose, which are adapted to withstand an intense heat. [illustration: _fig. ._ section of electric iron] the foregoing example of the use of the current, through resistance wires, has a very wide application, and any boy, with these examples before him, can readily make these devices. thermo electricity.--it has long been the dream of scientists to convert heat directly into electricity. the present practice is to use a boiler to generate steam, an engine to provide the motion, and a dynamo to convert that motion into electricity. the result is that there is loss in the process of converting the fuel heat into steam; loss to change the steam into motion, and loss to make electricity out of the motion of the engine. by using water-power there is less actual loss; but water-power is not available everywhere. converting heat directly into electricity.--heat may be converted directly into electricity without using a boiler, an engine or a dynamo, but it has not been successful from a commercial standpoint. it is interesting, however, to know and understand the subject, and for that reason it is explained herein. metals; electric positive-negative.--to understand the principle, it may be stated that all metals are electrically positive-negative to each other. you will remember that it has hereinbefore been stated that if, for instance, iron and copper are put into an acid solution, a current will be created or generated thereby. so with zinc and copper, the usual primary battery elements. in all such cases an electrolyte is used. thermo-electricity dispenses with the electrolyte, and nothing is used but the metallic elements and heat. the word thermo means heat. if, now, we can select two strips of different metals, and place them as far apart as possible--that is, in their positive-negative relations with each other, and unite the end of one with one end of other by means of a rivet, and then heat the riveted ends, a current will be generated in the strips. if, for instance, we use an iron in conjunction with a copper strip, the current will flow from the copper to the iron, because copper is positive to iron, and iron negative to copper. it is from this that the term positive-negative is taken. the two metals most available, which are thus farthest apart in the scale of positive-negative relation, are bismuth and antimony. [illustration: _fig. ._ thermo-electric couple] in fig. is shown a thermo-electric couple (a, b) riveted together, with thin outer ends connected by means of a wire (c) to form a circuit. a galvanometer (d) or other current-testing means is placed in this circuit. a lamp is placed below the joined ends. thermo-electric couples.--any number of these couples may be put together and joined at each end to a common wire and a fairly large flow of current obtained thereby. one thing must be observed: a current will be generated only so long as there exists a difference in temperature between the inner and the outer ends of the bars (a, b). this may be accomplished by water, or any other cooling means which may suggest itself. chapter xv alternating currents, choking coils, transformers, converters and rectifiers direct current.--when a current of electricity is generated by a cell, it is assumed to move along the wire in one direction, in a steady, continuous flow, and is called a _direct_ current. this direct current is a natural one if generated by a cell. alternating current.--on the other hand, the natural current generated by a dynamo is alternating in its character--that is, it is not a direct, steady flow in one direction, but, instead, it flows for an instant in one direction, then in the other direction, and so on. a direct-current dynamo such as we have shown in chapter iv, is much easier to explain, hence it is illustrated to show the third method used in generating an electric current. it is a difficult matter to explain the principle and operation of alternating current machines, without becoming, in a measure, too technical for the purposes of this book, but it is important to know the fundamentals involved, so that the operation and uses of certain apparatus, like the choking coil, transformers, rectifiers and converters, may be explained. the magnetic field.--it has been stated that when a wire passes through the magnetic field of a magnet, so as to cut the lines of force flowing out from the end of a magnet, the wire will receive a charge of electricity. [illustration: _fig. ._ cutting a magnetic field] to explain this, study fig. , in which is a bar magnet (a). if we take a metal wire (b) and bend it in the form of a loop, as shown, and mount the ends on journal-bearing blocks, the wire may be rotated so that the loop will pass through the magnetic field. when this takes place, the wire receives a charge of electricity, which moves, say, in the direction of the darts, and will make a complete circuit if the ends of the looped wire are joined, as shown by the conductor (d). action of the magnetized wire.--you will remember, also that we have pointed out how, when a current passes over a wire, it has a magnetic field extending out around it at all points, so that while it is passing through the magnetic field of the magnet (a), it becomes, in a measure, a magnet of its own and tries to set up in business for itself as a generator of electricity. but when the loop leaves the magnetic field, the magnetic or electrical impulse in the wire also leaves it. the movement of a current in a charged wire.--your attention is directed, also, to another statement, heretofore made, namely, that when a current from a charged wire passes by induction to a wire across space, so as to charge it with an electric current, it moves along the charged wire in a direction opposite to that of the current in the charging wire. now, the darts show the direction in which the current moves while it is approaching and passing through the magnetic field. but the moment the loop is about to pass out of the magnetic field, the current in the loop surges back in the opposite direction, and when the loop has made a revolution and is again entering the magnetic field, it must again change the direction of flow in the current, and thus produce alternations in the flow thereof. let us illustrate this by showing the four positions of the revolving loop. in fig. the loop (b) is in the middle of the magnetic field, moving upwardly in the direction of the curved dart (a), and while in that position the voltage, or the electrical impulse, is the most intense. the current used flows in the direction of the darts (c) or to the left. in fig. , the loop (a) has gone beyond the influence of the magnetic field, and now the current in the loop tries to return, or reverse itself, as shown by the dart (d). it is a reaction that causes the current to die out, so that when the loop has reached the point farthest from the magnet, as shown in fig. , there is no current in the loop, or, if there is any, it moves faintly in the direction of the dart (e). [illustration: _figs. - ._ illustrating alternations] current reversing itself.--when the loop reaches its lowest point (fig. ) it again comes within the magnetic field and the current commences to flow back to its original direction, as shown by darts (c). self-induction.--this tendency of a current to reverse itself, under the conditions cited, is called self-induction, or inductance, and it would be well to keep this in mind in pursuing the study of alternating currents. you will see from the foregoing, that the alternations, or the change of direction of the current, depends upon the speed of rotation of the loop past the end of the magnet. [illustration: _figs. - ._ form for increasing alternations] instead, therefore, of using a single loop, we may make four loops (fig. ), which at the same speed as we had in the case of the single loop, will give four alternations, instead of one, and still further, to increase the periods of alternation, we may use the four loops and two magnets, as in fig. . by having a sufficient number of loops and of magnets, there may be , , , , or such alternating periods in each second. time, therefore, is an element in the operation of alternating currents. let us now illustrate the manner of connecting up and building the dynamo, so as to derive the current from it. in fig. , the loop (a) shows, for convenience, a pair of bearings (b). a contact finger (c) rests on each, and to these the circuit wire (d) is attached. do not confuse these contact fingers with the commutator brushes, shown in the direct-current motor, as they are there merely for the purpose of making contact between the revolving loop (a) and stationary wire (d). [illustration: _fig. ._ connection of alternating dynamo armature] brushes in a direct-current dynamo.--the object of the brushes in the direct-current dynamo, in connection with a commutator, is to convert this _inductance_ of the wire, or this effort to reverse itself into a current which will go in one direction all the time, and not in both directions alternately. to explain this more fully attention is directed to figs. and . let a represent the armature, with a pair of grooves (b) for the wires. the commutator is made of a split tube, the parts so divided being insulated from each other, and in fig. , the upper one, we shall call and designate the positive (+) and the lower one the negative (-). the armature wire (c) has one end attached to the positive commutator terminal and the other end of this wire is attached to the negative terminal. [illustration: _fig. ._ direct current dynamo] one brush (d) contacts with the positive terminal of the commutator and the other brush (e) with the negative terminal. let us assume that the current impulse imparted to the wire (c) is in the direction of the dart (f, fig. ). the current will then flow through the positive (+) terminal of the commutator to the brush (d), and from the brush (d) through the wire (g) to the brush (e), which contacts with the negative (-) terminal of the commutator. this will continue to be the case, while the wire (c) is passing the magnetic field, and while the brush (d) is in contact with the positive (+) terminal. but when the armature makes a half turn, or when it reaches that point where the brush (d) contacts with the negative (-) terminal, and the brush (e) contacts with the positive (+) terminal, a change in the direction of the current through the wire (g) takes place, unless something has happened to change it before it has reached the brushes (d, e). [illustration: _fig. ._ circuit wires in direct current dynamo] now, this change is just exactly what has happened in the wire (c), as we have explained. the current attempts to reverse itself and start out on business of its own, so to speak, with the result that when the brushes (d and e) contact with the negative and positive terminals, respectively, the surging current in the wire (c) is going in the direction of the dart (h)--that is, while, in fig. , the current flows from the wire (c) into the positive terminal, and out of the negative terminal into the wire (c), the conditions are exactly reversed in fig. . here the current in wire c flows _into_ the negative (-) terminal, and _from_ the positive (+) terminal into the wire c, so that in either case the current will flow out of the brush d and into the brush e, through the external circuit (g). it will be seen, therefore, that in the direct-current motor, advantage is taken of the surging, or back-and-forth movement, of the current to pass it along in one direction, whereas in the alternating current no such change in direction is attempted. alternating positive and negative poles.--the alternating current, owing to this surging movement, makes the poles alternately positive and negative. to express this more clearly, supposing we take a line (a, fig. ), which is called the zero line, or line of no electricity. the current may be represented by the zigzag line (b). the lines (b) above zero (a) may be designated as positive, and those below the line as negative. the polarity reverses at the line a, goes up to d, which is the maximum intensity or voltage above zero, and, when the current falls and crosses the line a, it goes in the opposite direction to e, which is its maximum voltage in the other direction. in point of time, if it takes one second for the current to go from c to f, on the down line, then it takes only a half second to go from c to g, so that the line a represents the time, and the line h the intensity, a complete cycle being formed from c, d, f, then through f, e, c, and so on. [illustration: _fig. ._ alternating polarity lines] how an alternating dynamo is made.--it is now necessary to apply these principles in the construction of an alternating-current machine. fig. is a diagram representing the various elements, and the circuiting. [illustration: _fig. ._ alternating current dynamo] let a represent the ring or frame containing the inwardly projecting field magnet cores (b). c is the shaft on which the armature revolves, and this carries the wheel (d), which has as many radially disposed magnet cores (e) as there are of the field magnet cores (b). the shaft (c) also carries two pulleys with rings thereon. one of these rings (f) is for one end of the armature winding, and the other ring (g) for the other end of the armature wire. the windings.--the winding is as follows: one wire, as at h, is first coiled around one magnet core, the turnings being to the right. the outlet terminal of this wire is then carried to the next magnet core and wound around that, in the opposite direction, and so on, so that the terminal of the wire is brought out, as at i, all of these wires being connected to binding posts (j, j'), to which, also, the working circuits are attached. the armature wires.--the armature wires, in like manner, run from the ring (g) to one armature core, being wound from right to left, then to the next core, which is wound to the right, afterward to the next core, which is wound to the left, and so on, the final end of the wire being connected up with the other ring (f). the north (n) and the south (s) poles are indicated in the diagram. choking coil.--the self-induction in a current of this kind is utilized in transmitting electricity to great distances. wires offer resistance, or they impede the flow of a current, as hereinbefore stated, so that it is not economical to transmit a direct current over long distances. this can be done more efficiently by means of the alternating current, which is subject to far less loss than is the case with the direct current. it affords a means whereby the flow of a current may be checked or reduced without depending upon the resistance offered by the wire over which it is transmitted. this is done by means of what is called a choking coil. it is merely a coil of wire, wound upon an iron core, and the current to be choked passes through the coil. to illustrate this, let us take an arc lamp designed to use a -volt current. if a current is supplied to it carrying volts, it is obvious that there are volts more than are needed. we must take care of this excess of volts without losing it, as would happen were we to locate a resistance of some kind in the circuit. this result we accomplish by the introduction of the choking coil, which has the effect of absorbing the excessive volts, the action being due to its quality of self-induction, referred to in the foregoing. [illustration: _fig. ._ choking coil] in fig. , a is the choking coil and b an arc lamp, connected up, in series, with the choking coil. the transformer.--it is more economical to transmit , volts a long distance than , volts, because the lower the pressure, or the voltage, the larger must be the conductor to avoid loss. it is for this reason that volts, or more, are used on electric railways. for electric light purposes, where the current goes into dwellings, even this is too high, so a transformer is used to take a high-voltage current from the main line and transform it into a low voltage. this is done by means of two distinct coils of wire, wound upon an iron core. [illustration: _fig. ._ a transformer] in fig. the core is o-shaped, so that a primary winding (a), from the electrical source, can be wound upon one limb, and the secondary winding (b) wound around the other limb. the wires, to supply the lamps, run from the secondary coil. there is no electrical connection between the two coils, but the action from the primary to the secondary coil is solely by induction. when a current passes through the primary coil, the surging movement, heretofore explained, is transmitted to the iron core, and the iron core, in turn, transmits this electrical energy to the secondary coil. how the voltage is determined.--the voltage produced by the secondary coil will depend upon several things, namely, the strength of the magnetism transmitted to it; the rapidity, or periodicity of the current, and the number of turns of wire around the coil. the voltage is dependent upon the length of the winding. but the voltage may also be increased, as well as decreased. if the primary has, we will say, turns of wire, and has volts, and the secondary has turns of wire, the secondary will give forth only one-half as much as the primary, or volts. if, on the other hand, volts would be required, the secondary should have turns in the winding. voltage and amperage in transformers.--it must not be understood that, by increasing the voltage in this way, we are getting that much more electricity. if the primary coil, with turns, produces a current of volts and amperes, which would be � = , watts, and the secondary coil has turns, we shall have volts and amperes: (v.) � (a.) = , watts. or, if, on the other hand, our secondary winding is composed of turns, we shall have volts and amperes, (volts) � (amperes) also gives , watts. necessarily, there will be some loss, but the foregoing is offered as the theoretical basis of calculation. chapter xvi electric lighting the most important step in the electric field, after the dynamo had been brought to a fairly workable condition, was its utilization to make light. it was long known prior to the discovery of practical electric dynamos, that the electric current would produce an intense heat. ordinary fuels under certain favorable conditions will produce a temperature of , degrees of heat; but by means of the electric arc, as high as six, eight and ten thousand degrees are available. the fact that when a conductor, in an electric current, is severed, a spark will follow the drawing part of the broken ends, led many scientists to believe, even before the dynamo was in a practical shape, that electricity, sooner or later, would be employed as the great lighting agent. when the dynamo finally reached a stage in development where its operation could be depended on, and was made reversible, the first active steps were taken to not only produce, but to maintain an arc between two electrodes. it would be difficult and tedious to follow out the first experiments in detail, and it might, also, be useless, as information, in view of the present knowledge of the science. a few steps in the course of the development are, however, necessary to a complete understanding of the subject. reference has been made in a previous chapter to what is called the _electric arc_, produced by slightly separated conductors, across which the electric current jumps, producing the brilliantly lighted area. this light is produced by the combustion of the carbon of which the electrodes are composed. thus, the illumination is the result of directly burning a fuel. the current, in passing from one electrode to the other, through the gap, produces such an intense heat that the fuel through which the current passes is consumed. carbon in a comparatively pure state is difficult to ignite, owing to its great resistance to heat. at about , degrees it will fuse, and pass into a vapor which causes the intense illumination. the earliest form of electric lighting was by means of the arc, in which the light is maintained so long as the electrodes were kept a certain distance apart. to do this requires delicate mechanism, for the reason that when contact is made, and the current flows through the two electrodes, which are connected up directly with the coils of a magnet, the cores, or armatures, will be magnetized. the result is that the electrode, connected with the armature of the magnet, is drawn away from the other electrode, and the arc is formed, between the separated ends. as the current also passes through a resistance coil, the moment the ends of the electrodes are separated too great a distance, the resistance prevents a flow of the normal amount of current, and the armature is compelled to reduce its pull. the effect is to cause the two electrodes to again approach each other, and in doing so the arc becomes brighter. it will be seen, therefore, that there is a constant fight between the resistance coil and the magnet, the combined action of the two being such, that, if properly arranged, and with powers in correct relation to each other, the light may be maintained without undue flickering. such devices are now universally used, and they afford a steady and reliable means of illumination. many improvements are made in this direction, as well as in the ingredients of the electrodes. a very novel device for assuring a perfect separation at all times between the electrodes, is by means of a pair of parallel carbons, held apart by a non-conductor such as clay, or some mixture of earth, a form of which is shown in fig. . the drawing shows two electrodes, separated by a non-conducting material, which is of such a character that it will break down and crumble away, as the ends of the electrodes burn away. [illustration: _fig. . parallel carbons._] this device is admirable where the alternating current is used, because the current moves back and forth, and the two electrodes are thus burned away at the same rate of speed. in the direct or continuous current the movement is in one direction only, and as a result the positive electrode is eaten away twice as fast as the negative. this is the arc form of lamp universally used for lighting large spaces or areas, such as streets, railway stations, and the like. it is important also as the means for utilizing searchlight illumination, and frequently for locomotive headlights. arc lights are produced by what is called the _series current_. this means that the lamps are all connected in a single line. this is illustrated by reference to fig. , in which a represents the wire from the dynamo, and b, c the two electrodes, showing the current passing through from one lamp to the next. [illustration: _fig. . arc-lighting circuit._] a high voltage is necessary in order to cause the current to leap across the gap made by the separation of the electrodes. the incandescent system.--this method is entirely different from the arc system. it has been stated that certain metals conduct electricity with greater facility than others, and some have higher resistance than others. if a certain amount of electricity is forced through some metals, they will become heated. this is true, also, if metals, which, ordinarily, will conduct a current freely, are made up into such small conductors that it is difficult for the current to pass. [illustration: _fig . interrupted conductor._] in the arc method high voltage is essential; in the incandescent plan, current is the important consideration. in the arc, the light is produced by virtue of the break in the line of the conductor; in the incandescent, the system is closed at all times. supposing we have a wire a, a quarter of an inch in diameter, carrying a current of, say, amperes, and at any point in the circuit the wire is made very small, as shown at b, in fig. , it is obvious that the small wire would not be large enough to carry the current. the result would be that the small connection b would heat up, and, finally, be fused. while the large part of the wire would carry amperes, the small wire could not possibly carry more than, say, amperes. now these little wires are the filaments in an electric bulb, and originally the attempt was made to have them so connected up that they could be illuminated by a single wire, as with the arc system above explained, one following the other as shown in fig. . [illustration: _fig. . incandescent circuit._] it was discovered, however, that the addition of each successive lamp, so wired, would not give light in proportion to the addition, but at only about one-fourth the illumination, and such a course would, therefore, make electric lighting enormously expensive. this knowledge resulted in an entirely new system of wiring up the lamps in a circuit. this is explained in fig. . in this figure a represents the dynamo, b, b the brushes, c, d the two line wires, e the lamps, and f the short-circuiting wires between the two main conductors c, d. it will be observed that the wires c, d are larger than the cross wires f. the object is to show that the main wires might carry a very heavy amperage, while the small cross wires f require only a few amperes. this is called the _multiple_ circuit, and it is obvious that the entire amperage produced by the dynamo will not be required to pass through each lamp, but, on the other hand, each lamp takes only enough necessary to render the filament incandescent. this invention at once solved the problem of the incandescent system and was called the subdivision of the electric light. by this means the cost was materially reduced, and the wiring up and installation of lights materially simplified. but the divisibility of the light did not, by any means, solve the great problem that has occupied the attention of electricians and experimenters ever since. the great question was and is to preserve the little filament which is heated to incandescence, and from which we get the light. the effort of the current to pass through the small filament meets with such a great resistance that the substance is heated up. if it is made of metal there is a point at which it will fuse, and thus the lamp is destroyed. it was found that carbon, properly treated, would heat to a brilliant white heat without fusing, or melting, so that this material was employed. but now followed another difficulty. as this intense heat consumed the particles of carbon, owing to the presence of oxygen, means were sought to exclude the air. this was finally accomplished by making a bulb of glass, from which the air was exhausted, and as such a globe had no air to support combustion, the filaments were finally made so that they would last a long time before being finally disintegrated. the quest now is, and has been, to find some material of a purely metallic character, which will have a very high fusing point, and which will, therefore, dispense with the cost of the exhausted bulb. some metals, as for instance, osmium, tantalum, thorium, and others, have been used, and others, also, with great success, so that the march of improvements is now going forward with rapid strides. vapor lamps.--one of the directions in which considerable energy has been directed in the past, was to produce light from vapors. the cooper hewitt mercury vapor lamp is a tube filled with the vapor of mercury, and a current is sent through the vapor which produces a greenish light, and owing to that peculiar color, has not met with much success. it is merely cited to show that there are other directions than the use of metallic conductors and filaments which will produce light, and the day is no doubt close at hand when we may expect some important developments in the production of light by means of the hertzian waves. directions for improvements.--electricity, however, is not a cheap method of illumination. the enormous heat developed is largely wasted. the quest of the inventor is to find a means whereby light can be produced without the generation of the immense heat necessary. man has not yet found a means whereby he can make a heat without increasing the temperature, as nature does it in the glow worm, or in the firefly. a certain electric energy will produce both light and heat, but it is found that much more of this energy is used in the heat than in the light. what wonderful possibilities are in store for the inventor who can make a heatless light! it is a direction for the exercise of ingenuity that will well repay any efforts. _curious superstitions concerning electricity_ electricity, as exhibited in light, has been the great marvel of all times. the word electricity itself comes from the thunderbolt of the ancient god zeus, which is known to be synonymous with the thunderbolt and the lightning. magnetism, which we know to be only another form of electricity, was not regarded the same as electricity by the ancients. iron which had the property to attract, was first found near the town of magnesia, in lydia, and for that reason was called magnetism. later on, a glimmer of the truth seemed to dawn on the early scientists, when they saw the resemblance between the actions of the amber and the loadstone, as both attracted particles. and here another curious thing resulted. amber will attract particles other than metals. the magnet did not; and from this imperfect observation and understanding, grew a belief that electricity, or magnetism would attract all substances, even human flesh, and many devices were made from magnets, and used as cures for the gout, and to affect the brain, or to remove pain. even as early as , years before the birth of christ the chinese knew of the properties of the magnet, and also discovered that a bar of the permanent magnet would arrange itself north and south, like the mariners' compass. there is no evidence, however, that it was used as a mariner's compass until centuries afterwards. but the matter connected with light, as an electrical development, which interests us, is its manifestations to the ancients in the form of lightning. the electricity of the earth concentrates itself on the tops of mountains, or in sharp peaks, and accounts for the magnificent electrical displays always found in mountainous regions. some years ago, a noted scientist, dr. siemens, while standing on the top of the great pyramid of cheops, in egypt, during a storm, noted that an electrical discharge flowed from his hand when extended toward the heavens. the current manifested itself in such a manner that the hissing noise was plainly perceptible. the literature of all ages and of all countries shows that this manifestation of electrical discharges was noted, and became the subject of discussions among learned men. all these displays were regarded as the bolts of an angry god, and historians give many accounts of instances where, in his anger, he sent down the lightning to destroy. among the romans jupiter thus hurled forth his wrath; and among many ancient people, even down to the time of charlemagne, any space struck by lightning was considered sacred, and made consecrated ground. from this grew the belief that it was sacrilegious to attempt to imitate the lightning of the sky--that deity would visit dire punishment on any man who attempted to produce an electric light. virgil relates accounts where certain princes attempted to imitate the lightning, and were struck by thunderbolts as punishments. less than a century ago benjamin franklin devised the lightning rod, in order to prevent lightning from striking objects. the literature of that day abounds with instances of protests made, on the part of those who were as superstitions as the people in ancient times, who urged that it was impious to attempt to ward off heaven's lightnings. it was argued that the lightning was one way in which the creator manifested his displeasure, and exercised his power to strike the wicked. when such writers as pliny will gravely set forth an explanation of the causes of lightning, as follows in the paragraph below, we can understand why it inculcated superstitious fears in the people of ancient times. he says: "most men are ignorant of that secret, which, by close observation of the heavens, deep scholars and principal men of learning have found out, namely, that they are the fires of the uppermost planets, which, falling to the earth, are called lightning; but those especially which are seated in the middle, that is about jupiter, perhaps because participating in the excessive cold and moisture from the upper circle of saturn, and the immoderate heat of mars, that is next beneath, by this means he discharges his superfluity, and therefore it is commonly said, 'that jupiter shooteth and darteth lightning.' therefore, like as out of a burning piece of wood a coal flieth forth with a crack, even so from a star is spit out, as it were, and voided forth this celestial fire, carrying with it presages of future things; so that the heavens showeth divine operations, even in these parcels and portions which are rejected and cast away as superfluous." chapter xvii power, and various other electrical manifestations it would be difficult to mention any direction in human activity where electricity does not serve as an agent in some form or manner. man has learned that the creator gave this great power into the hands of man to use, and not to curse. when the dynamo was first developed it did not appear possible that it could generate electricity, and then use that electricity in order to turn the dynamo in the opposite direction. it all seems so very natural to us now, that such a thing should practically follow; but man had to learn this. let us try to make the statement plain by a few simple illustrations. by carefully going over the chapter on the making of the dynamo, it will be evident that the basis of the generation of the current depends on the changing of the direction of the flow of an electric current. look at the simple horse-shoe magnet. if two of them are gradually moved toward each other, so that the north pole of one approaches the north pole of the other, there is a sensible attempt for them to push away from each other. if, however, one of them is turned, so that the north pole of one is opposite the south pole of the other, they will draw together. in this we have the foundation physical action of the dynamo and the motor. when power is applied to an armature, and it moves through a magnetic field, the action is just the same as in the case of the hand drawing the north and the south pole of the two approaching magnets from each other. the influence of the electrical disturbance produced by that act permeated the entire winding of the field and armature, and extended out on the whole line with which the dynamo was connected. in this way a current was established and transmitted, and with proper wires was sent in the form of circuits and distributed so as to do work. but an electric current, without suitable mechanism, is of no value. it must have mechanism to use it, as well as to make it. in the case of light, we have explained how the arc and the incandescent lamps utilize it for that purpose. but now, attempting to get something from it in the way of power, means another piece of mechanism. this is done by the motor, and this motor is simply a converter, or a device for reversing the action of the electricity. attention is called to figs. and . let us assume that the field magnets a, a are the positives, and the magnets b, b the negatives. the revolving armature has also four magnet coils, two of them, c, c, being positive, and the other two, d, d, negative, each of these magnet coils being so connected up that they will reverse the polarities of the magnets. [illustration: _figs. - ._ action of magnets in a dynamo] now in the particular position of the revolving armature, in fig. , the magnets of the armature have just passed the respective poles of the field magnets, and the belt e is compelled to turn the armature past the pole pieces by force in the direction of the arrow f. after the armature magnets have gone to the positions in fig. , the positives a try to draw back the negatives d of the armature, and at the same time the negatives b repel the negatives d, because they are of the same polarities. this repulsion of the negatives a, b continues until the armature poles c, d have slightly passed them, when the polarities of the magnets c, d are changed; so that it will be seen, by reference to fig. , that d is now retreating from b, and c is going away from a--that is, being forced away contrary to their natural attractive influences, and in fig. , when the complete cycle is nearly finished, the positives are again approaching each other and the negatives moving together. [illustration: _figs. - ._ cycle action in dynamo] in this manner, at every point, the sets of magnets are compelled to move against their magnetic pull. this explains the dynamo. now take up the cycle of the motor, and note in fig. that the negative magnets d of the armature are closely approaching the positive and negative magnets, on one side; and the positive magnets c are nearing the positive and negatives on the other side. the positives a, therefore, attract the negatives d, and the negative b exert a pull on the positives c at the same time. the result is that the armature is caused to revolve, as shown by the dart g, in a direction opposite to the dart in fig. . [illustration: _figs. - ._ action of magnets in motor] when the pole pieces of the magnets c, d are about to pass magnets a, b, as shown in fig. , it is necessary to change the polarities of the armature magnets c, d; so that by reference to fig. , it will be seen that they are now indicated as c-, and d+, respectively, and have moved to a point midway between the poles a, b (as in fig. ), where the pull on one side, and the push on the other are again the same, and the last figure shows the cycle nearly completed. the shaft of the motor armature is now the element which turns the mechanism which is to be operated. to convert electrical impulses into power, as thus shown, results in great loss. the first step is to take the steam boiler, which is the first stage in that source which is the most common and universal, and by means of fuel, converting water into steam. the second is to use the pressure of this steam to drive an engine; the third is to drive the dynamo which generates the electrical impulse; and the fourth is the conversion from the dynamo into a motor shaft. loss is met with at each step, and the great problem is to eliminate this waste. [illustration: _figs. - ._ positions of magnets in motor] the great advantage of electrical power is not in utilizing it for consumption at close ranges, but where it is desired to transmit it for long distances. such illustrations may be found in electric railways, and where water power can be obtained as the primal source of energy, the cost is not excessive. it is found, however, that even with the most improved forms of mechanism, in electrical construction, the internal combustion engines are far more economical. _transmission of energy_ one of the great problems has been the transmission of the current to great distances. by using a high voltage it may be sent hundreds of miles, but to use a current of that character in the cars, or shops, or homes, would be exceedingly dangerous. to meet this requirement transformers have been devised, which will take a current of very high voltage, and deliver a current of low tension, and capable of being used anywhere with the ordinary motors. the transformer.--this is an electrical device made up of a core or cores of thin sheet metal, around which is wound sets of insulated wires, one set being designed to receive the high voltage, and the other set to put out the low voltage, as described in a former chapter. these may be made where the original output is a very high voltage, so that they will be stepped down, first from one voltage to a lower, and then from that to the next lower stage. this is called the "step down" transformer, and is now used over the entire world, where large voltages are generated. electric furnaces.--the most important development of electricity in the direction of heat is its use in furnaces. as before stated, an intense heat is capable of being generated by the electric current, so that it becomes the great agent to use for the treatment of refractory material. in furnaces of this kind the electric arc is the mechanical form used to produce the great heat, the only difference being in the size of the apparatus. the electric furnace is simply an immense form of arc light, capable of taking a high voltage, and such an arc is enclosed within a suitable oven of refractory material, which still further conserves the heat. welding by electricity.--the next step is to use the high heat thus capable of being produced, to fuse metals so that they may be welded together. it is a difficult matter to unite two large pieces of metal by the forging method, because the highest heat is required, owing to their bulk, and in addition immense hammers, weighing tons, must be employed. electric welding offers a simple and easy method of accomplishing the result, and in the doing of which it avoids the oxidizing action of the forging heat. instead of heating the pieces to be welded in a forge, as is now done, the ends to be united are simply brought into contact, and the current is sent through the ends until they are in a soft condition, after which the parts are pressed together and united by the simple merging of the plastic condition in which they are reduced by the high electric heat. this form of welding makes the most perfect joint, and requires no hammering, as the mass of the metal flows from one part or end to the other; the unity is a perfect one, and the advantage is that the metals can be kept in a semi-fluid state for a considerable time, thus assuring a perfect admixture of the two parts. with the ordinary form of welding it is necessary to drive the heated parts together without any delay, and at the least cooling must be reheated, or the joint will not be perfect. the smallest kinds of electric heating apparatus are now being made, so that small articles, sheet metal, small rods, and like parts can be united with the greatest facility. chapter xviii x-ray, radium, and the like the camera sees things invisible to the human eye. its most effective work is done with beams which are beyond human perception. the photographer uses the _actinic_ rays. ordinary light is composed of the seven primary colors, of which the lowest in the scale is the red, and the highest to violet. those below the red are called the infra-red, and they are the hertzian waves, or those used in wireless telegraphy. those above the violet are called ultra-violet, and these are employed for x-ray work. the former are produced by the high tension electric apparatus, which we have described in the chapter relating to wireless telegraphy; and the latter, called also the roentgen rays, are generated by the crookes' tube. this is a tube from which all the atmosphere has been extracted so that it is a practical vacuum. within this are placed electrodes so as to divert the action of the electrical discharge in a particular direction, and this light, when discharged, is of such a peculiar character that its discovery made a sensation in the scientific world. the reason for this great wonder was not in the fact that it projected a light, but because of its character. ordinary light, as we see it with the eye, is capable of being reflected, as when we look into a mirror at an angle. the x-ray will not reflect, but instead, pass directly through the glass. then, ordinary light is capable of refraction. this is shown by a ray of light bending as it passes through a glass of water, which is noticed when the light is at an angle to the surface. the x-ray will pass through the water without being changed from a straight line. the foregoing being the case, it was but a simple step to conclude that if it were possible to find a means whereby the human eye could see within the ultra-violet beam, it would be possible to see through opaque substances. from the discovery so important and far reaching it was not long until it was found that if the ultra-violet rays, thus propagated, were transmitted through certain substances, their rates of vibration would be brought down to the speeds which send forth the visible rays, and now the eye is able to see, in a measure at least, what the actinic rays show. this discovery was but the forerunner of a still more important development, namely, the discovery of _radium_. the actual finding of the metal was preceded by the knowledge that certain minerals, and water, as well, possessed the property of radio-activity. radio-activity is a word used to express that quality in metals or other material by means of which obscure rays are emitted, that have the capacity of discharging electrified bodies, and the power to ionize gases, as well as to actually affect photograph plates. certain metals had this property to a remarkable degree, particularly uranium, thorium, polonium, actinium, and others, and in the curies, husband and wife, french chemists, isolated an element, very ductile in its character, which was a white metal, and had a most brilliant luster. pitchblende, the base metal from which this was extracted, was discovered to be highly radio-active, and on making tests of the product taken from it, they were surprised to find that it emitted a form of energy that far exceeded in calculations any computations made on the basis of radio-activity in the metals hitherto examined. but this was not the most remarkable part of the developments. the energy, whatever it was, had the power to change many other substances if brought into close proximity. it darkens the color of diamonds, quartz, mica, and glass. it changes some of the latter in color, some kinds being turned to brown and others into violet or purple tinges. radium has the capacity to redden the skin, and affect the flesh of persons, even at some considerable distance, and it is a most powerful germicide, destroying bacteria, and has been found also to produce some remarkable cures in diseases of a cancerous nature. the remarkable similarity of the rays propagated by this substance, with the x-rays, lead many to believe that they are electrical in their character, and the whole scientific world is now striving to use this substance, as well as the more familiar light waves of the roentgen tube, in the healing of diseases. it is not at all remarkable that this use of it should first be considered, as it has been the history of the electrical developments, from the earliest times, that each successive stage should find advocates who would urge its virtues to heal the sick. it was so when the dynamo was invented, when the high tension current was produced; and electrical therapeutics became a leading theme when transmission by induction became recognized as a scientific fact. it is not many years since the x-rays were discovered, and the first announcement was concerning its wonderful healing powers. this was particularly true in the case of radium, but for some reason, after the first tests, all experimenters were thwarted in their theories, because the science, like all others, required infinite patience and experience. it was discovered, in the case of the x-ray, that it must be used in a modified form, and accordingly, various modifications of the waves were introduced, called the _m_ and the _n_ rays, as well as many others, each having some peculiar qualification. in time, no doubt, the investigators will find the right quality for each disease, and learn how to apply it. thus, electricity, that most alluring thing which, in itself, cannot be seen, and is of such a character that it cannot even be defined in terms which will suit the exact scientific mind, is daily bringing new wonders for our investigation and use. it is, indeed, a study which is so broad that it has no limitations, and a field which never will be exhausted. the end glossary of words used in text of this volume acid. accumulator material is sulphuric acid, diluted with water. active that part of the material in accumulator plates material. which is acted upon by the electric current. accumulator. a cell, generally known as a storage battery, which while it initially receives a charge of electricity, is nevertheless, of such a character, owing to the active material of which it is made, that it accumulates, or, as it were, generates electricity. aerial wire, the wire which, in wireless telegraphy, is carried or conductor. up into the air to connect the antennæ with the receiving and sending apparatus. alarm, burglar. a circulating system in a building, connected up with a bell or other signaling means. alloy. a mixture of two or more metals; as copper and zinc to make brass; nickel and zinc to form german silver. alternating current. a current which goes back and forth in opposite directions, unlike a direct current which flows continuously in one direction over a wire. alternation. the term applied to a change in the direction of an alternating current, the frequency of the alternations ranging up to , or more vibrations per second. amber. a resin, yellow in color, which when rubbed with a cloth, becomes excited and gives forth negative electricity. ammeter. an instrument for measuring the quantity or flow of electricity. ampere. the unit of current; the term in which strength of the current is measured. an ampere is an electromotive force of one volt through a resistance of one ohm. annunciator. a device which indicates or signals a call given from some distant point. anode. the positive terminal in a conducting circuit, like the terminal of the carbon plate in a battery. it is a plate in an electroplating bath from which the current goes over to the cathode or negative plate or terminal. arc. a term employed to designate the gap, or the current which flows across between the conductors, like the space between the two carbons of an arc lamp, which gives the light. armature. a body of iron, or other suitable metal, which is in the magnetic field of a magnet. armature bar. the piece which holds the armature. also one of a series of bars which form the conductors in armature windings. armature coil. the winding around an armature, or around the core of an armature. armature core. the part in a dynamo or motor which revolves, and on which the wire coils are wound. astatic (galvanometer). that which has no magnetic action to direct or divert anything exterior to it. atom. the ultimate particle of an elementary substance. attraction. that property of matter which causes particles to adhere, or cohere, to each other. it is known under a variety of terms, such as gravitation, chemical affinity, electro-magnetism and dynamic attraction. automatic cut-out. a device which acts through the operation of the mechanism with which it is connected. it is usually applied to a device which cuts out a current when it overcharges or overloads the wire. bath. in electroplating, the vessel or tank which holds the electroplating solution. battery. a combination of two or more cells. battery, dry. a primary battery in which the electrolyte is made in a solid form. battery, galvanic. a battery which is better known by the name of the voltaic pile, made up of zinc and copper plates which alternate, and with a layer of acidulated paper between each pair of plates. battery, storage. a battery which accumulates electricity generated by a primary battery or a generator. brush. a term applied to the conducting medium that bears against the cylindrical surface of a commutator. buzzer. an electric call produced by a rapidly moving armature of an electro-magnet. cable. a number of wires or conductors assembled in one strand. candle-power. the amount of light given by the legal-standard candle. this standard is a sperm candle, which burns two grains a minute. capacity. the carrying power of a wire or circuit, without heating. when heated there is an overload, or the _capacity_ of the wire is overtaxed. capacity, storage. the quantity of electricity in a secondary battery when fully charged, usually reckoned in ampere hours. carbon. a material, like coke, ground or crushed, and formed into sticks or plates by molding or compression. it requires a high heat to melt or burn, and is used as electrodes for arc lamps and for battery elements. it has poor conductivity, and for arc lamps is coated with copper to increase its conductivity. cell, electrolytic. a vessel containing an electrolyte for electroplating purposes. charge. the quantity of electricity on the surface of a body or conductor. chemical change. when a current passes through electrodes in a solution, a change takes place which is chemical in its character. adding sulphuric acid to water produces heat. if electrodes of opposite polarity are placed in such an acid solution, a chemical change is produced, which is transformed into electricity. choking coil. an instrument in a circuit which by a form of resistance regulates the flow of the current, or returns part of it to the source of its generation. counter-electromotive force. cells which are inserted in opposition to a battery to reduce high voltage. circuit, astatic. a circuit in an instrument so wound that the earth's magnetism will not affect it. circuit breaker. any instrument in a circuit which cuts out or interrupts the flow of a current. circuit, external. a current flows through a wire or conductor, and also along the air outside of the conductor, the latter being the _external circuit._ circuit indicator. an instrument, like a galvanometer, that shows the direction in which a current is flowing through a conductor. circuit, return. usually the ground return, or the negative wire from a battery. circuit, short. any connection between the mains or parallel lines of a circuit which does not go through the apparatus for which the circuit is intended. coherer. a tube, or other structure, containing normally high resistance particles which form a path or bridge between the opposite terminals of a circuit. coil. a wire, usually insulated, wound around a spool. coil, induction. one of a pair of coils designed to change the voltage of a current of electricity, from a higher to a lower, or from a lower to a higher electro-motive force. coil, resistance. a coil so wound that it will offer a resistance to a steady current, or reduce the flow of electricity. commutator. a cylinder on the end of the armature of a dynamo or motor and provided with a pair of contact plates for each particular coil in the armature, in order to change the direction of the current. compass. an apparatus which indicates the direction or flow of the earth's magnetism. condenser. a device for storing up electro-static charges. conductance. that quality of a conductor to carry a current of electricity, dependent on its shape for the best results. conduction. the transmission of a current through a rod, wire or conductor. conductivity. that quality which has reference to the capacity to conduct a current. conductor. any body, such as a bar, rod, wire, or machine, which will carry a current. connector. a binding post, clamp, screw, or other means to hold the end of a wire, or electric conductor. contact. to unite any parts in an electric circuit. controller. the handle of a switchboard, or other contact making and breaking means in a circuit. converter. an induction coil in an alternating circuit for changing potential difference, such as high alternating voltage into low direct current voltage. convolution. to wind like a clock spring. core. the inner portion of an electro-magnet. the inside part of an armature wound with wire. core, laminated. when the core is built up of a number of separate pieces of the same material, but not insulated from each other. coulomb. the unit of electrical quantity. it is the quantity passed by a current of one ampere intensity in one second of time. couple, electric. two or more electrodes in a liquid to produce an electric force. current, alternating. a natural current produced by the action of electro-magnets. it is a succession of short impulses in opposite directions. current, constant. a current which is uniformly maintained in a steady stream. current, induced. a current produced by electro-dynamic induction. current meter. an apparatus for indicating the strength of a current. an ammeter. current, oscillating. a current which periodically alternates. current, periodic. a periodically varying current strength. current, undulating. a current which has a constant direction, but has a continuously varying strength. decomposition. the separation of a liquid, such as an electrolyte, into its prime elements, either electrically or otherwise. deflection. the change of movement of a magnetic needle out of its regular direction of movement. demagnetization. when a current passes through a coil wound on an iron core, the core becomes magnetized. when the current ceases the core is no longer a magnet. it is then said to be _demagnetized_. it also has reference to the process for making a watch non-magnetic so that it will not be affected when in a magnetic field. density. the quantity of an electric charge in a conductor or substance. depolarization. the removal of magnetism from a permanent magnet, or a horse-shoe magnet, for instance. it is generally accomplished by applying heat. deposition, the act of carrying metal from one pole of a cell to electrolysis. another pole, as in electroplating. detector. mechanism for indicating the presence of a current in a circuit. diaphragm. a plate in a telephone, which, in the receiver, is in the magnetic field of a magnet, and in a transmitter carries the light contact points. dielectric. a non-conductor for an electric current, but through which electro-static induction will take place. for example: glass and rubber are dielectrics. discharge. the current flowing from an accumulator. disintegration. the breaking up of the plate or active material. disruptive. a static discharge passing through a dielectric. duplex wire. a pair of wires usually twisted together and insulated from each other to form the conducting circuit of a system. dynamic electricity. the term applied to a current flowing through a wire. dynamo. an apparatus, consisting of core and field magnets, which, when the core is turned, will develop a current of electricity. earth returns. instead of using two wires to carry a circuit, the earth is used for what is called the _return_ circuit. efficiency. the total electrical energy produced, in which that wasted, as well as that used, is calculated. elasticity. that property of any matter which, after a stress, will cause the substance to return to its original form or condition. electricity has elasticity, which is utilized in condensers, as an instance. electricity, lightning, and, in short, any current or electrical atmospheric. impulse, like wireless telegraphic waves, is called _atmospheric_. electricity, electricity with a low potentiality and large current voltaic. density. electrification. the process of imparting a charge of electricity to any body. electro-chemistry. the study of which treats of electric and chemical forces, such as electric plating, electric fusing, electrolysis, and the like. electrode. the terminals of a battery, or of any circuit; as, for instance, an arc light. electrolyte. any material which is capable of being decomposed by an electric current. electro-magnetism. magnetism which is created by an electric current. electrometer. an instrument for measuring static electricity, differing from a galvanometer, which measures a current in a wire that acts on the magnetic needle of the galvanometer. electro-motive voltage, which is the measure or unit of e. m. f. force. (e. m. f.) electroscope. a device for indicating not only the presence of electricity, but whether it is positive or negative. electro-static surfaces separated by a dielectric for opposite accumulator. charging of the surface. element. in electricity a form of matter, as, for instance, gold, or silver, that has no other matter or compound. original elements cannot be separated, because they are not made up of two or more elements, like brass, for instance. excessive charge. a storage battery charged at too high a rate. excessive discharge. a storage battery discharged at too high a rate. excessive overcharge. charging for too long a time. exciter. a generator, either a dynamo or a battery, for exciting the field of a dynamo. exhaustive discharge. an excessive over-discharge of an accumulator. f. the sign used to indicate the heat term fahrenheit. fall of voltage. the difference between the initial and the final voltage in a current. field. the space or region near a magnet or charged wire. also the electro-magnets in a dynamo or motor. flow. the volume of a current going through a conductor. force, electro-magnetic. the pull developed by an electro-magnet. frictional a current produced by rubbing dissimilar electricity. substances together. full load. the greatest load a battery, accumulator or dynamo will sustain. galvanic. pertaining to the electro-chemical relations of metals toward each other. galvanizing. the art of coating one metal with another, such, for instance, as immersing iron in molten zinc. galvanometry. an instrument having a permanently magnetized needle, which is influenced by a coil or a wire in close proximity to it. galvanoscope. an instrument, like a galvanometer, which determines whether or not a current is present in a tested wire. generator. a term used to generally indicate any device which originates a current. german silver. an alloy of copper, nickel and zinc. graphite. one form of carbon. it is made artificially by the electric current. grid. the metallic frame of a plate used to hold the active material of an accumulator. gravity. the attraction of mass for mass. weight. the accelerating tendency of material to move toward the earth. gutta percha. caoutchouc, which has been treated with sulphur, to harden it. it is produced from the sap of tropical trees, and is a good insulator. harmonic receiver. a vibrating reed acted on by an electro-magnet, when tuned to its pitch. high e. m. f. a term to indicate currents which have a high voltage, and usually low amperage. igniter. mechanism composed of a battery, induction coil and a vibrator, for making a jump spark, to ignite gas, powder, etc. i. h. p. abbreviation, which means indicated horse power. impulse. a sudden motion of one body acting against another. an electro-magnetic wave magnetizing soft iron, and this iron attracting another piece of iron, as an example. incandescence, a conductor heated up by a current so it will electric. glow. induced current. a current of electricity which sets up lines of force at right angles to the body of the wire through which the current is transmitted. induction, magnetic. a body within a magnetic field which is excited by the magnetism. installation. everything belonging to an equipment of a building, or a circuiting system to do a certain thing. insulation. a material or substance which resists the passage of a current placed around a conductor. intensity. the strength of a magnetic field, or of a current flowing over a wire. internal resistance. the current strength of electricity of a wire to resist the passage. interrupter. a device in a wire or circuit for checking a current. it also refers to the vibrator of an induction coil. joint. the place where two or more conductors are united. joint resistance. the combined resistance offered by two or more substances or conductors. jump spark. a spark, disruptive in its character, between two conducting points. initial charge. the charge required to start a battery. kathode, or cathode. the negative plate or side of a battery. the plate on which the electro deposit is made. key. the arm of a telegraph sounder. a bar with a finger piece, which is hinged and so arranged that it will make and break contacts in an electric circuit. keyboard. a switch-board; a board on which is mounted a number of switches. kilowatt. a unit, representing , watts. an electric current measure, usually expressed thus: k.w. kilowatt hour. the computation of work equal to the exertion of one kilowatt in one hour. knife switch. a bar of a blade-like form, adapted to move down between two fingers, and thus establish metallic connections. laminated. made up of thin plates of the same material, laid together, but not insulated from each other. lamp arc. a voltaic arc lamp, using carbon electrodes, with mechanism for feeding the electrodes regularly. lamp, incandescent. a lamp with a filament heated up to a glow by the action of an electric current. the filament is within a vacuum in a glass globe. leak. loss of electrical energy through a fault in wiring, or in using bare wires. load. the ampere current delivered by a dynamo under certain conditions. low frequency. a current in which the vibrations are of few alternations per second. magnet. a metallic substance which has power to attract iron and steel. magnet bar. a straight piece of metal. magnet coil. a coil of wire, insulated, surrounding a core of iron, to receive a current of electricity. magnet core. a bar of iron adapted to receive a winding of wire. magnet, field. a magnet in a dynamo. a motor to produce electric energy. magnet, permanent. a short steel form, to hold magnetism for a long time. magnetic adherence. the adherence of particles to the poles of a magnet. magnetic that quality of a metal which draws metals. also attraction and the pulling action of unlike poles for each repulsion. other, and pushing away of like poles when brought together. magnetic force. the action exercised by a magnet of attracting or repelling. magnetic pole. the earth has north and south magnetic poles. the south pole of a magnetic needle is attracted so it points to the north magnetic pole; and the north pole of the needle is attracted to point to the south magnetic pole. magneto-generator. a permanent magnet and a revolving armature for generating a current. maximum voltage. the final voltage after charging. molecule. invisible particles made up of two or more atoms of different matter. an atom is a particle of one substance only. morse sounder. an electric instrument designed to make a clicking sound, when the armature is drawn down by a magnet. motor-dynamo. a motor and a dynamo having their armatures connected together, whereby the motor is driven by the dynamo, so as to change the current into a different voltage and amperage. motor-transformer. a motor which delivers the current like a generator. needle. a bar magnet horizontally poised on a vertical pivot point, like the needle of a mariner's compass. negative amber, when rubbed, produces negative electricity. electricity. a battery has positive as well as negative electricity. negative element. that plate in the solution of a battery cell which is not disintegrated. normal. the usual, or ordinary. the average. in a current the regular force required to do the work. north pole, the term applied to the force located near electric. the north pole of the globe, to which a permanent magnet will point if allowed to swing freely. o. abbreviation for ohm. ohm. the unit of resistance. equal to the resistance of a column of mercury one square millimeter in cross section, and . centimeters in length. ohm's law. it is expressed as follows: . the current strength is equal to the electro-motive force divided by its resistance. . the electro-motive force is equal to the current strength multiplied by the resistance. . the resistance is equal to the electro-motive force divided by the current strength. overload. in a motor an excess of mechanical work which causes the armature to turn too slowly and produces heat. phase. one complete oscillation. the special form of a wave at any instant, or at any interval of time. plate, condenser. in a static machine it is usually a plate of glass and revoluble. plate, negative. the plate in a battery, such as carbon, copper or platinum, which is not attacked by the solution. plating, electro-. the method of coating one metal with another by electrolysis. polarity. the peculiarity, in a body, of arranging itself with reference to magnetic influence. parallel. when a number of cells are coupled so that their similar poles are grouped together. that is to say, as the carbon plates, for instance, are connected with one terminal, and all the zinc plates with the other terminal. polarization. when the cell is deprived of its electro-motive force, or any part of it, polarization is the result. it is usually caused by coating of the plates. porosity. having small interstices or holes. positive current. one which deflects a needle to the left. positive any current flowing from the active element, electricity. such as zinc, in a battery. the negative electricity flows from the carbon to the zinc. potential, electric. the power which performs work in a circuit. potential energy. that form of force, which, when liberated, does or performs work. power unit. the volt-amperes or watt. primary. the induction coil in induction machines, or in a transformer. push button. a thumb piece which serves as a switch to close a circuit while being pressed inwardly. quantity. such arrangement of electrical connections which give off the largest amount of current. receiver. an instrument in telephony and telegraphy which receives or takes in the sound or impulses. relay. the device which opens or closes a circuit so as to admit a new current which is sent to a more distant point. repulsion, that tendency in bodies to repel each other when electric. similarly charged. resilience. the springing back to its former condition or position. electricity has resilience. resistance. the quality in all conductors to oppose the passage of a current. resistance coil. a coil made up of wire which prevents the passage of a current to a greater or less degree. resistance, the counter force in an electrolyte which seeks electrolytic. to prevent a decomposing current to pass through it. resistance: internal, the opposing force to the movement of a current external. which is in the cell or generator. this is called the _internal_. that opposite action outside of the cell or generator is the _external_. resonator, an open-circuited conductor for electrically electric. resounding or giving back a vibration, usually exhibited by means of a spark. rheostat. a device which has an adjustable resistance, so arranged that while adjusting the same the circuit will not be open. safety fuse. a piece of fusible metal of such resistance that it breaks down at a certain current strength. saturated. when a liquid has taken up a soluble material to the fullest extent it is then completely saturated. secondary. one of the two coils in a transformer, or induction coil. secondary plates. the brown or deep red plates in a storage battery when charged. self-excited. producing electricity by its own current. series. arranged in regular order. from one to the other directly. if lamps, for instance, should be arranged in circuit on a single wire, they would be in series. series, multiple. when lamps are grouped in sets in parallel, and these sets are then connected up in series. series windings. a generator or motor wound in such a manner that one of the commutator brush connections is joined to the field magnet winding, and the other end of the magnet winding joined to the outer circuit. shunt. going around. shunt winding. a dynamo in which the field winding is parallel with the winding of the armature. snap switch. a switch so arranged that it will quickly make a break. sounder. the apparatus at one end of a line actuated by a key at the other end of the line. spark coil. a coil, to make a spark from a low electro-motive force. spark, electric. the flash caused by drawing apart the ends of a conductor. specific gravity. the weight or density of a body. static electricity. generated by friction. also lightning. any current generated by a high electro-motive force. strength of current. the quantity of electricity in a circuit. synchronize. operating together; acting in unison. terminal. the end of any electric circuit or of a body or machine which has a current passing through it. thermostat, electric. an electric thermometer. usually made with a metal coil which expands through the action of the electricity passing through it, and, in expanding, it makes a contact and closes a circuit. transformer. the induction coil with a high initial e. m. f. changes into a low electro-motive force. unit. a standard of light, heat, electricity, or of other phenomena. vacuum. a space from which all matter has been exhausted. vibrator. mechanism for making and breaking circuits in induction coils or other apparatus. volt. the unit of electro-motive force. voltage. electro-motive force which is expressed in volts. voltaic. a term applied to electric currents and devices. volt-meter. an apparatus for showing the difference of potential, or e. m. f. in the term of volts. watt. the unit of electrical activity. the product of amperes multiplied by volts. watt hour. one watt maintained through one hour of time. waves, electric waves in the ether caused by electro-magnetic magnetic. disturbances. x-rays. the radiation of invisible rays of light, which penetrate or pass through opaque substances. yoke, or bar. a soft iron body across the ends of a horseshoe magnet, to enable the magnet to retain its magnetism an indefinite time. zinc battery. a battery which uses zinc for one of its elements. index a accumulated, . accumulation, . accumulator cell, . accumulators, , , . accumulators, plates, . acid, , , . acid maker, . acid, sulphuric, , . acidulated, . acidulated water, . acoustics, . actinic rays, , . actinium, . active element, . adjustable rod, . adjusting screw, , , , , . aerial wire, . agents, , . alarms, burglar, , , . alkali, . alkaline, . alternate, . alternating, , , , , , , . alternating current, . alternating periods, . alternations, . aluminum, , , , . aluminum hydrate, . amber, , . ammeter, , . amperage, , , , , , , . ampere, , , , , , , . amplitude, . annunciator, , , , , , . annunciator bells, . anode, , , . antennæ, . antimony , . anvil, , . apparatus, , , , , . arc, , . arc lighting, , . arc system, . armature, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , . armature brush, . armature post, . armature, vertical, . armature winding, , , . asbestos, . astatic galvanometer, . atmosphere, . attract, . attracted, . attraction, , . attractive, . automatic, . auxiliary, . awls, . b bacteria, , . bar, cross, . bar, horizontal, . bar, parallel switch, . bar, switch, , . base block, . batteries, , , . battery, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , . battery charging, . bearings, , . bells, , , , . bells, electric, . bench, , , . binding post, , , , , , , , . binding screw, , . bismuth, , . bit, . blue vitriol, . brass plate, , . brazing, , . bridge, . brush holder, . brushes, , , , , . burglar, . burglar alarm, , . buttons, contact, . buttons, push, , , , , , . c calorimeter, . cancerous, . candle power, , . cap, removable, . cap screws, . carbon, , , , , , . carbon block, . carbon pencil, . cathode, , , , . cell, , . cell, accumulator, . cell, charging, . channel, . channel, concave, . charged, . charged battery, . charging circuit, , . charging source, . charged wire, . chemical, . chisels, . chloride of lime, . choked, . choking coils, , , , . circuit, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , . circuit, primary, . circuit, secondary, . circuiting, , . circuiting system, . clapper arm, . closed rings, . coherer, , , . cohering, . coils, , , , , , . coils, choking, , , , . coils, induction, , . coils, primary, . coils, secondary, , . coincide, . cold, . collecting surfaces, . collector, . column, . combustion, . commutator, , , , . commutator brushes, . commutator plates, . compass, , , . composition, , . compound wound, . concave channel, . condenser, , , , , . conduct, , . conduction, , , , , . conduction current, . conductor, , , , , , , , . conduit, . conically formed, . conjunction, . connecting wire, . connection, , . construction, magnet, . consumption, . contact, , , , . contact finger, . contact plate, , , . contact screws, . contact surface, . continuous, . converter, . converting, , , . copper, , , , , , , , , , , , , . copper cyanide, . copper plate, , , , . copper sulphate, . copper voltameter, , . core, , , , , , . core, magnet, , . counter, clock-wise, . coupled, . crank, . crookes' tube, . cross bar, , . crown of cups, . crystal, . current, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , . current, alternating, . current changing, . current conduction, . current, continuous, . current, direct, , . current direction, . current, exterior, , . current, reversing, . current strength, , . current testing, . cut-out, . cutter, . cutting, lines of force, . cylinder, . cylindrical, . d dash, , . decoherer, , . decomposed, , . decomposes, . decomposing, . decomposition, , , . deflected, . degree, , . demagnetized, , . deposited, , . depression, , . detecting current, . detector, , , , . devices, measuring, . diagrams, , , , . diagrammatically, . diamagnetic, . diametrically, . diaphragm, , , , , . diamonds, . diluted, . direct current, , . direction of current, . direction of flow, . discharge, . disintegrate, . disk, . dissimilar, . disturbance, . dividers, . divisibility, . dot, , . dot and dash, . double click, . double line, . double-pole switch, . double-throw switch, . drawing, . drill, ratchet, . drops, . ductile, . duplex wire, . dynamo, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , . dynamo fields, , . e earth, . elasticity, , . electric, , , , , , , , , , , , , . electric arc, , . electric bell, , , , , , , . electric bulbs, . electric circuit, . electric fan, . electric field, . electric hand purifier, . electric heating, , , . electric iron, , . electric lamp socket, . electric light, , . electric lighting, . electric power, . electric welding, . electrical, , , , , , , , , , , . electrical impulses, , , . electrical manifestations, . electrically, , . electricity, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , . electricity measuring, . electricity, thermo-, . electrified, , . electro-chemical, . electrode, , , , , , , , , , . electrolysis, , , , . electrolyte, , , , , , , , , . electrolytic, , , . electro-magnet, , . electro-magnetic, , , , , , , , , . electro-magnetic force, . electro-magnetic rotation, . electro-magnetic switch, . electro-meter, . electro-motive force, , , . electroplate, , , , , , . electro-positive-negative, , . elements, , . engine energy, , . equidistant, . ether, . example, . excited, . extension plate, . exterior, . exterior magnetic, . external, . external circuit, . external current, . external resistance, . f factor, . ferrous oxide, . field, , . field, dynamo, , . field magnet cores, . field, magnetic, . field of force, . field wire, . filament, , , . filter, . flat iron, . flocculent, . force, . formulated, . friction, . frictional, , , . fuse, . g galvani, . galvanic, , , . galvanometer, , , , . galvanoscope, , , . gaseous, . gasoline, . gas stove, . gelatine, . generate, , , , , . generated, . generating, , . generation, . generator, , , . german silver, , . germicide, . gimlets, . glass, , , , . gold, . grid, . ground circuit, . gunpowder, . h hack-saw, . hammer, . heart-shaped switch, . heater, . heating, , . hertzian rays, . hertzian wave, . high tension, , , . high tension apparatus, . high tension coils, . high voltage, . horizontal bar, . horseshoe magnet, , , . hydrate of aluminum, . hydrogen, , , , . i igniting, . illumination, , , , , . immersed, . impulses, , , , , , , . incandescent, , . induced, . inductance, , . induction, , , , . induction coils, , , . influences, . initial charge, . insulated, , , , , , , , , , . insulating, , , , , . insulating material, . insulation, , . instruments, , , , , . instruments, measuring, . intensity, , , , . interior, magnetic, . internal resistance, . interruption, , . installation, . ionize, . iron, , , , , , . isolated, . j jar, , , . journal, . journal block, , . jump spark, . k key, , , . key, sending, . knob, . knob, terminal, . l laboratory, . lead, , . lead, precipitated, , . lead, red, , . lever switching, . light, . light method, . lighting, , . lighting circuit, . lighting system, . lightning, , , , . lightning rod, . lime, chloride of, . line of force, . line wire, . line, magnetic, , . liquid, . litharge, . loadstone, . locomotives, . low tension, , , , . m magnet bar, . magnet core, , , . magnet, electro, , . magnet, horseshoe, , , . magnet lines, , . magnet, permanent, , , , , . magnet, reversed, . magnet, steel, . magnet, swinging, . magnetic, , , , , , , , . magnetic construction, . magnetic exterior, . magnetic field, , , , , , , , , . magnetic interior, . magnetic pull, . magnetic radiator, . magnetism, , , , , , . magnetized, , , , . magnetized wire, . magnets, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , . main conductor, . mandrel, , . manganese, . manifestations, . mariner, . material, non-conducting, . maximum, . measure, , , , . measurement, . measuring devices, . measuring instruments, . mechanism, , . medical batteries, . mercury, , . metal base, . mica, . microphone, , , . millimeter, . minus, . minus sign, . morse code, . motor, , , , , , , , , , , . mouthpiece, . mouthpiece rays, . moving field, . multiple, . musical scale, . n negative, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , . neutral, . neutral plate, . nickel, . nickel plating, . nitrate of silver, . nitrogen, . non-conducting material, . non-conductor, . non-magnetic, . north pole, , , , , , , , . number plate, . n-ray, . o ohms, , . ohms, international, . ohms law, . operator, , . oscillating, , . osmium, . oxides, . oxidizing, . oxygen, , , , , , , . p packing ring, . paraffine, , , , . paraffine wax, . parallel, , , . parallel switch bar, . parallel wires, , . partition, . peon, . percolate, . periodicity, . periods of alternations, . permanent, , , . permanent magnet, , , , , . phase, . phenomenon, , . photograph, . physical, . pile, voltaic, . pipe, . pitchblende, . pivot pin, . pivotal, . plane, . plate, , . plate, contact, , , . plate, copper, , , , . plate, negative, . plate, number, . plate, positive, , . plate, zinc, . platinum, , , . pliers, . plus sign, , . pointer, . polarity, , , , . polarization, . pole, north, , , , , , , , . pole piece, , . pole, south, , , , , , , . poles, , . polonium, . porcelain, . porous, . positive, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , . post, binding, , . potentiality, , . power, , . power, candle, , . precipitate of lead, , . precision, . pressure, . primary, , , , , , , . primary battery, , . primary circuit, . primary coil, , . prime conductor, . projected, . propagated, , . properties, . purification, , . purifier, , . push button, , , , , , . q quantity, , , , . quartz, . r radio-activity, . radium, , , , . ratchet drill, . reaction, . receiver, , , , , . receiving station, . rectangular, . rectifiers, . red lead, , . reel, . reflected, . refraction, . refractory, . register, . removable, . removable cap, . repel, . repulsion, , . reservoir, , . resiliency, . resistance, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , . resistance bridge, . resistance, external, . resistance, internal, . rheostat, . reversed, , , . reversible, . reversing, . reversing switch, . revolubly, . revolve, . revolving, . roentgen rays, . roentgen tube, . rotation, . rubber, , , , , , , . s sad-irons, . saline, . sanitation, . saturated, . screw, . screw, binding, , . screw-driver, . screw, set, . sealing wax, . secondary, , , , , , . secondary circuit, . secondary coil, , . self-induction, , . sender, , . sending apparatus, . sending key, . separately excited, . series-wound, . severed magnet, . sewage, . shaft, . shears, , . shellac, . shunt-wound, . signal, . silver, , , . silver nitrate, . socket, , . soldering, . soldering iron, . solution, , , , , , , , , . sounder, , , , . sounding board, . source, charging, . south pole, , , , , , , . spark gap, , . spark jump, . spring finger, . square, , . standard, , . station, , , , . steel, , . steel magnet, . sterilized, . stirrup, . stock bit, . stock contact, . storage, . storage battery, . storing, . substances, . sulphate, , , . sulphur, . sulphuric acid, , . sulphuric acid voltameter, , . superstition, , . surging, , . swinging magnet, . swinging switch blade, . switch blades, . switches, , , , , , , . switches, bar, , , , . switches, bar, parallel, . switches, heart-shaped, . switches, piece, . switches, reversing, . switches, sliding, , . switches, terminal, . switches, two-pole, . system, circuiting, . t tail-piece, . tantalum, . telegraph, , , . telegraph key, . telegraph sounder, , . telegraphing, . telephone, , , , , , , . telephone circuit, . telephone connections, . telephone hook, . temperature, , , , , . tension, high, , , . tension, low, , , , . terminal, , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , . terminal knob, . terminal, secondary, . terminal switch, . theoretical, . therapeutics, . thermo-electric couples, . thermo-electricity, . thermometer, . thorium, , . thunderbolt, , . tin, . tinfoil, , . tools, , , . torch, brazing, . transformer, , , , , , . transformer, step-down, . transmission, , . transmit, , , . transmitter, , , , , . transverse, , . transversely, . trigger, . tripod, . tubular, , . two-pole switch, . u ultra-violet, . uranium, . v vacuum, . vapor lamps, . velocity, , . vertical armature, . vibration, , , . vibratory, . vise, . voltage, , , , , , , , , , , , , , . voltage, high, . voltaic, , . voltaic pile, . voltameter, , , . voltameter, sulphuric, acid, , . volts, , , , , , , . w water, , , . water power, . watts, , , . wave lengths, , . weight, . welding, , . winding, , , , , , . winding reel, . window connection, . window frame, . wire, , , , , , . wire, circuiting, . wire coil, . wire lead, . wire, parallel, , . wireless, . wireless telegraphy, , , . wiring, . wiring, window, . workshop, , . wound, compound, . wound-series, . wound-shunt, . x x-ray, , , , . z zinc, , , , , . zinc plates, . the "how-to-do-it" books carpentry for boys a book which treats, in a most practical and fascinating manner all subjects pertaining to the "king of trades"; showing the care and use of tools; drawing; designing, and the laying out of work; the principles involved in the building of various kinds of structures, and the rudiments of architecture. it contains over two hundred and fifty illustrations made especially for this work, and includes also a complete glossary of the technical terms used in the art. the most comprehensive volume on this subject ever published for boys. electricity for boys the author has adopted the unique plan of setting forth the fundamental principles in each phase of the science, and practically applying the work in the successive stages. it shows how the knowledge has been developed, and the reasons for the various phenomena, without using technical words so as to bring it within the compass of every boy. it has a complete glossary of terms, and is illustrated with two hundred original drawings. practical mechanics for boys this book takes the beginner through a comprehensive series of practical shop work, in which the uses of tools, and the structure and handling of shop machinery are set forth; how they are utilized to perform the work, and the manner in which all dimensional work is carried out. every subject is illustrated, and model building explained. it contains a glossary which comprises a new system of cross references, a feature that will prove a welcome departure in explaining subjects. fully illustrated. _price cents per volume_ the new york book company fourth avenue new york +-----------------------------------------------------------------+ | transcriber's note. | | | | every effort has been made to replicate this text as faithfully | | as possible, including obsolete and variant spellings and other | | inconsistencies. | | | | minor punctuation and printing errors have been corrected. | | | | the first page of the original book is an advertisement. the | | page was moved to the end of the text. | | | | some hyphenation inconsistencies in the text were retained: | | -candle-power and -candlepower, | | electromotive and electro-motive, | | electro-meter and electrometer, | | horseshoe and horse-shoe, | | switchboard and switch-board, | | | | two occurrences of 'colorimeter' for 'calorimeter' repaired. | +-----------------------------------------------------------------+ preliminary specifications --- programmed data processor model three (pdp- ) --- october, digital equipment corporation maynard, massachusetts table of contents introduction general description system block diagram electrical description mechanical description environmental requirements central processor operating speeds instruction format number system indexing indirect addressing instruction list manual controls storage standard input-output paper tape reader paper tape punch typewriter optional input-output sequence break system high speed in-out channel magnetic tape crt display real time clock line printer utility programs frap system decal system floating point subroutines maintenance routines miscellaneous routines introduction general description the dec programmed data processor model three (pdp- ) is a high performance, large scale digital computer featuring reliability in operation together with economy in initial cost, maintenance and use. this combination is achieved by the use of very fast, reliable, solid state circuits coupled with system design restraint. the simplicity of the system design excludes many marginal or superfluous features and thus their attendant cost and maintenance problems. the average internal instruction execution rate is about , operations per second with a peak rate of , operations per second. this speed, together with its economy and reliability, recommends pdp- as an excellent instrument for complex real time control applications and as the center of a modern computing facility. pdp- is a stored program, general purpose digital computer. it is a single address, single instruction machine operating in parallel on bit numbers. it features multiple step indirect addressing and indexing of addresses. the main memory makes registers available as index registers. the main storage is coincident current magnetic core modules of words each. the computer has a built-in facility to address modules and can be expanded to drive modules. the memory has a cycle time of five microseconds. system block diagram the flow of information between the various registers of pdp- is shown in the system block diagram (fig. ). there are four registers of bit length. their functions are described below. memory buffer the memory buffer is the central switching register. the word coming from or going to memory is retained in this register. in arithmetic operations it holds the addend, subtrahend, multiplicand, or divisor. the left bits of this register communicate with the instruction register. the address portion of the memory buffer register communicates with the index adder, the memory address register, and the program counter. in certain instructions, the address portion of the control word does not refer to memory but specifies variations of an instruction, thus, the address portion of the memory buffer is connected to the control element. accumulator the accumulator is the main register of the arithmetic element. sums and differences are formed in the accumulator. at the completion of multiplication it holds the high order digits of the product. in division it initially contains the high order digits of the dividend and is left with the remainder. the logical functions and, inclusive or, and exclusive or, are formed in the accumulator. carry storage register the carry storage register facilitates high-speed multiply and is properly part of the accumulator. in-out register the in-out register is the main path of communication with external equipment. it is also part of the arithmetic element. in multiplication it ends with the low order digits of the product. in division it starts with the low order parts of the dividend and ends with the quotient. the in-out register has a full set of shifting properties, (arithmetic and logical). * * * * * there are three registers of bit length which deal exclusively with addresses. the design allows for expansion to bits. these registers are: memory addressing the memory address register holds the number of the memory location that is currently being interrogated. it receives this number from the program counter, the index adder or the memory buffer. program counter the program counter holds the memory location of the next instruction to be executed. index adder the index adder is a bit ring accumulator. the sum of an instruction base address, y, and the contents of an index register, c(x), are formed in this register. this register holds the previous content of the program counter in the "jump and save program counter," jps, instruction. the index adder also serves as the step counter in shift, multiply, and divide. * * * * * the control element contains two six bit registers and several miscellaneous flip-flops. the latter deal with indexing, indirect addressing, memory control, etc. the six bit registers are: instruction register the instruction register receives the first six bits of the memory buffer register during the cycle which obtains the instruction from memory (cycle zero). this information is the primary input to the control element. program flags the six program flags act as convenient program switches. they are used to indicate separate states of a program. the program can set, clear, or sense the individual flip-flops. the program can also sense or make the state "all flags zero." they can also be used to synchronize various input devices which occur at random times (see input-output, typewriter input). * * * * * three toggle switch registers are connected to the central processor (see manual controls). test address the fifteen test address switches are used to indicate start points and to select memory registers for manual examination or change. test word the thirty-six test word switches indicate a new number for manual deposit into memory. they may also be used for insertion of constants while a program is operating by means of the operate instruction. sense switches the six sense switches allow the operator to manually select program options or cause a jump to another program in memory. the program can sense individual switches or the state "all switches zero." electrical description the pdp- circuitry is the static type using saturating transistor flip-flops and, for the most part, transistor switch elements. the primary active elements are micro-alloy and micro-alloy-diffused transistors. the flip-flops have built-in delay so that a logic net may be sampled and changed simultaneously. machine timing is performed by a delay line chain. auxiliary delay line chains time the step counter instructions (multiply, divide, etc.). the machine is thus internally synchronous with step counter instructions being asynchronous. the machine is asynchronous for in-out operations, that is, the completion of an in-out operation initiates the following instruction. mechanical description the pdp- consists of two mechanical assemblies, the console and the equipment frame. fig. is a photograph of pdp- which is an bit version of pdp- . console the console is a desk approximately seven feet long. it contains the controls and indicators necessary for operation and maintenance of the machine. a cable connects the console to the equipment frame. equipment frame the equipment frame is approximately six feet high and two feet deep. the length is a function of the amount of optional features included. the central processor requires a length of five and one half feet. the power cabinet is twenty-two inches long. a memory cabinet is thirty-two inches long and will hold three memory modules ( , words per cabinet). memory cabinets may be added at any time. magnetic tape units require twenty-two inches per transport. a tape unit cabinet may be connected as an extension of the equipment frame or may be a free-standing frame. environmental requirements the pdp- requires no special room preparation. the computer will operate properly over the normal range of room temperature. the central processor and memory together require thirty amperes of volts single phase cycle ac. each inactive tape transport requires two amperes and the one active transport requires amperes. central processor the central processor of pdp- contains the control element, the memory buffer register, the arithmetic element, and the memory addressing element. the control element governs the complete operation of the computer including memory timing, instruction performance, and the initiation of input-output commands. the arithmetic element, which includes the accumulator, the in-out register, and the carry storage register, performs the arithmetic operations. the memory addressing element which includes the index adder, the program counter, and the memory address register, performs address bookkeeping and modification. operating speeds operating times of pdp- instructions are normally multiples of the memory cycle of microseconds. two cycle instructions refer twice to memory and thus require microseconds for completion. examples of this are add, subtract, deposit, load, etc. one cycle instructions do not refer to memory and require microseconds. examples of the latter are the jump instructions, the skip instructions, and the operate group. the operating times of variable cycle instructions depend upon the instruction. for example, the operating time for a shift or rotate instruction is + . n microseconds, where n is the number of shifts performed. the operating times for multiply and divide are functions of the number of ones in the multiplier and in the quotient, respectively. maximum time for multiply is microseconds. this includes the time necessary to get the multiply instruction from memory. divide takes microseconds maximum. in-out transfer instructions that do not include the optional wait function require microseconds. if the in-out device requires a wait time for completion, the operating time depends upon the device being used. if an instruction includes reference to an index register, an additional microseconds is required. each step of indirect addressing also requires an additional microseconds. instruction format the instructions for pdp- may be divided into three classes: . indexable memory instructions . non-indexable memory instructions . non-memory instructions. the layout of the instruction word is shown in fig. . the octal digits and define the instruction code, thus, there are possible instruction codes, not all of which are used. the first bit of octal digit is the indirect address bit. if this bit is a one, indirect addressing occurs. the index address, x, is in octal digits , , and . these digits address an index register for memory-type instructions. if these digits are all zero, indexing will not take place. in main memory, of the registers can be used as automatic index registers. the instruction base address, y, is in octal digits through . these digits are sufficient to address , words of memory. octal digit is reserved for further memory expansion. space is available in the equipment frame for this expansion, should it prove desirable. in those instructions which do not refer to memory, the memory address digits, y, and in some cases the index address digits also, are used to specify the variations in any group of instructions. an example of this is in the shift and rotate instructions in which the memory address digits determine the number of shifts. number system the pdp- is a "fixed" point machine using binary arithmetic. negative numbers are represented as the 's complement of the positive numbers. bit is the sign bit which is zero for positive numbers. bits to are magnitude bits with bit being the most significant and bit being the least significant. the actual position of the binary point may be arbitrarily assigned to best suit the problem in hand. two common conventions in the placement of the binary point are: . the binary point is to the right of the least significant digit, thus, numbers represent integers. . the binary point is to the right of the sign digit, thus the numbers represent a fraction which lies between ± . the conversion of decimal numbers into the binary system for use by the machine may be performed automatically by subroutines. similarly the output conversion of binary numbers into decimals is done by subroutine. operations for floating point numbers are handled by programming. the utility program system provides for automatic insertion of the routines required to perform floating point operations and number base conversion (see utility programs). indexing in pdp- , registers of the main magnetic core memory are available for use as automatic index registers. their addresses are specified by octal digits to of the instruction word. these registers are memory locations - (octal). address specifies that no index register is to be used with the instructions. the contents of octal digits through of the selected index register are added to the unmodified address (octal digits through of the instruction). this sum is used to locate the operand. the addition is done in the index adder which is a bit 's complement adder. the contents of the accumulator and the in-out register are unaffected by the indexing process. an instruction which has used indexing is retained in memory with its original address unmodified. memory registers - (octal) are available for use as normal memory registers if they are not being used as index registers. the left half of these registers is available for the storage of constants, tables, etc., when octal digits through act as index registers. three special instructions snx, spx and lir, are available to facilitate resetting, advancing, and sampling of the index registers. since the index registers are normal memory registers, their contents can also be manipulated by the standard computer instructions. indirect addressing an instruction which is to use an indirect address will have a one in bit six of the instruction word. the original address, y, of the instruction will not be used to locate the operand of the instruction, as is the normal case. instead, it is used to locate a memory register whose contents in octal digits through will be used as the address of the original instruction. this new address is known as the indirect address for the instruction and will be used to locate the operand. if the memory register containing the indirect address also has a in bit six, the indirect addressing procedure is repeated again and a third address is located. there is no limit to the number of times this process can be repeated. index registers may be used in conjunction with indirect addressing. in this case, the address after being modified by the selected index register is used to locate the indirect address. the indirect address can be acted on by an index register and deferred again if desired. each use of an index register or an indirect address extends the operating time of the original instruction by microseconds. instruction list this list includes the title of the instruction, the normal execution time of the instruction, i.e., the time with no indexing and no deferring, the mnemonic code of the instruction, and the operation code number. the notation used requires the following definitions. the contents of a register q are indicated as c(q). the address portion of the instruction is indicated by y. the index register address of an instruction is indicated by x. the effective address of an operand is indicated by z. z may be equal to y or it may be y as modified by deferring or by indexing. indexable memory instructions arithmetic instructions _add_ ( usec.) add x y operation code the new c(ac) are the sum of c(z) and the original c(ac). the c(z) are unchanged. the addition is performed with 's complement arithmetic. if the sum exceeds the capacity of the accumulator register, the overflow flip-flop will be set (see skip group instructions). _subtract_ ( usec.) sub x y operation code the new c(ac) are the original c(ac) minus the c(z). the c(z) are unchanged. the subtraction is performed using 's complement arithmetic. if the difference exceeds the capacity of the accumulator, the overflow flip-flop will be set (see skip group instructions). _multiply_ (approximately usec.) mul x y operation code the c(ac) are multiplied by the c(z). the most significant digits of the product are left in the accumulator and the least significant digits in the in-out register. the previous c(ac) are lost. _divide_ (approximately usec.) div x y operation code the accumulator and the in-out register together form a bit dividend. the high order part of the dividend is in the accumulator. the low order part of the dividend is in the in-out register. the divisor is (z). upon completion of the division, the quotient is in the in-out register. the remainder is in the accumulator. the sign of the remainder is the same as the sign of the dividend. if the dividend is larger than c(z), the overflow flip-flop will be set and the division will not take place. logical instructions _logical and_ ( usec.) and x y operation code the bits of c(z) operate on the corresponding bits of the accumulator to form the logical and. the result is left in the accumulator. the c(z) are unaffected by this instruction. logical and function table ac bit c(z) bit result _exclusive or_ ( usec.) xor x y operation code the bits of c(z) operate on the corresponding bits of the accumulator to form the exclusive or. the result is left in the accumulator. the c(z) are unaffected by this order. exclusive or table ac bit c(z) bit result _inclusive or_ ( usec.) ior x y operation code the bits of c(z) operate on the corresponding bits of the accumulator to form the inclusive or. the result is left in the accumulator. the c(z) are unaffected by this order. inclusive or table ac bit c(z) bit result general instructions _load accumulator_ ( usec.) lac x y operation code the c(z) are placed in the accumulator. the c(z) are unchanged. the original c(z) are lost. _deposit accumulator_ ( usec.) dac x y operation code the c(ac) replace the c(z) in the memory. the c(ac) are left unchanged by this instruction. the original c(z) are lost. _deposit address part_ ( usec.) dap x y operation code octal digits through of the accumulator replace the corresponding digits of memory register z. c(ac) are unchanged as are the contents of octal digits through of z. the original contents of octal digits through of z are lost. _deposit instruction part_ ( usec.) dip x y operation code octal digits through of the accumulator replace the corresponding digits of memory register z. the accumulator is unchanged as are digits through of z. the original contents of octal digits through of z are lost. _load in-out register_ ( usec.) lio x y operation code the c(z) are placed in the in-out register. c(z) are unchanged. the original c(io) are lost. _deposit in-out register_ ( usec.) dio x y operation code the c(io) replace the c(z) in memory. the c(io) are unaffected by this instruction. the original c(z) are lost. _jump_ ( usec.) jmp x y operation code the program counter is reset to address z. the next instruction that will be executed will be taken from memory register z. the original contents of the program counter are lost. _jump and save program counter_ ( usec.) jsp x y operation code the contents of the program counter are transferred to the index adder. when the transfer takes place, the program counter holds the address of the instruction following the jsp. the program counter is then reset to address z. the next instruction that will be executed will be taken from memory register z. _skip if accumulator and z differ_ ( usec.) sad x y operation code the c(z) are compared with the c(ac). if the two numbers are different, the program counter is indexed one extra position and the next instruction in the sequence is skipped. the c(ac) and the c(z) are unaffected by this operation. _skip if accumulator and z are the same_ ( usec.) sas x y operation code the c(z) are compared with c(ac). if the two numbers are identical, the program counter is indexed one extra position and the next instruction in the sequence is skipped. the c(ac) and c(z) are unaffected by this operation. non-indexable memory instructions these instructions have the same word format as the indexable instructions. since they operate on the index register location, x, they cannot be indexed. _skip on negative index_ ( usec.) snx x y operation code the number in octal digits through of the instruction word is added to the c(x). this addition is done in the bit index adder using 's complement arithmetic. if, after the addition, the sum is negative, the program counter is advanced one extra position and the next instruction in the sequence is skipped. the contents of octal digits - of the index register location are unaffected by this instruction. _skip on positive index_ ( usec.) spx x y operation code the number in octal digits through of the instruction word is added to the c(x). this addition is done in the bit index adder using 's complement arithmetic. if, after the addition, the sum is positive, the program counter is advanced one extra position and the next instruction in the sequence is skipped. the contents of octal digits - of the index register location are unaffected by this instruction. _load index register_ ( usec.) lir x y operation code the octal digits through (y) of the instruction will replace the corresponding digits of the memory register specified by x. octal digit of the memory register will be left clear. digits - of the memory register are unchanged. _deposit index adder_ ( usec.) dia x y operation code the c(ia) replace the octal digits through of memory location y. octal digit of y is cleared. digits through of y are left unchanged. the x portion of the instruction is ignored. non-memory instructions rotate and shift group this group of instructions will rotate or shift the accumulator and/or the in-out register. when the two registers operate combined, the in-out register is considered to be a bit magnitude extension of the right end of the accumulator. rotate is a non-arithmetic cyclic shift. that is, the two ends of the register are logically tied together and information is rotated as though the register were a ring. shift is an arithmetic operation and is in effect multiplication of the number in the register by ^{+n}, where n is the number of shifts. shift or rotate instructions involving more than steps can be used for simulating time delays. rotate steps of the accumulator will return all information to its original position. _rotate accumulator right_ ( usec. maximum for shifts) rar n operation code this instruction will rotate the bits of the accumulator right n positions, where n is octal digits - of the instructions word. _rotate accumulator left_ ( usec. maximum for shifts) ral n operation code this instruction will rotate the bits of the accumulator left n positions, where n is octal digits - of the instruction word. _shift accumulator right_ ( usec. maximum for shifts) sar n operation code this instruction will shift the contents of the accumulator right n positions, where n is octal digits - of the instruction word. _shift accumulator left_ ( usec. maximum for shifts) sal n operation code this instruction will shift the contents of the accumulator left n positions, where n is octal digits - of the instruction word. _rotate in-out register right_ ( usec. maximum for shifts) rir n operation code this instruction will rotate the bits of the in-out register right n positions, where n is octal digits - of the instruction word. _rotate in-out register left_ ( usec. maximum for shifts) ril n operation code this instruction will rotate the bits of the in-out register left n positions, where n is octal digits - of the instruction word. _shift in-out register right_ ( usec. maximum for shifts) sir n operation code this instruction will shift the contents of the in-out register right n positions, where n is octal digits - of the instruction word. _shift in-out register left_ ( usec. maximum for shifts) sil n operation code this instruction will shift the contents of the in-out register left n positions, where n is octal digits - of the instruction word. _rotate ac and io right_ ( usec. maximum for shifts) rcr n operation code this instruction will rotate the bits of the combined register right in a single ring n positions, where n is octal digits - of the instruction word. _rotate ac and io left_ ( usec. maximum for shifts) rcl n operation code this instruction will rotate the bits of the combined register left in a single ring n position, where n is octal digits - of the instruction word. _shift ac and io right_ ( usec. maximum for shifts) scr n operation code this instruction will shift the contents of the combined register right n positions, where n is octal digits - of the instruction word. _shift ac and io left_ ( usec. maximum for shifts) scl n operation code this instruction will shift the contents of the combined registers left n positions, where n is octal digits - of the instruction word. * * * * * _skip group_ ( usec.) skp y operation code this group of instructions senses the state of various flip-flops and switches in the machine. it does not require any reference to memory. the address portion of the instruction selects the particular function to be sensed. all members of this group have the same operation code. _skip on zero accumulator_ ( usec.) sza address if the accumulator is equal to plus zero (all bits are zero) the program counter is advanced one extra position and the next instruction in the sequence is skipped. _skip on plus accumulator_ ( usec.) spa address if the sign bit of the accumulator is zero, the program counter is advanced one extra position and the next instruction in the sequence is skipped. _skip on minus accumulator_ ( usec.) sma address if the sign bit of the accumulator is one, the program counter is advanced one extra position and the next instruction in the sequence is skipped. _skip on zero overflow_ ( usec.) szo address if the overflow flip-flop is a zero the program counter is advanced one extra position and the next instruction in the sequence will be skipped. the overflow flip-flop is cleared by this instruction. this flip-flop is set by addition, subtraction, or division that exceeds the capacity of the accumulator. the overflow flip-flop is not cleared by arithmetic operations which do not cause an overflow. thus, a whole series of arithmetic operations may be checked for correctness by a single szo. the overflow flip-flop is cleared by the "start" switch. _skip on plus in-out register_ ( usec.) spi address if the sign digit of the in-out register is zero the program counter is indexed one extra position and the next instruction in the sequence is skipped. _skip on zero switch_ ( usec.) szs addresses , , ... if the selected sense switch is zero, the program counter is advanced one extra position and the next instruction in the sequence will be skipped. address senses the position of sense switch , address switch , etc. address senses all the switches. if is selected all switches must be zero to cause the skip to occur. _skip on zero program flag_ ( usec.) szf addresses to inclusive if the selected program flag is a zero, the program counter is advanced one extra position and the next instruction in the sequence will be skipped. address is no selection. address selects program flag one, etc. address selects all programs flags. all flags must be zero to cause the skip. the instructions in the one cycle skip group may be combined to form the inclusive or of the separate skips. thus, if address is selected, the skip would occur if the overflow flip-flop equals zero or if the in-out register is positive. the combined instruction would still take microseconds. * * * * * _operate group_ ( usec.) opr y operation code this instruction group performs miscellaneous operations on various central processor registers. the address portion of the instruction specifies the action to be performed. _clear in-out register_ ( usec.) cli address equal this instruction clears the in-out register. _load accumulator from test word_ ( usec.) lat address this instruction forms the inclusive or of the c(ac) and the contents of the test word. this instruction is usually combined with address (clear accumulator), so that c(ac) will equal the contents of the test word switches. _complement accumulator_ ( usec.) cma address this instruction complements (makes negative) the contents of the accumulator. _halt_ hlt address this instruction stops the computer. _clear accumulator_ ( usec.) cla address this instruction clears (sets equal to plus ) the contents of the accumulator. _clear selected program flag_ ( usec.) clf address to inclusive the selected program flag will be cleared. address selects no program flag, clears program flag , clears program flag , etc. address clears all program flags. _set selected program flag_ ( usec.) stf address to inclusive * * * * * _in-out transfer group_ ( usec. without in-out wait) iot x y operation code the variations within this group of instructions perform all the in-out control and information transfer functions. if bit six (normally the indirect address bit) is a one, the computer will halt and wait for the completion pulse from the device activated. when this device delivers its completion, the computer will resume operation of the instruction sequence. an incidental fact which may be of importance in certain scientific or real time control applications is that the time origin of operations following an in-out completion pulse is identical with the time of that pulse. most in-out operations require a known minimum time before completion. this time may be utilized for programming. the appropriate in-out transfer is given with no in-out wait (bit six a zero). the instruction sequence then continues. this sequence must include an iot instruction which performs nothing but the in-out wait. this last instruction must occur before the safe minimum time. a table of minimum times for all in-out devices is delivered with the computer. it lists minimum time before completion pulse and minimum in-out register free time. the details of the in-out transfer variations are listed under input-output. the mnemonic codes and addresses for the standard equipment are: _read paper tape alphanumeric mode_ rpa address _read paper tape binary mode_ rpb address _typewriter output_ tyo address _typewriter input_ tyi address _punch paper tape alphanumeric mode_ ppa address _punch paper tape binary mode_ ppb address manual controls the console of pdp- has controls and indicators for the use of the operator. fig. is a close-up of the control panel of pdp- , the bit version of pdp- . all computer flip-flops have indicator lights on the console. these indicators are primarily for use when the machine has stopped or when the machine is being operated one step at a time. while the machine is running, the brightness of an indicator bears some relationship to the relative duty factor of that particular flip-flop. three registers of toggle switches are available on the console. these are the test address ( bits), the test word ( bits), and the sense switches ( bits). the first two are used in conjunction with the operating push buttons. the sense switches are present for manual intervention. the use of these switches is determined by the program (see system block diagram and skip group instructions). operating push buttons _start_ - when this switch is operated, the computer will start. the first instruction comes from the memory location indicated in the test address switches. _stop_ - the computer will come to a halt at the completion of the current memory cycle. _continue_ - the computer will resume operation starting at the state indicated by the lights. _examine_ - the contents of the memory register indicated in the test address will be displayed in the accumulator and the memory buffer lights. _deposit_ - the word selected by the test word switches will be put in the memory location indicated by the test address switches. _read-in_ - when this switch is operated, the photoelectric paper tape reader will start operating in the read-in mode. (see input-output). in addition to the operating push buttons, there are several separate toggle switches. _single cycle switch_ - when the single cycle switch is on, the computer will halt at the completion of each memory cycle. this switch is particularly useful in debugging programs. repeated operation of the continue switch button will step the program one cycle at a time. the programmer is thus able to examine the machine states at each step. _test switch_ - when the test switch is on, the computer will perform the instruction indicated in the test address location. it will repeat this instruction either at the normal speed rate or at a single cycle rate if the single cycle switch is up. this switch is primarily useful for maintenance purposes. _sense switches_ - there are six switches on the console which are present for manual intervention. storage the internal memory system for pdp- consists of modules of words of coincident current magnetic core storage. each word has bits. the memory modules operate with a read-rewrite cycle time of microseconds. the driving currents of the memory are automatically adjusted to compensate for normal room temperature variations. each core memory module consists of the memory stack, the required x and y switches, the x and y current sources and sense amplifiers for that stack. the memory address register, the memory buffer register, and the memory timing controls are considered to be part of the central processor. the standard pdp- memory address register configuration is built to allow up to modules of core memory ( , words). there is a space in the addressing section of the machine to allow expansion of the addressing by a factor of eight for a total addressing capacity of , memory registers. the core memory may be supplemented by magnetic tape storage. this is described under input-output. standard input-output the pdp- is designed to accommodate a variety of input-output equipment. standard input-output units include a paper tape reader, paper tape punch and an electric typewriter. a single instruction, in-out transfer (see central processor), performs all in-out operations through the bit in-out register. the address portion of this instruction specifies the in-out function. one bit of the instruction selects an in-out halt as required. paper tape reader the paper tape reader of the pdp- is a photoelectric device capable of reading lines per second. six lines form the standard bit word when reading binary punched eight hole tape. five, six and seven hole tape may also be read. the reader will operate in one of two basic modes or in a third special mode. alphanumeric mode rpa iot in this mode, one line of tape is read for each in-out transfer. all eight holes of the line are read. the information is left in the right eight bits of the in-out register, the remainder of the register being left clear. the standard pdp alphanumeric paper tape code includes an odd parity bit which may be checked by the program. tape of non-standard width would be read in this mode. binary mode rpb iot for each in-out transfer instruction, six lines of paper tape are read and assembled in the in-out register to form a full computer word. for a line to be recognized in this mode, the eighth hole must be punched; i.e., lines with no eighth hole will be skipped over. the seventh hole is ignored. the pattern of holes in the binary tape is arranged so as to be easily interpreted visually in terms of machine instruction. read-in mode this is a special mode activated by the "read-in" switch on the console. it provides a means of entering programs which neither rely on read-in programs in memory nor require a plug board. pushing the "read-in" switch starts the reader in the binary mode. the first group of six lines and alternate succeeding groups of six lines are interpreted as "read-in" mode instructions. even-numbered groups of lines are data. the "read-in" mode instructions must be either "deposit in-out" (dio y) or "jump" (jmp y). if the instruction is dio y, the next group of six binary lines will be stored in memory location y and the reader continues moving. if the instruction is jmp y, the "read-in" mode is terminated and the computer will commence operation at the address of the jump instruction. paper tape punch the standard pdp- paper tape punch has a nominal speed of lines per second. it can operate in either the alphanumeric mode or the binary mode. alphanumeric mode ppa iot for each in-out transfer instruction one line of tape is punched. in-out register bit conditions hole # . bit conditions hole # , etc. bit conditions hole # . binary mode ppb iot for each in-out transfer instruction one line of tape is punched. in-out register bit five conditions hole # . bit four conditions hole # , etc. bit zero conditions hole # . hole # is left blank. the # hole is always punched in this mode. typewriter the typewriter will operate in the input mode or the output mode. output mode tyo iot for each in-out transfer instruction one character is typed. the character is specified by the right six bits of the in-out register. input mode tyi iot this operation is completely asynchronous and is therefore handled differently than any of the preceding in-out operations. when a typewriter key is struck, program flag number one is set. at the same time the code for the struck key is presented to gates connected to the right six bits of the in-out register. this information will remain at the gate for a relatively long time by virtue of the slow mechanical action. a program designed to accept typed-in data would periodically check the status of program flag one. if at any time program flag one is found to be set, an in-out transfer instruction with address four must be executed for information to be transferred. this in-out transfer normally should not use the optional in-out halt. the information contained in the typewriter's coder is then read into the right six bits of the in-out register. optional input-output the pdp- is designed to accommodate a variety of input-output equipment. of particular interest is the ease with which new, and perhaps unusual, external equipment can be added to the machine. optional in-out devices include cathode ray tube display, magnetic tape, real time clock, line printer and analog to digital converters. the method of operation of pdp- with these optional devices is similar to the standard input-output equipment. sequence break system an optional in-out control is available for pdp- . this control, termed the sequence break system, allows concurrent operation of several in-out devices and the main sequence. the system has, nominally, automatic interrupt channels arranged in a priority chain. a break to a particular sequence may be initiated by the completion of an in-out device, the program, or an external signal. if this sequence has priority, the c(ac), c(io), c(pc), and c(ia) are stored in three fixed memory locations unique to that sequence. since the c(pc) and c(ia) are eighteen bits each, these two registers are stored in one memory location. the next instruction is taken from a fourth location. this instruction is usually a jump to a suitable routine. the program is now operating in the new sequence. this new sequence may be broken by a higher priority sequence. a typical program loop for handling an in-out sequence would contain to instructions, including the appropriate iot. these are followed by load ad and load io from the fixed locations and a special indirect jump through the location of the previous c(pc). this special jump also loads the ia. this last instruction terminates the sequence. high speed in-out channel the device connected to an in-out channel communicates directly with memory through the memory buffer register. at the completion of each machine instruction, a check is made to see if the in-out channel has a word for, or needs a word from, the memory. when necessary, a memory cycle is taken to serve the channel. the operation is initiated by an in-out command. the in-out transfer command indicates the nature of the transfer. the left half of the in-out register must contain the starting address of the transfer, and the right half must contain the number of words to be transferred. if the sequence break system is connected, the completion of the transfer will signal the proper sequence. if no sequence break system is connected, the completion of the in-out channel transfer sets a program flag. magnetic tape the system consists of tape units connected to the pdp- through a tape control (tc). this tape is read or written in ibm i format. two hundred characters, each having bits plus a parity bit, are written on each inch of tape and the tape moves at inches/sec. the tape control has the job of connecting a specific unit to the pdp- and is a switch. it also has the function of controlling the format of information that is read or written on tape. in-out class commands instruct tc to the type of information transfer and select the tape unit. another iot command synchronizes the transfer of information through the tc to the computer. the iot order to select the unit and function is decoded as follows: ) three bits specify the function of tc. ) the remaining bits select the unit. _iot motion commands for magnetic tape units_ _iot code_ _abbreviation_ _function_ ....nn mrb read a binary record. ....nn mra read an alphanumeric (bcd) record. ....nn mbb backspace a binary record. ....nn mba backspace an alphanumeric record. ....nn mwb write a binary record. ....nn mwa write an alphanumeric record. ....nn mlp move tape to lead point (rewind). where the octal digits, nn, specify the unit number. the motion commands have the deferred bit, thus, the program halts. if the tc is free, the command will be transferred to the tape control for action and the program restarts immediately. if the tape control is currently busy with an instruction, i.e., it hasn't finished a previous command, the motion command is held up until tc is free to execute the new command. the transfer of information from the computer to the tc is accomplished with the pause and skip command, mps or iot . this command has the deferred bit and halts a program until the tc can handle the transfer. on completion, the transfer occurs and the program restarts. this is used exclusively to synchronize the flow of information between a tape unit and the computer. this command normally skips the following instruction. if a flag is set in the tc, indicating incorrect information flow, the skip does not take place. the tc contains a bit buffer which holds a complete word while information is read or written. when an mps order is given and the unit is reading, the tc buffer is read into the io. the mps order given during writing causes the io to be transferred to the tc buffer. various conditions occurring in the tc cause the no-skip condition, when an mps is given. tape control flags are examined by the command, examine and clear flags, mec or iot . when mec is given, the flags are put into the io for program interrogation, and the flags cleared. the flags are: parity, end of tape, an end of record flag, and reading-writing check. the parity flag is set if the parity condition is not met while the tape is being read (during mwa, mwb, mra, or mrb). the end of tape flag is set when the tape comes to the end of tape, moving in either direction. three conditions set the read-write check flag: ) if tc is inactive, i.e., no unit or function selected, and an mps instruction is given. the mps becomes a no-operation, no-halt instruction. ) when reading information and not emptying the tc buffer, by giving an mps before more information arrives from tape. ) a unit becomes unavailable during a normal sequence. the end of record flag is set during reading or backspacing when the tape comes to an end of record gap. _writing a record of information_ information is written on the tape by giving a mwb or mwa command. this sets a write binary or a write alphanumeric into the tc and selects the unit. a motion select command is executed immediately if the tc is free, otherwise, the command waits until it can be executed. normal programming can continue after the mwa or mwb is given for approximately milliseconds. at this time, an mps order is given and the program pauses until information can be written. when the mps is restarted, information is transferred to the tc buffer from the io. if no flags have been set, the following instruction is skipped. three-quarter inches of blank tape is written by giving either the mwa or mwb order. an end of file is written as follows: ) four mwa commands write three inches of blank tape. ) then end of file character is written by giving the mps order. information is read and checked for correct parity while writing. if too many program steps are given between the motion select command, mwa or mwb and the first mps, the unit will deselect (or disconnect). the mps is then a no-operation command. _writing program_ as an example, a program to write k words in binary format from storage beginning in register a, using tape unit number , is shown. the following program is written in standard frap language. the program begins in register enterwrite. enterwrite mec ,clear flags initially mwb , lir x/-k+ ,initialize index register x b lio x/a+k- ,begin loop mps ,wait for tc then write c(z) jmp c ,error spx x/ ,add to index register x jmp b ,return of loop jmp done ,record written c mec ,tape error ril spi jmp rwcstop ,read-write error or tape fault ril spi jmp b+ ,tape end hlt ,tape parity done ,resume programming _reading information_ information is read by giving the mra or mrb order. almost ms. is available after a read order is given before information actually enters the tc buffer. to read a record of unknown length, the read order is first given. the mps order halts the program until six characters are assembled in the tc information buffer. the next instruction after the mps, a jump instruction, transfers control from the loop when any flag is set. the next instruction deposits the io. the record length is determined by not skipping after the mps order on the setting of the end of record flag. the read-write check flag or the end of record flag is then interrogated to see that the tape is actually at the end of record. if a tape is not at the end of record, then the tape is either at the end of the reel, or a parity check has occurred. _reading program_ program to read j binary words into storage beginning in register d, using tape unit , j is unknown. the program begins in register enteread. enteread mec ,clear flags initially mrb , dzm x ,put zero in memory location x e mps jmp outcheck dio x/d ,store in location modified by x snx x/+ ,add to c(x) jmp e outcheck mec ,examine flags spi ,end of record? jmp recordend ,yes hlt ,error recordend snx x/+ ,to find value of j " ,resume programming c(ia) = j " " " _forward spacing_ forward spacing is done by giving an mrb or mra order. this moves the tape forward with the read-write head positioned at the end of the following record. if n read orders are given, the tape is spaced forward n records. by giving the mec order, parity flags are examined to see that information on tape has been read correctly. _backspacing_ by giving an mba or mbb order the tape is moved backwards a record with the read-write heads positioned in the previous end of record gap. the end of record flag is set when the tape has moved backwards a record. _rewinding_ rewinding is accomplished by giving the rewind order, move tape to load point, mlp. the rewind order starts a unit rewinding and does not tie up the tc. if a motion command is given which calls for a unit that is rewinding, the command is executed, but the action will not take place until the unit is available. _unit availability_ a unit is unavailable to the program under the following conditions: . unit is rewinding. . tape is improperly loaded. . cover door open. . unit overloaded. . unit under manual control. . power off. a selected but unavailable unit holds up the tc if a motion order is given for the unit. the tc will be held up until the unit is ready. _flag positions_ _io bit_ _flag_ eor - end of record rwf - read-write eot - end of tape parity _connection with high speed channel_ the high speed channel directs the tape control, and word transfer, just as a program would. a unit is first started reading or writing. the high speed channel is given the memory location of the information, and the number of registers the words read or written will occupy. the channel effects the information transfer. thus, a high speed channel connected to a tape control handles the programming for the unit word transfers. completion of the block transfer is signified by either setting a program flag, or entering the sequence break. _connection with sequence break system_ when the tc is connected to the sequence break system, the program is automatically interrupted each time an mps command needs to be given. programming is unaffected during reading and a record may be read with no flags set. the tc initiates breaks so that an mps may be given in time. similarly, the break is initiated during writing each time an mps needs to be given. _motion command summary_ _time before _time between _time after end of _flags that first mps_ mps's_ record to deselect_ may be set_ mwa ms. us. ms. rwf (if unit mwb (longer time is deselected causes deselection) and mps given, or unit becomes unavailable), parity, eot. mra ms. < us. ms. rwf, (if mrb (longer time information misses information, is missed, or and unit becomes rwc set) unavailable), eot, eor, parity. mba - - ms. rwf (if unit mbb becomes unavailable), eor, eot. cathode-ray-tube display the pdp- cathode ray tube display is useful for presentation of graphical or tabular information to the operator. it uses a inch round tube with magnetic deflection. for each in-out transfer order, one point is displayed at the position indicated by the in-out register. bits - of the io indicate the x coordinate of the position, and bits - indicate the y coordinate. the display takes microseconds. an additional display option is a light pen. by use of this device the computer is signaled that the operator is interested in the last point displayed. thus the program can take appropriate action such as changing the display or shifting operation to another program. a smaller display is available. this display uses a five inch, high resolution cathode ray tube. the tube is equipped with a mounting bezel to accept a camera or photomultiplier device. the operation of this display is similar to that of the inch, except that bits are decoded for each axis. real time clock a special input register may be connected to operate as a real time clock. this is a counting register operated by a crystal controlled oscillator. the clock can be reset to zero by manual operation. a toggle switch interlock prevents an accidental reset. the state of this counter may be read at any time by the appropriate in-out transfer instruction. line printer a column anelex printer and control are available as an option for pdp- . the control contains a one line buffer. this buffer is cleared by the completion of an order to space the paper one position (psp). the buffer is filled from the in-out register by a succession of load buffer orders (plb). the first plb will put the six characters represented by c(io) in the leading (left-hand) column positions of the buffer. after the buffer is loaded, the order, print (pnt), is given. utility programs frap- - the assembly program an assembler or compiler prepares a machine language tape suitable for direct interpretation by the computer from a program tape in operator language. generally speaking, one statement accepted by frap produces one instruction for the machine. a single statement written for the pdp- compiler, decal- , may cause several instructions to be written. thus, frap causes a for mapping of instructions for statements while decal may produce many instructions from one statement. in addition to allowing program tapes to be prepared with off line equipment, an assembly program has other functions. normally, the machine would require bits or octal digits to be written for each instruction used in the machine. frap allows mnemonic symbols to be used for the instructions. these mnemonic symbols aid the programmer by representing the instruction in an easily remembered form. in addition to allowing mnemonic symbols to represent the instructions, variable length sequences of alphanumeric characters may be used to represent memory addresses in symbolic form. the assembly program does the address bookkeeping for the programmer. a short example of a frap program is on page . since few characters limit or control the format of instructions written in frap- language, it is possible to write instructions in almost any format or style. frap- may also be used to prepare tapes for interpretive programming, since arbitrary definitions for operation code symbols are permitted. a feature useful both for ease of programming and for machine simulation is the ability to call for a series of instructions (macro-instruction) to be written. frequently used instruction sequences thus need only to be defined once. decal - the compiler program decal- (digital equipment compiler, assembler, and linking loader for pdp- ) is an integrated programming system for pdp- . it incorporates in one system all of the essential features of advanced assemblers, compilers, and loaders. decal is both an assembler and compiler. it combines the one-to-one translation facilities of an assembler, and the one-to-many translation facilities of a formula translation compiler. problem oriented language statements may be freely intermixed with symbolic machine language instructions. a flexible loader is available to allow the specification of program location at load time. the programmer may specify that certain variables and constants are "systems" variables and constants. the symbols so defined are universally used in a system of many routines. thus, communications between parts of a major program is facilitated even though these parts may be compiled separately. storage requirements for a large program are lessened by this technique. decal is an open-ended programming system and can be modified without a detailed understanding of the internal operation. this is achieved by means of a recursive definition facility based on a skeleton compiler with a small set of logical capabilities. the skeleton compiler acts as a bootstrap for introducing more sophisticated facilities. the compiler will be delivered with a fully defined subset of formula translation operators. additional subsets may be defined by the user to best fit his source language. floating point subroutines a set of subroutines are provided with the pdp- to perform floating point arithmetic. in these, the pdp- bit word is divided to form a bit mantissa, a, and bit exponent, b. numbers, thus, appear in the form: k = ax ^b where, a, is considered to be in fractional form in the range / <= a < , and b is an integer, <= b < . this gives number, k, the range ^{- } < k < ^{+ }. the subroutines are called with one operand in the accumulator. after the subroutine has been executed, the accumulator contains the answer. thus floating point numbers are essentially handled as regular logical works. the format of the number allows magnitude comparisons to be made by conventional arithmetic as bit is the sign of the number, bits to the exponent, and the remaining bits, together with the sign bit, the mantissa in ones complement arithmetic. the arithmetic subroutines are: add, subtract, multiply, divide, convert a floating point number to binary, convert a binary number to a floating number. additional routines form: [square root of x], e^x, ln x, sine(~pi~/ )x, cos(~pi~/ )x, tan^{- }x. there are also programs to convert between floating decimal numbers and pdp- floating numbers. routines which require two operands, e.g., add, subtract, multiply and divide, require an index register to specify the address of the second operand. an index register also specifies parameters in data conversions, e.g., the position of the binary point when converting a binary number to a standard floating number. using the floating point subroutines, additional routines may be written which handle complex floating numbers and vector and matrix algebra. maintenance routines maintenance routines are used exclusively to check the operation of the machine. these routines are operated while varying the bias supply voltages, and thus a check is made on possible degradation of all components which would affect the operation of the machine. miscellaneous routines a variety of additional programs are provided with pdp- . one of the more important programs is the typewriter interrogator program (tip). tip allows the typewriter to be used most effectively as an input-output link by which programs and data are examined and modified. the features include request for printing of a series of registers, interrogation and modification of the contents of registers, and the ability to request new tapes after programs have been suitably modified. communication is done completely via the typewriter in either octal numbers, decimal numbers, or alphanumeric codes. register contents are presented in similar form. other miscellaneous routines handle arithmetic processes, e.g., number conversions, and communication with the input or output devices. these routines include various format print outs, paper tape and magnetic tape read in programs, and display subroutines. * * * * * [illustration: system block diagram figure ] [illustration: instruction format figure ] [illustration: figure ] * * * * * transcriber's notes: c (x) and c(x) standardized to c(x). usec and usec. standardized to usec. throughout text. other changes to the original text are listed below. figure is referred to in the text, but a copy could not be located. underlined text is enclosed by underscores. superscripts are marked with carats x^ and y^{- }. greek symbols are surrounded by ~tildes~. transcriber changes: table of contents: originally 'operation' (=operating= speeds) table of contents: originally 'frap' (=frap=) table of contents: originally 'routines' (=subroutines=) page : originally 'theoperate' (while a program is operating by means of =the operate= instruction.) page : added comma (the instruction base address, =y,= is in octal digits through .) page : standardized from 'sub-routines' (the conversion of decimal numbers into the binary system for use by the machine may be performed automatically by =subroutines=.) page : standardized from 'sub-routine' (the output conversion of binary numbers into decimals is done by =subroutine=.) page : added comma (this instruction will shift the contents of the combined register right n =positions,= where n is octal digits - of the instruction word.) page : moved comma. was 'left, n positions' (this instruction will shift the contents of the combined registers =left n positions,= where n is octal digits - of the instruction word.) page : was 'know' (most in-out operations require a =known= minimum time before completion.) page : removed inconsistent comma (these are the test address ( bits), the test word ( bits), and the sense =switches= ( bits).) page : changed comma to period (the computer will halt at the completion of each memory =cycle.= this switch is particularly useful in debugging programs.) page : was 'tpae' (during reading or backspacing when the =tape= comes to an end of record gap.) page : standardized from 'de-select' (the unit will =deselect= (or disconnect).) page : was 'propares' (an assembler or compiler =prepares= a machine language tape suitable for direct interpretation) page : removed comma (frequently used instruction =sequences= thus need only to be defined once.) page : was 'routiines' (=routines= which require two operands, e.g., add, subtract, multiply and divide) produced by core historical literature in agriculture (chla), cornell university) electricity for the farm the macmillan company new york · boston · chicago · dallas atlanta · san francisco macmillan & co., limited london · bombay · calcutta · melbourne the macmillan co. of canada, ltd. toronto [illustration: even the tiny trout brook becomes a thing of utility as well as of joy (_courtesy of the fitz water wheel company, hanover, pa._)] electricity for the farm light, heat and power by inexpensive methods from the water wheel or farm engine by frederick irving anderson author of "the farmer of to-morrow," etc., etc. new york the macmillan company _all rights reserved_ copyright, by the curtis publishing company the country gentleman copyright, by the macmillan company set up and electrotyped. published april, . preface this book is designed primarily to give the farmer a practical working knowledge of electricity for use as light, heat, and power on the farm. the electric generator, the dynamo, is explained in detail; and there are chapters on electric transmission and house-wiring, by which the farm mechanic is enabled to install his own plant without the aid and expense of an expert. with modern appliances, within the means of the average farmer, the generation of electricity, with its unique conveniences, becomes automatic, provided some dependable source of power is to be had--such as a water wheel, gasoline (or other form of internal combustion) engine, or the ordinary windmill. the water wheel is the ideal prime mover for the dynamo in isolated plants. since water-power is running to waste on tens of thousands of our farms throughout the country, several chapters are devoted to this phase of the subject: these include descriptions and working diagrams of weirs and other simple devices for measuring the flow of streams; there are tables and formulas by which any one, with a knowledge of simple arithmetic, may determine the power to be had from falling water under given conditions; and in addition, there are diagrams showing in general the method of construction of dams, bulkheads, races, flumes, etc., from materials usually to be found on a farm. the tiny unconsidered brook that waters the farm pasture frequently possesses power enough to supply the farmstead with clean, cool, safe light in place of the dangerous, inconvenient oil lamp; a small stream capable of developing from twenty-five to fifty horsepower will supply a farmer (at practically no expense beyond the original cost of installation) not only with light, but with power for even the heavier farm operations, as threshing; and in addition will do the washing, ironing, and cooking, and at the same time keep the house warm in the coldest weather. less than one horsepower of energy will light the farmstead; less than five horsepower of energy will provide light and small power, and take the drudgery out of the kitchen. for those not fortunate enough to possess water-power which can be developed, there are chapters on the use of the farm gasoline engine and windmill, in connection with the modern storage battery, as sources of electric current. it is desired to make acknowledgment for illustrations and assistance in gathering material for the book, to the editors of _the country gentleman_, philadelphia, pa.; the crocker-wheeler company, ampere, n. j.; the general electric company, schenectady, n. y.; the weston electrical instrument company, of newark, n. j.; the chase turbine manufacturing company, orange, mass.; the c. p. bradway machine works, west stafford, conn.; the pelton water wheel company, san francisco and new york; the ward leonard manufacturing company, bronxville, n. y.; the fairbanks, morse company, chicago; and the fitz water wheel company, hanover, pa. table of contents page introduction xvii part i water-power chapter i a working plant the "agriculturist"--an old chair factory--a neighbor's home-coming--the idle wheel in commission again--light, heat and power for nothing--advantages of electricity chapter ii a little prospecting small amount of water required for an electric plant--exploring, on a dull day--a rough and ready weir--what a little water will do--the water wheel and the dynamo--electricity consumed the instant it is produced--the price of the average small plant, not counting labor chapter iii how to measure water-power what is a horsepower?--how the carthaginians manufactured horsepower--all that goes up must come down--how the sun lifts water up for us to use--water the ideal power for generating electricity--the weir--table for estimating flow of streams with a weir--another method of measuring--figuring water horsepower--the size of the wheel--what head is required--quantity of water necessary chapter iv the water wheel and how to install it different types of water wheels--the impulse and the reaction wheels--the impulse wheel adapted to high heads and small amount of water--pipe lines--table of resistance in pipes--advantages and disadvantages of the impulse wheel--other forms of impulse wheels--the reaction turbine, suited to low heads and large quantity of water--its advantages and limitations--developing a water-power project: the dam; the race; the flume; the penstock; and the tailrace--water rights for the farmer part ii electricity chapter v the dynamo; what it does, and how electricity compared to the heat and light of the sun--the simple dynamo--the amount of electric energy a dynamo will generate--the modern dynamo--measuring power in terms of electricity--the volt--the ampere--the ohm--the watt and the kilowatt--ohm's law of the electric circuit, and some examples of its application--direct current, and alternating current--three types of direct-current dynamos: series, shunt, and compound chapter vi what size plant to install the farmer's wife his partner--little and big plants--limiting factors--fluctuations in water supply--the average plant--the actual plant--amount of current required for various operations--standard voltage--a specimen allowance for electric light--heating and cooking by electricity--electric power: the electric motor chapter vii transmission lines copper wire--setting of poles--loss of power in transmission--ohm's law and examples of how it is used in figuring size of wire--copper-wire tables--examples of transmission lines--when to use high voltages--over-compounding a dynamo to overcome transmission loss chapter viii wiring the house the insurance code--different kinds of wiring described--wooden moulding cheap and effective--the distributing panel--branch circuits--protecting the circuits--the use of porcelain tubes and other insulating devices--putting up chandeliers and wall-brackets--"multiple" connections--how to connect a wall switch--special wiring required for heat and power circuits--knob and cleat wiring, its advantages and disadvantages chapter ix the electric plant at work direct-connected generating sets--belt drive--the switchboard--governors and voltage regulators--methods of achieving constant pressure at all loads: over-compounding the dynamo; a system of resistances (a home-made electric radiator); regulating voltage by means of the rheostat--automatic devices--putting the plant in operation part iii gasoline engines, windmills, etc. the storage batteries chapter x gasoline engine plants the standard voltage set--two-cycle and four-cycle gasoline engines--horsepower, and fuel consumption--efficiency of small engines and generators--cost of operating a one-kilowatt plant chapter xi the storage battery what a storage battery does--the lead battery and the edison battery--economy of tungsten lamps for storage batteries--the low-voltage battery for electric light--how to figure the capacity of a battery--table of light requirements for a farm house--watt-hours and lamp-hours--the cost of storage battery current--how to charge a storage battery--care of storage batteries chapter xii battery charging devices the automatic plant most desirable--how an automobile lighting and starting system works--how the same results can be achieved in house lighting, by means of automatic devices--plants without automatic regulation--care necessary--the use of heating devices on storage battery current--portable batteries--an electricity "route"--automobile power for lighting a few lamps illustrations even the tiny trout brook becomes a thing of utility as well as of joy _frontispiece_ farm labor and materials built this crib and stone dam measuring a small stream with a weir efficient modern adaptations of the archaic undershot and overshot water wheels a direct-current dynamo or motor, showing details of construction details of voltmeter or ammeter instantaneous photograph of high-pressure water jet being quenched by buckets of a tangential wheel a tangential wheel, and a dynamo keyed to the same shaft--the ideal method for generating electricity a rough-and-ready farm electric plant, supplying two farms with light, heat and power; and a ward leonard-type circuit breaker for charging storage batteries introduction the sight of a dozen or so fat young horses and mares feeding and frolicking on the wild range of the southwest would probably inspire the average farmer as an awful example of horsepower running to waste. if, by some miracle, he came on such a sight in his own pastures, he would probably consume much time practising the impossible art of "creasing" the wild creatures with a rifle bullet--after the style of kit carson and other free rovers of the old prairies when they were in need of a new mount. he would probably spend uncounted hours behind the barn learning to throw a lariat; and one fine day he would sally forth to capture a horsepower or two--and, once captured, he would use strength and strategy breaking the wild beast to harness. a single horsepower--animal--will do the work of lifting , pounds one foot in one minute, providing the animal is young, and sound, and is fed quarts of oats and or pounds of hay a day, and is given a chance to rest hours out of --providing also it has a dentist to take care of its teeth occasionally, and a blacksmith chiropodist to keep it in shoes. on the hoof, this horsepower is worth about $ --unless the farmer is looking for something fancy in the way of drafters, when he will have to go as high as $ for a big fellow. and after or years, the farmer would look around for another horse, because an animal grows old. this animal horsepower isn't a very efficient horsepower. in fact, it is less than three-fourths of an actual horsepower, as engineers use the term. a real horsepower will do the work of lifting , pounds one foot in one minute--or pounds one foot in one second. burn a pint of gasoline, with pounds of air, in a gasoline engine, and the engine will supply one , -pound horsepower for an hour. the gasoline will cost about cents, and the air is supplied free. if it was the air that cost two cents a pound, instead of the gasoline, the automobile industry would undoubtedly stop where it began some fifteen years ago. it is human nature, however, to grumble over this two cents. yet the average farmer who would get excited if sound young chunks and drafters were running wild across his pastures, is not inspired by any similar desire of possession and mastery by the sight of a brook, or a rivulet that waters his meadows. this brook or river is flowing down hill to the sea. every , gallons that falls one foot in one minute; every gallons that falls feet in one minute; or every gallons that falls feet in one minute, means the power of one horse going to waste--not the $ flesh-and-blood kind that can lift only , pounds a foot a minute--but the , foot-pound kind. thousands of farms have small streams in their very dooryard, capable of developing five, ten, twenty, fifty horsepower twenty-four hours a day, for the greater part of the year. within a quarter of a mile of the great majority of farms (outside of the dry lands themselves) there are such streams. only a small fraction of one per cent of them have been put to work, made to pay their passage from the hills to the sea. the united states government geological survey engineers recently made an estimate of the waterfalls capable of developing , horsepower and over, that are running to waste, unused, in this country. they estimated that there is available, every second of the day and night, some , , horsepower, in dry weather--and twice this during the eight wet months of the year. the waterfall capable of giving up , horsepower in energy is not the subject of these chapters. it is the small streams--the brooks, the creeks, the rivulets--which feed the , horsepower torrents, make them possible, that are of interest to the farmer. these small streams thread every township, every county, seeking the easiest way to the main valleys where they come together in great rivers. what profitable crop on your farm removes the least plant food? a bee-farmer enters his honey for the prize in this contest. another farmer maintains that his ice-crop is the winner. but electricity generated from falling water of a brook meandering across one's acres, comes nearer to the correct answer of how to make something out of nothing. it merely utilizes the wasted energy of water rolling down hill--the weight of water, the pulling power of gravity. water is still water, after it has run through a turbine wheel to turn an electric generator. it is still wet; it is there for watering the stock; and a few rods further down stream, where it drops five or ten feet again, it can be made to do the same work over again--and over and over again as long as it continues to fall, on its journey to the sea. the city of los angeles has a municipal water plant, generating , horsepower of electricity, in which the water is used three times in its fall of , feet; and in the end, where it runs out of the race in the valley, it is sold for irrigation. one water-horsepower will furnish light for the average farm; five water-horsepower will furnish light and power, and do the ironing and baking. the cost of installing a plant of five water-horsepower should not exceed the cost of one sound young horse, the $ kind--under conditions which are to be found on thousands of farms and farm communities in the east, the central west, and the pacific states. this electrical horsepower will work hours a day, winter and summer, and the farmer would not have to grow oats and hay for it on land that might better be used in growing food for human beings. it would not become "aged" at the end of ten or fifteen years, and the expense of maintenance would be practically nothing after the first cost of installation. it would require only water as food--waste water. two hundred and fifty cubic feet of water a minute, falling ten feet, will supply the average farm with all the conveniences of electricity. this is a very modest creek--the kind of brook or creek that is ignored by the man who would think time well spent in putting in a week capturing a wild horse, if a miracle should send such a beast within reach. and the task of harnessing and breaking this water-horsepower is much more simple and less dangerous than the task of breaking a colt to harness. part i water-power electricity for the farm chapter i a working plant the "agriculturist"--an old chair factory--a neighbor's home-coming--the idle wheel in commission again--light, heat and power for nothing--advantages of electricity. let us take an actual instance of one man who did go ahead and find out by experience just how intricate and just how simple a thing electricity from farm water-power is. this man's name was perkins, or, we will call him that, in relating this story. perkins was what some people call, not a farmer, but an "agriculturist,"--that is, he was a back-to-the-land man. he had been born and raised on a farm. he knew that you must harness a horse on the left side, milk a cow on the right, that wagon nuts tighten the way the wheel rims, and that a fresh egg will not float. he had a farm that would grow enough clover to fill the average dairy if he fed it lime; he had a boy coming to school age; and both he and his wife wanted to get back to the country. they had their little savings, and they wanted, first of all, to take a vacation, getting acquainted with their farm. they hadn't taken a vacation in fifteen years. he moved in, late in the summer, and started out to get acquainted with his neighbors, as well as his land. this was in the new england hills. water courses cut through everywhere. in regard to its bountiful water supply, the neighborhood had much in common with all the states east of the mississippi, along the atlantic seaboard, in the lake region of the central west, and in the pacific states. with this difference; the water courses in his neighborhood had once been of economic importance. a mountain river flowed down his valley. up and down the valley one met ramshackle mills, fallen into decay. many years ago before railroads came, before it was easy to haul coal from place to place to make steam, these little mills were centers of thriving industries, which depended on the power of falling water to make turned articles, spin cotton, and so forth. then the railroads came, and it was easy to haul coal to make steam. and the same railroads that hauled the coal to make steam, were there to haul away the articles manufactured by steam power. so in time the little manufacturing plants on the river back in the hills quit business and moved to railroad stations. then new england, from being a manufacturing community made up of many small isolated water plants, came to be a community made up of huge arteries and laterals of smoke stacks that fringed the railroads. where the railroad happened to follow a river course--as the connecticut river--the water-power plants remained; but the little plants back in the hills were wiped off the map--because steam power with railroads at the front door proved cheaper than water-power with railroads ten miles away. one night perkins came in late from a long drive with his next-door neighbor. he had learned the first rule of courtesy in the country, which is to unhitch his own side of the horse and help back the buggy into the shed. they stumbled around in the barn putting up the horse, and getting down hay and grain for it, by the light of an oil lantern, which was set on the floor in a place convenient to be kicked over. he went inside and took supper by the light of a smoky smelly oil lamp, that filled the room full of dark corners; and when supper was over, the farmwife groped about in the cellar putting things away by the light of a candle. the next day his neighbor was grinding cider at his ramshackle water mill--one of the operations for which a week must be set aside every fall. perkins sat on a log and listened to the crunch-crunch of the apples in the chute, and the drip of the frothy yellow liquid that fell into waiting buckets. "how much power have you got here?" he asked. "thirty or forty horsepower, i guess." "what do you do with it, besides grinding cider to pickle your neighbors' digestion with?" "nothing much. i've got a planer and a moulding machine in there, to work up jags of lumber occasionally. that's all. this mill was a chair-factory in my grandfather's day, back in ." "do you use it thirty days in a year?" "no; not half that." "what are you going to do with it this winter?" "nothing; i keep the gate open and the wheel turning, so it won't freeze, but nothing else. i am going to take the family to texas to visit my wife's folks for three months. we've worked hard enough to take a vacation." "will you rent me the mill while you are gone?" "go ahead; you can have it for nothing, if you will watch the ice." "all right; let me know when you come back and i'll drive to town and bring you home." * * * * * three months went by, and one day in february the city man, in response to a letter, hitched up and drove to town to bring his neighbor back home. it was four o'clock in the afternoon when they started out, and it was six--dark--when they turned the bend in the road to the farm house. they helped the wife and children out, with their baggage, and as perkins opened the door of the house, he reached up on the wall and turned something that clicked sharply. instantly light sprang from everywhere. in the barn-yard a street lamp with an -inch reflector illuminated all under it for a space of feet with bright white rays of light. another street lamp hung over the watering trough. the barn doors and windows burst forth in light. there was not a dark corner to be found anywhere. in the house it was the same. perkins led the amazed procession from room to room of the house they had shut up for the winter. on the wall in the hall outside of every room was a button which he pushed, and the room became as light as day before they entered. the cellar door, in opening, automatically lighted a lamp illuminating that cavern as it had never been lighted before since the day a house was built over it. needless to say, the farmer and his family were reduced to a state of speechlessness. "how the deuce did you do it?" finally articulated the farmer. "i put your idle water wheel to work," said perkins; and then, satisfied with this exhibition, he put them back in the sleigh and drove to his home, where his wife had supper waiting. while the men were putting up the team in the electric lighted barn, the farmwife went into the kitchen. her hostess was cooking supper on an electric stove. it looked like a city gas range and it cooked all their meals, and did the baking besides. a hot-water tank stood against the wall, not connected to anything hot, apparently. but it was scalding hot, by virtue of a little electric water heater the size of a quart tin can, connected at the bottom. twenty-four hours a day the water wheel pumped electricity into that "can," so that hot water was to be had at any hour simply by turning a faucet. in the laundry there was an electric pump that kept the tank in the attic filled automatically. when the level of water in this tank fell to a certain point, a float operated a switch that started the pump; and when the water level reached a certain height, the same float stopped the pump. a small motor, the size of a medium hubbard squash operated a washing machine and wringer on wash days. this same motor was a man-of-all-work for this house, for, when called on, it turned the separator, ground and polished knives and silverware, spun the sewing machine, and worked the vacuum cleaner. over the dining room table hung the same hanging shade of old days, but the oil lamp itself was gone. in its place was a -watt tungsten lamp whose rays made the white table cloth fairly glisten. the wires carrying electricity to this lamp were threaded through the chains reaching to the ceiling, and one had to look twice to see where the current came from. in the sitting room, a cluster of electric bulbs glowed from a fancy wicker work basket that hung from the ceiling. the housewife had made use of what she had throughout the house. old-fashioned candle-shades sat like cocked hats astride electric bulbs. there is little heat to an electric bulb for the reason that the white-hot wire that gives the light is made to burn in high vacuum, which transmits heat very slowly. the housewife had taken advantage of this fact and from every corner gleamed lights dressed in fancy designs of tissue paper and silk. "now we will talk business," said perkins when supper was over and they had lighted their pipes. the returned native looked dubious. his new england training had warned him long ago that one cannot expect to get something for nothing, and he felt sure there was a joker in this affair. "how much do i owe you?" he asked. "nothing," said perkins. "you furnish the water-power with your idle wheel, and i furnish the electric installation. this is only a small plant i have put in, but it gives us enough electricity to go around, with a margin for emergencies. i have taken the liberty of wiring your house and your horse-barn and cow-barn and your barn-yard. altogether, i suppose you have lights about the place, and during these long winter days you will keep most of them going from to hours a night and or hours in the early morning. if you were in town, those lights would cost you about cents an hour, at the commercial rate of electricity. say cents a day--eighteen dollars a month. that isn't a very big electric light bill for some people i know in town--and they consider themselves lucky to have the privilege of buying electricity at that rate. your wheel is running all winter to prevent ice from forming and smashing it. it might just as well be spinning the dynamo. "if you think it worth while," continued perkins,--"this $ worth of light you have on tap night and morning, or any hour of the day,--we will say the account is settled. that is, of course, if you will give me the use of half the electricity that your idle wheel is grinding out with my second-hand dynamo. we have about eight electrical horsepower on our wires, without overloading the machine. next spring i am going to stock up this place; and i think about the first thing i do, when my dairy is running, will be to put in a milking machine and let electricity do the milking for me. it will also fill my silo, grind my mowing-machine knives, saw my wood, and keep water running in my barn. you will probably want to do the same. "but what it does for us men in the barn and barn-yard, isn't to be compared to what it does for the women in the house. when my wife wants a hot oven she presses a button. when she wants to put the 'fire' out, she presses another. that's all there is to it. no heat, no smoke, no ashes. the same with ironing--and washing. no oil lamps to fill, no wicks to trim, no chimneys to wash, no kerosene to kick over and start a fire." "you say the current you have put in my house would cost me about $ a month, in town." "yes, about that. making electricity from coal costs money." "what does it cost here?" "practically nothing. your river, that has been running to waste ever since your grandfather gave up making chairs, does the work. there is nothing about a dynamo to wear out, except the bearings, and these can be replaced once every five or ten years for a trifle. the machine needs to be oiled and cared for--fill the oil cups about once in three days. your water wheel needs the same attention. that's all there is to it. you can figure the cost of your current yourself--just about the cost of the lubricating oil you use--and the cost of the time you give it--about the same time you give to any piece of good machinery, from a sulky plow to a cream separator." this is a true story. this electric plant, where perkins furnishes the electric end, and his neighbor the water-power, has been running now for two years, grinding out electricity for the two places twenty-four hours a day. perkins was not an electrical engineer. he was just a plain intelligent american citizen who found sufficient knowledge in books to enable him to install and operate this plant. frequently he is away for long periods, but his neighbor (who has lost his original terror of electricity) takes care of the plant. in fact, this farmer has given a lot of study to the thing, through curiosity, until he knows fully as much about it now as his city neighbor. he had the usual idea, at the start, that a current strong enough to light a candlepower lamp would kick like a mule if a man happened to get behind it. he watched the city man handle bare wires and finally he plucked up courage to do it himself. it was a -volt current, the pressure used in our cities for domestic lighting. the funny part about it was, the farmer could not feel it at all at first. his fingers were calloused and no current could pass through them. finally he sandpapered his fingers and tried it again. then he was able to get the "tickle" of volts. it wasn't so deadly after all--about the strength of a weak medical battery, with which every one is familiar. a current of volts cannot do any harm to the human body unless contact is made over a very large surface, which is impossible unless a man goes to a lot of trouble to make such a contact. a current of volts pressure--the pressure used in cities for motors--has a little more "kick" to it, but still is not uncomfortable. when the pressure rises to volts (the pressure used in trolley wires for street cars), it begins to be dangerous. but there is no reason why a farm plant should be over volts, under usual conditions; engineers have decided on this pressure as the best adapted to domestic use, and manufacturers who turn out the numerous electrical devices, such as irons, toasters, massage machines, etc., fit their standard instruments to this voltage. [illustration: farm labor and materials built this crib and stone dam] as to the cost of this co-operative plant--it was in the neighborhood of $ . as we have said, it provided eight electrical horsepower on tap at any hour of the day or night--enough for the two farms, and a surplus for neighbors, if they wished to string lines and make use of it. the dynamo, a direct-current machine, volts pressure, and what is known in the trade as "compound,"--that is, a machine that maintains a constant pressure automatically and does not require an attendant--was picked up second-hand, through a newspaper "ad" and cost $ . the switchboard, a make-shift affair, not very handsome, but just as serviceable as if it were made of marble, cost less than $ all told. the transmission wire cost $ a hundred pounds; it is of copper, and covered with weatherproofed tape. perkins bought a -cent book on house-wiring, and did the wiring himself, the way the book told him to, a simple operation. for fixtures, as we have said, his wife devised fancy shades out of mexican baskets, tissue paper, and silk, in which are hidden electric globes that glow like fire-flies at the pressing of a button. the lamps themselves are mostly old-style carbon lamps, which can be bought at cents each retail. in his living room and dining room he used the new-style tungsten lamps instead of old-style carbon. these cost cents each. incandescent lamps are rated for , hours useful life. the advantage of tungsten lights is that they give three times as much light for the same expenditure of current as carbon lights. this is a big advantage in the city, where current is costly; but it is not so much of an advantage in the country where a farmer has plenty of water-power--because his current costs him practically nothing, and he can afford to be wasteful of it to save money in lamps. another advantage he has over his city cousin: in town, an incandescent lamp is thrown away after it has been used , hours because after that it gives only % of the light it did when new--quite an item when one is paying for current. the experience of perkins and his neighbor in their coöperative plant has been that they have excess light anyway, and if a few bulbs fall off a fifth in efficiency, it is not noticeable. as a matter of fact most of their bulbs have been in use without replacing for the two years the plant has been in operation. the lamps are on the wall or the ceiling, out of the way, not liable to be broken; so the actual expense in replacing lamps is less than for lamp chimneys in the old days. insurance companies recognize that a large percentage of farm fires comes from the use of kerosene; for this reason, they are willing to make special rates for farm homes lighted by electricity. they prescribe certain rules for wiring a house, and they insist that their agent inspect and pass such wiring before current is turned on. once the wiring is passed, the advantage is all in favor of the farmer with electricity over the farmer with kerosene. the national board of fire underwriters is sufficiently logical in its demands, and powerful enough, so that manufacturers who turn out the necessary fittings find no sale for devices that do not conform to insurance standards. therefore it is difficult to go wrong in wiring a house. finally, as to the added value a water-power electric plant adds to the selling price of a farm. let the farmer answer this question for himself. if he can advertise his farm for sale, with a paragraph running: "hydroelectric plant on the premises, furnishing electricity for light, heat, and power"--what do you suppose a wide-awake purchaser would be willing to pay for that? perkins and his neighbor believe that $ , is a very modest estimate added by their electric plant to both places. and they talk of doing still more. they use only a quarter of the power of the water that is running to waste through the wheel. they are figuring on installing a larger dynamo, of say electrical horse-power, which will provide clean, dry, safe heat for their houses even on the coldest days in winter. when they have done this, they will consider that they are really putting their small river to work. chapter ii a little prospecting small amount of water required for an electric plant--exploring, on a dull day--a rough and ready weir--what a little water will do--the water wheel and the dynamo--electricity consumed the instant it is produced--the price of the average small plant, not counting labor. the average farmer makes the mistake of considering that one must have a river of some size to develop power of any practical use. on your next free day do a little prospecting. we have already said that cubic feet of water falling feet a minute will provide light, heat and small motor power for the average farm. a single water horsepower will generate enough electricity to provide light for the house and barn. but let us take five horsepower as a desirable minimum in this instance. [illustration: measuring a small stream with a weir] in your neighborhood there is a creek three or four feet wide, toiling along day by day, at its task of watering your fields. find a wide board a little longer than the width of this creek you have scorned. set it upright across the stream between the banks, so that no water flows around the ends or under it. it should be high enough to set the water back to a dead level for a few feet upstream, before it overflows. cut a gate in this board, say three feet wide and ten inches deep, or according to the size of a stream. cut this gate from the top, so that all the water of the stream will flow through the opening, and still maintain a level for several feet back of the board. this is what engineers call a weir, a handy contrivance for measuring the flow of small streams. experts have figured out an elaborate system of tables as to weirs. all we need to do now, in this rough survey, is to figure out the number of square inches of water flowing through this opening and falling on the other side. with a rule, measure the depth of the overflowing water, from the bottom of the opening to the top of the dead level of the water behind the board. multiply this depth by the width of the opening, which will give the square inches of water escaping. for every square inch of this water escaping, engineers tell us that stream is capable of delivering, roughly, one cubic foot of water a minute. thus, if the water is inches deep in an opening inches wide, then the number of cubic feet this stream is delivering each minute is times , or cubic feet a minute. so, a stream inches wide, with a uniform depth of inches running through our weir is capable of supplying the demands of the average farm in terms of electricity. providing, of course, that the lay of the land is such that this water can be made to fall feet into a water wheel. go upstream and make a rough survey of the fall. in the majority of instances (unless this is some sluggish stream in a flat prairie) it will be found feasible to divert the stream from its main channel by means of a race--an artificial channel--and to convey it to a not far-distant spot where the necessary fall can be had at an angle of about degrees from horizontal. if you find there is _twice_ as much water as you need for the amount of power you require, a five-foot fall will give the same result. or, if there is only _one-half_ as much water as the cubic feet specified, you can still obtain your theoretical five horsepower if the means are at hand for providing a fall of twenty feet instead of ten. do not make the very common mistake of figuring that a stream is delivering a cubic foot a minute to each square inch of weir opening, simply because it _fills_ a certain opening. it is the excess water, falling _over_ the opening, after the stream has set back to a permanent dead level, that is to be measured. this farmer who spends an idle day measuring the flow of his brook with a notched board, may say here: "this is all very well. this is the spring of the year, when my brook is flowing at high-water mark. what am i going to do in the dry months of summer, when there are not cubic feet of water escaping every minute?" there are several answers to this question, which will be taken up in detail in subsequent chapters. here, let us say, even if this brook does flow in sufficient volume only months in a year--the dark months, by the way,--is not electricity and the many benefits it provides worth having eight months in the year? my garden provides fresh vegetables four months a year. because it withers and dies and lies covered with snow during the winter, is that any reason why i should not plow and manure and plant my garden when spring comes again? a water wheel, the modern turbine, is a circular fan with curved iron blades, revolving in an iron case. water, forced through the blades of this fan by its own weight, causes the wheel to revolve on its axis; and the fan, in turn causes a shaft fitted with pulleys to revolve. the water, by giving the iron-bladed fan a turning movement as it rushes through, imparts to it mechanical power. the shaft set in motion by means of this mechanical power is, in turn, belted to the pulley of a dynamo. this dynamo consists, first, of a shaft on which is placed a spool, wound in a curious way, with many turns of insulated copper wire. this spool revolves freely in an air space surrounded by electric magnets. the spool does not touch these magnets. it is so nicely balanced that the weight of a finger will turn it. yet, when it is revolved by water-power at a predetermined speed--say , revolutions a minute--it generates electricity, transforms the mechanical power of the water wheel into another form of energy--a form of energy which can be carried for long distances on copper wires, which can, by touching a button, be itself converted into light, or heat, or back into mechanical energy again. if two wires be led from opposite sides of this revolving spool, and an electric lamp be connected from one to the other wire, the lamp will be lighted--will grow white hot,--hence _incandescent light_. the instant this lamp is turned on, the revolving spool feels a stress, the magnets by which it is surrounded begin to pull back on it. the power of the water wheel, however, overcomes this pull. if one hundred lights be turned on, the backward pull of the magnets surrounding the spool will be one hundred times as strong as for one light. for every ounce of electrical energy used in light or heat or power, the dynamo will require a like ounce of mechanical power from the water wheel which drives it. the story is told of a canny scotch engineer, who, in the first days of dynamos, not so very long ago, scoffed at the suggestion that such a spool, spinning in free air, in well lubricated bearings, could bring his big corliss steam engine to a stop. yet he saw it done simply by belting this "spool," a dynamo, to his engine and asking the dynamo for more power in terms of light than his steam could deliver in terms of mechanical power to overcome the pull of the magnets. electricity must be consumed the instant it is generated (except in rare instances where small amounts are accumulated in storage batteries by a chemical process). the pressure of a button, or the throw of a switch causes the dynamo instantly to respond with just enough energy to do the work asked of it, always in proportion to the amount required. having this in mind, it is rather curious to think of electricity as being an article of export, an item in international trade. yet in hydro-electric companies in canada "exported" by means of wires, to this country over , , kilowatt-hours (over one billion horsepower hours) of electricity for use in factories near the boundary line. this cubic feet of water per minute then, which the farmer has measured by means of his notched board, will transform by means of its falling weight mechanical power into a like amount of electrical power--less friction losses, which may amount to as much as % in very small machines, and % in larger plants. that is, the brook which has been draining your pastures for uncounted ages contains the potential power of and young horses--with this difference: that it works hours a day, runs on forever, and requires no oats or hay. and the cost of such an electric plant, which is ample for the needs of the average farm, _is in most cases less than the price of a good farm horse_--the $ kind--not counting labor of installation. it is the purpose of these chapters to awaken the farmer to the possibilities of such small water-power as he or his community may possess; to show that the generating of electricity is a very simple operation, and that the maintenance and care of such a plant is within the mechanical ability of any american farmer or farm boy; and to show that electricity itself is far from being the dangerous death-dealing "fluid" of popular imagination. electricity must be studied; and then it becomes an obedient, tireless servant. during the past decade or two, mathematical wizards have studied electricity, explored its atoms, reduced it to simple arithmetic--and although they cannot yet tell us _why_ it is generated, they tell us _how_. it is with this simple arithmetic, and the necessary manual operations that we have to do here. chapter iii how to measure water-power what is a horsepower?--how the carthaginians manufactured horsepower--all that goes up must come down--how the sun lifts water up for us to use--water the ideal power for generating electricity--the weir--table for estimating flow of streams, with a weir--another method of measuring--figuring water horsepower--the size of the wheel--what head is required--quantity of water necessary. if a man were off in the woods and needed a horsepower of energy to work for him, he could generate it by lifting pounds of stone or wood, or whatnot, one foot off the ground, and letting it fall back in the space of one second. as a man possesses capacity for work equal to one-fifth horsepower, it would take him five seconds to do the work of lifting the weight up that the weight itself accomplished in falling down. all that goes up must come down; and by a nice balance of physical laws, a falling body hits the ground with precisely the same force as is required to lift it to the height from which it falls. the carthaginians, and other ancients (who were deep in the woods as regards mechanical knowledge) had their slaves carry huge stones to the top of the city wall; and the stones were placed in convenient positions to be tipped over on the heads of any besieging army that happened along. thus by concentrating the energy of many slaves in one batch of stones, the warriors of that day were enabled to deliver "horsepower" in one mass where it would do the most good. the farmer who makes use of the energy of falling water to generate electricity for light, heat, and power does the same thing--he makes use of the capacity for work stored in water in being lifted to a certain height. as in the case of the gasoline engine, which burns pounds of air for every pound of gasoline, the engineer of the water-power plant does not have to concern himself with the question of how this natural source of energy happened to be in a handy place for him to make use of it. the sun, shining on the ocean, and turning water into vapor by its heat has already lifted it up for him. this vapor floating in the air and blown about by winds, becomes chilled from one cause or another, gives up its heat, turns back into water, and falls as rain. this rain, falling on land five, ten, a hundred, a thousand, or ten thousand feet above the sea level, begins to run back to the sea, picking out the easiest road and cutting a channel that we call a brook, a stream, or a river. our farm lands are covered to an average depth of about three feet a year with water, every gallon of which has stored in it the energy expended by the heat of the sun in lifting it to the height where it is found. the farmer, prospecting on his land for water-power, locates a spot on a stream which he calls supply; and another spot a few feet down hill near the same stream, which he calls power. every gallon of water that falls between these two points, and is made to escape through the revolving blades of a water wheel is capable of work in terms of foot-pounds--an amount of work that is directly proportional to the _quantity_ of water, and to the _distance_ in feet which it falls to reach the wheel--_pounds_ and _feet_. _the efficient water wheel_ and it is a very efficient form of work, too. in fact it is one of the most efficient forms of mechanical energy known--and one of the easiest controlled. a modern water wheel uses per cent of the total capacity for work imparted to falling water by gravity, and delivers it as rotary motion. compare this water wheel efficiency with other forms of mechanical power in common use: whereas a water wheel uses per cent of the energy of its water supply, and wastes only per cent, a gasoline engine reverses the table, and delivers only per cent of the energy in gasoline and wastes per cent--and it is rather a high-class gasoline engine that can deliver even per cent; a steam engine, on the other hand, uses about per cent of the energy in the coal under its boilers and passes the rest up the chimney as waste heat and smoke. there is still another advantage possessed by water-power over its two rivals, steam and gas: it gives the most even flow of power. a gas engine "kicks" a wheel round in a circle, by means of successive explosions in its cylinders. a reciprocating steam engine "kicks" a wheel round in a circle by means of steam expanding first in one direction, then in another. a water wheel, on the other hand, is made to revolve by means of the pressure of water--by the constant force of gravity, itself--weight. weight is something that does not vary from minute to minute, or from one fraction of a second to another. it is always the same. a square inch of water pressing on the blades of a water wheel weights ten, twenty, a hundred pounds, according to the height of the pipe conveying that water from the source of supply, to the wheel. so long as this column of water is maintained at a fixed height, the power it delivers to the wheel does not vary by so much as the weight of a feather. this property of falling water makes it the ideal power for generating electricity. electricity generated from mechanical power depends on constant speed for steady pressure--since the electric current, when analyzed, is merely a succession of pulsations through a wire, like waves beating against a sea wall. water-power delivers these waves at a constant speed, so that electric lights made from water-power do not flicker and jump like the flame of a lantern in a gusty wind. on the other hand, to accomplish the same thing with steam or gasoline requires an especially constructed engine. _the simple weir_ since a steady flow of water, and a constant head, bring about this ideal condition in the water wheel, the first problem that faces the farmer prospector is to determine the amount of water which his stream is capable of delivering. this is always measured, for convenience, in _cubic feet per minute_. (a cubic foot of water weighs . pounds, and contains - / gallons.) this measurement is obtained in several ways, among which probably the use of a weir is the simplest and most accurate, for small streams. a weir is, in effect, merely a temporary dam set across the stream in such a manner as to form a small pond; and to enable one to measure the water escaping from this pond. it may be likened to the overflow pipe of a horse trough which is being fed from a spring. to measure the flow of water from such a spring, all that is necessary is to measure the water escaping through the overflow when the water in the trough has attained a permanent level. [illustration: detail of home-made weir] [illustration: cross-section of weir] the diagrams show the cross-section and detail of a typical weir, which can be put together in a few minutes with the aid of a saw and hammer. the cross-section shows that the lower edge of the slot through which the water of the temporary pond is made to escape, is cut on a bevel, with its sharp edge upstream. the wing on each side of the opening is for the purpose of preventing the stream from narrowing as it flows through the opening, and thus upsetting the calculations. this weir should be set directly across the flow of the stream, perfectly level, and upright. it should be so imbedded in the banks, and in the bottom of the stream, that no water can escape, except through the opening cut for that purpose. it will require a little experimenting with a rough model to determine just how wide and how deep this opening should be. it should be large enough to prevent water flowing over the top of the board; and it should be small enough to cause a still-water pond to form for several feet behind the weir. keep in mind the idea of the overflowing water trough when building your weir. the stream, running down from a higher level behind, should be emptying into a still-water pond, which in turn should be emptying itself through the aperture in the board at the same rate as the stream is keeping the pond full. your weir should be fashioned with the idea of some permanency so that a number of measurements may be taken, extending over a period of time--thus enabling the prospector to make a reliable estimate not only of the amount of water flowing at any one time, but of its fluctuations. under expert supervision, this simple weir is an exact contrivance--exact enough, in fact, for the finest calculations required in engineering work. to find out how many cubic feet of water the stream is delivering at any moment, all that is necessary is to measure its depth where it flows through the opening. there are instruments, like the hook-gauge, which are designed to measure this depth with accuracy up to one-thousandth of an inch. an ordinary foot rule, or a folding rule, will give results sufficiently accurate for the water prospector in this instance. the depth should be measured not at the opening itself, but a short distance back of the opening, where the water is setting at a dead level and is moving very slowly. with this weir, every square inch of water flowing through the opening indicates roughly one cubic foot of water a minute. thus if the opening is inches wide and the water flowing through it is inches deep, the number of cubic feet a minute the stream is delivering is × = square inches = cubic feet a minute. this is a very small stream; yet, if it could be made to fall through a water wheel feet below a pond or reservoir, it would exert a continuous pressure of , pounds per minute on the blades of the wheel--nearly one theoretical horsepower. this estimate of one cubic foot to each square inch is a very rough approximation. engineers have developed many complicated formulas for determining the flow of water through weirs, taking into account fine variations that the farm prospector need not heed. the so-called francis formula, developed by a long series of actual experiments at lowell, mass., in by mr. james b. francis, with weirs feet long and feet inches high, is standard for these calculations and is expressed (for those who desire to use it for special purposes) as follows: q = . l h^( / ) or, q = . l h sqrt(h), in which q means _quantity_ of water in cubic feet per second, l is length of opening, in feet; and h is height of opening in feet. the following table is figured according to the francis formula, and gives the discharge in cubic feet per minute, for openings one inch wide: table of weirs inches / / / . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . thus, let us say, our weir has an opening inches wide, and the water overflows through the opening at a uniform depth of - / inches, when measured a few inches behind the board at a point before the overflow curve begins. run down the first column on the left to " ", and cross over to the second column to the right, headed " / ". this gives the number of cubic feet per minute for this depth one inch wide, as . . since the weir is inches wide, multiply . × = . --or, say, cubic feet per minute. once the weir is set, it is the work of but a moment to find out the quantity of water a stream is delivering, simply by referring to the above table. _another method of measuring a stream_ weirs are for use in small streams. for larger streams, where the construction of a weir would be difficult, the u. s. geological survey engineers recommend the following simple method: choose a place where the channel is straight for or feet, and has a nearly constant depth and width; lay off on the bank a line or feet in length. throw small chips into the stream, and measure the time in seconds they take to travel the distance laid off on the bank. this gives the surface velocity of the water. multiply the average of several such tests by . , which will give very nearly the mean velocity. then it is necessary to find the cross-section of the flowing water (its average depth multiplied by width), and this number, in square feet, multiplied by the velocity in feet per second, will give the number of cubic feet the stream is delivering each second. multiplied by gives cubic feet a minute. _figuring a stream's horsepower_ by one of the above simple methods, the problem of _quantity_ can easily be determined. the next problem is to determine what _head_ can be obtained. _head_ is the distance in feet the water may be made to fall, from the source of supply, to the water wheel itself. the power of water is directly proportional to _head_, just as it is directly proportional to _quantity_. thus the typical weir measured above was inches wide and - / deep, giving cubic feet of water a minute--_quantity._ since such a stream is of common occurrence on thousands of farms, let us analyze briefly its possibilities for power: one hundred and eighty-nine cubic feet of water weighs × . pounds = , . pounds. drop this weight one foot, and we have , . foot-pounds. drop it feet and we have , × = , . foot-pounds. since , foot-pounds exerted in one minute is one horsepower, we have here a little more than one horsepower. for simplicity let us call it a horsepower. [illustration: detail of a water-power plant, showing setting of wheel, and dynamo connection] now, since the work to be had from this water varies directly with _quantity_ and _head_, it is obvious that a stream _one-half_ as big falling _twice_ as far, would still give one horsepower at the wheel; or, a stream of cubic feet a minute falling _ten times_ as far, feet, would give _ten times_ the power, or _ten_ horsepower; a stream falling _one hundred times_ as far would give _one hundred_ horsepower. thus small quantities of water falling great distances, or large quantities of water falling small distances may accomplish the same results. from this it will be seen, that the simple formula for determining the theoretical horsepower of any stream, in which quantity and head are known, is as follows: cu. ft. per feet minute × head × . (a) theoretical horsepower = ---------------------- , _as an example, let us say that we have a stream whose weir measurement shows it capable of delivering cubic feet a minute, with a head (determined by survey) of feet inches. what is the horsepower of this stream?_ answer: cu. ft. p. m. head pounds × . × . h.p. = ----------------------------- = . horsepower , this is _theoretical horsepower_. to determine the _actual_ horsepower that can be counted on, in practice, it is customary, with small water wheels, to figure per cent loss through friction, etc. in this instance, the actual horsepower would then be . . _the size of the wheel_ water wheels are not rated by horsepower by manufacturers, because the same wheel might develop one horsepower or one hundred horsepower, or even a thousand horsepower, according to the conditions under which it is used. with a given supply of water, the head, in feet, determines the size of wheel necessary. the farther a stream of water falls, the smaller the pipe necessary to carry a given number of gallons past a given point in a given time. a small wheel, under × . ft. head, would give the same power with the above cubic feet of water a minute, as a large wheel would with × cubic feet, under a . foot head. this is due to the _acceleration of gravity_ on falling bodies. a rifle bullet shot into the air with a muzzle velocity of , feet a second begins to diminish its speed instantly on leaving the muzzle, and continues to diminish in speed at the fixed rate of . feet a second, until it finally comes to a stop, and starts to descend. then, again, its speed accelerates at the rate of . feet a second, until on striking the earth it has attained the velocity at which it left the muzzle of the rifle, less loss due to friction. the acceleration of gravity affects falling water in the same manner as it affects a falling bullet. at any one second, during its course of fall, it is traveling at a rate . feet a second in excess of its speed the previous second. in figuring the size wheel necessary under given conditions or to determine the power of water with a given nozzle opening, it is necessary to take this into account. the table on page gives velocity per second of falling water, ignoring the friction of the pipe, in heads from to feet. the scientific formula from which the table is computed is expressed as follows, for those of a mathematical turn of mind: velocity (ft. per sec.) = sqrt( gh); or, velocity is equal to the square root of the product (g = . ,--times head in feet, multiplied by ). spouting velocity of water, in feet per second, in heads of from to , feet head velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _in the above example, we found that cubic feet of water a minute, under . feet head, would deliver . actual horsepower. question: what size wheel would it be necessary to install under such conditions?_ by referring to the table of velocity above, (or by using the formula), we find that water under a head of . feet, has a spouting velocity of . feet a second. this means that a solid stream of water . feet long would pass through the wheel in one second. _what should be the diameter of such a stream, to make its cubical contents cubic feet a minute or / = . cubic feet a second?_ the following formula should be used to determine this: × cu. ft. per second (b) sq. inches of wheel = -------------------------- velocity in ft. per sec. substituting values, in the above instance, we have: answer: sq. inches of wheel = × . (cu. ft. sec.) --------------------------- = . sq. in. . (vel. in feet.) that is, a wheel capable of using . square inches of water would meet these conditions. _what head is required_ let us attack the problem of water-power in another way. _a farmer wishes to install a water wheel that will deliver horsepower on the shaft, and he finds his stream delivers cubic feet of water a minute. how many feet fall is required?_ formula: , × horsepower required (c) head in feet = ------------------------------ cu. ft. per minute × . since a theoretical horsepower is only per cent efficient, he would require × / = . theoretical horsepower of water, in this instance. substituting the values of the problem in the formula, we have: , × . answer: head = ---------------- = . feet fall required. × . _what capacity of wheel would this prospect ( cubic feet of water a minute falling . feet, and developing . horsepower) require?_ by referring to the table of velocities, we find that the velocity for . feet head (nearly) is . feet a second. four hundred feet of water a minute is / = . cu. ft. a second. substituting these values, in formula (b) then, we have: answer: capacity of wheel = × . ---------- = . square inches of water. . _quantity of water_ let us take still another problem which the prospector may be called on to solve: _a man finds that he can conveniently get a fall of feet. he desires actual horsepower. what quantity of water will be necessary, and what capacity wheel?_ twenty actual horsepower will be × / = . theoretical horsepower. formula: , × hp. required (d) cubic feet per minute = --------------------- (head in feet × . ) substituting values, then, we have: cu. ft. per minute = , × . -------------- = . cubic feet a minute. × . a head of feet would give this stream a velocity of . feet a second, and, from formula (b) we find that the capacity of the wheel should be square inches. it is well to remember that the square inches of wheel capacity does not refer to the size of pipe conveying water from the head to the wheel, but merely to the actual nozzle capacity provided by the wheel itself. in small installations of low head, such as above a penstock at least six times the nozzle capacity should be used, to avoid losing effective head from friction. thus, with a nozzle of square inches, the penstock or pipe should be square inches, or nearly inches square inside measurement. a larger penstock would be still better. chapter iv the water wheel and how to install it different types of water wheels--the impulse and reaction wheels--the impulse wheel adapted to high heads and small amount of water--pipe lines--table of resistance in pipes--advantages and disadvantages of the impulse wheel--other forms of impulse wheels--the reaction turbine, suited to low heads and large quantity of water--its advantages and limitations--developing a water-power project: the dam; the race; the flume; the penstock; and the tailrace--water rights for the farmer. in general, there are two types of water wheels, the _impulse_ wheel and the _reaction_ wheel. both are called turbines, although the name belongs, more properly, to the reaction wheel alone. impulse wheels derive their power from the _momentum_ of falling water. reaction wheels derive their power from the _momentum and pressure_ of falling water. the old-fashioned _undershot_, _overshot_, and _breast_ wheels are familiar to all as examples of impulse wheels. water wheels of this class revolve in the air, with the energy of the water exerted on one face of their buckets. on the other hand, reaction wheels are enclosed in water-tight cases, either of metal or of wood, and the buckets are entirely surrounded by water. the old-fashioned undershot, overshot, and breast wheels were not very efficient; they wasted about per cent of the power applied to them. a modern impulse wheel, on the other hand, operates at an efficiency of per cent and over. the loss is mainly through friction and leakage, and cannot be eliminated altogether. the modern reaction wheel, called the _turbine_, attains an equal efficiency. individual conditions govern the type of wheel to be selected. _the impulse, or tangential water wheel_ the modern impulse, or tangential wheel (so called because the driving stream of water strikes the wheel at a tangent) is best adapted to situations where the amount of water is limited, and the head is large. thus, a mountain brook supplying only seven cubic feet of water a minute--a stream less than two-and-a-half inches deep flowing over a weir with an opening three inches wide--would develop two actual horsepower, under a head of feet--not an unusual head to be found in the hill country. under a head of one thousand feet, a stream furnishing . cubic feet of water a minute would develop . horsepower at the nozzle. ordinarily these wheels are not used under heads of less than feet. a wheel of this type, six feet in diameter, would develop six horsepower, with cubic feet of water a minute and -foot head. the great majority of impulse wheels are used under heads of feet and over. in this country the greatest head in use is slightly over , feet, although in switzerland there is one plant utilizing a head of over , feet. [illustration: runner of pelton wheel, showing peculiar shape of the buckets] [illustration: the fitz overshoot wheel efficient modern adaptations of the archaic undershot and overshot water wheels] the old-fashioned impulse wheels were inefficient because of the fact that their buckets were not constructed scientifically, and much of the force of the water was lost at the moment of impact. the impulse wheel of to-day, however, has buckets which so completely absorb the momentum of water issuing from a nozzle, that the water falls into the tailrace with practically no velocity. when it is remembered that the nozzle pressure under a , -foot head is nearly , pounds to the square inch, and that water issues from this nozzle with a velocity of , feet a minute, the scientific precision of this type of bucket can be appreciated. a typical bucket for such a wheel is shaped like an open clam shell, the central line which cuts the stream of water into halves being ground to a sharp edge. the curves which absorb the momentum of the water are figured mathematically and in practice become polished like mirrors. so great is the eroding action of water, under great heads--especially when it contains sand or silt--that it is occasionally necessary to replace these buckets. for this reason the larger wheels consist merely of a spider of iron or steel, with each bucket bolted separately to its circumference, so that it can be removed and replaced easily. usually only one nozzle is provided; but in order to use this wheel under low heads--down to feet--a number of nozzles are used, sometimes five, where the water supply is plentiful. the wheel is keyed to a horizontal shaft running in babbited bearings, and this same shaft is used for driving the generator, either by direct connection, or by means of pulleys and a belt. the wheel may be mounted on a home-made timber base, or on an iron frame. it takes up very little room, especially when it is so set that the nozzle can be mounted under the flooring. the wheel itself is enclosed, above the floor, in a wooden box, or a casing made of cast or sheet iron, which should be water-tight. since these wheels are usually operated under great heads, the problem of regulating their water supply requires special consideration. a gate is always provided at the upper, or intake end, where the water pipe leaves the flume. since the pressure reaches , pounds the square inch and more, there would be danger of bursting the pipe if the water were suddenly shut off at the nozzle itself. for this reason it is necessary to use a needle valve, similar to that in an ordinary garden hose nozzle; and by such a valve the amount of water may be regulated to a nicety. where the head is so great that even such a valve could not be used safely, provision is made to deflect the nozzle. these wheels have a speed variation amounting to as much as per cent from no-load to full load, in generating electricity, and since the speed of the prime mover--the water wheel--is reflected directly in the voltage or pressure of electricity delivered, the wheel must be provided with some form of automatic governor. this consists usually of two centrifugal balls, similar to those used in governing steam engines; these are connected by means of gears to the needle valve or the deflector. as the demand for farm water-powers in our hill sections becomes more general, the tangential type of water wheel will come into common use for small plants. at present it is most familiar in the great commercial installations of the far west, working under enormous heads. these wheels are to be had in the market ranging in size from six inches to six feet and over. wheels ranging in size from six inches to twenty-four inches are called water motors, and are to be had in the market, new, for $ for the smallest size, and $ for the largest. above three feet in diameter, the list prices will run from $ for a -foot wheel to $ for a -foot wheel. where one has a surplus of water, it is possible to install a multiple nozzle wheel, under heads of from to feet, the cost for -inch wheels of this pattern running from $ to $ list, and for -inch wheels from $ to $ . a -inch wheel, with a -foot head would give . horsepower, enough for lighting the home, and using an electric iron. under a -foot head this same wheel would provide . horsepower, to meet the requirements of a bigger-than-average farm plant. _the pipe line_ the principal items of cost in installing an impulse wheel are in connection with the pipe line, and the governor. in small heads, that is, under feet, the expense of pipe line is low. frequently, however, the governor will cost more than the water motor itself, although cheaper, yet efficient, makes are now being put on the market to meet this objection. in a later chapter, we will take up in detail the question of governing the water wheel, and voltage regulation, and will attempt to show how this expense may be practically eliminated by the farmer. to secure large heads, it is usually necessary to run a pipe line many hundreds (and in many cases, many thousands) of feet from the flume to the water wheel. water flowing through pipes is subject to loss of head, by friction, and for this reason the larger the pipe the less the friction loss. under no circumstances is it recommended to use a pipe of less than two inches in diameter, even for the smallest water motors; and with a two-inch pipe, the run should not exceed feet. where heavy-pressure mains, such as those of municipal or commercial water systems, are available, the problem of both water supply and head becomes very simple. merely ascertain the pressure of the water in the mains _when flowing_, determine the amount of power required (as illustrated in a succeeding chapter of this book), and install the proper water motor with a suitably sized pipe. where one has his own water supply, however, and it is necessary to lay pipe to secure the requisite fall, the problem is more difficult. friction in pipes acts in the same way as cutting down the head a proportional amount; and by cutting down the head, your water motor loses power in direct proportion to the number of feet head lost. this head, obtained by subtracting friction and other losses from the surveyed head, is called the _effective head_, and determines the amount of power delivered at the nozzle. the tables on pages - show the friction loss in pipes up to inches in diameter, according to the amount of water, and the length of pipe. in this example it is seen that a -foot static head is reduced by friction to . feet effective head. by referring to the table we find the wheel fitting these conditions has a nozzle so small that it cuts down the rate of flow of water in the big pipe to . feet a second, and permits the flow of only cubic feet of water a minute. the actual horsepower of this tube and nozzle, then, can be figured by applying formula (a), chapter iii, allowing per cent for the efficiency of the wheel. thus: actual horsepower = × . × . ------------------ = . × . = . hp. , to calculate what the horsepower of this tube inches in diameter and feet long, would be without a nozzle, under a head of feet, introduces a new element of friction losses, which is too complicated to figure here. such a condition would not be met with in actual practice, in any event. the largest nozzles used, even in the jumbo plants of the far west, rarely exceed inches in diameter; and the pipe conveying water to such a nozzle is upwards of eight feet in diameter. pipe friction tables indicating the calculated loss of head due to friction in riveted steel pipe with various water quantities and velocities [courtesy of the pelton water wheel company] heavy-faced figures = loss of head in feet for each one thousand feet of pipe. light-faced figures = water quantity in cubic feet per minute. --------+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+ pipe | velocity in feet per second | diameter+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+-------+ | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | --------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+-------+ |= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . = | " | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | |= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . = | " | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | | = . =| = . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . = | " | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | | = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . = | " | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | | = . | = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . = | " | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | | = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . = | " | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | | = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . = | " | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | | | | | | = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . = | " | . | . | . | . | . | . | | | | | | | | | = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =|= . =|= . =|= . = | " | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |= . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =|= . =|= . = | " | | | | | | | | | | | | | | --------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+------+-------+ --------+------+------+------+------+-------+-------+-------+-------+-------+-------+-------+-------+ | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | --------+------+------+------+------+-------+-------+-------+-------+-------+-------+-------+-------+ |= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =|= .= |= .= | " | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | |= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =|= .= |= .= |= .= |= .= | " | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | |= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = .= |= .= |= .= |= .= | " | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | |= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =|= .= |= .= | " | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | | | |= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =|= .= | " | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | . | | | | | |= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| " | . | | | | | | | | | | | | |= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| " | | | | | | | | | | | | | |= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| " | | | | | | | | | | | | | |= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| " | | | | | | | | | | | | | |= . =|= . =|= . =|= . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| = . =| " | | | | | | | | | | | | | --------+---------+----------+------+-------+-------+-------+-------+-------+-------+-------+-------+ example assume the surveyed head as feet, the water quantity as cubic feet per minute and a pipe line inches in diameter feet long. to ascertain the friction loss, refer to column of pipe diameter and follow across the column for inches diameter to the quantity, cubic feet per minute. the heavy-faced figures above indicate that the loss per feet of pipe length is feet. therefore, since the pipe in the example is feet long, the loss will be .' × / or . feet, and the effective head will be ' - . ' = . ' steel tubing for supply pipes, from to inches in diameter is listed at from cents to $ . a foot, according to the diameter and thickness of the material. discounts on these prices will vary from to per cent. the farmer can cut down the cost of this pipe by conveying his supply water from its natural source to a pond, by means of an open race, or a wooden flume. an ingenious mechanic can even construct his own pipe out of wood, though figuring labor and materials, it is doubtful if anything would be saved over a riveted steel pipe, purchased at the regular price. this pipe, leading from the pond, or forebay, to the water wheel, should be kept as short as possible; at the same time, the fall should not be too sharp. an angle of ° will be found very satisfactory, although pipe is frequently laid at angles up to °. _other types of impulse wheels_ in recent years more efficient forms of the old-fashioned overshoot, pitch-back breast, and undershoot wheels have been developed, by substituting steel or other metal for wood, and altering the shape of the buckets to make better use of the power of falling water. in some forms of overshoot wheels, an efficiency of over per cent is claimed by manufacturers; and this type offers the additional advantage of utilizing small quantities of water, as well as being efficient under varying quantities of water. they utilize the falling weight of water, although by giving the water momentum at the point of delivery, by means of the proper fall, impulse too is utilized in some measure. the modern steel overshoot wheel receives water in its buckets from a spout set a few degrees back of dead center; and its buckets are so shaped that the water is retained a full half-revolution of the wheel. the old-style overshoot wheel was inefficient principally because the buckets began emptying themselves at the end of a quarter-revolution. another advantage claimed for these wheels over the old style is that, being made of thin metal, their buckets attain the temperature of the water itself, thus reducing the danger of freezing to a minimum. they are manufactured in sizes from feet in diameter to upwards of fifty feet; and with buckets of from inches to feet in width. in practice it is usual to deliver water to the buckets by means of a trough or pipe, through a suitable spout and gate, at a point two feet above the crown of the wheel. for this reason, the diameter of the wheel corresponds very closely to the head in feet. _the reaction turbine_ the reaction turbine is best adapted to low heads, with a large supply of water. it is not advisable, under ordinary circumstances, to use it under heads exceeding feet, as its speed is then excessive. it may be used under falls as low as two feet. five thousand cubic feet of water a minute would give approximately actual horsepower under such a head. a sluggish creek that flows in large volume could thus be utilized for power with the reaction turbine, whereas it would be useless with an impulse wheel. falls of from five to fifteen feet are to be found on thousands of farm streams, and the reaction turbine is admirably adapted to them. reaction turbines consist of an iron "runner" which is in effect a rotary fan, the pressure and momentum of the column of water pressing on the slanted blades giving it motion and power. these wheels are manufactured in a great variety of forms and sizes; and are to be purchased either as the runner (set in bearings) alone, or as a runner enclosed in an iron case. in case the runner alone is purchased, the owner must enclose it, either with iron or wood. they vary in price according to size, and the means by which the flow of water is controlled. a simple -inch reaction turbine wheel, such as would be suitable for many power plants can be had for $ . a twelve-inch wheel, using or square inches of water, would generate about - / horsepower under a -foot head, with cubic feet of water a minute. under a -foot head, and with cubic feet of water such a wheel will give horsepower. a -inch wheel, under a -foot head, would use , cubic feet of water, and give horsepower. under a -foot head, this same wheel, using , cubic feet of water a minute, would develop over horsepower. if the farmer is confronted by the situation of a great deal of water and small head, a large wheel would be necessary. thus he could secure horsepower with only a -foot head, providing his water supply is equal to the draft of , cubic feet a minute. from these sample figures, it will be seen that the reaction turbine will meet the requirements of widely varying conditions up to, say a head of feet. the farmer prospector should measure first the quantity of water to be depended on, and then the number of feet fall to be had. the higher the fall, with certain limits, the smaller the expense of installation, and the less water required. when he has determined _quantity_ and _head_, the catalogue of a reputable manufacturer will supply him with what information is necessary to decide on the style and size wheel he should install. in the older settled communities, especially in new england, a farmer should be able to pick up a second-hand turbine, at half the price asked for a new one; and since these wheels do not depreciate rapidly, it would serve his purpose as well, in most cases, as a new one. [illustration: a typical vertical turbine] reaction turbines may be either horizontal or vertical. if they are vertical, it is necessary to connect them to the main shaft by means of a set of bevel gears. these gears should be substantially large, and if the teeth are of hard wood (set in such a manner that they can be replaced when worn) they will be found more satisfactory than if of cast or cut metal. [illustration: two wheels on a horizontal shaft (courtesy of the c. p. bradway company, west stafford, conn.)] the horizontal turbine is keyed to its shaft, like the impulse wheel, so that the wheel shaft itself is used for driving, without gears or a quarter-turn belt. (the latter is to be avoided, wherever possible.) there are many forms of horizontal turbines; they are to be had of the duplex type, that is, two wheels on one shaft. these are arranged so that either wheel may be run separately, or both together, thus permitting one to take advantage of the seasonal fluctuation in water supply. a convenient form of these wheels includes draft tubes, by which the wheel may be set several feet above the tailrace, and the advantage of this additional fall still be preserved. in this case the draft tube must be airtight so as to form suction, when filled with escaping water, and should be proportioned to the size of the wheel. theoretically these draft tubes might be feet long, but in practice it has been found that they should not exceed or feet under ordinary circumstances. they permit the wheel to be installed on the main floor of the power station, with the escape below, instead of being set just above the tailrace level itself, as is the case when draft tubes are not used. reaction turbines when working under a variable load require water governors (like impulse wheels) although where the supply of water is large, and the proportion of power between water wheel and dynamo is liberal--say two to one, or more--this necessity is greatly reduced. reaction wheels as a rule govern themselves better than impulse wheels, due both to the fact that they use more water, and that they operate in a small airtight case. the centrifugal ball governor is the type usually used with reaction wheels as well as with impulse wheels. this subject will be discussed more fully later. _installing a power plant_ in developing a power prospect, the dam itself is usually not the site of the power plant. in fact, because of danger from flood water and ice, it is better to locate it in a more protected spot, leading the water to the wheel by means of a race and flume. [illustration: bird's-eye view of a developed water-power plant] a typical crib dam, filled with stone, is shown in section in the diagram, and the half-tone illustration shows such a dam in course of construction. the first bed of timbers should be laid on hard-pan or solid rock in the bed of the stream parallel to its flow. the second course, across the stream, is then begun, being spiked home by means of rods cut to length and sharpened by the local blacksmith, from / -inch norway iron. hemlock logs are suitable for building the crib; and as the timbers are finally laid, it should be filled in and made solid with boulders. this filling in should proceed section by section, as the planking goes forward, otherwise there will be no escape for the water of the stream, until it rises and spills over the top timbers. the planking should be of two-inch chestnut, spiked home with penny wire spikes. when the last section of the crib is filled with boulders and the water rises, the remaining planks may be spiked home with the aid of an iron pipe in which to drive the spike by means of a plunger of iron long enough to reach above the level of the water. when the planking is completed, the dam should be well gravelled, to within a foot or two of its crest. such dams are substantial, easily made with the aid of unskilled labor, and the materials are to be had on the average farm with the exception of the hardware. [illustration: cross-section of a rock and timber dam] this dam forms a pond from which the race draws its supply of water for the wheel. it also serves as a spillway over which the surplus water escapes. the race should enter the pond at some convenient point, and should be protected at or near its point of entrance by a bulkhead containing a gate, so that the supply of water may be cut off from the race and wheel readily. the lay of the land will determine the length and course of the race. the object of the race is to secure the required head by carrying a portion of the available water to a point where it can escape, by a fall of say ° to the tailrace. it may be feasible to carry the race in a line almost at right angles to the stream itself, or, again, it may be necessary to parallel the stream. if the lay of the land is favorable, the race may be dug to a distance of a rod or so inshore, and then be permitted to cut its own course along the bank, preventing the water escaping back to the river or brook before the site of the power plant is reached, by building suitable retaining embankments. the race should be of ample size for conveying the water required without too much friction. it should end in a flume constructed stoutly of timbers. it is from this flume that the penstock draws water for the wheel. when the wheel gate is closed the water in the mill pond behind the dam, and in the flume itself should maintain an approximate level. any surplus flow is permitted to escape over flushboards in the flume; these same flushboards maintain a constant head when the wheel is in operation by carrying off what little surplus water the race delivers from the pond. [illustration: detail of bulkhead gate] at some point in the race or flume, the flow should be protected from leaves and other trash by means of a rack. this rack is best made of / or / -inch battens from - / to inches in width, bolted together on their flat faces and separated a distance equal to the thickness of the battens by means of iron washers. this rack will accumulate leaves and trash, varying with the time of year and should be kept clean, so as not to cut down the supply of water needed by the wheel. the penstock, or pipe conveying water from the flume to the wheel, should be constructed of liberal size, and substantially, of two-inch chestnut planking, with joints caulked with oakum, and the whole well bound together to resist the pressure of the water. means should be provided near the bottom for an opening through which to remove any obstructions that may by accident pass by the rack. many wheels have plates provided in their cases for this purpose. the tailrace should be provided with enough fall to carry the escaping water back to the main stream, without backing up on the wheel itself and thus cutting down the head. it is impossible to make any estimates of the cost of such a water-power plant. the labor required will in most instances be supplied by the farmer himself, his sons, and his help, during times when farm operations are slack. _water rights of the farmer_ the farmer owns the bed of every stream not navigable, lying within the boundary lines of the farm; and his right to divert and make use of the water of such streams is determined in most states by common law. in the dry-land states where water is scarce and is valuable for irrigation, a special set of statutes has sprung up with the development of irrigation in this country. a stream on the farm is either public or private; its being navigable or "floatable" (suitable for floating logs) determining which. water rights are termed in law "riparian" rights, and land is riparian only when water flows over it or along its borders. green (law for the american farmer) says: "water is the common and equal property of every one through whose land it flows, and the right of each land-owner to use and consume it without destroying, or unreasonably impairing the rights of others, is the same. an owner of land bordering on a running stream has the right to have its waters flow naturally, and none can lawfully divert them without his consent. each riparian proprietor has an equal right with all the others to have the stream flow in its natural way without substantial reduction in volume, or deterioration in quality, subject to a proper and reasonable use of its waters for domestic, agricultural and manufacturing purposes, and he is entitled to use it himself for such purposes, but in doing so must not substantially injure others. in addition to the right of drawing water for the purposes just mentioned, a riparian proprietor, if he duly regards the rights of others, and does not unreasonably deplete the supply, has also the right to take the water for some other proper uses." thus, the farmer who seeks to develop water-power from a stream flowing across his own land, has the right to divert such a stream from its natural channel--providing it is not a navigable or floatable stream--but in so doing, he must return it to its own channel for lower riparian owners. the generation of water-power does not pollute the water, nor does it diminish the water in quantity, therefore the farmer is infringing on no other owner's rights in using the water for such a purpose. when a stream is a dividing line between two farms, as is frequently the case, each proprietor owns to the middle of the stream and controls its banks. therefore to erect a dam across such a private stream and divert all or a part of the water for power purposes, requires the consent of the neighboring owner. the owner of the dam is responsible for damage due to flooding, to upstream riparian owners. part ii electricity chapter v the dynamo; what it does, and how electricity compared to the heat and light of the sun--the simple dynamo--the amount of electric energy a dynamo will generate--the modern dynamo--measuring power in terms of electricity--the volt--the ampere--the ohm--the watt and the kilowatt--ohm's law of the electric circuit, and some examples of its application--direct current, and alternating current--three types of direct-current dynamos: series, shunt, and compound. what a farmer really does in generating electricity from water that would otherwise run to waste in his brook, is to install a private sun of his own--which is on duty not merely in daylight, but twenty-four hours a day; a private sun which is under such simple control that it shines or provides heat and power, when and where wanted, simply by touching a button. this is not a mere fanciful statement. when you come to look into it you find that electricity actually is the life-giving power of the sun's rays, so transformed that it can be handily conveyed from place to place by means of wires, and controlled by mechanical devices as simple as the spigot that drains a cask. nature has the habit of traveling in circles. sometimes these circles are so big that the part of them we see looks like a straight line, but it is not. even parallel lines, according to the mathematicians, "meet in infinity." take the instance of the water wheel which the farmer has installed under the fall of his brook. the power which turns the wheel has the strength of many horses. it is there in a handy place for use, because the sun brought it there. the sun, by its heat, lifted the water from sea-level, to the pond where we find it--and we cannot get any more power out of this water by means of a turbine using its pressure and momentum in falling, than the sun itself expended in raising the water against the force of gravity. once we have installed the wheel to change the energy of falling water into mechanical power, the task of the dynamo is to turn this mechanical power into another mode of motion--electricity. and the task of electricity is to change this mode of motion back into the original heat and light of the sun--which started the circle in the beginning. astronomers refer to the sun as "he" and "him" and they spell his name with a capital letter, to show that he occupies the center of our small neighborhood of the universe at all times. _magnets and magnetism_ the dynamo is a mechanical engine, like the steam engine, the water turbine or the gas engine; and it converts the mechanical motion of the driven wheel into electrical motion, with the aid of a magnet. many scientists say that the full circle of energy that keeps the world spinning, grows crops, and paints the sky with the aurora borealis, begins and ends with magnetism--that the sun's rays are magnetic rays. magnetism is the force that keeps the compass needle pointing north and south. take a steel rod and hold it along the north and south line, slightly inclined towards the earth, and strike it a sharp blow with a hammer, and it becomes a magnet--feeble, it is true, but still a magnet. take a wire connected with a common dry battery and hold a compass needle under it and the needle will immediately turn around and point directly across the wire, showing that the wire possesses magnetism encircling it in invisible lines, stronger than the magnetism of the earth. [illustration: (_courtesy of the crocker-wheeler company_) a direct-current dynamo or motor, showing details of construction] insulate this wire by covering it with cotton thread, and wind it closely on a spool. connect the two loose ends to a dry battery, and you will find that you have multiplied the magnetic strength of a single loop of wire by the number of turns on the spool--concentrated all the magnetism of the length of that wire into a small space. put an iron core in the middle of this spool and the magnet seems still more powerful. lines of force which otherwise would escape in great circles into space, are now concentrated in the iron. the iron core is a magnet. shut off the current from the battery and the iron is still a magnet--weak, true, but it will always retain a small portion of its magnetism. soft iron retains very little of its magnetism. hard steel retains a great deal, and for this reason steel is used for permanent magnets, of the horseshoe type so familiar. _a simple dynamo_ a dynamo consists, first, of a number of such magnets, wound with insulated wire. their iron cores point towards the center of a circle like the spokes of a wheel; and their curved inner faces form a circle in which a spool, wound with wire in another way, may be spun by the water wheel. now take a piece of copper wire and make a loop of it. pass one side of this loop in front of an electric magnet. as the wire you hold in your hands passes the iron face of the magnet, a wave of energy that is called electricity flows around this loop at the rate of , miles a second--the same speed as light comes to us from the sun. as you move the wire away from the magnet, a second wave starts through the wire, flowing in the opposite direction. you can prove this by holding a compass needle under the wire and see it wag first in one direction, then in another. [illustration: a wire "cutting" the lines of force of an electro-magnet] this is a simple dynamo. a wire "cutting" the invisible lines of force, that a magnet is spraying out into the air, becomes "electrified." why this is true, no one has ever been able to explain. the amount of electricity--its capacity for work--which you have generated with the magnet and wire, does not depend alone on the pulling power of that simple magnet. let us say the magnet is very weak--has not enough power to lift one ounce of iron. nevertheless, if you possessed the strength of hercules, and could pass that wire through the field of force of the magnet many thousands of times a second, you would generate enough electricity in the wire to cause the wire to melt in your hands from heat. [illustration: cross-section of an armature revolving in its field] [illustration: forms of annealed steel discs used in armature construction] this experiment gives the theory of the dynamo. instead of passing only one wire through the field of force of a magnet, we have hundreds bound lengthwise on a revolving drum called an armature. instead of one magnetic pole in a dynamo we have two, or four, or twenty according to the work the machine is designed for--always in pairs, a north pole next to a south pole, so that the lines of force may flow out of one and into another, instead of escaping in the surrounding air. if you could see these lines of force, they would appear in countless numbers issuing from each pole face of the field magnets, pressing against the revolving drum like hair brush bristles--trying to hold it back. this drum, in practice, is built up of discs of annealed steel, and the wires extending lengthwise on its face are held in place by slots to prevent them from flying off when the drum is whirled at high speed. the drum does not touch the face of the magnets, but revolves in an air space. if we give the electric impulses generated in these wires a chance to flow in a circuit--flow out of one end of the wires, and in at the other, the drum will require more and more power to turn it, in proportion to the amount of electricity we permit to flow. thus, if one electric light is turned on, the drum will press back with a certain strength on the water wheel; if one hundred lights are turned on it will press back one hundred times as much. providing there is enough power in the water wheel to continue turning the drum at its predetermined speed, the dynamo will keep on giving more and more electricity if asked to, until it finally destroys itself by fire. you cannot take more power, in terms of electricity, out of a dynamo that you put into it, in terms of mechanical motion. in fact, to insure flexibility and constant speed at all loads, it is customary to provide twice as much water wheel, or engine, power as the electrical rating of the dynamo. [illustration: an armature partly wound, showing slots and commutator] we have seen that a water wheel is per cent efficient under ideal conditions. a dynamo's efficiency in translating mechanical motion into electricity, varies with the type of machine and its size. the largest machines attain as high as per cent efficiency; the smallest ones run as low as per cent. _measuring electric power_ the amount of electricity any given dynamo can generate depends, generally speaking, on two factors, i. e., ( ) the power of the water wheel, or other mechanical engine that turns the armature; and ( ) the size (carrying capacity) of the wires on this drum. strength, of electricity, is measured in _amperes_. an ampere of electricity is the unit of the rate of flow and may be likened to a gallon of water per minute. in surveying for water-power, in chapter iii, we found that the number of gallons or cubic feet of water alone did not determine the amount of power. we found that the number of gallons or cubic feet multiplied by the distance in feet it falls in a given time, was the determining factor--pounds (quantity) multiplied by feet per second--(velocity). [illustration: showing the analogy of water to volts and amperes of electricity] the same is true in figuring the power of electricity. we multiply the _amperes_ by the number of electric impulses that are created in the wire in the course of one second. the unit of velocity, or pressure of the electric current is called a _volt_. voltage is the pressure which causes electricity to flow. a volt may be likened to the velocity in feet per second of water in falling past a certain point. if you think a moment you will see that this has nothing to do with quantity. a pin-hole stream of water under pounds pressure has the same velocity as water coming from a nozzle as big as a barrel, under the same pressure. so with electricity under the pressure of one volt or one hundred volts. one volt is said to consist of a succession of impulses caused by _one wire cutting , , lines of magnetic force in one second_. thus, if the strength of a magnet consisted of one line of force, to create the pressure of one volt we would have to "cut" that line of force , , times a second, with one wire; or , times a second with one thousand wires. or, if a magnet could be made with , , lines of force, a single wire cutting those lines once in a second would create one volt pressure. in actual practice, field magnets of dynamos are worked at densities up to and over , lines of force to the square inch, and armatures contain several hundred conductors to "cut" these magnetic lines. the voltage then depends on the speed at which the armature is driven. in machines for isolated plants, it will be found that the speed varies from revolutions per minute, to , , according to the design of dynamo used. [illustration: pressure determines volume of flow in a given time] multiplying amperes (strength) by volts (pressure), gives us _watts_ (power). seven hundred and forty-six watts of electrical energy is equal to one horsepower of mechanical energy--will do the same work. thus an electric current under a pressure of volts, and a density of . amperes, is one horsepower; as is . amperes, at volts pressure; or amperes at one volt pressure. for convenience (as a watt is a small quantity) electricity is measured in _kilowatts_, or , watts. since watts is one horsepower, , watts or one kilowatt is . horsepower. the work of such a current for one hour is called a _kilowatt-hour_, and in our cities, where electricity is generated from steam, the retail price of a kilowatt-hour varies from to cents. now as to how electricity may be controlled, so that a dynamo will not burn itself up when it begins to generate. again we come back to the analogy of water. the amount of water that passes through a pipe in any given time, depends on the size of the pipe, if the pressure is maintained uniform. in other words the _resistance_ of the pipe to the flow of water determines the amount. if the pipe be the size of a pin-hole, a very small amount of water will escape. if the pipe is as big around as a barrel, a large amount will force its way through. so with electricity. resistance, introduced in the electric circuit, controls the amount of current that flows. a wire as fine as a hair will permit only a small quantity to pass, under a given pressure. a wire as big as one's thumb will permit a correspondingly greater quantity to pass, the pressure remaining the same. the unit of electrical resistance is called the _ohm_--named after a man, as are all electrical units. _ohm's law_ the _ohm_ is that amount of _resistance_ that will permit the passage of _one ampere_, under the pressure of _one volt_. it would take two volts to force two amperes through one ohm; or volts to force amperes through the resistance of one ohm. from this we have ohm's law, a simple formula which is the beginning and end of all electric computations the farmer will have to make in installing his water-power electric plant. ohm's law tells us that the density of current (amperes) that can pass through a given resistance in ohms (a wire, a lamp, or an electric stove) equals _volts_ divided by _ohms_--or _pressure_ divided by _resistance_. this formula may be written in three ways, thus: c = e/r, or r = e/c or, e = c × r. or to express the same thing in words, _current_ equals _volts_ divided by _ohms_; _ohms_ equals _volts_ divided by _current_; or _volts_ equals _current_ multiplied by _ohms_. so, with any two of these three determining factors known, we can find the third. as we have said, this simple law is the beginning and end of ordinary calculations as to electric current, and it should be thoroughly understood by any farmer who essays to be his own electrical engineer. once understood and applied, the problem of the control of the electric current becomes simple a b c. _examples of ohm's law_ let us illustrate its application by an example. the water wheel is started and is spinning the dynamo at its rated speed, say , r.p.m. two heavy wires, leading from brushes which collect electricity from the revolving armature, are led, by suitable insulated supports to the switchboard, and fastened there. they do not touch each other. dynamo mains must not be permitted to touch each other _under any conditions_. they are separated by say four inches of air. dry air is a very poor conductor of electricity. let us say, for the example, that dry air has a resistance to the flow of an electric current, of , , ohms to the inch--that would be , , ohms. how much electricity is being permitted to escape from the armature of this -volt dynamo, when the mains are separated by four inches of dry air? apply ohm's law, c equals e divided by r. e, in this case is ; r is , , ; therefore c (amperes) equals / , , --an infinitesimal amount--about . ampere. let us say that instead of separating these two mains by air we separated them by the human body--that a man took hold of the bare wires, one in each hand. the resistance of the human body varies from , to , ohms. in that case c (amperes) equals / , , or / , --about / th, or / th of an ampere. this illustrates why an electric current of volts pressure is not fatal to human beings, under ordinary circumstances. the body offers too much resistance. but, if the volts were , instead of the usual used in commercial and private plants for domestic use, the value of c, by this formula at , ohms, would be nearly / th ampere. to drive / th ampere of electricity through the human body would be fatal in many instances. the higher the voltage, the more dangerous the current. in large water-power installations in the far west, where the current must be transmitted over long distances to the spot where it is to be used, it is occasionally generated at a pressure of , volts. needless to say, contact with such wires means instant death. before being used for commercial or domestic purposes, in such cases, the voltage is "stepped down" to safe pressures--to , or to , or to volts--always depending on the use made of it. now, if instead of interposing four inches of air, or the human body, between the mains of our -volt dynamo, we connected an incandescent lamp across the mains, how much electricity would flow from the generator? an incandescent lamp consists of a vacuum bulb of glass, in which is mounted a slender thread of carbonized fibre, or fine tungsten wire. to complete a circuit, the current must flow through this wire or filament. in flowing through it, the electric current turns the wire or filament white hot--incandescent--and thus turns electricity back into light, with a small loss in heat. in an ordinary candlepower carbon lamp, the resistance of this filament is ohms. therefore the amount of current that a -volt generator can force through that filament is / , or / ampere. [illustration: armature and field coils of a direct current dynamo] one hundred lamps would provide paths of ohms resistance each to carry current, and the amount required to light such lamps would be × / or amperes. every electrical device--a lamp, a stove, an iron, a motor, etc.,--must, by regulations of the fire underwriters' board be plainly marked with the voltage of the current for which it is designed and the amount of current it will consume. this is usually done by indicating its capacity in watts, which as we have seen, means volts times amperes, and from this one can figure ohms, by the above formulas. _a short circuit_ we said a few paragraphs back that under no conditions must two bare wires leading from electric mains be permitted to touch each other, without some form of resistance being interposed in the form of lamps, or other devices. let us see what would happen if two such bare wires did touch each other. our dynamo as we discover by reading its plate, is rated to deliver amperes, let us say, at volts pressure. modern dynamos are rated liberally, and can stand % overload for short periods of time, without dangerous overheating. let us say that the mains conveying current from the armature to the switchboard are five feet long, and of no. b. & s. gauge copper wire, a size which will carry amperes without heating appreciably. the resistance of this feet of no. copper wire, is, as we find by consulting a wire table, . ohms. if we touch the ends of these two five-foot wires together, we instantly open a clear path for the flow of electric current, limited only by the carrying capacity of the wire and the back pressure of . ohms resistance. using ohm's law, c equals e divided by r, we find that c (amperes) equals /. or _ , amperes_! [illustration: a direct current dynamo] unless this dynamo were properly protected, the effect of such a catastrophe would be immediate and probably irreparable. in effect, it would be suddenly exerting a force of nearly , horsepower against the little horsepower water wheel that is driving this dynamo. the mildest thing that could happen would be to melt the feed-wire or to snap the driving belt, in which latter case the dynamo would come to a stop. if by any chance the little water wheel was given a chance to maintain itself against the blow for an instant, the dynamo, rated at amperes, would do its best to deliver the , amperes you called for--and the result would be a puff of smoke, and a ruined dynamo. this is called a "short circuit"--one of the first "don'ts" in handling electricity. as a matter of fact every dynamo is protected against such a calamity by means of safety devices, which will be described in a later chapter--because no matter how careful a person may be, a partial short circuit is apt to occur. happily, guarding against its disastrous effects is one of the simplest problems in connection with the electric plant. _direct current and alternating current_ when one has mastered the simple ohm's law of the electric circuit, the next step is to determine what type of electrical generator is best suited to the requirements of a farm plant. in the first place, electric current is divided into two classes of interest here--_alternating_, and _direct_. we have seen that when a wire is moved through the field of a magnet, there is induced in it two pulsations--first in one direction, then in another. this is an _alternating_ current, so called because it changes its direction. if, with our armature containing hundreds of wires to "cut" the lines of force of a group of magnets, we connected the beginning of each wire with one copper ring, and the end of each wire with another copper ring, we would have what is called an _alternating-current_ dynamo. simply by pressing a strap of flexible copper against each revolving copper ring, we would gather the sum of the current of these conductors. its course would be represented by the curved line in the diagram, one loop on each side of the middle line (which represents time) would be a _cycle_. the number of _cycles_ to the second depends on the speed of the armature; in ordinary practice it is usually twenty-five or sixty. alternating current has many advantages, which however, do not concern us here. except under very rare conditions, a farmer installing his own plant should not use this type of machine. [illustration: diagram of alternating and direct current] if, however, instead of gathering all the current with brushes bearing on two copper rings, we collected all the current traveling in one direction, on one set of brushes--and all the current traveling in the other direction on another set of brushes,--we would straighten out this current, make it all travel in one direction. then we would have a _direct current_. a direct current dynamo, the type generally used in private plants, does this. instead of having two copper rings for collecting the current, it has a single ring, made up of segments of copper bound together, but insulated from each other, one segment for each set of conductors on the armature. this ring of many segments, is called a _commutator_, because it commutates, or changes, the direction of the electric impulses, and delivers them all in one direction. in effect, it is like the connecting rod of a steam engine that straightens out the back-and-forth motion of the piston in the steam cylinder and delivers the motion to a wheel running in one direction. such a current, flowing through a coil of wire would make a magnet, one end of which would always be the north end, and the other end the south end. an alternating current, on the other hand, flowing through a coil of wire, would make a magnet that changed its poles with each half-cycle. it would no sooner begin to pull another magnet to it, than it would change about and push the other magnet away from it, and so on, as long as it continued to flow. this is one reason why a direct current dynamo is used for small plants. alternating current will light the same lamps and heat the same irons as a direct current; but for electric power it requires a different type of motor. _types of direct current dynamos_ just as electrical generators are divided into two classes, alternating and direct, so direct current machines are divided into three classes, according to the manner in which their output, in amperes and volts, is regulated. they differ as to the manner in which their field magnets (in whose field of force the armature spins) are excited, or made magnetic. they are called _series_, _shunt_, and _compound_ machines. _the series dynamo_ by referring to the diagram, it will be seen that the current of a _series_ dynamo issues from the armature mains, and passes through the coils of the field magnets before passing into the external circuit to do its work. the residual magnetism, or the magnetism left in the iron cores of the field magnets from its last charge, provides the initial excitation, when the machine is started. as the resistance of the external circuit is lowered, by turning on more and more lights, more and more current flows from the armature, through the field magnets. each time the resistance is lowered, therefore, the current passing through the field magnets becomes more dense in amperes, and makes the field magnets correspondingly stronger. we have seen that the voltage depends on the number of lines of magnetic force cut by the armature conductors in a given time. if the speed remains constant then, and the magnets grow stronger and stronger, the voltage will rise in a straight line. when no current is drawn, it is ; at full load, it may be volts, or , or , according to the machine. this type of machine is used only in street lighting, in cities, with the lights connected in "series," or one after another on the same wire, the last lamp finally returning the wire to the machine to complete the circuit. this type of dynamo has gained the name for itself of "mankiller," as its voltage becomes enormous at full load. it is unsuitable, in every respect, for the farm plant. its field coils consist of a few turns of very heavy wire, enough to carry all the current of the external circuit, without heating. [illustration: connections of a series dynamo] _the shunt dynamo_ the shunt dynamo, on the other hand, has field coils connected directly _across_ the circuit, from one wire to another, instead of in "series." these coils consist of a great many turns of very fine wire, thus introducing _resistance_ into the circuit, which limits the amount of current (amperes) that can be forced through them at any given voltage. as a shunt dynamo is brought up to its rated speed, its voltage gradually rises until a condition of balance occurs between the field coils and the armature. there it remains constant. when resistance on the external circuit is lowered, by means of turning on lamps or other devices, the current from the armature increases in working power, by increasing its amperes. its voltage remains stationary; and, since the resistance of its field coils never changes, the magnets do not vary in strength. [illustration: connections of a shunt dynamo] the objection to this type of machine for a farm plant is that, in practice, the armature begins to exercise a de-magnetizing effect on the field magnets after a certain point is reached--weakens them; consequently the voltage begins to fall. the voltage of a shunt dynamo begins to fall after half-load is reached; and at full load, it has fallen possibly per cent. a rheostat, or resistance box on the switchboard, makes it possible to cut out or switch in additional resistance in the field coils, thus varying the strength of the field coils, within a limit of say per cent, to keep the voltage constant. this, however, requires a constant attendance on the machine. if the voltage were set right for lights, the lights would grow dim when lights were turned on; and if it were adjusted for lights, the voltage would be too high for only ten lights--would cause them to "burn out." shunt dynamos are used for charging storage batteries, and are satisfactory for direct service only when an attendant is constantly at hand to regulate them. _the compound dynamo_ the ideal between these two conditions would be a compromise, which included the characteristics of both _series_ and _shunt_ effects. that is exactly what the _compound_ dynamo effects. a compound dynamo is a shunt dynamo with just enough series turns on its field coils, to counteract the de-magnetizing effect of the armature at full load. a machine can be designed to make the voltage rise gradually, or swiftly, by combining the two systems. for country homes, the best combination is a machine that will keep the voltage constant from no load to full load. a so-called _flat-compounded_ machine does this. in actual practice, this voltage rises slightly at the half-load line--only two or three volts, which will not damage the lamps in a -volt circuit. the compound dynamo is therefore self-regulating, and requires no attention, except as to lubrication, and the incidental care given to any piece of machinery. any shunt dynamo can be made into a compound dynamo, by winding a few turns of heavy insulated wire around the shunt coils, and connecting them in "series" with the external circuit. how many turns are necessary depends on conditions. three or four turns to each coil usually are sufficient for "flat compounding." if the generating plant is a long distance from the farm house where the light, heat, and power are to be used, the voltage drops at full load, due to resistance of the transmission wires. to overcome this, enough turns can be wound on top of the shunt coils to cause the voltage to rise at the switchboard, but remain stationary at the spot where the current is used. the usual so-called flat-compounded dynamo, turned out by manufacturers, provides for constant voltage at the switchboard. such a dynamo is eminently fitted for the farm electric plant. any other type of machine is bound to cause constant trouble and annoyance. [illustration: connections of a compound dynamo] chapter vi what size plant to install the farmer's wife his partner--little and big plants--limiting factors--fluctuations in water supply--the average plant--the actual plant--amount of current required for various operations--standard voltage--a specimen allowance for electric light--heating and cooking by electricity--electric power: the electric motor. the farmer's wife becomes his partner when he has concluded the preliminary measurements and surveys for building his water-power electric plant. now the question is, how big a plant is necessary, or how small a plant can he get along with. electricity may be used for a multitude of purposes on the farm, in its sphere of furnishing portable light, heat and power; but when this multitude of uses has been enumerated, it will be found that the wife shares in the benefits no less than the farmer himself. the greatest dividend of all, whether dividends are counted in dollars or happiness, is that electricity takes the drudgery out of housework. here, the work of the farmer himself ends when he has brought electricity to the house, just as his share in housework ends when he has brought in the kerosene, and filled the woodbox. of the light and heat, she will use the lion's share; and for the power, she will discover heretofore undreamed-of uses. so she must be a full partner when it comes to deciding how much electricity they need. how much electricity, in terms of light, heat, and power, will the farmer and his wife have use for? how big a plant should be installed to meet the needs of keeping house and running the farm? the answer hangs mainly on how much water-power there is available, through all the seasons of the year, with which to generate electricity. beyond that, it is merely a question of the farmer's pocketbook. how much money does he care to spend? electricity is a cumulative "poison." the more one uses it, the more he wants to use it. after a plant has been in operation a year, the family have discovered uses for electricity which they did not think of in the beginning. for this reason, it is well to put in a plant larger than the needs of the moment seem to require. an electrical horsepower or two one way or another will not greatly change the first cost, and you will always find use for any excess. once for all, to settle the question of water-power, the water wheel should be twice the normal capacity of the dynamo it drives, in terms of power. this allows for overload, which is bound to occur occasionally; and it also insures smooth running, easy governing, and the highest efficiency. since the electric current, once the plant is installed, will cost practically nothing, the farmer can afford to ignore the power going to waste, and consider only how to get the best service. _the two extremes_ the amount of water to be had to be turned into electricity, will vary with location, and with the season. it may be only enough, the greater part of the year, for a "toy" plant--a very practical toy, by the way--one that will keep half a dozen lights burning in the house and barn at one time; under some conditions water may be so scarce that it must be stored for three or four days to get enough power to charge a storage battery for these six or eight lights. a one-quarter, or a one-half kilowatt electrical generator, with a one horsepower (or smaller) wheel, will light a farmstead very satisfactorily--much better than kerosene lamps. on the other hand, the driving power of your wheel may be sufficient to furnish or lights for the house, barn, and out-buildings, and barn-yard and drives; to provide ample current for irons, toasters, vacuum cleaners, electric fans, etc.; to do all the cooking and baking and keep the kitchen boiler hot; and to heat the house in the coldest weather with a dry clean heat that does not vitiate the air, with no ashes, smoke or dust or woodchopping--nothing but an electric switch to turn on and off; and to provide power for motors ranging from tiny ones to run the sewing machine, to one of horsepower to do the threshing. a plant capable of developing from to kilowatts of electricity, and requiring from to horsepower at the water wheel, would do all this, depending on the size of the farmstead. one hundred horsepower is a very small water project, in a commercial way; and there are thousands of farms possessing streams of this capacity. _fluctuations in water supply_ it would be only during the winter months that such a plant would be driven to its full capacity; and since water is normally plentiful during these months, the problem of power would be greatly simplified. the heaviest draft on such a plant in summer would be during harvesting; otherwise it would be confined to light, small power for routine work, and cooking. thus, a plant capable of meeting all the ordinary requirements of the four dry months of summer, when water is apt to be scarce, doubles or quadruples its capacity during the winter months, to meet the necessities of heat for the house. a dynamo requires only as much power to drive it, at any given time, as is being used in terms of electricity. there is some small loss through friction, of course, but aside from this the power required of the prime mover (the water wheel) is always in proportion to the amount of current flowing. when water is scarce, and the demands for current for heating are low, it is good practice to close a portion of the buckets of the turbine wheel with wooden blocks provided for this purpose. it is necessary to keep the speed of the dynamo uniform under all water conditions; and where there is a great fluctuation between high and low water periods, it is frequently necessary to have a separate set of pulleys for full gate and for half-gate. the head must remain the same, under all conditions. changing the gate is in effect choking or opening the nozzle supplying the wheel, to cut down or increase its consumption of water. _the average plant_ it will be the exceptional plant, however, among the hundreds of thousands to be had on our farms, which will banish not only the oil lamp and kitchen stove, but all coal or wood burning stoves as well--which will heat the house in below-zero weather, and provide power for the heavier operations of the farm. also, on the other hand, it will be the exceptional plant whose capacity is limited to furnishing a half-dozen lights and no more. a happy medium between these two conditions is the plant large enough to supply between five and ten electrical horsepower, in all seasons. such a plant will meet the needs of the average farm, outside of winter heating and large power operations, and will provide an excess on which to draw in emergencies, or to pass round to one's neighbors. it is such a plant that we refer to when we say that (not counting labor) its cost, under ordinary conditions should not greatly exceed the price of one sound young horse for farm work. since the plant we described briefly in the first chapter, meets the requirements of this "average plant" let us inquire a little more fully into its installation, maintenance, and cost. _an actual plant_ in this instance, the water-power was already installed, running to waste, in fact. the wheel consists of the so-called thirty-six inch vertical turbine, using square inches of water, under a -foot head. water is supplied to this wheel by a wooden penstock inches square, inside measurements, and sloping at an angle of ° from the flume to the wheel. [illustration: details of voltmeter or ammeter] this wheel, under a -foot head, takes , cubic feet of water a minute; and it develops . actual horsepower (as may be figured by using the formulas of chapter iii). the water supply is provided by a small mountain river. the dam is feet high, and the race, which feeds the flume from the mill pond is yards long. the race has two spillways, one near the dam, and the second at the flume itself, to maintain an even head of water at all times. _half-gate_ since the water supply varies with the seasons, it has been found practical to run the wheel at half-gate--that is, with the gate only half-open. a set of bevel gears work the main shaft, which runs at approximately revolutions per minute; and the dynamo is worked up to its required speed of , revolutions per minute through a countershaft. the dynamo is a modern four-pole machine, compound-wound, with a rated output of amperes, at volts--in other words a dynamo of . kilowatts capacity, or . electrical horsepower. at full load this dynamo would require a driving power of horsepower, counting it as per cent efficient; and, to conform to our rule of two water horsepower to one electrical horsepower, the wheel should be capable of developing horsepower. as a matter of fact, in this particular instance, shutting down the wheel to half-gate more than halves the rated power of the wheel, and little more than horsepower is available. this allowance has proved ample, under all conditions met with, in this plant. the dynamo is mounted on a firm floor foundation; and it is belted from the countershaft by an endless belt running diagonally. a horizontal belt drive is the best. vertical drive should be avoided wherever possible. _the switchboard_ the switchboard originally consisted of a wooden frame on which were screwed ordinary asbestos shingles, and the instruments were mounted on these. later, a sheet of electric insulating fibre was substituted, for look's sake. the main requisite is something substantial--and fireproof. the switchboard instruments consist of a voltmeter, with a range of from to volts; an ammeter, with a range, to amperes; a field regulating rheostat (which came with the dynamo); a main switch, with cartridge fuses protecting the machine against a draft of current over amperes; and two line switches for the two owners, one fuse at amperes, and the other at amperes. electric fuses are either cartridges or plugs, enclosing lead wire of a size corresponding to their rating. all the current of the line they protect passes through this lead wire. if the current drawn exceeds the capacity of the lead wire, it melts from the heat, and thus opens the circuit, and cuts off the current. [illustration: a switchboard and its connections: _g._ dynamo; _a._ shunt field coils; _b._ series coils; _dd._ fuses; _ff._ main switch; _f._ field switch; _c._ ammeter; _v._ voltmeter; _e._ lamp; _r._ rheostat. dotted lines show connections on back of board] _items of cost_ this water wheel would cost $ new. there is a duplicate in the neighborhood bought at second-hand, for $ . the dynamo cost $ , and was picked up second-hand in new york city. new it would cost $ . the voltmeter cost $ , and the ammeter $ ; and the switches and fuses could be had for $ . a wheel one-half the size, using one-half the amount of water at full gate, would do the work required, and the cost would be correspondingly less. _capacity_ this plant supplies two farms with electric light. one farm (that of the owner of the wheel) has lamps, of candlepower each, and two barn-yard lamps of candlepower each. his wife has an electric iron and an electric water heater. needless to say, all these lamps, and the iron and water heater are not in use at one time. [illustration: carbon lamps gem type ( / scale)] the partner who owns the electric part of the plant has lamps in his house and barn, many of them being watt tungsten, which give more light for less power, but cost more to buy. they are not all in use at one time, though (since the current costs nothing) the inclination is to turn them on at night and let them burn. in his kitchen he has an electric range, and a water heater for the gallon boiler. in addition to this he has all sorts of appliances,--irons, toasters, grills, a vacuum cleaner, a vibrator, etc. naturally all these appliances are not in use at one time, else the draft on the plant would be such as to "blow" the fuses. for instance, all the baking is done in daylight; and when the oven is used after dark, they are careful to turn off all lights not needed. an ideal plant, of course, would be a plant big enough to take care of the sum of lamps and handy devices used at one time. to make this plant ideal, (for, being an actual affair, it has developed some short-comings, with the extension of the use of electricity) it would require a dynamo whose capacity can be figured, from the following: watts carbon lamps, candlepower, @ watts each tungsten lamps, candlepower, @ watts each tungsten lamps, candlepower, @ watts each water heater, continuous service toaster, occasional service iron, occasional service oven-baking, roasting, etc , stove plates @ , watts each , stove plate vacuum cleaner, occasional service vibrator, occasional service small water heater, quart capacity small motor, / horsepower, occasional motor, / hp, pumping water, etc electric fan, occasional service ------- total current, one house , carbon lamps, candlepower, @ , lamps, watt tungsten electric iron small water or milk heater ------- total current, nd house , st house , ------- , thus, in this plant, if every electrical device were turned on at once, the demand on the dynamo would be for . kilowatts, or an overload of over per cent. the main-switch fuse, being for amperes, would "blow" or melt, and cut off all current for the moment. to repair the damage would be merely the work of a second--and at a cost of a few cents--simply insert a new fuse, of which there must be a supply on hand at all times. or, if either owner exceeded his capacity, the line fuses (one for amperes, and the other for amperes) would instantly cut off all current from the greedy one. [illustration: and watt mazda tungsten lamps ( / scale)] _lessons from this plant_ the story of this plant illustrates two things which the farmer and his wife must take into account when they are figuring how much electricity they require. first, it illustrates how one uses more and more current, as he finds it so serviceable and labor-saving, and at the same time free. the electric range and the water boiler, in the above instance, were later acquisitions not counted on in figuring the original installation. second, it illustrates, that while the normal load of this generator is _ . _ kilowatts, one does not have to limit the electrical conveniences in the home to this amount. true, he cannot use more electricity than his plant will produce _at any one time_,--but it is only by a stretch of the imagination that one may conceive the necessity of using them all at once. ironing, baking, and the use of small power are usually limited to daylight hours when no lights are burning. as a matter of fact, this plant has proved satisfactory in every way; and only on one or two occasions have fuses been "blown", and then it was due to carelessness. a modern dynamo is rated liberally. it will stand an overload of as much as per cent for a short time--half an hour or so. the danger from overloading is from heating. when the machine grows too hot for the hand, it is beginning to char its insulation, to continue which, of course would ruin it. the best plant is that which works under one-half or three-quarters load, under normal demands. _standard voltage_ we are assuming the farmer's plant to be, in cases out of , the standard -volt, direct current type. such a plant allows for at least a per cent regulation, in voltage, up or down the scale; supplies for this voltage are to be had without delay in even the more remote parts of the country, and (being sold in greater volume) they are cheaper than those for other voltages. there are two general exceptions to this rule as to -volt plants: ( ) if the plant is located at a distance greater than a quarter of a mile from the house, it will be found cheaper (in cost of transmission line, as will be shown later) to adopt the -volt plant; ( ), if the water supply is so meagre that it must be stored for many hours at a time, and then used for charging storage batteries, it will be found most economical to use a -volt plant. a storage battery is made up of cells of approximately volts each; and, since more than such cells would be required for a -volt installation, its cost would be prohibitive, with many farmers. so we will assume that this plant is a -volt plant, to be run without storage battery. it will be well to make a chart, dividing the farm requirements into three heads--light, heat, and power. _light_ [illustration: and watt mazda tungsten lamp. these lamps may be had in sizes from to watts ( / scale)] [illustration: the lamp of the future. a watt mazda nitrogen lamp, giving candlepower ( / scale)] light is obtained by means of incandescent lamps. there are two styles in common use, the carbon and the tungsten lamp. it requires . to watts of electricity to produce one candlepower in a carbon lamp. it requires from to . watt to produce one candlepower in the tungsten lamp. the new nitrogen lamp, not yet in general use, requires only / watt to the candlepower. since tungsten lamps give three times the light of the carbon lamp, they are the most economical to use in the city or town where one is paying for commercial current. but, in the country where water-power furnishes current for nothing, it will be found most economical to use the carbon lamp, since its cost at retail is cents, as compared with cents for a corresponding size in tungsten. a watt carbon lamp, of candlepower; or a watt tungsten lamp, of candlepower, are the sizes to use. in hanging lamps, as over the dining room table, a watt tungsten lamp, costing cents, and giving candlepower light is very desirable; and for lighting the barn-yard, these watt tungsten lamps should be used. for reading lamps, the tungsten style, of or watt capacity, will be found best. otherwise, in all locations use the cheaper carbon lamp. both styles have a rated life of , hours, after which they begin to fall off in efficiency. here again, the farmer need not worry over lack of highest efficiency, as a lamp giving only per cent of its rated candlepower is still serviceable when he is not paying for the current. with care not to use them at voltages beyond their ratings, lamps will last for years. _a specimen light allowance_ below is a typical table of lights for a large farm house, the barns and barn-yard. it is given merely as a guide, to be varied for each individual case: watts kitchen, lights @ watts dining room, light, tungsten living room, table lamp with tungstens @ living room, wall fixtures, lamps @ watts parlor, same as living room pantry, hanging lamp cellar, one portable lamp woodshed, hanging lamp bedrooms, lights each @ bed rooms, light each @ bathroom, "turn-down" light, @ hall, downstairs, lights @ hall, upstairs, light attic, light porch, light barn and barn-yard: barn-yard entrance, tungsten watering trough, " front gate, " horse barn, lights @ cow barn, lights @ pig house, light hay barn, lights, @ ------- total for farmstead , this provides for lights, an extremely liberal allowance. how many of these lights will be burning at any one time? probably not one-half of them; yet the ideal plant is that which permits all fixtures to be in service at one time on the rare occasions when necessary. thus, for lighting only, , watts maximum service would require a kilowatt generator, and water horsepower, on the liberal rating of two to one. a kilowatt generator would take care of these lights, with a per cent overload (which is not excessive) for maximum service. the above liberal allowance of lights may be cut in two, or four--or even eight--and still throw a kerosene lamp in shadow. it all depends on the number of lights one wants burning at one time; and the power of the water wheel. if the carbon lights in the above table were replaced by watt tungsten lights, the saving in power would be watts each, or , watts, nearly two electrical horsepower; while the added first cost would be cents a light, or $ . . a generator of kilowatt capacity would take care of all these lights then, with watts to spare. _heating_ electric heating and cooking is in its infancy, due to the prohibitive cost of commercial current in our cities. here the farmer has the advantage again, with his cheap current. for heating the house, it is calculated that watts is required for each cubic foot of air space in a room, during ordinary winter weather. thus, a room × , and feet high, would contain cubic feet, and would require , watts energy to heat it in cold weather. five such rooms would require . kilowatts; and such rooms, or their equivalent, would require . kilowatts. electric heating devices are divided into two classes: ( ) those which can be used on lamp circuits, _and do not draw more than watts each_; and ( ) those which draw more than , therefore _require special wiring_. the capacity of these devices is approximately as follows: lamp circuit devices: watts electric iron to toaster to vacuum cleaner to grill to small water heater to hot plates to lamp circuit devices: coffee percolator to chafing dish to electric fan to special circuit devices: hot water boiler heater to , small ovens to , range ovens , to , range, hot plates to , radiators (small) to , radiators (large) , to , the only device in the above list which is connected continuously, is the hot water boiler, and this can be credited with at least one electrical horsepower hours a day. it is a small contrivance, not much bigger than a quart can, attached to the back of the kitchen boiler, and it keeps the water hot throughout the house at all hours. its cost will vary with the make, ranging from $ to $ ; and since it is one of the real blessings of the farm kitchen and bathroom, it should be included in all installations where power permits. electric radiators will be used hours a day in winter, and not at all in summer. they are portable, and can be moved from room to room, and only such rooms as are in actual use need be heated. the other devices are for intermittent service, many of them (like the iron) for only a few hours each week. the grill, chafing dish, coffee percolator, etc., which are used on the dining room table while the family is at meals, each draw an equivalent of from to carbon lights. by keeping this in view and turning off spare lights, one can have the use of them, with even a small plant. thus, a one kilowatt plant permits the use of any one of these lamp circuit devices at a time, with a few lights in addition. _power_ electric power is to be had through motors. a direct current dynamo and a direct current motor are identical in construction. that is, a motor becomes a generator if belted to power; and a generator becomes a motor, if connected to electric mains. this is best illustrated by citing the instance of a trans-continental railroad which crosses the bitter root mountains by means of electric power. running miles up a per cent grade, it is drawn by its motors. coasting miles down the per cent grade on the other side of the mountains, its motors become generators. they act as brakes, and at the same time they pump the power of the coasting weight of this train back into the wires to help a train coming up the other side of the mountains. [illustration: connections of shunt motor and starting rheostat] just as there are three types of direct current generators, so there are three types of direct current motors: _series_, _shunt_, and _compound_, with features already explained in the case of generators. motors are rated by horsepower, and generators are rated by kilowatts. thus a one kilowatt generator has a capacity of , watts; as a motor, it would be rated as / horsepower, or . horsepower. their efficiency varies with their size, ranging from to per cent in very small motors, and up to per cent in very large ones. the following table may be taken as a guide in calculating the power required by motors, on -volt circuits: / horsepower - / amperes, or watts / hp - / amperes, or watts hp amperes, or watts hp amperes, or . kilowatts hp amperes, or . kilowatts hp amperes, or . kilowatts - / hp amperes, or . kilowatts hp amperes, or . kilowatts hp amperes, or . kilowatts an electric motor, in operation, actually generates electricity, which it pushes back into the line as a counter-electromotive-force. the strength of this counter force, in volts, depends on the motor's speed, the same as if it were running as a dynamo. for this reason, when a motor is started, and before it comes up to speed, there would be a rush of current from the line, with nothing to hold it back, and the motor would be burned out unless some means were provided to protect it for the moment. this is done by means of a starting rheostat, similar to the regulating rheostat on the dynamo switchboard. this resistance box is connected in "series" with the armature, in the case of shunt and compound motors; and with the entire motor circuit in the case of a series machine. a _series_ motor has a powerful starting torque, and adjusts its speed to the load. it is used almost altogether in street cars. it can be used in stump pulling, or derrick work, such as using a hay fork. it must always be operated under load, otherwise, it would increase in speed until it tore itself to pieces through mechanical strain. the ingenious farmer who puts together an electric plow, with the mains following behind on a reel, will use a series motor. a _shunt_ motor should be used in all situations where a fairly uniform speed under load is required, such as separating, in milking machines, running a lathe, an ensilage cutter, vacuum cleaners, grinders, etc. the _compound_ motor has the characteristics of the series and shunt motors, giving an increased starting torque, and a more nearly constant speed under varying loads than the shunt motor, since the latter drops off slightly in speed with increasing load. _flexible power_ an electric motor is an extremely satisfactory form of power because it is so flexible. thus, one may use a five horsepower motor for a one horsepower task, and the motor will use only one electrical horsepower in current--just enough to overcome the task imposed on it. for this reason, a large-sized motor may be used for any operation, from one requiring small power, up to its full capacity. it will take an overload, the same as a dynamo. in other words it is "eager" for any task imposed on it; therefore it must be protected by fuses, or it will consume itself, if too big an overload is imposed on it. a one horsepower shunt or compound motor is very serviceable for routine farm operations, such as operating the separator, the churn, the milking machine, grinder, pump, and other small power jobs. motors of / horsepower are handy in the kitchen, for grinding knives, polishing silver, etc., and can be used also for vacuum cleaners, and running the sewing machine. for the larger operations, motors will vary from three horsepower for cutting ensilage, to fifteen horsepower for threshing. they can be mounted on trucks and conveyed from one point to another, being fed current from the mains by means of suitable wires wound on reels. remember, in estimating the size of your plant for light, heat, and power, that it does not have to be big enough to use all the devices at one time. also remember, that two water horsepower to one electrical horsepower is a very liberal allowance; and that a generator working under one-half or two-thirds capacity at normal loads will require less attention than a machine constantly being worked above its capacity. therefore, let your generator be of liberal size, because the difference in cost between a and kilowatt machine is not in proportion to their capacity. in fact (especially among second-hand machines), the difference in cost is very small. the mere fact that the generator is of electrical horsepower capacity does not require a turbine of horsepower. the chances are that (unless you wish to heat your house and do large power jobs) you will not use more than to electrical horsepower normally; therefore an allowance of water horsepower, in this case, would be ample. a plant used simply for lighting the house and barn, for irons, and toasters, and one horsepower motors, need not exceed or - / kilowatts for the generator, and or horsepower for the turbine wheel. normally it would not use one-half this capacity. chapter vii transmission lines copper wire--setting of poles--loss of power in transmission--ohm's law and examples of how it is used in figuring size of wire--copper-wire tables--examples of transmission lines--when to use high voltages--over-compounding a dynamo to overcome transmission loss. having determined on the location of the farm water-power electric plant, and its capacity, in terms of electricity, there remains the wiring, for the transmission line, and the house and barn. for transmission lines, copper wire covered with waterproof braid--the so-called weatherproof wire of the trade--is used. under no circumstances should a wire smaller than no. , b. & s. gauge be used for this purpose, as it would not be strong enough mechanically. the poles should be of chestnut or cedar, feet long, and set four feet in the ground. where it is necessary to follow highways, they should be set on the fence line; and in crossing public highways, the ordinance of your own town must guide you. some towns prescribe a height of feet above the road, others feet, some . direct current, such as is advised for farm installations, under ordinary circumstances, does not affect telephone wires, and therefore transmission lines may be strung on telephone poles. poles are set at an average distance of rods; they are set inclined outward on corners. sometimes it is necessary to brace them with guy wires or wooden braces. glass insulators are used to fasten the wires to the cross-arms of the poles, and the tie-wires used for this purpose must be the same size as the main wire and carry the same insulation. _size of wire for transmission_ to determine the size of the transmission wires will require knowledge of the strength of current (in amperes) to be carried, and the distance in feet. in transmission, the electric current is again analogous to water flowing in pipes. it is subject to resistance, which cuts down the amount of current (in watts) delivered. [illustration: bringing wires into the house or barn] the loss in transmission is primarily measured in volts; and since the capacity of an electric current for work equals the _volts_ multiplied by _amperes_, which gives _watts_, every volt lost reduces the working capacity of the current by so much. this loss is referred to by electrical engineers as the "c^ r loss," which is another way of saying that the loss is equal to the _square of the current in amperes_, multiplied by _ohms_ resistance. thus, if the amperes carried is , and the ohms resistance of the line is , then the loss in watts to convey that current would be ( × ) × , or watts, nearly a horsepower. the pressure of _one volt_ (as we have seen in another chapter) is sufficient to force _one ampere_, through a resistance of _one ohm_. such a current would have no capacity for work, since its pressure would be consumed in the mere act of transmission. if, however, the pressure were _ volts_, and the current _one ampere_, and the resistance _one ohm_, the effective pressure after transmission would be - , or volts. to force a -volt current of _ amperes_ through the resistance of _one ohm_, would require the expenditure of _ volts_ pressure. its capacity for work, after transmission, would be - , or _ volts, × amperes_, or , watts. as this current consisted of _ × _, or , watts at the point of starting, the loss would be , watts, or about per cent. it is bad engineering to allow more than per cent loss in transmission. there are two ways of keeping this loss down. one is by increasing the size of the transmission wires, thus cutting down the resistance in ohms; the other way is by raising the voltage, thus cutting down the per cent loss. for instance, suppose the pressure was , volts, instead of volts. five amperes at , volts pressure, gives the same number of watts, power, as amperes, at volts pressure. therefore it would be necessary to carry only amperes, at this rate. the loss would be volts, or less than / of per cent, as compared with per cent with volts. [illustration: splicing transmission wire] in large generating stations, where individual dynamos frequently generate as much as , horsepower, and the current must be transmitted over several hundred miles of territory, the voltage is frequently as high as , , with the amperes reduced in proportion. then the voltage is lowered to a suitable rate, and the amperage raised in proportion, by special machinery, at the point of use. it is the principle of the c^ r loss, which the farmer must apply in determining the size of wire he is to use in transmitting his current from the generator switchboard to his house or barn. the wire table on page , together with the formula to be used in connection with it, reduce the calculations necessary to simple arithmetic. in this table the resistance of the various sizes of wire is computed from the fact that a wire of pure copper foot long, and / inch in diameter (equal to one circular mill) offers a resistance of . ohms to the foot. the principle of the c^ r loss is founded on ohm's law, which is explained in chapter v. the formula by which the size of transmission wire is determined, for any given distance, and a given number of amperes, is as follows: distance ft. one way × × no. of amperes circular ------------------------------------------ = mills. number of volts lost in other words, multiply the _distance in feet_ from mill to house by , and multiply this product by the _number of amperes_ to be carried. then divide the product by the _number of volts_ to be lost; and the result will be the diameter of the wire required _in circular mills_. by referring to the table above, the b. & s. gauge of the wire necessary for transmission, can be found from the nearest corresponding number under the second column, entitled "circular mills area." copper wire table --------+----------+-----------+-----------+-----------+------------ | | _area in | _(r) ohms | | _b.& s. | _feet | circular | per , | _feet | _(r) ohms gauge_ | per lb._ | mills_ | feet_ | per ohm_ | per pound_ --------+----------+-----------+-----------+-----------+------------ | . | , | . | , . | . | . | , | . | , . | . | . | , | . | , . | . | . | , | . | , . | . | . | , | . | , . | . | . | , | . | , . | . | . | , | . | , . | . | . | , | . | , . | . | . | , | . | , . | . | . | , | . | , . | . | . | , | . | , . | . | . | , | . | , . | . | . | , | . | , . | . | . | , | . | , . | . | . | , . | . | . | . | . | , . | . | . | . | . | , . | . | . | . | . | , . | . | . | . | . | , . | . | . | . | . | , . | . | . | . | . | , . | . | . | . | . | , . | . | . | . --------+----------+-----------+-----------+-----------+------------ carrying capacity of wires and weight -----------+-------------------+--------------------+-------------------- | _weight , ft. | _carrying capacity | _carrying capacity _b. & s. | weatherproof | weatherproof | rubber cov. gauge no._ | (pounds)_ | (amperes)_ | (amperes)_ -----------+-------------------+--------------------+-------------------- | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | -----------+-------------------+--------------------+-------------------- since two wires are required for electrical transmission, the above formula is made simple by counting the distance only one way, in feet, and doubling the resistance constant, . , which, for convenience is taken as , instead of . . _examples of transmission lines_ as an example, let us say that farmer jones has installed a water-power electric plant on his brook, _ yards distant_ from his house. the generator is a kilowatt machine, capable of producing _ amperes_ at _ volts pressure_. he has a horsepower motor, drawing amperes at full load; he has lights of varying capacities, requiring , watts, or amperes when all on; and his wife uses irons, toasters, etc., which amount to another or amperes--say altogether. the chances are that he will never use all of the apparatus at one time; but for flexibility, and his own satisfaction in not having to stop to think if he is overloading his wires, he would like to be able to draw the full _ amperes_ if he wishes to. he is willing to allow _ per cent loss_ in transmission. _what size wires will be necessary, and what will they cost?_ substituting these values in the above formula, the result is: answer: × × ------------- = , circular mills. . [illustration: transmission wire on glass insulator] referring to the table, no. wire is , circular mills, and is near enough; so this wire would be used. it would require , feet, which would weigh, by the second table, . pounds. at cents a pound, it would cost $ . . farmer jones says this is more money than he cares to spend for transmission. as a matter of fact, he says, he never uses his motor except in the daytime, when his lights are not burning; so the maximum load on his line at any one time would be _ amperes_, not . _what size wire would he use in this instance?_ substituting for in the equation, the result is , circular mills, which corresponds to no. wire. it would cost $ . . now, if farmer jones, in an emergency, wished to use his motor at the same time he was using all his lights and his wife was ironing and making toast--in other words, if he wanted to use the _ amperes_ capacity of his dynamo, _how many volts would he lose?_ to get this answer, we change the formula about, until it reads as follows: distance in feet × × amperes --------------------------------- = number of volts lost circular mills substituting values, we have, in this case, × × / , (no. ) = volts, nearly, less than per cent. this is a very efficient line, under the circumstances. now if he is willing to lose per cent on _half-load_, instead of full load, he can save still more money in line wire. in that case (as you can find by applying the formula again), he could use no. wire, at a cost of $ . . he would lose volts pressure drawing amperes; and he would lose volts pressure drawing amperes, if by any chance he wished to use full load. in actual practice, this dynamo would be regulated, by means of the field resistance, to register plus volts, or volts at the switchboard to make up for the loss at half-load. at full load, his voltage at the end of the line would be minus , or volts; his motor would run a shade slower, at this voltage, and his lights would be slightly dimmer. he would probably not notice the difference. if he did, he could walk over to his generating station, and raise the voltage a further volts by turning the rheostat handle another notch. [illustration: a barn-yard light] thousands of plants can be located within feet of the house. if farmer jones could do this, he could use no. wire, costing $ . . the drop in pressure would be . volts at full load--so small it could be ignored entirely. in this case the voltmeter should be made to read volts at the switchboard, by means of the rheostat. if, on the other hand, this plant were , feet away from the house and the loss volts the size wire would be , × × --------------- = , circular mills; a no. wire comes nearest to this figure, and its cost, for , feet, at cents a pound, would be $ . . a no. wire, costing $ . , would give a per cent drop at full load. in this case, the cost of transmission can be reduced to a much lower figure, by allowing a bigger drop at half-load, with regulation at the switchboard. thus, a no. wire here, costing but $ , would be satisfactory in every way. the loss at half-load would be about volts, and the rheostat would be set permanently for or volts. a modern dynamo can be regulated in voltage by over per cent in either direction, without harm, if care is taken not to overload it. _benefit of higher voltages_ if farmer jones' plant is a half of a mile away from the house, he faces a more serious proposition in the way of transmission. say he wishes to transmit amperes with a loss of volts. what size wire will be necessary? × × thus: -------------- = , circular mills. a no. wire is nearest this size, and , feet of it would cost over $ . . this cost would be prohibitive. if, however, he installed a -volt dynamo--at no increase in cost--then he would have to transmit only a half of amperes, or amperes, and he could allow volts loss, counting per cent. in this case, the problem would work out as follows: × × -------------- = , circular mills, or approximately a no. wire which, at cents a pound, would cost $ . . install a -volt generator, instead of a -volt machine and the amperes necessary would be cut to . , and the volts lost would be raised to . in this case a no. wire would carry the current; but since it would not be strong enough for stringing on poles, a no. wire would be used, costing about $ . it will be readily seen from these examples how voltage influences the efficiency of transmission. current generated at a pressure in excess of volts is not to be recommended for farm plants unless an expert is in charge. a safer rule is not to exceed volts, for while volts is not necessarily deadly, it is dangerous. when one goes into higher voltages, it is necessary to change the type of dynamo to _alternating current_, so that the current can be transformed to safe voltages at the point where it is used. since only the occasional farm plant requires a high-tension system, the details of such a plant will not be gone into here. in transmitting the electric current over miles of territory, engineers are accustomed to figure , volts for each mile. since this is a deadly pressure, it should not be handled by any one not an expert, which, in this case, the farmer is not. _over-compounding the generator_ one can absorb the loss in transmission frequently, by over-compounding the machine. in describing the compound machine, in chapter five, it is shown that the usual compound dynamo on the market is the so-called flat-compounded type. in such a dynamo, the voltage remains constant at the switchboard, from no load to full load, allowing for a slight curve which need not be taken into account. now, by adding a few more turns to the series wires on the field coils of such a dynamo, a machine is to be had which gradually raises its voltage as the load comes on in increasing volume. thus, one could secure such a machine, which would begin generating at volts, and would gradually rise to at full load. yet the voltage would remain constant at the point of use, the excess being absorbed in transmission. a machine of this type can be made to respond to any required rise in voltage. as an example of how to take advantage of this very valuable fact, let us take an instance: say that farmer jones has a transmission line , feet long strung with no. copper wire. this , feet of wire would introduce a resistance of one ohm in the circuit. that is, every ampere of current drawn at his house would cause the working voltage there to fall one volt. if he drew amperes, the voltage would fall, at the house, volts. if his switchboard voltage was set at say , the voltage at his house, at amperes of load, would fall to volts, which would cause his lights to dim considerably. it would be a very unsatisfactory transmission line, with a flat-compounded dynamo. on the other hand, if his dynamo was over-compounded per cent--that is, if it gained volts from no load to full load, the system would be perfect. in this case, the dynamo would be operated at volts pressure at the switchboard with no load. at full load the voltmeter would indicate plus , or volts. the one or two lights burned at the power plant would be subject to a severe strain; but the or lights burned at the house and barn would burn at constant voltage, which is very economical for lamps. the task of over-compounding a dynamo can be done by any trained electrician. the farmer himself, if he progresses far enough in his study of electricity, can do it. it is necessary to remove the top or "series" winding from the field coils. count the number of turns of this wire to each spool. then procure some identical wire in town and begin experimenting. say you found four turns of field wire to each spool. now wind on five, or six, being careful to wind it in the same direction as the coils you removed and connect it in the same way. if this additional number of turns does not raise the voltage enough, in actual practice, when the dynamo is running from no load to full load, add another turn or two. with patience, the task can be done by any careful mechanic. the danger is in not winding the coils the same way as before, and getting the connections wrong. to prevent this mistake, make a chart of the "series" coils as you take them off. to make the task of over-compounding your own dynamo even more simple, write to the manufacturers, giving style and factory number of your machine. tell them how much voltage rise you wish to secure, and ask them how many turns of "series" wire should be wound on each spool in place of the old "series" coil. they could tell you exactly, since they have mathematical diagrams of each machine they make. avoid overloading an over-compounded machine. since its voltage is raised automatically, its output in watts is increased a similar amount at the switchboard, and, for a given resistance, its output in amperes would be increased the same amount, as can be ascertained by applying ohm's law. your ammeter is the best guide. your machine is built to stand a certain number of amperes, and this should not be exceeded in general practice. chapter viii wiring the house the insurance code--different kinds of wiring described--wooden moulding cheap and effective--the distributing panel--branch circuits--protecting the circuits--the use of porcelain tubes and other insulating devices--putting up chandeliers and wall brackets--"multiple" connections--how to connect a wall switch--special wiring required for heat and power circuits--knob and cleat wiring, its advantages and drawbacks. the task of wiring your house is a simple one, with well-defined rules prescribed by your insurance company. electricity, properly installed, is much safer than oil lamps--so much so indeed that insurance companies are ready to quote especial rates. but they require that the wiring be done in accordance with rules laid down by their experts, who form a powerful organization known as the national board of fire underwriters. ask your insurance agent for a copy of the code rules. danger of fire from an electric current comes from the "short circuit," partial or complete; and it is against this danger that the rules guard one. the amount of electricity flowing through a short circuit is limited only by the fuse protecting that line; and since there is no substance known that can withstand the heat of the electric arc, short circuits must be guarded against. happily the current is so easily controlled that the fire hazard is eliminated entirely--something which cannot be done with oil lamps. in house-wiring for farm plants, the wire should be rubber-covered, and not smaller than no. b. & s. gauge. this is the wire to use on all lamp circuits. it costs about $ . cents per feet. there are four kinds of wiring permitted, under the insurance code: ( ) _flexible armoured cable_: this consists of two-wire cable, protected with a covering of flexible steel. it is installed out of sight between the walls, and provides suitable outlets for lamps, etc., by means of metal boxes set flush with the plaster. it is easily installed in a house being built, but requires much tearing down of plaster for an old house. since its expense prohibits it in the average farm house, this system will not be described in detail here. ( ) _rigid and flexible conduit_: as the name implies this system consists of iron pipe, in connection with flexible conduit, run between the walls. it differs from the above system, in that the pipes with their fittings and outlet boxes are installed first, and the wires are then "fished" through them. duplex wires--the two wires of the circuit woven in one braid--are used; and a liberal amount of soapstone, and occasionally kerosene, are used to make the wires slip easily into place. this is the most expensive system, and the best; but it is difficult to install it in an old house without tearing down a good deal of plaster. it has the advantage of being absolutely waterproof and fireproof. ( ) _wooden moulding_: this is simply moulding, providing two raceways for the insulated wires to run in, and covered with a capping. it is nailed or screwed firmly to the wall, on top of the plaster; and when the wires have been installed in their respective slots and the capping tacked on, the moulding is given a coat of paint to make it in harmony with the other moulding in the room. this system is cheap, safe, and easily installed, and will be described in detail here. [illustration: detail of wooden moulding] ( ) _open wiring_: in open wiring, the wires are stretched from one support to another (such as beams) and held by means of porcelain cleats, or knobs. it is the simplest to install; but it has the objection of leaving the wires unprotected, and is ugly. it is very satisfactory in barns or out-buildings however. _the distributing panel_ the first point to consider in wiring a house with wooden moulding is the distribution board. it should be located centrally, on the wall near the ceiling, so as to be out of ordinary reach. it consists of a panel of wood--though fireproof material is better--firmly screwed to the wall, and containing in a row, the porcelain cut-outs, as shown in the cut, from which the various branch circuits are to be led. each cut-out provides for two branch circuits; and each branch contains receptacles for two plug fuses. these fuses should be of amperes each. the insurance code limits the amount of electricity that may be drawn on any branch lamp circuit to watts; and these fuses protect the circuit from drafts beyond this amount. [illustration: porcelain cut-out and plug fuse] the mains, leading from the entrance switch, as shown in the diagram, to the panel board, should be of the same size as the transmission wire itself, and rubber-covered. these mains terminate at the distributing board. they are connected to the terminals of the cut-outs by means of heavy brass screws. _wire joints_ [illustration: examples of cleat and knob wiring, , , ; wire joints, ; flexible armoured conductor, ] the branch circuits are, as has been said, of no. rubber-covered wire, running concealed in wooden moulding. all joints or splices in this wire are made, as shown in the illustration, by first scraping the wires bright, and fastening them stoutly together. this joint is then soldered, to make the connection electrically perfect. soft solder is used, with ordinary soldering salts. there are several compounds on the market, consisting of soft solder in powder form, ready-mixed with flux. coat the wire joint with this paste and apply the flame of an alcohol lamp. the soldered joint is then covered with rubber tape, and over this ordinary friction tape is wound on. a neat joint should not be larger than the diameter of the wire before insulation is removed. _branch circuits_ first, make a diagram of your rooms and indicate where you wish lamps, or outlets for other purposes. since wooden moulding can be run across ceilings, and up or down walls, lamps may be located in places where they are out of the way. in planning the circuit, remember that you will want many outlets in handy places on the walls, from which portable cords will convey current to table lamps, to electric irons and toasters and other handy devices which can be used on the lamp circuit. these outlets are made of porcelain, in two pieces. one piece is merely a continuation of the moulding itself; and the other is a cap to connect permanently to the end of the lamp or iron cord, which may be snapped into place in a second. since there are a great many designs of separable current taps on the market, it is well to select one design and stick to it throughout the house, so that any device can be connected to any outlet. the code permits watts on each circuit. this would allow lamps of watts each. it is well to limit any one circuit to lamps; this will give leeway for the use of small stoves, irons, toasters, etc. without overloading the circuit and causing a fuse to blow. having installed your distributing board, with its cut-outs, figure out the course of your first branch circuit. let us say it will provide lights and outlets for the dining room and living room. it will be necessary to run the wires through the partitions or floors in several places. for this purpose porcelain tubes should be used, costing one to three cents each. knock holes in the plaster at the determined point, insert the tubes so they project / inch on each side, and fill up the ragged edge of the hole neatly with plaster. [illustration: the distributing panel] when all the tubes have been set in place, begin laying the moulding. run it in a straight line, on the wall against the ceiling wherever possible, mitering the joints neatly. whenever it is necessary to change the run from the ceiling to the wall and a miter cannot be made, the wires should be protected in passing from one slot to the other by being enclosed in non-metallic flexible conduit, called circular loom. in running wooden moulding, avoid brick walls liable to sweat or draw dampness; keep away from places where the heat of a stove might destroy the rubber insulation of the wires; do not pass nearer than six inches to water pipes when possible--and when it is necessary to pass nearer than this, the wooden moulding should pass above the pipe, not below it, with at least an inch of air space intervening, thus avoiding dampness from sweating of pipes. [illustration: snap switch connections] places where chandeliers or wall bracket lamps are to be installed permanently are fitted with wooden terminal blocks, which fit over the moulding and flush with the plaster. these, after holes have been bored in them for the wires, and the wires drawn through, should be screwed firmly to the wall or ceiling, always choosing a joist or beam for support. then a crow's-foot, or tripod of iron, tapped and threaded for iron pipe, is screwed to the terminal block. the iron pipe of the chandelier or wall bracket is then screwed home in this crow's-foot. do not begin stringing wires until all the moulding of the circuit has been laid. then thread the wires through the wall or floor tubes and lay them in their respective slots. if trouble be found making them stay in place before the capping is put on, small tacks may be driven into the moulding beside them to hold them. when a terminal block is reached, a loop is made of each wire, through the hole cut in the block, if the circuit is to continue in the same direction. if it is to end there, the two wires are drawn through taut, and cut off at a length of or inches. these end wires, or loops, are then scraped bare and spliced to the two wires coming out of the chandelier or wall bracket. this joint is then soldered and covered with tape, and the shell of the chandelier is screwed into place, covering the joint. [illustration: detail of wooden moulding] if the moulding is run along the walls flush with the ceiling, as is usual, a branch is made for a wall light, or wall tap, by means of a porcelain "t," or branch-block, which provides the means for running the circuit at right angles to itself without letting the wires come in contact with each other where they cross. separable current taps should be installed in handy places on all circuits, so that small heating devices may be used without removing the lamps from their sockets. the two wires are bared for half an inch where they run through these current taps, and are fastened by means of brass screws. _"multiple" connections_ all electric devices for this installation--lamps, irons, vacuum cleaners, motors--must be connected _across_ the circuit--that is, bridged, from one wire to the other. this is called _multiple_, or shunt connection. there is only one exception to it, in wiring the house. that one exception is installing a wall switch, the ordinary snap switch. since this wall switch, is, in effect, merely an instrument, which opens or closes a circuit, it should be connected to only one wire, which is cut to provide two ends for the screw connections in the switch. when a moulding branch is run down from the ceiling to some convenient spot for a snap switch (with which to turn the lights of a room on or off), a porcelain "t" is not used. all that is necessary to do is to loop the bottom wire of the circuit down through the branch moulding, and connect it to the switch at a terminal block, or porcelain base. in wiring lamp fixtures, no. rubber-covered wire will usually prove too large. for this purpose, no. may be used, with one lamp to each loop. hanging lamps may not be supported by electric lamp cord itself, if there is more than one lamp in the cluster, because the weight is apt to break the electrical connections. in such a case, the lamp should be supported by a chain, and the twisted cord conveying current to the electric bulbs, is woven in the links of the chain. for the pantry, kitchen, woodshed, barn, etc., a single hanging lamp may be suspended from a fielding rosette, as shown in the cut, provided a single knot is tied inside both the rosette and the lamp socket, to make it secure. this makes a very cheap fixture. the rosette of porcelain will cost cents; the lamp socket cents, and the lamp cord suspending the lamp and carrying the current will cost - / cents a foot; while a tin shade will cost another cents. [illustration: detail of simple hanging lamp supported by rosette] _official inspection_ in all communities, your insurance agent must inspect and pass your wiring before you are permitted to throw the main switch and turn on the electricity. frequently they require that the moulding be left uncapped, until they have inspected it. if you have more than watts in lamps to a circuit; if your joints are not soldered and well taped; if the moulding is used in any concealed or damp place, the agent is liable to condemn your work and refuse permission to turn on the electricity. however the rules are so clearly defined that it is difficult to go wrong; and a farmer who does his own wiring and takes pride in its appearance is more apt to be right than a professional electrician who is careless at his task. after the work has been passed, tack on the moulding capping, with brads, and paint the moulding to match the woodwork. wooden moulding wiring is perfectly satisfactory if properly installed. it is forbidden in many large cities, because of the liability of careless workmanship. it should never be installed in damp places, or out of sight. if the work is well done, the system leaves nothing to be desired; and it has the additional advantage of being cheap, and easily done by any farmer who can use carpenter tools. farmers with moulding machinery can make their own moulding. the code prescribes it shall be of straight-grained wood; that the raceways for the wires shall be separated by a tongue of wood one-half inch wide; and that the backing shall be at least / inch thick. it must be covered, inside and out, with at least two coats of moisture-repellant paint. it can be had ready-made for about cents a foot. _special heating circuits_ if one plans using electricity for heavy-duty stoves, such as ranges and radiators, it is necessary to install a separate heating circuit. this is the best procedure in any event, even when the devices are all small and suited to lamp circuits. the wire used can be determined by referring to the table for carrying capacity, under the column headed "rubber-covered." a stove or range drawing amperes, would require a no. wire, in moulding. a good plan is to run the heating circuit through the basement, attaching it to the rafters by means of porcelain knobs. branches can then be run up through the floor to places where outlets are desired. such a branch circuit should carry fuses suitable to the allowed carrying capacity of the wire. _knob and cleat wiring_ knob and cleat wiring, such as is used extensively for barns and out-buildings, requires little explanation. the wires should not be closer than - / inches in open places, and a wider space is better. the wires should be drawn taut, and supported by cleats or knobs at least every four feet. in case of branch circuits, one wire must be protected from the other it passes by means of a porcelain tube. it should never be used in damp places, and should be kept clear of dust and litter, and protected from abrasion. [illustration: knob and cleat wiring] knob and tube wiring is frequently used in houses, being concealed between walls or flooring. in this case, the separate wires are stretched on adjoining beams or rafters, and porcelain tubes are used, in passing through cross beams. for a ceiling or wall outlet, a spliced branch is passed through the plaster by means of porcelain tubes or flexible loom. wires from the house to the barn should be uniform with transmission wires. at the point of entry to buildings they must be at least six inches apart, and must take the form of the "drop loop" as shown in the illustration. a double-pole entrance switch must be provided, opening downward, with a double-pole fuse. in passing over buildings wires must not come closer than feet to flat roofs, or one foot to a ridge roof. feed-wires for electric motors should be determined from the table of safe carrying capacities, and should be of liberal size. chapter ix the electric plant at work direct-connected generating sets--belt drive--the switchboard--governors and voltage regulators--methods of achieving constant pressure at all loads: over-compounding the dynamo; a system of resistances; (a home-made electric radiator); regulating voltage by means of the rheostat--automatic devices--putting the plant in operation. dynamos may be connected to water wheels either by means of a belt, or the armature may spin on the same shaft as the water wheel itself. the latter is by far the more desirable way, as it eliminates the loss of power through shafting and belting, and does away altogether with the belts themselves as a source of trouble. an installation with the water wheel and armature on the same shaft is called a "direct-connected set" and is of almost universal use in large power plants. to be able to use such a direct-connected set, the dynamo must be designed to develop its full voltage when run at a speed identical with that of the water wheel. that is, if the dynamo is wound to be run at a speed of revolutions per minute, it must be driven by a water wheel which runs at this speed and can be governed within narrow limits. small impulse wheels running under great heads attain high speed, and for such wheels it is possible to obtain a suitable dynamo at low cost. for instance, a -inch impulse wheel, running under a -foot head will develop - / horsepower when running at a speed of revolutions per minute. a dynamo for direct coupling to such a wheel should have a rated speed within per cent of r.p.m.; and, as generators of this speed are to be had from the stock of almost all manufacturers, there would be no extra charge. when it comes to the larger wheels, however, of the impulse type, or to turbines operating under their usual head the question becomes a little more difficult. in such cases, the speed of the water wheel will vary from revolutions per minute, to , which is slow speed for a small dynamo. as a general rule, the higher the speed of a dynamo, the lower the cost; because, to lower the speed for a given voltage, it is necessary either to increase the number of conductors on the armature, or to increase the number of field coils, or both. that means a larger machine, and a corresponding increase in cost. in practice, in large plants, with alternating-current machines it has become usual to mount the field magnets on the shaft, and build the armature as a stationary ring in whose air space the field coils revolve. this simplifies the construction of slow-speed, large-output dynamos. such a machine, however, is not to be had for the modest isolated plant of the farmer with his small water-power. [illustration: instantaneous photograph of high-pressure water jet being quenched by buckets of a tangential wheel] [illustration: a tangential wheel, and a dynamo keyed to the same shaft--the ideal method for generating electricity. the centrifugal governor is included on the same base] dynamos can be designed for almost any waterwheel speed, and, among small manufacturers especially, there is a disposition to furnish these special machines at little advance in price over their stock machines. frequently it is merely a matter of changing the winding on a stock machine. the farmer himself, in many cases, can re-wind an old dynamo to fit the speed requirements of a direct-connected drive if the difference is not too great. all that would be necessary to effect this change would be to get the necessary winding data from the manufacturer himself, and proceed with the winding. this data would give the gauge of wire and the number of turns required for each spool of the field magnets; and the gauge of wire and number of turns required for each slot in the armature. the average boy who has studied electricity (and there is something about electricity that makes it closer to the boy's heart than his pet dog) could do this work. the advantages of direct drive are so many that it should be used wherever possible. when direct drive cannot be had, a belt must be used, either from a main shaft, or a countershaft. the belt must be of liberal size, and must be of the "endless" variety--with a scarfed joint. leather belt lacing, or even the better grades of wire lacing, unless very carefully used, will prove unsatisfactory. the dynamo feels every variation in speed, and this is reflected in the lights. there is nothing quite so annoying as flickering lights. usually this can be traced to the belt connections. leather lacing forms a knot which causes the lights to flicker at each revolution of the belt. the endless belt does away with this trouble. most dynamos are provided with sliding bases, by which the machine can be moved one way or another a few inches, to take up slack in the belt. to take advantage of this, the belt must be run in a horizontal line, or nearly so. vertical belting is to be avoided. the dynamo is mounted on a wooden base, in a dry location where it is protected from the weather, or dampness from any source. it must be mounted firmly, to prevent vibration when running up to speed; and the switchboard should occupy a place within easy reach. wires running from the dynamo to the switchboard should be protected from injury, and must be of ample size to carry the full current of the machine without heating. a neat way is to carry them down through the flooring through porcelain tubes, thence to a point where they can be brought up at the back of the switchboard. if there is any danger of injury to these mains they may be enclosed in iron pipe. keep the wires out of sight as much as possible, and make all connections on the back of the switchboard. _the switchboard_ [illustration: connecting switchboard instruments] the switchboard is constructed of some fireproof material, preferably slate or marble. when the cost of this material is an item to consider, build a substantial wooden frame for your switchboard. you can then screw asbestos shingles to this to hold the various instruments and with a little care such a switchboard can be made to look business-like, and it is fully as serviceable as the more expensive kind. the switchboard instruments have already been described briefly. they consist of a voltmeter (to measure voltage); an ammeter (to measure the strength of the current drawn, in amperes), a rheostat (to regulate the voltage of the machine to suit the individual requirements); and the usual switches and fuses. the main switch should be so wired that when open it will throw all the current off the line, but still leave the field coils, the voltmeter, and the switchboard lamp in circuit. the main-switch fuses should have a capacity about per cent in excess of the full load of the dynamo. if the machine is rated for amperes, -ampere fuses should be installed. this permits throwing on an overload in an emergency; and at the same time guards against a short circuit. if the capacity of the machine is under amperes, plug fuses, costing cents each, can be used. if it is above this capacity, cartridge fuses, costing a little more, are required. a supply of these fuses should be kept handy at all times. _governors and voltage regulators_ [illustration: a centrifugal governor (courtesy of the c. p. bradway company, west stafford, conn.)] the necessity for water wheel governors will vary with conditions. as a general rule, it may be said that reaction turbines working under a low head with a large quantity of water do not require as much governing as the impulse wheel, working under high heads with small quantities of water. when governing is necessary at all, it is because the prime mover varies in speed from no load to full load. planning one's plant with a liberal allowance of power--two water horsepower to one electrical horsepower is liberal--reduces the necessity of governors to a minimum. as an instance of this, the plant described in some detail in chapters one and six of this volume, runs without a governor. however, a surplus of water-power is not usual. generally plants are designed within narrow limits; and then the need of a governor becomes immediately apparent. there are many designs of governors on the market, the cheapest being of the centrifugal type, in which a pair of whirling balls are connected to the water wheel gate by means of gears, and open or close the gate as the speed lowers or rises. constant speed is necessary because voltage is directly dependent on speed. if the speed falls per cent, the voltage falls likewise; and a plant with the voltage varying between such limits would be a constant source of annoyance, as well as expense for burned-out lamps. since constant voltage is the result aimed at by the use of a governor, the same result can be attained in other ways, several of which will be explained here briefly. _over-compounding_ ( ) over-compounding the dynamo. this is simple and cheap, if one buys the right dynamo in the first instance; or if he can do the over-compounding himself, by the method described in the concluding paragraphs of chapter seven. if it is found that the speed of the water wheel drops per cent between no load and full load, a dynamo with field coils over-compounded to this extent would give a fairly constant regulation. if you are buying a special dynamo for direct drive, your manufacturer can supply you with a machine that will maintain constant voltage under the normal variations in speed of your wheel. _a system of resistances_ ( ) constant load systems. this system provides that the dynamo shall be delivering a fixed amount of current at all times, under which circumstances the water wheel would not require regulation, as the demands on it would not vary from minute to minute or hour to hour. this system is very simply arranged. it consists of having a set of "resistances" to throw into the circuit, in proportion to the amount of current used. let us say, as an example, that a -ampere generator is used at a pressure of volts; and that it is desirable to work this plant at per cent load, or amperes current draft. when all the lights or appliances were in use, there would be no outside "resistance" in the circuit. when none of the lights or appliances were in use (as would be the case for many hours during the day) it would be necessary to consume this amount of current in some other way--to _waste it_. a resistance permitting amperes of current to flow, would be necessary. of what size should this resistance be? the answer is had by applying ohm's law, explained in chapter five. the law in this case, would be read r = e/c. therefore, in this case r = / = - / ohms resistance, would be required, switched across the mains, to keep the dynamo delivering its normal load. the cheapest form of this resistance would be iron wire. in place of iron wire, german silver wire could be used. german silver wire is to be had cheaply, and is manufactured in two grades, % and %, with a resistance respectively and times that of copper for the same gauge. nichrome wire has a resistance times that of copper; and manganin wire has a resistance times that of copper, of the same gauge. first figure the number of feet of copper wire suitable for the purpose. allowing circular mills for each ampere, the gauge of the wire should be × = , circular mills, or approximately no. b. & s. gauge. how many feet of no. copper wire would give a resistance of - / ohms? referring to the copper wire table, we find that it requires . of no. wire to make one ohm. then - / ohms would require , feet. since per cent german silver wire is approximately times the resistance of copper, a no. german silver wire, for this purpose, would be / the length of the copper wire, or feet. if nichrome wire were used, it would be / th the length of copper for the same gauge, or feet. this resistance wire can be wound in spirals and made to occupy a very small space. as long as it is connected in circuit, the energy of the dynamo otherwise consumed as light would be wasted as heat. this heat could be utilized in the hot water boiler or stove when the lights were turned off. in actual practice, however, the resistance necessary to keep the dynamo up to full load permanently, would not be furnished by one set of resistance coils. each lamp circuit would have a set of resistance coils of its own. a double-throw switch would turn off the lamps and turn on the resistance coils, or _vice versa_. let us say a lamp circuit consisted of carbon lamps, of candlepower each. it would consume × / ampere, or amperes of current, and interpose a resistance of . ohms--say ohms. three amperes would require a wire of at least , circular mills in area for safety. this corresponds to a no. wire. a no. copper wire interposes a resistance of one ohm, for each . feet length. for ohms, , feet would be required, for copper wire, which of course would be impractical. dividing by gives feet for % german silver wire; and dividing by gives feet of nichrome wire of the same gauge. it is simple to figure each circuit in this way and to construct resistance units for each switch. since the resistance units develop considerable heat, they must be enclosed and protected. _a home-made stove or radiator_ while we are on the subject of resistance coils it might be well here to describe how to make stoves for cooking, and radiators for heating the house, at small expense. these stoves consist merely of resistances which turn hot--a dull red--when the current is turned on. iron wire, german silver wire, or the various trade brands of resistance wire, of which nichrome, calido, and manganin are samples, can be used. in buying this wire, procure the table of resistance and carrying capacity from the manufacturers. from this table you can make your own radiators to keep the house warm in winter. iron wire has the disadvantage of oxidizing when heated to redness, so that it goes to pieces after prolonged use. it is cheap, however, and much used for resistance in electrical work. let us say we wish to heat a bathroom, a room × , and feet high--that is a room containing cubic feet of air space. allowing watts for each cubic foot, we would require watts of current, or practically amperes at volts. what resistance would be required to limit the current to this amount? apply ohm's law, as before, and we have r equals e divided by c, or r equals divided by , which is . ohms. forty-two feet of no. german silver wire would emit this amount of heat and limit the current output to amperes. in the far west, it is quite common, in the outlying district, to find electric radiators made out of iron pipe covered with asbestos, on which the requisite amount of iron wire is wound and made secure. this pipe is mounted in a metal frame. or the frame may consist of two pipes containing heating elements; and a switch, in this case, is so arranged that either one or two heating elements may be used at one time, according to the weather. an ingenious mechanic can construct such a radiator, experimenting with the aid of an ammeter to ascertain the length of wire required for any given stove. _regulating voltage at switchboards_ the voltage of any given machine may be regulated, within wide limits, by means of the field rheostat on the switchboard. a dynamo with a rated speed of , revolutions per minute, for volts, will actually attain this voltage at as low as , r.p.m. if all the regulating resistance be cut out. you can test this fact with your own machine by cutting out the resistance from the shunt field entirely, and starting the machine slowly, increasing its speed gradually, until the voltmeter needle registers volts. then measure the speed. it will be far below the rated speed of your machine. if, on the other hand, the speed of such a machine runs up to , or over--that is, an excess of %--the voltage would rise proportionally, unless extra resistance was cut in. by cutting in such resistance--by the simple expedient of turning the rheostat handle on the switchboard,--the field coils are so weakened that the voltage is kept at the desired point in spite of the excessive speed of the machine. excessive speeds are to be avoided, as a rule, because of mechanical strain. but within a wide range, the switchboard rheostat can be used for voltage regulation. as it would be a source of continual annoyance to have to run to the switchboard every time the load of the machine was varied greatly this plan would not be practical for the isolated plant, unless the rheostat could be installed,--with a voltmeter--in one's kitchen. this could be done simply by running a small third wire from the switchboard to the house. then, when the lights became dim from excessive load, a turn of the handle would bring them back to the proper voltage; and when they flared up and burned too bright, a turn of the handle in the opposite direction would remedy matters. by this simple arrangement, any member of the family could attend to voltage regulation with a minimum of bother. _automatic devices_ there are several automatic devices for voltage regulation at the switchboard on the market. these consist usually of vibrator magnets or solenoids, in which the strength of the current, varying with different speeds, reacts in such a way as to regulate field resistance. such voltage regulators can be had for $ or less, and are thoroughly reliable. * * * * * to sum up the discussion of governors and voltage regulators: if you can allow a liberal proportion of water-power, and avoid crowding your dynamo, the chances are you will not need a governor for the ordinary reaction turbine wheel. start your plant, and let it run for a few days or a few weeks without a governor, or regulator. then if you find the operation is unsatisfactory, decide for yourself which of the above systems is best adapted for your conditions. economy as well as convenience will affect your decision. the plant which is most nearly automatic is the best; but by taking a little trouble and giving extra attention, a great many dollars may be saved in extras. _starting the dynamo_ you are now ready to put your plant in operation. your dynamo has been mounted on a wooden foundation, and belted to the countershaft, by means of an endless belt. see that the oil cups are filled. then throw off the main switch and the field switch at the switchboard; open the water gate slowly, and occasionally test the speed of the dynamo. when it comes up to rated speed, say , per minute, let it run for a few minutes, to be sure everything is all right. having assured yourself that the mechanical details are all right, now look at the voltmeter. it is probably indicating a few volts pressure, from to or perhaps. this pressure is due to the residual magnetism in the field cores, as the field coils are not yet connected. if by any chance, the needle does not register, or is now back of , try changing about the connections or the voltmeter on the back of the switchboard. now snap on the field switch. instantly the needle will begin to move forward, though slowly; and it will stop. turn the rheostat handle gradually; as you advance it, the voltmeter needle will advance. finally you will come to a point where the needle will indicate volts. if you have designed your transmission line for a drop of volts at half-load, advance the rheostat handle still further, until the needle points to volts. let the machine run this way for some time. when assured all is right, throw on the main switch, and turn on the light at the switchboard. then go to the house and gradually turn on lights. come back and inspect the dynamo as the load increases. it should not run hot, nor even very warm, up to full load. its brushes should not spark, though a little sparking will do no harm. your plant is now ready to deliver current up to the capacity of its fuses. see that it does not lack good lubricating oil, and do not let its commutator get dirty. the commutator should assume a glossy chocolate brown color. if it becomes dirty, or the brushes spark badly, hold a piece of fine sandpaper against it. never use emery paper! if, after years of service, it becomes roughened by wear, have it turned down in a lathe. occasionally, every few weeks, say, take the brushes out and clean them with a cloth. they will wear out in the course of time and can be replaced for a few cents each. the bearings may need replacing after several years' continuous use. otherwise your electric plant will take care of itself. keep it up to speed, and keep it clean and well oiled. never shut it down unless you have to. in practice, dynamos run week after week, year after year, without stopping. this one, so long as you keep it running true to form, will deliver light, heat and power to you for nothing, which your city cousin pays for at the rate of cents a kilowatt-hour. part iii gasoline engines, windmills, etc. the storage batteries chapter x gasoline engine plants the standard voltage set--two-cycle and four-cycle gasoline engines--horsepower, and fuel consumption--efficiency of small engines and generators--cost of operating a one-kilowatt plant. electricity is of so much value in farm operations, as well as in the farm house, that the farmer who is not fortunate enough to possess water-power of his own, or to live in a community where a coöperative hydro-electric plant may be established, should not deny himself its many conveniences. in place of the water wheel to turn the dynamo, there is the gasoline engine (or other forms of internal combustion engine using oil, gas, or alcohol as fuel); in many districts where steam engines are used for logging or other operations, electricity may be generated as a by-product; and almost any windmill capable of pumping water can be made to generate enough electricity for lighting the farm house at small expense. the great advantage of water-power is that the expense of maintenance--once the plant is installed--is practically nothing. this advantage is offset in some measure by the fact that other forms of power, gas, steam, or windmills, are already installed, in many instances and that their judicious use in generating electricity does not impair their usefulness for the other farm operations for which they were originally purchased. in recent years gasoline engines have come into general use on farms as a cheap dependable source of power for all operations; and windmills date from the earliest times. they may be installed and maintained cheaply, solely for generating electricity, if desired. steam engines, however, require so much care and expert attention that their use for farm electric plants is not to be advised, except under conditions where a small portion of their power can be used to make electricity as a by-product. there are two types of gasoline engine electric plants suitable for the farm, in general use: first: the standard voltage set, in which the engine and dynamo are mounted on one base, and the engine is kept running when current is required for any purpose. these sets are usually of the -volt type, and all standard appliances, such as irons, toasters, motors, etc., may be used in connection with them. since the electricity is drawn directly from the dynamo itself, without a storage battery, it is necessary that these engines be efficient and governed as to speed within a five per cent variation from no load to full load. second: storage battery sets, in which the dynamo is run only a few hours each week, and the electricity thus generated is "stored" by chemical means, in storage batteries, for use when required. since, in this case, the current is drawn from the battery, instead of the dynamo, when used for lighting or other purposes, it is not necessary that a special type of engine be used to insure constant speed. _the standard voltage set_ in response to a general demand, the first type (the direct-connected standard voltage set) has been developed to a high state of efficiency recently, and is to be had in a great variety of sizes (ranging from one-quarter kilowatt to kilowatts and over) from many manufacturers. the principle of the gasoline engine as motive power is so familiar to the average farmer that it needs but a brief description here. gasoline or other fuel (oil, gas, or alcohol) is transformed into vapor, mixed with air in correct proportions, and drawn into the engine cylinder and there exploded by means of a properly-timed electric spark. internal combustion engines are of two general types--four-cycle and two-cycle. the former is by far the more common. in a four-cycle engine the piston must travel twice up and down in each cylinder, to deliver one power stroke. this results in one power impulse in each cylinder every two revolutions of the crank shaft. on its first down stroke, the piston sucks in gas. on its first up stroke, it compresses the gas. at the height of this stroke, the gas is exploded by means of the electric spark and the piston is driven down, on its power stroke. the fourth stroke is called the scavening stroke, and expels the burned gas. this completes the cycle. a one-cylinder engine of the ordinary four-cycle type has one power stroke for every two revolutions of the fly wheel. a two-cylinder engine has one power stroke for one revolution of the fly wheel; and a four-cylinder engine has two power strokes to each revolution. the greater the number of cylinders, the more even the flow of power. in automobiles six cylinders are common, and in the last year or two, eight-cylinder engines began appearing on the market in large numbers. a twelve-cylinder engine is the prospect for the immediate future. since the dynamo that is to supply electric current direct to lamps requires a steady flow of power, the single-cylinder gas or gasoline engine of the four-cycle type is not satisfactory as a rule. the lights will flicker with every other revolution of the fly wheel. this would be of no importance if the current was being used to charge a storage battery--and right here lies the reason why a cheaper engine may be used in connection with a storage battery than when the dynamo supplies the current direct for lighting. a two-cylinder engine is more even in its flow of power and a four-cylinder engine still better. for this reason, standard voltage generating sets without battery are usually of two or four cylinders when of the four-cycle type. when a single-cylinder engine is used, it should be of the two-cycle type. in the two-cycle engine, there is one power stroke to each up-and-down journey of the piston. this effect is produced by having inlet and exhaust ports in the crank case, so arranged that, when the piston arrives at the bottom of the power stroke, the waste gases are pushed out, and fresh gas drawn in before the up stroke begins. for direct lighting, the engine must be governed so as not to vary more than five per cent in speed between no load and full load. there are many makes on the market which advertise a speed variation of three per cent under normal loads. governors are usually of the centrifugal ball type, integral with the fly wheel, regulating the amount of gas and air supplied to the cylinders in accordance with the speed. thus, if such an engine began to slow down because of increase in load, the centrifugal balls would come closer together, and open the throttle, thus supplying more gas and air and increasing the speed. if the speed became excessive, due to sudden shutting off of lights, the centrifugal balls would fly farther apart, and the throttle would close until the speed was again adjusted to the load. these direct-connected standard voltage sets are as a rule fitted with the -volt, direct current, compound type of dynamo, the duplicate in every respect of the machine described in previous chapters for water-power plants. they are practically automatic in operation and will run for hours without attention, except as to oil and gasoline supply. they may be installed in the woodshed or cellar without annoyance due to noise or vibration. it is necessary to start them, of course, when light or power is desired, and to stop them when no current is being drawn. there have appeared several makes on the market in which starting and stopping are automatic. storage batteries are used in connection with these latter plants for starting the engine. when a light is turned on, or current is drawn for any purpose, an automatic switch turns the dynamo into a motor, and it starts the engine by means of the current stored in the battery. instantly the engine has come up to speed, the motor becomes a dynamo again and begins to deliver current. when the last light is turned off, the engine stops automatically. since the installation of a direct-connected standard voltage plant of this type is similar in every respect, except as to motive power, to the hydro-electric plant, its cost, with this single exception, is the same. the same lamps, wire, and devices are used. with gasoline power, the cost of the engine offsets the cost of the water wheel. the engine is more expensive than the ordinary gasoline engine; but even this item of cost is offset by the cost of labor and materials used in installing a water wheel. the expense of maintenance is limited to gasoline and oil. depreciation enters in both cases; and though it may be more rapid with a gasoline engine than a water wheel, that item will not be considered here. the cost of lubricating oil is inconsiderable. it will require, when operated at from one-half load to full load, approximately one pint of gasoline to each horsepower hour. when operated at less than half-load, its efficiency lowers. thus, for a quarter-load, an average engine of this type may require three pints of gasoline for each horsepower hour. for this reason it is well, in installing such a plant, to have it of such size that it will be operating on at least three-fourths load under normal draft of current. norman h. schneider, in his book "low voltage electric lighting," gives the following table of proportions between the engine and dynamo: actual watts actual horsepower nearest engine size . / . / . . - / . - / . - / . - / . . this table is figured for an efficiency of only per cent for the smaller generators, and per cent for the larger. in machines from to kilowatts, the efficiency will run considerably higher. to determine the expense of operating a one-kilowatt gasoline generator set of this type, as to gasoline consumption, we can assume at full load that the gasoline engine is delivering - / horsepower, and consuming, let us say, - / pint of gasoline for each horsepower hour (to make allowance for lower efficiency in small engines). that would be . pints of gasoline per hour. allowing a ten per cent loss of current in wiring, we have watts of electricity to use, for this expenditure of gasoline. this would light ÷ = lamps of watts each, a liberal allowance for house and barn, and permitting the use of small cooking devices and other conveniences when part of the lights were not in use. with gasoline selling at cents a gallon, the use of this plant for an hour at full capacity would cost $ . . your city cousin pays cents for the same current on a basis of cents per kilowatt-hour; and in smaller towns where the rate is cents, he would pay - / cents. running this plant at only half-load--that is, using only lights, or their equivalent--would reduce the price to about cents an hour--since the efficiency decreases with smaller load. it is customary to figure an average of - / hours a day throughout the year, for all lights. on this basis the cost of gasoline for this one-kilowatt plant would be - / cents a day for full load, and approximately - / cents a day for half-load. this is extremely favorable, as compared with the cost of electric current in our cities and towns, at the commercial rate, especially when one considers that light and power are to be had at any place or at any time on the farm simply by starting the engine. a smaller plant, operating at less cost for fuel, would furnish ample light for most farms; but it is well to remember in this connection plants smaller than one kilowatt are practical for light only, since electric irons, toasters, etc., draw from to watts each. obviously a plant of watts capacity would not permit the use of these instruments, although it would furnish or lamps of watts each. chapter xi the storage battery what a storage battery does--the lead battery and the edison battery--economy of tungsten lamps for storage batteries--the low-voltage battery for electric light--how to figure the capacity of a battery--table of light requirements for a farm house--watt-hours and lamp-hours--the cost of storage battery current--how to charge a storage battery--care of storage batteries. for the man who has a small supply of water to run a water wheel a few hours at a time, or who wishes to store electricity while he is doing routine jobs with a gasoline engine or other source of power, the storage battery solves the problem. the storage battery may be likened to a tank of water which is drawn on when water is needed, and which must be re-filled when empty. a storage battery, or accumulator is a device in which a chemical action is set up when an electric current is passed through it. this is called _charging_. when such a battery is charged, it has the property of giving off an electric current by means of a reversed chemical action when a circuit is provided, through a lamp or other connection. this reversed action is called _discharging_. such a battery will discharge nearly as much current as is required originally to bring about the first chemical action. there are two common types of storage battery--the lead accumulator, made up of lead plates (alternately positive and negative); and the two-metal accumulator, of which the edison battery is a representative, made up of alternate plates of iron and nickel. in the lead accumulator, the "positive" plate may be recognized by its brown color when charging, while the "negative" plate is usually light gray, or leaden in color. the action of the charging current is to form oxides of lead in the plates; the action of the discharging current is to reduce the oxides to metallic lead again. this process can be repeated over and over again during the life of the battery. because of the cost of the batteries themselves, it is possible (from the viewpoint of the farmer and the size of his pocketbook) to store only a relatively small amount of electric current. for this reason, the storage battery was little used for private plants, where expense is a considerable item, up to a few years ago. carbon lamps require from - / to watts for each candlepower of light they give out; and a lead battery capable of storing enough electricity to supply the average farm house with light by means of carbon lamps for three or four days at a time without recharging, proved too costly for private use. _the tungsten lamp_ with the advent of the new tungsten lamp, however, reducing the current requirements for light by two-thirds, the storage battery immediately came into its own, and is now of general use. since incandescent lamps were first invented scientists have been trying to find some metal of high fusion to use in place of the carbon filament of the ordinary lamp. the higher the fusing point of this filament of wire, the more economical would be the light. edison sought, thirty years ago, for just the qualities now found in tungsten metal. tungsten metal was first used for incandescent lamps in the form of a paste, squirted into the shape of a thread. this proved too fragile. later investigators devised means of drawing tungsten into wire; and it is tungsten wire that is now used so generally in lighting. a tungsten lamp has an average efficiency of - / watts per candlepower, compared with - / to watts of the old-style carbon lamp. in larger sizes the efficiency is as low as . watt per candlepower; and only recently it has been found that if inert nitrogen gas is used in the glass bulb, instead of using a high vacuum as is the general practice, the efficiency of the lamp becomes still higher, approaching . watt for each candlepower in large lamps. this new nitrogen lamp is not yet being manufactured in small domestic sizes, though it will undoubtedly be put on the market in those sizes in the near future. [illustration: the fairbanks morse oil engine storage battery set] the tungsten lamp, requiring only one-third as much electric current as the carbon lamp, for the same amount of light, reduces the size (and the cost) of the storage battery in the same degree, thus bringing the storage battery within the means of the farmer. some idea of the power that may be put into a small storage battery is to be had from the fact that a storage battery of only volts pressure, such as is used in self-starters on automobiles, will turn a motor and crank a heavy six-cylinder engine; or it will run the automobile, without gasoline, for a mile or more with its own accumulated store of electric current. _the low voltage battery_ the -volt storage battery has become standard for small lighting plants, since the introduction of the tungsten lamp. although the voltage of each separate cell of this battery registers . volts when fully charged, it falls to approximately volts per cell immediately discharging begins. for this reason, it is customary to figure the working pressure of each cell at volts. this means that a -volt battery should consist of at least cells. since, however, the voltage falls below for each cell, as discharging proceeds, it is usual to include one additional cell for regulating purposes. thus, the ordinary -volt storage battery consists of cells, the last cell in the line remaining idle until the lamps begin to dim, when it is switched in by means of a simple arrangement of connections. this maintains a uniform pressure of volts from the beginning to the end of the charge, at the lamp socket. we saw in earlier chapters that the -volt current is the most satisfactory, under all conditions, where the current is to be used for heating and small power, as well as light. but a storage battery of volts would require at least cells, which would make it too expensive for ordinary farm use. as a -volt current is just as satisfactory for electric light, this type has become established, in connection with the battery, and it is used for electric lighting only, as a general rule. batteries are rated first, as to voltage; second, as to their capacity in ampere hours--that is, the number of amperes that may be drawn from them in a given number of hours. thus, a battery rated at ampere hours would give amperes, at volts pressure, for one hour; amperes for hours; amperes for hours; - / amperes for hours; - / amperes for hours; etc., etc. in practice, a battery should not be discharged faster than its -hour rate. thus, a -ampere hour battery should not be drawn on at a greater rate than - / amperes per hour. this -hour rate also determines the rate at which a battery should be re-charged, once it is exhausted. thus, this battery should be charged at the rate of - / amperes for hours, with another hour added to make up for losses that are bound to occur. a battery of -ampere hour capacity should be charged for or hours at the rate of ÷ , or amperes, etc. to determine the size of battery necessary for any particular instance, it is necessary first to decide on the number of lamps required, and their capacity. thirty-volt lamps are to be had in the market in sizes of , and watts; they yield respectively , , and candlepower each. of these the -watt lamp is the most satisfactory for the living rooms; lamps of or watts may be used for the halls, the bathroom and the bedrooms. at volts pressure these lamps would require a current of the following density in amperes: candle power -volt lamp amperes watts . watts . watts . let us assume, as an example, that farmer brown will use -watt lamps in his kitchen, dining room, and sitting room; and -watt lamps in the halls, bathroom, and bedrooms. his requirements may be figured either in lamp hours or in watt-hours. since he is using two sizes of lamps, it will be simpler to figure his requirements in watt-hours. thus: number size of hours watt- room of lamps lamps burned hours kitchen dining room sitting room ( ) bedrooms (each) bathroom ( ) halls (each) pantry cellar ---- total since amperes equal watts divided by volts, the number of ampere hours required in this case each night would be ÷ = . ampere hours; or approximately - / amperes per hour for hours. say it is convenient to charge this battery every fourth day. this would require a battery of × . ampere hours, or . ampere hours. the nearest size on the market is the -ampere hour battery, which would be the one to use for this installation. to charge this battery would require a dynamo capable of delivering amperes of current for hours. the generator should be of volts pressure (allowing - / volts in the generator for each volts of battery) and the capacity of the generator would therefore be watts. this would require a - / horsepower gasoline engine. at - / pints of gasoline for each horsepower, nine hours work of this engine would consume pints of gasoline--or say pints, or two gallons. at cents a gallon for gasoline, lighting your house with this battery would cost cents for four days, or cents a day. your city cousin, using commercial current, would pay - / cents a day for the same amount of current at cents a kilowatt-hour; or - / cents at a -cent rate. if the battery is charged by the farm gasoline engine at the same time it is doing its other work, the cost would be still less, as the extra gasoline required would be small. this figure does not take into account depreciation of battery and engine. the average farmer is too apt to overlook this factor in figuring the cost of machinery of all kinds, and for that reason is unprepared when the time comes to replace worn-out machinery. the dynamo and switchboard should last a lifetime with ordinary care, so there is no depreciation charge against them. the storage battery, a -volt, -ampere hour installation, should not cost in excess of $ ; and, if it is necessary to buy a gasoline engine, a - / horsepower engine can be had for $ or less according to the type. storage batteries of the lead type are sold under a two-years' guarantee--which does not mean that their life is limited to that length of time. with good care they may last as long as years; with poor care it may be necessary to throw them away at the end of a year. the engine should be serviceable for at least years, with ordinary replacements; and the storage battery may last from to years, with occasional renewal of parts. if it were necessary to duplicate both at the end of ten years, this would make a carrying charge of $ . a month for depreciation, which must be added to the cost of light. _figuring by lamp hours_ if all the lamps are to be of the same size--either ten, fifteen, or twenty watts, the light requirements of a farm house can be figured readily by lamp hours. in that event, the foregoing table would read as follows: lamp hours kitchen, lamp, hours sitting room, lamps, hours each dining room, lamps, hours each bedrooms, lamps, hour each halls, lamps, hours each bathroom, lamp, hours pantry and cellar, lamps, hour each to determine the ampere hours from this table, multiply the total number of lamp hours by the current in amperes required for each lamp. as , , and -watt tungsten lamps require . , . and . amperes, respectively at volts pressure, the above requirements in ampere hours would be , - / , or ampere hours, according to the size of lamp chosen. this gives the average current consumption for one night. if it is desired to charge the battery twice a week on the average, multiply the number of lamp hours by , to get the size of battery required. the foregoing illustration is not intended to indicate average light requirements for farms, but is given merely to show how a farmer may figure his own requirements. in some instances, it will be necessary to install a battery of or more ampere hours, whereas a battery of or ampere hours would be quite serviceable in other instances. it all depends on how much light you wish to use and are willing to pay for, because with a storage battery the cost of electric light is directly in proportion to the number of lights used. as a general rule, a larger generator and engine are required for a larger battery--although it is possible to charge a large battery with a small generator and engine by taking more time for the operation. _how to charge a storage battery_ direct current only can be used for charging storage batteries. in the rare instance of alternating current only being available, it must be converted into direct current by any one of the many mechanical, chemical, or electrical devices on the market--that is, the alternating current must be straightened out, to flow always in one direction. a shunt-wound dynamo must be used; else, when the voltage of the battery rises too high, it may "back up" and turn the dynamo as a motor, causing considerable damage. if a compound dynamo is already installed, or if it is desired to use such a machine for charging storage batteries, it can be done simply by disconnecting the series windings on the field coils, thus turning the machine into a shunt dynamo. the voltage of the dynamo should be approximately per cent above the working pressure of the battery. for this reason -volt machines are usually used for or -volt batteries. higher voltages may be used, if convenient. thus a -volt dynamo may be used to charge a single -volt cell if necessary, although it is not advisable. _direction of current_ electricity flows from the positive to the negative terminal. a charging current must be so connected that the negative wire of the dynamo is always connected to the negative terminal of the battery, and the positive wire to the positive terminal. as the polarity is always marked on the battery, there is little danger of making a mistake in this particular. when the storage battery is charged, and one begins to use its accumulation of energy, the current comes out in the opposite direction from which it entered in charging. in this respect, a storage battery is like a clock spring, which is wound up in one direction, and unwinds itself in the other. with all storage battery outfits, an ammeter (or current measure) is supplied with zero at the center. when the battery is being charged, the indicating needle points in one direction in proportion to the strength of the current flowing in; and when the battery is being discharged, the needle points in the opposite direction, in proportion to the strength of the current flowing out. sometimes one is at loss, in setting about to connect a battery and generator, to know which is the positive and which the negative wire of the generator. a very simple test is as follows: start the generator and bring it up to speed. connect some form of resistance in "series" with the mains. a lamp in an ordinary lamp socket will do very well for this resistance. dip the two ends of the wire (one coming from the generator, the other through the lamp) into a cup of water, in which a pinch of salt is dissolved. bring them almost together and hold them there. almost instantly, one wire will begin to turn bright, and give off bubbles. the wire which turns bright and gives off bubbles is the _negative_ wire. the other is the positive. [illustration: a rough-and-ready farm electric plant, supplying two farms with light, heat and power; and a ward leonard-type circuit-breaker for charging storage batteries] _care of battery_ since specific directions are furnished with all storage batteries, it is not necessary to go into the details of their care here. storage battery plants are usually shipped with all connections made, or plainly indicated. all that is necessary is to fill the batteries with the acid solution, according to directions, and start the engine. if the engine is fitted with a governor, and the switchboard is of the automatic type, all the care necessary in charging is to start the engine. in fact, many makes utilize the dynamo as a "self-starter" for the engine, so that all that is necessary to start charging is to throw a switch which starts the engine. when the battery is fully charged, the engine is stopped automatically. the "electrolyte" or solution in which the plates of the lead battery are immersed, is sulphuric acid, diluted with water in the proportion of one part of acid to five of water, by volume. the specific gravity of ordinary commercial sulphuric acid is . . since its strength is apt to vary, however, it is best to mix the electrolyte with the aid of the hydrometer furnished with the battery. the hydrometer is a sealed glass tube, with a graduated scale somewhat resembling a thermometer. the height at which it floats in any given solution depends on the density of the solution. it should indicate approximately . for a storage battery electrolyte before charging. it should not be over . --or , if your hydrometer reads in thousandths. only pure water should be used. distilled water is the best, but fresh clean rain water is permissible. never under any circumstances use hydrant water, as it contains impurities which will injure the battery, probably put it out of commission before its first charge. _pour the acid into the water._ never under any circumstances pour the water into the acid, else an explosion may occur from the heat developed. mix the electrolyte in a stone crock, or glass container, stirring with a glass rod, and testing from time to time with a hydrometer. let it stand until cool and then pour it into the battery jars, filling them to / inch above the top of the plates. then begin charging. the first charge will probably take a longer time than subsequent charges. if the installation is of the automatic type, all that is necessary is to start the engine. if it is not of the automatic type, proceed as follows: first be sure all connections are right. then start the engine and bring the dynamo up to its rated speed. adjust the voltage to the pressure specified. then throw the switch connecting generator to battery. watch the ammeter. it should register in amperes, one-eighth of the ampere-hour capacity of the battery, as already explained. if it registers too high, reduce the voltage of the generator slightly, by means of the field rheostat connected to the generator. this will also reduce the amperes flowing. if too low, raise the voltage until the amperes register correctly. continue the charging operation until the cells begin to give off gas freely; or until the specific gravity of the electrolyte, measured by the hydrometer, stands at . . your battery is now fully charged. throw the switch over to the service line, and your accumulator is ready to furnish light if you turn on your lamps. occasionally add distilled water to the cells, to make up for evaporation. it is seldom necessary to add acid, as this does not evaporate. if the battery is kept fully charged, it will not freeze even when the thermometer is well below zero. a storage battery should be installed as near the house as possible--in the house, if possible. since its current capacity is small, transmission losses must be reduced to a minimum. in wiring the house for storage battery service, the same rules apply as with standard voltage. not more than amperes should be used on any single branch circuit. with low voltage batteries (from volts to volts) it is well to use no. or no. b. & s. gauge rubber-covered wire, instead of the usual no. used with standard voltage. the extra expense will be only a few cents for each circuit, and precious volts will be saved in distribution of the current. chapter xii battery charging devices the automatic plant most desirable--how an automobile lighting and starting system works--how the same results can be achieved in house lighting, by means of automatic devices--plants without automatic regulation--care necessary--the use of heating devices on storage battery current--portable batteries--an electricity "route"--automobile power for lighting a few lamps. the water-power electric plants described in preceding chapters are practically automatic in operation. this is very desirable, as such plants require the minimum of care. it is possible to attain this same end with a storage battery plant. automatic maintenance approaches a high degree of perfection in the electric starting and lighting device on a modern automobile. in this case, a small dynamo geared to the main shaft is running whenever the engine is running. it is always ready to "pump" electricity into the storage battery when needed. an electric magnet, wound in a peculiar manner, automatically cuts off the charging current from the dynamo, when the battery is "full;" and the same magnet, or "regulator," permits the current to flow into the battery when needed. the principle is the same as in the familiar plumbing trap, which constantly maintains a given level of water in a tank, no matter how much water may be drawn from the tank. the result, in the case of the automobile battery, is that the battery is always kept fully charged; for no sooner does the "level" of electricity begin to drop (when used for starting or lighting) than the generator begins to charge. this is very desirable in more ways than one. in the first place, the energy of the battery is always the same; and in the second place, the mere fact that the battery is always kept fully charged gives it a long life. the same result can be achieved in storage battery plants for house lighting, where the source of power is a gasoline or other engine engaged normally in other work. then your electric current becomes merely a by-product of some other operation. take a typical instance where such a plant would be feasible: farmer brown has a five horsepower gasoline engine--an ordinary farm engine for which he paid probably $ or $ . electric light furnished direct from such an engine would be intolerable because of its constant flickering. this five horsepower engine is installed in the milk room of the dairy, and is belted to a countershaft. this countershaft is belted to the vacuum pump for the milking machine, and to the separator, and to a water pump, any one of which may be thrown into service by means of a tight-and-loose pulley. this countershaft is also belted to a small dynamo, which runs whenever the engine is running. the milking machine, the separator, and the water pump require that the gasoline engine be run on the average three hours each day. the dynamo is connected by wires to the house storage battery through a properly designed switchboard. the "brains" of this switchboard is a little automatic device (called a regulator or a circuit breaker), which opens and shuts according to the amount of current stored in the battery and the strength of the current from the generator. when the battery is "full," this regulator is "open" and permits no current to flow. then the dynamo is running idle, and the amount of power it absorbs from the gasoline engine is negligible. when the "level" of electricity in the battery falls, due to drawing current for light, the regulator is "shut," that is, the dynamo and battery are connected, and current flows into the battery. these automatic instruments go still farther in their brainy work. they do not permit the dynamo to charge the battery when the voltage falls below a fixed point, due to the engine slowing down; neither do they permit the dynamo current to flow when the voltage gets too high due to sudden speeding up of the engine. necessarily, an instrument which will take care of a battery in this way, is intricate in construction. that is not an argument against it however. a watch is intricate, but so long as we continue to wind it at stated intervals, it keeps time. so with this storage battery plant: so long as farmer brown starts his engine to do his farm chores every day, his by-product of electricity is stored automatically. such installations are not expensive. a storage battery capable of lighting tungsten lamps, of candlepower each, continuously for hours (or fewer lamps for a longer time); a switchboard containing all the required regulating instruments; and a dynamo of suitable size, can be had for from $ to $ . all that is necessary to put such a plant in operation, is to belt the dynamo to the gasoline engine so that it will run at proper speed; and to connect the wires from dynamo to switchboard, and thence to the house service. the dynamo required for the above plant delivers amperes at volts pressure, or × = watts. a gasoline, gas, or oil engine, or a windmill of - / horsepower furnishes all the power needed. if the farmer uses his engine daily, or every other day, for other purposes, the cost of power will be practically negligible. with this system electric lights are available at any time day or night; and when the gasoline engine is in service daily for routine farm chores, the battery will never run low. this system is especially desirable where one uses a windmill for power. the speed of the windmill is constantly fluctuating, so much so in fact that it could not be used for electric light without a storage battery. but when equipped with a regulator on the switchboard which permits the current to flow only when the battery needs it, and then only when the speed of the windmill is correct, the problem of turning wind power into electric light is solved. * * * * * if the farmer does not desire to go to the additional expense of automatic regulation, there are cheaper plants, requiring attention for charging. these plants are identical with those described above, except they have no regulators. with these plants, when the battery runs low (as is indicated by dimming of the lights) it is necessary to start the engine, bring it up to speed, adjust the dynamo voltage to the proper pressure, and throw a switch to charge the battery. for such plants it is customary to run the engine to charge the battery twice a week. it is necessary to run the engine from to hours to fully charge the discharged battery. when the battery approaches full charge, the fact is evidenced by so-called "gassing" or giving off of bubbles. another way to determine if the battery is fully charged is by means of the voltmeter, as the volts slowly rise to the proper point during the process of charging. a third way, and probably the most reliable is by the use of the hydrometer. the voltage of each cell when fully charged should be . ; it should never be discharged below . volts. many storage battery electric light plants on the market are provided with a simple and inexpensive circuit breaker, which automatically cuts off the current and stops the engine when the battery is charged. the current is then thrown from the dynamo to the house service by an automatic switch. if such a circuit breaker is not included, it is necessary to throw the switch by hand when charging is begun or ended. since the principal item of first cost, as well as depreciation, in a storage battery electric light plant is the storage battery itself, the smallest battery commensurate with needs is selected. since the amount of current stored by these batteries is relatively small, electric irons and heating devices such as may be used freely on a direct-connected plant without a battery, are rather expensive luxuries. for instance, an electric iron drawing watts an hour while in use, requires as much energy as tungsten lamps of candlepower each burning for the same length of time. its rate of current consumption would be over amperes, at volts; which would require a larger battery than needed for light in the average farm home. the use to which electricity from a storage battery is put, however, is wholly a matter of expense involved; and if one is willing to pay for these rather expensive luxuries, there is no reason why he should not have them. heating, in any form, by electricity, requires a large amount of current proportionally. as a matter of fact, there is less heat to be had in thermal units from a horsepower-hour of electricity than from three ounces of coal. when one is generating current from water-power, or even direct from gasoline or oil, this is not an argument against electric heating devices. but it becomes a very serious consideration when one is installing a storage battery as the source of current, because of the high initial cost, and depreciation of such a battery. farmers who limit the use of their storage battery plants to lighting will get the best service. _portable batteries_ abroad it is becoming quite common for power companies to deliver storage batteries fully charged, and call for them when discharged. without a stretch of the imagination, we can imagine an ingenious farmer possessing a water-power electric plant building up a thriving business among his less fortunate neighbors, with an "electricity" route. it could be made quite as paying as a milk route. [illustration: connections for charging storage batteries on -volt mains] many communities have water or steam power at a distance too great to transmit -volt current by wire economically; and because of lack of expert supervision, they do not care to risk using current at a pressure of volts or higher, because of its danger to human life. in such a case it would be quite feasible for families to wire their houses, and carry their batteries to the generating plant two or three times a week to be charged. there are a number of portable batteries on the market suitable for such service, at voltages ranging from to volts. the best results would be obtained by having two batteries, leaving one to be charged while the other was in use; and if the generating station was located at the creamery or feed mill, where the farmer calls regularly, the trouble would be reduced to a minimum. such a battery would necessarily be small, and of the sealed type, similar to those used in automobiles. it could be used merely for reading lamps--or it could be used for general lighting, according to the expense the farmer is willing to incur for batteries. an ordinary storage battery used in automobile ignition and lighting systems is of the -volt, -ampere type, called in trade a " - ." lamps can be had for these batteries ranging in sizes from candlepower to candlepower. a lamp of candlepower, drawing - / amperes, is used for automobile headlights, and, as any one knows after an experience of meeting a headlight on a dark road, they give a great deal of light. a " - " battery keeps one of these lamps running for hours, or two lamps running hours. a minimum of wiring would be required to install such a battery for the reading lights in the sitting room, and for a hanging light in the dining room. the customary gates for charging these batteries in a large city is cents; but in a country plant it could be made less. to charge such a battery on a -volt direct current, it is necessary to install some means of limiting the amount of current, or in other words, the charging rate. this charging rate, for hours should be, as we have seen, one-eighth of the ampere-hour capacity of the battery. thus a " - " battery would require a - / ampere current. connecting two such batteries in "series" (that is, the negative pole of one battery to the positive pole of the second) would make a -volt battery. ten or twelve such batteries could be connected in "series," and a -volt direct current generator would charge them in hours at a - / ampere rate. the diagram on page shows the connections for charging on a -volt circuit. an ordinary -candlepower carbon lamp is of ohms resistance, and (by ohm's law, c equals e divided by r) permits / ampere of current to flow. by connecting such lamps across the mains, in parallel, the required - / amperes of current would be flowing from the generator through the lamps, and back again. connect the battery in "series" at any point on either of the two mains, between the lamps and the generator, being careful to connect the positive end to the positive pole of the battery, and _vice versa_. lamps are the cheapest form of resistance; but in case they are not available, any other form of resistance can be used. iron wire wound in spirals can be used, or any of the many makes of special resistance wire on the market. first it is necessary to determine the amount of resistance required. we have just seen that the charging rate of a -ampere hour battery is - / amperes. applying ohm's law here, we find that ohms resistance equals volts divided by amperes, or r = / . = . ohms. with a -volt current, the ohms resistance required in series with the storage battery of this size would be . ohms. _automobile power for lighting_ there are many ingenious ways by which an automobile may be utilized to furnish electric light for the home. the simplest is to run wires direct from the storage battery of the self-starting system, to the house or barn, in such a way that the current may be used for reading lamps in the sitting room. by a judicious use of the current in this way, the normal operation of the automobile in the daytime will keep the battery charged for use of the night lamps, and if care is used, such a plan should not affect the life of the battery. care should be used also, in this regard, not to discharge the battery too low to prevent its utilizing its function of starting the car when it was desired to use the car. however, if the battery were discharged below its starting capacity, by any peradventure, the car could be started by the old-fashioned cranking method. using an automobile lighting system for house lighting implies that the car be stored in a garage near the house or barn; as this battery is too low in voltage to permit transmitting the current any distance. one hundred feet, with liberal sized transmission wires is probably the limit. that such a system is feasible is amply proved by an occurrence recently reported in the daily papers. a doctor summoned to a remote farm house found that an immediate operation was necessary to save the patient's life. there was no light available, except a small kerosene lamp which was worse than nothing. the surgeon took a headlight off his car, strung a pair of wires through a window, and instantly had at his command a light of the necessary intensity. another manner in which an automobile engine may be used for house lighting is to let it serve as the charging power of a separate storage battery. the engine can be belted to the generator, in such a case, by means of the fly wheel. or a form of friction drive can be devised, by means of which the rear wheels (jacked up off the floor) may supply the necessary motive power. in such a case it would be necessary to make allowance for the differential in the rear axle, so that the power developed by the engine would be delivered to the friction drive. the following pages contain advertisements of macmillan books by the same author or on related subjects. water power engineers designers and manufacturers hunt superior quality complete equipments for developing water powers including:--water wheels, flumes, governors, supply pipes, gates, hoists, valves, screens, gears, pulleys, clutches, bearings, shafting, etc. three types of water power developing wheels, ranged to meet every condition. [illustration] div. no. --turbine water wheels for large powers and large quantities of water. div. no. --rim leverage wheels for small powers and very limited quantities of water. div. no. --small water motors for minimum water supplies under high heads. send for special catalogues and water power blanks to fill in for estimates on suitable type of water wheel for developing your water power to best advantage. rodney hunt machine company mill street orange, massachusetts, u.s.a. the farmer of tomorrow _cloth, mo, $ . _ "a crisp, entertaining, and instructive discussion of the conditions which have brought about the present agricultural problem in america."--_countryside magazine._ "the book is interestingly written and full of many vital discussions."--_annals of the american academy of political and social science._ "a popular consideration of the fundamental factors affecting the business of farming."--_pacific rural press._ "the growing, popular question of farming analyzed from all angles, with many helpful suggestions."--_leslie's weekly._ "any person of intelligence, alive to the present and future welfare of his country will find 'the farmer of tomorrow,' a book of absorbing character."--_times-star._ the macmillan company publishers - fifth avenue new york coöperation in agriculture by g. harold powell _cloth, mo, $ . _ "the author has a broad outlook and never fails to suggest that the economic advantages of coöperation may frequently be quite subordinate to the general social and community interests which are fostered through a common undertaking. he writes with the genuine interest of a man having experience and faith in that of which he speaks."--_political science quarterly._ "a volume which explains in a lucid way the features of the existing system and the measures taken by farmers to protect their interests."--_journal of the royal statistical society._ "mr. powell has not attempted to cover the entire field of agricultural coöperation, but has confined himself to its more important phases. his work shows a grasp of the issues involved and a ripeness of conclusion that comes only from actual contact with the practical side of coöperation."--_american economic review._ "the book is decidedly worth while."--_farm life and agriculture._ the macmillan company publishers - fifth avenue new york rural science series edited by l. h. bailey _each volume illustrated. cloth, mo._ a series of practical books for farmers and gardeners, sold as a set or separately. each one is the work of a competent specialist, and is suitable for consultation alike by the amateur or professional tiller of the soil, the scientist or the student. illustrations of marked beauty are freely used, and the books are clearly printed and well bound. on selection of land, etc. isaac p. roberts' the farmstead $ t. f. hunt's how to choose a farm e. s. cheyney and j. p. wentling's the farm woodlot glenn w. herrick's insects injurious to the household on tillage, etc. f. h. king's the soil isaac p. roberts' the fertility of the land f. h. king's irrigation and drainage edward b. voorhees' fertilizers edward b. voorhees' forage crops j. a. widtsoe's dry farming l. h. bailey's principles of agriculture s. m. tracy's forage crops for the south on plant diseases, etc. e. c. lodeman's the spraying of plants on garden-making l. h. bailey's garden-making l. h. bailey's vegetable-gardening l. h. bailey's forcing book l. h. bailey's plant breeding on fruit-growing, etc. l. h. bailey's nursery book l. h. bailey's fruit-growing (new edition) l. h. bailey's the pruning book f. w. card's bush fruits w. paddock & o. b. whipple's fruit-growing in arid regions j. e. coit's citrus fruits _prepar_ on the care of live-stock nelson s. mayo's the diseases of animals w. h. jordan's the feeding of animals i. p. roberts' the horse m. w. harper's breaking and training of horses george c. watson's farm poultry. new edition john a. craig's sheep farming on dairy work, farm chemistry, etc. henry h. wing's milk and its products. new edition j. g. lipman's bacteria and country life on economics and organization william a. mckeever's farm boys and girls i. p. roberts' the farmer's business handbook george t. fairchild's rural wealth and welfare h. n. ogden's rural hygiene j. green's law for the american farmer g. h. powell's coöperation in agriculture the macmillan company publishers - fifth avenue new york rural text-book series edited by l. h. bailey _each volume illustrated. cloth, mo._ while the rural science series is designed primarily for popular reading and for general use, this related new series is designed for classroom work and for special use in consultation and reference. the rural text-book series is planned to cover eventually the entire range of public school and college texts. duggar, b. m. physiology of plant production $ duggar, john frederick southern field crops gay, c. warren principles and practice of judging live-stock harper, m. w. animal husbandry for schools hitchcock, a. s. grasses livingston, george field crop production lyon, t. l. and fippin, e. o. principles of soil management mann, a. r. beginnings in agriculture montgomery, g. f. corn crops piper, charles v. forage plants and their culture warren, g. f. elements of agriculture warren, g. f. farm management wheeler, h. j. manures and fertilizers widtsoe, john a. principles of irrigation practice the macmillan company publishers - fifth avenue new york the rural outlook set by l. h. bailey _four volumes. each, cloth, mo. uniform binding, attractively boxed. $ . per set; carriage extra. each volume also sold separately._ in this set are included three of professor bailey's most popular books as well as a hitherto unpublished one,--"the country-life movement." the long and persistent demand for a uniform edition of these little classics is answered with the publication of this attractive series. the country life movement _cloth, mo, pages, $ . postage extra_ this hitherto unpublished volume deals with the present movement for the redirection of rural civilization, discussing the real country-life problem as distinguished from the city problem, known as the back-to-the-land movement. the outlook to nature (new and revised edition) _cloth, mo, pages, $ . postage extra_ in this alive and bracing book, full of suggestions and encouragement, professor bailey argues the importance of contact with nature, a sympathetic attitude toward which "means greater efficiency, hopefulness, and repose." the state and the farmer (new edition) _cloth, mo, $ . postage extra_ it is the relation of the farmer to the government that professor bailey here discusses in its varying aspects. he deals specifically with the change in agricultural methods, in the shifting of the geographical centers of farming in the united states, and in the growth of agricultural institutions. the nature study idea (new edition) _cloth, mo, $ . postage extra_ "it would be well," the critic of _the tribune farmer_ once wrote, "if 'the nature study idea' were in the hands of every person who favors nature study in the public schools, of every one who is opposed to it, and most important, of every one who teaches it or thinks he does." it has been professor bailey's purpose to interpret the new school movement to put the young into relation and sympathy with nature,--a purpose which he has admirably accomplished. the macmillan company publishers - fifth avenue new york * * * * * transcriber's notes: the square root symbol is indicated by sqrt(..) exponents are indicated by ^ bold in a table is indicated by =..= [illustration: the royalty of radio and television a new world of entertainment television receiver zenith® operating manual warranty registration card caution: dealer do not remove this booklet contains customer's registration card and serial number] warranty zenith radio corporation warrants the parts, transistors, and tubes (including television picture tubes) in any zenith black and white television receiver or zenith black and white television combination receiver to be free from defects in material arising from normal usage. its obligation under this warranty is limited to replacing, or at its option repairing any such parts or transistors or tubes of the receiver which, after regular installation and under normal usage and service, shall be returned within ninety ( ) days (one year in case of television picture tubes only) from the date of original consumer purchase of the receiver to the authorized dealer from whom the purchase was made and which shall be found to have been thus defective in accordance with the policies established by zenith radio corporation. the obligation of zenith radio corporation does not include either the making or the furnishing of any labor in connection with the installation of such repaired or replacement parts, transistors or tubes nor does it include responsibility for any transportation expense. zenith radio corporation assumes no liability for failure to perform or delay in performing its obligations with respect to the above warranty if such failure or delay results, directly or indirectly, from any cause beyond its control including but not limited to acts of god, acts of government, floods, fires, shortage of materials, and labor and/or transportation difficulties. conditions and exclusions this warranty is expressly in lieu of all other agreements and warranties, expressed or implied, and zenith radio corporation does not authorize any person to assume for it the obligations contained in this warranty and neither assumes nor authorizes any representative or other person to assume for it any other liability in connection with such zenith television receiver or parts or tubes or transistors thereof. the warranty herein extends only to the original consumer purchaser and is not assignable or transferable and shall not apply to any receiver or parts or transistors or tubes thereof which have been repaired or replaced by anyone else other than an authorized zenith dealer, service contractor or distributor, or which have been subject to alteration, misuse, negligence or accident, or to the parts or tubes or transistors of any receiver which have had the serial number or name altered, defaced or removed. =zenith radio corporation is under no obligation to extend this warranty to any receiver for which a zenith warranty registration card has not been completed and mailed to the corporation within fifteen ( ) days after date of delivery.= zenith radio corporation chicago, illinois =note:= uhf information in this book applies to models equipped for vhf-uhf reception. general notes . place receiver where no bright light will fall on the screen or in the eyes of the viewers. . viewers should not be seated closer than a distance of ft. from the screen for maximum comfort. . place where unimpeded cabinet ventilation is allowed. if receiver is to be placed along a wall allow several inches between wall and cabinet back. this is important for proper ventilation. warning, high voltage it is recommended that only your authorized zenith television technician make repairs or adjustments inside the receiver. a severe shock can result from tampering. power supply do not attempt to operate on dc or line supplies of other voltages or frequency ratings than those stated on the cabinet back. cabinet stains to preserve the finish on your zenith television cabinet, instruments or ornaments with rubber feet should not be placed on it. the chemicals in the rubber feet have a tendency to leave a stain. picture glass your zenith is equipped with the new sealed picture glass and tube. simply clean it from the front of the set when necessary. use lukewarm water and a mild soap solution. carefully wipe dry with a clean, damp chamois cloth. controls pull-push on-off switch--volume control to turn receiver on, pull knob outward. to turn receiver off, push knob inward. clockwise rotation of the knob increases the volume, counterclockwise rotation diminishes the volume. allow the receiver to warm up for about minute before you wish to use it. =channel selector (vhf)= turn knob to channel desired. =perma-set tuning control (vhf) note:= your zenith has the new perma-set tuning control. each channel has been correctly set at the factory for best picture and sound. [illustration: fig. --controls note: open panel door at front of cabinet for access to controls tone control horizontal hold vertical hold (some models) peak picture brightness contrast] [illustration: vhf channel selector vhf perma-set tuning knob vhf channel indicator channel numbers illuminated (some models)] [illustration: uhf channel indicator uhf fine tuning knob uhf channel tuning control pull-push on-off switch and volume control =note:= knob style varies with models] however, should the settings become mis-adjusted, it is a simple matter to adjust them as follows: . turn the vhf channel selector knob to the channel number desired. . turn vhf perma-set tuning knob until there is no picture. . then turn perma-set tuning knob back slowly for best picture and sound. . repeat for each channel to be set. tone control your zenith is equipped with a tone control which enables you to personally select tonal values of unmatched richness and fidelity. the high tonal register and the "bass" or low frequencies are emphasized by turning the tone control knob. set knob to the position most pleasing to your ear. uhf tuning first, turn vhf channel selector to "uhf" position. turn uhf channel tuning control for desired uhf channel. then carefully turn uhf fine tuning knob for best picture and sound. disregard channel numbers and if they appear in the uhf indicator dial of your unit. these are vhf channels to be tuned in with the vhf selector. peak picture (some models) set this control for best picture crispness in your location. the strength of the signal being received and your personal preference for picture detail will determine the optimum setting. service your new zenith television receiver is engineered for dependable long life service but like any mechanical or electrical instrument, it will occasionally require maintenance. for service consult your zenith dealer or refer to the organization that installed your instrument. (see warranty.) picture adjustments brightness rotate clockwise to increase the brightness; counterclockwise reduces the brightness. it is to be used in conjunction with the contrast control since its movement will also have an effect on picture contrast. [illustration: fig. ] =note:= the brightness control setting for the picture shown in figure is set too high. set the control below this level. contrast adjust the picture for best distinction between the black and white shading. your own vision is the best judge in setting this control properly. [illustration: fig. ] =note:= the contrast control setting for the picture shown in figure is set too high. set the control below this level. horizontal hold control if the picture appears to have a tendency to move across the screen, or if it assumes a broken streaked appearance, as indicated in figure , it should be readjusted to a point where the pictures remain locked in properly on all channels. [illustration: fig. ] vertical hold control this control is used in correcting for vertical movement, or rolling up or down. set control to lock picture. (fig. ) [illustration: fig. ] interference the most effective means of reducing interference to a minimum has been built into your zenith television receiver. occasionally however, the picture may be affected by electrical interference or reflections. auto ignition and appliances automobile ignition, electrical appliances, etc., cause a speckled streaked appearing picture as shown. this condition is most noticeable in weak signal areas. (fig. .) [illustration: fig. ] diathermy diathermy produces a distinctive herringbone pattern and one or two horizontal bands across the face of the picture. (fig. ). it can sometimes be reduced or eliminated by the insertion of a filter trap at the antenna terminals. [illustration: fig. ] r.f. interference radio signals by a neighboring commercial, amateur or police station may cause interference in the form of moving ripples or diagonal streaks. television or fm receivers operating near your receiver, can also be the reason for this reaction. (fig. .) [illustration: fig. ] the insertion of a filter trap at the antenna terminals of the tv receiver will sometimes eliminate or reduce this type of interference. antenna connections [illustration: fig. --antenna connections at cabinet back figure . notes: . for possible better performance connect additional wire to remaining antenna terminal . tack or twist end of wire to convenient point up and away from tv chassis (vary position for best reception.) additional ft length wire approx. tv receiver] an outdoor type antenna is recommended for best reception. if such installation is impossible, different type indoor antenna may be used. quality of reception also depends upon local signal conditions. some models are equipped with a di-pole or mono-pole antenna mounted at the cabinet back. to use this antenna, raise and extend rods. vary the length and position of the rods or rod for best picture and sound. under favorable receiving conditions, satisfactory reception may be obtained with a ft. length of antenna wire. (supplied with some models). stretch out wire for best reception. when using a regular outside antenna, disconnect the inside antenna leads from the antenna terminal screws. connect the antenna transmission line to both of these terminal screws. the proof of zenith antenna superiority is in the picture. zenith tv antennas are designed and constructed to provide you maximum service and superior performance. contact your zenith dealer for the one that will provide you with the best picture quality. diplexer (see page ) when using a combination vhf-uhf antenna system with a single transmission line it is necessary to have an additional diplexer at the receiver. make the transmission line lengths from the diplexer to the vhf and uhf antenna post terminals on the receiver as short as possible. see your zenith dealer for additional information. oscillator adjustments (vhf) =note:= _the vhf perma-set tuning control on the tuner is also the vhf channel oscillator adjustment._ no additional oscillator adjustments are incorporated. therefore, should re-tuning of a vhf tv channel be required, select the channel and then manually turn the tuning knob for best picture and sound. each individual vhf channel is tuned in this manner. phonevision a three-year commercial trial of zenith's phonevision[a] systems of over-the-air subscription television has been in progress for the hartford, connecticut area since june , . authorized by the federal communications commission, the trial has made it possible, for the first time, for about american tv homes to enjoy the convenience and economy of viewing top flight box-office entertainment and other features broadcast to their home receivers. features at prices for the entire family no greater than a single admission at the theatre, stadium or concert hall. the hartford test has already furnished factual information, rather than speculation, concerning this brand new television service. on the basis of this factual information, the f.c.c. has been requested to authorize nationwide operation. if the f.c.c. is persuaded by the results of the trial that subscription television is in the public interest and should be authorized nationally, then every home could have its own "television theatre" with the world's greatest and most costly entertainment offered for an admission well below the cost of witnessing these same events outside the home. with such premium-type programs added to entertainment now available from sponsored television, the home viewer would be able to obtain the ultimate of everything he wants to see on his own tv screen. [a] reg. u.s. pat. off. fuse replacement remove cabinet back for access to main chassis fuse if it ever becomes necessary to replace it. installation instructions for s- zenith diplexer the diplexer is designed for use with a combined vhf-uhf antenna system incorporating a single transmission line. figures a, b, c, and d show diplexer installed on various chassis models. uhf reception should be tried with and without the inductance wire to obtain the best overall results. disconnect leads from previous antenna system. install diplexer assembly in manner most suitable to tv chassis model. note: always connect the diplexer assembly with coil terminal to vhf antenna terminal. [illustration: fig. a vhf antenna terminals on tuner connect transmission line from combined vhf-uhf antenna system to these terminals uhf antenna terminals note to install diplexer disconnect cabinet antenna leads] [illustration: fig. b vhf to vhf tuner new terminals for combination vhf-uhf antenna system snap terminal cups into holes located to the right of vhf terminals install diplexer assembly as shown connect ohm transmission line (supplied with kit) between terminals as shown uhf continuous tuner terminals if necessary connect uhf inductance wire (supplied with kit) as shown note disconnect previous antenna leads from vhf terminals. do not remove leads from vhf tuner to antenna terminals.] [illustration: fig. c to antenna terminals on uhf tuner to antenna inductance wire to antenna terminals on vhf tuner] [illustration: fig d. bend diplexer lugs and mount as shown note: do not allow diplexer terminals to short against cabinet back solder leads & connect to uhf terminals connect ohm uhf new terminals for combination vhf-uhf antenna system vhf antenna terminals on tv set] when you mail the registration card below the warranty on your zenith® television receiver becomes effective x w inst. book warranty is void unless registration card is returned to us within days after date of delivery important--please fill in both sections of card mail this card today mail this card today serial no. model owner's name__________________________________ street________________________________________ city_______________________county___________state__________zip code_______ purchased from______________________________________date__________________ address___________________________________________________________________ mail this card today mail this card today zenith sales corporation dickens avenue chicago, ill. printed in u.s.a. g e d c b - [illustration: radio shack trs- expansion interface] radio shack trs- expansion interface _see caution inside cover_ catalog numbers - - - =operator's manual= custom manufactured in u.s.a. for radio shack [tc] a division of tandy corporation introduction the trs- expansion interface (see figure ) consists of the case, a dc power supply, a ribbon cable, a cassette recorder jumper cable and an additional cassette recorder cable for cassette recorder number . notice that the dc power supply is not installed in the case upon receipt. it must be installed using the procedures under the heading "setting up" and as illustrated in figure . the case houses the expansion interface printed circuit board (pcb), two dc power supplies and provides a housing area for an additional expansion pcb. the expansion interface utilizes a real-time clock and contains sockets for the addition of up to k of ram in k increments. one dc power supply provides power to the pcb. the other one supplies power to the trs- . the power supplies are interchangeable. the ribbon cable has -pin connectors on both ends and is used to connect the expansion interface to the trs- . you received hoods for these connectors which are covered later in this manual. the cassette recorder jumper cable has -pin audio din connectors on both ends. it connects between the expansion interface tape input/output (i/o) and the tape connector on the right rear of the trs- microcomputer. the cassette recorder cable is provided to connect the expansion interface to cassette recorder number . capabilities and advantages the interface allows you to add the following radio shack modules to your system: . screen printer ( - ) . line printer ( - ) . mini-disk system ( - / - ) . cassette recorder number ( - ) the screen printer and line printer allow you to obtain hard copy (printed) information generated by your trs- . the trs- mini-disk system is a small version of the floppy disk. it provides vast storage space and much quicker access time than tape. the number disk contains about , bytes of free space for files. each additional disk has , bytes of file space. the disk system has its own set of commands that allow manipulation of files and expanded abilities in file use. the trs- mini-disk system uses sequential or random access. the disks will allow use of several additional level ii commands. =important note= because of the presence of a disk controller in the expansion interface, the computer will try to input the additional commands. when the expansion interface is connected to the computer, it assumes that a mini-disk is connected. to use the expansion interface without a mini-disk, press the break key on the trs- keyboard. this will override the mini-disk mode and allow normal level ii operation. the use of two cassettes allows a much more efficient and convenient manner of updating data stored on tape. for example, if you have payroll data stored on tape, the information can be read, one item at a time, from cassette recorder number , then changed or added to and written out on cassette recorder number . the example cited is a very simple application; however, very powerful routines can be constructed to allow input and output of data using two tapes simultaneously. caution this unit is designed to be used with level ii only. =do not use with level i.= [illustration: figure . expansion interface.*] * catalog number description ram - trs- expansion interface k - trs- expansion interface k - trs- expansion interface k setting up =power supplies and pcb housing= (see figure ) remove the power supply door (top right side). first connect one dc power cord (din connector) to the power connector on the pcb. now install the two dc power supplies as illustrated. route the remaining cords out the rear of the case. be sure the power cords are seated in the door cutouts before replacing the door. to gain access to the future expansion pcb housing, remove the expansion door from the top left side of the module. [illustration: figure . power supplies and future expansion pcb locations. (illustration shows the following parts:) power supply door expansion door recesses recesses housing for future expansion board trs- dc power supply rear expansion interface dc power supply ac power cord dc power cord note: install expansion interface dc power supply =first=.] =note= the term "port" as used in this manual refers to the openings into which the cable connectors are inserted to provide an interconnection between the trs- and the expansion interface modules. the ports, with the exception of the expansion interface port, are also covered by removable doors. to remove these doors, press on the right side of the door and it will pivot slightly. grasp the left side of the door and pull out (see figure for locations). [illustration: figure . expansion interface, front view--doors removed. (illustration shows the following parts:) door--mini-disk door--line printer port door--future expansion port door--screen printer port] =electrical connections= (see figure ) turn the trs- so that it faces away from you. locate the port door ( ); it's at the right end of the rear panel. to remove the door, raise it up and slide it to the right--then lift it up and away from the trs- . place the trs- and expansion interface hoods ( and ) on the ribbon cable connectors as shown in figure . the hoods replace the door on the trs- and fill the opening on the expansion interface. these hoods are designed so that it is not possible to insert the connectors upside down. they function as keyways for the connectors. now connect the ribbon cable between the left front expansion interface port and the trs- port. connect the dc power cord (din connector) to the power connector on the right rear of the trs- and connect both ac power cords to standard vac outlets. the interconnect cable for an expansion module is provided with that unit. see figure for hood assembly and installation. connect the cassette recorder cable (din plug on one end and three plugs on the other) to the tape i/o connector that is located on the rear of the expansion interface nearest the power cord exits. (refer to figure ). of the three plugs on the other end of the cable: . connect the black plug to the ear jack on the side of the cassette recorder. . connect the larger gray plug to the aux jack. . connect the smaller gray plug to the rem jack. =note= a dummy plug is provided with your cassette recorder. plug it in to the mic jack. this plug disconnects the built-in microphone so it won't pick up sounds while you are loading tapes. [illustration: figure . front view--interface connections. (illustration shows the following parts:) hood connector and cable telephone-type cable line printer edge card connector with hood and cable (assembled) line printer port (edge card) hood connector and cable future expansion port (edge card) future expansion edge card connector with hood and cable screen printer edge card connector and cable (assembled) screen printer port (edge card) trs- interface port (edge card) trs- interface port hood connector and cable hood connector and cable door - trs- expansion port trs- port edge connector hood connector and cable] connect the cassette recorder jumper cable to the center din connector on the rear of the expansion interface. connect the other end to the tape connector on the right rear of the trs- . connect the video cable from the video display to the video connector on the right rear of the trs- . =note= your cassette recorders may be powered by batteries or from a vac source. thus, ac power cords are optional. the trs- expansion interface has been designed to support the video display module. set the feet of the video display in the recesses in the power supply and pcb housing doors. (refer to figure ). operation =note= the power switch is recessed into the front of the expansion interface to prevent accidental loss of power. activate the switch with the eraser-end of a pencil or small tool of similar size. apply power to the expansion interface. notice that when power is off, the end surface of the switch is white and when power is on, it changes to orange. conclusion possibly, you will not need all of the expansion modules that are available but, we have supplied you with hoods for cable connectors for a complete expansion system. use the hoods as illustrated to prevent accidental mismatch between the edge connectors on the pcb and the cable connectors. in the event that you lose a door or hood and want to replace it, we have given you a parts list. you may refer to the parts list and exploded diagrams to determine its part number. you can order replacement parts through your local radio shack store. you must have a level ii basic trs- microcomputer to utilize the trs- expansion interface, the line printer and the mini-disk modules. if you have a level i basic machine, it must be modified to accept level ii programs. the screen printer is the only expansion module that may be connected directly to the trs- microcomputer and that will operate with level i machines. we are continually improving and updating our trs- microcomputer system. you will be kept informed through our newsletters (you are on the mailing list), addenda and revisions to the manual. for the complete electrical connections block diagram, see figure . [illustration: figure . rear view--interface connections. (illustration shows the following parts:) mini-disk hood connector and cable door (mini-disk port) -pin audio din (female connectors) -pin audio din (male connectors) to trs- tape connector] [illustration: figure . placement of expansion interface.] [illustration: +---------------+ +-----------+ | video display | | dc power | | | | supply | +------+--------+ +----+------+ | | | +---------------+ | | optional +---------+ +------+-----+--+ +-----------+ __ | screen |_________| |_______| cassette |___/ |= | printer | | trs- | | recorder | \__|= +---------+ +---------------+ +-----------+ trs- microcomputer system without expansion interface.] [illustration: +---------+ | screen |______screen printer ________ | printer | interface cable | +---------+ | | | +---------+ | +----------+ | line | line printer | | cassette | _ | printer |-------interface cable--+ | +----| recorder |__/ |= +---------+ p/n | | | | (no. ) | \_|= | | | +----------+ / | | | / +---------+ +------+---+----+ | optional / |mini-disk|_________________| expansion |--+ (cassette___/ |(no. ) | | | interface | recorders \ +---------+ mini-disk +--| - |--+ may be \ multi cable | +-+-----+-----+-+ | operated with \ p/n | | | | | batteries) \ +---------+ | | | | | | \ |mini-disk| | | | dc | | +----------+ \ |(no. ) |--+ | | power | | | cassette | _ +---------+ | future-+ | supply | +----| recorder |__/ |= | expansion | cord | | (no. ) | \_|= | cable | | | +----------+ +---------+ | | | | | |mini-disk| | | interface | audio din |(no. ) |--+ | cable | to +---------+ | | assembly | audio din | | p/n | p/n | | | | | +---------+ | | +-+-----+-----+-+ +---------+ |mini-disk| | | | | | video | |(no. ) |--+ future | trs- |__video___| display | +---------+ applications | | cable | - | +---------------+ +---------+ trs- microcomputer system with expansion interface (maximum system). figure . electrical connections block diagram.] parts list expansion interface door, mini-disk door, line printer door, screen printer door, future expansion board hood, mini-disk hood, line printer hood, screen printer hood, future expansion board hood, trs- microcomputer system trs- microcomputer system door hood limited warranty radio shack warrants for a period of days from the date of delivery to customer that the computer hardware described herein shall be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service. this warranty shall be void if the computer case or cabinet is opened or if the unit is altered or modified. during this period, if a defect should occur, the product must be returned to a radio shack store or dealer for repair. customer's sole and exclusive remedy in the event of defect is expressly limited to the correction of the defect by adjustment, repair or replacement at radio shack's election and sole expense, except there shall be no obligation to replace or repair items which by their nature are expendable. no representations or other affirmation of fact, including but not limited to statements regarding capacity, suitability for use, or performance of the equipment, shall be or be deemed to be a warranty or representation by radio shack, for any purpose, nor give rise to any liability or obligation of radio shack whatsoever. except as specifically provided in this agreement, there are no other warranties, express or implied, including, but not limited to, any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose and in no event shall radio shack be liable for loss of profits or benefits, indirect, special, consequential or other similar damages arising out of any breach of this warranty or otherwise. radio shack [tc] a division of tandy corporation usa.: fort worth, texas canada: barrie, ontario l m w tandy corporation australia - victoria road rydalmere n s w belgium parc industriel de naninne naninne u k bilston road wednesbury west midlands ws jn -perkco- printed in u.s.a. [transcriber's note: an underscore character "_" is used around text to signify italics in the _original_ text, as illustrated. it also is used to signify a subscript, used frequently in technical descriptions. for example _e_{c}_ would have been originally typeset as a capital e followed by a smaller c subscript, and both would have been in an italic typeface.] [illustration: pl. i.--one of the lines of towers at radio central (courtesy of radio corporation of america).] letters of a radio-engineer to his son by john mills engineering department, western electric company, inc., author of "radio-communication," "the realities of modern science," and "within the atom" new york harcourt, brace and company copyright, , by harcourt, brace and company, inc. printed in the u. s. a. by the quinn & boden company rahway, n. j. to j. m., jr. contents electricity and matter why a copper wire will conduct electricity how a battery works the batteries in your radio set getting electrons from a heated wire the audion how to measure an electron stream electron-moving-forces the audion-characteristic condensers and coils a "c-w" transmitter inductance and capacity tuning why and how to use a detector radio-telephony the human voice grid batteries and grid condensers for detectors amplifiers and the regenerative circuit the audion amplifier and its connections telephone receivers and other electromagnetic devices your receiving set and how to experiment high-powered radio-telephone transmitters amplification at intermediate frequencies by wire and by radio index list of plates i one of the lines of towers at radio central frontispiece ii bird's-eye view of radio central iii dry battery for use in audion circuits, and also storage battery iv radiotron v variometer and variable condenser of the general radio company. voltmeter and ammeter of the weston instrument company vi low-power transmitting tube, u v vii photographs of vibrating strings viii to illustrate the mechanism for the production of the human voice ix western electric loud speaking receiver. crystal detector set of the general electric co. audibility meter of general radio co. x audio-frequency transformer and banked-wound coil xi broadcasting equipment, developed by the american telephone and telegraph company and the western electric company xii broadcasting station of the american telephone and telegraph company on the roof of the walker-lispenard bldg. in new york city where the long-distance telephone lines terminate letters of a radio-engineer to his son letter electricity and matter my dear son: you are interested in radio-telephony and want me to explain it to you. i'll do so in the shortest and easiest way which i can devise. the explanation will be the simplest which i can give and still make it possible for you to build and operate your own set and to understand the operation of the large commercial sets to which you will listen. i'll write you a series of letters which will contain only what is important in the radio of to-day and those ideas which seem necessary if you are to follow the rapid advances which radio is making. some of the letters you will find to require a second reading and study. in the case of a few you might postpone a second reading until you have finished those which interest you most. i'll mark the letters to omit in this way. all the letters will be written just as i would talk to you, for i shall draw little sketches as i go along. one of them will tell you how to experiment for yourself. this will be the most interesting of all. you can find plenty of books to tell you how radio sets operate and what to do, but very few except some for advanced students tell you how to experiment for yourself. not to waste time in your own experiments, however, you will need to be quite familiar with the ideas of the other letters. what is a radio set? copper wires, tinfoil, glass plates, sheets of mica, metal, and wood. where does it get its ability to work--that is, where does the "energy" come from which runs the set? from batteries or from dynamos. that much you know already, but what is the real reason that we can use copper wires, metal plates, audions, crystals, and batteries to send messages and to receive them? the reason is that all these things are made of little specks, too tiny ever to see, which we might call specks of electricity. there are only two kinds of specks and we had better give them their right names at once to save time. one kind of speck is called "electron" and the other kind "proton." how do they differ? they probably differ in size but we don't yet know so very much about their sizes. they differ in laziness a great deal. one is about times as lazy as the other. that is, it has eighteen hundred and forty-five times as much inertia as the other. it is harder to get it started but it is just as much harder to get it to stop after it is once started or to change its direction and go a different direction. the proton has the larger inertia. it is the electron which is the easier to start or stop. how else do they differ? they differ in their actions. protons don't like to associate with other protons but take quite keenly to electrons. and electrons--they go with protons but they won't associate with each other. an electron always likes to be close to a proton. two is company when one is an electron and the other a proton but three is a crowd always. it doesn't make any difference to a proton what electron it is keeping company with provided only it is an electron and not another proton. all electrons are alike as far as we can tell and so are all protons. that means that all the stuff, or matter, of our world is made up of two kinds of building blocks, and all the blocks of each kind are just alike. of course you mustn't think of these blocks as like bricks, for we don't know their shapes. then there is another reason why you must not think of them as bricks and that is because when you build a house out of bricks each brick must rest on another. between an electron and any other electron or between two protons or between an electron and a proton there is usually a relatively enormous distance. there is enough space so that lots of other electrons or protons could be fitted in between if only they were willing to get that close together. sometimes they do get very close together. i can tell you how if you will imagine four small boys playing tag. suppose tom and dick don't like to play with each other and run away from each other if they can. now suppose that bill and sam won't play with each other if they can help it but that either of them will play with tom or dick whenever there is a chance. now suppose tom and bill see each other; they start running toward each other to get up some sort of a game. but sam sees tom at the same time, so he starts running to join him even though bill is going to be there too. meanwhile dick sees bill and sam running along and since they are his natural playmates he follows them. in a minute they are all together, and playing a great game; although some of the boys don't like to play together. whenever there is a group of protons and electrons playing together we have what we call an "atom." there are about ninety different games which electrons and protons can play, that is ninety different kinds of atoms. these games differ in the number of electrons and protons who play and in the way they arrange themselves. larger games can be formed if a number of atoms join together. then there is a "molecule." of molecules there are as many kinds as there are different substances in the world. it takes a lot of molecules together to form something big enough to see, for even the largest molecule, that of starch, is much too small to be seen by itself with the best possible microscope. what sort of a molecule is formed will depend upon how many and what kinds of atoms group together to play the larger game. whenever there is a big game it doesn't mean that the little atomic groups which enter into it are all changed around. they keep together like a troop of boy scouts in a grand picnic in which lots of troops are present. at any rate they keep together enough so that we can still call them a group, that is an atom, even though they do adapt their game somewhat so as to fit in with other groups--that is with other atoms. what will the kind of atom depend upon? it will depend upon how many electrons and protons are grouped together in it to play their little game. how any atom behaves so far as associating with other groups or atoms will depend upon what sort of a game its own electrons and protons are playing. now the simplest kind of a game that can be played, and the one with the smallest number of electrons and protons, is that played by a single proton and a single electron. i don't know just how it is played but i should guess that they sort of chase each other around in circles. at any rate i do know that the atom called "hydrogen" is formed by just one proton and one electron. suppose they were magnified until they were as large as the moon and the earth. then they would be just about as far apart but the smaller one would be the proton. that hydrogen atom is responsible for lots of interesting things for it is a great one to join with other atoms. we don't often find it by itself although we can make it change its partners and go from one molecule to another very easily. that is what happens every time you stain anything with acid. a hydrogen atom leaves a molecule of the acid and then it isn't acid any more. what remains isn't a happy group either for it has lost some of its playfellows. the hydrogen goes and joins with the stuff which gets stained. but it doesn't join with the whole molecule; it picks out part of it to associate with and that leaves the other part to take the place of the hydrogen in the original molecule of acid from which it came. many of the actions which we call chemistry are merely the result of such changes of atoms from one molecule to another. not only does the hydrogen atom like to associate in a larger game with other kinds of atoms but it likes to do so with one of its own kind. when it does we have a molecule of hydrogen gas, the same gas as is used in balloons. we haven't seemed to get very far yet toward radio but you can see how we shall when i tell you that next time i shall write of more complicated games such as are played in the atoms of copper which form the wires of radio sets and of how these wires can do what we call "carrying an electric current." letter why a copper wire will conduct electricity my dear young atomist: you have learned that the simplest group which can be formed by protons and electrons is one proton and one electron chasing each other around in a fast game. this group is called an atom of hydrogen. a molecule of hydrogen is two of these groups together. all the other possible kinds of groups are more complicated. the next simplest is that of the atom of helium. helium is a gas of which small quantities are obtained from certain oil wells and there isn't very much of it to be obtained. it is an inert gas, as we call it, because it won't burn or combine with anything else. it doesn't care to enter into the larger games of molecular groups. it is satisfied to be as it is, so that it isn't much use in chemistry because you can't make anything else out of it. that's the reason why it is so highly recommended for filling balloons or airships, because it cannot burn or explode. it is not as light as hydrogen but it serves quite well for making balloons buoyant in air. this helium atom is made up of four electrons and four protons. right at the center there is a small closely crowded group which contains all the protons and two of the electrons. the other two electrons play around quite a little way from this inner group. it will make our explanations easier if we learn to call this inner group "the nucleus" of the atom. it is the center of the atom and the other two electrons play around about it just as the earth and mars and the other planets play or revolve about the sun as a center. that is why we shall call these two electrons "planetary electrons." there are about ninety different kinds of atoms and they all have names. some of them are more familiar than hydrogen and helium. for example, there is the iron atom, the copper atom, the sulphur atom and so on. some of these atoms you ought to know and so, before telling you more of how atoms are formed by protons and electrons, i am going to write down the names of some of the atoms which we have in the earth and rocks of our world, in the water of the oceans, and in the air above. start first with air. it is a mixture of several kinds of gases. each gas is a different kind of atom. there is just a slight trace of hydrogen and a very small amount of helium and of some other gases which i won't bother you with learning. most of the air, however, is nitrogen, about percent in fact and almost all the rest is oxygen. about . percent is oxygen so that all the gases other than these two make up only about . percent of the atmosphere in which we live. [illustration: pl. ii.--bird's-eye view of radio central (courtesy of radio corporation of america).] the earth and rocks also contain a great deal of oxygen; about . percent of the atoms which form earth and rocks are oxygen atoms. about half of the rest of the atoms are of a kind called silicon. sand is made up of atoms of silicon and oxygen and you know how much sand there is. about . percent of the earth and its rocks is silicon. the next most important kind of atom in the earth is aluminum and after that iron and then calcium. here is the way they run in percentages: aluminum . percent; iron . percent; calcium . percent; sodium . percent; potassium . percent; magnesium . percent. besides these which are most important there is about . percent of hydrogen and the same amount of carbon. then there is a little phosphorus, a little sulphur, a little fluorine, and small amounts of all of the rest of the different kinds of atoms. sea water is mostly oxygen and hydrogen, about . percent of oxygen and . percent of hydrogen. that is what you would expect for water is made up of molecules which in turn are formed by two atoms of hydrogen and one atom of oxygen. the oxygen atom is about sixteen times as heavy as the hydrogen atom. however, for every oxygen atom there are two hydrogen atoms so that for every pound of hydrogen in water there are about eight pounds of oxygen. that is why there is about eight times as high a percentage of oxygen in sea water as there is of hydrogen. most of sea water, therefore, is just water, that is, pure water. but it contains some other substances as well and the best known of these is salt. salt is a substance the molecules of which contain atoms of sodium and of chlorine. that is why sea water is about . percent sodium and about . percent chlorine. there are some other kinds of atoms in sea water, as you would expect, for it gets all the substances which the waters of the earth dissolve and carry down to it but they are unimportant in amounts. now we know something about the names of the important kinds of atoms and can take up again the question of how they are formed by protons and electrons. no matter what kind of atom we are dealing with we always have a nucleus or center and some electrons playing around that nucleus like tiny planets. the only differences between one kind of atom and any other kind are differences in the nucleus and differences in the number and arrangement of the planetary electrons which are playing about the nucleus. no matter what kind of atom we are considering there is always in it just as many electrons as protons. for example, the iron atom is formed by a nucleus and twenty-six electrons playing around it. the copper atom has twenty-nine electrons as tiny planets to its nucleus. what does that mean about its nucleus? that there are twenty-nine more protons in the nucleus than there are electrons. silver has even more planetary electrons, for it has . radium has and the heaviest atom of all, that of uranium, has . we might use numbers for the different kinds of atoms instead of names if we wanted to do so. we could describe any kind of atom by telling how many planetary electrons there were in it. for example, hydrogen would be number , helium number , lithium of which you perhaps never heard, would be number , and so on. oxygen is , sodium is , chlorine is , iron , and copper . for each kind of atom there is a number. let's call that number its atomic number. now let's see what the atomic number tells us. take copper, for example, which is number . in each atom of copper there are electrons playing around the nucleus. the nucleus itself is a little inner group of electrons and protons, but there are more protons than electrons in it; twenty-nine more in fact. in an atom there is always an extra proton in the nucleus for each planetary electron. that makes the total number of protons and electrons the same. about the nucleus of a copper atom there are playing electrons just as if the nucleus was a teacher responsible for children who were out in the play yard. there is one very funny thing about it all, however, and that is that we must think of the scholars as if they were all just alike so that the teacher couldn't tell one from the other. electrons are all alike, you remember. all the teacher or nucleus cares for is that there shall be just the right number playing around her. you could bring a boy in from some other play ground and the teacher couldn't tell that he was a stranger but she would know that something was the matter for there would be one too many in her group. she is responsible for just scholars, and the nucleus of the copper atom is responsible for just electrons. it doesn't make any difference where these electrons come from provided there are always just playing around the nucleus. if there are more or less than something peculiar will happen. we shall see later what might happen, but first let's think of an enormous lot of atoms such as there would be in a copper wire. a small copper wire will have in it billions of copper atoms, each with its planetary electrons playing their invisible game about their own nucleus. there is quite a little distance in any atom between the nucleus and any of the electrons for which it is responsible. there is usually a greater distance still between one atomic group and any other. on the whole the electrons hold pretty close to their own circles about their own nuclei. there is always some tendency to run away and play in some other group. with electrons it's no wonder if sometimes one goes wandering off and finally gets into the game about some other nucleus. of course, an electron from some other atom may come wandering along and take the place just left vacant, so that nucleus is satisfied. we don't know all we might about how the electrons wander around from atom to atom inside a copper wire but we do know that there are always a lot of them moving about in the spaces between the atoms. some of them are going one way and some another. it's these wandering electrons which are affected when a battery is connected to a copper wire. every single electron which is away from its home group, and wandering around, is sent scampering along toward the end of the wire which is connected to the positive plate or terminal of the battery and away from the negative plate. that's what the battery does to them for being away from home; it drives them along the wire. there's a regular stream or procession of them from the negative end of the wire toward the positive. when we have a stream of electrons like this we say we have a current of electricity. we'll need to learn more later about a current of electricity but one of the first things we ought to know is how a battery is made and why it affects these wandering electrons in the copper wire. that's what i shall tell you in my next letter.[ ] [footnote : the reader who wishes the shortest path to the construction and operation of a radio set should omit the next two letters.] letter how a battery works (this letter may be omitted on the first reading.) my dear boy: when i was a boy we used to make our own batteries for our experiments. that was before storage batteries became as widely used as they are to-day when everybody has one in the starting system of his automobile. that was also before the day of the small dry battery such as we use in pocket flash lights. the batteries which we made were like those which they used on telegraph systems, and were sometimes called "gravity" batteries. of course, we tried several kinds and i believe i got quite a little acid around the house at one time or another. i'll tell you about only one kind but i shall use the words "electron," "proton," "nucleus," "atom," and "molecule," about some of which nothing was known when i was a boy. we used a straight-sided glass jar which would hold about a gallon. on the bottom we set a star shaped arrangement made of sheets of copper with a long wire soldered to it so as to reach up out of the jar. then we poured in a solution of copper sulphate until the jar was about half full. this solution was made by dissolving in water crystals of "blue vitriol" which we bought at the drug store. blue vitriol, or copper sulphate as the chemists would call it, is a substance which forms glassy blue crystals. its molecules are formed of copper atoms, sulphur atoms, and oxygen atoms. in each molecule of it there is one atom of copper, one of sulphur and four of oxygen. when it dissolves in water the molecules of the blue vitriol go wandering out into the spaces between the water molecules. but that isn't all that happens or the most important thing for one who is interested in making a battery. each molecule is formed by six atoms, that is by six little groups of electrons playing about six little nuclei. about each nucleus there is going on a game but some of the electrons are playing in the game about their own nucleus and at the same time taking some part in the game which is going on around one of the other nuclei. that's why the groups or atoms stay together as a molecule. when the molecules wander out into the spaces between the water molecules something happens to this complicated game. it will be easiest to see what sort of thing happens if we talk about a molecule of ordinary table salt, for that has only two atoms in it. one atom is sodium and one is chlorine. the sodium molecule has eleven electrons playing around its nucleus. fairly close to the nucleus there are two electrons. then farther away there are eight more and these are having a perfect game. then still farther away from the nucleus there is a single lonely electron. the atom of chlorine has seventeen electrons which play about its nucleus. close to the nucleus there are two. a little farther away there are eight just as there are in the sodium atom. then still farther away there are seven. i am going to draw a picture (fig. ) to show what i mean, but you must remember that these electrons are not all in the same plane as if they lay on a sheet of paper, but are scattered all around just as they would be if they were specks on a ball. [illustration: fig. ] you see that the sodium atom has one lonely electron which hasn't any play fellows and that the chlorine atom has seven in its outside circle. it appears that eight would make a much better game. suppose that extra electron in the sodium atom goes over and plays with those in the chlorine atom so as to make eight in the outside group as i have shown fig. . that will be all right as long as it doesn't get out of sight of its own nucleus because you remember that the sodium nucleus is responsible for eleven electrons. the lonely electron of the sodium atom needn't be lonely any more if it can persuade its nucleus to stay so close to the chlorine atom that it can play in the outer circle of the chlorine atom. [illustration: fig. ] the outer circle of the chlorine atom will then have a better game, for it will have just the eight that makes a perfect game. this can happen if the chlorine atom will stay close enough to the sodium atom so that the outermost electron of the sodium atom can play in the chlorine circle. you see everything will be satisfactory if an electron can be shared by the two atoms. that can happen only if the two atoms stay together; that is, if they form a molecule. that's why there are molecules and that's what i meant when i spoke of the molecule as a big game played by the electrons of two or more atoms. this molecule which is formed by a sodium atom and a chlorine atom is called a molecule of sodium chloride by chemists and a molecule of salt by most every one who eats it. something strange happens when it dissolves. it wanders around between the water molecules and for some reason or other--we don't know exactly why--it decides to split up again into sodium and chlorine but it can't quite do it. the electron which joined the game about the chlorine nucleus won't leave it. the result is that the nucleus of the sodium atom gets away but it leaves this one electron behind. what gets away isn't a sodium atom for it has one too few electrons; and what remains behind isn't a chlorine atom for it has one too many electrons. we call these new groups "ions" from a greek word which means "to go" for they do go, wandering off into the spaces between the water molecules. fig. gives you an idea of what happens. you remember that in an atom there are always just as many protons as electrons. in this sodium ion which is formed when the nucleus of the sodium atom breaks away but leaves behind one planetary electron, there is then one more proton than there are electrons. because it has an extra proton, which hasn't any electron to associate with, we call it a plus ion or a "positive ion." similarly we call the chlorine ion, which has one less proton than it has electrons, a minus or "negative ion." [illustration: fig. ] now, despite the fact that these ions broke away from each other they aren't really satisfied. any time that the sodium ion can find an electron to take the place of the one it lost it will welcome it. that is, the sodium ion will want to go toward places where there are extra electrons. in the same way the chlorine ion will go toward places where electrons are wanted as if it could satisfy its guilty conscience by giving up the electron which it stole from the sodium atom, or at least by giving away some other electron, for they are all alike anyway. sometimes a positive sodium ion and a negative chlorine ion meet in their wanderings in the solution and both get satisfied by forming a molecule again. even so they don't stay together long before they split apart and start wandering again. that's what goes on over and over again, millions of times, when you dissolve a little salt in a glass of water. now we can see what happens when copper sulphate dissolves. the copper atom has twenty-nine electrons about its nucleus and all except two of these are nicely grouped for playing their games about the nucleus. two of the electrons are rather out of the game, and are unsatisfied. they play with the electrons of the part of the molecule which is called "sulphate," that is, the part formed by the sulphur atom and the four oxygen atoms. these five atoms of the sulphate part stay together very well and so we treat them as a group. the sulphate group and the copper atom stay together as long as they are not in solution but when they are, they act very much like the sodium and chlorine which i just described. the molecule splits up into two ions, one positive and one negative. the positive ion is the copper part except that two of the electrons which really belong to a copper atom got left behind because the sulphate part wouldn't give them up. the rest of the molecule is the negative ion. the copper ion is a copper atom which has lost two electrons. the sulphate ion is a combination of one sulphur atom, four oxygen atoms and two electrons which it stole from the copper atom. just as the sodium ion is unsatisfied because in it there is one more proton than there are electrons, so the copper ion is unsatisfied. as a matter of fact it is twice as badly unsatisfied. it has two more protons than it has electrons. we say it has twice the "electrical charge" of the sodium ion. just like a sodium ion the copper ion will tend to go toward any place where there are extra electrons which it can get to satisfy its own needs. in much the same way the sulphate ion will go toward places where it can give up its two extra electrons. sometimes, of course, as ions of these two kinds wander about between the water molecules, they meet and satisfy each other by forming a molecule of copper sulphate. but if they do they will split apart later on; that is, they will "dissociate" as we should say. now let's go on with the kind of batteries i used to make as a boy. you can see that in the solution of copper sulphate at the bottom of the jar there was always present a lot of positive copper ions and of negative sulphate ions. on top of this solution of copper sulphate i poured very carefully a weak solution of sulphuric acid. as i told you, an acid always has hydrogen in its molecules. sulphuric acid has molecules formed by two hydrogen atoms and one of the groups which we decided to call sulphate. a better name for this acid would be hydrogen sulphate for that would imply that its molecule is the same as one of copper sulphate, except that the place of the copper is taken by two atoms of hydrogen. it takes two atoms of hydrogen because the copper atom has two lonely electrons while a hydrogen atom only has one. it takes two electrons to fill up the game which the electrons of the sulphate group are playing. if it can get these from a single atom, all right; but if it has to get one from each of two atoms, it will do it that way. i remember when i mixed the sulphuric acid with water that i learned to pour the acid into the water and not the other way around. spatterings of sulphuric acid are not good for hands or clothes. with this solution i filled the jar almost to the top and then hung over the edge a sort of a crow's foot shape of cast zinc. the zinc reached down into the sulphuric acid solution. there was a binding post on it to which a wire could be connected. this wire and the one which came from the plate of copper at the bottom were the two terminals of the battery. we called the wire from the copper "positive" and the one from the zinc "negative." now we shall see why and how the battery worked. the molecules of sulphuric acid dissociate in solution just as do those of copper sulphate. when sulphuric acid molecules split, the sulphate part goes away with two electrons which don't belong to it and each of the hydrogen atoms goes away by itself but without its electron. we call each a "hydrogen ion" but you can see that each is a single proton. in the two solutions are pieces of zinc and copper. zinc is like all the rest of the metals in one way. atoms of metals always have lonely electrons for which there doesn't seem to be room in the game which is going on around their nuclei. copper as we saw has two lonely electrons in each atom. zinc also has two. some metals have one and some two and some even more lonely electrons in each atom. what happens then is this. the sulphate ions wandering around in the weak solution of sulphuric acid come along beside the zinc plate and beckon to its atoms. the sulphate ions had a great deal rather play the game called "zinc sulphate" than the game called "hydrogen sulphate." so the zinc atoms leave their places to join with the sulphate ions. but wait a minute! the sulphate ions have two extra electrons which they kept from the hydrogen atoms. they don't need the two lonely electrons which each zinc atom could bring and so the zinc atom leaves behind it these unnecessary electrons. every time a zinc atom leaves the plate it fails to take all its electrons with it. what leaves the zinc plate, therefore, to go into solution is really not a zinc atom but is a zinc ion; that is, it is the nucleus of a zinc atom and all except two of the planetary electrons. every time a zinc ion leaves the plate there are left behind two electrons. the plate doesn't want them for all the rest of its atoms have just the same number of protons as of electrons. where are they to go? we shall see in a minute. sometimes the zinc ions which have got into solution meet with sulphate ions and form zinc sulphate molecules. but if they do these molecules split up sooner or later into ions again. in the upper part of the liquid in the jar, therefore, there are sulphate ions which are negative and two kinds of positive ions, namely, the hydrogen ions and the zinc ions. before the zinc ions began to crowd in there were just enough hydrogen ions to go with the sulphate ions. as it is, the entrance of the zinc ions has increased the number of positive ions and now there are too many. some of the positive ions, therefore, and particularly the hydrogen ions, because the sulphate prefers to associate with the zinc ions, can't find enough playfellows and so go down in the jar. down in the bottom of the jar the hydrogen ions find more sulphate ions to play with, but that leaves the copper ions which used to play with these sulphate ions without any playmates. so the copper ions go still further down and join with the copper atoms of the copper plate. they haven't much right to do so, for you remember that they haven't their proper number of electrons. each copper ion lacks two electrons of being a copper atom. nevertheless they join the copper plate. the result is a plate of copper which has too few electrons. it needs two electrons for every copper ion which joins it. how about the zinc plate? you remember that it has two electrons more than it needs for every zinc ion which has left it. if only the extra electrons on the negative zinc plate could get around to the positive copper plate. they can if we connect a wire from one plate to the other. then the electrons from the zinc stream into the spaces between the atoms of the wire and push ahead of them the electrons which are wandering around in these spaces. at the other end an equal number of electrons leave the wire to satisfy the positive copper plate. so we have a stream of electrons in the wire, that is, a current of electricity and our battery is working. that's the sort of a battery i used to play with. if you understand it you can get the general idea of all batteries. let me express it in general terms. at the negative plate of a battery ions go into solution and electrons are left behind. at the other end of the battery positive ions are crowded out of solution and join the plate where they cause a scarcity of electrons; that is, make the plate positive. if a wire is connected between the two plates, electrons will stream through it from the negative plate to the positive; and this stream is a current of electricity. [illustration: pl. iii.--dry battery for use in audion circuits (courtesy of national carbon co., inc.). storage battery (courtesy of the electric storage battery co.).] letter the batteries in your radio set (this letter may be omitted on the first reading.) my dear young man: you will need several batteries when you come to set up your radio receiver but you won't use such clumsy affairs as the gravity cell which i described in my last letter. some of your batteries will be dry batteries of the size used in pocket flash lights. these are not really dry, for between the plates they are filled with a moist paste which is then sealed in with wax to keep it from drying out or from spilling. instead of zinc and copper these batteries use zinc and carbon. no glass jar is needed, for the zinc is formed into a jar shape. in this is placed the paste and in the center of the paste a rod or bar of carbon. the paste doesn't contain sulphuric acid, but instead has in it a stuff called sal ammoniac; that is, ammonium chloride. the battery, however, acts very much like the one i described in my last letter. ions of zinc leave the zinc and wander into the moist paste. these ions are positive, just as in the case of the gravity battery. the result is that the electrons which used to associate with a zinc ion to form a zinc atom are left in the zinc plate. that makes the zinc negative for it has more electrons than protons. the zinc ions take the place of the positive ions which are already in the paste. the positive ions which originally belonged with the paste, therefore, move along to the carbon rod and there get some electrons. taking electrons away from the carbon leaves it with too many protons; that is, leaves it positive. in the little flash light batteries, therefore, you will always find that the round carbon rod, which sticks out of the center, is positive and the zinc casing is negative. the trouble with the battery like the one i used to make is that the zinc plate wastes away. every time a zinc ion leaves it that means that the greater part of an atom is gone. then when the two electrons which were left behind get a chance to start along a copper wire toward the positive plate of the battery there goes the rest of the atom. after a while there is no more zinc plate. it is easy to see what has happened. all the zinc has gone into solution or been "eaten away" as most people say. dry batteries, however, don't stop working because the zinc gets used up, but because the active stuff in the paste, the ammonium chloride, is changed into something else. there's another kind of battery which you will need to use with your radio set; that is the storage battery. storage batteries can be used over and over again if they are charged between times and will last for a long time if properly cared for. then too, they can give a large current, that is, a big swift-moving stream of electrons. you will need that when you wish to heat the filament of the audion in your receiving set. the english call our storage batteries by the name "accumulators." i don't like that name at all, but i don't like our name for them nearly as well as i do the name "reversible batteries." nobody uses this last name because it's too late to change. nevertheless a storage battery is reversible, for it will work either way at an instant's notice. a storage battery is something like a boy's wagon on a hill side. it will run down hill but it can be pushed up again for another descent. you can use it to send a stream of electrons through a wire from its negative plate to its positive plate. then if you connect these plates to some other battery or to a generator, (that is, a dynamo) you can make a stream of electrons go in the other direction. when you have done so long enough the battery is charged again and ready to discharge. i am not going to tell you very much about the storage battery but you ought to know a little about it if you are to own and run one with your radio set. when it is all charged and ready to work, the negative plate is a lot of soft spongy lead held in place by a frame of harder lead. the positive plate is a lead frame with small squares which are filled with lead peroxide, as it is called. this is a substance with molecules formed of one lead atom and two oxygen atoms. why the chemists call it lead peroxide instead of just lead oxide i'll tell you some other time, but not in these letters. between the two plates is a wood separator to keep pieces of lead from falling down between and touching both plates. you know what would happen if a piece of metal touched both plates. there would be a short circuit, that is, a sort of a short cut across lots by which some of the electrons from the negative plate could get to the positive plate without going along the wires which we want them to travel. that's why there are separators. the two plates are in a jar of sulphuric acid solution. the sulphuric acid has molecules which split up in solution, as you remember, into hydrogen ions and the ions which we called "sulphate." in my gravity battery the sulphate ions used to coax the zinc ions away into the solution. in the storage battery on the other hand the sulphate ions can get to most of the lead atoms because the lead is so spongy. when they do, they form lead sulphate right where the lead atoms are. they don't really need whole lead atoms, because they have two more electrons than they deserve, so there are two extra electrons for every molecule of lead sulphate which is formed. that's why the spongy lead plate is negative. the lead sulphate won't dissolve, so it stays there on the plate as a whitish coating. now see what that means. what are the hydrogen ions going to do? as long as there was sulphuric acid in the water there was plenty of sulphate ions for them to associate with as often as they met; and they would meet pretty often. but if the sulphate ions get tied up with the lead of the plate there will be too many hydrogen ions left in the solution. now what are the hydrogen ions to do? they are going to get as far away from each other as they can, for they are nothing but protons; and protons don't like to associate. they only stayed around in the first place because there was always plenty of sulphate ions with whom they liked to play. when the hydrogen ions try to get away from each other they go to the other plate of the battery, and there they will get some electrons, if they have to steal in their turn. i won't try to tell you all that happens at the other plate. the hydrogen ions get the electrons which they need, but they get something more. they get some of the oxygen away from the plate and so form molecules of water. you remember that water molecules are made of two atoms of hydrogen and one of oxygen. meanwhile, the lead atoms, which have lost their oxygen companions, combine with some of the sulphate ions which are in that neighborhood. during the mix-up electrons are carried away from the plate and that leaves it positive. the result of all this is a little lead sulphate on each plate, a negative plate where the spongy lead was, and a positive plate where the lead peroxide was. notice very carefully that i said "a little lead sulphate on each plate." the sort of thing i have been describing doesn't go on very long. if it did the battery would run down inside itself and then when we came to start our automobile we would have to get out and crank. how long does it go on? answer another question first. so far we haven't connected any wire between the two plates of the battery, and so none of the electrons on the negative plate have any way of getting around to the positive plate where electrons are badly needed. every time a negative sulphate ion combines with the spongy lead of the negative plate there are two more electrons added to that plate. you know how well electrons like each other. do they let the sulphate ions keep giving that plate more electrons? there is the other question; and the answer is that they do not. every electron that is added to that plate makes it just so much harder for another sulphate ion to get near enough to do business at all. that's why after a few extra electrons have accumulated on the spongy lead plate the actions which i was describing come to a stop. do they ever begin again? they do just as soon as there is any reduction in the number of electrons which are hopping around in the negative plate trying to keep out of each other's way. when we connect a wire between the plates we let some of these extra electrons of the negative plate pass along to the positive plate where they will be welcome. and the moment a couple of them start off on that errand along comes another sulphate ion in the solution and lands two more electrons on the plate. that's how the battery keeps on discharging. we mustn't let it get too much discharged for the lead sulphate is not soluble, as i just told you, and it will coat up that plate until there isn't much chance of getting the process to reverse. that's why we are so careful not to let the discharge process go on too long before we reverse it and charge. that's why, when the car battery has been used pretty hard to start the car, i like to run quite a while to let the generator charge the battery again. when the battery charges, the process reverses and we get spongy lead on the negative plate and lead peroxide on the positive plate. you've learned enough for one day. write me your questions and i'll answer and then go on in my next letter to tell how the audion works. you know about conduction of electricity in wires; that is, about the electron stream, and about batteries which can cause the stream. now you are ready for the most wonderful little device known to science: the audion. letter getting electrons from a heated wire dear son: i was pleased to get your letter and its questions. yes, a proton is a speck of electricity of the kind we call positive and an electron is of the kind we call negative. you might remember this simple law; "like kinds of electricity repel, and unlike attract." the word ion[ ] is used to describe any atom, or part of a molecule which can travel by itself and has more or less than its proper number of electrons. by proper number of electrons i mean proper for the number of protons which it has. if an ion has more electrons than protons it is negative; if the inequality is the other way around it is positive. an atom or molecule has neither more nor less protons than electrons. it is neutral or "uncharged," as we say. no, not every substance which will dissolve will dissociate or split up into positive and negative ions. the salt which you eat will, but the sugar will not. if you want a name for those substances which will dissociate in solution, call them "electrolytes." to make a battery we must always use an electrolyte. yes, it is hard to think of a smooth piece of metal or a wire as full of holes. even in the densest solids like lead the atoms are quite far apart and there are large spaces between the nuclei and the planetary electrons of each atom. i hope this clears up the questions in your mind for i want to get along to the vacuum tube. by a vacuum we mean a space which has very few atoms or molecules in it, just as few as we can possibly get, with the best methods of pumping and exhausting. for the present let's suppose that we can get all the gas molecules, that is, all the air, out of a little glass bulb. the audion is a glass bulb like an electric light bulb which has in it a thread, or filament, of metal. the ends of this filament extend out through the glass so that we may connect a battery to them and pass a current of electricity through the wire. if we do so the wire gets hot. what do we mean when we say "the wire gets hot?" we mean that it feels hot. it heats the glass bulb and we can feel it. but what do we mean in words of electrons and atoms? to answer this we must start back a little way. in every bit of matter in our world the atoms and molecules are in very rapid motion. in gases they can move anywhere; and do. that's why odors travel so fast. in liquids most of the molecules or atoms have to do their moving without getting out of the dish or above the surface. not all of them stay in, however, for some are always getting away from the liquid and going out into the air above. that is why a dish of water will dry up so quickly. the faster the molecules are going the better chance they have of jumping clear away from the water like fish jumping in the lake at sundown. heating the liquid makes its molecules move faster and so more of them are able to jump clear of the rest of the liquid. that's why when we come in wet we hang our clothes where they will get warm. the water in them evaporates more quickly when it is heated because all we mean by "heating" is speeding up the molecules. in a solid body the molecules can't get very far away from where they start but they keep moving back and forth and around and around. the hotter the body is, the faster are its molecules moving. generally they move a little farther when the body is hot than when it is cold. that means they must have a little more room and that is why a body is larger when hot than when cold. it expands with heating because its molecules are moving more rapidly and slightly farther. when a wire is heated its molecules and atoms are hurried up and they dash back and forth faster than before. now you know that a wire, like the filament of a lamp, gets hot when the "electricity is turned on," that is, when there is a stream of electrons passing through it. why does it get hot? because when the electrons stream through it they bump and jostle their way along like rude boys on a crowded sidewalk. the atoms have to step a bit more lively to keep out of the way. these more rapid motions of the atoms we recognize by the wire growing hotter. that is why an electric current heats a wire through which it is flowing. now what happens to the electrons, the rude boys who are dodging their way along the sidewalk? some of them are going so fast and so carelessly that they will have to dodge out into the gutter and off the sidewalk entirely. the more boys that are rushing along and the faster they are going the more of them will be turned aside and plunge off the sidewalks. the greater and faster the stream of electrons, that is the more current which is flowing through the wire, the more electrons will be "emitted," that is, thrown out of the wire. if you could watch them you would see them shooting out of the wire, here, there, and all along its length, and going in every direction. the number which shoot out each second isn't very large until they have stirred things up so that the wire is just about red hot. what becomes of them? sometimes they don't get very far away from the wire and so come back inside again. they scoot off the sidewalk and on again just as boys do in dodging their way along. some of them start away as if they were going for good. if the wire is in a vacuum tube, as it is in the case of the audion, they can't get very far away. of course there is lots of room; but they are going so fast that they need more room just as older boys who run fast need a larger play ground than do the little tots. by and by there gets to be so many of them outside that they have to dodge each other and some of them are always dodging back into the wire while new electrons are shooting out from it. when there are just as many electrons dodging back into the wire each second as are being emitted from it the vacuum in the tube has all the electrons it can hold. we might say it is "saturated" with electrons, which means, in slang, "full up." if any more electrons are to get out of the filament just as many others which are already outside have to go back inside. or else they have got to be taken away somewhere else. what i have just told you about electrons getting away from a heated wire is very much like what happens when a liquid is heated. the molecules of the liquid get away from the surface. if we cover a dish of liquid which is being heated the liquid molecules can't get far away and very soon the space between the surface of the liquid and the cover gets saturated with them. then every time another molecule escapes from the surface of the liquid there must be some molecule which goes back into the liquid. there is then just as much condensation back into liquid as there is evaporation from it. that's why in cooking they put covers over the vessels when they don't want the liquid all to "boil away." sometimes we speak of the vacuum tube in the same words we would use in describing evaporation of a liquid. the molecules of the liquid which have escaped form what is called a "vapor" of the liquid. as you know there is usually considerable water vapor in the air. we say then that electrons are "boiled out" of the filament and that there is a "vapor of electrons" in the tube. that is enough for this letter. next time i shall tell you how use is made of these electrons which have been boiled out and are free in the space around the filament. [footnote : if the reader has omitted letters and he should omit this paragraph and the next.] letter the audion dear son: in my last letter i told how electrons are boiled out of a heated filament. the hotter the filament the more electrons are emitted each second. if the temperature is kept steady, or constant as we say, then there are emitted each second just the same number of electrons. when the filament is enclosed in a vessel or glass bulb these electrons which get free from it cannot go very far away. some of them, therefore, have to come back to the filament and the number which returns each second is just equal to the number which is leaving. you realize that this is what is happening inside an ordinary electric light bulb when its filament is being heated. [illustration: fig ] an ordinary electric light bulb, however, is not an audion although it is like one in the emission of electrons from its filament. that reminds me that last night as i was waiting for a train i picked up one of the radio supplements which so many newspapers are now running. there was a column of enquiries. one letter told how its writer had tried to use an ordinary electric light bulb to receive radio signals. he had plenty of electrons in it but no way to control them and make their motions useful. in an audion besides the filament there are two other things. one is a little sheet or plate of metal with a connecting wire leading out through the glass walls and the other is a little wire screen shaped like a gridiron and so called a "grid." it also has a connecting wire leading through the glass. fig. shows an audion. it will be most convenient, however, to represent an audion as in fig. . there you see the filament, _f_, with its two terminals brought out from the tube, the plate, _p_, and between these the grid, _g_. [illustration: fig ] these three parts of the tube are sometimes called "elements." usually, however, they are called "electrodes" and that is why the audion is spoken of as the "three-electrode vacuum tube." an electrode is what we call any piece of metal or wire which is so placed as to let us get at electrons (or ions) to control their motions. let us see how it does so. to start with, we shall forget the grid and think of a tube with only a filament and a plate in it--a two-electrode tube. we shall represent it as in fig. and show the battery which heats the filament by some lines as at _a_. in this way of representing a battery each cell is represented by a short heavy line and a longer lighter line. the heavy line stands for the negative plate and the longer line for the positive plate. we shall call the battery which heats the filament the "filament battery" or sometimes the "a-battery." as you see, it is formed by several battery cells connected in series. [illustration: fig ] sometime later i may tell you how to connect battery cells together and why. for the present all you need to remember is that two batteries are in series if the positive plate of one is connected to the negative plate of the other. if the batteries are alike they will pull an electron just twice as hard as either could alone. [illustration: pl. iv.--radiotron (courtesy of radio corporation of america).] to heat the filament of an audion, such as you will probably use in your set, will require three storage-battery cells, like the one i described in my fourth letter, all connected in series. we generally use storage batteries of about the same size as those in the automobile. if you will look at the automobile battery you will see that it is made of three cells connected in series. that battery would do very well for the filament circuit. by the way, do you know what a "circuit" is? the word comes from the same latin word as our word "circus." the romans were very fond of chariot racing at their circuses and built race tracks around which the chariots could go. a circuit, therefore, is a path or track around which something can race; and an electrical circuit is a path around which electrons can race. the filament, the a-battery and the connecting wires of fig. form a circuit. [illustration: fig ] let us imagine another battery formed by several cells in series which we shall connect to the tube as in fig. . all the positive and negative terminals of these batteries are connected in pairs, the positive of one cell to the negative of the next, except for one positive and one negative. the remaining positive terminal is the positive terminal of the battery which we are making by this series connection. we then connect this positive terminal to the plate and the negative terminal to the filament as shown in the figure. this new battery we shall call the "plate battery" or the "b-battery." now what's going to happen? the b-battery will want to take in electrons at its positive terminal and to send them out at its negative terminal. the positive is connected to the plate in the vacuum tube of the figure and so draws some of the electrons of the plate away from it. where do these electrons come from? they used to belong to the atoms of the plate but they were out playing in the space between the atoms, so that they came right along when the battery called them. that leaves the plate with less than its proper number of electrons; that is, leaves it positive. so the plate immediately draws to itself some of the electrons which are dodging about in the vacuum around it. do you remember what was happening in the tube? the filament was steadily going on emitting electrons although there were already in the tube so many electrons that just as many crowded back into the filament each second as the filament sent out. the filament was neither gaining nor losing electrons, although it was busy sending them out and welcoming them home again. when the b-battery gets to work all this is changed. the b-battery attracts electrons to the plate and so reduces the crowd in the tube. then there are not as many electrons crowding back into the filament as there were before and so the filament loses more than it gets back. suppose that, before the b-battery was connected to the plate, each tiny length of the filament was emitting electrons each second but was getting back each second. there was no net change. now, suppose that the b-battery takes away of these each second. then only get back to the filament and there is a net loss from the filament of . each second this tiny length of filament sends into the vacuum electrons which are taken out at the plate. from each little bit of filament there is a stream of electrons to the plate. millions of electrons, therefore, stream across from filament to plate. that is, there is a current of electricity between filament and plate and this current continues to flow as long as the a-battery and the b-battery do their work. the negative terminal of the b-battery is connected to the filament. every time this battery pulls an electron from the plate its negative terminal shoves one out to the filament. you know from my third and fourth letters that electrons are carried through a battery from its positive to its negative terminal. you see, then, that there is the same stream of electrons through the b-battery as there is through the vacuum between filament and plate. this same stream passes also through the wires which connect the battery to the tube. the path followed by the stream of electrons includes the wires, the vacuum and the battery in series. we call this path the "plate circuit." we can connect a telephone receiver, or a current-measuring instrument, or any thing we wish which will pass a stream of electrons, so as to let this same stream of electrons pass through it also. all we have to do is to connect the instrument in series with the other parts of the plate circuit. i'll show you how in a minute, but just now i want you to understand that we have a stream of electrons, for i want to tell you how it may be controlled. suppose we use another battery and connect it between the grid and the filament so as to make the grid positive. that would mean connecting the positive terminal of the battery to the grid and the negative to the filament as shown by the c-battery of fig. . this figure also shows a current-measuring instrument in the plate circuit. what effect is this c-battery, or grid-battery, going to have on the current in the _plate circuit_? making the grid positive makes it want electrons. it will therefore act just as we saw that the plate did and pull electrons across the vacuum towards itself. [illustration: fig ] what happens then is something like this: electrons are freed at the filament; the plate and the grid both call them and they start off in a rush. some of them are stopped by the wires of the grid but most of them go on by to the plate. the grid is mostly open space, you know, and the electrons move as fast as lightning. they are going too fast in the general direction of the grid to stop and look for its few and small wires. when the grid is positive the grid helps the plate to call electrons away from the filament. making the grid positive, therefore, increases the stream of electrons _between filament and plate_; that is, increases the current in the plate circuit. we could get the same effect so far as concerns an increased plate current by using more batteries in series in the plate circuit so as to pull harder. but the grid is so close to the filament that a single battery cell in the grid circuit can call electrons so strongly that it would take several extra battery cells in the plate circuit to produce the same effect. [illustration: fig ] if we reverse the grid battery, as in fig. , so as to make the grid negative, then, instead of attracting electrons the grid repels them. nowhere near as many electrons will stream across to the plate when the grid says, "no, go back." the grid is in a strategic position and what it says has a great effect. when there is no battery connected to the grid it has no possibility of influencing the electron stream which the plate is attracting to itself. we say, then, that the grid is uncharged or is at "zero potential," meaning that it is zero or nothing in possibility. but when the grid is charged, no matter how little, it makes a change in the plate current. when the grid says "come on," even though very softly, it has as much effect on the electrons as if the plate shouted at them, and a lot of extra electrons rush for the plate. but when the grid whispers "go back," many electrons which would otherwise have gone streaking off to the plate crowd back toward the filament. that's how the audion works. there is an electron stream and a wonderfully sensitive way of controlling the stream. letter how to measure an electron stream (this letter may be omitted on the first reading.) dear youth: if we are to talk about the audion and how its grid controls the current in the plate circuit we must know something of how to measure currents. an electric current is a stream of electrons. we measure it by finding the rate at which electrons are traveling along through the circuit. what do we mean by the word "rate?" you know what it means when a speedometer says twenty miles an hour. if the car should keep going just as it was doing at the instant you looked at the speedometer it would go twenty miles in the next hour. its rate is twenty miles an hour even though it runs into a smash the next minute and never goes anywhere again except to the junk heap. it's the same when we talk of electric currents. we say there is a current of such and such a number of electrons a second going by each point in the circuit. we don't mean that the current isn't going to change, for it may get larger or smaller, but we do mean that if the stream of electrons keeps going just as it is there will be such and such a number of electrons pass by in the next second. in most of the electrical circuits with which you will deal you will find that electrons must be passing along in the circuit at a most amazing rate if there is to be any appreciable effect. when you turn on the -watt light at your desk you start them going through the filament of the lamp at the rate of about two and a half billion billion each second. you have stood on the sidewalk in the city and watched the people stream past you. just suppose you could stand beside that narrow little sidewalk which the filament offers to the electrons and count them as they go by. we don't try to count them although we do to-day know about how many go by in a second if the current is steady. if some one asks you how old you are you don't say "about five hundred million seconds"; you tell him in years. when some one asks how large a current is flowing in a wire we don't tell him six billion billion electrons each second; we tell him "one ampere." just as we use years as the units in which to count up time so we use amperes as the units in which to count up streams of electrons. when a wire is carrying a current of one ampere the electrons are streaming through it at the rate of about , , , , , , a second. don't try to remember this number but do remember that an ampere is a unit in which we measure currents just as a year is a unit in which we measure time. an ampere is a unit in which we measure streams of electrons just as "miles per hour" is a unit in which we measure the speed of trains or automobiles. if you wanted to find the weight of something you would take a scale and weigh it, wouldn't you? you might take that spring balance which hangs out in the kitchen. but if the spring balance said the thing weighed five pounds how would you know if it was right? of course you might take what ever it was down town and weigh it on some other scales but how would you know those scales gave correct weight? the only way to find out would be to try the scales with weights which you were sure were right and see if the readings on the scale correspond to the known weights. then you could trust it to tell you the weight of something else. that's the way scales are tested. in fact that's the way that the makers know how to mark them in the first place. they put on known weights and marked the lines and figures which you see. what they did was called "calibrating" the scale. you could make a scale for yourself if you wished, but if it was to be reliable you would have to find the places for the markings by applying known weights, that is, by calibration. how would you know that the weights you used to calibrate your scale were really what you thought them to be? you would have to find some place where they had a weight that everybody would agree was correct and then compare your weight with that. you might, for example, send your pound weight to the bureau of standards in washington and for a small payment have the bureau compare it with the pound which it keeps as a standard. that is easy where one is interested in a pound. but it is a little different when one is interested in an ampere. you can't make an ampere out of a piece of platinum as you can a standard pound weight. an ampere is a stream of electrons at about the rate of six billion billion a second. no one could ever count anywhere near that many, and yet everybody who is concerned with electricity wants to be able to measure currents in amperes. how is it done? first there is made an instrument which will have something in it to move when electrons are flowing through the instrument. we want a meter for the flow of electrons. in the basement we have a meter for the flow of gas and another for the flow of water. each of these has some part which will move when the water or the gas passes through. but they are both arranged with little gear wheels so as to keep track of all the water or gas which has flowed through; they won't tell the rate at which the gas or water is flowing. they are like the odometer on the car which gives the "trip mileage" or the "total mileage." we want a meter like the speedometer which will indicate at each instant just how fast the electrons are streaming through it. there are several kinds of meters but i shall not try to tell you now of more than one. the simplest to understand is called a "hot-wire meter." you already know that an electron stream heats a wire. suppose a piece of fine wire is fastened at the two ends and that there are binding posts also fastened to these ends of the wire so that the wire may be made part of the circuit where we want to know the electron stream. then the same stream of electrons will flow through the fine wire as through the other parts of the circuit. because the wire is fine it acts like a very narrow sidewalk for the stream of electrons and they have to bump and jostle pretty hard to get through. that's why the wire gets heated. you know that a heated wire expands. this wire expands. it grows longer and because it is held firmly at the ends it must bow out at the center. the bigger the rate of flow of electrons the hotter it gets; and the hotter it gets the more it bows out. at the center we might fasten one end--the short end--of a little lever. a small motion of this short end of the lever will mean a large motion of the other end, just like a "teeter board" when one end is longer than the other; the child on the long end travels further than the child on the short end. the lever magnifies the motion of the center of the hot wire part of our meter so that we can see it easier. [illustration: fig ] there are several ways to make such a meter. the one shown in fig. is as easy to understand as any. we shape the long end of the lever like a pointer. then the hotter the wire the farther the pointer moves. if we could put this meter in an electric circuit where we knew one ampere was flowing we could put a numeral " " opposite where the pointer stood. then if we could increase the current until there were two amperes flowing through the meter we could mark that position of the pointer " " and so on. that's the way we would calibrate the meter. after we had done so we would call it an "ammeter" because it measures amperes. years ago people would have called it an "amperemeter" but no one who is up-to-date would call it so to-day. [illustration: fig ] if we had a very carefully made ammeter we would send it to the bureau of standards to be calibrated. at the bureau they have a number of meters which they know are correct in their readings. they would put one of their meters and ours into the same circuit so that both carry the same stream of electrons as in fig. . then whatever the reading was on their meter could be marked opposite the pointer on ours. now i want to tell you how the physicists at the bureau know what is an ampere. several years ago there was a meeting or congress of physicists and electrical engineers from all over the world who discussed what they thought should be the unit in which to measure current. they decided just what they would call an ampere and then all the countries from which they came passed laws saying that an ampere should be what these scientists had recommended. to-day, therefore, an ampere is defined by law. to tell when an ampere of current is flowing requires the use of two silver plates and a solution of silver nitrate. silver nitrate has molecules made up of one atom of silver combined with a group of atoms called "nitrate." you remember that the molecule of copper sulphate, discussed in our third letter, was formed by a copper atom and a group called sulphate. nitrate is another group something like sulphate for it has oxygen atoms in it, but it has three instead of four, and instead of a sulphur atom there is an atom of nitrogen. when silver nitrate molecules go into solution they break up into ions just as copper sulphate does. one ion is a silver atom which has lost one electron. this electron was stolen from it by the nitrate part of the molecule when they dissociated. the nitrate ion, therefore, is formed by a nitrogen atom, three oxygen atoms, and one extra electron. if we put two plates of silver into such a solution nothing will happen until we connect a battery to the plates. then the battery takes electrons away from one plate and gives electrons to the other. some of the atoms in the plate which the battery is robbing of electrons are just like the silver ions which are moving around in the solution. that's why they can go out into the solution and play with the nitrate ions each of which has an extra electron which it stole from some silver atom. but the moment silver ions leave their plate we have more silver ions in the solution than we do sulphate ions. the only thing that can happen is for some of the silver ions to get out of the solution. they aren't going back to the positive silver plate from which they just came. they go on toward the negative plate where the battery is sending an electron for every one which it takes away from the positive plate. there start off towards the negative plate, not only the ions which just came from the positive plate, but all the ions that are in the solution. the first one to arrive gets an electron but it can't take it away from the silver plate. and why should it? as soon as it has got this electron it is again a normal silver atom. so it stays with the other atoms in the silver plate. that's what happens right along. for every atom which is lost from the positive plate there is one added to the negative plate. the silver of the positive plate gradually wastes away and the negative plate gradually gets an extra coating of silver. every time the battery takes an electron away from the positive plate and gives it to the negative plate there is added to the negative plate an atom of silver. if the negative plate is weighed before the battery is connected and again after the battery is disconnected we can tell how much silver has been added to it. suppose the current has been perfectly steady, that is, the same number of electrons streaming through the circuit each second. then if we know how long the current has been running we can tell how much silver has been deposited each second. the law says that if silver is being deposited at the rate of . gram each second then the current is one ampere. that's a small amount of silver, only about a thousandth part of a gram, and you know that it takes . grams to make an ounce. it's a very small amount of silver but it's an enormous number of atoms. how many? six billion billion, of course, for there is deposited one atom for each electron in the stream. in my next letter i'll tell you how we measure the pull which batteries can give to electrons, and then we shall be ready to go on with more about the audion. letter electron-moving-forces (this letter may be omitted on the first reading.) dear young man: i trust you have a fairly good idea that an ampere means a stream of electrons at a certain definite rate and hence that a current of say amperes means a stream with three times as many electrons passing along each second. in the third and fourth letters you found out why a battery drives electrons around a conducting circuit. you also found that there are several different kinds of batteries. batteries differ in their abilities to drive electrons and it is therefore convenient to have some way of comparing them. we do this by measuring the electron-moving-force or "electromotive force" which each battery can exert. to express electromotive force and give the results of our measurements we must have some unit. the unit we use is called the "volt." the volt is defined by law and is based on the suggestions of the same body of scientists who recommended the ampere of our last letter. they defined it by telling how to make a particular kind of battery and then saying that this battery had an electromotive force of a certain number of volts. one can buy such standard batteries, or standard cells as they are called, or he can make them for himself. to be sure that they are just right he can then send them to the bureau of standards and have them compared with the standard cells which the bureau has. i don't propose to tell you much about standard cells for you won't have to use them until you come to study physics in real earnest. they are not good for ordinary purposes because the moment they go to work driving electrons the conditions inside them change so their electromotive force is changed. they are delicate little affairs and are useful only as standards with which to compare other batteries. and even as standard batteries they must be used in such a way that they are not required to drive any electrons. [illustration: fig ] let's see how it can be done. suppose two boys sit opposite each other on the floor and brace their feet together. then with their hands they take hold of a stick and pull in opposite directions. if both have the same stick-motive-force the stick will not move. now suppose we connect the negative feet--i mean negative terminals--of two batteries together as in fig. . then we connect their positive terminals together by a wire. in the wire there will be lots of free electrons ready to go to the positive plate of the battery which pulls the harder. if the batteries are equal in electromotive force these electrons will stay right where they are. there will be no stream of electrons and yet we'll be using one of the batteries to compare with the other. that is all right, you think, but what are we to do when the batteries are not just equal in e. m. f.? (e. m. f. is code for electromotive force). i'll tell you, because the telling includes some other ideas which will be valuable in your later reading. [illustration: fig ] suppose we take batteries which aren't going to be injured by being made to work--storage batteries will do nicely--and connect them in series as in fig. . when batteries are in series they act like a single stronger battery, one whose e. m. f. is the sum of the e. m. f.'s of the separate batteries. connect these batteries to a long fine wire as in fig. . there is a stream of electrons along this wire. next connect the negative terminal of the standard cell to the negative terminal of the storage batteries, that is, brace their feet against each other. then connect a wire to the positive terminal of the standard cell. this wire acts just like a long arm sticking out from the positive plate of this cell. [illustration: fig ] touch the end of the wire, which is _p_ of fig. , to some point as _a_ on the fine wire. now what do we have? right at _a_, of course, there are some free electrons and they hear the calls of both batteries. if the standard battery, _s_ of the figure, calls the stronger they go to it. in that case move the end _p_ nearer the positive plate of the battery _b_, so that it will have a chance to exert a stronger pull. suppose we try at _c_ and find the battery _b_ is there the stronger. then we can move back to some point, say _b_, where the pulls are equal. to make a test like this we put a sensitive current-measuring instrument in the wire which leads from the positive terminal of the standard cell. we also use a long fine wire so that there can never be much of an electron stream anyway. when the pulls are equal there will be no current through this instrument. as soon as we find out where the proper setting is we can replace _s_ by some other battery, say _x_, which we wish to compare with _s_. we find the setting for that battery in the same way as we just did for _s_. suppose it is at _d_ in fig. while the setting for _s_ was at _b_. we can see at once that _x_ is stronger than _s_. the question, however, is how much stronger. perhaps it would be better to try to answer this question by talking about e. m. f.'s. it isn't fair to speak only of the positive plate which calls, we must speak also of the negative plate which is shooing electrons away from itself. the idea of e. m. f. takes care of both these actions. the steady stream of electrons in the fine wire is due to the e. m. f. of the battery _b_, that is to the pull of the positive terminal and the shove of the negative. if the wire is uniform, that is the same throughout its length, then each inch of it requires just as much e. m. f. as any other inch. two inches require twice the e. m. f. which one inch requires. we know how much e. m. f. it takes to keep the electron stream going in the part of the wire from _n_ to _b_. it takes just the e. m. f. of the standard cell, _s_, because when that had its feet braced at _n_ it pulled just as hard at _b_ as did the big battery _b_. suppose the distance _n_ to _d_ (usually written _nd_) is twice as great as that from _n_ to _b_ (_nb_). that means that battery _x_ has twice the e. m. f. of battery _s_. you remember that _x_ could exert the same force through the length of wire _nd_, as could the large battery. that is twice what cell _s_ can do. therefore if we know how many volts to call the e. m. f. of the standard cell we can say that _x_ has an e. m. f. of twice as many volts. if we measured dry batteries this way we should find that they each had an e. m. f. of about . volts. a storage battery would be found to have about . volts when fully charged and perhaps as low as . volts when we had run it for a while. that is the way in which to compare batteries and to measure their e. m. f.'s, but you see it takes a lot of time. it is easier to use a "voltmeter" which is an instrument for measuring e. m. f.'s. here is how one could be made. first there is made a current-measuring instrument which is quite sensitive, so that its pointer will show a deflection when only a very small stream of electrons is passing through the instrument. we could make one in the same way as we made the ammeter of the last letter but there are other better ways of which i'll tell you later. then we connect a good deal of fine wire in series with the instrument for a reason which i'll tell you in a minute. the next and last step is to calibrate. we know how many volts of e. m. f. are required to keep going the electron stream between _n_ and _b_--we know that from the e. m. f. of our standard cell. suppose then that we connect this new instrument, which we have just made, to the wire at _n_ and _b_ as in fig. . some of the electrons at _n_ which are so anxious to get away from the negative plate of battery _b_ can now travel as far as _b_ through the wire of the new instrument. they do so and the pointer swings around to some new position. opposite that we mark the number of volts which the standard battery told us there was between _n_ and _b_. [illustration: fig ] if we move the end of the wire from _b_ to _d_ the pointer will take a new position. opposite this we mark twice the number of volts of the standard cell. we can run it to a point _e_ where the distance _ne_ is one-half _nb_, and mark our scale with half the number of volts of the standard cell, and so on for other positions along the wire. that's the way we calibrate a sensitive current-measuring instrument (with its added wire, of course) so that it will read volts. it is now a voltmeter. if we connect a voltmeter to the battery _x_ as in fig. the pointer will tell us the number of volts in the e. m. f. of _x_, for the pointer will take the same position as it did when the voltmeter was connected between _n_ and _d_. there is only one thing to watch out for in all this. we must be careful that the voltmeter is so made that it won't offer too easy a path for electrons to follow. we only want to find how hard a battery can pull an electron, for that is what we mean by e. m. f. of course, we must let a small stream of electrons flow through the voltmeter so as to make the pointer move. that is why voltmeters of this kind are made out of a long piece of fine wire or else have a coil of fine wire in series with the current-measuring part. the fine wire makes a long and narrow path for the electrons and so there can be only a small stream. usually we describe this condition by saying that a voltmeter has a high resistance. [illustration: fig ] fine wires offer more resistance to electron streams than do heavy wires of the same length. if a wire is the same diameter all along, the longer the length of it which we use the greater is the resistance which is offered to an electron stream. you will need to know how to describe the resistance of a wire or of any part of an electric circuit. to do so you tell how many "ohms" of resistance it has. the ohm is the unit in which we measure the resistance of a circuit to an electron stream. i can show you what an ohm is if i tell you a simple way to measure a resistance. suppose you have a wire or coil of wire and want to know its resistance. connect it in series with a battery and an ammeter as shown in fig. . the same electron stream passes through all parts of this circuit and the ammeter tells us what this stream is in amperes. now connect a voltmeter to the two ends of the coil as shown in the figure. the voltmeter tells in volts how much e. m. f. is being applied to force the current through the coil. divide the number of volts by the number of amperes and the quotient (answer) is the number of ohms of resistance in the coil. [illustration: fig ] suppose the ammeter shows a current of one ampere and the voltmeter an e. m. f. of one volt. then dividing by gives . that means that the coil has a resistance of one ohm. it also means one ohm is such a resistance that one volt will send through it a current of one ampere. you can get lots of meaning out of this. for example, it means also that one volt will send a current of one ampere through a resistance of one ohm. how many ohms would the coil have if it took volts to send amperes through it. solution: divide by and you get . . therefore the coil would have a resistance of . ohms. try another. if a coil of resistance three ohms is carrying two amperes what is the voltage across the terminals of the coil? for ohm it would take volt to give a current of ampere, wouldn't it? for ohms it takes three times as much to give one ampere. to give twice this current would take twice volts. that is, amperes in ohms requires x volts. here's one for you to try by yourself. if an e. m. f. of volts is sending current through a resistance of ohms, how much current is flowing? notice that i told the number of ohms and the number of volts, what are you going to tell? don't tell just the number; tell how many and what. letter the audion-characteristic my dear young student: although there is much in letters and which it is well to learn and to think about, there are only three of the ideas which you must have firmly grasped to get the most out of this letter which i am now going to write you about the audion. first: electric currents are streams of electrons. we measure currents in amperes. to measure a current we may connect into the circuit an ammeter. second: electrons move in a circuit when there is an electron-moving-force, that is an electromotive force or e. m. f. we measure e. m. f.'s in volts. to measure an e. m. f. we connect a voltmeter to the two points between which the e. m. f. is active. third: what current any particular e. m. f. will cause depends upon the circuit in which it is active. circuits differ in the resistance which they offer to e. m. f.'s. for any particular e. m. f. (that is for any given e. m. f.) the resulting current will be smaller the greater the resistance of the circuit. we measure resistance in ohms. to measure it we find the quotient of the number of volts applied to the circuit by the number of amperes which flow. in my sixth letter i told you something of how the audion works. it would be worth while to read again that letter. you remember that the current in the plate circuit can be controlled by the e. m. f. which is applied to the grid circuit. there is a relationship between the plate current and the grid voltage which is peculiar or characteristic to the tube. so we call such a relationship "a characteristic." let us see how it may be found and what it will be. connect an ammeter in the plate- or b-circuit, of the tube so as to measure the plate-circuit current. you will find that almost all books use the letter "_i_" to stand for current. the reason is that scientists used to speak of the "intensity of an electric current" so that "_i_" really stands for intensity. we use _i_ to stand for something more than the word "current." it is our symbol for whatever an ammeter would read, that is for the amount of current. [illustration: fig ] another convenience in symbols is this: we shall frequently want to speak of the currents in several different circuits. it saves time to use another letter along with the letter _i_ to show the circuit to which we refer. for example, we are going to talk about the current in the b-circuit of the audion, so we call that current _i_{b}_. we write the letter _b_ below the line on which _i_ stands. that is why we say the _b_ is subscript, meaning "written below." when you are reading to yourself be sure to read _i_{b}_ as "eye-bee" or else as "eye-subscript-bee." _i_{b}_ therefore will stand for the number of amperes in the plate circuit of the audion. in the same way _i_{a}_ would stand for the current in the filament circuit. we are going to talk about e. m. f.'s also. the letter "_e_" stands for the number of volts of e. m. f. in a circuit. in the filament circuit the battery has _e_{a}_ volts. in the plate circuit the e. m. f. is _e_{b}_ volts. if we put a battery in the grid circuit we can let _e_{c}_ represent the number of volts applied to the grid-filament or c-circuit. the characteristic relation which we are after is one between grid voltage, that is _e_{c}_, and plate current, that is _i_{b}_. so we call it the _e_{c}_--_i_{b}_ characteristic. the dash between the letters is not a subtraction sign but merely a dash to separate the letters. now we'll find the "ee-see-eye-bee" characteristic. connect some small dry cells in series for use in the grid circuit. then connect the filament to the middle cell as in fig. . take the wire which comes from the grid and put a battery clip on it, then you can connect the grid anywhere you want along this series of batteries. see fig. . in the figure this movable clip is represented by an arrow head. you can see that if it is at _a_ the battery will make the grid positive. if it is moved to _b_ the grid will be more positive. on the other hand if the clip is at _o_ there will be no e. m. f. applied to the grid. if it is at _c_ the grid will be made negative. between grid and filament there is placed a voltmeter which will tell how much e. m. f. is applied to the grid, that is, tell the value of _e_{c}_, for any position whatever of the clip. we shall start with the filament heated to a deep red. the manufacturers of the audion tell the purchaser what current should flow through the filament so that there will be the proper emission of electrons. there are easy ways of finding out for one's self but we shall not stop to describe them. the makers also tell how many volts to apply to the plate, that is what value _e_{b}_ should have. we could find this out also for ourselves but we shall not stop to do so. [illustration: fig ] now we set the battery clip so that there is no voltage applied to the grid; that is, we start with _e_{c}_ equal to zero. then we read the ammeter in the plate circuit to find the value of _i_{b}_ which corresponds to this condition of the grid. next we move the clip so as to make the grid as positive as one battery will make it, that is we move the clip to _a_ in fig. . we now have a different value of _e_{c}_ and will find a different value of _i_{b}_ when we read the ammeter. next move the clip to apply two batteries to the grid. we get a new pair of values for _e_{c}_ and _i_{b}_, getting _e_{c}_ from the voltmeter and _i_{b}_ from the ammeter. as we continue in this way, increasing _e_{c}_, we find that the current _i_{b}_ increases for a while and then after we have reached a certain value of _e_{c}_ the current _i_{b}_ stops increasing. adding more batteries and making the grid more positive doesn't have any effect on the plate current. [illustration: fig ] before i tell you why this happens i want to show you how to make a picture of the pairs of values of _e_{c}_ and _i_{b}_ which we have been reading on the voltmeter and ammeter. imagine a city where all the streets are at right angles and the north and south streets are called streets and numbered while the east and west thorofares are called avenues. i'll draw the map as in fig. . right through the center of the city goes main street. but the people who laid out the roads were mathematicians and instead of calling it main street they called it "zero street." the first street east of zero st. we should have called "east first street" but they called it "positive st." and the next beyond "positive st.," and so on. west of the main street they called the first street "negative st." and so on. when they came to name the avenues they were just as precise and mathematical. they called the main avenue "zero ave." and those north of it "positive ave.," "positive ave." and so on. of course, the avenues south of zero ave. they called negative. the town council went almost crazy on the subject of numbering; they numbered everything. the silent policeman which stood at the corner of "positive st." and "positive ave." was marked that way. half way between positive st. and positive st. there was a garage which set back about two-tenths of a block from positive ave. the council numbered it and called it "positive . st. and positive . ave." most of the people spoke of it as "plus . st. and plus . ave." sometime later there was an election in the city and a new council was elected. the members were mostly young electricians and the new highway commissioner was a radio enthusiast. at the first meeting the council changed the names of all the avenues to "mil-amperes"[ ] and of all the streets to "volts." then the highway commissioner who had just been taking a set of voltmeter and ammeter readings on an audion moved that there should be a new road known as "audion characteristic." he said the road should pass through the following points: zero volt and plus . mil-ampere plus . volts and plus . mil-amperes plus . volts and plus . mil-amperes plus . volts and plus . mil-amperes plus . volts and plus . mil-amperes and so on. fig. shows the new road. [illustration: fig ] one member of the council jumped up and said "but what if the grid is made negative?" the commissioner had forgotten to see what happened so he went home to take more readings. he shifted the battery clip along, starting at _c_ of fig. . at the next meeting of the council he brought in the following list of readings and hence of points on his proposed road. minus . volts and plus . mil-ampere " . " " " . " " " . " " " . " " " . " " " . " " " . " " " . " " then he showed the other members of the council on the map of fig. how the audion characteristic would look. [illustration: fig ] there was considerable discussion after that and it appeared that different designs and makes of audions would have different characteristic curves. they all had the same general form of curve but they would pass through different sets of points depending upon the design and upon the b-battery voltage. it was several meetings later, however, before they found out what effects were due to the form of the curve. right after this they found that they could get much better results with their radio sets. now look at the audion characteristic. making the grid positive, that is going on the positive side of the zero volts in our map, makes the plate current larger. you remember that i told you in letter how the grid, when positive, helped call electrons away from the filament and so made a larger stream of electrons in the plate circuit. the grid calls electrons away from the filament. it can't call them out of it; they have to come out themselves as i explained to you in the fifth letter. [illustration: fig ] you can see that as we make the grid more and more positive, that is, make it call louder and louder, a condition will be reached where it won't do it any good to call any louder, for it will already be getting all the electrons away from the filament just as fast as they are emitted. making the grid more positive after that will not increase the plate current any. that's why the characteristic flattens off as you see at high values of grid voltage. the arrangement which we pictured in fig. for making changes in the grid voltage is simple but it doesn't let us change the voltage by less than that of a single battery cell. i want to show you a way which will. you'll find it very useful to know and it is easily understood for it is something like the arrangement of fig. in the preceding letter. [illustration: fig ] connect the cells as in fig. to a fine wire. about the middle of this wire connect the filament. as before use a clip on the end of the wire from the grid. if the grid is connected to _a_ in the figure there is applied to the grid circuit that part of the e. m. f. of the battery which is active in the length of wire between _o_ and _a_. the point _a_ is nearer the positive plate of the battery than is the point _o_. so the grid will be positive and the filament negative. on the other hand, if the clip is connected at _b_ the grid will be negative with respect to the filament. we can, therefore, make the grid positive or negative depending on which side of _o_ we connect the clip. how large the e. m. f. is which will be applied to the grid depends, of course, upon how far away from _o_ the clip is connected. suppose you took the clip in your hand and slid it along in contact with the wire, first from _o_ to _a_ and then back again through _o_ to _b_ and so on back and forth. you would be making the grid _alternately_ positive and negative, wouldn't you? that is, you would be applying to the grid an e. m. f. which increases to some positive value and then, decreasing to zero, _reverses_, and increases just as much, only to decrease to zero, where it started. if you do this over and over again, taking always the same time for one round trip of the clip you will be impressing on the grid circuit an "_alternating e. m. f._" what's going to happen in the plate circuit? when there is no e. m. f. applied to the grid circuit, that is when the grid potential (possibilities) is zero, there is a definite current in the plate circuit. that current we can find from our characteristic of fig. for it is where the curve crosses zero volts. as the grid becomes positive the current rises above this value. when the grid is made negative the current falls below this value. the current, _i_{b}_, then is made alternately greater and less than the current when _e_{c}_ is zero. you might spend a little time thinking over this, seeing what happens when an alternating e. m. f. is applied to the grid of an audion, for that is going to be fundamental to our study of radio. [footnote : a mil-ampere is a thousandth of an ampere just as a millimeter is a thousandth of a meter.] letter condensers and coils dear son: in the last letter we learned of an alternating e. m. f. the way of producing it, which i described, is very crude and i want to tell how to make the audion develop an alternating e. m. f. for itself. that is what the audion does in the transmitting set of a radio telephone. but an audion can't do it all alone. it must have associated with it some coils and a condenser. you know what i mean by coils but you have yet to learn about condensers. a condenser is merely a gap in an otherwise conducting circuit. it's a gap across which electrons cannot pass so that if there is an e. m. f. in the circuit, electrons will be very plentiful on one side of the gap and scarce on the other side. if there are to be many electrons waiting beside the gap there must be room for them. for that reason we usually provide waiting-rooms for the electrons on each side of the gap. metal plates or sheets of tinfoil serve nicely for this purpose. look at fig. . you see a battery and a circuit which would be conducting except for the gap at _c_. on each side of the gap there is a sheet of metal. the metal sheets may be separated by air or mica or paraffined paper. the combination of gap, plates, and whatever is between, provided it is not conducting, is called a condenser. let us see what happens when we connect a battery to a condenser as in the figure. the positive terminal of the battery calls electrons from one plate of the condenser while the negative battery-terminal drives electrons away from itself toward the other plate of the condenser. one plate of the condenser, therefore, becomes positive while the other plate becomes negative. [illustration: fig ] you know that this action of the battery will go on until there are so many electrons in the negative plate of the condenser that they prevent the battery from adding any more electrons to that plate. the same thing happens at the other condenser plate. the positive terminal of the battery calls electrons away from the condenser plate which it is making positive until so many electrons have left that the protons in the atoms of the plate are calling for electrons to stay home just as loudly and effectively as the positive battery-terminal is calling them away. when both these conditions are reached--and they are both reached at the same time--then the battery has to stop driving electrons around the circuit. the battery has not enough e. m. f. to drive any more electrons. why? because the condenser has now just enough e. m. f. with which to oppose the battery. it would be well to learn at once the right words to use in describing this action. we say that the battery sends a "charging current" around its circuit and "charges the condenser" until it has the same e. m. f. when the battery is first connected to the condenser there is lots of space in the waiting-rooms so there is a great rush or surge of electrons into one plate and away from the other. just at this first instant the charging current, therefore, is large but it decreases rapidly, for the moment electrons start to pile up on one plate of the condenser and to leave the other, an e. m. f. builds up on the condenser. this e. m. f., of course, opposes that of the battery so that the net e. m. f. acting to move electrons round the circuit is no longer that of the battery, but is the difference between the e. m. f. of the battery and that of the condenser. and so, with each added electron, the e. m. f. of the condenser increases until finally it is just equal to that of the battery and there is no net e. m. f. to act. what would happen if we should then disconnect the battery? the condenser would be left with its extra electrons in the negative plate and with its positive plate lacking the same number of electrons. that is, the condenser would be left charged and its e. m. f. would be of the same number of volts as the battery. [illustration: fig ] now suppose we connect a short wire between the plates of the condenser as in fig. . the electrons rush home from the negative plate to the positive plate. as fast as electrons get home the e. m. f. decreases. when they are all back the e. m. f. has been reduced to zero. sometimes we say that "the condenser discharges." the "discharge current" starts with a rush the moment the conducting path is offered between the two plates. the e. m. f. of the condenser falls, the discharge current grows smaller, and in a very short time the condenser is completely discharged. [illustration: fig ] that's what happens when there is a short conducting path for the discharge current. if that were all that could happen i doubt if there would be any radio communication to-day. but if we connect a coil of wire between two plates of a charged condenser, as in fig. , then something of great interest happens. to understand you must know something more about electron streams. suppose we should wind a few turns of wire on a cylindrical core, say on a stiff cardboard tube. we shall use insulated wire. now start from one end of the coil, say _a_, and follow along the coiled wire for a few turns and then scratch off the insulation and solder onto the coil two wires, _b_, and _c_, as shown in fig. . the further end of the coil we shall call _d_. now let's arrange a battery and switch so that we can send a current through the part of the coil between _a_ and _b_. arrange also a current-measuring instrument so as to show if any current is flowing in the part of the coil between _c_ and _d_. for this purpose we shall use a kind of current-measuring instrument which i have not yet explained. it is different from the hot-wire type described in letter for it will show in which direction electrons are streaming through it. the diagram of fig. indicates the apparatus of our experiment. when we close the switch, _s_, the battery starts a stream of electrons from _a_ towards _b_. just at that instant the needle, or pointer, of the current instrument moves. the needle moves, and thus shows a current in the coil _cd_; but it comes right back again, showing that the current is only momentary. let's say this again in different words. the battery keeps steadily forcing electrons through the circuit _ab_ but the instrument in the circuit _cd_ shows no current in that circuit except just at the instant when current starts to flow in the neighboring circuit _ab_. [illustration: fig ] one thing this current-measuring instrument tells us is the direction of the electron stream through itself. it shows that the momentary stream of electrons goes through the coil from _d_ to _c_, that is in the opposite direction to the stream in the part _ab_. now prepare to do a little close thinking. read over carefully all i have told you about this experiment. you see that the moment the battery starts a stream of electrons from _a_ towards _b_, something causes a momentary, that is a temporary, movement of electrons from _d_ to _c_. we say that starting a stream of electrons from _a_ to _b_ sets up or "induces" a stream of electrons from _d_ to _c_. what will happen then if we connect the battery between _a_ and _d_ as in fig. ? electrons will start streaming away from _a_ towards _b_, that is towards _d_. but that means there will be a momentary stream from _d_ towards _c_, that is towards _a_. our stream from the battery causes this oppositely directed stream. in the usual words we say it "induces" in the coil an opposing stream of electrons. this opposing stream doesn't last long, as we saw, but while it does last it hinders the stream which the battery is trying to establish. [illustration: fig ] the stream of electrons which the battery causes will at first meet an opposition so it takes a little time before the battery can get the full-sized stream of electrons flowing steadily. in other words a current in a coil builds up slowly, because while it is building up it induces an effect which opposes somewhat its own building up. did you ever see a small boy start off somewhere, perhaps where he shouldn't be going, and find his conscience starting to trouble him at once. for a time he goes a little slowly but in a moment or two his conscience stops opposing him and he goes on steadily at his full pace. when he started he stirred up his conscience and that opposed him. nobody else was hindering his going. it was all brought about by his own actions. the opposition which he met was "self-induced." he was hindered at first by a self-induced effect of his own conscience. if he was a stream of electrons starting off to travel around the coil we would say that he was opposed by a self-induced e. m. f. and any path in which such an effect will be produced we say has "self-inductance." usually we shorten this term and speak of "inductance." there is another way of looking at it. we know habits are hard to form and equally hard to break. it's hard to get electrons going around a coil and the self-inductance of a circuit tells us how hard it is. the harder it is the more self-inductance we say that the coil or circuit has. of course, we need a unit in which to measure self-inductance. the unit is called the "henry." but that is more self-inductance than we can stand in most radio circuits, so we find it convenient to measure in smaller units called "mil-henries" which are thousandths of a henry. you ought to know what a henry[ ] is, if we are to use the word, but it isn't necessary just now to spend much time on it. the opposition which one's self-induced conscience offers depends upon how rapidly one starts. it's volts which make electrons move and so the conscience which opposes them will be measured in volts. therefore we say that a coil has one henry of inductance when an electron stream which is increasing one ampere's worth each second stirs up in the coil a conscientious objection of one volt. don't try to remember this now; you can come back to it later. there is one more effect of inductance which we must know before we can get very far with our radio. suppose an electron stream is flowing through a coil because a battery is driving the electrons along. now let the battery be removed or disconnected. you'd expect the electron stream to stop at once but it doesn't. it keeps on for a moment because the electrons have got the habit. [illustration: fig ] if you look again at fig. you will see what i mean. suppose the switch is closed and a steady stream of electrons is flowing through the coil from _a_ to _b_. there will be no current in the other part of the coil. now open the switch. there will be a motion of the needle of the current-measuring instrument, showing a momentary current. the direction of this motion, however, shows that the momentary stream of electrons goes through the coil from _c_ to _d_. do you see what this means? the moment the battery is disconnected there is nothing driving the electrons in the part _ab_ and they slow down. immediately, and just for an instant, a stream of electrons starts off in the part _cd_ in the same direction as if the battery was driving them along. now look again at fig. . if the battery is suddenly disconnected there is a momentary rush of electrons in the same direction as the battery was driving them. just as the self-inductance of a coil opposes the starting of a stream of electrons, so it opposes the stopping of a stream which is already going. [illustration: fig ] so far we haven't said much about making an audion produce alternating e. m. f.'s and thus making it useful for radio-telephony. before radio was possible all these things that i have just told you, and some more too, had to be known. it took hundreds of good scientists years of patient study and experiment to find out those ideas about electricity which have made possible radio-telephony. two of these ideas are absolutely necessary for the student of radio-communication. first: a condenser is a gap in a circuit where there are waiting-rooms for the electrons. second: electrons form habits. it's hard to get them going through a coil of wire, harder than through a straight wire, but after they are going they don't like to stop. they like it much less if they are going through a coil instead of a straight wire. in my next letter i'll tell you what happens when we have a coil and a condenser together in a circuit. [footnote : the "henry" has nothing to do with a well-known automobile. it was named after joseph henry, a professor years ago at princeton university.] letter a "c-w" transmitter dear son: [illustration: fig ] let's look again at the coils of fig. which we studied in the last letter. i have reproduced them here so you won't have to turn back. when electrons start from _a_ towards _b_ there is a momentary stream of electrons from _d_ towards _c_. if the electron stream through _ab_ were started in the opposite direction, that is from _b_ to _a_ the induced stream in the coil _cd_ would be from _c_ towards _d_. [illustration: fig ] it all reminds me of two boys with a hedge or fence between them as in fig. . one boy is after the other. suppose you were being chased; you know what you'd do. if your pursuer started off with a rush towards one end of the hedge you'd "beat it" towards the other. but if he started slowly and cautiously you would start slowly too. you always go in the opposite direction, dodging back and forth along the paths which you are wearing in the grass on opposite sides of the hedge. if he starts to the right and then slows up and starts back, you will start to your right, slow up, and start back. suppose he starts at the center of the hedge. first he dodges to the right, and then back through the center as far to the left, then back again and so on. you follow his every change. [illustration: fig ] i am going to make a picture of what you two do. let's start with the other fellow. he dodges or alternates back and forth. some persons would say he "oscillates" back and forth in the same path. as he does so he induces you to move. i am on your side of the hedge with a moving-picture camera. my camera catches both of you. fig. shows the way the film would look if it caught only your heads. the white circle represents the tow-head on my side of the hedge and the black circle, young brown who lives next door. of course, the camera only catches you each time the shutter opens but it is easy to draw a complete picture of what takes place as time goes on. see fig. . [illustration: fig ] now suppose you are an electron in coil _cd_ of fig. and "brownie" is one in coil _ab_. your motions are induced by his. what's true of you two is true of all the other electrons. i have separated the coils a little in this sketch so that you can think of a hedge between. i don't know how one electron can affect another on the opposite side of this hedge but it can. and i don't know anything really about the hedge, which is generally called "the ether." the hedge isn't air. the effect would be the same if the coils were in a vacuum. the "ether" is just a name for whatever is left in the space about us when we have taken out everything which we can see or feel--every molecule, every proton and every electron. [illustration: fig ] why and how electrons can affect one another when they are widely separated is one of the great mysteries of science. we don't know any more about it than about why there are electrons. let's accept it as a fundamental fact which we can't as yet explain. [illustration: fig ] and now we can see how to make an audion produce an alternating current or as we sometimes say "make an audion oscillator." we shall set up an audion with its a-battery as in fig. . between the grid and the filament we put a coil and a condenser. notice that they are in parallel, as we say. in the plate-filament circuit we connect the b-battery and a switch, _s_, and another coil. this coil in the plate circuit of the audion we place close to the other coil so that the two coils are just like the coils _ab_ and _cd_ of which i have been telling you. the moment any current flows in coil _ab_ there will be a current flow in the coil _cd_. (an induced electron stream.) of course, as long as the switch in the b-battery is open no current can flow. the moment the switch _s_ is closed the b-battery makes the plate positive with respect to the filament and there is a sudden surge of electrons round the plate circuit and through the coil from _a_ to _b_. you know what that does to the coil _cd_. it induces an electron stream from _d_ towards _c_. where do these electrons come from? why, from the grid and the plate of the condenser. where do they go? most of them go to the waiting-room offered by plate of the condenser and some, of course, to the filament. what is the result? the grid becomes positive and the filament negative. [illustration: fig ] this is the crucial moment in our study. can you tell me what is going to happen to the stream of electrons in the plate circuit? remember that just at the instant when we closed the switch the grid was neither positive nor negative. we were at the point of zero volts on the audion characteristic of fig. . when we close the switch the current in the plate circuit starts to jump from zero mil-amperes to the number of mil-amperes which represents the point where zero volt st. crosses audion characteristic. but this jump in plate current makes the grid positive as we have just seen. so the grid will help the plate call electrons and that will make the current in the plate circuit still larger, that is, result in a larger stream of electrons from _a_ to _b_. this increase in current will be matched by an increased effect in the coil _cd_, for you remember how you and "brownie" behaved. and that will pull more electrons away from plate of the condenser and send them to the waiting-room of . all this makes the grid more positive and so makes it call all the more effectively to help the plate move electrons. [illustration: pl. v.--variometer (top) and variable condenser (bottom) of the general radio company. voltmeter and ammeter of the weston instrument company.] we "started something" that time. it's going on all by itself. the grid is getting more positive, the plate current is getting bigger, and so the grid is getting more positive and the plate current still bigger. is it ever going to stop? yes. look at the audion characteristic. there comes a time when making the grid a little more positive won't have any effect on the plate-circuit current. so the plate current stops increasing. there is nothing now to keep pulling electrons away from plate and crowding them into waiting-room . why shouldn't the electrons in this waiting-room go home to that of plate ? there is now no reason and so they start off with a rush. of course, some of them came from the grid and as fast as electrons get back to the grid it becomes less and less positive. as the grid becomes less and less positive it becomes less and less helpful to the plate. if the grid doesn't help, the plate alone can't keep up this stream of electrons. all the plate can do by itself is to maintain the current represented by the intersection of zero volts and the audion characteristic. the result is that the current in the plate circuit, that is, of course, the current in coil _ab_, becomes gradually less. about the time all the electrons, which had left the grid and plate of the condenser, have got home the plate current is back to the value corresponding to _e_{c}_=_ _. the plate current first increases and then decreases, but it doesn't stop decreasing when it gets back to zero-grid value. and the reason is all due to the habit forming tendencies of electrons in coils. to see how this comes about, let's tell the whole story over again. in other words let's make a review and so get a sort of flying start. [illustration: fig ] when we close the battery switch, _s_ in fig. , we allow a current to flow in the plate circuit. this current induces a current in the coil _cd_ and charges the condenser which is across it, making plate positive and plate negative. a positive grid helps the plate so that the current in the plate circuit builds up to the greatest possible value as shown by the audion characteristic. that's the end of the increase in current. now the condenser discharges, sending electrons through the coil _cd_ and making the grid less positive until finally it is at zero potential, that is neither positive nor negative. while the condenser is discharging the electrons in the coil _cd_ get a habit of flowing from _c_ toward _d_, that is from plate to plate . if it wasn't for this habit the electron stream in _cd_ would stop as soon as the grid had reduced to zero voltage. because of the habit, however, a lot of electrons that ought to stay on plate get hurried along and land on plate . it is a little like the old game of "crack the whip." some electrons get the habit and can't stop quickly enough so they go tumbling into waiting-room and make it negative. that means that the condenser not only discharges but starts to get charged in the other direction with plate negative and plate positive. the grid feels the effect of all this, because it gets extra electrons if plate gets them. in fact the voltage effective between grid and filament is always the voltage between the plates of the condenser. the audion characteristic tells us what is the result. as the grid becomes negative it opposes the plate, shooing electrons back towards the filament and reducing the plate current still further. but you have already seen in my previous letter what happens when we reduce the current in coil _ab_. there is then induced in coil _cd_ an electron stream from _c_ to _d_. this induced current is in just the right direction to send more electrons into waiting-room and so to make the grid still more negative. and the more negative the grid gets the smaller becomes the plate current until finally the plate current is reduced to zero. look at the audion characteristic again and see that making the grid sufficiently negative entirely stops the plate current. when the plate current stops, the condenser in the grid circuit is charged, with plate negative and positive. it was the plate current which was the main cause of this change for it induced the charging current in coil _cd_. so, when the plate current becomes zero there is nothing to prevent the condenser from discharging. its discharge makes the grid less and less negative until it is zero volts and there we are--back practically where we started. the plate current is increasing and the grid is getting positive, and we're off on another "cycle" as we say. during a cycle the plate current increases to a maximum, decreases to zero, and then increases again to its initial value. [illustration: fig ] this letter has a longer continuous train of thought than i usually ask you to follow. but before i stop i want to give you some idea of what good this is in radio. what about the current which flows in coil _cd_? it's an alternating current, isn't it? first the electrons stream from _d_ towards _c_, and then back again from _c_ towards _d_. suppose we set up another coil like _cd_ in fig. . it would have an alternating current induced in it. if this coil was connected to an antenna there would be radio waves sent out. the switch _s_ could be used for a key and kept closed longer or shorter intervals depending upon whether dashes or dots were being set. i'll tell you more about this later, but in this diagram are the makings of a "c-w transmitter," that is a "continuous wave transmitter" for radio-telegraphy. it would be worth while to go over this letter again using a pencil and tracing in the various circuits the electron streams which i have described. letter inductance and capacity dear sir: in the last letter i didn't stop to draw you a picture of the action of the audion oscillator which i described. i am going to do it now and you are to imagine me as using two pencils and drawing simultaneously two curves. one curve shows what happens to the current in the plate circuit. the other shows how the voltage of the grid changes. both curves start from the instant when the switch is closed; and the two taken together show just what happens in the tube from instant to instant. fig. shows the two curves. you will notice how i have drawn them beside and below the audion characteristic. the grid voltage and the plate current are related, as i have told you, and the audion characteristic is just a convenient way of showing the relationship. if we know the current in the plate circuit we can find the voltage of the grid and vice versa. as time goes on, the plate current grows to its maximum and decreases to zero and then goes on climbing up and down between these two extremes. the grid voltage meanwhile is varying alternately, having its maximum positive value when the plate current is a maximum and its maximum negative value when the plate current is zero. look at the two curves and see this for yourself. [illustration: fig ] now i want to tell you something about how fast these oscillations occur. we start by learning two words. one is "cycle" with which you are already partly familiar and the other is "frequency." take cycle first. starting from zero the current increases to a maximum, decreases to zero, and is ready again for the same series of changes. we say the current has passed through "a cycle of values." it doesn't make any difference where we start from. if we follow the current through all its different values until we are back at the same value as we started with and ready to start all over, then we have followed through a cycle of values. once you get the idea of a cycle, and the markings on the curves in fig. will help you to understand, then the other idea is easy. by "frequency" we mean the number of cycles each second. the electric current which we use in lighting our house goes through sixty cycles a second. that means the current reverses its direction times a second. in radio we use alternating currents which have very high frequencies. in ship sets the frequency is either , or , , cycles per second. amateur transmitting sets usually have oscillators which run at well over a million cycles per second. the longer range stations use lower frequencies. you'll find, however, that the newspaper announcements of the various broadcast stations do not tell the frequency but instead tell the "wave length." i am not going to stop now to explain what that means but i am going to give you a simple rule. divide , , by the "wave length" and you'll have the frequency. for example, ships are supposed to use wave lengths of meters or meters. dividing three hundred million by three hundred gives one million and that is one of the frequencies which i told you were used by ship sets. dividing by six hundred gives , or just half the frequency. you can remember that sets transmitting with long waves have low frequencies, but sets with short waves have high frequencies. the frequency and the wave length don't change in the same way. they change in opposite ways or inversely, as we say. the higher the frequency the shorter the wave length. i'll tell you about wave lengths later. first let's see how to control the frequency of an audion oscillator like that of fig. . [illustration: fig ] it takes time to get a full-sized stream going through a coil because of the inductance of the coil. that you have learned. and also it takes time for such a current to stop completely. therefore, if we make the inductance of the coil small, keeping the condenser the same, we shall make the time required for the current to start and stop smaller. that will mean a higher frequency for there will be more oscillations each second. one rule, then, for increasing the frequency of an audion oscillator is to decrease the inductance. later in this letter i shall tell you how to increase or decrease the inductance of a coil. before i do so, however, i want to call your attention to the other way in which we can change the frequency of an audion oscillator. let's see how the frequency will depend upon the capacity of the condenser. if a condenser has a large capacity it means that it can accommodate in its waiting-room a large number of electrons before the e. m. f. of the condenser becomes large enough to stop the stream of electrons which is charging the condenser. if the condenser in the grid circuit of fig. is of large capacity it means that it must receive in its upper waiting-room a large number of electrons before the grid will be negative enough to make the plate current zero. therefore, the charging current will have to flow a long time to store up the necessary number of electrons. you will get the same idea, of course, if you think about the electrons in the lower room. the current in the plate circuit will not stop increasing until the voltage of the grid has become positive enough to make the plate current a maximum. it can't do that until enough electrons have left the upper room and been stored away in the lower. therefore the charging current will have to flow for a long time if the capacity is large. we have, therefore, the other rule for increasing the frequency of an audion oscillator, that is, decrease the capacity. these rules can be stated the other way around. to decrease the frequency we can either increase the capacity or increase the inductance or do both. but what would happen if we should decrease the capacity and increase the inductance? decreasing the capacity would make the frequency higher, but increasing the inductance would make it lower. what would be the net effect? that would depend upon how much we decreased the capacity and how much we increased the inductance. it would be possible to decrease the capacity and then if we increased the inductance just the right amount to have no change in the frequency. no matter how large or how small we make the capacity we can always make the inductance such that there isn't any change in frequency. i'll give you a rule for this, after i have told you some more things about capacities and inductances. first as to inductances. a short straight wire has a very small inductance, indeed. the longer the wire the larger will be the inductance but unless the length is hundreds of feet there isn't much inductance anyway. a coiled wire is very different. a coil of wire will have more inductance the more turns there are to it. that isn't the whole story but it's enough for the moment. let's see why. the reason why a stream of electrons has an opposing conscience when they are started off in a coil of wire is because each electron affects every other electron which can move in a parallel path. look again at the coils of figs. and which we discussed in the tenth letter. those sketches plainly bring out the fact that the electrons in part _cd_ travel in paths which are parallel to those of the electrons in part _ab_. [illustration: fig ] if we should turn these coils as in fig. so that all the paths in _cd_ are at right angles to those in _ab_ there wouldn't be any effect in _cd_ when a current in _ab_ started or stopped. look at the circuit of the oscillating audion in fig. . if we should turn these coils at right angles to each other we would stop the oscillation. electrons only influence other electrons which are in parallel paths. when we want a large inductance we wind the coil so that there are many parallel paths. then when the battery starts to drive an electron along, this electron affects all its fellows who are in parallel paths and tries to start them off in the opposite direction to that in which it is being driven. the battery, of course, starts to drive all the electrons, not only those nearest its negative terminal but those all along the wire. and every one of these electrons makes up for the fact that the battery is driving it along by urging all its fellows in the opposite direction. it is not an exceptional state of affairs. suppose a lot of boys are being driven out of a yard where they had no right to be playing. suppose also that a boy can resist and lag back twice as much if some other boy urges him to do so. make it easy and imagine three boys. the first boy lags back not only on his own account but because of the urging of the other boys. that makes him three times as hard to start as if the other boys didn't influence him. the same is true of the second boy and also of the third. the result is the unfortunate property owner has nine times as hard a job getting that gang started as if only one boy were to be dealt with. if there were two boys it would be four times as hard as for one boy. if there were four in the group it would be sixteen times, and if five it would be twenty-five times. the difficulty increases much more rapidly than the number of boys. now all we have to do to get the right idea of inductance is to think of each boy as standing for the electrons in one turn of the coil. if there are five turns there will be twenty-five times as much inductance, as for a single turn; and so on. you see that we can change the inductance of a coil very easily by changing the number of turns. i'll tell you two things more about inductance because they will come in handy. the first is that the inductance will be larger if the turns are large circles. you can see that for yourself because if the circles were very small we would have practically a straight wire. the other fact is this. if that property owner had been an electrical engineer and the boys had been electrons he would have fixed it so that while half of them said, "aw, don't go; he can't put you off"; the other half would have said "come on, let's get out." if he did that he would have a coil without any inductance, that is, he would have only the natural inertia of the electrons to deal with. we would say that he had made a coil with "pure resistance" or else that he had made a "non-inductive resistance." [illustration: fig ] how would he do it? easy enough after one learns how, but quite ingenious. take the wire and fold it at the middle. start with the middle and wind the coil with the doubled wire. fig. shows how the coil would look and you can see that part of the way the electrons are going around the coil in one direction and the rest of the way in the opposite direction. it is just as if the boys were paired off, a "goody-goody" and a "tough nut" together. they both shout at once opposite advice and neither has any effect. i have told you all except one of the ways in which we can affect the inductance of a circuit. you know now all the methods which are important in radio. so let's consider how to make large or small capacities. first i want to tell you how we measure the capacity of a condenser. we use units called "microfarads." you remember that an ampere means an electron stream at the rate of about six billion billion electrons a second. a millionth of an ampere would, therefore, be a stream at the rate of about six million million electrons a second--quite a sizable little stream for any one who wanted to count them as they went by. if a current of one millionth of an ampere should flow for just one second six million million electrons would pass along by every point in the path or circuit. that is what would happen if there weren't any waiting-rooms in the circuit. if there was a condenser then that number of electrons would leave one waiting-room and would enter the other. well, suppose that just as the last electron of this enormous number[ ] entered its waiting-room we should know that the voltage of the condenser was just one volt. then we would say that the condenser had a capacity of one microfarad. if it takes half that number to make the condenser oppose further changes in the contents of its waiting-rooms, with one volt's worth of opposition, that is, one volt of e. m. f., then the condenser has only half a microfarad of capacity. the number of microfarads of capacity (abbreviated mf.) is a measure of how many electrons we can get away from one plate and into the other before the voltage rises to one volt. what must we do then to make a condenser with large capacity? either of two things; either make the waiting-rooms large or put them close together. if we make the plates of a condenser larger, keeping the separation between them the same, it means more space in the waiting-rooms and hence less crowding. you know that the more crowded the electrons become the more they push back against any other electron which some battery is trying to force into their waiting-room, that is the higher the e. m. f. of the condenser. the other way to get a larger capacity is to bring the plates closer together, that is to shorten the gap. look at it this way: the closer the plates are together the nearer home the electrons are. their home is only just across a little gap; they can almost see the electronic games going on around the nuclei they left. they forget the long round-about journey they took to get to this new waiting-room and they crowd over to one side of this room to get just as close as they can to their old homes. that's why it's always easier, and takes less voltage, to get the same number of electrons moved from one plate to the other of a condenser which has only a small space between plates. it takes less voltage and that means that the condenser has a smaller e. m. f. for the same number of electrons. it also means that before the e. m. f. rises to one volt we can get more electrons moved around if the plates are close together. and that means larger capacity. there is one thing to remember in all this: it doesn't make any difference how thick the plates are. it all depends upon how much surface they have and how close together they are. most of the electrons in the plate which is being made negative are way over on the side toward their old homes, that is, toward the plate which is being made positive. and most of the homes, that is, atoms which have lost electrons, are on the side of the positive plate which is next to the gap. that's why i said the electrons could almost see their old homes. [illustration: fig ] all this leads to two very simple rules for building condensers. if you have a condenser with too small a capacity and want one, say, twice as large, you can either use twice as large plates or bring the plates you already have twice as close together; that is, make the gap half as large. generally, of course, the gap is pretty well fixed. for example, if we make a condenser by using two pieces of metal and separating them by a sheet of mica we don't want the job of splitting the mica. so we increase the size of the plates. we can do that either by using larger plates or other plates and connecting it as in fig. so that the total waiting-room space for electrons is increased. [illustration: pl. vi.--low-power transmitting tube, u v (courtesy of radio corporation of america).] [illustration: fig ] if you have got these ideas you can understand how we use both sides of the same plate in some types of condensers. look at fig. . there are two plates connected together and a third between them. suppose electrons are pulled from the outside plates and crowded into the middle plate. some of them go on one side and some on the other, as i have shown. the negative signs indicate electrons and the plus signs their old homes. if we use more plates as in fig. we have a larger capacity. [illustration: fig ] [illustration: fig ] what if we have two plates which are not directly opposite one another, like those of fig. ? what does the capacity depend upon? imagine yourself an electron on the negative plate. look off toward the positive plate and see how big it seems to you. the bigger it looks the more capacity the condenser has. when the plates are right opposite one another the positive plate looms up pretty large. but if they slide apart you don't see so much of it; and if it is off to one side about all you see is the edge. if you can't see lots of atoms which have lost electrons and so would make good homes for you, there is no use of your staying around on that side of the plate; you might just as well be trying to go back home the long way which you originally came. that's why in a variable plate condenser there is very little capacity when no parts of the plates are opposite each other, and there is the greatest capacity when they are exactly opposite one another. [illustration: fig ] while we are at it we might just as well clean up this whole business of variable capacities and inductances by considering two ways in which to make a variable inductance. fig. shows the simplest way but it has some disadvantages which i won't try now to explain. we make a long coil and then take off taps. we can make connections between one end of the coil and any of the taps. the more turns there are included in the part of the coil which we are using the greater is the inductance. if we want to do a real job we can bring each of these taps to a little stud and arrange a sliding or rotating contact with them. then we have an inductance the value of which we can vary "step-by-step" in a convenient manner. another way to make a variable inductance is to make what is called a "variometer." i dislike the name because it doesn't "meter" anything. if properly calibrated it would of course "meter" inductance, but then it should be called an "inducto-meter." do you remember the gang of boys that fellow had to drive off his property? what if there had been two different gangs playing there? how much trouble he has depends upon whether there is anything in common between the gangs. suppose they are playing in different parts of his property and so act just as if the other crowd wasn't also trespassing. he could just add the trouble of starting one gang to the trouble of starting the other. it would be very different if the gangs have anything in common. then one would encourage the other much as the various boys of the same gang encourage each other. he would have a lot more trouble. and this extra trouble would be because of the relations between gangs, that is, because of their "mutual inductance." on the other hand suppose the gangs came from different parts of the town and disliked each other. he wouldn't have nearly the trouble. each gang would be yelling at the other as they went along: "you'd better beat it. he knows all right, all right, who broke that bush down by the gate. just wait till he catches you." they'd get out a little easier, each in the hope the other crowd would catch it from the owner. there's a case where their mutual relations, their mutual inductance, makes the job easier. that's true of coils with inductance. suppose you wind two inductance coils and connect them in series. if they are at right angles to each other as in fig. a they have no effect on each other. there is no mutual inductance. but if they are parallel and wound the same way like the coils of fig. b they will act like a single coil of greater inductance. if the coils are parallel but wound in opposite directions as in fig. c they will have less inductance because of their mutual inductance. you can check these statements for yourself if you'll refer back to letter and see what happens in the same way as i told you in discussing fig. . [illustration: fig a] [illustration: fig b] if the coils are neither parallel nor at right angles there will be some mutual inductance but not as much as if they were parallel. by turning the coils we can get all the variations in mutual relations from the case of fig. b to that of fig. c. that's what we arrange to do in a variable inductance of the variometer type. [illustration: fig c] there is another way of varying the mutual inductance. we can make one coil slide inside another. if it is way inside, the total inductance which the two coils offer is either larger than the sum of what they can offer separately or less, depending upon whether the windings are in the same direction or opposite. as we pull the coil out the mutual effect becomes less and finally when it is well outside the mutual inductance is very small. now we have several methods of varying capacity and inductance and therefore we are ready to vary the frequency of our audion oscillator; that is, "tune" it, as we say. in my next letter i shall show you why we tune. now for the rule which i promised. the frequency to which a circuit is tuned depends upon the product of the number of mil-henries in the coil and the number of microfarads in the condenser. change the coil and the condenser as much as you want but keep this product the same and the frequency will be the same. [footnote : more accurately the number is , , , , .] letter tuning dear radio enthusiast: i want to tell you about receiving sets and their tuning. in the last letter i told you what determines the frequency of oscillation of an audion oscillator. it was the condenser and inductance which you studied in connection with fig. . that's what determines the frequency and also what makes the oscillations. all the tube does is to keep them going. let's see why this is so. [illustration: fig a] start first, as in fig. a, with a very simple circuit of a battery and a non-inductive resistance, that is, a wire wound like that of fig. in the previous letter, so that it has no inductance. the battery must do work forcing electrons through that wire. it has the ability, or the energy as we say. [illustration: fig b] now connect a condenser to the battery as in fig. b. the connecting wires are very short; and so practically all the work which the battery does is in storing electrons in the negative plate of the condenser and robbing the positive plate. the battery displaces a certain number of electrons in the waiting-rooms of the condenser. how many, depends upon how hard it can push and pull, that is on its e. m. f., and upon how much capacity the condenser has. [illustration: fig c] remove the battery and connect the charged condenser to the resistance as in fig. c. the electrons rush home. they bump and jostle their way along, heating the wire as they go. they have a certain amount of energy or ability to do work because they are away from home and they use it all up, bouncing along on their way. when once they are home they have used up all the surplus energy which the battery gave them. try it again, but this time, as in fig. d, connect the charged condenser to a coil which has inductance. the electrons don't get started as fast because of the inductance. but they keep going because the electrons in the wire form the habit. the result is that about the time enough electrons have got into plate (which was positive), to satisfy all its lonely protons, the electrons in the wire are streaming along at a great rate. a lot of them keep going until they land on this plate and so make it negative. [illustration: fig d] that's the same sort of thing that happens in the case of the inductance and condenser in the oscillating audion circuit except for one important fact. there is nothing to keep electrons going to the plate except this habit. and there are plenty of stay-at-home electrons to stop them as they rush along. they bump and jostle, but some of them are stopped or else diverted so that they go bumping around without getting any nearer plate . of course, they spend all their energy this way, getting every one all stirred up and heating the wire. some of the energy which the electrons had when they were on plate is spent, therefore, and there aren't as many electrons getting to plate . when they turn around and start back, as you know they do, the same thing happens. the result is that each successive surge of electrons is smaller than the preceding. their energy is being wasted in heating the wire. the stream of electrons gets smaller and smaller, and the voltage of the condenser gets smaller and smaller, until by-and-by there isn't any stream and the condenser is left uncharged. when that happens, we say the oscillations have "damped out." [illustration: fig ] that's one way of starting oscillations which damp out--to start with a charged condenser and connect an inductance across it. there is another way which leads us to some important ideas. look at fig. . there is an inductance and a condenser. near the coil is another coil which has a battery and a key in circuit with it. the coils are our old friends of fig. in letter . suppose we close the switch _s_. it starts a current through the coil _ab_ which goes on steadily as soon as it really gets going. while it is starting, however, it induces an electron stream in coil _cd_. there is only a momentary or transient current but it serves to charge the condenser and then events happen just as they did in the case where we charged the condenser with a battery. [illustration: fig ] now take away this coil _ab_ with its battery and substitute the oscillator of fig. . what's going to happen? we have two circuits in which oscillations can occur. see fig. . one circuit is associated with an audion and some batteries which keep supplying it with energy so that its oscillations are continuous. the other circuit is near enough to the first to be influenced by what happens in that circuit. we say it is "coupled" to it, because whatever happens in the first circuit induces an effect in the second circuit. suppose first that in each circuit the inductance and capacity have such values as to produce oscillations of the same frequency. then the moment we start the oscillator we have the same effect in both circuits. let me draw the picture a little differently (fig. ) so that you can see this more easily. i have merely made the coil _ab_ in two parts, one of which can affect _cd_ in the oscillator and the other the coil _l_ of the second circuit. but suppose that the two circuits do not have the same natural frequencies, that is the condenser and inductance in one circuit are so large that it just naturally takes more time for an oscillation in that circuit than in the other. it is like learning to dance. you know about how well you and your partner would get along if you had one frequency of oscillation and she had another. that's what happens in a case like this. [illustration: fig ] if circuit _l-c_ takes longer for each oscillation than does circuit _ab_ its electron stream is always working at cross purposes with the electron stream in _ab_ which is trying to lead it. its electrons start off from one condenser plate to the other and before they have much more than got started the stream in _ab_ tries to call them back to go in the other direction. it is practically impossible under these conditions to get a stream of any size going in circuit _l-c_. it is equally hard if _l-c_ has smaller capacity and inductance than _ab_ so that it naturally oscillates faster. i'll tell you exactly what it is like. suppose you and your partner are trying to dance without any piano or other source of music. she has one tune running through her head and she dances to that, except as you drag her around the floor. you are trying to follow another tune. as a couple you have a difficult time going anywhere under these conditions. but it would be all right if you both had the same tune. if we want the electron stream in coil _ab_ to have a large guiding effect on the stream in coil _l-c_ we must see that both circuits have the same tune, that is the same natural frequency of oscillation. [illustration: fig ] this can be shown very easily by a simple experiment. suppose we set up our circuit _l-c_ with an ammeter in it, so as to be able to tell how large an electron stream is oscillating in that circuit. let us also make the condenser a variable one so that we can change the natural frequency or tune of the circuit. now let's see what happens to the current as we vary this condenser, changing the capacity and thus changing the tune of the circuit. if we use a variable plate condenser it will have a scale on top graduated in degrees and we can note the reading of the ammeter for each position of the movable plates. if we do, we find one position of these plates, that is one setting, corresponding to one value of capacity in the condenser, where the current in the circuit is a maximum. this is the setting of the condenser for which the circuit has the same tune or natural frequency as the circuit _cd_. sometimes we say that the circuits are now in resonance. we also refer to the curve of values of current and condenser positions as a "tuning curve." such a curve is shown in fig. . [illustration: fig ] that's all there is to tuning--adjusting the capacity and inductance of a circuit until it has the same natural frequency as some other circuit with which we want it to work. we can either adjust the capacity as we just did, or we can adjust the inductance. in that case we use a variable inductance as in fig. . if we want to be able to tune to any of a large range of frequencies we usually have to take out or put into the circuit a whole lot of mil-henries at a time. when we do we get these mil-henries of inductance from a coil which we call a "loading coil." that's why your friends add a loading coil when they want to tune for the long wave-length stations, that is, those with a low frequency. when our circuit _l-c_ of fig. is tuned to the frequency of the oscillator we get in it a maximum current. there is a maximum stream of electrons, and hence a maximum number of them crowded first into one and then into the other plate of the condenser. and so the condenser is charged to a maximum voltage, first in one direction and then in the other. [illustration: fig ] now connect the circuit _l-c_ to the grid of an audion. if the circuit is tuned we'll have the maximum possible voltage applied between grid and filament. in the plate circuit we'll get an increase and then a decrease of current. you know that will happen for i prepared you for this moment by the last page of my ninth letter. i'll tell you more about that current in the plate circuit in a later letter. i am connecting a telephone receiver in the plate circuit, and also a condenser, the latter for a reason to be explained later. the combination appears then as in fig. . that figure shows a c-w transmitter and an audion detector. this is the sort of a detector we would use for radio-telephony, but the transmitter is the sort we would use for radio-telegraphy. we shall make some changes in them later. [illustration: fig ] whenever we start the oscillating current in the transmitter we get an effect in the detector circuit, of which i'll tell you more later. for the moment i am interested in showing you how the transmitter and the detector may be separated by miles and still there will be an effect in the detector circuit every time the key in the transmitter circuit is closed. this is how we do it. at the sending station, that is, wherever we locate the transmitter, we make a condenser using the earth, or ground, as one plate. we do the same thing at the receiving station where the detector circuit is located. to these condensers we connect inductances and these inductances we couple to our transmitter and receiver as shown in fig. . the upper plate of the condenser in each case is a few horizontal wires. the lower plate is the moist earth of the ground and we arrange to get in contact with that in various ways. one of the simplest methods is to connect to the water pipes of the city water-system. now we have our radio transmitting-station and a station for receiving its signals. you remember we can make dots and dashes by the key or switch in the oscillator circuit. when we depress the key we start the oscillator going. that sets up oscillations in the circuit with the inductance and the capacity formed by the antenna. if we want a real-sized stream of electrons up and down this antenna lead (the vertical wire), we must tune that circuit. that is why i have shown a variable inductance in the circuit of the transmitting antenna. what happens when these electrons surge back and forth between the horizontal wires and the ground, i don't know. i do know, however, that if we tune the antenna circuit at the receiving station there will be a small stream of electrons surging back and forth in that circuit. usually scientists explain what happens by saying that the transmitting station sends out waves in the ether and that these waves are received by the antenna system at the distant station. wherever you put up a receiving station you will get the effect. it will be much smaller, however, the farther the two stations are apart. i am not going to tell you anything about wave motion in the ether because i don't believe we know enough about the ether to try to explain, but i shall tell you what we mean by "wave length." somehow energy, the ability to do work, travels out from the sending antenna in all directions. wherever you put up your receiving station you get more or less of this energy. of course, energy is being sent out only while the key is depressed and the oscillator going. this energy travels just as fast as light, that is at the enormous speed of , miles a second. if you use meters instead of miles the speed is , , meters a second. now, how far will the energy which is sent out from the antenna travel during the time it takes for one oscillation of the current in the antenna? suppose the current is oscillating one million times a second. then it takes one-millionth of a second for one oscillation. in that time the energy will have traveled away from the antenna one-millionth part of the distance it will travel in a whole second. that is one-millionth of million meters or meters. the distance which energy will go in the time taken by one oscillation of the source of that energy is the wave length. in the case just given that distance is meters. the wave length, then, of meters corresponds to a frequency of one million. in fact if we divide million meters by the frequency we get the wave length, and that's the same rule as i gave you in the last letter. in further letters i'll tell you how the audion works as a detector and how we connect a telephone transmitter to the oscillator to make it send out energy with a speech significance instead of a mere dot and dash significance, or signal significance. we shall have to learn quite a little about the telephone itself and about the human voice. letter why and how to use a detector dear son: in the last letter we got far enough to sketch, in fig. , a radio transmitting station and a receiving station. we should never, however, use just this combination because the transmitting station is intended to send telegraph signals and the receiving station is best suited to receiving telephonic transmission. but let us see what happens. [illustration: fig ] when the key in the plate circuit of the audion at the sending station is depressed an alternating current is started. this induces an alternating current in the neighboring antenna circuit. if this antenna circuit, which is formed by a coil and a condenser, is tuned to the frequency of oscillations which are being produced in the audion circuit then there is a maximum current induced in the antenna. as soon as this starts the antenna starts to send out energy in all directions, or "radiate" energy as we say. how this energy, or ability to do work, gets across space we don't know. however it may be, it does get to the receiving station. it only takes a small fraction of a second before the antenna at the receiving station starts to receive energy, because energy travels at the rate of , miles a second. the energy which is received does its work in making the electrons in that antenna oscillate back and forth. if the receiving antenna is tuned to the frequency which the sending station is producing, then the electrons in the receiving antenna oscillate back and forth most widely and there is a maximum current in this circuit. the oscillations of the electrons in the receiving antenna induce similar oscillations in the tuned circuit which is coupled to it. this circuit also is tuned to the frequency which the distant oscillator is producing and so in it we have the maximum oscillation of the electrons. the condenser in that circuit charges and discharges alternately. the grid of the receiving audion always has the same voltage as the condenser to which it is connected and so it becomes alternately positive and negative. this state of affairs starts almost as soon as the key at the sending station is depressed and continues as long as it is held down. now what happens inside the audion? as the grid becomes more and more positive the current in the plate circuit increases. when the grid no longer grows more positive but rather becomes less and less positive the current in the plate circuit decreases. as the grid becomes of zero voltage and then negative, that is as the grid "reverses its polarity," the plate current continues to decrease. when the grid stops growing more negative and starts to become less so, the plate current stops decreasing and starts to increase. all this you know, for you have followed through such a cycle of changes before. you know also how we can use the audion characteristic to tell us what sort of changes take place in the plate current when the grid voltage changes. the plate current increases and decreases alternately, becoming greater and less than it would be if the grid were not interfering. these variations in its intensity take place very rapidly, that is with whatever high frequency the sending station operates. what happens to the plate current on the average? the plate current, you remember, is a stream of electrons from the filament to the plate (on the inside of the tube), and from the plate back through the b-battery to the filament (on the outside of the tube). the grid alternately assists and opposes that stream. when it assists, the electrons in the plate circuit are moved at a faster rate. when the grid becomes negative and opposes the plate the stream of electrons is at a slower rate. the stream is always going in the same direction but it varies in its rate depending upon the changes in grid potential. [illustration: fig ] when the grid is positive, that is for half a cycle of the alternating grid-voltage, the stream is larger than it would be if the plate current depended only on the b-battery. for the other half of a cycle it is less. the question i am raising is this: do more electrons move around the plate circuit if there is a signal coming in than when there is no incoming signal? to answer this we must look at the audion characteristic of our particular tube and this characteristic must have been taken with the same b-battery as we use when we try to receive the signals. there are just three possible answers to this question. the first answer is: "no, there is a smaller number of electrons passing through the plate circuit each second if the grid is being affected by an incoming signal." the second is: "the signal doesn't make any difference in the total number of electrons which move each second from filament to plate." and the third answer is: "yes, there is a greater total number each second." [illustration: fig ] any one of the three answers may be right. it all depends on the characteristic of the tube as we are operating it, and that depends not only upon the type and design of tube but also upon what voltages we are using in our batteries. suppose the variations in the voltage of the grid are as represented in fig. , and that the characteristic of the tube is as shown in the same figure. then obviously the first answer is correct. you can see for yourself that when the grid becomes positive the current in the plate circuit can't increase much anyway. for the other half of the cycle, that is, while the grid is negative, the current in the plate is very much decreased. the decrease in one half-cycle is larger than the increase during the other half-cycle, so that on the average the current is less when the signal is coming in. the dotted line shows the average current. suppose that we take the same tube and use a b-battery of lower voltage. the characteristic will have the same shape but there will not be as much current unless the grid helps, so that the characteristic will be like that of fig. . this characteristic crosses the axis of zero volts at a smaller number of mil-amperes than does the other because the b-batteries can't pull as hard as they did in the other case. [illustration: fig ] you can see the result. when the grid becomes positive it helps and increases the plate current. when it becomes negative it opposes and decreases the plate current. but the increase just balances the decrease, so that on the average the current is unchanged, as shown by the dotted line. on the other hand, if we use a still smaller voltage of b-battery we get a characteristic which shows a still smaller current when the grid is at zero potential. for this case, as shown in fig. , the plate current is larger on the average when there is an incoming signal. if we want to know whether or not there is any incoming signal we will not use the tube in the second condition, that of fig. , because it won't tell us anything. on the other hand why use the tube under the first conditions where we need a large plate battery? if we can get the same result, that is an indication when the other station is signalling, by using a small battery let's do it that way for batteries cost money. for that reason we shall confine ourselves to the study of what takes place under the conditions of fig. . we now know that when a signal is being sent by the distant station the current in the plate circuit of our audion at the receiving station is greater, on the average. we are ready to see what effect this has on the telephone receiver. and to do this requires a little study of how the telephone receiver works and why. [illustration: fig ] i shall not stop now to tell you much about the telephone receiver for it deserves a whole letter all to itself. you know that a magnet attracts iron. suppose you wind a coil of insulated wire around a bar magnet or put the magnet inside such a coil as in fig. . send a stream of electrons through the turns of the coil--a steady stream such as comes from the battery shown in the figure. the strength of the magnet is altered. for one direction of the electron stream through the coil the magnet is stronger. for the opposite direction of current the magnet will be weaker. [illustration: fig ] fig. shows a simple design of telephone receiver. it is formed by a bar magnet, a coil about it through which a current can flow, and a thin disc of iron. the iron disc, or diaphragm, is held at its edges so that it cannot move as a whole toward the magnet. the center can move, however, and so the diaphragm is bowed out in the form shown in the smaller sketch. now connect a battery to the receiver winding and allow a steady stream of electrons to flow. the magnet will be either strengthened or weakened. suppose the stream of electrons is in the direction to make it stronger--i'll give you the rule later. then the diaphragm is bowed out still more. if we open the battery circuit and so stop the stream of electrons the diaphragm will fly back to its original position, for it is elastic. the effect is very much that of pushing in the bottom of a tin pan and letting it fly back when you remove your hand. next reverse the battery. the magnet does not pull as hard as it would if there were no current. the diaphragm is therefore not bowed out so much. suppose that instead of reversing the current by reversing the battery we arrange to send an alternating current through the coil. that will have the same effect. for one direction of current flow, the diaphragm is attracted still more by the magnet but for the other direction it is not attracted as much. the result is that the center of the diaphragm moves back and forth during one complete cycle of the alternating current in the coil. the diaphragm vibrates back and forth in tune with the alternating current in the receiver winding. as it moves away from the magnet it pushes ahead of it the neighboring molecules of air. these molecules then crowd and push the molecules of air which are just a little further away from the diaphragm. these in turn push against those beyond them and so a push or shove is sent out by the diaphragm from molecule to molecule until perhaps it reaches your ear. when the molecules of air next your ear receive the push they in turn push against your eardrum. in the meantime what has happened? the current in the telephone receiver has reversed its direction. the diaphragm is now pulled toward the magnet and the adjacent molecules of air have even more room than they had before. so they stop crowding each other and follow the diaphragm in the other direction. the molecules of air just beyond these, on the way toward your ear, need crowd no longer and they also move back. of course, they go even farther than their old positions for there is now more room on the other side. that same thing happens all along the line until the air molecules next your ear start back and give your eardrum a chance to expand outward. as they move away they make a little vacuum there and the eardrum puffs out. that goes on over and over again just as often as the alternating current passes through one cycle of values. and you, unless you are thinking particularly of the scientific explanations, say that you "hear a musical note." as a matter of fact if we increase the frequency of the alternating current you will say that the "pitch" of the note has been increased or that you hear a note higher in the musical scale. if we started with a very low-frequency alternating current, say one of fifteen or twenty cycles per second, you wouldn't say you heard a note at all. you would hear a sort of a rumble. if we should gradually increase the frequency of the alternating current you would find that about sixty or perhaps a hundred cycles a second would give you the impression of a musical note. as the frequency is made still larger you have merely the impression of a higher-pitched note until we get up into the thousands of cycles a second. then, perhaps about twenty-thousand cycles a second, you find you hear only a little sound like wind or like steam escaping slowly from a jet or through a leak. a few thousand cycles more each second and you don't hear anything at all. you know that for radio-transmitting stations we use audion oscillators which are producing alternating currents with frequencies of several hundred-thousand cycles per second. it certainly wouldn't do any good to connect a telephone receiver in the antenna circuit at the receiving station as in fig. . we couldn't hear so high pitched a note. [illustration: fig ] even if we could, there are several reasons why the telephone receiver wouldn't work at such high frequencies. the first is that the diaphragm can't be moved so fast. it has some inertia, you know, that is, some unwillingness to get started. if you try to start it in one direction and, before you really get it going, change your mind and try to make it go in the other direction, it simply isn't going to go at all. so even if there is an alternating current in the coil around the magnet there will not be any corresponding vibration of the diaphragm if the frequency is very high, certainly not if it is above about , cycles a second. the other reason is that there will only be a very feeble current in the coil anyway, no matter what you do, if the frequency is high. you remember that the electrons in a coil are sort of banded together and each has an effect on all the others which can move in parallel paths. the result is that they have a great unwillingness to get started and an equal unwillingness to stop. their unwillingness is much more than if the wire was long and straight. it is also made very much greater by the presence of the iron core. an alternating e. m. f. of high frequency hardly gets the electrons started at all before it's time to get them going in the opposite direction. there is very little movement to the electrons and hence only a very small current in the coil if the frequency is high. if you want a rule for it you can remember that the higher the frequency of an alternating e. m. f. the smaller the electron stream which it can set oscillating in a given coil. of course, we might make the e. m. f. stronger, that is pull and shove the electrons harder, but unless the coil has a very small inductance or unless the frequency is very low we should have to use an e. m. f. of enormous strength to get any appreciable current. condensers are just the other way in their action. if there is a condenser in a circuit, where an alternating e. m. f. is active, there is lots of trouble if the frequency is low. if, however, the frequency is high the same-sized current can be maintained by a smaller e. m. f. than if the frequency is low. you see, when the frequency is high the electrons hardly get into the waiting-room of the condenser before it is time for them to turn around and go toward the other room. unless there is a large current, there are not enough electrons crowded together in the waiting-room to push back very hard on the next one to be sent along by the e. m. f. because the electrons do not push back very hard a small e. m. f. can drive them back and forth. ordinarily we say that a condenser impedes an alternating current less and less the higher is the frequency of the current. and as to inductances, we say that an inductance impedes an alternating current more and more the higher is the frequency. now we are ready to study the receiving circuit of fig. . i showed you in fig. how the current through, the tube will vary as time goes on. it increases and decreases with the frequency of the current in the antenna of the distant transmitting station. we have a picture, or graph, as we say, of how this plate current varies. it will be necessary to study that carefully and to resolve it into its components, that is to separate it into parts, which, added together again will give the whole. to show you what i mean i am going to treat first a very simple case involving money. suppose a boy was started by his father with cents of spending money. he spends that and runs cents in debt. the next day his father gives him a dollar. half of this he has to spend to pay up his yesterday's indebtedness. this he does at once and that leaves him cents ahead. but again he buys something for a dollar and so runs cents in debt. day after day this cycle is repeated. we can show what happens by the curve of fig. a. [illustration: fig a] on the other hand, suppose he already had cents which, he was saving for some special purpose. this he doesn't touch, preferring to run into debt each day and to pay up the next, as shown in fig. a. then we would represent the story of this cents by the graph of fig. b. [illustration: fig b] now suppose that instead of going in debt each day he uses part of this cents. each day after the first his father gives him a dollar, just as before. he starts then with cents as shown in fig. c, increases in wealth to $ . , then spends $ . , bringing his funds down to cents. then he receives $ . from his father and the process is repeated cyclically. [illustration: fig c] if you saw the graph of fig. c you would be able to say that, whatever he actually did, the effect was the same as if he had two pockets, in one of which he kept cents all the time as shown in fig. b. in his other pocket he either had money or he was in debt as shown in fig. a. if you did that you would be resolving the money changes of fig. c into the two components of figs. a and b. that is what i want you to do with the curve of fig. which i am reproducing here, redrawn as fig. a. you see it is really the result of adding together the two curves of figs. b and c, which are shown on the following page. [illustration: fig a] we can think, therefore, of the current in the plate circuit as if it were two currents added together, that is, two electron streams passing through the same wire. one stream is steady and the other alternates. [illustration: fig b] now look again at the diagram of our receiving set which i am reproducing as fig. . when the signal is incoming there flow in the plate circuit two streams of electrons, one steady and of a value in mil-amperes corresponding to that of the graph in fig. b, and the other alternating as shown in fig. c. the steady stream of electrons will have no more difficulty in getting through the coiled wire of the receiver than it would through the same amount of straight wire. on the other hand it cannot pass the gap of the condenser. the alternating-current component can't get along in the coil because its frequency is so high that the coil impedes the motion of the electrons so much as practically to stop them. on the other hand these electrons can easily run into the waiting-room offered by the condenser and then run out again as soon as it is time. [illustration: fig c] when the current in the plate circuit is large all the electrons which aren't needed for the steady stream through the telephone receiver run into one plate of the condenser. of course, at that same instant an equal number leave the other plate and start off toward the b-battery and the filament. an instant later, when the current in the plate circuit is small, electrons start to come out of the plate and to join the stream through the receiver so that this stream is kept steady. [illustration: fig ] this steady stream of electrons, which is passing through the receiver winding, is larger than it would be if there was no incoming radio signal. the result is a stronger pull on the diaphragm of the receiver. the moment the signal starts this diaphragm is pulled over toward the magnet and it stays pulled over as long as the signal lasts. when the signal ceases it flies back. we would hear then a click when the signal started and another when it stopped. if we wanted to distinguish dots from dashes this wouldn't be at all satisfactory. so in the next letter i'll show you what sort of changes we can make in the apparatus. to understand what effect these changes will have you need, however, to understand pretty well most of this letter. letter radio-telephony dear lad: before we start on the important subject matter of this letter let us make a short review of the preceding two letters. an oscillating audion at the transmitting station produces an effect on the plate current of the detector audion at the receiving station. there is impressed upon the grid of the detector an alternating e. m. f. which has the same frequency as the alternating current which is being produced at the sending station. while this e. m. f. is active, and of course it is active only while the sending key is held down, there is more current through the winding of the telephone receiver and its diaphragm is consequently pulled closer to its magnet. what will happen if the e. m. f. which is active on the grid of the detector is made stronger or weaker? the pull on the receiver diaphragm will be stronger or weaker and the diaphragm will have to move accordingly. if the pull is weaker the elasticity of the iron will move the diaphragm away from the magnet, but if the pull is stronger the diaphragm will be moved toward the magnet. every time the diaphragm moves it affects the air in the immediate neighborhood of itself and that air in turn affects the air farther away and so the ear of the listener. therefore if there are changes in the intensity or strength of the incoming signal there are going to be corresponding motions of the receiver diaphragm. and something to listen, too, if these changes are frequent enough but not so frequent that the receiver diaphragm has difficulty in following them. there are many ways of affecting the strength of the incoming signal. suppose, for example, that we arrange to decrease the current in the antenna of the transmitting station. that will mean a weaker signal and a smaller increase in current through the winding of the telephone receiver at the other station. on the other hand if the signal strength is increased there is more current in this winding. [illustration: fig ] suppose we connect a fine wire in the antenna circuit as in fig. and have a sliding contact as shown. suppose that when we depress the switch in the oscillator circuit and so start the oscillations that the sliding contact is at _o_ as shown. corresponding to that strength of signal there is a certain value of current through the receiver winding at the other station. now let us move the slider, first to _a_ and then back to _b_ and so on, back and forth. you see what will happen. we alternately make the current in the antenna larger and smaller than it originally was. when the slider is at _b_ there is more of the fine wire in series with the antenna, hence more resistance to the oscillations of the electrons, and hence a smaller oscillating stream of electrons. that means a weaker outgoing signal. when the slider is at _a_ there is less resistance in the antenna circuit and a larger alternating current. [illustration: fig ] [illustration: fig ] a picture of what happens would be like that of fig. . the signal varies in intensity, therefore, becoming larger and smaller alternately. that means the voltage impressed on the grid of the detector is alternately larger and smaller. and hence the stream of electrons through the winding of the telephone receiver is alternately larger and smaller. and that means that the diaphragm moves back and forth in just the time it takes to move the slider back and forth. instead of the slider we might use a little cup almost full of grains of carbon. the carbon grains lie between two flat discs of carbon. one of these discs is held fixed. the other is connected to the center of a thin diaphragm of steel and moves back and forth as this diaphragm is moved. the whole thing makes a telephone transmitter such as you have often talked to. [illustration: fig a] wires connect to the carbon discs as shown in fig. . a stream of electrons can flow through the wires and from grain to grain through the "carbon button," as we call it. the electrons have less difficulty if the grains are compressed, that is the button then offers less resistance to the flow of current. if the diaphragm moves back, allowing the grains to have more room, the electron stream is smaller and we say the button is offering more resistance to the current. [illustration: fig b] you can see what happens. suppose some one talks into the transmitter and makes its diaphragm go back and forth as shown in fig. a. then the current in the antenna varies, being greater or less, depending upon whether the button offers less or more resistance. the corresponding variations in the antenna current are shown in fig. b. in the antenna at the receiving station there are corresponding variations in the strength of the signal and hence corresponding variations in the strength of the current through the telephone receiver. i shall show graphically what happens in fig. . you see that the telephone receiver diaphragm does just the same motions as does the transmitter diaphragm. that means that the molecules of air near the receiver diaphragm are going through just the same kind of motions as are those near the transmitter diaphragm. when these air molecules affect your eardrum you hear just what you would have heard if you had been right there beside the transmitter. that's one way of making a radio-telephone. it is not a very efficient method but it has been used in the past. before we look at any of the more recent methods we can draw some general ideas from this method and learn some words that are used almost always in speaking of radio-telephones. in any system of radio-telephony you will always find that there is produced at the transmitting station a high-frequency alternating current and that this current flows in a tuned circuit one part of which is the condenser formed by the antenna and the ground (or something which acts like a ground). this high-frequency current, or radio-current, as we usually say, is varied in its strength. it is varied in conformity with the human voice. if the human voice speaking into the transmitter is low pitched there are slow variations in the intensity of the radio current. if the voice is high pitched there are more rapid variations in the strength of the radio-frequency current. that is why we say the radio-current is "modulated" by the human voice. [illustration: fig ] the signal which radiates out from the transmitting antenna carries all the little variations in pitch and loudness of the human voice. when this signal reaches the distant antenna it establishes in that antenna circuit a current of high frequency which has just the same variations as did the current in the antenna at the sending station. the human voice isn't there. it is not transmitted. it did its work at the sending station by modulating the radio-signal, "modulating the carrier current," as we sometimes say. but there is speech significance hidden in the variations in strength of the received signal. if a telephone-receiver diaphragm can be made to vibrate in accordance with the variations in signal intensity then the air adjacent to that diaphragm will be set into vibration and these vibrations will be just like those which the human voice set up in the air molecules near the mouth of the speaker. all the different systems of receiving radio-telephone signals are merely different methods of getting a current which will affect the telephone receiver in conformity with the variations in signal strength. getting such a current is called "detecting." there are many different kinds of detectors but the vacuum tube is much to be preferred. the cheapest detector, but not the most sensitive, is the crystal. if you understand how the audion works as a detector you will have no difficulty in understanding the crystal detector. the crystal detector consists of some mineral crystal and a fine-wire point, usually platinum. crystals are peculiar things. like everything else they are made of molecules and these molecules of atoms. the atoms are made of electrons grouped around nuclei which, in turn, are formed by close groupings of protons and electrons. the great difference between crystals and substances which are not crystalline, that is, substances which don't have a special natural shape, is this: in crystals the molecules and atoms are all arranged in some orderly manner. in other substances, substances without special form, amorphous substances, as we call them, the molecules are just grouped together in a haphazard way. [illustration: fig ] for some crystals we know very closely indeed how their molecules or rather their individual atoms are arranged. sometime you may wish to read how this was found out by the use of x-rays.[ ] take the crystal of common salt for example. that is well known. each molecule of salt is formed by an atom of sodium and one of chlorine. in a crystal of salt the molecules are grouped together so that a sodium atom always has chlorine atoms on every side of it, and the other way around, of course. suppose you took a lot of wood dumb-bells and painted one of the balls of each dumb-bell black to stand for a sodium atom, leaving the other unpainted to stand for a chlorine atom. now try to pile them up so that above and below each black ball, to the right and left of it, and also in front and behind it, there shall be a white ball. the pile which you would probably get would look like that of fig. . i have omitted the gripping part of each dumbell because i don't believe it is there. in my picture each circle represents the nucleus of an atom. i haven't attempted to show the planetary electrons. other crystals have more complex arrangements for piling up their molecules. now suppose we put two different kinds of substances close together, that is, make contact between them. how their electrons will behave will depend entirely upon what the atoms are and how they are piled up. some very curious effects can be obtained. [illustration: fig ] the one which interests us at present is that across the contact points of some combinations of substances it is easier to get a stream of electrons to flow one way than the other. the contact doesn't have the same resistance in the two directions. usually also the resistance depends upon what voltage we are applying to force the electron stream across the point of contact. the one way to find out is to take the voltage-current characteristic of the combination. to do so we use the same general method as we did for the audion. and when we get through we plot another curve and call it, for example, a "platinum-galena characteristic." fig. shows the set-up for making the measurements. there is a group of batteries arranged so that we can vary the e. m. f. applied across the contact point of the crystal and platinum. a voltmeter shows the value of this e. m. f. and an ammeter tells the strength of the electron stream. each time we move the slider we get a new pair of values for volts and amperes. as a matter of fact we don't get amperes or even mil-amperes; we get millionths of an ampere or "microamperes," as we say. we can plot the pairs of values which we measure and make a curve like that of fig. . [illustration: fig ] when the voltage across the contact is reversed, of course, the current reverses. part of the curve looks something like the lower part of an audion characteristic. [illustration: fig ] now connect this crystal in a receiving circuit as in fig. . we use an antenna just as we did for the audion and we tune the antenna circuit to the frequency of the incoming signal. the receiving circuit is coupled to the antenna circuit and is tuned to the same frequency. whatever voltage there may be across the condenser of this circuit is applied to the crystal detector. we haven't put the telephone receiver in the circuit yet. i want to wait until you have seen what the crystal does when an alternating voltage is applied to it. [illustration: fig ] we can draw a familiar form of sketch as in fig. to show how the current in the crystal varies. you see that there flows through the crystal a current very much like that of fig. a. and you know that such a current is really equivalent to two electron streams, one steady and the other alternating. the crystal detector gives us much the same sort of a current as does the vacuum tube detector of fig. . the current isn't anywhere near as large, however, for it is microamperes instead of mil-amperes. our crystal detector produces the same results so far as giving us a steady component of current to send through a telephone receiver. so we can connect a receiver in series with the crystal as shown in fig. . because the receiver would offer a large impedance to the high-frequency current, that is, seriously impede and so reduce the high-frequency current, we connect a condenser around the receiver. [illustration: fig ] there is a simple crystal detector circuit. if the signal intensity varies then the current which passes through the receiver will vary. if these variations are caused by a human voice at the sending station the crystal will permit one to hear from the telephone receiver what the speaker is saying. that is just what the audion detector does very many times better. in the letter on how to experiment you'll find details as to the construction of a crystal-detector set. excellent instructions for an inexpensive set are contained in bull. no. of the bureau of standards. a copy can be obtained by sending ten cents to the commissioner of public documents, washington, d. c. [footnote : cf. "within the atom," chapter x.] letter the human voice dear sir: the radio-telephone does not transmit the human voice. it reproduces near the ears of the listener similar motions of the air molecules and hence causes in the ears of the listener the same sensations of sound as if he were listening directly to the speaker. this reproduction takes place almost instantaneously so great is the speed with which the electrical effects travel outward from the sending antenna. if you wish to understand radio-telephony you must know something of the mechanism by which the voice is produced and something of the peculiar or characteristic properties of voice sounds. [illustration: fig ] the human voice is produced by a sort of organ pipe. imagine a long pipe connected at one end to a pair of fire-bellows, and closed at the other end by two stretched sheets of rubber. fig. is a sketch of what i mean. corresponding to the bellows there is the human diaphragm, the muscular membrane separating the thorax and abdomen, which expands or contracts as one breathes. corresponding to the pipe is the windpipe. corresponding to the two stretched pieces of rubber are the vocal cords, l and r, shown in cross section in fig. . they are part of the larynx and do not show in fig. (pl. viii) which shows the wind pipe and an outside view of the larynx. [illustration: fig ] when the sides of the bellows are squeezed together the air molecules within are crowded closer together and the air is compressed. the greater the compression the greater, of course, is the pressure with which the enclosed air seeks to escape. that it can do only by lifting up, that is by blowing out, the two elastic strips which close the end of the pipe. the air pressure, therefore, rises until it is sufficient to push aside the elastic membranes or vocal cords and thus to permit some of the air to escape. it doesn't force the membranes far apart, just enough to let some air out. but the moment some air has escaped there isn't so much inside and the pressure is reduced just as in the case of an automobile tire from which you let the air escape. what is the result? the membranes fly back again and close the opening of the pipe. what got out, then, was just a little puff of air. the bellows are working all the while, however, and so the space available for the remaining air soon again becomes so crowded with air molecules that the pressure is again sufficient to open the membranes. another puff of air escapes. this happens over and over again while one is speaking or singing. hundreds of times a second the vocal cords vibrate back and forth. the frequency with which they do so determines the note or pitch of the speaker's voice. what determines the significance of the sounds which he utters? this is a most interesting question and one deserving of much more time than i propose to devote to it. to give you enough of an answer for your study of radio-telephony i am going to tell you first about vibrating strings for they are easier to picture than membranes like the vocal cords. suppose you have a stretched string, a piece of rubber band or a wire will do. you pluck it, that is pull it to one side. when you let go it flies back. because it has inertia[ ] it doesn't stop when it gets to its old position but goes on through until it bows out almost as far on the other side. [illustration: pl. vii.--photographs of vibrating strings.] it took some work to pluck this string, not much perhaps; but all the work which you did in deforming it, goes to the string and becomes its energy, its ability to do work. this work it does in pushing the air molecules ahead of it as it vibrates. in this way it uses up its energy and so finally comes again to rest. its vibrations "damp out," as we say, that is die down. each swing carries it a smaller distance away from its original position. we say that the "amplitude," meaning the size, of its vibration decreases. the frequency does not. it takes just as long for a small-sized vibration as for the larger. of course, for the vibration of large amplitude the string must move faster but it has to move farther so that the time required for a vibration is not changed. first the string crowds against each other the air molecules which are in its way and so leads to crowding further away, just as fast as these molecules can pass along the shove they are receiving. that takes place at the rate of about feet a second. when the string swings back it pushes away the molecules which are behind it and so lets those that were being crowded follow it. you know that they will. air molecules will always go where there is the least crowding. following the shove, therefore, there is a chance for the molecules to move back and even to occupy more room than they had originally. the news of this travels out from the string just as fast as did the news of the crowding. as fast as molecules are able they move back and so make more room for their neighbors who are farther away; and these in turn move back. do you want a picture of it? imagine a great crowd of people and at the center some one with authority. the crowd is the molecules of air and the one with authority is one of the molecules of the string which has energy. whatever this molecule of the string says is repeated by each member of the crowd to his neighbor next farther away. first the string says: "go back" and each molecule acts as soon as he gets the word. and then the string says: "come on" and each molecule of air obeys as soon as the command reaches him. over and over this happens, as many times a second as the string makes complete vibrations. [illustration: fig ] if we should make a picture of the various positions of one of these air molecules much as we pictured "brownie" in letter it would appear as in fig. a where the central line represents the ordinary position of the molecule. that's exactly the picture also of the successive positions of an electron in a circuit which is "carrying an alternating current." first it moves in one direction along the wire and then back in the opposite direction. the electron next to it does the same thing almost immediately for it does not take anywhere near as long for such an effect to pass through a crowd of electrons. if we make the string vibrate twice as fast, that is, have twice the frequency, the story of an adjacent particle of air will be as in fig. b. unless we tighten the string, however, we can't make it vibrate as a whole and do it twice as fast. we can make it vibrate in two parts or even in more parts, as shown in fig. of pl. vii. when it vibrates as a whole, its frequency is the lowest possible, the fundamental frequency as we say. when it vibrates in two parts each part of the string makes twice as many vibrations each second. so do the adjacent molecules of air and so does the eardrum of a listener. the result is that the listener hears a note of twice the frequency that he did when the string was vibrating as a whole. he says he hears the "octave" of the note he heard first. if the string vibrates in three parts and gives a note of three times the frequency the listener hears a note two octaves above the "fundamental note" of which the string is capable. it is entirely possible, however, for a string to vibrate simultaneously in a number of ways and so to give not only its fundamental note but several others at the same time. the photographs[ ] of fig. of pl. vii illustrate this possibility. what happens then to the molecules of air which are adjacent to the vibrating string? they must perform quite complex vibrations for they are called upon to move back and forth just as if there were several strings all trying to push them with different frequencies of vibration. look again at the pictures, of fig. and see that each might just as well be the picture of several strings placed close together, each vibrating in a different way. each of the strings has a different frequency of vibration and a different maximum amplitude, that is, greatest size of swing away from its straight position. [illustration: fig ] suppose instead of a single string acting upon the adjacent molecules we had three strings. suppose the first would make a nearby molecule move as in fig. a, the second as in fig. b, and the third as in fig. c. it is quite evident that the molecule can satisfy all three if it will vibrate as in fig. d. now take it the other way around. suppose we had a picture of the motion of a molecule and that it was not simple like those shown in fig. but was complex like that of fig. d. we could say that this complex motion was made up of three parts, that is, had three component simple motions, each represented by one of the three other graphs of fig. . that means we can resolve any complex vibratory motion into component motions which are simple. it means more than that. it means that the vibrating string which makes the neighboring molecules of air behave as shown in fig. d is really acting like three strings and is producing simultaneously three pure musical notes. now suppose we had two different strings, say a piano string in the piano and a violin string on its proper mounting. suppose we played both instruments and some musician told us they were in tune. what would he mean? he would mean that both strings vibrated with the same fundamental frequency. they differ, however, in the other notes which they produce at the same time that they produce their fundamental notes. that is, they differ in the frequencies and amplitudes of these other component vibrations or "overtones" which are going on at the same time as their fundamental vibrations. it is this difference which lets us tell at once which instrument is being played. that brings us to the main idea about musical sounds and about human speech. the pitch of any complex sound is the pitch of its fundamental or lowest sound; but the character of the complex sound depends upon all the overtones or "harmonics" which are being produced and upon their relative frequencies and amplitudes. [illustration: fig ] the organ pipe which ends in the larynx produces a very complex sound. i can't show you how complex but i'll show you in fig. the complicated motion of an air molecule which is vibrating as the result of being near an organ pipe. (organ pipes differ--this is only one case.) you can see that there are a large number of pure notes of various intensities, that is, strengths, which go to make up the sound which a listener to this organ pipe would hear. the note from the human pipe is much more complex. when one speaks there are little puffs of air escaping from his larynx. the vocal cords vibrate as i explained. and the molecules of air near the larynx are set into very complex vibrations. these transmit their vibrations to other molecules until those in the mouth are reached. in the mouth, however, something very important happens. did you ever sing or howl down a rain barrel or into a long pipe or hallway and hear the sound? it sounds just about the same no matter who does it. the reason is that the long column of air in the pipe or barrel is set into vibration and vibrates according to its own ideas of how fast to do it. it has a "natural frequency" of its own. if in your voice there is a note of just that frequency it will respond beautifully. in fact it "resonates," or sings back, when it hears this note. the net result is that it emphasizes this note so much that you don't hear any of the other component notes of your voice--all you hear is the rain barrel. we say it reinforces one of the component notes of your voice and makes it louder. that same thing happens in the mouth cavity of a speaker. the size and shape of the column of air in the mouth can be varied by the tongue and lip positions and so there are many different possibilities of resonance. depending on lip and tongue, different frequencies of the complex sound which comes from the larynx are reinforced. you can see that for yourself from fig. which shows the tongue positions for three different vowel sounds. you can see also from fig. , which shows the mouth positions for the different vowels, how the size and shape of the mouth cavity is changed to give different sounds. these figures are in pl. viii. the pitch of the note need not change as every singer knows. you can try that also for yourself by singing the vowel sound of "ahh" and then changing the shape of your mouth so as to give the sound "ah--aw--ow--ou." the pitch of the note will not change because the fundamental stays the same. the speech significance of the sound, however, changes completely because the mouth cavity resonates to different ones of the higher notes which come from the larynx along with the fundamental note. now you can see what is necessary for telephonic transmission. each and every component note which enters into human speech must be transmitted and accurately reproduced by the receiver. more than that, all the proportions must be kept just the same as in the original spoken sound. we usually say that there must be reproduced in the air at the receiver exactly the same "wave form" as is present in the air at the transmitter. if that isn't done the speech won't be natural and one cannot recognize voices although he may understand pretty well. if there is too much "distortion" of the wave form, that is if the relative intensities of the component notes of the voice are too much altered, then there may even be a loss of intelligibility so that the listener cannot understand what is being said. what particular notes are in the human voice depends partly on the person who is speaking. you know that the fundamental of a bass voice is lower than that of a soprano. besides the fundamental, however, there are a lot of higher notes always present. this is particularly true when the spoken sound is a consonant, like "s" or "f" or "v." the particular notes, which are present and are important, depend upon what sound one is saying. usually, however, we find that if we can transmit and reproduce exactly all the notes which lie between a frequency of about cycles a second and one of about cycles a second the reproduced speech will be quite natural and very intelligible. for singing and for transmitting instrumental music it is necessary to transmit and reproduce still higher notes. what you will have to look out for, therefore, in a receiving set is that it does not cut out some of the high notes which are necessary to give the sound its naturalness. you will also have to make sure that your apparatus does not distort, that is, does not receive and reproduce some notes or "voice frequencies" more efficiently than it does some others which are equally necessary. for that reason when you buy a transformer or a telephone receiver it is well to ask for a characteristic curve of the apparatus which will show how the action varies as the frequency of the current is varied. the action or response should, of course, be practically the same at all the frequencies within the necessary part of the voice range. [footnote : cf. chap. vi of "the realities of modern science."] [footnote : my thanks are due to professor d. c. miller and to the macmillan company for permission to reproduce figs. to inclusive from that interesting book, "the science of musical sounds."] letter grid batteries and grid condensers for detectors dear son: you remember the audion characteristics which i used in figs. , and of letter to show you how an incoming signal will affect the current in the plate circuit. look again at these figures and you will see that these characteristics all had the same general shape but that they differed in their positions with reference to the "main streets" of "zero volts" on the grid and "zero mil-amperes" in the plate circuit. changing the voltage of the b-battery in the plate circuit changed the position of the characteristic. we might say that changing the b-battery shifted the curve with reference to the axis of zero volts on the grid. [illustration: fig ] [illustration: fig ] in the case of the three characteristics which we are discussing the shift was made by changing the b-battery. increasing b-voltage shifts characteristic to the left. it is possible, however, to produce such a shift by using a c-battery, that is, a battery in the grid circuit, which makes the grid permanently negative (or positive, depending upon how it is connected). this battery either helps or hinders the plate battery, and because of the strategic position of the grid right near the filament one volt applied to the grid produces as large an effect as would several volts in the plate battery. usually, therefore, we arrange to shift the characteristic by using a c-battery. [illustration: fig ] suppose for example that we had an audion in the receiving circuit of fig. and that its characteristic under these conditions is given by fig. . i've redrawn the figures to save your turning back. the audion will not act as a detector because an incoming signal will not change the average value of the current in the plate circuit. if, however, we connect a c-battery so as to make the grid negative, we can shift this characteristic so that the incoming signal will be detected. we have only to make the grid sufficiently negative to reduce the plate current to the value shown by the line _oa_ in fig. . then the signal will be detected because, while it makes the plate current alternately larger and smaller than this value _oa_, it will result, on the average, in a higher value of the plate current. [illustration: fig ] you see that what we have done is to arrange the point on the audion characteristic about which the tube is to work by properly choosing the value of the grid voltage _e_{c}_. there is an important method of using an audion for a detector where we arrange to have the grid voltage change steadily, getting more and more negative all the time the signal is coming in. before i tell how it is done i want to show you what will happen. suppose we start with an audion detector, for which the characteristic is that of fig. , but arranged as in fig. to give the grid any potential which we wish. the batteries and slide wire resistance which are connected in the grid circuit are already familiar to you. when the slider is set as shown in fig. the grid is at zero potential and we are at the point of the characteristic shown in fig. . now imagine an incoming signal, as shown in that same figure, but suppose that as soon as the signal has stopped making the grid positive we shift the slider a little so that the c-battery makes the grid slightly negative. we have shifted the point on the characteristic about which the tube is being worked by the incoming signal from point to point . [illustration: fig ] every time the incoming signal makes one complete cycle of changes we shift the slider a little further and make the grid permanently more negative. you can see what happens. as the grid becomes more negative the current in the plate circuit decreases on the average. finally, of course, the grid will become so negative that the current in the plate circuit will be reduced to zero. under these conditions an incoming signal finally makes a large change in the plate current and hence in the current through the telephone. the method of shifting a slider along, every time the incoming signal makes a complete cycle, is impossible to accomplish by hand if the frequency of the signal is high. it can be done automatically, however, no matter how high the frequency if we use a condenser in the grid circuit as shown in fig. . [illustration: fig ] when the incoming signal starts a stream of electrons through the coil _l_ of fig. and draws them away from plate of the condenser _c_ it is also drawing electrons away from the plate of the condenser _c_{g}_ which is in series with the grid. as electrons leave plate of this condenser others rush away from the grid and enter plate . this means that the grid doesn't have its ordinary number of electrons and so is positive. if the grid is positive it will be pleased to get electrons; and it can do so at once, for there are lots of electrons streaming past it on their way to the plate. while the grid is positive, therefore, there is a stream of electrons to it from the filament. fig. shows this current. all this takes place during the first half-cycle of the incoming signal. during the next half-cycle electrons are sent into plate of the condenser _c_ and also into plate of the grid condenser _c_{g}_. as electrons are forced into plate of the grid condenser those in plate of that condenser have to leave and go back to the grid where they came from. that is all right, but while they were away the grid got some electrons from the filament to take their places. the result is that the grid has now too many electrons, that is, it is negatively charged. [illustration: fig ] an instant later the signal e. m. f. reverses and calls electrons away from plate of the grid condenser. again electrons from the grid rush into plate and again the grid is left without its proper number and so is positive. again it receives electrons from the filament. the result is still more electrons in the part of the grid circuit which is formed by the grid, the plate of the grid condenser and the connecting wire. these electrons can't get across the gap of the condenser _c_{g}_ and they can't go back to the filament any other way. so there they are, trapped. finally there are so many of these trapped electrons that the grid is so negative all the time as almost entirely to oppose the efforts of the plate to draw electrons away from the filament. [illustration: pl. viii.--to illustrate the mechanism for the production of the human voice.] then the plate current is reduced practically to zero. that's the way to arrange an audion so that the incoming signal makes the largest possible change in plate current. we can tell if there is an incoming signal because it will "block" the tube, as we say. the plate-circuit current will be changed from its ordinary value to almost zero in the short time it takes for a few cycles of the incoming signal. we can detect one signal that way, but only one because the first signal makes the grid permanently negative and blocks the tube so that there isn't any current in the plate circuit and can't be any. if we want to put the tube in condition to receive another signal we must allow these electrons, which originally came from the filament, to get out of their trapped position and go back to the filament. [illustration: fig ] to do so we connect a very fine wire between plates and of the grid condenser. we call that wire a "grid-condenser leak" because it lets the electrons slip around past the gap. by using a very high resistance, we can make it so hard for the electrons to get around the gap that not many will do so while the signal is coming in. in that case we can leave the leak permanently across the condenser as shown in fig. . of course, the leak must offer so easy a path for the electrons that all the trapped electrons can get home between one incoming signal and the next. one way of making a high resistance like this is to draw a heavy pencil line on a piece of paper, or better a line with india ink, that is ink made of fine ground particles of carbon. the leak should have a very high resistance, usually one or two million ohms if the condenser is about . microfarad. if it has a million ohms we say it has a "megohm" of resistance. this method of detecting with a leaky grid-condenser and an audion is very efficient so far as telling the listener whether or not a signal is coming into his set. it is widely used in receiving radio-telephone signals although it is best adapted to receiving the telegraph signals from a spark set. i don't propose to stop to tell you how a spark-set transmitter works. it is sufficient to say that when the key is depressed the set sends out radio signals at the rate usually of signals a second. every time a signal reaches the receiving station the current in the telephone receiver is sudden reduced; and in the time between signals the leak across the grid condenser brings the tube back to a condition where it can receive the next signal. while the sending key is depressed the current in the receiver is decreasing and increasing once for every signal which is being transmitted. for each decrease and increase in current the diaphragm of the telephone receiver makes one vibration. what the listener then hears is a musical note with a frequency corresponding to that number of vibrations a second, that is, a note with a frequency of one thousand cycles per second. he hears a note of frequency about that of two octaves above middle _c_ on the piano. there are usually other notes present at the same time and the sound is not like that of any musical instrument. [illustration: fig ] if the key is held down a long time for a dash the listener hears this note for a corresponding time. if it is depressed only about a third of that time so as to send a dot, the listener hears the note for a shorter time and interprets it to mean a dot. in fig. i have drawn a sketch to show the e. m. f. which the signals from a spark set impress on the grid of a detector and to show how the plate current varies if there is a condenser and leak in the grid circuit. i have only shown three signals in succession. if the operator sends at the rate of about twenty words a minute a dot is formed by about sixty of these signals in succession. the frequency of the alternations in one of the little signals will depend upon the wave length which the sending operator is using. if he uses the wave length of meters, as ship stations do, he will send with a radio frequency of , cycles a second. since the signals are at the rate of a thousand a second each one is made up of complete cycles of the current in the antenna. it would be impracticable therefore to show you a complete picture of the signal from a spark set. i have, however, lettered the figure quite completely to cover what i have just told you. if the grid-condenser and its leak are so chosen as to work well for signals from a -cycle spark set they will also work well for the notes in human speech which are about cycles a second in frequency. the detecting circuit will not, however, work so well for the other notes which are in the human voice and are necessary to speech. for example, if notes of about cycles a second are involved in the speech which is being transmitted, the leak across the condenser will not work fast enough. on the other hand, for the very lowest notes in the voice the leak will work too fast and such variations in the signal current will not be detected as efficiently as are those of cycles a second. you can see that there is always a little favoritism on the part of the grid-condenser detector. it doesn't exactly reproduce the variations in intensity of the radio signal which were made at the sending station. it distorts a little. as amateurs we usually forgive it that distortion because it is so efficient. it makes so large a change in the current through the telephone when it receives a signal that we can use it to receive much weaker signals, that is, signals from smaller or more distant sending stations, than we can receive with the arrangement described in letter . letter amplifiers and the regenerative circuit my dear receiver: there is one way of making an audion even more efficient as a detector than the method described in the last letter. and that is to make it talk to itself. suppose we arrange a receiving circuit as in fig. . it is exactly like that of fig. of the previous letter except for the fact that the current in the plate circuit passes through a little coil, _l_{t}_, which is placed near the coil _l_ and so can induce in it an e. m. f. which will correspond in intensity and wave form to the current in the plate circuit. if we should take out the grid condenser and its leak this circuit would be like that of fig. in letter which we used for a generator of high-frequency alternating currents. you remember how that circuit operates. a small effect in the grid circuit produces a large effect in the plate circuit. because the plate circuit is coupled to the grid circuit the grid is again affected and so there is a still larger effect in the plate circuit. and so on, until the current in the plate circuit is swinging from zero to its maximum possible value. what happens depends upon how closely the coils _l_ and _l_{t}_ are coupled, that is, upon how much the changing current in one can affect the other. if they are turned at right angles to each other, so that there is no possible mutual effect we say there is "zero coupling." start with the coils at right angles to each other and turn _l_{t}_ so as to bring its windings more and more parallel to those of _l_. if we want _l_{t}_ to have a large effect on _l_ its windings should be parallel and also in the same direction just as they were in fig. of letter to which we just referred. as we approach nearer to that position the current in _l_{t}_ induces more and more e. m. f. in coil _l_. for some position of the two coils, and the actual position depends on the tube we are using, there will be enough effect from the plate circuit upon the grid circuit so that there will be continuous oscillations. [illustration: fig ] we want to stop just short of this position. there will then be no continuous oscillations; but if any changes do take place in the plate current they will affect the grid. and these changes in the grid voltage will result in still larger changes in the plate current. now suppose that there is coming into the detector circuit of fig. a radio signal with, speech significance. the current in the plate circuit varies accordingly. so does the current in coil _l_{t}_ which is in the plate circuit. but this current induces an e. m. f. in coil _l_ and this adds to the e. m. f. of the incoming signal so as to make a greater variation in the plate current. this goes on as long as there is an incoming signal. because the plate circuit is coupled to the grid circuit the result is a larger e. m. f. in the grid circuit than the incoming signal could set up all by itself. you see now why i said the tube talked to itself. it repeats to itself whatever it receives. it has a greater strength of signal to detect than if it didn't repeat. of course, it detects also just as i told you in the preceding letter. in adjusting the coupling of the two coils of fig. we stopped short of allowing the tube circuit to oscillate and to generate a high frequency. if we had gone on increasing the coupling we should have reached a position where steady oscillations would begin. usually this is marked by a little click in the receiver. the reason is that when the tube oscillates the average current in the plate circuit is not the same as the steady current which ordinarily flows between filament and plate. there is a sudden change, therefore, in the average current in the plate circuit when the tube starts to oscillate. you remember that what affects the receiver is the average current in the plate circuit. so the receiver diaphragm suddenly changes position as the tube starts to oscillate and a listener hears a little click. the frequency of the alternating current which the tube produces depends upon the tuned circuit formed by _l_ and _c_. suppose that this frequency is not the same as that to which the receiving antenna is tuned. what will happen? there will be impressed on the grid of the tube two alternating e. m. f.'s, one due to the tube's own oscillations and the other incoming from the distant transmitting station. the two e. m. f. 's are both active at once so that at each instant the e. m. f. of the grid is really the sum of these two e. m. f.'s. suppose at some instant both e. m. f.'s are acting to make the grid positive. a little later one of them will be trying to make the grid negative while the other is still trying to make it positive. and later still when the first e. m. f. is ready again to make the grid positive the second will be trying to make it negative. it's like two men walking along together but with different lengths of step. even if they start together with their left feet they are soon so completely out of step that one is putting down his right foot while the other is putting down his left. a little later, but just for an instant, they are in step again. and so it goes. they are in step for a moment and then completely out of step. suppose one of them makes ten steps in the time that the other makes nine. in that time they will be once in step and once completely out of step. if one makes ten steps while the other does eight this will happen twice. the same thing happens in the audion detector circuit when two e. m. f.'s which differ slightly in frequency are simultaneously impressed on the grid. if one e. m. f. passes through ten complete cycles while the other is making eight cycles, then during that time they will twice be exactly in step, that is, "in phase" as we say. twice in that time they will be exactly out of step, that is, exactly "opposite in phase." twice in that time the two e. m. f.'s will aid each other in their effects on the grid and twice they will exactly oppose. unless they are equal in amplitude there will still be a net e. m. f. even when they are exactly opposed. the result of all this is that the average current in the plate circuit of the detector will alternately increase and decrease twice during this time. the listener will then hear a note of a frequency equal to the difference between the frequencies of the two e. m. f.'s which are being simultaneously impressed on the grid of the detector. suppose the incoming signal has a frequency of , cycles a second but that the detector tube is oscillating in its own circuit at the rate of , cycles per second, then the listener will hear a note of cycles per second. one thousand times each second the two e. m. f.'s will be exactly in phase and one thousand times each second they will be exactly opposite in phase. the voltage applied to the grid will be a maximum one thousand times a second and alternately a minimum. we can think of it, then, as if there were impressed on the grid of the detector a high-frequency signal which varied in intensity one thousand times a second. this we know will produce a corresponding variation in the current through the telephone receiver and thus give rise to a musical note of about two octaves above middle _c_ on the piano. this circuit of fig. will let us detect signals which are not varying in intensity. and consequently this is the method which we use to detect the telegraph signals which are sent out by such a "continuous wave transmitter" as i showed you at the end of letter . when the key of a c-w transmitter is depressed there is set up in the distant receiving-antenna an alternating current. this current doesn't vary in strength. it is there as long as the sender has his key down. because, however, of the effect which i described above there will be an audible note from the telephone receiver if the detector tube is oscillating at a frequency within two or three thousand cycles of that of the transmitting station. this method of receiving continuous wave signals is called the "heterodyne" method. the name comes from two greek words, "dyne" meaning "force" and the other part meaning "different." we receive by combining two different electron-moving-forces, one produced by the distant sending-station and the other produced locally at the receiving station. neither by itself will produce any sound, except a click when it starts. both together produce a musical sound in the telephone receiver; and the frequency of that note is the difference of the two frequencies. there are a number of words used to describe this circuit with some of which you should be familiar. it is sometimes called a "feed-back" circuit because part of the output of the audion is fed back into its input side. more generally it is known as the "regenerative circuit" because the tube keeps on generating an alternating current. the little coil which is used to feed back into the grid circuit some of the effects from the plate circuit is sometimes called a "tickler" coil. it is not necessary to use a grid condenser in a feed-back circuit but it is perhaps the usual method of detecting where the regenerative circuit is used. the whole value of the regenerative circuit so far as receiving is concerned is in the high efficiency which it permits. one tube can do the work of two. we can get just as loud signals by using another tube instead of making one do all the work. in the regenerative circuit the tube is performing two jobs at once. it is detecting but it is also amplifying.[ ] by "amplifying" we mean making an e. m. f. larger than it is without changing the shape of its picture, that is without changing its "wave form." to show just what we mean by amplifying we must look again at the audion and see how it acts. you know that a change in the grid potential makes a change in the plate current. let us arrange an audion in a circuit which will tell us a little more of what happens. fig. shows the circuit. this circuit is the same as we used to find the audion characteristic except that there is a clip for varying the number of batteries in the plate circuit and a voltmeter for measuring their e. m. f. we start with the grid at zero potential and the usual number of batteries in the plate circuit. the voltmeter tells us the e. m. f. we read the ammeter in the plate circuit and note what that current is. then we shift the slider in the grid circuit so as to give the grid a small potential. the current in the plate circuit changes. we can now move the clip on the b-batteries so as to bring the current in this circuit back to its original value. of course, if we make the grid positive we move the clip so as to use fewer cells of the b-battery. on the other hand if we make the grid negative we shall need more e. m. f. in the plate circuit. in either case we shall find that we need to make a very much larger change in the voltage of the plate circuit than we have made in the voltage of the grid circuit. [illustration: fig ] usually we perform the experiment a little differently so as to get more accurate results. we read the voltmeter in the plate circuit and the ammeter in that circuit. then we change the number of batteries which we are using in the plate circuit. that changes the plate current. the next step is to shift the slider in the grid circuit until we have again the original value of current in the plate circuit. suppose that the tube is ordinarily run with a plate voltage of volts and we start with that e. m. f. on the plate. suppose that we now make it volts and then vary the position of the slider in the grid circuit until the ammeter reads as it did at the start. next we read the voltage impressed on the grid by reading the voltmeter in the grid circuit. suppose it reads volts. what does that mean? [illustration: fig ] it means that two volts in the grid circuit have the same effect on the plate current as ten volts in the plate circuit. if we apply a volt to the grid circuit we get five times as large an effect in the plate circuit as we would if the volt were applied there. we get a greater effect, the effect of more volts, by applying our voltage to the grid. we say that the tube acts as an "amplifier of voltage" because we can get a larger effect than the number of volts which we apply would ordinarily entitle us to. now let's take a simple case of the use of an audion as an amplifier. suppose we have a receiving circuit with which we find that the signals are not easily understood because they are too weak. let this be the receiving circuit of fig. which i am reproducing here as part of fig. . we have replaced the telephone receiver by a "transformer." a transformer is two coils, or windings, coupled together. an alternating current in one will give rise to an alternating current in the other. you are already familiar with the idea but this is our first use of the word. usually we call the first coil, that is the one through which the alternating current flows, the "primary" and the second coil, in which a current is induced, the "secondary." the secondary of this transformer is connected to the grid circuit of another vacuum tube, to the plate circuit of which is connected another transformer and the telephone receiver. the result is a detector and "one stage of amplification." the primary of the first transformer, so we shall suppose, has in it the same current as would have been in the telephone. this alternating current induces in the secondary an e. m. f. which has the same variations as this current. this e. m. f. acts on the grid of the second tube, that is on the amplifier. because the audion amplifies, the e. m. f. acting on the telephone receiver is larger than it would have been without the use of this audion. and hence there is a greater response on the part of its diaphragm and a louder sound. in setting up such a circuit as this there are several things to watch. for some of these you will have to rely on the dealer from whom you buy your supplies and for the others upon yourself. but it will take another letter to tell you of the proper precautions in using an audion as an amplifier. [illustration: fig ] in the circuit which i have just described an audion is used to amplify the current which comes from the detector before it reaches the telephone receiver. sometimes we use an audion to amplify the e. m. f. of the signal before impressing it upon the grid of the detector. fig. shows a circuit for doing that. in the case of fig. we are amplifying the audio-frequency current. in that of fig. it is the radio-frequency effect which is amplified. the feed-back or regenerative circuit of fig. is a one-tube circuit for doing the same thing as is done with two tubes in fig . [footnote : there is always some amplification taking place in an audion detector but the regenerative circuit amplifies over and over again until the signal is as large as the tube can detect.] letter the audion amplifier and its connections dear son: in our use of the audion we form three circuits. the first or a-circuit includes the filament. the b-circuit includes the part of the tube between filament and plate. the c-circuit includes the part between filament and grid. we sometimes speak of the c-circuit as the "input" circuit and the b-circuit as the "output" circuit of the tube. this is because we can put into the grid-filament terminals an e. m. f. and obtain from the plate-filament circuit an effect in the form of a change of current. [illustration: fig ] suppose we had concealed in a box the audion and circuit of fig. and that only the terminals which are shown came through the box. we are given a battery and an ammeter and asked to find out all we can as to what is between the terminals _f_ and _g_. we connect the battery and ammeter in series with these terminals. no current flows through the circuit. we reverse the battery but no current flows in the opposite direction. then we reason that there is an open-circuit between _f_ and _g_. as long as we do not use a higher voltage than that of the c-battery which is in the box no current can flow. even if we do use a higher voltage than the "negative c-battery" of the hidden grid-circuit there will be a current only when the external battery is connected so as to make the grid positive with respect to the filament. now suppose we take several cells of battery and try in the same way to find what is hidden between the terminals _p_ and _f_. we start with one battery and the ammeter as before and find that if this battery is connected so as to make _p_ positive with respect to _f_, there is a feeble current. we increase the battery and find that the current is increased. two cells, however, do not give exactly twice the current that one cell does, nor do three give three times as much. the current does not increase proportionately to the applied voltage. therefore we reason that whatever is between _p_ and _f_ acts like a resistance but not like a wire resistance. then, we try another experiment with this hidden audion. we connect a battery to _g_ and _f_, and note what effect it has on the current which our other battery is sending through the box between _p_ and _f_. there is a change of current in this circuit, just as if our act of connecting a battery to _g-f_ had resulted in connecting a battery in series with the _p-f_ circuit. the effect is exactly as if there is inside the box a battery which is connected into the hidden part of the circuit _p-f_. this concealed battery, which now starts to act, appears to be several times stronger than the battery which is connected to _g-f_. sometimes this hidden battery helps the b-battery which is on the outside; and sometimes it seems to oppose, for the current in the _p-f_ circuit either increases or decreases, depending upon how we connect the battery to _g_ and _f_. the hidden battery is always larger than our battery connected to _g_ and _f_. if we arrange rapidly to reverse the battery connected to _g-f_ it appears as if there is inside the box in the _p-f_ circuit an alternator, that is, something which can produce an alternating e. m. f. all this, of course, is merely a review statement of what we already know. these experiments are interesting, however, because they follow somewhat those which were performed in studying the audion and finding out how to make it do all the wonderful things which it now can. as far as we have carried our series of experiments the box might contain two separate circuits. one between _g_ and _f_ appears to be an open circuit. the other appears to have in it a resistance and a battery (or else an alternator). the e. m. f. of the battery, or alternator, as the case may be, depends on what source of e. m. f. is connected to _g-f_. whatever that e. m. f. is, there is a corresponding kind of e. m. f. inside the box but one several times larger. [illustration: fig ] we might, therefore, pay no further attention to what is actually inside the box or how all these effects are brought about. we might treat the entire box as if it was formed by two separate circuits as shown in fig. . if we do so, we are replacing the box by something which is equivalent so far as effects are concerned, that is we are replacing an actual audion by two circuits which together are equivalent to it. the men who first performed such experiments wanted some convenient way of saying that if an alternator, which has an e. m. f. of _v_ volts, is connected to _f_ and _g_, the effect is the same as if a much stronger alternator is connected between _f_ and _p_. how much stronger this imaginary alternator is depends upon the design of the audion. for some audions it might be five times as strong, for other designs . or almost any other number, although usually a number of times less than . they used a little greek letter called "mu" to stand for this number which depends on the design of the tube. then they said that the hidden alternator in the output circuit was mu times as strong as the actual alternator which was applied between the grid and the filament. of course, instead of writing the sound and name of the letter they used the letter [greek: m] itself. and that is what i have done in the sketch of fig. . now we are ready to talk about the audion as an amplifier. the first thing to notice is the fact that we have an open circuit between _f_ and _g_. this is true as long as we don't apply an e. m. f. large enough to overcome the c-battery of fig. and thus let the grid become positive and attract electrons from the filament. we need then spend no further time thinking about what will happen in the circuit _g-f_, for there will be no current. as to the circuit _f-p_, we can treat it as a resistance in series with which there is a generator [greek: m] times as strong as that which is connected to _f_ and _g_. the next problem is how to get the most out of this hidden generator. we call the resistance which the tube offers to the passage of electrons between _p_ and _f_ the "internal resistance" of the plate circuit of the tube. how large it is depends upon the design of tube. in some tubes it may be five or six thousand ohms, and in others several times as high. in the large tubes used in high-powered transmitting sets it is much less. since it will be different in different cases we shall use a symbol for it and say that it is _r_{p}_ ohms. then one rule for using an audion as an amplifier is this: to get the most out of an audion see that the telephone, or whatever circuit or piece of apparatus is connected to the output terminals, shall have a resistance of _r_{p}_ ohms. when the resistance of the circuit, which an audion is supplying with current, is the same as the internal resistance of the output side of the tube, then the audion gives its greatest output. that is the condition for the greatest "amount of energy each second," or the "greatest power" as we say. that rule is why we always select the telephone receivers which we use with an audion and always ask carefully as to their resistance when we buy. sometimes, however, it is not practicable to use receivers of just the right resistance. where we connect the output side of an audion to some other circuit, as where we let one audion supply another, it is usually impossible to follow this rule without adding some special apparatus. this leads to the next rule: if the telephone receiver, or the circuit, which we wish to connect to the output of an audion, does not have quite nearly a resistance of _r_{p}_ ohms we use a properly designed transformer as we have already done in figs. and . a transformer is two separate coils coupled together so that an alternating current in the primary will induce an alternating current in the secondary. of course, if the secondary is open-circuited then no current can flow but there will be induced in it an e. m. f. which is ready to act if the circuit is closed. transformers have an interesting ability to make a large resistance look small or vice versa. to show you why, i shall have to develop some rules for transformers. suppose you have an alternating e. m. f. of ten volts applied to the primary of an iron-cored transformer which has ten turns. there is one volt applied to each turn. now, suppose the secondary has only one turn. that one turn has induced in it an alternating e. m. f. of one volt. if there are more turns of wire forming the secondary, then each turn has induced in it just one volt. but the e. m. f.'s of all these turns add together. if the secondary has twenty turns, there is induced in it a total of twenty volts. so the first rule is this: in a transformer the number of volts in each turn of wire is just the same in the secondary as in the primary. if we want a high-voltage alternating e. m. f. all we have to do is to send an alternating current through the primary of a transformer which has in the secondary, many times more turns of wire than it has in the primary. from the secondary we obtain a higher voltage than we impress on the primary. you can see one application of this rule at once. when we use an audion as an amplifier of an alternating current we send the current which is to be amplified through the primary of a transformer, as in fig. . we use a transformer with many times more turns on the secondary than on the primary so as to apply a large e. m. f. to the grid of the amplifying tube. that will mean a large effect in the plate circuit of the amplifier. you remember that the grid circuit of an audion with a proper value of negative c-battery is really open-circuited and no current will flow in it. for that case we get a real gain by using a "step-up" transformer, that is, one with more turns in the secondary than in the primary. it looks at first as if a transformer would always give a gain. _if we mean a gain in energy it will not_ although we may use it, as we shall see in a minute, to permit a vacuum tube to work into an output circuit more efficiently than it could without the transformer. we cannot have any more energy in the secondary circuit of a transformer than we give to the primary. suppose we have a transformer with twice as many turns on the secondary as on the primary. to the primary we apply an alternating e. m. f. of a certain number of volts. in the secondary there will be twice as many volts because it has twice as many turns. the current in the secondary, however, will be only half as large as is the current in the primary. we have twice the force in the secondary but only half the electron stream. it is something like this: you are out coasting and two youngsters ask you to pull them and their sleds up hill. you pull one of them all the way and do a certain amount of work. on the other hand suppose you pull them both at once but only half way up. you pull twice as hard but only half as far and you do the same amount of work as before. [illustration: fig ] we can't get more work out of the secondary of a transformer than we do in the primary. if we design the transformer so that there is a greater pull (e. m. f.) in the secondary the electron stream in the secondary will be correspondingly smaller. you remember how we measure resistance. we divide the e. m. f. (number of volts) by the current (number of amperes) to find the resistance (number of ohms). suppose we do that for the primary and for the secondary of the transformer of fig. which we are discussing. see what happens in the secondary. there is only half as much voltage but twice as much current. it looks as though the secondary had one-fourth as much resistance as the primary. and so it has, but we usually call it "impedance" instead of resistance because straight wires resist but coils or condensers impede alternating e. m. f.'s. [illustration: fig ] before we return to the question of using a transformer in an audion circuit let us turn this transformer around as in fig. and send the current through the side with the larger number of windings. let's talk of "primary" and "secondary" just as before but, of course, remember that now the primary has twice the turns of the secondary. on the secondary side we shall have only half the current, but there will be twice the e. m. f. the resistance of the secondary then is four times that of the primary. now return to the amplifier of fig. and see what sort of a transformer should be between the plate circuit of the tube and the telephone receivers. suppose the internal resistance of the tube is , ohms and the resistance of the telephones is , ohms. suppose also that the resistance (really impedance) of the primary side of the transformer which we just considered is , ohms. the impedance of its secondary will be a quarter of this or , ohms. if we connect such a transformer in the circuit, as shown, we shall obtain the greatest output from the tube. in the first place the primary of the transformer has a number of ohms just equal to the internal resistance of the tube. the tube, therefore, will give its best to that transformer. in the second place the secondary of the transformer has a resistance just equal to the telephone receivers so it can give its best to them. the effect of the transformer is to make the telephones act as if they had four times as much resistance and so were exactly suited to be connected to the audion. this whole matter of the proper use of transformers is quite simple but very important in setting up vacuum-tube circuits. to overlook it in building or buying your radio set will mean poor efficiency. whenever you have two parts of a vacuum-tube circuit to connect together be sure and buy only a transformer which is designed to work between the two impedances (or resistances) which you wish to connect together. there is one more precaution in connection with the purchase of transformers. they should do the same thing for all the important frequencies which they are to transmit. if they do not, the speech or signals will be distorted and may be unintelligible. if you take the precautions which i have mentioned your radio receiving set formed by a detector and one amplifier will look like that of fig. . that is only one possible scheme of connections. you can use any detector circuit which you wish,[ ] one with a grid condenser and leak, or one arranged for feed-back in either case your amplifier may well be as shown in the figure. [illustration: fig ] the circuit i have described uses an audion to amplify the audio-frequency currents which come from the detector and are capable of operating the telephones. in some cases it is desirable to amplify the radio signals before applying them to the detector. this is especially true where a "loop antenna" is being used. loop antennas are smaller and more convenient than aërials and they also have certain abilities to select the signals which they are to receive because they receive best from stations which lie along a line drawn parallel to their turns. unfortunately, however, they are much less efficient and so require the use of amplifiers. with a small loop made by ten turns of wire separated by about a quarter of an inch and wound on a square mounting, about three feet on a side, you will usually require two amplifiers. one of these might be used to amplify the radio signals before detection and the other to amplify after detection. to tune the loop for broadcasts a condenser of about . mf. will be needed. the diagram of fig. shows the complete circuit of a set with three stages of radio-amplification and none of audio. [footnote : except for patented circuits. see p. .] letter telephone receivers and other electromagnetic devices dear son: in an earlier letter when we first introduced a telephone receiver into a circuit i told you something of how it operates. i want now to tell why and also of some other important devices which operate for the same reason. you remember that a stream of electrons which is starting or stopping can induce the electrons of a neighboring parallel circuit to start off in parallel paths. we do not know the explanation of this. nor do we know the explanation of another fact which seems to be related to this fact of induction and is the basis for our explanations of magnetism. [illustration: fig ] if two parallel wires are carrying steady electron streams in the same general direction the wires attract each other. if the streams are oppositely directed the wires repel each other. fig. illustrates this fact. if the streams are not at all in the same direction, that is, if they are at right angles, they have no effect on each other. [illustration: fig ] these facts, of the attraction of electron streams which are in the same direction and repulsion of streams in opposite directions, are all that one need remember to figure out for himself what will happen under various conditions. for example, if two coils of wire are carrying currents what will happen is easily seen. fig. shows the two coils and a section through them. [illustration: fig ] looking at this cross section we seem to have four wires, _ _ and _ _ of coil _a_ and _ _ and _ _ of coil _b_. you see at once that if the coils are free to move they will move into the dotted positions shown in fig , because wire _ _ attracts wire _ _ and repels wire _ _, while wire _ _ attracts wire _ _ and repels wire _ _. if necessary, and if they are free to move, the coils will turn completely around to get to this position. i have shown such a case in fig. . wires which are not carrying currents do not behave in this way. the action is due, but how we don't yet know, to the motions of the electrons. as far as we can explain it to-day, the attraction of two wires which are carrying currents is due to the attraction of the two streams of electrons. of course these electrons are part of the wires. they can't get far away from the stay-at-home electrons and the nuclei of the atoms which form the wires. in fact it is these nuclei which keep the wandering electrons within the wires. the result is that if the streams of electrons are to move toward each other the wires must go along with them. if the wires are held firmly the electron streams cannot approach one another for they must stay in the wires. wires, therefore, perform the important service of acting as paths for electrons which are traveling as electric currents. there are other ways in which electrons can be kept in a path, and other means beside batteries for keeping them going. it doesn't make any difference so far as the attraction or the repulsion is concerned why they are following a certain path or why they stay in it. so far as we know two streams of electrons, following parallel paths, will always, behave just like the two streams of fig. . [illustration: fig ] suppose, for example, there were two atoms which were each formed by a nucleus and a number of electrons swinging around about the nucleus as pictured in fig. . the electrons are going of their own accord and the nucleus keeps them from flying off at a tangent, the way mud flies from the wheel of an automobile. suppose these two atoms are free to turn but not to move far from their present positions. they will turn so as to make their electron paths parallel just as did the loops of fig. . [illustration: fig ] now, i don't say that there are any atoms at all like the ones i have pictured. there is still a great deal to be learned about how electrons act inside different kinds of atoms. we do know, however, that the atoms of iron act just as if they were tiny loops with electron streams. [illustration: fig ] suppose we had several loops and that they were lined up like the three loops in fig. . you can see that they would all attract the other loop, on the right in the figure. on the other hand if they were grouped in the triangle of fig. they would barely affect the loop because they would be pulling at cross purposes. if a lot of the tiny loops of the iron atoms are lined up so as to act together and attract other loops, as in the first figure, we say the iron is magnetized and is a magnet. in an ordinary piece of iron, however, the atoms are so grouped that they don't pull together but like the loops of our second figure pull in different directions and neutralize each other's efforts so that there is no net effect. [illustration: pl. ix.--western electric loud speaking receiver. crystal detector set of the general electric co. audibility meter of general radio co.] and like the loops of fig. the atoms in an unmagnetized piece of iron are pretty well satisfied to stay as they are without all lining up to pull together. to magnetize the iron we must force some of these atomic loops to turn part way around. that can be done by bringing near them a strong magnet or a coil of wire which is carrying a current. then the atoms are forced to turn and if enough turn so that there is an appreciable effect then the iron is magnetized. the more that are properly turned the stronger is the magnet. one end or "pole" we call north-seeking and the other south-seeking, because a magnetized bar of iron acts like a compass needle. [illustration: fig ] a coil of wire, carrying a current, acts just like a magnet because its larger loops are all ready to pull together. i have marked the coil of fig. with _n_ and _s_ for north and south. if the electron stream in it is reversed the "polarity" is reversed. there is a simple rule for this. partially close your left hand so that the fingers form loops. let the thumb stick out at right angles to these loops. if the electron streams are flowing around the loops of a coil in the same direction as your fingers point then your thumb is the _n_ pole and the coil will repel the north poles of other loops or magnets in the direction in which your thumb points. if you know the polarity already there is a simple rule for the repulsion or attraction. like poles repel, unlike poles attract. from what has been said about magnetism you can now understand why in a telephone receiver the current in the winding can make the magnet stronger. it does so because it makes more of the atomic loops of the iron turn around and help pull. on the other hand if the current in the winding is reversed it will turn some of the loops which are already helping into other positions where they don't help and may hinder. if the current in the coil is to help, the electron stream in it must be so directed that the north pole of the coil is at the same end as the north pole of the magnet. this idea of the attraction or repulsion of electron streams, whether in coils of wire or in atoms of iron and other magnetizable substances, is the fundamental idea of most forms of telephone receivers, of electric motors, and of a lot of other devices which we call "electromagnetic." the ammeters and voltmeters which we use for the measurement of audion characteristics and the like are usually electromagnetic instruments. ammeters and voltmeters are alike in their design. both are sensitive current-measuring instruments. in the case of the voltmeter, as you know, we have a large resistance in series with the current-measuring part for the reason of which i told in letter . in the case of ammeters we sometimes let all the current go through the current-measuring part but generally we let only a certain fraction of it do so. to pass the rest of the current we connect a small resistance in parallel with the measuring part. in both types of instruments the resistances are sometimes hidden away under the cover. both instruments must, of course, be calibrated as i have explained before. in the electromagnetic instruments there are several ways of making the current-measuring part. the simplest is to let the current, or part of it, flow through a coil which is pivoted between the _n_ and _s_ poles of a strong permanent magnet. a spring keeps the coil in its zero position and if the current makes the coil turn it must do so against this spring. the stronger the current in the coil the greater the interaction of the loops of the coil and those of the iron atoms and hence the further the coil will turn. a pointer attached to the coil indicates how far; and the number of volts or amperes is read off from the calibrated scale. such instruments measure direct-currents, that is, steady streams of electrons in one direction. to measure an alternating current or voltage we can use a hot-wire instrument or one of several different types of electromagnetic instruments. perhaps the simplest of these is the so-called "plunger type." the alternating current flows in a coil; and a piece of soft iron is so pivoted that it can be attracted and moved into the coil. soft iron does not make a good permanent magnet. if you put a piece of it inside a coil which is carrying a steady current it becomes a magnet but about as soon as you interrupt the current the atomic loops of the iron stop pulling together. almost immediately they turn into all sorts of positions and form little self-satisfied groups which don't take any interest in the outside world. (that isn't true of steel, where the atomic loops are harder to turn and to line up, but are much more likely to stay in their new positions.) because the plunger in an alternating-current ammeter is soft iron its loops line up with those of the coil no matter which way the electron stream happens to be going in the coil. the atomic magnets in the iron turn around each time the current reverses and they are always, therefore, lined up so that the plunger is attracted. if the plunger has much inertia or if the oscillations of the current are reasonably frequent the plunger will not move back and forth with each reversal of the current but will take an average position. the stronger the a-c (alternating current) the farther inside the coil will be this position of the plunger. the position of the plunger becomes then a measure of the strength of the alternating current. instruments for measuring alternating e. m. f.'s and currents, read in volts and in amperes. so far i haven't stopped to tell what we mean by one ampere of alternating current. you know from letter what we mean by an ampere of d-c (direct current). it wasn't necessary to explain before because i told you only of hot-wire instruments and they will read the same for either d-c or a-c. when there is an alternating current in a wire the electrons start, rush ahead, stop, rush back, stop, and do it all over again and again. that heats the wire in which it happens. if an alternating stream of electrons, which are doing this sort of thing, heats a wire just exactly as much as would a d-c of one ampere, then we say that the a-c has an "effective value" of one ampere. of course part of the time of each cycle the stream is larger than an ampere but for part it is less. if the average heating effect is the same the a-c is said to be one ampere. in the same way, if a steady e. m. f. (a d-c e. m. f.) of one volt will heat a wire to which it is applied a certain amount and if an alternating e. m. f. will have the same heating effect in the same time, then the a-c e. m. f. is said to be one volt. another electromagnetic instrument which we have discussed but of which more should be said is the iron-cored transformer. we consider first what happens in one of the coils of the transformer. the inductance of a coil is very much higher if it has an iron core. the reason is that then the coil acts as if it had an enormously larger number of turns. all the atomic loops of the core add their effects to the loops of the coil. when the current starts it must line up a lot of these atomic loops. when the current stops and these loops turn back into some of their old self-satisfied groupings, they affect the electrons in the coil. where first they opposed the motion of these electrons, now they insist on its being continued for a moment longer. i'll prove that by describing two simple experiments; and then we'll have the basis for understanding the effect of an iron core in a transformer. [illustration: fig ] look again at fig. of letter which i am reproducing for convenience. we considered only what would happen in coil _cd_ if a current was started in coil _ab_. suppose instead of placing the coils as shown in that figure they are placed as in fig. . because they are at right angles there will be no effect in _cd_ when the current is started in _ab_. let the current flow steadily through _ab_ and then suddenly turn the coils so that they are again parallel as shown by the dotted positions. we get the same temporary current in _cd_ as we would if we should place the coils parallel and then start the current in _ab_. [illustration: fig ] the other experiment is this: starting with the coils lined up as in the dotted position of fig. and the current steadily flowing in _ab_, we suddenly turn them into positions at right angles to each other. there is the same momentary current in _cd_ as if we had left them lined up and had opened the switch in the circuit of _ab_. [illustration: fig ] now we know that the atomic loops of iron behave in the same general way as do loops of wire which are carrying currents. let us replace the coil _ab_ by a magnet as shown in fig. . first we start with the magnet at right angles to the coil _cd_. suddenly we turn it into the dotted position of that figure. there is the same momentary current in _cd_ as if we were still using the coil _ab_ instead of a magnet. if now we turn the magnet back to a position at right angles to _cd_, we observe the opposite direction of current in _cd_. these effects are more noticeable the more rapidly we turn the magnet. the same is true of turning the coil. the experiment of turning the magnet illustrates just what happens in the case of a transformer with, an iron core except that instead of turning the entire magnet the little atomic loops do the turning inside the core. in the secondary of an iron-cored transformer the induced current is the sum of two currents both in the same direction at each instant. one current is caused by the starting or stopping of the current in the primary. the other current is due to the turning of the atomic loops of the iron atoms so that more of them line up with the turns of the primary. these atomic loops, of course, are turned by the current in the primary. there are so many of them, however, that the current due to their turning is usually the more important part of the total current. in all transformers the effect is greater the more rapidly the current changes direction and the atomic loops turn around. for the same size of electron stream in the primary, therefore, there is induced in the secondary a greater e. m. f. the greater is the frequency with which the primary current alternates. where high frequencies are dealt with it isn't necessary to have iron cores because the effect is large enough without the help of the atomic loops. and even if we wanted their help it wouldn't be easy to obtain, for they dislike to turn so fast and it takes a lot of power to make them do so. we know that fact because we know that an iron core increases the inductance and so chokes the current. for low frequencies, however, that is those frequencies in the audio range, it is usually necessary to have iron cores so as to get enough effect without too many turns of wire. the fact that iron decreases the inductance and so seriously impedes alternating currents leads us to use iron-core coils where we want high inductance. such coils are usually called "choke coils" or "retard coils." of their use we shall see more in a later letter where we study radio-telephone transmitters. letter your receiving set and how to experiment my dear student: in this letter i want to tell you how to experiment with radio apparatus. the first rule is this: start with a simple circuit, never add anything to it until you know just why you are doing so, and do not box it up in a cabinet until you know how it is working and why. your antenna at the start had better be a single wire about feet high and about feet long. this antenna will have capacity of about . m. f. if you want an antenna of two wires spaced about three feet apart i would make it about feet long. bring down a lead from each wire, twisting them into a pigtail to act like one wire except near the horizontal part of the antenna. [illustration: fig ] your ground connection can go to a water pipe. to protect the house and your apparatus from lightning insert a fuse and a little carbon block lightning arrester such as are used by the telephone company in their installations of house phones. you can also use a so-called "vacuum lightning arrester." in either case the connections will be as shown in fig. . if you use a loop antenna, of course, no arrester is needed. at first i would plan to receive signals between meters and meters. this will include the amateurs who work between and m., the special amateurs who send c-w telegraph at m., and the broadcasting stations which operate at m. this range will give you plenty to listen to while you are experimenting. in addition you will get some ship signals at m. [illustration: fig ] to tune the antenna to any of the wave lengths in this range you can use a coil of turns wound on a cardboard tube of three and a half inches in diameter. you can wind this coil of bare wire if you are careful, winding a thread along with the wire so as to keep the successive turns separated. in that case you will need to construct a sliding contact for it. that is the simplest form of tuner. on the other hand you can wind with single silk covered wire and bring out taps at the , , , , , , , , , , , , , and th turns. to make a tap drill a small hole through the tube, bend the wire into a loop about a foot long and pull this loop through the hole as shown in fig. . then give the wire a twist, as shown, so that it can't pull out, and proceed with your winding. use s. s. c. wire. you will need about feet and might buy to have enough for the secondary coil. make contacts to the taps by two rotary switches as shown in fig. . you can buy switch arms and contacts studs or a complete switch mounted on a small panel of some insulating compound. let switch _s_{ }_ make the contacts for taps between and turns, and let switch _s_{ }_ make the other contacts. for the secondary coil use the same size of wire and of core. wind turns, bringing out a tap at the middle. to tune the secondary circuit you will need a variable condenser. you can buy one of the small ones with a maximum capacity of about . mf., one of the larger ones with a maximum capacity of . mf., or even the larger size which has a maximum capacity of . mf. i should prefer the one of . mf. you will need a crystal detector--i should try galena first--and a so-called "cat's whisker" with which to make contact with the galena. for these parts and for the switch mentioned above you can shop around to advantage. for telephone receivers i would buy a really good pair with a resistance of about ohms. buy also a small mica condenser of . mf. for a blocking condenser. your entire outfit will then look as in fig. . the switch _s_ is a small knife switch. to operate, leave the switch _s_ open, place the primary and secondary coils near together as in the figure and listen. the tuning is varied, while you listen, by moving the slider of the slide-wire tuner or by moving the switches if you have connected your coil for that method. make large changes in the tuning by varying the switch _s_{ }_ and then turn slowly through all positions of _s_{ }_, listening at each position. [illustration: fig ] when a signal is heard adjust to the position of _s_{ }_ and _s_{ }_ which gives the loudest signal and then closing _s_ start to tune the secondary circuit. to do this, vary the capacity of the condenser in the secondary circuit. don't change the primary tuning until you have tuned the secondary and can get the signal with good volume, that is loud. you will want to vary the position of the primary and secondary coils, that is, vary their coupling, for you will get sharper tuning as they are drawn farther apart. sharper tuning means less interference from other stations which are sending on wave lengths near that which you wish to receive. reduce the coupling, therefore, and then readjust the tuning. it will usually be necessary to make a slight change in both circuits, in one case with switch _s_{ }_ and in the other with the variable condenser. as soon as you can identify any station which you hear sending make a note of the position of the switches _s_{ }_ and _s_{ }_, and of the setting of the condenser in the secondary circuit. in that way you will acquire information as to the proper adjustments to receive certain wave-lengths. this is calibrating your set by the known wave-lengths of distant stations. after learning to receive with this simple set i should recommend buying a good audion tube. ask the seller to supply you with a blue print of the characteristic[ ] of the tube taken under the conditions of filament current and plate voltage which he recommends for its use. buy a storage battery and a small slide-wire rheostat, that is variable resistance, to use in the filament circuit. buy also a bank of dry batteries of the proper voltage for the plate circuit of the tube. at the same time you should buy the proper design of transformer to go between the plate circuit of your tube and the pair of receivers which you have. it will usually be advisable to ask the dealer to show you a characteristic curve for the transformer, which will indicate how well the transformer operates at the different frequencies in the audio range. it should operate very nearly the same for all frequencies between and cycles. the next step is to learn to use the tube as a detector. connect it into your secondary circuit instead of the crystal detector. use the proper value of c-battery as determined from your study of the characteristic of the tube. one or two small dry cells, which have binding-post terminals are convenient c-batteries. if you think you will need a voltage much different from that obtained with a whole number of batteries you can arrange to supply the grid as we did in fig. of letter . in that case you can use a few feet of german-silver wire and make connections to it with a suspender clip. learn to receive with the tube and be particularly careful not to let the filament have too much current and burn out. now buy some more apparatus. you will need a grid condenser of about . mf. the grid leaks to go with it you can make for yourself. i would use a piece of brown wrapping paper and two little metal eyelets. the eyelets can be punched into the paper. between them coat the paper with carbon ink, or with lead pencil marks. a line about an inch long ought to serve nicely. you will probably wish to make several grid leaks to try. when you get satisfactory operation in receiving by the grid-condenser method the leak will probably be somewhere between a megohm and two megohms. for this method you will not want a c-battery, but you will wish to operate the detector with about as high a voltage as the manufacturers will recommend for the plate circuit. in this way the incoming signal, which decreases the plate current, can produce the largest decrease. it is also possible to start with the grid slightly positive instead of being as negative as it is when connected to the negative terminal of the a-battery. there will then be possible a greater change in grid voltage. to do so connect the grid as in fig. to the positive terminal of the a-battery. [illustration: fig ] about this time i would shop around for two or three small double-pole double-throw switches. those of the -ampere size will do. with these you can arrange to make comparisons between different methods of receiving. suppose, for example, you connect the switches as shown in fig. so that by throwing them to the left you are using the audion and to the right the crystal as a detector. you can listen for a minute in one position and then switch and listen for a minute in the other position, and so on back and forth. that way you can tell whether or not you really are getting better results. if you want a rough measure of how much better the audion is than the crystal you might see, while you are listening to the audion, how much you can rob the telephone receiver of its current and still hear as well as you do when you switch back to the crystal. the easiest way to do this is to put a variable resistance across the receiver as shown in fig. . adjust this resistance until the intensity of the signal when detected by the audion is the same as for the crystal. you adjust this variable resistance until it by-passes so much of the current, which formerly went through the receiver, that the "audibility" of the signal is reduced until it is the same as for the crystal detector. carefully made resistances for such a purpose are sold under the name of "audibility meters." you can assemble a resistance which will do fairly well if you will buy a small rheostat which will give a resistance varying by steps of ten ohms from zero to one hundred ohms. at the same time you can buy four resistance spools of one hundred ohms each and perhaps one of ohms. the spools need not be very expensive for you do not need carefully adjusted resistances. assemble them so as to make a rheostat with a range of - ohms by steps of ohms. the cheapest way to mount is with fahnestock clips as illustrated in fig. . after a while, however, you will probably wish to mount them in a box with a rotary switch on top. [illustration: fig ] to study the effect of the grid condenser you can arrange switches so as to insert this condenser and its leak and at the same time to cut out the c-battery. fig. shows how. you can measure the gain in audibility at the same time. [illustration: pl. x.--audio-frequency transformer and banked-wound coil. (courtesy of pacent electric co.)] [illustration: fig ] after learning to use the audion as a detector, both by virtue of its curved characteristic and by the grid-condenser method, i would suggest studying the same tube as an amplifier. first i would learn to use it as an audio-frequency amplifier. set up the crystal detector circuit. use your audio-frequency transformer the other way around so as to step up to the grid. put the telephone in the plate circuit. choose your c-battery for amplification and _not detection_ and try to receive. you will get better results if you can afford another iron-core transformer. if you can, buy one which will work between the plate circuit of one vacuum tube and the grid circuit of another similar tube. then you will have the right equipment when you come to make a two-stage audio-frequency amplifier. if you buy such a transformer use the other transformer between plate and telephones as you did before and insert the new one as shown in fig. . this circuit also shows how you can connect the switches so as to see how much the audion is amplifying. [illustration: fig ] the next step is to use the audion as an amplifier of the radio-signal before its detection. use the proper c-battery for an amplifier, as determined from the blue print of the tube characteristic. connect the tube as shown in fig. . you will see that in this circuit we are using a choke coil to keep the radio-frequency current out of the battery part of the plate circuit and a small condenser, another one of . mf., to keep the battery current from the crystal detector. you can see from the same figure how you can arrange the switches so as to find whether or not you are getting any gain from the amplifier. now you are ready to receive those c-w senders at meters. you will need to wind another coil like the secondary coil you already have. here is where you buy another condenser. you will need it later. if before you bought the . size, this time buy the . size or vice versa. wind also a small coil for a tickler. about turns of wire on a core of - / in. diameter will do. connect the tickler in the plate circuit of the audion. connect to the grid your new coil and condenser and set the audion circuit so that it will induce a current in the secondary circuit which supplies the crystal. fig. shows the hook-up. [illustration: fig ] you will see that you are now supplying the crystal with current from two sources, namely the distant source of the incoming signals and the local oscillator which you have formed. the crystal will detect the "beat note" between these two currents. to receive the meters signals you will need to make several adjustments at the same time. in the first place i would set the tuning of the antenna circuit and of the crystal circuit about where you think right because of your knowledge of the settings for other wave lengths. then i would get the local oscillator going. you can tell whether or not it is going if you suddenly increase or decrease the coupling between the tickler coil and the input circuit of the audion. if this motion is accompanied by a click in the receivers the tube is oscillating. [illustration: fig ] now you must change the frequency at which it is oscillating by slowly changing the capacity in the tuned input circuit of the tube. unless the antenna circuit is properly tuned to the meter signal you will get no results. if it is, you will hear an intermittent musical note for some tune of your local oscillator. this note will have the duration of dots and dashes. you will have to keep changing the tuning of your detector circuit and of the antenna. for each new setting very slowly swing the condenser plates in the oscillator circuit and see if you get a signal. it will probably be easier to use the "stand-by position," which i have described, with switch _s_ open in the secondary circuit of fig. . in that case you have only to tune your antenna to meters and then you will pick up a note when your local oscillator is in tune. after you have done so you can tune the secondary circuit which supplies the crystal. if you adopt this method you will want a close coupling between the antenna and the crystal circuit. you will always want a very weak coupling between the oscillator circuit and the detector circuit. you will also probably want a weaker coupling between tickler and tube input than you are at first inclined to believe will be enough. patience and some skill in manipulation is always required for this sort of experiment. when you have completed this experiment in heterodyne receiving, using a local oscillator, you are ready to try the regenerative circuit. this has been illustrated in fig. of letter and needs no further description. you will have the advantage when you come to this of knowing very closely the proper settings of the antenna circuit and the secondary tuned circuit. you will need then only to adjust the coupling of the tickler and make finer adjustments in your tuning. after you have completed this series of experiments you will be something of an adept at radio and are in a position to plan your final set. for this set you will need to purchase certain parts complete from reputable dealers because many of the circuits which i have described are patented and should not be used except as rights to use are obtained by the purchase of licensed apparatus which embodies the patented circuits. knowing how radio receivers operate and why, you are now in a good condition to discuss with dealers the relative merits and costs of receiving sets. [illustration: fig ] before you actually buy a completed set you may want to increase the range of frequency over which you are carrying out your experiments. to receive at longer wave-lengths you will need to increase the inductance of your antenna so that it will be tuned to a lower frequency. this is usually called "loading" and can be done by inserting a coil in the antenna. to obtain smaller wave-lengths decrease the effective capacity of the antenna circuit by putting another condenser in series with the antenna. usually, therefore, one connects into his antenna circuit both a condenser and a loading coil. by using a variable condenser the effective capacity of the antenna system may be easily changed. the result is that this series condenser method becomes the easiest method of tuning and the slide wire tuner is not needed. fig. shows the circuit. for quite a range of wave-lengths we may use the same loading coil and tune the antenna circuit entirely by this series condenser. for some other range of wave-lengths we shall then need a different loading coil. in a well-designed set the wave-length ranges overlap. the calculation of the size of loading coil is quite easy but requires more arithmetic than i care to impose on you at present. i shall therefore merely give you illustrations based on the assumption that your antenna has a capacity of . or of . mf. and that the condensers which you have bought are . and . for their maxima. in table i there is given, for each of several values of the inductance of the primary coil, the shortest and the longest wave-lengths which you can expect to receive. the table is in two parts, the first for an antenna of capacity . mf. and the second for one of . mf. yours will be somewhere between these two limits. the shortest wave-length depends upon the antenna and not upon the condenser which you use in series with it for tuning. it also depends upon how much inductance there is in the coil which you have in the antenna circuit. the table gives values of inductance in the first column, and of minimum wave-length in the second. the third column shows what is the greatest wave-length you may expect if you use a tuning condenser of . mf.; and the fourth column the slightly large wave-length which is possible with the larger condenser. table i part . (for antenna of . mf.) inductance in shortest wave-length longest wave-length in meters mil-henries. in meters. with . mf. with . mf. . . . . . . . . . . part . (for antenna of . mf.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . from table i you can find how much inductance you will need in the primary circuit. a certain amount you will need to couple the antenna and the secondary circuit. the coil which you wound at the beginning of your experiments will do well for that. anything more in the way of inductance, which the antenna circuit requires to give a desired wave-length, you may consider as loading. in table ii are some data as to winding coils on straight cores to obtain various values of inductance. your s. s. c. wire will wind about turns to the inch. i have assumed that you will have this number of turns per inch on your coils and calculated the inductance which you should get for various numbers of total turns. the first part of the table is for a core of . inches in diameter and the second part for one of inches. the first column gives the inductance in mil-henries. the second gives number of turns. the third and fourth are merely for convenience and give the approximate length in inches of the coil and the approximate total length of wire which is required to wind it. i have allowed for bringing out taps. in other words feet of the wire will wind a coil of . inches with an inductance of . mil-henries, and permit you to bring out taps at all the lower values of inductance which are given in the table. table ii part . (for a core of . in. diam.) inductance in number length feet of wire mil-henries. of turns. in inches. required. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . part . (for core of . in. diam.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . the coil which you wound at the beginning of your experiment had only turns and was tapped so that you could, by manipulating the two switches of fig. , get small variations in inductance. in table iii is given the values of the inductance which is controlled by the switches of that figure, the corresponding number of turns, and the wave-length to which the antenna should then be tuned. i am giving this for two values of antenna capacity, as i have done before. by the aid of these three tables you should have small difficulty in taking care of matters of tuning for all wave-lengths below about meters. if you want to get longer waves than that you had better buy a few banked-wound coils. these are coils in which the turns are wound over each other but in such a way as to avoid in large part the "capacity effects" which usually accompany such winding. you can try winding them for yourself but i doubt if the experience has much value until you have gone farther in the study of the mathematical theory of radio than this series of letters will carry you. table iii circuit of fig. number inductance in wave length with antenna of of turns. mil-henries. . mf. . mf. . . . . . . . in the secondary circuit there is only one capacity, that of the variable condenser. if it has a range of values from about . mf. to . mf. your coil of turns and . mf. permits a range of wave-lengths from to m. using half the coil the range is to m. with the larger condenser the ranges are respectively to and to . for longer wave-lengths load with inductance. four times the inductance will tune to double these wave-lengths. [footnote : if you can afford to buy, or if you can borrow, ammeters and voltmeters of the proper range you should take the characteristic yourself.] letter high-powered radio-telephone transmitters my dear experimenter: this letter is to summarize the operations which must be performed in radio-telephone transmission and reception; and also to describe the circuit of an important commercial system. to transmit speech by radio three operations are necessary. first, there must be generated a high-frequency alternating current; second, this current must be modulated, that is, varied in intensity in accordance with the human voice; and third, the modulated current must be supplied to an antenna. for efficient operation, of course, the antenna must be tuned to the frequency which is to be transmitted. there is also a fourth operation which is usually performed and that is amplification. wherever the electrical effect is smaller than desired, or required for satisfactory transmission, vacuum tubes are used as amplifiers. of this i shall give you an illustration later. three operations are also essential in receiving. first, an antenna must be so arranged and tuned as to receive energy from the distant transmitting station. there is then in the receiving antenna a current similar in wave form to that in the transmitting antenna. second, the speech significance of this current must be detected, that is, the modulated current must be demodulated. a current is then obtained which has the same wave form as the human voice which was the cause of the modulation at the distant station. the third operation is performed by a telephone receiver which makes the molecules of air in its neighborhood move back and forth in accordance with the detected current. as you already know a fourth operation may be carried on by amplifiers which give on their output sides currents of greater strength but of the same forms as they receive at their input terminals. in transmitting and in receiving equipment two or more of these operations may be performed by the same vacuum tube as you will remember from our discussion of the regenerative circuit for receiving. for example, also, in any receiving set the vacuum tube which detects is usually amplifying. in the regenerative circuit for receiving continuous waves by the heterodyne method the vacuum tube functions as a generator of high-frequency current and as a detector of the variations in current which occur because the locally-generated current does not keep in step with that generated at the transmitting station. another example of a vacuum tube performing simultaneously two different functions is illustrated in fig. which shows a simple radio-telephone transmitter. the single tube performs in itself both the generation of the radio-frequency current and its modulation in accordance with the output of the carbon-button transmitter. this audion is in a feed-back circuit, the oscillation frequency of which depends upon the condenser _c_ and the inductance _l_. the voice drives the diaphragm of the transmitter and thus varies the resistance of the carbon button. this varies the current from the battery, _b_{a}_, through the primary, _t_{ }_, of the transformer _t_. the result is a varying voltage applied to the grid by the secondary _t_{ }_. the oscillating current in the plate circuit of the audion varies accordingly because it is dependent upon the grid voltage. the condenser _c_{r}_ offers a low impedance to the radio-frequency current to which the winding _t_{ }_ of audio-frequency transformer offers too much. [illustration: fig ] in this case the tube is both generator and "modulator." in some cases these operations are separately performed by different tubes. this was true of the transmitting set used in when the engineers of the bell telephone system talked by radio from arlington, near washington, d. c., to paris and honolulu. i shall not draw out completely the circuit of their apparatus but i shall describe it by using little squares to represent the parts responsible for each of the several operations. first there was a vacuum tube oscillator which generated a small current of the desired frequency. then there was a telephone transmitter which made variations in a direct-current flowing through the primary of a transformer. the e. m. f. from the secondary of this transformer and the e. m. f. from the radio-frequency oscillator were both impressed upon the grid of an audion which acted as a modulator. the output of this audion was a radio-frequency current modulated by the voice. the output was amplified by a two-stage audion amplifier and supplied through a coupling coil to the large antenna of the u. s. navy station at arlington. fig. shows the system. [illustration: fig ] the audion amplifiers each consisted of a number of tubes operating in parallel. when tubes are operated in parallel they are connected as shown in fig. so that the same e. m. f. is impressed on all the grids and the same plate-battery voltage on all the plates. as the grids vary in voltage there is a corresponding variation of current in the plate circuit of each tube. the total change of the current in the plate-battery circuit is, then, the sum of the changes in all the plate-filament circuits of the tubes. this scheme of connections gives a result equivalent to that of a single tube with a correspondingly larger plate and filament. [illustration: fig ] parallel connection is necessary because a single tube would be overheated in delivering to the antenna the desired amount of power. you remember that when the audion is operated as an amplifier the resistance to which it supplies current is made equal to its own internal resistance of _r_{p}_. that means that there is in the plate circuit just as much resistance inside the tube as outside. hence there is the same amount of work done each second in forcing the current through the tube as through the antenna circuit, if that is what the tube supplies. "work per second" is power; the plate battery is spending energy in the tube at the same rate as it is supplying it to the antenna where it is useful for radiation. [illustration: pl. xi.--broadcasting equipment, developed by the american telephone and telegraph company and the western electric company.] all the energy expended in the tube appears as heat. it is due to the blows which the electrons strike against the plate when they are drawn across from the filament. these impacts set into more rapid motion the molecules of the plate; and the temperature of the tube rises. there is a limit to the amount the temperature can rise without destroying the tube. for that reason the heat produced inside it must not exceed a certain limit depending upon the design of the tube and the method of cooling it as it is operated. in the arlington experiments, which i mentioned a moment ago, the tubes were cooled by blowing air on them from fans. we can find the power expended in the plate circuit of a tube by multiplying the number of volts in its battery by the number of amperes which flows. suppose the battery is volts and the current . amperes, then the power is watts. the "watt" is the unit for measuring power. tubes are rated by the number of watts which can be safely expended in them. you might ask, when you buy an audion, what is a safe rating for it. the question will not be an important one, however, unless you are to set up a transmitting set since a detector is usually operated with such small plate-voltage as not to have expended in it an amount of power dangerous to its life. in recent transmitting sets the tubes are used in parallel for the reasons i have just told, but a different method of modulation is used. the generation of the radio-frequency current is by large-powered tubes which are operated with high voltages in their plate circuits. the output of these oscillators is supplied to the antenna. the intensity of the oscillations of the current in these tubes is controlled by changing the voltage applied in their plate circuits. you can see from fig. that if the plate voltage is changed the strength of the alternating current is changed accordingly. it is the method used in changing the voltage which is particularly interesting. [illustration: fig ] the high voltages which are used in the plate circuits of these high-powered audions are obtained from generators instead of batteries. you remember from letter that an e. m. f. is induced in a coil when the coil and a magnet are suddenly changed in their positions, one being turned with reference to the other. a generator is a machine for turning a coil so that a magnet is always inducing an e. m. f. in it. it is formed by an armature carrying coils and by strong electromagnets. the machine can be driven by a steam or gas engine, by a water wheel, or by an electric motor. generators are designed either to give steady streams of electrons, that is for d-c currents, or to act as alternators. [illustration: fig ] suppose we have, as shown in fig. , a d-c generator supplying current to a vacuum tube oscillator. the current from the generator passes through an iron-cored choke coil, marked _l_{a}_ in the figure. between this coil and the plate circuit we connect across the line a telephone transmitter. to make a system which will work efficiently we shall have to suppose that this transmitter has a high resistance, say about the same as the internal resistance, _r_{p}_, of the tube and also that it can carry as large a current. of the current which comes from the generator about one-half goes to the tube and the rest to the transmitter. if the resistance of the transmitter is increased it can't take as much current. the coil, _l_{a}_, however, because of its inductance, tends to keep the same amount of current flowing through itself. for just an instant then the current in _l_{a}_ keeps steady even though the transmitter doesn't take its share. the result is more current for the oscillating tube. on the other hand if the transmitter takes more current, because its resistance is decreased, the choke coil, _l_{a}_, will momentarily tend to keep the current steady so that what the transmitter takes must be at the expense of the oscillating tube. that's one way of looking at what happens. we know, however, from fig. that to get an increase in the amplitude of the current in the oscillating tube we must apply an increased voltage to its plate circuit. that is what really happens when the transmitter increases in resistance and so doesn't take its full share of the current. the reason is this: when the transmitter resistance is increased the current in the transmitter decreases. just for a moment it looks as though the current in _l_{a}_ is going to decrease. that's the way it looks to the electrons; and you know what electrons do in an inductive circuit when they think they shall have to stop. they induce each other to keep on for a moment. for a moment they act just as if there was some extra e. m. f. which was acting to keep them going. we say, therefore, that there is an extra e. m. f., and we call this an e. m. f. of self-induction. all this time there has been active on the plate circuit of the tube the e. m. f. of the generator. to this there is added at the instant when the transmitter resistance increases, the e. m. f. of self-induction in the coil, _l_{a}_ and so the total e. m. f. applied to the tube is momentarily increased. this increased e. m. f., of course, results in an increased amplitude for the alternating current which the oscillator is supplying to the transmitting antenna. when the transmitter resistance is decreased, and a larger current should flow through the choke coil, the electrons are asked to speed up in going through the coil. at first they object and during that instant they express their objection by an e. m. f. of self-induction which opposes the generator voltage. for an instant, then, the voltage of the oscillating tube is lowered and its alternating-current output is smaller. [illustration: fig ] for the purpose of bringing about such threatened changes in current, and hence such e. m. f.'s of self-induction, the carbon transmitter is not suitable because it has too small a resistance and too small a current carrying ability. the plate circuit of a vacuum tube will serve admirably. you know from the audion characteristic that without changing the plate voltage we can, by applying a voltage to the grid, change the current through the plate circuit. now if it was a wire resistance with which we were dealing and we should be able to obtain a change in current without changing the voltage acting on this wire we would say that we had changed the resistance. we can say, therefore, that the internal resistance of the plate circuit of a vacuum tube can be changed by what we do to the grid. in fig. i have substituted the plate circuit of an audion for the transmitter of fig. and arranged to vary its resistance by changing the potential of the grid. this we do by impressing upon the grid the e. m. f. developed in the secondary of a transformer, to the primary of which is connected a battery and a carbon transmitter. the current through the primary varies in accordance with the sounds spoken into the transmitter. and for all the reasons which we have just finished studying there are similar variations in the output current of the oscillating tube in the transmitting set of fig. . in this latter figure you will notice a small air-core coil, _l_{r}_, between the oscillator and the modulator tube. this coil has a small inductance but it is enough to offer a large impedance to radio-frequency currents. the result is, it does not let the alternating currents of the oscillating tube flow into the modulator. these currents are confined to their own circuit, where they are useful in establishing similar currents in the antenna. on the other hand, the coil _l_{r}_ doesn't seriously impede low-frequency currents and therefore it does not prevent variations in the current which are at audio-frequency. it does not interfere with the changes in current which accompany the variations in the resistance of the plate circuit of the modulator. that is, it has too little impedance to act like _l_{a}_ and so it permits the modulator to vary the output of the oscillator. [illustration: fig ] the oscillating circuit of fig. includes part of the antenna. it differs also from the others i have shown in the manner in which grid and plate circuits are coupled. i'll explain by fig. . the transmitting set which i have just described involves many of the principles of the most modern sets. if you understand its operation you can probably reason out for yourself any of the other sets of which you will hear from time to time. letter amplification at intermediate frequencies dear son: in the matter of receiving i have already covered all the important principles. there is one more system, however, which you will need to know. this is spoken of either as the "super-heterodyne" or as the "intermediate-frequency amplification" method of reception. the system has two important advantages. first, it permits sharper tuning and so reduces interference from other radio signals. second, it permits more amplification of the incoming signal than is usually practicable. first as to amplification: we have seen that amplification can be accomplished either by amplifying the radio-frequency current before detection or by amplifying the audio-frequency current which results from detection. there are practical limitations to the amount of amplification which can be obtained in either case. an efficient multi-stage amplifier for radio-frequencies is difficult to build because of what we call "capacity effects." consider for example the portion of circuit shown in fig. . the wires _a_ and _b_ act like small plates of condensers. what we really have, is a lot of tiny condensers which i have shown in the figure by the light dotted-lines. if the wires are transmitting high-frequency currents these condensers offer tiny waiting-rooms where the electrons can run in and out without having to go on to the grid of the next tube. there are other difficulties in high-frequency amplifiers. this one of capacity effects between parallel wires is enough for the present. it is perhaps the most interesting because it is always more or less troublesome whenever a pair of wires is used to transmit an alternating current. [illustration: fig ] in the case of a multi-stage amplifier of audio-frequency current there is always the possibility of the amplification of any small variations in current which may naturally occur in the action of the batteries. there are always small variations in the currents from batteries, due to impurities in the materials of the plates, air bubbles, and other causes. ordinarily we don't observe these changes because they are too small to make an audible sound in the telephone receivers. suppose, however, that they take place in the battery of the first tube of a series of amplifiers. any tiny change of current is amplified many times and results in a troublesome noise in the telephone receiver which is connected to the last tube. in both types of amplifiers there is, of course, always the chance that the output circuit of one tube may be coupled to and induce some effect in the input circuit of one of the earlier tubes of the series. this will be amplified and result in a greater induction. in other words, in a circuit where there is large amplification, there is always the difficulty of avoiding a feed-back of energy from one tube to another so that the entire group acts like an oscillating circuit, that is "regeneratively." much of this difficulty can be avoided after experience. if a multi-stage amplifier is to be built for a current which does not have too high a frequency the "capacity effects" and the other difficulties due to high-frequency need not be seriously troublesome. if the frequency is not too high, but is still well above the audible limit, the noises due to variations in battery currents need not bother for they are of quite low frequency. currents from , to , cycles a second are, therefore, the most satisfactory to amplify. suppose, however, one wishes to amplify the signals from a radio-broadcasting station. the wave-length is meters and the frequency is about , cycles a second. the system of intermediate-frequency amplification solves the difficulty and we shall see how it does so. [illustration: fig ] at the receiving station a local oscillator is used. this generates a frequency which is about , cycles less than that of the incoming signal. both currents are impressed on the grid of a detector. the result is, in the output of the detector, a current which has a frequency of , cycles a second. the intensity of this detected current depends upon the intensity of the incoming signal. the "beat note" current of , cycles varies, therefore, in accordance with the voice which is modulating at the distant sending station. the speech significance is now hidden in a current of a frequency intermediate between radio and audio. this current may be amplified many times and then supplied to the grid of a detector which obtains from it a current of audio-frequency which has a speech significance. in fig. i have indicated the several operations. we can now see why this method permits sharper tuning. the whole idea of tuning, of course, is to arrange that the incoming signal shall cause the largest possible current and at the same time to provide that any signals at other wave-lengths shall cause only negligible currents. what we want a receiving set to do is to distinguish between two signals which differ slightly in wave-length and to respond to only one of them. suppose we set up a tuned circuit formed by a coil and a condenser and try it out for various frequencies of signals. you know how it will respond from our discussion in connection with the tuning curve of fig. of letter . we might find from a number of such tests that the best we can expect any tuned circuit to do is to discriminate between signals which differ about ten percent in frequency, that is, to receive well the desired signal and to fail practically entirely to receive a signal of a frequency either ten percent higher or the same amount lower. for example, if the signal is at , cycles a tuned circuit might be expected to discriminate against an interfering signal of , . if the signal is at , cycles a tuned circuit might discriminate against an interfering signal of , cycles, but an interference at , cycles would be very troublesome indeed. it couldn't be "tuned out" at all. now suppose that the desired signal is at , cycles and that there is interference at , cycles. we provide a local oscillator of , cycles a second, receive by this "super-heterodyne" method which i have just described, and so obtain an intermediate frequency. in the output of the first detector we have then a current of , -- , or , cycles due to the desired signal and also a current of , -- , or , cycles due to the interference. both these currents we can supply to another tuned circuit which is tuned for , cycles a second. it can receive the desired signal but it can discriminate against the interference because now the latter is ten percent "off the tune" of the signal. you see the question is not one of how far apart two signals are in number of cycles per second. the question always is: how large in percent is the difference between the two frequencies? the matter of separating two effects of different frequencies is a question of the "interval" between the frequencies. to find the interval between two frequencies we divide one by the other. you can see that if the quotient is larger than . or smaller than . the frequencies differ by ten percent or more. the higher the frequency the larger the number of cycles which is represented by a given size of interval. while i am writing of frequency intervals i want to tell you one thing more of importance. you remember that in human speech there may enter, and be necessary, any frequency between about and cycles a second. that we might call the range of the necessary notes in the voice. whenever we want a good reproduction of the voice we must reproduce all the frequencies in this range. suppose we have a radio-current of , cycles modulated by the frequencies in the voice range. we find in the output of our transmitting set not only a current of , cycles but currents in two other ranges of frequencies. one of these is above the signal frequency and extends from , to , cycles. the other is the same amount below and extends from , to , cycles. we say there is an upper and a lower "band of frequencies." all these currents are in the complex wave which comes from the radio-transmitter. for this statement you will have to take my word until you can handle the form of mathematics known as "trigonometry." when we receive at the distant station we receive not only currents of the signal frequency but also currents whose frequencies lie in these "side-bands." no matter what radio-frequency we may use we must transmit and receive side-bands of this range if we use the apparatus i have described in the past letters. you can see what that means. suppose we transmit at a radio-frequency of , cycles and modulate that with speech. we shall really need all the range from , cycles to , cycles for one telephone message. on the other hand if we modulated a , cycle wave by speech the side-bands are from , to , and , to , cycles. if we transmit at , cycles, that is, at meters, we really need all the range between meters and meters, as you can see by the frequencies of the side-bands. at , cycles we need only the range of wave-lengths between m. and m. if the radio-frequency is , cycles we need a still smaller range of wave-lengths to transmit the necessary side-bands. then the range is from m. to m. in the case of the transmission of speech by radio we are interested in having no interference from other signals which are within cycles of the frequency of our radio-current no matter what their wave-lengths may be. the part of the wave-length range which must be kept clear from interfering signals becomes smaller the higher the frequency which is being modulated. you can see that very few telephone messages can be sent in the long-wave-length part of the radio range and many more, although not very many after all, in the short wave-length part of the radio range. you can also see why it is desirable to keep amateurs in the short wave-length part of the range where more of them can transmit simultaneously without interfering with each other or with commercial radio stations. there is another reason, too, for keeping amateurs to the shortest wave-lengths. transmission of radio signals over short distances is best accomplished by short wave-lengths but over long distances by the longer wave-lengths. for trans-oceanic work the very longest wave-lengths are best. the "long-haul" stations, therefore, work in the frequency range immediately above , cycles a second and transmit with wave lengths of , m. and shorter. [illustration: pl. xii.--broadcasting station of the american telephone and telegraph company on the roof of the walker-lispenard bldg. in new york city where the long-distance telephone lines terminate.] letter by wire and by radio dear boy: the simplest wire telephone-circuit is formed by a transmitter, a receiver, a battery, and the connecting wire. if two persons are to carry on a conversation each must have this amount of equipment. the apparatus might be arranged as in fig. . this set-up, however, requires four wires between the two stations and you know the telephone company uses only two wires. let us find the principle upon which its system operates because it is the solution of many different problems including that of wire-to-radio connections. [illustration: fig ] imagine four wire resistances connected together to form a square as in fig. . suppose there are two pairs of equal resistances, namely _r_{ }_ and _r_{ }_, and _z_{ }_ and _z_{ }_. if we connect a generator, _g_, between the junctions _a_ and _b_ there will be two separate streams of electrons, one through the r-side and the other through the z-side of the circuit. these streams, of course, will not be of the same size for the larger stream will flow through the side which offers the smaller resistance. [illustration: fig ] half the e. m. f. between _a_ and _b_ is used up in sending the stream half the distance. half is used between _a_ and the points _c_ and _d_, and the other half between _c_ and _d_ and the other end. it doesn't make any difference whether we follow the stream from _a_ to _c_ or from _a_ to _d_, it takes half the e. m. f. to keep this stream going. points _c_ and _d_, therefore, are in the same condition of being "half-way electrically" from _a_ to _b_. the result is that there can be no current through any wire which we connect between _c_ and _d_. suppose, therefore, that we connect a telephone receiver between _c_ and _d_. no current flows in it and no sound is emitted by it. now suppose the resistance of _z_{ }_ is that of a telephone line which stretches from one telephone station to another. suppose also that _z_{ }_ is a telephone line exactly like _z_{ }_ except that it doesn't go anywhere at all because it is all shut up in a little box. we'll call _z_{ }_ an artificial telephone line. we ought to call it, as little children would say, a "make-believe" telephone line. it doesn't fool us but it does fool the electrons for they can't tell the difference between the real line _z_{ }_ and the artificial line _z_{ }_. we can make a very good artificial line by using a condenser and a resistance. the condenser introduces something of the capacity effects which i told you were always present in a circuit formed by a pair of wires. [illustration: fig ] at the other telephone station let us duplicate this apparatus, using the same real line in both cases. instead of just any generator of an alternating e. m. f. let us use a telephone transmitter. we connect the transmitter through a transformer. the system then looks like that of fig. . when some one talks at station there is no current through his receiver because it is connected to _c_ and _d_, while the e. m. f. of the transmitter is applied to _a_ and _b_. the transmitter sets up two electron streams between _a_ and _b_, and the stream which flows through the z-side of the square goes out to station . at this station the electrons have three paths between _d_ and _b_. i have marked these by arrows and you see that one of them is through the receiver. the current which is started by the transmitter at station will therefore operate the receiver at station but not at its own station. of course station can talk to in the same way. the actual set-up used by the telephone company is a little different from that which i have shown because it uses a single common battery at a central office between two subscribers. the general principle, however, is the same. [illustration: fig ] it won't make any difference if we use equal inductance coils, instead of the r-resistances, and connect the transmitter to them inductively as shown in fig. . so far as that is concerned we can also use a transformer between the receiver and the points _c_ and _d_, as shown in the same figure. [illustration: fig ] we are now ready to put in radio equipment at station . in place of the telephone receiver at station we connect a radio transmitter. then whatever a person at station says goes by wire to and on out by radio. in place of the telephone transmitter at station we connect a radio receiver. whatever that receives by radio is detected and goes by wire to the listener at station . in fig. i have shown the equipment of station . there you have the connections for wire to radio and vice versa. one of the most interesting developments of recent years is that of "wired wireless" or "carrier-current telephony" over wires. suppose that instead of broadcasting from the antenna at station we arrange to have its radio transmitter supply current to a wire circuit. we use this same pair of wires for receiving from the distant station. we can do this if we treat the radio transmitter and receiver exactly like the telephone instruments of fig. and connect them to a square of resistances. one of these resistances is, of course, the line between the stations. i have shown the general arrangement in fig. . you see what the square of resistances, or "bridge" really does for us. it lets us use a single pair of wires for messages whether they are coming or going. it does that because it lets us connect a transmitter and also a receiver to a single pair of wires in such a way that the transmitter can't affect the receiver. whatever the transmitter sends out goes along the wires to the distant receiver but doesn't affect the receiver at the sending station. this bridge permits this whether the transmitter and receiver are radio instruments or are the ordinary telephone instruments. [illustration: fig ] by its aid we may send a modulated high-frequency current over a pair of wires and receive from the same pair of wires the high-frequency current which is generated and modulated at the distant end of the line. it lets us send and receive over the same pair of wires the same sort of a modulated current as we would supply to an antenna in radio-telephone transmitting. it is the same sort of a current but it need not be anywhere near as large because we aren't broadcasting; we are sending directly to the station of the other party to our conversation. if we duplicate the apparatus we can use the same pair of wires for another telephone conversation without interfering with the first. of course, we have to use a different frequency of alternating current for each of the two conversations. we can send these two different modulated high-frequency currents over the same pair of wires and separate them by tuning at the distant end just as well as we do in radio. i won't sketch out for you the tuned circuits by which this separation is made. it's enough to give you the idea. in that way, a single pair of wires can be used for transmitting, simultaneously and without any interference, several different telephone conversations. it takes very much less power than would radio transmission and the conversations are secret. the ordinary telephone conversation can go on at the same time without any interference with those which are being carried by the modulations in high-frequency currents. a total of five conversations over the same pair of wires is the present practice. this method is used between many of the large cities of the u. s. because it lets one pair of wires do the work of five. that means a saving, for copper wire costs money. of course, all the special apparatus also costs money. you can see, therefore, that this method wouldn't be economical between cities very close together because all that is saved by not having to buy so much wire is spent in building special apparatus and in taking care of it afterwards. for long lines, however, by not having to buy five times as much wire, the bell company saves more than it costs to build and maintain the extra special apparatus. i implied a moment ago why this system is called a "carrier-current" system; it is because "the high-frequency currents carry in their modulations the speech significance." sometimes it is called a system of "multiplex" telephony because it permits more than one message at a time. this same general principle is also applied to the making of a multiplex system of telegraphy. in the multiplex telephone system we pictured transmitting and receiving sets very much like radio-telephone sets. if instead of transmitting speech each transmitter was operated as a c-w transmitter then it would transmit telegraph messages. in the same frequency range there can be more telegraph systems operated simultaneously without interfering with each other, for you remember how many cycles each radio-telephone message requires. for that reason the multiplex telegraph system which operates by carrier-currents permits as many as ten different telegraph messages simultaneously. you remember that i told you how capacity effects rob the distant end of a pair of wires of the alternating current which is being sent to them. that is always true but the effect is not very great unless the frequency of the alternating current is high. it's enough, however, so that every few hundred miles it is necessary to connect into the circuit an audion amplifier. this is true of carrier currents especially, but also true of the voice-frequency currents of ordinary telephony. the latter, however, are not weakened, that is, "attenuated," as much and consequently do not need to be amplified as much to give good intelligibility at the distant receiver. [illustration: fig ] in a telephone circuit over such a long distance as from new york city to san francisco it is usual to insert amplifiers at about a dozen points along the route. of course, these amplifiers must work for transmission in either direction, amplifying speech on its way to san francisco or in the opposite direction. at each of the amplifying stations, or "repeater stations," as they are usually called, two vacuum tube amplifiers are used, one for each direction. to connect these with the line so that each may work in the right direction there are used two of the bridges or resistance squares. you can see from the sketch of fig. how an alternating current from the east will be amplified and sent on to the west, or vice versa. [illustration: fig ] there are a large number of such repeater stations in the united states along the important telephone routes. in fig. i am showing you the location of those along the route of the famous "transcontinental telephone-circuit." this shows also a radio-telephone connection between the coast of california and catalina island. conversations have been held between this island and a ship in the atlantic ocean, as shown in the sketch. the conversation was made possible by the use of the vacuum tube and the bridge circuit. part of the way it was by wire and part by radio. wire and radio tie nicely together because both operate on the same general principles and use much of the same apparatus. [blank page] index a-battery for tubes, accumulator, acid, action of hydrogen in, air, constitution of, ammeter, alternating current, ; calibration of, ; construction of, ampere, , amplification, ; one stage of, amplitude of vibration, antenna current variation, arlington tests, artificial telephone line, atom, conception of, ; nucleus of, ; neutral, atomic number, atoms, difference between, ; kinds of, , ; motion of, attenuation of current in wires, audibility meter, audio-frequency amplifier, ; limitations of, audion, , , audion, amplifier, ; detector, theory of, ; modulator, ; oscillator, theory of, ; frequency control of, b-battery for tubes, ; effect upon characteristic, banked wound coils, battery, construction of gravity, ; dry, ; reversible or storage, band of frequencies, beat note, detection of, , bell system, arlington transmitter, blocking of tube, reason for, blue vitriol, bridge circuit, bureau of standards, c-battery for tubes, , ; variation of, ; for detection, calibration of a receiver, capacity, effect upon frequency, ; measurement of, ; unit of, ; variable, capacity effects, ; elimination of, carrier current, modulation of, ; telephony, characteristic, of vacuum tube, , ; effect of b-battery upon, ; how to plot a, characteristic curve of transformer, chemistry, choke coils, , circuit, a, b, c, ; coupled, ; defined, ; oscillating, ; plate, ; short, ; tune of a, condenser, defined, ; charging current of, ; discharge current of, ; impedance of, ; theory of, ; tuning, common battery system, connection for wire to radio, continuous waves, copper, atomic number of, copper sulphate, in solution, crystals, atomic structure, crystal detectors, ; characteristic of, ; circuit of, ; theory of, current, transient, ; radio, cycle, , damped oscillations, demodulation, detection, explained, detectors, audion, ; crystal, direct currents, dissociation, distortion, of wave form, dry battery, earth, atomic constitution, effective value, of ampere, ; of volt, efficiency, of regenerative circuit, electrical charge, electricity, current of, , electrodes, of vacuum tube, ; definition of, electrolyte, definition of, electrons, properties of, ; planetary, , ; rate of flow, ; vapor of, ; wandering of, electron streams, laws of attraction, e. m. f., ; alternating, ; of self-induction, energy, expended in tube, ; of electrons, ; radiation of, ether, feed-back circuit, frequency, , ; effect upon pitch, ; interval, ; natural, ; of voice, fundamental note, of string, gravity battery, theory of, grid, action of, ; condenser, ; current, ; leak, ; leak, construction, , ; of audion, harmonics, helium, properties of, henry, heterodyne, hot-wire ammeter, human voice, mechanism of, hydrogen, action of in acid, ; atom of, impedance, of coil, ; of condenser, ; of transformer, ; effect of iron core upon, ; matching of, intermediate-frequency amplification, inductance, defined, ; effect upon frequency, ; impedance of, ; mutual, ; of coils, ; self, ; table of values, ; unit of, ; variable, induction, principle of, inducto-meter, input circuit, interference, internal resistance, ion, definition of, ; positive and negative, , ionization, larynx, laws of attraction, loading coil, loop antenna, magnet, pole of, ; of soft iron, ; of steel, magnetism, matter, constitution of, megohm, microfarad, mil-ampere, mil-henry, modulation, , , , molecule, kinds of, ; motion of, [greek: mu], multiplex telegraphy, ; telephony, mutual inductance, ; variation of, natural frequency, nitrogen, nucleus of atom, , ohm, defined, organ pipe, oscillations, ; damped, ; to start, ; intensity of, ; natural frequency of, output circuit, overtones, oxygen, percentage in air, phase, plate, of an audion, plunger type of instrument, polarity of a coil, power, defined, ; electrical unit of, proton, properties of, radio current, modulation of, radio-frequency amplification, ; limitations, radio-frequency amplifier, , radio station connected to land line, rating of tubes, reception, essential operations in, regenerative circuit, ; frequency of, repeater stations, resistance, measurement of, ; non-inductive, ; square, resonance, resonance curve, retard coils, salt, atomic construction of, ; crystal structure, ; molecule in solution, ; percentage in sea water, saturation, sea water, atomic constitution of, self-inductance, ; unit of, side bands, ; relation to wave lengths, silicon, percentage in earth, sodium chloride, in solution, sound, production of, speech, to transmit by radio, speed of light, standard cell, storage battery, , sulphuric acid, super-heterodyne, ; advantages of, telephone receiver, ; theory of, telephone transmitter, telephony, by wire, tickler coil, transcontinental telephone line, transmission, essential operations in, transmitter, arlington, ; continuous wave, , ; for high power, transformer, ; step-up, tubes, connected in parallel, tuning, curve, ; sharp, ; with series condenser, undamped waves (see continuous waves), vacuum tube, , ; characteristics of, ; construction of, ; modulator, ; three-electrode, ; two-electrode, variometer, vibrating string, study of, vocal cords, voice frequencies, volt, definition of, ; measurement of, voltmeter, calibration of, ; construction of, watt, wave form, wave length, relation to frequency, , ; defined, wire, inductance of, wire, movement of electrons in, ; emission of electrons from, wire telephony, wired wireless, ; advantages of, x-rays, zero coupling, zinc, electrode for battery, this is the jargon file, a comprehensive compendium of hacker slang illuminating many aspects of hackish tradition, folklore, and humor. this document (the jargon file) is in the public domain, to be freely used, shared, and modified. there are (by intention) no legal restraints on what you can do with it, but there are traditions about its proper use to which many hackers are quite strongly attached. please extend the courtesy of proper citation when you quote the file, ideally with a version number, as it will change and grow over time. (examples of appropriate citation form: "jargon file . . " or "the on-line hacker jargon file, version . . , jul ".) the jargon file is a common heritage of the hacker culture. over the years a number of individuals have volunteered considerable time to maintaining the file and been recognized by the net at large as editors of it. editorial responsibilities include: to collate contributions and suggestions from others; to seek out corroborating information; to cross-reference related entries; to keep the file in a consistent format; and to announce and distribute updated versions periodically. current volunteer editors include: eric raymond eric@snark.thyrsus.com ( )- - although there is no requirement that you do so, it is considered good form to check with an editor before quoting the file in a published work or commercial product. we may have additional information that would be helpful to you and can assist you in framing your quote to reflect not only the letter of the file but its spirit as well. all contributions and suggestions about this file sent to a volunteer editor are gratefully received and will be regarded, unless otherwise labelled, as freely given donations for possible use as part of this public-domain file. from time to time a snapshot of this file has been polished, edited, and formatted for commercial publication with the cooperation of the volunteer editors and the hacker community at large. if you wish to have a bound paper copy of this file, you may find it convenient to purchase one of these. they often contain additional material not found in on-line versions. the two `authorized' editions so far are described in the revision history section; there may be more in the future. :introduction: ************** :about this file: ================= this document is a collection of slang terms used by various subcultures of computer hackers. though some technical material is included for background and flavor, it is not a technical dictionary; what we describe here is the language hackers use among themselves for fun, social communication, and technical debate. the `hacker culture' is actually a loosely networked collection of subcultures that is nevertheless conscious of some important shared experiences, shared roots, and shared values. it has its own myths, heroes, villains, folk epics, in-jokes, taboos, and dreams. because hackers as a group are particularly creative people who define themselves partly by rejection of `normal' values and working habits, it has unusually rich and conscious traditions for an intentional culture less than years old. as usual with slang, the special vocabulary of hackers helps hold their culture together --- it helps hackers recognize each other's places in the community and expresses shared values and experiences. also as usual, *not* knowing the slang (or using it inappropriately) defines one as an outsider, a mundane, or (worst of all in hackish vocabulary) possibly even a {suit}. all human cultures use slang in this threefold way --- as a tool of communication, and of inclusion, and of exclusion. among hackers, though, slang has a subtler aspect, paralleled perhaps in the slang of jazz musicians and some kinds of fine artists but hard to detect in most technical or scientific cultures; parts of it are code for shared states of *consciousness*. there is a whole range of altered states and problem-solving mental stances basic to high-level hacking which don't fit into conventional linguistic reality any better than a coltrane solo or one of maurits escher's `trompe l'oeil' compositions (escher is a favorite of hackers), and hacker slang encodes these subtleties in many unobvious ways. as a simple example, take the distinction between a {kluge} and an {elegant} solution, and the differing connotations attached to each. the distinction is not only of engineering significance; it reaches right back into the nature of the generative processes in program design and asserts something important about two different kinds of relationship between the hacker and the hack. hacker slang is unusually rich in implications of this kind, of overtones and undertones that illuminate the hackish psyche. but there is more. hackers, as a rule, love wordplay and are very conscious and inventive in their use of language. these traits seem to be common in young children, but the conformity-enforcing machine we are pleased to call an educational system bludgeons them out of most of us before adolescence. thus, linguistic invention in most subcultures of the modern west is a halting and largely unconscious process. hackers, by contrast, regard slang formation and use as a game to be played for conscious pleasure. their inventions thus display an almost unique combination of the neotenous enjoyment of language-play with the discrimination of educated and powerful intelligence. further, the electronic media which knit them together are fluid, `hot' connections, well adapted to both the dissemination of new slang and the ruthless culling of weak and superannuated specimens. the results of this process give us perhaps a uniquely intense and accelerated view of linguistic evolution in action. hackish slang also challenges some common linguistic and anthropological assumptions. for example, it has recently become fashionable to speak of `low-context' versus `high-context' communication, and to classify cultures by the preferred context level of their languages and art forms. it is usually claimed that low-context communication (characterized by precision, clarity, and completeness of self-contained utterances) is typical in cultures which value logic, objectivity, individualism, and competition; by contrast, high-context communication (elliptical, emotive, nuance-filled, multi-modal, heavily coded) is associated with cultures which value subjectivity, consensus, cooperation, and tradition. what then are we to make of hackerdom, which is themed around extremely low-context interaction with computers and exhibits primarily "low-context" values, but cultivates an almost absurdly high-context slang style? the intensity and consciousness of hackish invention make a compilation of hacker slang a particularly effective window into the surrounding culture --- and, in fact, this one is the latest version of an evolving compilation called the `jargon file', maintained by hackers themselves for over years. this one (like its ancestors) is primarily a lexicon, but also includes `topic entries' which collect background or sidelight information on hacker culture that would be awkward to try to subsume under individual entries. though the format is that of a reference volume, it is intended that the material be enjoyable to browse. even a complete outsider should find at least a chuckle on nearly every page, and much that is amusingly thought-provoking. but it is also true that hackers use humorous wordplay to make strong, sometimes combative statements about what they feel. some of these entries reflect the views of opposing sides in disputes that have been genuinely passionate; this is deliberate. we have not tried to moderate or pretty up these disputes; rather we have attempted to ensure that *everyone's* sacred cows get gored, impartially. compromise is not particularly a hackish virtue, but the honest presentation of divergent viewpoints is. the reader with minimal computer background who finds some references incomprehensibly technical can safely ignore them. we have not felt it either necessary or desirable to eliminate all such; they, too, contribute flavor, and one of this document's major intended audiences --- fledgling hackers already partway inside the culture --- will benefit from them. a selection of longer items of hacker folklore and humor is included in {appendix a}. the `outside' reader's attention is particularly directed to {appendix b}, "a portrait of j. random hacker". {appendix c} is a bibliography of non-technical works which have either influenced or described the hacker culture. because hackerdom is an intentional culture (one each individual must choose by action to join), one should not be surprised that the line between description and influence can become more than a little blurred. earlier versions of the jargon file have played a central role in spreading hacker language and the culture that goes with it to successively larger populations, and we hope and expect that this one will do likewise. :of slang, jargon, and techspeak: ================================= linguists usually refer to informal language as `slang' and reserve the term `jargon' for the technical vocabularies of various occupations. however, the ancestor of this collection was called the `jargon file', and hackish slang is traditionally `the jargon'. when talking about the jargon there is therefore no convenient way to distinguish what a *linguist* would call hackers' jargon --- the formal vocabulary they learn from textbooks, technical papers, and manuals. to make a confused situation worse, the line between hackish slang and the vocabulary of technical programming and computer science is fuzzy, and shifts over time. further, this vocabulary is shared with a wider technical culture of programmers, many of whom are not hackers and do not speak or recognize hackish slang. accordingly, this lexicon will try to be as precise as the facts of usage permit about the distinctions among three categories: *`slang': informal language from mainstream english or non-technicalsubcultures (bikers, rock fans, surfers, etc). *`jargon': without qualifier, denotes informal `slangy' languagepeculiar to hackers --- the subject of this lexicon. *`techspeak': the formal technical vocabulary of programming, computerscience, electronics, and other fields connected to hacking. this terminology will be consistently used throughout the remainder of this lexicon. the jargon/techspeak distinction is the delicate one. a lot of techspeak originated as jargon, and there is a steady continuing uptake of jargon into techspeak. on the other hand, a lot of jargon arises from overgeneralization of techspeak terms (there is more about this in the "jargon construction" section below). in general, we have considered techspeak any term that communicates primarily by a denotation well established in textbooks, technical dictionaries, or standards documents. a few obviously techspeak terms (names of operating systems, languages, or documents) are listed when they are tied to hacker folklore that isn't covered in formal sources, or sometimes to convey critical historical background necessary to understand other entries to which they are cross-referenced. some other techspeak senses of jargon words are listed in order to make the jargon senses clear; where the text does not specify that a straight technical sense is under discussion, these are marked with `[techspeak]' as an etymology. some entries have a primary sense marked this way, with subsequent jargon meanings explained in terms of it. we have also tried to indicate (where known) the apparent origins of terms. the results are probably the least reliable information in the lexicon, for several reasons. for one thing, it is well known that many hackish usages have been independently reinvented multiple times, even among the more obscure and intricate neologisms. it often seems that the generative processes underlying hackish jargon formation have an internal logic so powerful as to create substantial parallelism across separate cultures and even in different languages! for another, the networks tend to propagate innovations so quickly that `first use' is often impossible to pin down. and, finally, compendia like this one alter what they observe by implicitly stamping cultural approval on terms and widening their use. :revision history: ================== the original jargon file was a collection of hacker jargon from technical cultures including the mit ai lab, the stanford ai lab (sail), and others of the old arpanet ai/lisp/pdp- communities including bolt, beranek and newman (bbn), carnegie-mellon university (cmu), and worcester polytechnic institute (wpi). the jargon file (hereafter referred to as `jargon- ' or `the file') was begun by raphael finkel at stanford in . from this time until the plug was finally pulled on the sail computer in , the file was named aiword.rf[up,doc] there. some terms in it date back considerably earlier ({frob} and some senses of {moby}, for instance, go back to the tech model railroad club at mit and are believed to date at least back to the early s). the revisions of jargon- were all unnumbered and may be collectively considered `version '. in , mark crispin, having seen an announcement about the file on the sail computer, {ftp}ed a copy of the file to mit. he noticed that it was hardly restricted to `ai words' and so stored the file on his directory as ai:mrc;sail jargon. the file was quickly renamed jargon > (the `>' means numbered with a version number) as a flurry of enhancements were made by mark crispin and guy l. steele jr. unfortunately, amidst all this activity, nobody thought of correcting the term `jargon' to `slang' until the compendium had already become widely known as the jargon file. raphael finkel dropped out of active participation shortly thereafter and don woods became the sail contact for the file (which was subsequently kept in duplicate at sail and mit, with periodic resynchronizations). the file expanded by fits and starts until about ; richard stallman was prominent among the contributors, adding many mit and its-related coinages. in spring , a hacker named charles spurgeon got a large chunk of the file published in russell brand's `coevolution quarterly' (pages - ) with illustrations by phil wadler and guy steele (including a couple of the crunchly cartoons). this appears to have been the file's first paper publication. a late version of jargon- , expanded with commentary for the mass market, was edited by guy steele into a book published in as `the hacker's dictionary' (harper & row cn , isbn - - - ). the other jargon- editors (raphael finkel, don woods, and mark crispin) contributed to this revision, as did richard m. stallman and geoff goodfellow. this book (now out of print) is hereafter referred to as `steele- ' and those six as the steele- coauthors. shortly after the publication of steele- , the file effectively stopped growing and changing. originally, this was due to a desire to freeze the file temporarily to facilitate the production of steele- , but external conditions caused the `temporary' freeze to become permanent. the ai lab culture had been hit hard in the late s by funding cuts and the resulting administrative decision to use vendor-supported hardware and software instead of homebrew whenever possible. at mit, most ai work had turned to dedicated lisp machines. at the same time, the commercialization of ai technology lured some of the ai lab's best and brightest away to startups along the route strip in massachusetts and out west in silicon valley. the startups built lisp machines for mit; the central mit-ai computer became a {twenex} system rather than a host for the ai hackers' beloved {its}. the stanford ai lab had effectively ceased to exist by , although the sail computer continued as a computer science department resource until . stanford became a major {twenex} site, at one point operating more than a dozen tops- systems; but by the mid- s most of the interesting software work was being done on the emerging bsd unix standard. in april , the pdp- -centered cultures that had nourished the file were dealt a death-blow by the cancellation of the jupiter project at digital equipment corporation. the file's compilers, already dispersed, moved on to other things. steele- was partly a monument to what its authors thought was a dying tradition; no one involved realized at the time just how wide its influence was to be. by the mid- s the file's content was dated, but the legend that had grown up around it never quite died out. the book, and softcopies obtained off the arpanet, circulated even in cultures far removed from mit and stanford; the content exerted a strong and continuing influence on hackish language and humor. even as the advent of the microcomputer and other trends fueled a tremendous expansion of hackerdom, the file (and related materials such as the ai koans in appendix a) came to be seen as a sort of sacred epic, a hacker-culture matter of britain chronicling the heroic exploits of the knights of the lab. the pace of change in hackerdom at large accelerated tremendously --- but the jargon file, having passed from living document to icon, remained essentially untouched for seven years. this revision contains nearly the entire text of a late version of jargon- (a few obsolete pdp- -related entries were dropped after careful consultation with the editors of steele- ). it merges in about % of the steele- text, omitting some framing material and a very few entries introduced in steele- that are now also obsolete. this new version casts a wider net than the old jargon file; its aim is to cover not just ai or pdp- hacker culture but all the technical computing cultures wherein the true hacker-nature is manifested. more than half of the entries now derive from {usenet} and represent jargon now current in the c and unix communities, but special efforts have been made to collect jargon from other cultures including ibm pc programmers, amiga fans, mac enthusiasts, and even the ibm mainframe world. eric s. raymond maintains the new file with assistance from guy l. steele jr. ; these are the persons primarily reflected in the file's editorial `we', though we take pleasure in acknowledging the special contribution of the other coauthors of steele- . please email all additions, corrections, and correspondence relating to the jargon file to jargon@thyrsus.com (uucp-only sites without connections to an autorouting smart site can use ...!uunet!snark!jargon). (warning: other email addresses appear in this file *but are not guaranteed to be correct* later than the revision date on the first line. *don't* email us if an attempt to reach your idol bounces --- we have no magic way of checking addresses or looking up people.) the . . version became the main text of `the new hacker's dictionary', by eric raymond (ed.), mit press , isbn - - - . the maintainers are committed to updating the on-line version of the jargon file through and beyond paper publication, and will continue to make it available to archives and public-access sites as a trust of the hacker community. here is a chronology of the high points in the recent on-line revisions: version . . , jun : the jargon file comes alive again after a seven-year hiatus. reorganization and massive additions were by eric s. raymond, approved by guy steele. many items of unix, c, usenet, and microcomputer-based jargon were added at that time (as well as the untimely demise of mabel the monkey). version . . , aug : corresponds to reproduction copy for book. this version had lines, words, characters, and entries. version . . , jan : first public release since the book, including over fifty new entries and numerous corrections/additions to old ones. packaged with version . of vh( ) hypertext reader. this version had lines, words, characters, and entries. version . . , apr : folded in xerox parc lexicon. this version had lines, words, characters, and entries. version . . , jul : lots of new historical material. this version had lines, words, characters, and entries. version numbering: version numbers should be read as major.minor.revision. major version is reserved for the `old' (its) jargon file, jargon- . major version encompasses revisions by esr (eric s. raymond) with assistance from gls (guy l. steele, jr.). someday, the next maintainer will take over and spawn `version '. usually later versions will either completely supersede or incorporate earlier versions, so there is generally no point in keeping old versions around. our thanks to the coauthors of steele- for oversight and assistance, and to the hundreds of usenetters (too many to name here) who contributed entries and encouragement. more thanks go to several of the old-timers on the usenet group alt.folklore.computers, who contributed much useful commentary and many corrections and valuable historical perspective: joseph m. newcomer , bernie cosell , earl boebert , and joe morris . we were fortunate enough to have the aid of some accomplished linguists. david stampe and charles hoequist contributed valuable criticism; joe keane helped us improve the pronunciation guides. a few bits of this text quote previous works. we are indebted to brian a. lamacchia for obtaining permission for us to use material from the `tmrc dictionary'; also, don libes contributed some appropriate material from his excellent book `life with unix'. we thank per lindberg , author of the remarkable swedish-language 'zine `hackerbladet', for bringing `foo!' comics to our attention and smuggling one of the ibm hacker underground's own baby jargon files out to us. thanks also to maarten litmaath for generously allowing the inclusion of the ascii pronunciation guide he formerly maintained. and our gratitude to marc weiser of xerox parc for securing us permission to quote from parc's own jargon lexicon and shipping us a copy. it is a particular pleasure to acknowledge the major contributions of mark brader to the final manuscript; he read and reread many drafts, checked facts, caught typos, submitted an amazing number of thoughtful comments, and did yeoman service in catching typos and minor usage bobbles. mr. brader's rare combination of enthusiasm, persistence, wide-ranging technical knowledge, and precisionism in matters of language made his help invaluable, and the sustained volume and quality of his input over many months only allowed him to escape co-editor credit by the slimmest of margins. finally, george v. reilly helped with tex arcana and painstakingly proofread some . and . versions; steve summit contributed a number of excellent new entries and many small improvements to . . ; and eric tiedemann contributed sage advice throughout on rhetoric, amphigory, and philosophunculism. :how jargon works: ****************** :jargon construction: ===================== there are some standard methods of jargonification that became established quite early (i.e., before ), spreading from such sources as the tech model railroad club, the pdp- spacewar hackers, and john mccarthy's original crew of lispers. these include the following: :verb doubling: --------------- a standard construction in english is to double a verb and use it as an exclamation, such as "bang, bang!" or "quack, quack!". most of these are names for noises. hackers also double verbs as a concise, sometimes sarcastic comment on what the implied subject does. also, a doubled verb is often used to terminate a conversation, in the process remarking on the current state of affairs or what the speaker intends to do next. typical examples involve {win}, {lose}, {hack}, {flame}, {barf}, {chomp}: "the disk heads just crashed." "lose, lose." "mostly he talked about his latest crock. flame, flame." "boy, what a bagbiter! chomp, chomp!" some verb-doubled constructions have special meanings not immediately obvious from the verb. these have their own listings in the lexicon. the usenet culture has one *tripling* convention unrelated to this; the names of `joke' topic groups often have a tripled last element. the first and paradigmatic example was alt.swedish.chef.bork.bork.bork (a "muppet show" reference); other classics include alt.french.captain.borg.borg.borg, alt.wesley.crusher.die.die.die, comp.unix.internals.system.calls.brk.brk.brk, sci.physics.edward.teller.boom.boom.boom, and alt.sadistic.dentists.drill.drill.drill. :soundalike slang: ------------------ hackers will often make rhymes or puns in order to convert an ordinary word or phrase into something more interesting. it is considered particularly {flavorful} if the phrase is bent so as to include some other jargon word; thus the computer hobbyist magazine `dr. dobb's journal' is almost always referred to among hackers as `dr. frob's journal' or simply `dr. frob's'. terms of this kind that have been in fairly wide use include names for newspapers: boston herald => horrid (or harried) boston globe => boston glob houston (or san francisco) chronicle => the crocknicle (or the comical) new york times => new york slime however, terms like these are often made up on the spur of the moment. standard examples include: data general => dirty genitals ibm => ibm three-sickly government property --- do not duplicate (on keys) => government duplicity --- do not propagate for historical reasons => for hysterical raisins margaret jacks hall (the cs building at stanford) => marginal hacks hall this is not really similar to the cockney rhyming slang it has been compared to in the past, because cockney substitutions are opaque whereas hacker punning jargon is intentionally transparent. :the `-p' convention: --------------------- turning a word into a question by appending the syllable `p'; from the lisp convention of appending the letter `p' to denote a predicate (a boolean-valued function). the question should expect a yes/no answer, though it needn't. (see {t} and {nil}.) at dinnertime: q: "foodp?" a: "yeah, i'm pretty hungry." or "t!" at any time: q: "state-of-the-world-p?" a: (straight) "i'm about to go home." a: (humorous) "yes, the world has a state." on the phone to florida: q: "state-p florida?" a: "been reading jargon.txt again, eh?" [one of the best of these is a {gosperism}. once, when we were at a chinese restaurant, bill gosper wanted to know whether someone would like to share with him a two-person-sized bowl of soup. his inquiry was: "split-p soup?" --- gls] :overgeneralization: -------------------- a very conspicuous feature of jargon is the frequency with which techspeak items such as names of program tools, command language primitives, and even assembler opcodes are applied to contexts outside of computing wherever hackers find amusing analogies to them. thus (to cite one of the best-known examples) unix hackers often {grep} for things rather than searching for them. many of the lexicon entries are generalizations of exactly this kind. hackers enjoy overgeneralization on the grammatical level as well. many hackers love to take various words and add the wrong endings to them to make nouns and verbs, often by extending a standard rule to nonuniform cases (or vice versa). for example, because porous => porosity generous => generosity hackers happily generalize: mysterious => mysteriosity ferrous => ferrosity obvious => obviosity dubious => dubiosity also, note that all nouns can be verbed. e.g.: "all nouns can be verbed", "i'll mouse it up", "hang on while i clipboard it over", "i'm grepping the files". english as a whole is already heading in this direction (towards pure-positional grammar like chinese); hackers are simply a bit ahead of the curve. however, note that hackers avoid the unimaginative verb-making techniques characteristic of marketroids, bean-counters, and the pentagon; a hacker would never, for example, `productize', `prioritize', or `securitize' things. hackers have a strong aversion to bureaucratic bafflegab and regard those who use it with contempt. similarly, all verbs can be nouned. this is only a slight overgeneralization in modern english; in hackish, however, it is good form to mark them in some standard nonstandard way. thus: win => winnitude, winnage disgust => disgustitude hack => hackification further, note the prevalence of certain kinds of nonstandard plural forms. some of these go back quite a ways; the tmrc dictionary noted that the defined plural of `caboose' is `cabeese', and includes an entry which implies that the plural of `mouse' is {meeces}. on a similarly anglo-saxon note, almost anything ending in `x' may form plurals in `-xen' (see {vaxen} and {boxen} in the main text). even words ending in phonetic /k/ alone are sometimes treated this way; e.g., `soxen' for a bunch of socks. other funny plurals are `frobbotzim' for the plural of `frobbozz' (see {frobnitz}) and `unices' and `twenices' (rather than `unixes' and `twenexes'; see {unix}, {twenex} in main text). but note that `unixen' and `twenexen' are never used; it has been suggested that this is because `-ix' and `-ex' are latin singular endings that attract a latinate plural. finally, it has been suggested to general approval that the plural of `mongoose' ought to be `polygoose'. the pattern here, as with other hackish grammatical quirks, is generalization of an inflectional rule that in english is either an import or a fossil (such as the hebrew plural ending `-im', or the anglo-saxon plural suffix `-en') to cases where it isn't normally considered to apply. this is not `poor grammar', as hackers are generally quite well aware of what they are doing when they distort the language. it is grammatical creativity, a form of playfulness. it is done not to impress but to amuse, and never at the expense of clarity. :spoken inarticulations: ------------------------ words such as `mumble', `sigh', and `groan' are spoken in places where their referent might more naturally be used. it has been suggested that this usage derives from the impossibility of representing such noises on a comm link or in electronic mail (interestingly, the same sorts of constructions have been showing up with increasing frequency in comic strips). another expression sometimes heard is "complain!", meaning "i have a complaint!" :anthromorphization: -------------------- semantically, one rich source of jargon constructions is the hackish tendency to anthropomorphize hardware and software. this isn't done in a na"ive way; hackers don't personalize their stuff in the sense of feeling empathy with it, nor do they mystically believe that the things they work on every day are `alive'. what *is* common is to hear hardware or software talked about as though it has homunculi talking to each other inside it, with intentions and desires. thus, one hears "the protocol handler got confused", or that programs "are trying" to do things, or one may say of a routine that "its goal in life is to x". one even hears explanations like "... and its poor little brain couldn't understand x, and it died." sometimes modelling things this way actually seems to make them easier to understand, perhaps because it's instinctively natural to think of anything with a really complex behavioral repertoire as `like a person' rather than `like a thing'. of the six listed constructions, verb doubling, peculiar noun formations, anthromorphization, and (especially) spoken inarticulations have become quite general; but punning jargon is still largely confined to mit and other large universities, and the `-p' convention is found only where lispers flourish. finally, note that many words in hacker jargon have to be understood as members of sets of comparatives. this is especially true of the adjectives and nouns used to describe the beauty and functional quality of code. here is an approximately correct spectrum: monstrosity brain-damage screw bug lose misfeature crock kluge hack win feature elegance perfection the last is spoken of as a mythical absolute, approximated but never actually attained. another similar scale is used for describing the reliability of software: broken flaky dodgy fragile brittle solid robust bulletproof armor-plated note, however, that `dodgy' is primarily commonwealth hackish (it is rare in the u.s.) and may change places with `flaky' for some speakers. coinages for describing {lossage} seem to call forth the very finest in hackish linguistic inventiveness; it has been truly said that hackers have even more words for equipment failures than yiddish has for obnoxious people. :hacker writing style: ====================== we've already seen that hackers often coin jargon by overgeneralizing grammatical rules. this is one aspect of a more general fondness for form-versus-content language jokes that shows up particularly in hackish writing. one correspondent reports that he consistently misspells `wrong' as `worng'. others have been known to criticize glitches in jargon file drafts by observing (in the mode of douglas hofstadter) "this sentence no verb", or "bad speling", or "incorrectspa cing." similarly, intentional spoonerisms are often made of phrases relating to confusion or things that are confusing; `dain bramage' for `brain damage' is perhaps the most common (similarly, a hacker would be likely to write "excuse me, i'm cixelsyd today", rather than "i'm dyslexic today"). this sort of thing is quite common and is enjoyed by all concerned. hackers tend to use quotes as balanced delimiters like parentheses, much to the dismay of american editors. thus, if "jim is going" is a phrase, and so are "bill runs" and "spock groks", then hackers generally prefer to write: "jim is going", "bill runs", and "spock groks". this is incorrect according to standard american usage (which would put the continuation commas and the final period inside the string quotes); however, it is counter-intuitive to hackers to mutilate literal strings with characters that don't belong in them. given the sorts of examples that can come up in discussions of programming, american-style quoting can even be grossly misleading. when communicating command lines or small pieces of code, extra characters can be a real pain in the neck. consider, for example, a sentence in a {vi} tutorial that looks like this: then delete a line from the file by typing "dd". standard usage would make this then delete a line from the file by typing "dd." but that would be very bad -- because the reader would be prone to type the string d-d-dot, and it happens that in `vi( )' dot repeats the last command accepted. the net result would be to delete *two* lines! the jargon file follows hackish usage throughout. interestingly, a similar style is now preferred practice in great britain, though the older style (which became established for typographical reasons having to do with the aesthetics of comma and quotes in typeset text) is still accepted there. `hart's rules' and the `oxford dictionary for writers and editors' call the hacker-like style `new' or `logical' quoting. another hacker quirk is a tendency to distinguish between `scare' quotes and `speech' quotes; that is, to use british-style single quotes for marking and reserve american-style double quotes for actual reports of speech or text included from elsewhere. interestingly, some authorities describe this as correct general usage, but mainstream american english has gone to using double-quotes indiscriminately enough that hacker usage appears marked [and, in fact, i thought this was a personal quirk of mine until i checked with usenet --- esr]. one further permutation that is definitely *not* standard is a hackish tendency to do marking quotes by using apostrophes (single quotes) in pairs; that is, 'like this'. this is modelled on string and character literal syntax in some programming languages (reinforced by the fact that many character-only terminals display the apostrophe in typewriter style, as a vertical single quote). one quirk that shows up frequently in the {email} style of unix hackers in particular is a tendency for some things that are normally all-lowercase (including usernames and the names of commands and c routines) to remain uncapitalized even when they occur at the beginning of sentences. it is clear that, for many hackers, the case of such identifiers becomes a part of their internal representation (the `spelling') and cannot be overridden without mental effort (an appropriate reflex because unix and c both distinguish cases and confusing them can lead to {lossage}). a way of escaping this dilemma is simply to avoid using these constructions at the beginning of sentences. there seems to be a meta-rule behind these nonstandard hackerisms to the effect that precision of expression is more important than conformance to traditional rules; where the latter create ambiguity or lose information they can be discarded without a second thought. it is notable in this respect that other hackish inventions (for example, in vocabulary) also tend to carry very precise shades of meaning even when constructed to appear slangy and loose. in fact, to a hacker, the contrast between `loose' form and `tight' content in jargon is a substantial part of its humor! hackers have also developed a number of punctuation and emphasis conventions adapted to single-font all-ascii communications links, and these are occasionally carried over into written documents even when normal means of font changes, underlining, and the like are available. one of these is that text in all caps is interpreted as `loud', and this becomes such an ingrained synesthetic reflex that a person who goes to caps-lock while in {talk mode} may be asked to "stop shouting, please, you're hurting my ears!". also, it is common to use bracketing with unusual characters to signify emphasis. the asterisk is most common, as in "what the *hell*?" even though this interferes with the common use of the asterisk suffix as a footnote mark. the underscore is also common, suggesting underlining (this is particularly common with book titles; for example, "it is often alleged that joe haldeman wrote _the_forever_war_ as a rebuttal to robert heinlein's earlier novel of the future military, _starship_troopers_."). other forms exemplified by "=hell=", "\hell/", or "/hell/" are occasionally seen (it's claimed that in the last example the first slash pushes the letters over to the right to make them italic, and the second keeps them from falling over). finally, words may also be emphasized l i k e t h i s, or by a series of carets (^) under them on the next line of the text. there is a semantic difference between *emphasis like this* (which emphasizes the phrase as a whole), and *emphasis* *like* *this* (which suggests the writer speaking very slowly and distinctly, as if to a very young child or a mentally impaired person). bracketing a word with the `*' character may also indicate that the writer wishes readers to consider that an action is taking place or that a sound is being made. examples: *bang*, *hic*, *ring*, *grin*, *kick*, *stomp*, *mumble*. there is also an accepted convention for `writing under erasure'; the text be nice to this fool^h^h^h^hgentleman, he's in from corporate hq. would be read as "be nice to this fool, i mean this gentleman...". this comes from the fact that the digraph ^h is often used as a print representation for a backspace. it parallels (and may have been influenced by) the ironic use of `slashouts' in science-fiction fanzines. in a formula, `*' signifies multiplication but two asterisks in a row are a shorthand for exponentiation (this derives from fortran). thus, one might write ** = . another notation for exponentiation one sees more frequently uses the caret (^, ascii ); one might write instead ` ^ = '. this goes all the way back to algol- , which used the archaic ascii `up-arrow' that later became the caret; this was picked up by kemeny and kurtz's original basic, which in turn influenced the design of the `bc( )' and `dc( )' unix tools, which have probably done most to reinforce the convention on usenet. the notation is mildly confusing to c programmers, because `^' means bitwise {xor} in c. despite this, it was favored : over ** in a late- snapshot of usenet. it is used consistently in this text. in on-line exchanges, hackers tend to use decimal forms or improper fractions (` . ' or ` / ') rather than `typewriter style' mixed fractions (` - / '). the major motive here is probably that the former are more readable in a monospaced font, together with a desire to avoid the risk that the latter might be read as `three minus one-half'. the decimal form is definitely preferred for fractions with a terminating decimal representation; there may be some cultural influence here from the high status of scientific notation. another on-line convention, used especially for very large or very small numbers, is taken from c (which derived it from fortran). this is a form of `scientific notation' using `e' to replace `* ^'; for example, one year is about e seconds long. the tilde (~) is commonly used in a quantifying sense of `approximately'; that is, `~ ' means `about fifty'. on usenet and in the {mud} world, common c boolean, logical, and relational operators such as `|', `&', `||', `&&', `!', `==', `!=', `>', and `<', `>=', and `=<' are often combined with english. the pascal not-equals, `<>', is also recognized, and occasionally one sees `/=' for not-equals (from ada, common lisp, and fortran ). the use of prefix `!' as a loose synonym for `not-' or `no-' is particularly common; thus, `!clue' is read `no-clue' or `clueless'. a related practice borrows syntax from preferred programming languages to express ideas in a natural-language text. for example, one might see the following: i resently had occasion to field-test the snafu systems e adaptive gonkulator. the price was right, and the racing stripe on the case looked kind of neat, but its performance left something to be desired. #ifdef flame hasn't anyone told those idiots that you can't get decent bogon suppression with afj filters at today's net speeds? #endif /* flame */ i guess they figured the price premium for true frame-based semantic analysis was too high. unfortunately, it's also the only workable approach. i wouldn't recommend purchase of this product unless you're on a *very* tight budget. #include -- == frank foonly (fubarco systems) in the above, the `#ifdef'/`#endif' pair is a conditional compilation syntax from c; here, it implies that the text between (which is a {flame}) should be evaluated only if you have turned on (or defined on) the switch flame. the `#include' at the end is c for "include standard disclaimer here"; the `standard disclaimer' is understood to read, roughly, "these are my personal opinions and not to be construed as the official position of my employer." another habit is that of using angle-bracket enclosure to genericize a term; this derives from conventions used in {bnf}. uses like the following are common: so this walks into a bar one day, and... hackers also mix letters and numbers more freely than in mainstream usage. in particular, it is good hackish style to write a digit sequence where you intend the reader to understand the text string that names that number in english. so, hackers prefer to write ` s' rather than `nineteen-seventies' or ` 's' (the latter looks like a possessive). it should also be noted that hackers exhibit much less reluctance to use multiply nested parentheses than is normal in english. part of this is almost certainly due to influence from lisp (which uses deeply nested parentheses (like this (see?)) in its syntax a lot), but it has also been suggested that a more basic hacker trait of enjoying playing with complexity and pushing systems to their limits is in operation. one area where hackish conventions for on-line writing are still in some flux is the marking of included material from earlier messages --- what would be called `block quotations' in ordinary english. from the usual typographic convention employed for these (smaller font at an extra indent), there derived the notation of included text being indented by one ascii tab ( ) character, which under unix and many other environments gives the appearance of an -space indent. early mail and netnews readers had no facility for including messages this way, so people had to paste in copy manually. bsd `mail( )' was the first message agent to support inclusion, and early usenetters emulated its style. but the tab character tended to push included text too far to the right (especially in multiply nested inclusions), leading to ugly wraparounds. after a brief period of confusion (during which an inclusion leader consisting of three or four spaces became established in emacs and a few mailers), the use of leading `>' or `> ' became standard, perhaps owing to its use in `ed( )' to display tabs (alternatively, it may derive from the `>' that some early unix mailers used to quote lines starting with "from" in text, so they wouldn't look like the beginnings of new message headers). inclusions within inclusions keep their `>' leaders, so the `nesting level' of a quotation is visually apparent. a few other idiosyncratic quoting styles survive because they are automatically generated. one particularly ugly one looks like this: /* written hh:mm pm mmm dd, yyyy by user@site in */ /* ---------- "article subject, chopped to ch" ---------- */ /* end of text from local:group */ it is generated by an elderly, variant news-reading system called `notesfiles'. the overall trend, however, is definitely away from such verbosity. the practice of including text from the parent article when posting a followup helped solve what had been a major nuisance on usenet: the fact that articles do not arrive at different sites in the same order. careless posters used to post articles that would begin with, or even consist entirely of, "no, that's wrong" or "i agree" or the like. it was hard to see who was responding to what. consequently, around , new news-posting software evolved a facility to automatically include the text of a previous article, marked with "> " or whatever the poster chose. the poster was expected to delete all but the relevant lines. the result has been that, now, careless posters post articles containing the *entire* text of a preceding article, *followed* only by "no, that's wrong" or "i agree". many people feel that this cure is worse than the original disease, and there soon appeared newsreader software designed to let the reader skip over included text if desired. today, some posting software rejects articles containing too high a proportion of lines beginning with `>' -- but this too has led to undesirable workarounds, such as the deliberate inclusion of zero-content filler lines which aren't quoted and thus pull the message below the rejection threshold. because the default mailers supplied with unix and other operating systems haven't evolved as quickly as human usage, the older conventions using a leading tab or three or four spaces are still alive; however, >-inclusion is now clearly the prevalent form in both netnews and mail. in practice is still evolving, and disputes over the `correct' inclusion style occasionally lead to {holy wars}. one variant style reported uses the citation character `|' in place of `>' for extended quotations where original variations in indentation are being retained. one also sees different styles of quoting a number of authors in the same message: one (deprecated because it loses information) uses a leader of `> ' for everyone, another (the most common) is `> > > > ', `> > > ', etc. (or `>>>> ', `>>> ', etc., depending on line length and nesting depth) reflecting the original order of messages, and yet another is to use a different citation leader for each author, say `> ', `: ', `| ', `} ' (preserving nesting so that the inclusion order of messages is still apparent, or tagging the inclusions with authors' names). yet *another* style is to use each poster's initials (or login name) as a citation leader for that poster. occasionally one sees a `# ' leader used for quotations from authoritative sources such as standards documents; the intended allusion is to the root prompt (the special unix command prompt issued when one is running as the privileged super-user). finally, it is worth mentioning that many studies of on-line communication have shown that electronic links have a de-inhibiting effect on people. deprived of the body-language cues through which emotional state is expressed, people tend to forget everything about other parties except what is presented over that ascii link. this has both good and bad effects. the good one is that it encourages honesty and tends to break down hierarchical authority relationships; the bad is that it may encourage depersonalization and gratuitous rudeness. perhaps in response to this, experienced netters often display a sort of conscious formal politesse in their writing that has passed out of fashion in other spoken and written media (for example, the phrase "well said, sir!" is not uncommon). many introverted hackers who are next to inarticulate in person communicate with considerable fluency over the net, perhaps precisely because they can forget on an unconscious level that they are dealing with people and thus don't feel stressed and anxious as they would face to face. though it is considered gauche to publicly criticize posters for poor spelling or grammar, the network places a premium on literacy and clarity of expression. it may well be that future historians of literature will see in it a revival of the great tradition of personal letters as art. :hacker speech style: ===================== hackish speech generally features extremely precise diction, careful word choice, a relatively large working vocabulary, and relatively little use of contractions or street slang. dry humor, irony, puns, and a mildly flippant attitude are highly valued --- but an underlying seriousness and intelligence are essential. one should use just enough jargon to communicate precisely and identify oneself as a member of the culture; overuse of jargon or a breathless, excessively gung-ho attitude is considered tacky and the mark of a loser. this speech style is a variety of the precisionist english normally spoken by scientists, design engineers, and academics in technical fields. in contrast with the methods of jargon construction, it is fairly constant throughout hackerdom. it has been observed that many hackers are confused by negative questions --- or, at least, that the people to whom they are talking are often confused by the sense of their answers. the problem is that they have done so much programming that distinguishes between if (going) { and if (!going) { that when they parse the question "aren't you going?" it seems to be asking the opposite question from "are you going?", and so merits an answer in the opposite sense. this confuses english-speaking non-hackers because they were taught to answer as though the negative part weren't there. in some other languages (including russian, chinese, and japanese) the hackish interpretation is standard and the problem wouldn't arise. hackers often find themselves wishing for a word like french `si' or german `doch' with which one could unambiguously answer `yes' to a negative question. for similar reasons, english-speaking hackers almost never use double negatives, even if they live in a region where colloquial usage allows them. the thought of uttering something that logically ought to be an affirmative knowing it will be misparsed as a negative tends to disturb them. here's a related quirk. a non-hacker who is indelicate enough to ask a question like "so, are you working on finding that bug *now* or leaving it until later?" is likely to get the perfectly correct answer "yes!" (that is, "yes, i'm doing it either now or later, and you didn't ask which!"). :international style: ===================== although the jargon file remains primarily a lexicon of hacker usage in american english, we have made some effort to get input from abroad. though the hacker-speak of other languages often uses translations of jargon from english (often as transmitted to them by earlier jargon file versions!), the local variations are interesting, and knowledge of them may be of some use to travelling hackers. there are some references herein to `commonwealth english'. these are intended to describe some variations in hacker usage as reported in the english spoken in great britain and the commonwealth (canada, australia, india, etc. --- though canada is heavily influenced by american usage). there is also an entry on {{commonwealth hackish}} reporting some general phonetic and vocabulary differences from u.s. hackish. hackers in western europe and (especially) scandinavia are reported to often use a mixture of english and their native languages for technical conversation. occasionally they develop idioms in their english usage that are influenced by their native-language styles. some of these are reported here. a few notes on hackish usages in russian have been added where they are parallel with english idioms and thus comprehensible to english-speakers. :how to use the lexicon: ************************ :pronunciation guide: ===================== pronunciation keys are provided in the jargon listings for all entries that are neither dictionary words pronounced as in standard english nor obvious compounds thereof. slashes bracket phonetic pronunciations, which are to be interpreted using the following conventions: . syllables are hyphen-separated, except that an accent or back-accent follows each accented syllable (the back-accent marks a secondary accent in some words of four or more syllables). . consonants are pronounced as in american english. the letter `g' is always hard (as in "got" rather than "giant"); `ch' is soft ("church" rather than "chemist"). the letter `j' is the sound that occurs twice in "judge". the letter `s' is always as in "pass", never a z sound. the digraph `kh' is the guttural of "loch" or "l'chaim". . uppercase letters are pronounced as their english letter names; thus (for example) /h-l-l/ is equivalent to /aitch el el/. /z/ may be pronounced /zee/ or /zed/ depending on your local dialect. . vowels are represented as follows: a back, that ar far, mark aw flaw, caught ay bake, rain e less, men ee easy, ski eir their, software i trip, hit i: life, sky o father, palm oh flow, sew oo loot, through or more, door ow out, how oy boy, coin uh but, some u put, foot y yet, young yoo few, chew [y]oo /oo/ with optional fronting as in `news' (/nooz/ or /nyooz/) a /*/ is used for the `schwa' sound of unstressed or occluded vowels (the one that is often written with an upside-down `e'). the schwa vowel is omitted in syllables containing vocalic r, l, m or n; that is, `kitten' and `color' would be rendered /kit'n/ and /kuhl'r/, not /kit'*n/ and /kuhl'*r/. entries with a pronunciation of `//' are written-only usages. (no, unix weenies, this does *not* mean `pronounce like previous pronunciation'!) :other lexicon conventions: =========================== entries are sorted in case-blind ascii collation order (rather than the letter-by-letter order ignoring interword spacing common in mainstream dictionaries), except that all entries beginning with nonalphabetic characters are sorted after z. the case-blindness is a feature, not a bug. the beginning of each entry is marked by a colon (`:') at the left margin. this convention helps out tools like hypertext browsers that benefit from knowing where entry boundaries are, but aren't as context-sensitive as humans. in pure ascii renderings of the jargon file, you will see {} used to bracket words which themselves have entries in the file. this isn't done all the time for every such word, but it is done everywhere that a reminder seems useful that the term has a jargon meaning and one might wish to refer to its entry. in this all-ascii version, headwords for topic entries are distinguished from those for ordinary entries by being followed by "::" rather than ":"; similarly, references are surrounded by "{{" and "}}" rather than "{" and "}". defining instances of terms and phrases appear in `slanted type'. a defining instance is one which occurs near to or as part of an explanation of it. prefix * is used as linguists do; to mark examples of incorrect usage. we follow the `logical' quoting convention described in the writing style section above. in addition, we reserve double quotes for actual excerpts of text or (sometimes invented) speech. scare quotes (which mark a word being used in a nonstandard way), and philosopher's quotes (which turn an utterance into the string of letters or words that name it) are both rendered with single quotes. references such as `malloc( )' and `patch( )' are to unix facilities (some of which, such as `patch( )', are actually freeware distributed over usenet). the unix manuals use `foo(n)' to refer to item foo in section (n) of the manual, where n= is utilities, n= is system calls, n= is c library routines, n= is games, and n= (where present) is system administration utilities. sections , , and of the manuals have changed roles frequently and in any case are not referred to in any of the entries. various abbreviations used frequently in the lexicon are summarized here: abbrev. abbreviation adj. adjective adv. adverb alt. alternate cav. caveat esp. especially excl. exclamation imp. imperative interj. interjection n. noun obs. obsolete pl. plural poss. possibly pref. prefix prob. probably prov. proverbial quant. quantifier suff. suffix syn. synonym (or synonymous with) v. verb (may be transitive or intransitive) var. variant vi. intransitive verb vt. transitive verb where alternate spellings or pronunciations are given, alt. separates two possibilities with nearly equal distribution, while var. prefixes one that is markedly less common than the primary. where a term can be attributed to a particular subculture or is known to have originated there, we have tried to so indicate. here is a list of abbreviations used in etymologies: berkeley university of california at berkeley cambridge the university in england (*not* the city in massachusetts where mit happens to be located!) bbn bolt, beranek & newman cmu carnegie-mellon university commodore commodore business machines dec the digital equipment corporation fairchild the fairchild instruments palo alto development group fidonet see the {fidonet} entry ibm international business machines mit massachusetts institute of technology; esp. the legendary mit ai lab culture of roughly to and its feeder groups, including the tech model railroad club nrl naval research laboratories nyu new york university oed the oxford english dictionary purdue purdue university sail stanford artificial intelligence laboratory (at stanford university) si from syst`eme international, the name for the standard conventions of metric nomenclature used in the sciences stanford stanford university sun sun microsystems tmrc some mitisms go back as far as the tech model railroad club (tmrc) at mit c. . material marked tmrc is from `an abridged dictionary of the tmrc language', originally compiled by pete samson in ucla university of california at los angeles uk the united kingdom (england, wales, scotland, northern ireland) usenet see the {usenet} entry wpi worcester polytechnic institute, site of a very active community of pdp- hackers during the s xerox parc xerox's palo alto research center, site of much pioneering research in user interface design and networking yale yale university some other etymology abbreviations such as {unix} and {pdp- } refer to technical cultures surrounding specific operating systems, processors, or other environments. the fact that a term is labelled with any one of these abbreviations does not necessarily mean its use is confined to that culture. in particular, many terms labelled `mit' and `stanford' are in quite general use. we have tried to give some indication of the distribution of speakers in the usage notes; however, a number of factors mentioned in the introduction conspire to make these indications less definite than might be desirable. a few new definitions attached to entries are marked [proposed]. these are usually generalizations suggested by editors or usenet respondents in the process of commenting on previous definitions of those entries. these are *not* represented as established jargon. :format for new entries: ======================== all contributions and suggestions about the jargon file will be considered donations to be placed in the public domain as part of this file, and may be used in subsequent paper editions. submissions may be edited for accuracy, clarity and concision. try to conform to the format already being used --- head-words separated from text by a colon (double colon for topic entries), cross-references in curly brackets (doubled for topic entries), pronunciations in slashes, etymologies in square brackets, single-space after definition numbers and word classes, etc. stick to the standard ascii character set ( -bit printable, no high-half characters or [nt]roff/tex/scribe escapes), as one of the versions generated from the master file is an info document that has to be viewable on a character tty. we are looking to expand the file's range of technical specialties covered. there are doubtless rich veins of jargon yet untapped in the scientific computing, graphics, and networking hacker communities; also in numerical analysis, computer architectures and vlsi design, language design, and many other related fields. send us your jargon! we are *not* interested in straight technical terms explained by textbooks or technical dictionaries unless an entry illuminates `underground' meanings or aspects not covered by official histories. we are also not interested in `joke' entries --- there is a lot of humor in the file but it must flow naturally out of the explanations of what hackers do and how they think. it is ok to submit items of jargon you have originated if they have spread to the point of being used by people who are not personally acquainted with you. we prefer items to be attested by independent submission from two different sites. the jargon file will be regularly maintained and re-posted from now on and will include a version number. read it, pass it around, contribute --- this is *your* monument! the jargon lexicon ****************** = a = ===== :abbrev: /*-breev'/, /*-brev'/ n. common abbreviation for `abbreviation'. :abend: [abnormal end] /ah'bend/, /*-bend'/ n. abnormal termination (of software); {crash}; {lossage}. derives from an error message on the ibm ; used jokingly by hackers but seriously mainly by {code grinder}s. usually capitalized, but may appear as `abend'. hackers will try to persuade you that abend is called `abend' because it is what system operators do to the machine late on friday when they want to call it a day, and hence is from the german `abend' = `evening'. :accumulator: n. . archaic term for a register. on-line use of it as a synonym for `register' is a fairly reliable indication that the user has been around for quite a while and/or that the architecture under discussion is quite old. the term in full is almost never used of microprocessor registers, for example, though symbolic names for arithmetic registers beginning in `a' derive from historical use of the term `accumulator' (and not, actually, from `arithmetic'). confusingly, though, an `a' register name prefix may also stand for `address', as for example on the motorola x family. . a register being used for arithmetic or logic (as opposed to addressing or a loop index), especially one being used to accumulate a sum or count of many items. this use is in context of a particular routine or stretch of code. "the foobaz routine uses a as an accumulator." . one's in-basket (esp. among old-timers who might use sense ). "you want this reviewed? sure, just put it in the accumulator." (see {stack}.) :ack: /ak/ interj. . [from the ascii mnemonic for ] acknowledge. used to register one's presence (compare mainstream *yo!*). an appropriate response to {ping} or {enq}. . [from the comic strip "bloom county"] an exclamation of surprised disgust, esp. in "ack pffft!" semi-humorous. generally this sense is not spelled in caps (ack) and is distinguished by a following exclamation point. . used to politely interrupt someone to tell them you understand their point (see {nak}). thus, for example, you might cut off an overly long explanation with "ack. ack. ack. i get it now". there is also a usage "ack?" (from sense ) meaning "are you there?", often used in email when earlier mail has produced no reply, or during a lull in {talk mode} to see if the person has gone away (the standard humorous response is of course {nak} (sense ), i.e., "i'm not here"). :ad-hockery: /ad-hok'*r-ee/ [purdue] n. . gratuitous assumptions made inside certain programs, esp. expert systems, which lead to the appearance of semi-intelligent behavior but are in fact entirely arbitrary. for example, fuzzy-matching input tokens that might be typing errors against a symbol table can make it look as though a program knows how to spell. . special-case code to cope with some awkward input that would otherwise cause a program to {choke}, presuming normal inputs are dealt with in some cleaner and more regular way. also called `ad-hackery', `ad-hocity' (/ad-hos'*-tee/), `ad-crockery'. see also {eliza effect}. :ada:: n. a {{pascal}}-descended language that has been made mandatory for department of defense software projects by the pentagon. hackers are nearly unanimous in observing that, technically, it is precisely what one might expect given that kind of endorsement by fiat; designed by committee, crockish, difficult to use, and overall a disastrous, multi-billion-dollar boondoggle (one common description is "the pl/i of the s"). hackers find ada's exception-handling and inter-process communication features particularly hilarious. ada lovelace (the daughter of lord byron who became the world's first programmer while cooperating with charles babbage on the design of his mechanical computing engines in the mid- s) would almost certainly blanch at the use to which her name has latterly been put; the kindest thing that has been said about it is that there is probably a good small language screaming to get out from inside its vast, {elephantine} bulk. :adger: /aj'r/ [ucla] vt. to make a bonehead move with consequences that could have been foreseen with a slight amount of mental effort. e.g., "he started removing files and promptly adgered the whole project". compare {dumbass attack}. :admin: /ad-min'/ n. short for `administrator'; very commonly used in speech or on-line to refer to the systems person in charge on a computer. common constructions on this include `sysadmin' and `site admin' (emphasizing the administrator's role as a site contact for email and news) or `newsadmin' (focusing specifically on news). compare {postmaster}, {sysop}, {system mangler}. :advent: /ad'vent/ n. the prototypical computer adventure game, first implemented on the {pdp- } by will crowther as an attempt at computer-refereed fantasy gaming, and expanded into a puzzle-oriented game by don woods. now better known as adventure, but the {{tops- }} operating system permitted only -letter filenames. see also {vadding}. this game defined the terse, dryly humorous style now expected in text adventure games, and popularized several tag lines that have become fixtures of hacker-speak: "a huge green fierce snake bars the way!" "i see no x here" (for some noun x). "you are in a maze of twisty little passages, all alike." "you are in a little maze of twisty passages, all different." the `magic words' {xyzzy} and {plugh} also derive from this game. crowther, by the way, participated in the exploration of the mammoth & flint ridge cave system; it actually *has* a `colossal cave' and a `bedquilt' as in the game, and the `y ' that also turns up is cavers' jargon for a map reference to a secondary entrance. :afj: n. written-only abbreviation for "april fool's joke". elaborate april fool's hoaxes are a hallowed tradition on usenet and internet; see {kremvax} for an example. in fact, april fool's day is the *only* seasonal holiday marked by customary observances on the hacker networks. :ai-complete: /a-i k*m-pleet'/ [mit, stanford: by analogy with `np-complete' (see {np-})] adj. used to describe problems or subproblems in ai, to indicate that the solution presupposes a solution to the `strong ai problem' (that is, the synthesis of a human-level intelligence). a problem that is ai-complete is, in other words, just too hard. examples of ai-complete problems are `the vision problem' (building a system that can see as well as a human) and `the natural language problem' (building a system that can understand and speak a natural language as well as a human). these may appear to be modular, but all attempts so far ( ) to solve them have foundered on the amount of context information and `intelligence' they seem to require. see also {gedanken}. :ai koans: /a-i koh'anz/ pl.n. a series of pastiches of zen teaching riddles created by danny hillis at the mit ai lab around various major figures of the lab's culture (several are included under "{a selection of ai koans}" in {appendix a}). see also {ha ha only serious}, {mu}, and {{humor, hacker}}. :aids: /aydz/ n. short for a* infected disk syndrome (`a*' is a {glob} pattern that matches, but is not limited to, apple), this condition is quite often the result of practicing unsafe {sex}. see {virus}, {worm}, {trojan horse}, {virgin}. :aidx: n. /aydkz/ n. derogatory term for ibm's perverted version of unix, aix, especially for the aix .? used in the ibm rs/ series. a victim of the dreaded "hybridism" disease, this attempt to combine the two main currents of the unix stream ({bsd} and {usg unix}) became a {monstrosity} to haunt system administrators' dreams. for example, if new accounts are created while many users are logged on, the load average jumps quickly over due to silly implementation of the user databases. for a quite similar disease, compare {hp-sux}. also, compare {terminak}, {macintrash} {nominal semidestructor}, {open deathtrap}, {scumos}, {sun-stools}. :airplane rule: n. "complexity increases the possibility of failure; a twin-engine airplane has twice as many engine problems as a single-engine airplane." by analogy, in both software and electronics, the rule that simplicity increases robustness (see also {kiss principle}). it is correspondingly argued that the right way to build reliable systems is to put all your eggs in one basket, after making sure that you've built a really *good* basket. :aliasing bug: n. a class of subtle programming errors that can arise in code that does dynamic allocation, esp. via `malloc( )' or equivalent. if more than one pointer addresses (`aliases for') a given hunk of storage, it may happen that the storage is freed or reallocated (and thus moved) through one alias and then referenced through another, which may lead to subtle (and possibly intermittent) lossage depending on the state and the allocation history of the malloc {arena}. avoidable by use of allocation strategies that never alias allocated core. also avoidable by use of higher-level languages, such as {lisp}, which employ a garbage collector (see {gc}). also called a {stale pointer bug}. see also {precedence lossage}, {smash the stack}, {fandango on core}, {memory leak}, {memory smash}, {overrun screw}, {spam}. historical note: though this term is nowadays associated with c programming, it was already in use in a very similar sense in the algol- and fortran communities in the s. :all-elbows: adj. of a tsr (terminate-and-stay-resident) ibm pc program, such as the n pop-up calendar and calculator utilities that circulate on {bbs} systems: unsociable. used to describe a program that rudely steals the resources that it needs without considering that other tsrs may also be resident. one particularly common form of rudeness is lock-up due to programs fighting over the keyboard interrupt. see {rude}, also {mess-dos}. :alpha particles: n. see {bit rot}. :alt: /awlt/ . n. the alt shift key on an ibm pc or {clone}. . n. the `clover' or `command' key on a macintosh; use of this term usually reveals that the speaker hacked pcs before coming to the mac (see also {feature key}). some mac hackers, confusingly, reserve `alt' for the option key. . n.obs. [pdp- ; often capitalized to alt] alternate name for the ascii esc character (ascii ), after the keycap labeling on some older terminals. also `altmode' (/awlt'mohd/). this character was almost never pronounced `escape' on an its system, in {teco}, or under tops- --- always alt, as in "type alt alt to end a teco command" or "alt-u onto the system" (for "log onto the [its] system"). this was probably because alt is more convenient to say than `escape', especially when followed by another alt or a character (or another alt *and* a character, for that matter). :alt bit: /awlt bit/ [from alternate] adj. see {meta bit}. :altmode: n. syn. {alt} sense . :aluminum book: [mit] n. `common lisp: the language', by guy l. steele jr. (digital press, first edition , second edition ). note that due to a technical screwup some printings of the second edition are actually of a color the author describes succinctly as "yucky green". see also {{book titles}}. :amoeba: n. humorous term for the commodore amiga personal computer. :amp off: [purdue] vt. to run in {background}. from the unix shell `&' operator. :amper: n. common abbreviation for the name of the ampersand (`&', ascii ) character. see {{ascii}} for other synonyms. :angle brackets: n. either of the characters `<' (ascii ) and `>' (ascii ) (ascii less-than or greater-than signs). the {real world} angle brackets used by typographers are actually taller than a less-than or greater-than sign. see {broket}, {{ascii}}. :angry fruit salad: n. a bad visual-interface design that uses too many colors. this derives, of course, from the bizarre day-glo colors found in canned fruit salad. too often one sees similar effects from interface designers using color window systems such as {x}; there is a tendency to create displays that are flashy and attention-getting but uncomfortable for long-term use. :annoybot: /*-noy-bot/ [irc] n. see {robot}. :aos: . /aws/ (east coast), /ay-os/ (west coast) [based on a pdp- increment instruction] vt.,obs. to increase the amount of something. "aos the campfire." usage: considered silly, and now obsolete. now largely supplanted by {bump}. see {sos}. . a {{multics}}-derived os supported at one time by data general. this was pronounced /a-o-s/ or /a-os/. a spoof of the standard aos system administrator's manual (`how to load and generate your aos system') was created, issued a part number, and circulated as photocopy folklore. it was called `how to goad and levitate your chaos system'. . algebraic operating system, in reference to those calculators which use infix instead of postfix (reverse polish) notation. historical note: aos in sense was the name of a {pdp- } instruction that took any memory location in the computer and added to it; aos meant `add one and do not skip'. why, you may ask, does the `s' stand for `do not skip' rather than for `skip'? ah, here was a beloved piece of pdp- folklore. there were eight such instructions: aose added and then skipped the next instruction if the result was equal to zero; aosg added and then skipped if the result was greater than ; aosn added and then skipped if the result was not ; aosa added and then skipped always; and so on. just plain aos didn't say when to skip, so it never skipped. for similar reasons, aoj meant `add one and do not jump'. even more bizarre, skip meant `do not skip'! if you wanted to skip the next instruction, you had to say `skipa'. likewise, jump meant `do not jump'; the unconditional form was jumpa. however, hackers never did this. by some quirk of the 's design, the {jrst} (jump and restore flag with no flag specified) was actually faster and so was invariably used. such were the perverse mysteries of assembler programming. :app: /ap/ n. short for `application program', as opposed to a systems program. what systems vendors are forever chasing developers to create for their environments so they can sell more boxes. hackers tend not to think of the things they themselves run as apps; thus, in hacker parlance the term excludes compilers, program editors, games, and messaging systems, though a user would consider all those to be apps. oppose {tool}, {operating system}. :arc: [primarily msdos] vt. to create a compressed {archive} from a group of files using sea arc, pkware pkarc, or a compatible program. rapidly becoming obsolete as the arc compression method is falling into disuse, having been replaced by newer compression techniques. see {tar and feather}, {zip}. :arc wars: [primarily msdos] n. {holy wars} over which archiving program one should use. the first arc war was sparked when system enhancement associates (sea) sued pkware for copyright and trademark infringement on its arc program. pkware's pkarc outperformed arc on both compression and speed while largely retaining compatibility (it introduced a new compression type that could be disabled for backward-compatibility). pkware settled out of court to avoid enormous legal costs (both sea and pkware are small companies); as part of the settlement, the name of pkarc was changed to pkpak. the public backlash against sea for bringing suit helped to hasten the demise of arc as a standard when pkware and others introduced new, incompatible archivers with better compression algorithms. :archive: n. . a collection of several files bundled into one file by a program such as `ar( )', `tar( )', `cpio( )', or {arc} for shipment or archiving (sense ). see also {tar and feather}. . a collection of files or archives (sense ) made available from an `archive site' via {ftp} or an email server. :arena: [unix] n. the area of memory attached to a process by `brk( )' and `sbrk( )' and used by `malloc( )' as dynamic storage. so named from a semi-mythical `malloc: corrupt arena' message supposedly emitted when some early versions became terminally confused. see {overrun screw}, {aliasing bug}, {memory leak}, {memory smash}, {smash the stack}. :arg: /arg/ n. abbreviation for `argument' (to a function), used so often as to have become a new word (like `piano' from `pianoforte'). "the sine function takes arg, but the arc-tangent function can take either or args." compare {param}, {parm}, {var}. :armor-plated: n. syn. for {bulletproof}. :asbestos: adj. used as a modifier to anything intended to protect one from {flame}s. important cases of this include {asbestos longjohns} and {asbestos cork award}, but it is used more generally. :asbestos cork award: n. once, long ago at mit, there was a {flamer} so consistently obnoxious that another hacker designed, had made, and distributed posters announcing that said flamer had been nominated for the `asbestos cork award'. persons in any doubt as to the intended application of the cork should consult the etymology under {flame}. since then, it is agreed that only a select few have risen to the heights of bombast required to earn this dubious dignity --- but there is no agreement on *which* few. :asbestos longjohns: n. notional garments often donned by {usenet} posters just before emitting a remark they expect will elicit {flamage}. this is the most common of the {asbestos} coinages. also `asbestos underwear', `asbestos overcoat', etc. :ascii:: [american standard code for information interchange] /as'kee/ n. the predominant character set encoding of present-day computers. uses bits for each character, whereas most earlier codes (including an early version of ascii) used fewer. this change allowed the inclusion of lowercase letters --- a major {win} --- but it did not provide for accented letters or any other letterforms not used in english (such as the german sharp-s and the ae-ligature which is a letter in, for example, norwegian). it could be worse, though. it could be much worse. see {{ebcdic}} to understand how. computers are much pickier and less flexible about spelling than humans; thus, hackers need to be very precise when talking about characters, and have developed a considerable amount of verbal shorthand for them. every character has one or more names --- some formal, some concise, some silly. common jargon names for ascii characters are collected here. see also individual entries for {bang}, {excl}, {open}, {ques}, {semi}, {shriek}, {splat}, {twiddle}, and {yu-shiang whole fish}. this list derives from revision . of the usenet ascii pronunciation guide. single characters are listed in ascii order; character pairs are sorted in by first member. for each character, common names are given in rough order of popularity, followed by names that are reported but rarely seen; official ansi/ccitt names are surrounded by brokets: <>. square brackets mark the particularly silly names introduced by {intercal}. ordinary parentheticals provide some usage information. ! common: {bang}; pling; excl; shriek; . rare: factorial; exclam; smash; cuss; boing; yell; wow; hey; wham; eureka; [spark-spot]; soldier. " common: double quote; quote. rare: literal mark; double-glitch; ; ; dirk; [rabbit-ears]; double prime. # common: ; pound; pound sign; hash; sharp; {crunch}; hex; [mesh]; octothorpe. rare: flash; crosshatch; grid; pig-pen; tictactoe; scratchmark; thud; thump; {splat}. $ common: dollar; . rare: currency symbol; buck; cash; string (from basic); escape (when used as the echo of ascii esc); ding; cache; [big money]. % common: percent; ; mod; grapes. rare: [double-oh-seven]. & common: ; amper; and. rare: address (from c); reference (from c++); andpersand; bitand; background (from `sh( )'); pretzel; amp. [intercal called this `ampersand'; what could be sillier?] ' common: single quote; quote; . rare: prime; glitch; tick; irk; pop; [spark]; ; . () common: left/right paren; left/right parenthesis; left/right; paren/thesis; open/close paren; open/close; open/close parenthesis; left/right banana. rare: so/al-ready; lparen/rparen; ; open/close round bracket, parenthisey/unparenthisey; [wax/wane]; left/right ear. * common: star; [{splat}]; . rare: wildcard; gear; dingle; mult; spider; aster; times; twinkle; glob (see {glob}); {nathan hale}. + common: ; add. rare: cross; [intersection]. , common: . rare: ; [tail]. - common: dash; ; . rare: [worm]; option; dak; bithorpe. . common: dot; point; ; . rare: radix point; full stop; [spot]. / common: slash; stroke; ; forward slash. rare: diagonal; solidus; over; slak; virgule; [slat]. : common: . rare: dots; [two-spot]. ; common: ; semi. rare: weenie; [hybrid], pit-thwong. <> common: ; left/right angle bracket; bra/ket; left/right broket. rare: from/{into, towards}; read from/write to; suck/blow; comes-from/gozinta; in/out; crunch/zap (all from unix); [angle/right angle]. = common: ; gets; takes. rare: quadrathorpe; [half-mesh]. ? common: query; ; {ques}. rare: whatmark; [what]; wildchar; huh; hook; buttonhook; hunchback. @ common: at sign; at; strudel. rare: each; vortex; whorl; [whirlpool]; cyclone; snail; ape; cat; rose; cabbage; . v rare: [book]. [] common: left/right square bracket; ; bracket/unbracket; left/right bracket. rare: square/unsquare; [u turn/u turn back]. \ common: backslash; escape (from c/unix); reverse slash; slosh; backslant; backwhack. rare: bash; ; reversed virgule; [backslat]. ^ common: hat; control; uparrow; caret; . rare: chevron; [shark (or shark-fin)]; to the (`to the power of'); fang; pointer (in pascal). _ common: ; underscore; underbar; under. rare: score; backarrow; skid; [flatworm]. ` common: backquote; left quote; left single quote; open quote; ; grave. rare: backprime; [backspark]; unapostrophe; birk; blugle; back tick; back glitch; push; ; quasiquote. {} common: open/close brace; left/right brace; left/right squiggly; left/right squiggly bracket/brace; left/right curly bracket/brace; . rare: brace/unbrace; curly/uncurly; leftit/rytit; left/right squirrelly; [embrace/bracelet]. | common: bar; or; or-bar; v-bar; pipe; vertical bar. rare: ; gozinta; thru; pipesinta (last three from unix); [spike]. ~ common: ; squiggle; {twiddle}; not. rare: approx; wiggle; swung dash; enyay; [sqiggle (sic)]. the pronunciation of `#' as `pound' is common in the u.s. but a bad idea; {{commonwealth hackish}} has its own, rather more apposite use of `pound sign' (confusingly, on british keyboards the pound graphic happens to replace `#'; thus britishers sometimes call `#' on a u.s.-ascii keyboard `pound', compounding the american error). the u.s. usage derives from an old-fashioned commercial practice of using a `#' suffix to tag pound weights on bills of lading. the character is usually pronounced `hash' outside the u.s. the `uparrow' name for circumflex and `leftarrow' name for underline are historical relics from archaic ascii (the version), which had these graphics in those character positions rather than the modern punctuation characters. the `swung dash' or `approximation' sign is not quite the same as tilde in typeset material but the ascii tilde serves for both (compare {angle brackets}). some other common usages cause odd overlaps. the `#', `$', `>', and `&' characters, for example, are all pronounced "hex" in different communities because various assemblers use them as a prefix tag for hexadecimal constants (in particular, `#' in many assembler-programming cultures, `$' in the world, `>' at texas instruments, and `&' on the bbc micro, sinclair, and some z machines). see also {splat}. the inability of ascii text to correctly represent any of the world's other major languages makes the designers' choice of bits look more and more like a serious {misfeature} as the use of international networks continues to increase (see {software rot}). hardware and software from the u.s. still tends to embody the assumption that ascii is the universal character set; this is a a major irritant to people who want to use a character set suited to their own languages. perversely, though, efforts to solve this problem by proliferating `national' character sets produce an evolutionary pressure to use a *smaller* subset common to all those in use. :ascii art: n. the fine art of drawing diagrams using the ascii character set (mainly `|', `-', `/', `\', and `+'). also known as `character graphics' or `ascii graphics'; see also {boxology}. here is a serious example: o----)||(--+--|<----+ +---------o + d o l )||( | | | c u a i )||( +-->|-+ | +-\/\/-+--o - t c n )||( | | | | p e )||( +-->|-+--)---+--)|--+-o u )||( | | | gnd t o----)||(--+--|<----+----------+ a power supply consisting of a full wave rectifier circuit feeding a capacitor input filter circuit figure . and here are some very silly examples: |\/\/\/| ____/| ___ |\_/| ___ | | \ o.o| ack! / \_ |` '| _/ \ | | =(_)= thphth! / \/ \/ \ | (o)(o) u / \ c _) (__) \/\/\/\ _____ /\/\/\/ | ,___| (oo) \/ \/ | / \/-------\ u (__) /____\ || | \ /---v `v'- oo ) / \ ||---w|| * * |--| || |`. |_/\ figure . there is an important subgenre of humorous ascii art that takes advantage of the names of the various characters to tell a pun-based joke. +--------------------------------------------------------+ | ^^^^^^^^^^^^ | | ^^^^^^^^^^^ ^^^^^^^^^ | | ^^^^^^^^^^^^^ ^^^^^^^^^^^^^ | | ^^^^^^^ b ^^^^^^^^^ | | ^^^^^^^^^ ^^^ ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ | +--------------------------------------------------------+ " a bee in the carrot patch " figure . within humorous ascii art, there is for some reason an entire flourishing subgenre of pictures of silly cows. four of these are reproduced in figure ; here are three more: (__) (__) (__) (\/) ($$) (**) /-------\/ /-------\/ /-------\/ / | || / |=====|| / | || * ||----|| * ||----|| * ||----|| ~~ ~~ ~~ ~~ ~~ ~~ satanic cow this cow is a yuppie cow in love figure . :attoparsec: n. `atto-' is the standard si prefix for multiplication by ^(- ). a parsec (parallax-second) is . light-years; an attoparsec is thus . * ^(- ) light years, or about . cm (thus, attoparsec/{microfortnight} equals about inch/sec). this unit is reported to be in use (though probably not very seriously) among hackers in the u.k. see {micro-}. :autobogotiphobia: /aw'to-boh-got`*-foh'bee-*/ n. see {bogotify}. :automagically: /aw-toh-maj'i-klee/ or /aw-toh-maj'i-k*l-ee/ adv. automatically, but in a way that, for some reason (typically because it is too complicated, or too ugly, or perhaps even too trivial), the speaker doesn't feel like explaining to you. see {magic}. "the c-intercal compiler generates c, then automagically invokes `cc( )' to produce an executable." :avatar: [cmu, tektronix] n. syn. {root}, {superuser}. there are quite a few unix machines on which the name of the superuser account is `avatar' rather than `root'. this quirk was originated by a cmu hacker who disliked the term `superuser', and was propagated through an ex-cmu hacker at tektronix. :awk: . n. [unix techspeak] an interpreted language for massaging text data developed by alfred aho, peter weinberger, and brian kernighan (the name is from their initials). it is characterized by c-like syntax, a declaration-free approach to variable typing and declarations, associative arrays, and field-oriented text processing. see also {perl}. . n. editing term for an expression awkward to manipulate through normal {regexp} facilities (for example, one containing a {newline}). . vt. to process data using `awk( )'. = b = ===== :back door: n. a hole in the security of a system deliberately left in place by designers or maintainers. the motivation for this is not always sinister; some operating systems, for example, come out of the box with privileged accounts intended for use by field service technicians or the vendor's maintenance programmers. historically, back doors have often lurked in systems longer than anyone expected or planned, and a few have become widely known. the infamous {rtm} worm of late , for example, used a back door in the {bsd} unix `sendmail( )' utility. ken thompson's turing award lecture to the acm revealed the existence of a back door in early unix versions that may have qualified as the most fiendishly clever security hack of all time. the c compiler contained code that would recognize when the `login' command was being recompiled and insert some code recognizing a password chosen by thompson, giving him entry to the system whether or not an account had been created for him. normally such a back door could be removed by removing it from the source code for the compiler and recompiling the compiler. but to recompile the compiler, you have to *use* the compiler --- so thompson also arranged that the compiler would *recognize when it was compiling a version of itself*, and insert into the recompiled compiler the code to insert into the recompiled `login' the code to allow thompson entry --- and, of course, the code to recognize itself and do the whole thing again the next time around! and having done this once, he was then able to recompile the compiler from the original sources, leaving his back door in place and active but with no trace in the sources. the talk that revealed this truly moby hack was published as "reflections on trusting trust", `communications of the acm ', (august ), pp. -- . syn. {trap door}; may also be called a `wormhole'. see also {iron box}, {cracker}, {worm}, {logic bomb}. :backbone cabal: n. a group of large-site administrators who pushed through the {great renaming} and reined in the chaos of {usenet} during most of the s. the cabal {mailing list} disbanded in late after a bitter internal catfight, but the net hardly noticed. :backbone site: n. a key usenet and email site; one that processes a large amount of third-party traffic, especially if it is the home site of any of the regional coordinators for the usenet maps. notable backbone sites as of early include uunet and the mail machines at rutgers university, uc berkeley, dec's western research laboratories, ohio state university, and the university of texas. compare {rib site}, {leaf site}. :backgammon:: see {bignum}, {moby}, and {pseudoprime}. :background: n.,adj.,vt. to do a task `in background' is to do it whenever {foreground} matters are not claiming your undivided attention, and `to background' something means to relegate it to a lower priority. "for now, we'll just print a list of nodes and links; i'm working on the graph-printing problem in background." note that this implies ongoing activity but at a reduced level or in spare time, in contrast to mainstream `back burner' (which connotes benign neglect until some future resumption of activity). some people prefer to use the term for processing that they have queued up for their unconscious minds (a tack that one can often fruitfully take upon encountering an obstacle in creative work). compare {amp off}, {slopsucker}. technically, a task running in background is detached from the terminal where it was started (and often running at a lower priority); oppose {foreground}. nowadays this term is primarily associated with {{unix}}, but it appears to have been first used in this sense on os/ . :backspace and overstrike: interj. whoa! back up. used to suggest that someone just said or did something wrong. common among apl programmers. :backward combatability: /bak'w*rd k*m-bat'*-bil'*-tee/ [from `backward compatibility'] n. a property of hardware or software revisions in which previous protocols, formats, and layouts are discarded in favor of `new and improved' protocols, formats, and layouts. occurs usually when making the transition between major releases. when the change is so drastic that the old formats are not retained in the new version, it is said to be `backward combatable'. see {flag day}. :bad: /b-a-d/ [ibm: acronym, `broken as designed'] adj. said of a program that is {bogus} because of bad design and misfeatures rather than because of bugginess. see {working as designed}. :bad thing: [from the sellar & yeatman parody ` and all that'] n. something that can't possibly result in improvement of the subject. this term is always capitalized, as in "replacing all of the -baud modems with bicycle couriers would be a bad thing". oppose {good thing}. british correspondents confirm that {bad thing} and {good thing} (and prob. therefore {right thing} and {wrong thing}) come from the book referenced in the etymology, which discusses rulers who were good kings but bad things. this has apparently created a mainstream idiom on the british side of the pond. :bag on the side: n. an extension to an established hack that is supposed to add some functionality to the original. usually derogatory, implying that the original was being overextended and should have been thrown away, and the new product is ugly, inelegant, or bloated. also v. phrase, `to hang a bag on the side [of]'. "c++? that's just a bag on the side of c ...." "they want me to hang a bag on the side of the accounting system." :bagbiter: /bag'bi:t-*r/ n. . something, such as a program or a computer, that fails to work, or works in a remarkably clumsy manner. "this text editor won't let me make a file with a line longer than characters! what a bagbiter!" . a person who has caused you some trouble, inadvertently or otherwise, typically by failing to program the computer properly. synonyms: {loser}, {cretin}, {chomper}. . adj. `bagbiting' having the quality of a bagbiter. "this bagbiting system won't let me compute the factorial of a negative number." compare {losing}, {cretinous}, {bletcherous}, `barfucious' (under {barfulous}) and `chomping' (under {chomp}). . `bite the bag' vi. to fail in some manner. "the computer keeps crashing every minutes." "yes, the disk controller is really biting the bag." the original loading of these terms was almost undoubtedly obscene, possibly referring to the scrotum, but in their current usage they have become almost completely sanitized. a program called lexiphage on the old mit ai pdp- would draw on a selected victim's bitmapped terminal the words "the bag" in ornate letters, and then a pair of jaws biting pieces of it off. this is the first and to date only known example of a program *intended* to be a bagbiter. :bamf: /bamf/ . [from old x-men comics] interj. notional sound made by a person or object teleporting in or out of the hearer's vicinity. often used in {virtual reality} (esp. {mud}) electronic {fora} when a character wishes to make a dramatic entrance or exit. . the sound of magical transformation, used in virtual reality {fora} like sense . . [from `don washington's survival guide'] n. acronym for `bad-ass mother fucker', used to refer to one of the handful of nastiest monsters on an lpmud or other similar mud. :banana label: n. the labels often used on the sides of {macrotape} reels, so called because they are shaped roughly like blunt-ended bananas. this term, like macrotapes themselves, is still current but visibly headed for obsolescence. :banana problem: n. [from the story of the little girl who said "i know how to spell `banana', but i don't know when to stop"]. not knowing where or when to bring a production to a close (compare {fencepost error}). one may say `there is a banana problem' of an algorithm with poorly defined or incorrect termination conditions, or in discussing the evolution of a design that may be succumbing to featuritis (see also {creeping elegance}, {creeping featuritis}). see item under {hakmem}, which describes a banana problem in a {dissociated press} implementation. also, see {one-banana problem} for a superficially similar but unrelated usage. :bandwidth: n. . used by hackers in a generalization of its technical meaning as the volume of information per unit time that a computer, person, or transmission medium can handle. "those are amazing graphics, but i missed some of the detail --- not enough bandwidth, i guess." compare {low-bandwidth}. . attention span. . on {usenet}, a measure of network capacity that is often wasted by people complaining about how items posted by others are a waste of bandwidth. :bang: . n. common spoken name for `!' (ascii ), especially when used in pronouncing a {bang path} in spoken hackish. in {elder days} this was considered a cmuish usage, with mit and stanford hackers preferring {excl} or {shriek}; but the spread of unix has carried `bang' with it (esp. via the term {bang path}) and it is now certainly the most common spoken name for `!'. note that it is used exclusively for non-emphatic written `!'; one would not say "congratulations bang" (except possibly for humorous purposes), but if one wanted to specify the exact characters `foo!' one would speak "eff oh oh bang". see {shriek}, {{ascii}}. . interj. an exclamation signifying roughly "i have achieved enlightenment!", or "the dynamite has cleared out my brain!" often used to acknowledge that one has perpetrated a {thinko} immediately after one has been called on it. :bang on: vt. to stress-test a piece of hardware or software: "i banged on the new version of the simulator all day yesterday and it didn't crash once. i guess it is ready for release." the term {pound on} is synonymous. :bang path: n. an old-style uucp electronic-mail address specifying hops to get from some assumed-reachable location to the addressee, so called because each {hop} is signified by a {bang} sign. thus, for example, the path ...!bigsite!foovax!barbox!me directs people to route their mail to machine bigsite (presumably a well-known location accessible to everybody) and from there through the machine foovax to the account of user me on barbox. in the bad old days of not so long ago, before autorouting mailers became commonplace, people often published compound bang addresses using the { } convention (see {glob}) to give paths from *several* big machines, in the hopes that one's correspondent might be able to get mail to one of them reliably (example: ...!{seismo, ut-sally, ihnp }!rice!beta!gamma!me). bang paths of to hops were not uncommon in . late-night dial-up uucp links would cause week-long transmission times. bang paths were often selected by both transmission time and reliability, as messages would often get lost. see {{internet address}}, {network, the}, and {sitename}. :banner: n. . the title page added to printouts by most print spoolers (see {spool}). typically includes user or account id information in very large character-graphics capitals. also called a `burst page', because it indicates where to burst (tear apart) fanfold paper to separate one user's printout from the next. . a similar printout generated (typically on multiple pages of fan-fold paper) from user-specified text, e.g., by a program such as unix's `banner({ , })'. . on interactive software, a first screen containing a logo and/or author credits and/or a copyright notice. :bar: /bar/ n. . the second {metasyntactic variable}, after {foo} and before {baz}. "suppose we have two functions: foo and bar. foo calls bar...." . often appended to {foo} to produce {foobar}. :bare metal: n. . new computer hardware, unadorned with such snares and delusions as an {operating system}, an {hll}, or even assembler. commonly used in the phrase `programming on the bare metal', which refers to the arduous work of {bit bashing} needed to create these basic tools for a new machine. real bare-metal programming involves things like building boot proms and bios chips, implementing basic monitors used to test device drivers, and writing the assemblers that will be used to write the compiler back ends that will give the new machine a real development environment. . `programming on the bare metal' is also used to describe a style of {hand-hacking} that relies on bit-level peculiarities of a particular hardware design, esp. tricks for speed and space optimization that rely on crocks such as overlapping instructions (or, as in the famous case described in {the story of mel, a real programmer} (in {appendix a}), interleaving of opcodes on a magnetic drum to minimize fetch delays due to the device's rotational latency). this sort of thing has become less common as the relative costs of programming time and machine resources have changed, but is still found in heavily constrained environments such as industrial embedded systems. see {real programmer}. in the world of personal computing, bare metal programming (especially in sense but sometimes also in sense ) is often considered a {good thing}, or at least a necessary evil (because these machines have often been sufficiently slow and poorly designed to make it necessary; see {ill-behaved}). there, the term usually refers to bypassing the bios or os interface and writing the application to directly access device registers and machine addresses. "to get . kilobaud on the serial port, you need to get down to the bare metal." people who can do this sort of thing are held in high regard. :barf: /barf/ [from mainstream slang meaning `vomit'] . interj. term of disgust. this is the closest hackish equivalent of the val\-speak "gag me with a spoon". (like, euwww!) see {bletch}. . vi. to say "barf!" or emit some similar expression of disgust. "i showed him my latest hack and he barfed" means only that he complained about it, not that he literally vomited. . vi. to fail to work because of unacceptable input. may mean to give an error message. examples: "the division operation barfs if you try to divide by ." (that is, the division operation checks for an attempt to divide by zero, and if one is encountered it causes the operation to fail in some unspecified, but generally obvious, manner.) "the text editor barfs if you try to read in a new file before writing out the old one." see {choke}, {gag}. in commonwealth hackish, `barf' is generally replaced by `puke' or `vom'. {barf} is sometimes also used as a {metasyntactic variable}, like {foo} or {bar}. :barfmail: n. multiple {bounce message}s accumulating to the level of serious annoyance, or worse. the sort of thing that happens when an inter-network mail gateway goes down or wonky. :barfulation: /bar`fyoo-lay'sh*n/ interj. variation of {barf} used around the stanford area. an exclamation, expressing disgust. on seeing some particularly bad code one might exclaim, "barfulation! who wrote this, quux?" :barfulous: /bar'fyoo-l*s/ adj. (alt. `barfucious', /bar-fyoo-sh*s/) said of something that would make anyone barf, if only for esthetic reasons. :barney: n. in commonwealth hackish, `barney' is to {fred} (sense # ) as {bar} is to {foo}. that is, people who commonly use `fred' as their first metasyntactic variable will often use `barney' second. the reference is, of course, to fred flintstone and barney rubble in the flintstones cartoons. :baroque: adj. feature-encrusted; complex; gaudy; verging on excessive. said of hardware or (esp.) software designs, this has many of the connotations of {elephantine} or {monstrosity} but is less extreme and not pejorative in itself. "metafont even has features to introduce random variations to its letterform output. now *that* is baroque!" see also {rococo}. :bartlemud: /bar'tl-muhd/ n. any of the muds derived from the original mud game by richard bartle and roy trubshaw (see {mud}). bartlemuds are noted for their (usually slightly offbeat) humor, dry but friendly syntax, and lack of adjectives in object descriptions, so a player is likely to come across `brand ', for instance (see {brand brand brand}). bartle has taken a bad rap in some mudding circles for supposedly originating this term, but (like the story that mud is a trademark) this appears to be a myth; he uses `mud '. :basic: n. a programming language, originally designed for dartmouth's experimental timesharing system in the early s, which has since become the leading cause of brain-damage in proto-hackers. this is another case (like {pascal}) of the bad things that happen when a language deliberately designed as an educational toy gets taken too seriously. a novice can write short basic programs (on the order of -- lines) very easily; writing anything longer is (a) very painful, and (b) encourages bad habits that will bite him/her later if he/she tries to hack in a real language. this wouldn't be so bad if historical accidents hadn't made basic so common on low-end micros. as it is, it ruins thousands of potential wizards a year. :batch: adj. . non-interactive. hackers use this somewhat more loosely than the traditional technical definitions justify; in particular, switches on a normally interactive program that prepare it to receive non-interactive command input are often referred to as `batch mode' switches. a `batch file' is a series of instructions written to be handed to an interactive program running in batch mode. . performance of dreary tasks all at one sitting. "i finally sat down in batch mode and wrote out checks for all those bills; i guess they'll turn the electricity back on next week..." . accumulation of a number of small tasks that can be lumped together for greater efficiency. "i'm batching up those letters to send sometime" "i'm batching up bottles to take to the recycling center." :bathtub curve: n. common term for the curve (resembling an end-to-end section of one of those claw-footed antique bathtubs) that describes the expected failure rate of electronics with time: initially high, dropping to near for most of the system's lifetime, then rising again as it `tires out'. see also {burn-in period}, {infant mortality}. :baud: /bawd/ [simplified from its technical meaning] n. bits per second. hence kilobaud or kbaud, thousands of bits per second. the technical meaning is `level transitions per second'; this coincides with bps only for two-level modulation with no framing or stop bits. most hackers are aware of these nuances but blithely ignore them. histotical note: this was originally a unit of telegraph signalling speed, set at one pulse per second. it was proposed at the international telegraph conference of , and named after j.m.e. baudot ( - ), the french engineer who constructed the first successful teleprinter. :baud barf: /bawd barf/ n. the garbage one gets on the monitor when using a modem connection with some protocol setting (esp. line speed) incorrect, or when someone picks up a voice extension on the same line, or when really bad line noise disrupts the connection. baud barf is not completely {random}, by the way; hackers with a lot of serial-line experience can usually tell whether the device at the other end is expecting a higher or lower speed than the terminal is set to. *really* experienced ones can identify particular speeds. :baz: /baz/ n. . the third {metasyntactic variable} "suppose we have three functions: foo, bar, and baz. foo calls bar, which calls baz...." (see also {fum}) . interj. a term of mild annoyance. in this usage the term is often drawn out for or seconds, producing an effect not unlike the bleating of a sheep; /baaaaaaz/. . occasionally appended to {foo} to produce `foobaz'. earlier versions of this lexicon derived `baz' as a stanford corruption of {bar}. however, pete samson (compiler of the {tmrc} lexicon) reports it was already current when he joined tmrc in . he says "it came from `pogo'. albert the alligator, when vexed or outraged, would shout `bazz fazz!' or `rowrbazzle!' the club layout was said to model the (mythical) new england counties of rowrfolk and bassex (rowrbazzle mingled with (norfolk/suffolk/middlesex/essex)." :bboard: /bee'bord/ [contraction of `bulletin board'] n. . any electronic bulletin board; esp. used of {bbs} systems running on personal micros, less frequently of a usenet {newsgroup} (in fact, use of the term for a newsgroup generally marks one either as a {newbie} fresh in from the bbs world or as a real old-timer predating usenet). . at cmu and other colleges with similar facilities, refers to campus-wide electronic bulletin boards. . the term `physical bboard' is sometimes used to refer to a old-fashioned, non-electronic cork memo board. at cmu, it refers to a particular one outside the cs lounge. in either of senses or , the term is usually prefixed by the name of the intended board (`the moonlight casino bboard' or `market bboard'); however, if the context is clear, the better-read bboards may be referred to by name alone, as in (at cmu) "don't post for-sale ads on general". :bbs: /b-b-s/ [abbreviation, `bulletin board system'] n. an electronic bulletin board system; that is, a message database where people can log in and leave broadcast messages for others grouped (typically) into {topic group}s. thousands of local bbs systems are in operation throughout the u.s., typically run by amateurs for fun out of their homes on ms-dos boxes with a single modem line each. fans of usenet and internet or the big commercial timesharing bboards such as compuserve and genie tend to consider local bbses the low-rent district of the hacker culture, but they serve a valuable function by knitting together lots of hackers and users in the personal-micro world who would otherwise be unable to exchange code at all. :beam: [from star trek classic's "beam me up, scotty!"] vt. to transfer {softcopy} of a file electronically; most often in combining forms such as `beam me a copy' or `beam that over to his site'. compare {blast}, {snarf}, {blt}. :beanie key: [mac users] n. see {command key}. :beep: n.,v. syn. {feep}. this term seems to be preferred among micro hobbyists. :beige toaster: n. a macintosh. see {toaster}; compare {macintrash}, {maggotbox}. :bells and whistles: [by analogy with the toyboxes on theater organs] n. features added to a program or system to make it more {flavorful} from a hacker's point of view, without necessarily adding to its utility for its primary function. distinguished from {chrome}, which is intended to attract users. "now that we've got the basic program working, let's go back and add some bells and whistles." no one seems to know what distinguishes a bell from a whistle. :bells, whistles, and gongs: n. a standard elaborated form of {bells and whistles}; typically said with a pronounced and ironic accent on the `gongs'. :benchmark: [techspeak] n. an inaccurate measure of computer performance. "in the computer industry, there are three kinds of lies: lies, damn lies, and benchmarks." well-known ones include whetstone, dhrystone, rhealstone (see {h}), the gabriel lisp benchmarks (see {gabriel}), the specmark suite, and linpack. see also {machoflops}, {mips}, {smoke and mirrors}. :berkeley quality software: adj. (often abbreviated `bqs') term used in a pejorative sense to refer to software that was apparently created by rather spaced-out hackers late at night to solve some unique problem. it usually has nonexistent, incomplete, or incorrect documentation, has been tested on at least two examples, and core dumps when anyone else attempts to use it. this term was frequently applied to early versions of the `dbx( )' debugger. see also {berzerkeley}. :berklix: /berk'liks/ n.,adj. [contraction of `berkeley unix'] see {bsd}. not used at berkeley itself. may be more common among {suit}s attempting to sound like cognoscenti than among hackers, who usually just say `bsd'. :berserking: vi. a {mud} term meaning to gain points *only* by killing other players and mobiles (non-player characters). hence, a berserker-wizard is a player character that has achieved enough points to become a wizard, but only by killing other characters. berserking is sometimes frowned upon because of its inherently antisocial nature, but some muds have a `berserker mode' in which a player becomes *permanently* berserk, can never flee from a fight, cannot use magic, gets no score for treasure, but does get double kill points. "berserker wizards can seriously damage your elf!" :berzerkeley: /b*r-zer'klee/ [from `berserk', via the name of a now-deceased record label] n. humorous distortion of `berkeley' used esp. to refer to the practices or products of the {bsd} unix hackers. see {software bloat}, {missed'em-five}, {berkeley quality software}. mainstream use of this term in reference to the cultural and political peculiarities of uc berkeley as a whole has been reported from as far back as the s. :beta: /bay't*/, /be't*/ or (commonwealth) /bee't*/ n. . in the {real world}, software often goes through two stages of testing: alpha (in-house) and beta (out-house?). software is said to be `in beta'. . anything that is new and experimental is in beta. "his girlfriend is in beta" means that he is still testing for compatibility and reserving judgment. . beta software is notoriously buggy, so `in beta' connotes flakiness. historical note: more formally, to beta-test is to test a pre-release (potentially unreliable) version of a piece of software by making it available to selected customers and users. this term derives from early s terminology for product cycle checkpoints, first used at ibm but later standard throughout the industry. `alpha test' was the unit, module, or component test phase; `beta test' was initial system test. these themselves came from earlier a- and b-tests for hardware. the a-test was a feasibility and manufacturability evaluation done before any commitment to design and development. the b-test was a demonstration that the engineering model functioned as specified. the c-test (corresponding to today's beta) was the b-test performed on early samples of the production design. :bfi: /b-f-i/ n. see {brute force and ignorance}. also encountered in the variants `bfmi', `brute force and *massive* ignorance' and `bfbi' `brute force and bloody ignorance'. :bible: n. . one of a small number of fundamental source books such as {knuth} and {k&r}. . the most detailed and authoritative reference for a particular language, operating system, or other complex software system. :bicapitalization: n. the act said to have been performed on trademarks (such as {postscript}, next, {news}, visicalc, framemaker, tk!solver, easywriter) that have been raised above the ruck of common coinage by nonstandard capitalization. too many {marketroid} types think this sort of thing is really cute, even the , th time they do it. compare {studlycaps}. :biff: /bif/ [usenet] n. the most famous {pseudo}, and the prototypical {newbie}. articles from biff are characterized by all uppercase letters sprinkled liberally with bangs, typos, `cute' misspellings (evry budy luvs good old biff cuz he"s a k l dood an he rites reel awesum thingz in capitull lettrs like this!!!), use (and often misuse) of fragments of {talk mode} abbreviations, a long {sig block} (sometimes even a {doubled sig}), and unbounded na"ivet'e. biff posts articles using his elder brother's vic- . biff's location is a mystery, as his articles appear to come from a variety of sites. however, {bitnet} seems to be the most frequent origin. the theory that biff is a denizen of bitnet is supported by biff's (unfortunately invalid) electronic mail address: biff@bit.net. :biff: /bif/ vt. to notify someone of incoming mail. from the bsd utility `biff( )', which was in turn named after a friendly golden labrador who used to chase frisbees in the halls at ucb while . bsd was in development (it had a well-known habit of barking whenever the mailman came). no relation to {biff}. :big gray wall: n. what faces a {vms} user searching for documentation. a full vms kit comes on a pallet, the documentation taking up around feet of shelf space before the addition of layered products such as compilers, databases, multivendor networking, and programming tools. recent (since vms version ) dec documentation comes with gray binders; under vms version the binders were orange (`big orange wall'), and under version they were blue. see {vms}. often contracted to `gray wall'. :big iron: n. large, expensive, ultra-fast computers. used generally of {number-crunching} supercomputers such as crays, but can include more conventional big commercial ibmish mainframes. term of approval; compare {heavy metal}, oppose {dinosaur}. :big red switch: [ibm] n. the power switch on a computer, esp. the `emergency pull' switch on an ibm {mainframe} or the power switch on an ibm pc where it really is large and red. "this !@%$% {bitty box} is hung again; time to hit the big red switch." sources at ibm report that, in tune with the company's passion for {tla}s, this is often abbreviated as `brs' (this has also become established on fidonet and in the pc {clone} world). it is alleged that the emergency pull switch on an ibm / actually fired a non-conducting bolt into the main power feed; the brses on more recent machines physically drop a block into place so that they can't be pushed back in. people get fired for pulling them, especially inappropriately (see also {molly-guard}). compare {power cycle}, {three-finger salute}, { reset}; see also {scram switch}. :big room, the: n. the extremely large room with the blue ceiling and intensely bright light (during the day) or black ceiling with lots of tiny night-lights (during the night) found outside all computer installations. "he can't come to the phone right now, he's somewhere out in the big room." :big win: n. serendipity. "yes, those two physicists discovered high-temperature superconductivity in a batch of ceramic that had been prepared incorrectly according to their experimental schedule. small mistake; big win!" see {win big}. :big-endian: [from swift's `gulliver's travels' via the famous paper `on holy wars and a plea for peace' by danny cohen, usc/isi ien , dated april , ] adj. . describes a computer architecture in which, within a given multi-byte numeric representation, the most significant byte has the lowest address (the word is stored `big-end-first'). most processors, including the ibm family, the {pdp- }, the motorola microprocessor families, and most of the various risc designs current in mid- , are big-endian. see {little-endian}, {middle-endian}, {nuxi problem}. . an {{internet address}} the wrong way round. most of the world follows the internet standard and writes email addresses starting with the name of the computer and ending up with the name of the country. in the u.k. the joint networking team had decided to do it the other way round before the internet domain standard was established; e.g., me@uk.ac.wigan.cs. most gateway sites have {ad-hockery} in their mailers to handle this, but can still be confused. in particular, the address above could be in the u.k. (domain uk) or czechoslovakia (domain cs). :bignum: /big'nuhm/ [orig. from mit maclisp] n. . [techspeak] a multiple-precision computer representation for very large integers. more generally, any very large number. "have you ever looked at the united states budget? there's bignums for you!" . [stanford] in backgammon, large numbers on the dice are called `bignums', especially a roll of double fives or double sixes (compare {moby}, sense ). see also {el camino bignum}. sense may require some explanation. most computer languages provide a kind of data called `integer', but such computer integers are usually very limited in size; usually they must be smaller than than ^( ) ( , , , ) or (on a losing {bitty box}) ^( ) ( , ). if you want to work with numbers larger than that, you have to use floating-point numbers, which are usually accurate to only six or seven decimal places. computer languages that provide bignums can perform exact calculations on very large numbers, such as ! (the factorial of , which is times times times ... times times ). for example, this value for ! was computed by the maclisp system using bignums: . :bigot: n. a person who is religiously attached to a particular computer, language, operating system, editor, or other tool (see {religious issues}). usually found with a specifier; thus, `cray bigot', `its bigot', `apl bigot', `vms bigot', `berkeley bigot'. true bigots can be distinguished from mere partisans or zealots by the fact that they refuse to learn alternatives even when the march of time and/or technology is threatening to obsolete the favored tool. it is said "you can tell a bigot, but you can't tell him much." compare {weenie}. :bit: [from the mainstream meaning and `binary digit'] n. . [techspeak] the unit of information; the amount of information obtained by asking a yes-or-no question for which the two outcomes are equally probable. . [techspeak] a computational quantity that can take on one of two values, such as true and false or and . . a mental flag: a reminder that something should be done eventually. "i have a bit set for you." (i haven't seen you for a while, and i'm supposed to tell or ask you something.) . more generally, a (possibly incorrect) mental state of belief. "i have a bit set that says that you were the last guy to hack on emacs." (meaning "i think you were the last guy to hack on emacs, and what i am about to say is predicated on this, so please stop me if this isn't true.") "i just need one bit from you" is a polite way of indicating that you intend only a short interruption for a question that can presumably be answered yes or no. a bit is said to be `set' if its value is true or , and `reset' or `clear' if its value is false or . one speaks of setting and clearing bits. to {toggle} or `invert' a bit is to change it, either from to or from to . see also {flag}, {trit}, {mode bit}. the term `bit' first appeared in print in the computer-science sense in , and seems to have been coined by early computer scientist john tukey. tukey records that it evolved over a lunch table as a handier alternative to `bigit' or `binit'. :bit bang: n. transmission of data on a serial line, when accomplished by rapidly tweaking a single output bit at the appropriate times. the technique is a simple loop with eight out and shift instruction pairs for each byte. input is more interesting. and full duplex (doing input and output at the same time) is one way to separate the real hackers from the {wannabee}s. bit bang was used on certain early models of prime computers, presumably when uarts were too expensive, and on archaic z micros with a zilog pio but no sio. in an interesting instance of the {cycle of reincarnation}, this technique is now ( ) coming back into use on some risc architectures because it consumes such an infinitesimal part of the processor that it actually makes sense not to have a uart. :bit bashing: n. (alt. `bit diddling' or {bit twiddling}) term used to describe any of several kinds of low-level programming characterized by manipulation of {bit}, {flag}, {nybble}, and other smaller-than-character-sized pieces of data; these include low-level device control, encryption algorithms, checksum and error-correcting codes, hash functions, some flavors of graphics programming (see {bitblt}), and assembler/compiler code generation. may connote either tedium or a real technical challenge (more usually the former). "the command decoding for the new tape driver looks pretty solid but the bit-bashing for the control registers still has bugs." see also {bit bang}, {mode bit}. :bit bucket: n. . the universal data sink (originally, the mythical receptacle used to catch bits when they fall off the end of a register during a shift instruction). discarded, lost, or destroyed data is said to have `gone to the bit bucket'. on {{unix}}, often used for {/dev/null}. sometimes amplified as `the great bit bucket in the sky'. . the place where all lost mail and news messages eventually go. the selection is performed according to {finagle's law}; important mail is much more likely to end up in the bit bucket than junk mail, which has an almost % probability of getting delivered. routing to the bit bucket is automatically performed by mail-transfer agents, news systems, and the lower layers of the network. . the ideal location for all unwanted mail responses: "flames about this article to the bit bucket." such a request is guaranteed to overflow one's mailbox with flames. . excuse for all mail that has not been sent. "i mailed you those figures last week; they must have ended in the bit bucket." compare {black hole}. this term is used purely in jest. it is based on the fanciful notion that bits are objects that are not destroyed but only misplaced. this appears to have been a mutation of an earlier term `bit box', about which the same legend was current; old-time hackers also report that trainees used to be told that when the cpu stored bits into memory it was actually pulling them `out of the bit box'. see also {chad box}. another variant of this legend has it that, as a consequence of the `parity preservation law', the number of bits that go to the bit bucket must equal the number of bits. any imbalance results in bits filling up the bit bucket. a qualified computer technician can empty a full bit bucket as part of scheduled maintenance. :bit decay: n. see {bit rot}. people with a physics background tend to prefer this one for the analogy with particle decay. see also {computron}, {quantum bogodynamics}. :bit rot: n. also {bit decay}. hypothetical disease the existence of which has been deduced from the observation that unused programs or features will often stop working after sufficient time has passed, even if `nothing has changed'. the theory explains that bits decay as if they were radioactive. as time passes, the contents of a file or the code in a program will become increasingly garbled. there actually are physical processes that produce such effects (alpha particles generated by trace radionuclides in ceramic chip packages, for example, can change the contents of a computer memory unpredictably, and various kinds of subtle media failures can corrupt files in mass storage), but they are quite rare (and computers are built with error-detecting circuitry to compensate for them). the notion long favored among hackers that cosmic rays are among the causes of such events turns out to be a myth; see the {cosmic rays} entry for details. the term {software rot} is almost synonymous. software rot is the effect, bit rot the notional cause. :bit twiddling: n. . (pejorative) an exercise in tuning (see {tune}) in which incredible amounts of time and effort go to produce little noticeable improvement, often with the result that the code has become incomprehensible. . aimless small modification to a program, esp. for some pointless goal. . approx. syn. for {bit bashing}; esp. used for the act of frobbing the device control register of a peripheral in an attempt to get it back to a known state. :bit-paired keyboard: n. obs. (alt. `bit-shift keyboard') a non-standard keyboard layout that seems to have originated with the teletype asr- and remained common for several years on early computer equipment. the asr- was a mechanical device (see {eou}), so the only way to generate the character codes from keystrokes was by some physical linkage. the design of the asr- assigned each character key a basic pattern that could be modified by flipping bits if the shift or the ctrl key was pressed. in order to avoid making the thing more of a rube goldberg kluge than it already was, the design had to group characters that shared the same basic bit pattern on one key. looking at the ascii chart, we find: high low bits bits ! " # $ % & ' ( ) this is why the characters !"#$%&'() appear where they do on a teletype (thankfully, they didn't use shift- for space). this was *not* the weirdest variant of the {qwerty} layout widely seen, by the way; that prize should probably go to one of several (differing) arrangements on ibm's even clunkier and card punches. when electronic terminals became popular, in the early s, there was no agreement in the industry over how the keyboards should be laid out. some vendors opted to emulate the teletype keyboard, while others used the flexibility of electronic circuitry to make their product look like an office typewriter. these alternatives became known as `bit-paired' and `typewriter-paired' keyboards. to a hacker, the bit-paired keyboard seemed far more logical --- and because most hackers in those days had never learned to touch-type, there was little pressure from the pioneering users to adapt keyboards to the typewriter standard. the doom of the bit-paired keyboard was the large-scale introduction of the computer terminal into the normal office environment, where out-and-out technophobes were expected to use the equipment. the `typewriter-paired' standard became universal, `bit-paired' hardware was quickly junked or relegated to dusty corners, and both terms passed into disuse. :bitblt: /bit'blit/ n. [from {blt}, q.v.] . any of a family of closely related algorithms for moving and copying rectangles of bits between main and display memory on a bit-mapped device, or between two areas of either main or display memory (the requirement to do the {right thing} in the case of overlapping source and destination rectangles is what makes bitblt tricky). . synonym for {blit} or {blt}. both uses are borderline techspeak. :bitnet: /bit'net/ [acronym: because it's time network] n. everybody's least favorite piece of the network (see {network, the}). the bitnet hosts are a collection of ibm dinosaurs and vaxen (the latter with lobotomized comm hardware) that communicate using -character {{ebcdic}} card images (see {eighty-column mind}); thus, they tend to mangle the headers and text of third-party traffic from the rest of the ascii/rfc- world with annoying regularity. bitnet is also notorious as the apparent home of {biff}. :bits: n.pl. . information. examples: "i need some bits about file formats." ("i need to know about file formats.") compare {core dump}, sense . . machine-readable representation of a document, specifically as contrasted with paper: "i have only a photocopy of the jargon file; does anyone know where i can get the bits?". see {softcopy}, {source of all good bits} see also {bit}. :bitty box: /bit'ee boks/ n. . a computer sufficiently small, primitive, or incapable as to cause a hacker acute claustrophobia at the thought of developing software on or for it. especially used of small, obsolescent, single-tasking-only personal machines such as the atari , osborne, sinclair, vic- , trs- , or ibm pc. . [pejorative] more generally, the opposite of `real computer' (see {get a real computer!}). see also {mess-dos}, {toaster}, and {toy}. :bixie: /bik'see/ n. variant {emoticon}s used on bix (the byte information exchange). the {smiley} bixie is <@_@>, apparently intending to represent two cartoon eyes and a mouth. a few others have been reported. :black art: n. a collection of arcane, unpublished, and (by implication) mostly ad-hoc techniques developed for a particular application or systems area (compare {black magic}). vlsi design and compiler code optimization were (in their beginnings) considered classic examples of black art; as theory developed they became {deep magic}, and once standard textbooks had been written, became merely {heavy wizardry}. the huge proliferation of formal and informal channels for spreading around new computer-related technologies during the last twenty years has made both the term `black art' and what it describes less common than formerly. see also {voodoo programming}. :black hole: n. when a piece of email or netnews disappears mysteriously between its origin and destination sites (that is, without returning a {bounce message}) it is commonly said to have `fallen into a black hole'. "i think there's a black hole at foovax!" conveys suspicion that site foovax has been dropping a lot of stuff on the floor lately (see {drop on the floor}). the implied metaphor of email as interstellar travel is interesting in itself. compare {bit bucket}. :black magic: n. a technique that works, though nobody really understands why. more obscure than {voodoo programming}, which may be done by cookbook. compare also {black art}, {deep magic}, and {magic number} (sense ). :blargh: /blarg/ [mit] n. the opposite of {ping}, sense ; an exclamation indicating that one has absorbed or is emitting a quantum of unhappiness. less common than {ping}. :blast: . vt.,n. synonym for {blt}, used esp. for large data sends over a network or comm line. opposite of {snarf}. usage: uncommon. the variant `blat' has been reported. . vt. [hp/apollo] synonymous with {nuke} (sense ). sometimes the message `unable to kill all processes. blast them (y/n)?' would appear in the command window upon logout. :blat: n. . syn. {blast}, sense . . see {thud}. :bletch: /blech/ [from yiddish/german `brechen', to vomit, poss. via comic-strip exclamation `blech'] interj. term of disgust. often used in "ugh, bletch". compare {barf}. :bletcherous: /blech'*-r*s/ adj. disgusting in design or function; esthetically unappealing. this word is seldom used of people. "this keyboard is bletcherous!" (perhaps the keys don't work very well, or are misplaced.) see {losing}, {cretinous}, {bagbiter}, {bogus}, and {random}. the term {bletcherous} applies to the esthetics of the thing so described; similarly for {cretinous}. by contrast, something that is `losing' or `bagbiting' may be failing to meet objective criteria. see also {bogus} and {random}, which have richer and wider shades of meaning than any of the above. :blinkenlights: /blink'*n-li:tz/ n. front-panel diagnostic lights on a computer, esp. a {dinosaur}. derives from the last word of the famous blackletter-gothic sign in mangled pseudo-german that once graced about half the computer rooms in the english-speaking world. one version ran in its entirety as follows: achtung! alles lookenspeepers! das computermachine ist nicht fuer gefingerpoken und mittengrabben. ist easy schnappen der springenwerk, blowenfusen und poppencorken mit spitzensparken. ist nicht fuer gewerken bei das dumpkopfen. das rubbernecken sichtseeren keepen das cotten-pickenen hans in das pockets muss; relaxen und watchen das blinkenlichten. this silliness dates back at least as far as at stanford university and had already gone international by the early s, when it was reported at london university's atlas computing site. there are several variants of it in circulation, some of which actually do end with the word `blinkenlights'. in an amusing example of turnabout-is-fair-play, german hackers have developed their own versions of the blinkenlights poster in fractured english, one of which is reproduced here: attention this room is fullfilled mit special electronische equippment. fingergrabbing and pressing the cnoeppkes from the computers is allowed for die experts only! so all the "lefthanders" stay away and do not disturben the brainstorming von here working intelligencies. otherwise you will be out thrown and kicked anderswhere! also: please keep still and only watchen astaunished the blinkenlights. see also {geef}. :blit: /blit/ vt. . to copy a large array of bits from one part of a computer's memory to another part, particularly when the memory is being used to determine what is shown on a display screen. "the storage allocator picks through the table and copies the good parts up into high memory, and then blits it all back down again." see {bitblt}, {blt}, {dd}, {cat}, {blast}, {snarf}. more generally, to perform some operation (such as toggling) on a large array of bits while moving them. . all-capitalized as `blit': an early experimental bit-mapped terminal designed by rob pike at bell labs, later commercialized as the at&t . (the folk etymology from `bell labs intelligent terminal' is incorrect.) :blitter: /blit'r/ n. a special-purpose chip or hardware system built to perform {blit} operations, esp. used for fast implementation of bit-mapped graphics. the commodore amiga and a few other micros have these, but in the trend is away from them (however, see {cycle of reincarnation}). syn. {raster blaster}. :blivet: /bliv'*t/ [allegedly from a world war ii military term meaning "ten pounds of manure in a five-pound bag"] n. . an intractable problem. . a crucial piece of hardware that can't be fixed or replaced if it breaks. . a tool that has been hacked over by so many incompetent programmers that it has become an unmaintainable tissue of hacks. . an out-of-control but unkillable development effort. . an embarrassing bug that pops up during a customer demo. this term has other meanings in other technical cultures; among experimental physicists and hardware engineers of various kinds it seems to mean any random object of unknown purpose (similar to hackish use of {frob}). it has also been used to describe an amusing trick-the-eye drawing resembling a three-pronged fork that appears to depict a three-dimensional object until one realizes that the parts fit together in an impossible way. :blob: [acronym, binary large object] n. used by database people to refer to any random large block of bits which needs to be stored in a database, such as a picture or sound file. the essential point about a blob is that it's an object you can't interpret within the database itself. :block: [from process scheduling terminology in os theory] . vi. to delay or sit idle while waiting for something. "we're blocking until everyone gets here." compare {busy-wait}. . `block on' vt. to block, waiting for (something). "lunch is blocked on phil's arrival." :block transfer computations: n. from the television series "dr. who", in which it referred to computations so fiendishly subtle and complex that they could not be performed by machines. used to refer to any task that should be expressible as an algorithm in theory, but isn't. :blow an eprom: /bloh *n ee'prom/ v. (alt. `blast an eprom', `burn an eprom') to program a read-only memory, e.g. for use with an embedded system. this term arises because the programming process for the programmable read-only memories (proms) that preceded present-day erasable programmable read-only memories (eproms) involved intentionally blowing tiny electrical fuses on the chip. thus, one was said to `blow' (or `blast') a prom, and the terminology carried over even though the write process on eproms is nondestructive. :blow away: vt. to remove (files and directories) from permanent storage, generally by accident. "he reformatted the wrong partition and blew away last night's netnews." oppose {nuke}. :blow out: vi. of software, to fail spectacularly; almost as serious as {crash and burn}. see {blow past}, {blow up}, {die horribly}. :blow past: vt. to {blow out} despite a safeguard. "the server blew past the k reserve buffer." :blow up: vi. . [scientific computation] to become unstable. suggests that the computation is diverging so rapidly that it will soon overflow or at least go {nonlinear}. . syn. {blow out}. :blt: /b-l-t/, /bl*t/ or (rarely) /belt/ n.,vt. synonym for {blit}. this is the original form of {blit} and the ancestor of {bitblt}. it referred to any large bit-field copy or move operation (one resource-intensive memory-shuffling operation done on pre-paged versions of its, waits, and tops- was sardonically referred to as `the big blt'). the jargon usage has outlasted the {pdp- } block transfer instruction from which {blt} derives; nowadays, the assembler mnemonic {blt} almost always means `branch if less than zero'. :blue book: n. . informal name for one of the three standard references on the page-layout and graphics-control language {postscript} (`postscript language tutorial and cookbook', adobe systems, addison-wesley , qa . .p p , isbn - - - ); the other two official guides are known as the {green book}, the {red book}, and the {white book} (sense ). . informal name for one of the three standard references on smalltalk: `smalltalk- : the language and its implementation', david robson, addison-wesley , qa . .s g , isbn - - - (this is also associated with green and red books). . any of the standards issued by the ccitt's ninth plenary assembly. until now, they have changed color each review cycle ( was {red book}, would be {green book}); however, it is rumored that this convention is going to be dropped before . these include, among other things, the x. email spec and the group through fax standards. see also {{book titles}}. :blue glue: [ibm] n. ibm's sna (systems network architecture), an incredibly {losing} and {bletcherous} communications protocol widely favored at commercial shops that don't know any better. the official ibm definition is "that which binds blue boxes together." see {fear and loathing}. it may not be irrelevant that {blue glue} is the trade name of a m product that is commonly used to hold down the carpet squares to the removable panel floors common in {dinosaur pen}s. a correspondent at u. minn. reports that the cs department there has about bottles of the stuff hanging about, so they often refer to any messy work to be done as `using the blue glue'. :blue goo: n. term for `police' {nanobot}s intended to prevent {gray goo}, denature hazardous waste, destroy pollution, put ozone back into the stratosphere, prevent halitosis, and promote truth, justice, and the american way, etc. see {{nanotechnology}}. :blue wire: [ibm] n. patch wires added to circuit boards at the factory to correct design or fabrication problems. this may be necessary if there hasn't been time to design and qualify another board version. compare {purple wire}, {red wire}, {yellow wire}. :blurgle: /bler'gl/ [great britain] n. spoken {metasyntactic variable}, to indicate some text which is obvious from context, or which is already known. if several words are to be replaced, blurgle may well be doubled or trebled. "to look for something in several files use `grep string blurgle blurgle'." in each case, "blurgle blurgle" would be understood to be replaced by the file you wished to search. compare {mumble}, sense . :bnf: /b-n-f/ n. . [techspeak] acronym for `backus-naur form', a metasyntactic notation used to specify the syntax of programming languages, command sets, and the like. widely used for language descriptions but seldom documented anywhere, so that it must usually be learned by osmosis from other hackers. consider this bnf for a u.s. postal address: ::= ::= | "." ::= [] | ::= [] ::= "," this translates into english as: "a postal-address consists of a name-part, followed by a street-address part, followed by a zip-code part. a personal-part consists of either a first name or an initial followed by a dot. a name-part consists of either: a personal-part followed by a last name followed by an optional `jr-part' (jr., sr., or dynastic number) and end-of-line, or a personal part followed by a name part (this rule illustrates the use of recursion in bnfs, covering the case of people who use multiple first and middle names and/or initials). a street address consists of an optional apartment specifier, followed by a street number, followed by a street name. a zip-part consists of a town-name, followed by a comma, followed by a state code, followed by a zip-code followed by an end-of-line." note that many things (such as the format of a personal-part, apartment specifier, or zip-code) are left unspecified. these are presumed to be obvious from context or detailed somewhere nearby. see also {parse}. . the term is also used loosely for any number of variants and extensions, possibly containing some or all of the {regexp} wildcards such as `*' or `+'. in fact the example above isn't the pure form invented for the algol- report; it uses `[]', which was introduced a few years later in ibm's pl/i definition but is now universally recognized. . in {{science-fiction fandom}}, bnf means `big-name fan' (someone famous or notorious). years ago a fan started handing out black-on-green bnf buttons at sf conventions; this confused the hacker contingent terribly. :boa: [ibm] n. any one of the fat cables that lurk under the floor in a {dinosaur pen}. possibly so called because they display a ferocious life of their own when you try to lay them straight and flat after they have been coiled for some time. it is rumored within ibm that channel cables for the are limited to feet because beyond that length the boas get dangerous --- and it is worth noting that one of the major cable makers uses the trademark `anaconda'. :board: n. . in-context synonym for {bboard}; sometimes used even for usenet newsgroups. . an electronic circuit board (compare {card}). :boat anchor: n. . like {doorstop} but more severe; implies that the offending hardware is irreversibly dead or useless. "that was a working motherboard once. one lightning strike later, instant boat anchor!" . a person who just takes up space. :bof: /b-o-f/ or /bof/ n. abbreviation for the phrase "birds of a feather" (flocking together), an informal discussion group and/or bull session scheduled on a conference program. it is not clear where or when this term originated, but it is now associated with the usenix conferences for unix techies and was already established there by . it was used earlier than that at decus conferences, and is reported to have been common at share meetings as far back as the early s. :bogo-sort: /boh`goh-sort'/ n. (var. `stupid-sort') the archetypical perversely awful algorithm (as opposed to {bubble sort}, which is merely the generic *bad* algorithm). bogo-sort is equivalent to repeatedly throwing a deck of cards in the air, picking them up at random, and then testing whether they are in order. it serves as a sort of canonical example of awfulness. looking at a program and seeing a dumb algorithm, one might say "oh, i see, this program uses bogo-sort." compare {bogus}, {brute force}. :bogometer: /boh-gom'-*t-er/ n. see {bogosity}. compare the `wankometer' described in the {wank} entry; see also {bogus}. :bogon: /boh'gon/ [by analogy with proton/electron/neutron, but doubtless reinforced after by the similarity to douglas adams's `vogons'; see the bibliography in {appendix c}] n. . the elementary particle of bogosity (see {quantum bogodynamics}). for instance, "the ethernet is emitting bogons again" means that it is broken or acting in an erratic or bogus fashion. . a query packet sent from a tcp/ip domain resolver to a root server, having the reply bit set instead of the query bit. . any bogus or incorrectly formed packet sent on a network. . by synecdoche, used to refer to any bogus thing, as in "i'd like to go to lunch with you but i've got to go to the weekly staff bogon". . a person who is bogus or who says bogus things. this was historically the original usage, but has been overtaken by its derivative senses -- . see also {bogosity}, {bogus}; compare {psyton}, {fat electrons}, {magic smoke}. the bogon has become the type case for a whole bestiary of nonce particle names, including the `clutron' or `cluon' (indivisible particle of cluefulness, obviously the antiparticle of the bogon) and the futon (elementary particle of {randomness}). these are not so much live usages in themselves as examples of a live meta-usage: that is, it has become a standard joke or linguistic maneuver to "explain" otherwise mysterious circumstances by inventing nonce particle names. and these imply nonce particle theories, with all their dignity or lack thereof (we might note *parenthetically* that this is a generalization from "(bogus particle) theories" to "bogus (particle theories)"!). perhaps such particles are the modern-day equivalents of trolls and wood-nymphs as standard starting-points around which to construct explanatory myths. of course, playing on an existing word (as in the `futon') yields additional flavor. compare {magic smoke}. :bogon filter: /boh'gon fil'tr/ n. any device, software or hardware, that limits or suppresses the flow and/or emission of bogons. "engineering hacked a bogon filter between the cray and the vaxen, and now we're getting fewer dropped packets." see also {bogosity}, {bogus}. :bogon flux: /boh'gon fluhks/ n. a measure of a supposed field of {bogosity} emitted by a speaker, measured by a {bogometer}; as a speaker starts to wander into increasing bogosity a listener might say "warning, warning, bogon flux is rising". see {quantum bogodynamics}. :bogosity: /boh-go's*-tee/ n. . the degree to which something is {bogus}. at cmu, bogosity is measured with a {bogometer}; in a seminar, when a speaker says something bogus, a listener might raise his hand and say "my bogometer just triggered". more extremely, "you just pinned my bogometer" means you just said or did something so outrageously bogus that it is off the scale, pinning the bogometer needle at the highest possible reading (one might also say "you just redlined my bogometer"). the agreed-upon unit of bogosity is the microlenat /mi:k`roh-len'*t/ (ul). the consensus is that this is the largest unit practical for everyday use. . the potential field generated by a {bogon flux}; see {quantum bogodynamics}. see also {bogon flux}, {bogon filter}, {bogus}. historical note: the microlenat was invented as an attack against noted computer scientist doug lenat by a {tenured graduate student}. doug had failed the student on an important exam for giving only "ai is bogus" as his answer to the questions. the slur is generally considered unmerited, but it has become a running gag nevertheless. some of doug's friends argue that *of course* a microlenat is bogus, since it is only one millionth of a lenat. others have suggested that the unit should be redesignated after the grad student, as the microreid. :bogotify: /boh-go't*-fi:/ vt. to make or become bogus. a program that has been changed so many times as to become completely disorganized has become bogotified. if you tighten a nut too hard and strip the threads on the bolt, the bolt has become bogotified and you had better not use it any more. this coinage led to the notional `autobogotiphobia' defined as `the fear of becoming bogotified'; but is not clear that the latter has ever been `live' jargon rather than a self-conscious joke in jargon about jargon. see also {bogosity}, {bogus}. :bogue out: /bohg owt/ vi. to become bogus, suddenly and unexpectedly. "his talk was relatively sane until somebody asked him a trick question; then he bogued out and did nothing but {flame} afterwards." see also {bogosity}, {bogus}. :bogus: adj. . non-functional. "your patches are bogus." . useless. "opcon is a bogus program." . false. "your arguments are bogus." . incorrect. "that algorithm is bogus." . unbelievable. "you claim to have solved the halting problem for turing machines? that's totally bogus." . silly. "stop writing those bogus sagas." astrology is bogus. so is a bolt that is obviously about to break. so is someone who makes blatantly false claims to have solved a scientific problem. (this word seems to have some, but not all, of the connotations of {random} --- mostly the negative ones.) it is claimed that `bogus' was originally used in the hackish sense at princeton in the late s. it was spread to cmu and yale by michael shamos, a migratory princeton alumnus. a glossary of bogus words was compiled at yale when the word was first popularized (see {autobogotiphobia} under {bogotify}). the word spread into hackerdom from cmu and mit. by the early s it was also current in something like the hackish sense in west coast teen slang, and it had gone mainstream by . a correspondent from cambridge reports, by contrast, that these uses of `bogus' grate on british nerves; in britain the word means, rather specifically, `counterfeit', as in "a bogus -pound note". :bohr bug: /bohr buhg/ [from quantum physics] n. a repeatable {bug}; one that manifests reliably under a possibly unknown but well-defined set of conditions. antonym of {heisenbug}; see also {mandelbug}, {schroedinbug}. :boink: /boynk/ [usenet: ascribed there to the tv series "cheers" and "moonlighting"] . to have sex with; compare {bounce}, sense . (this is mainstream slang.) in commonwealth hackish the variant `bonk' is more common. . after the original peter korn `boinkon' {usenet} parties, used for almost any net social gathering, e.g., miniboink, a small boink held by nancy gillett in ; minniboink, a boinkcon in minnesota in ; humpdayboinks, wednesday get-togethers held in the san francisco bay area. compare {@-party}. . var of `bonk'; see {bonk/oif}. :bomb: . v. general synonym for {crash} (sense ) except that it is not used as a noun; esp. used of software or os failures. "don't run empire with less than k stack, it'll bomb." . n.,v. atari st and macintosh equivalents of a unix `panic' or amiga {guru} (sense ), where icons of little black-powder bombs or mushroom clouds are displayed, indicating that the system has died. on the mac, this may be accompanied by a decimal (or occasionally hexadecimal) number indicating what went wrong, similar to the amiga {guru meditation} number. {{ms-dos}} machines tend to get {locked up} in this situation. :bondage-and-discipline language: a language (such as pascal, ada, apl, or prolog) that, though ostensibly general-purpose, is designed so as to enforce an author's theory of `right programming' even though said theory is demonstrably inadequate for systems hacking or even vanilla general-purpose programming. often abbreviated `b&d'; thus, one may speak of things "having the b&d nature". see {{pascal}}; oppose {languages of choice}. :bonk/oif: /bonk/, /oyf/ interj. in the {mud} community, it has become traditional to express pique or censure by `bonking' the offending person. there is a convention that one should acknowledge a bonk by saying `oif!' and a myth to the effect that failing to do so upsets the cosmic bonk/oif balance, causing much trouble in the universe. some muds have implemented special commands for bonking and oifing. see also {talk mode}, {posing}. :book titles:: there is a tradition in hackerdom of informally tagging important textbooks and standards documents with the dominant color of their covers or with some other conspicuous feature of the cover. many of these are described in this lexicon under their own entries. see {aluminum book}, {blue book}, {cinderella book}, {devil book}, {dragon book}, {green book}, {orange book}, {pink-shirt book}, {purple book}, {red book}, {silver book}, {white book}, {wizard book}, {yellow book}, and {bible}; see also {rainbow series}. :boot: [techspeak; from `by one's bootstraps'] v.,n. to load and initialize the operating system on a machine. this usage is no longer jargon (having passed into techspeak) but has given rise to some derivatives that are still jargon. the derivative `reboot' implies that the machine hasn't been down for long, or that the boot is a {bounce} intended to clear some state of {wedgitude}. this is sometimes used of human thought processes, as in the following exchange: "you've lost me." "ok, reboot. here's the theory...." this term is also found in the variants `cold boot' (from power-off condition) and `warm boot' (with the cpu and all devices already powered up, as after a hardware reset or software crash). another variant: `soft boot', reinitialization of only part of a system, under control of other software still running: "if you're running the {mess-dos} emulator, control-alt-insert will cause a soft-boot of the emulator, while leaving the rest of the system running." opposed to this there is `hard boot', which connotes hostility towards or frustration with the machine being booted: "i'll have to hard-boot this losing sun." "i recommend booting it hard." one often hard-boots by performing a {power cycle}. historical note: this term derives from `bootstrap loader', a short program that was read in from cards or paper tape, or toggled in from the front panel switches. this program was always very short (great efforts were expended on making it short in order to minimize the labor and chance of error involved in toggling it in), but was just smart enough to read in a slightly more complex program (usually from a card or paper tape reader), to which it handed control; this program in turn was smart enough to read the application or operating system from a magnetic tape drive or disk drive. thus, in successive steps, the computer `pulled itself up by its bootstraps' to a useful operating state. nowadays the bootstrap is usually found in rom or eprom, and reads the first stage in from a fixed location on the disk, called the `boot block'. when this program gains control, it is powerful enough to load the actual os and hand control over to it. :bottom feeder: n. syn. for {slopsucker} derived from the fisherman's and naturalist's term for finny creatures who subsist on the primordial ooze. :bottom-up implementation: n. hackish opposite of the techspeak term `top-down design'. it is now received wisdom in most programming cultures that it is best to design from higher levels of abstraction down to lower, specifying sequences of action in increasing detail until you get to actual code. hackers often find (especially in exploratory designs that cannot be closely specified in advance) that it works best to *build* things in the opposite order, by writing and testing a clean set of primitive operations and then knitting them together. :bounce: v. . [perhaps from the image of a thrown ball bouncing off a wall] an electronic mail message that is undeliverable and returns an error notification to the sender is said to `bounce'. see also {bounce message}. . [stanford] to play volleyball. at the now-demolished {d. c. power lab} building used by the stanford ai lab in the s, there was a volleyball court on the front lawn. from p.m. to p.m. was the scheduled maintenance time for the computer, so every afternoon at the computer would become unavailable, and over the intercom a voice would cry, "now hear this: bounce, bounce!" followed by brian mccune loudly bouncing a volleyball on the floor outside the offices of known volleyballers. . to engage in sexual intercourse; prob. from the expression `bouncing the mattress', but influenced by roo's psychosexually loaded "try bouncing me, tigger!" from the "winnie-the-pooh" books. compare {boink}. . to casually reboot a system in order to clear up a transient problem. reported primarily among {vms} users. . [ibm] to {power cycle} a peripheral in order to reset it. :bounce message: [unix] n. notification message returned to sender by a site unable to relay {email} to the intended {{internet address}} recipient or the next link in a {bang path} (see {bounce}). reasons might include a nonexistent or misspelled username or a {down} relay site. bounce messages can themselves fail, with occasionally ugly results; see {sorcerer's apprentice mode}. the terms `bounce mail' and `barfmail' are also common. :boustrophedon: [from a greek word for turning like an ox while plowing] n. an ancient method of writing using alternate left-to-right and right-to-left lines. this term is actually philologists' techspeak and typesetter's jargon. erudite hackers use it for an optimization performed by some computer typesetting software (notably unix `troff( )'). the adverbial form `boustrophedonically' is also found (hackers purely love constructions like this). :box: n. . a computer; esp. in the construction `foo box' where foo is some functional qualifier, like `graphics', or the name of an os (thus, `unix box', `ms-dos box', etc.) "we preprocess the data on unix boxes before handing it up to the mainframe." . [within ibm] without qualification but within an sna-using site, this refers specifically to an ibm front-end processor or fep /f-e-p/. an fep is a small computer necessary to enable an ibm {mainframe} to communicate beyond the limits of the {dinosaur pen}. typically used in expressions like the cry that goes up when an sna network goes down: "looks like the {box} has fallen over." (see {fall over}.) see also {ibm}, {fear and loathing}, {fepped out}, {blue glue}. :boxed comments: n. comments (explanatory notes attached to program instructions) that occupy several lines by themselves; so called because in assembler and c code they are often surrounded by a box in a style something like this: /************************************************* * * this is a boxed comment in c style * *************************************************/ common variants of this style omit the asterisks in column or add a matching row of asterisks closing the right side of the box. the sparest variant omits all but the comment delimiters themselves; the `box' is implied. oppose {winged comments}. :boxen: /bok'sn/ [by analogy with {vaxen}] pl.n. fanciful plural of {box} often encountered in the phrase `unix boxen', used to describe commodity {{unix}} hardware. the connotation is that any two unix boxen are interchangeable. :boxology: /bok-sol'*-jee/ n. syn. {ascii art}. this term implies a more restricted domain, that of box-and-arrow drawings. "his report has a lot of boxology in it." compare {macrology}. :bozotic: /boh-zoh'tik/ or /boh-zo'tik/ [from the name of a tv clown even more losing than ronald mcdonald] adj. resembling or having the quality of a bozo; that is, clownish, ludicrously wrong, unintentionally humorous. compare {wonky}, {demented}. note that the noun `bozo' occurs in slang, but the mainstream adjectival form would be `bozo-like' or (in new england) `bozoish'. :bqs: /b-q-s/ adj. syn. {berkeley quality software}. :brain dump: n. the act of telling someone everything one knows about a particular topic or project. typically used when someone is going to let a new party maintain a piece of code. conceptually analogous to an operating system {core dump} in that it saves a lot of useful {state} before an exit. "you'll have to give me a brain dump on foobar before you start your new job at hackercorp." see {core dump} (sense ). at sun, this is also known as `toi' (transfer of information). :brain fart: n. the actual result of a {braino}, as opposed to the mental glitch which is the braino itself. e.g. typing `dir' on a unix box after a session with dos. :brain-damaged: . [generalization of `honeywell brain damage' (hbd), a theoretical disease invented to explain certain utter cretinisms in honeywell {{multics}}] adj. obviously wrong; {cretinous}; {demented}. there is an implication that the person responsible must have suffered brain damage, because he should have known better. calling something brain-damaged is really bad; it also implies it is unusable, and that its failure to work is due to poor design rather than some accident. "only six monocase characters per file name? now *that's* brain-damaged!" . [esp. in the mac world] may refer to free demonstration software that has been deliberately crippled in some way so as not to compete with the commercial product it is intended to sell. syn. {crippleware}. :brain-dead: adj. brain-damaged in the extreme. it tends to imply terminal design failure rather than malfunction or simple stupidity. "this comm program doesn't know how to send a break --- how brain-dead!" :braino: /bray'no/ n. syn. for {thinko}. see also {brain fart}. :branch to fishkill: [ibm: from the location of one of the corporation's facilities] n. any unexpected jump in a program that produces catastrophic or just plain weird results. see {jump off into never-never land}, {hyperspace}. :brand brand brand: n. humorous catch-phrase from {bartlemud}s, in which players were described carrying a list of objects, the most common of which would usually be a brand. often used as a joke in {talk mode} as in "fred the wizard is here, carrying brand ruby brand brand brand kettle broadsword flamethrower". a brand is a torch, of course; one burns up a lot of those exploring dungeons. prob. influenced by the famous monty python "spam" skit. :bread crumbs: n. debugging statements inserted into a program that emit output or log indicators of the program's {state} to a file so you can see where it dies, or pin down the cause of surprising behavior. the term is probably a reference to the hansel and gretel story from the brothers grimm; in several variants, a character leaves a trail of breadcrumbs so as not to get lost in the woods. :break: . vt. to cause to be broken (in any sense). "your latest patch to the editor broke the paragraph commands." . v. (of a program) to stop temporarily, so that it may debugged. the place where it stops is a `breakpoint'. . [techspeak] vi. to send an rs- break (two character widths of line high) over a serial comm line. . [unix] vi. to strike whatever key currently causes the tty driver to send sigint to the current process. normally, break (sense ) or delete does this. . `break break' may be said to interrupt a conversation (this is an example of verb doubling). this usage comes from radio communications, which in turn probably came from landline telegraph/teleprinter usage, as badly abused in the citizen's band craze a few years ago. :break-even point: n. in the process of implementing a new computer language, the point at which the language is sufficiently effective that one can implement the language in itself. that is, for a new language called, hypothetically, foogol, one has reached break-even when one can write a demonstration compiler for foogol in foogol, discard the original implementation language, and thereafter use older versions of foogol to develop newer ones. this is an important milestone; see {mftl}. :breath-of-life packet: [xerox parc] n. an ethernet packet that contained bootstrap (see {boot}) code, periodically sent out from a working computer to infuse the `breath of life' into any computer on the network that had happened to crash. machines depending on such packets have sufficient hardware or firmware code to wait for (or request) such a packet during the reboot process. see also {dickless workstation}. :breedle: n. see {feep}. :bring x to its knees: v. to present a machine, operating system, piece of software, or algorithm with a load so extreme or {pathological} that it grinds to a halt. "to bring a microvax to its knees, try twenty users running {vi} --- or four running {emacs}." compare {hog}. :brittle: adj. said of software that is functional but easily broken by changes in operating environment or configuration, or by any minor tweak to the software itself. also, any system that responds inappropriately and disastrously to expected external stimuli; e.g., a file system that is usually totally scrambled by a power failure is said to be brittle. this term is often used to describe the results of a research effort that were never intended to be robust, but it can be applied to commercially developed software, which displays the quality far more often than it ought to. oppose {robust}. :broadcast storm: n. an incorrect packet broadcast on a network that causes most hosts to respond all at once, typically with wrong answers that start the process over again. see {network meltdown}. :broken: adj. . not working properly (of programs). . behaving strangely; especially (when used of people) exhibiting extreme depression. :broken arrow: [ibm] n. the error code displayed on line of a terminal (or a pc emulating a ) for various kinds of protocol violations and "unexpected" error conditions (including connection to a {down} computer). on a pc, simulated with `->/_', with the two center characters overstruck. in true {luser} fashion, the original documentation of these codes (visible on every terminal, and necessary for debugging network problems) was confined to an ibm customer engineering manual. note: to appreciate this term fully, it helps to know that `broken arrow' is also military jargon for an accident involving nuclear weapons.... :broket: /broh'k*t/ or /broh'ket`/ [by analogy with `bracket': a `broken bracket'] n. either of the characters `<' and `>', when used as paired enclosing delimiters. this word originated as a contraction of the phrase `broken bracket', that is, a bracket that is bent in the middle. (at mit, and apparently in the {real world} as well, these are usually called {angle brackets}.) :brooks's law: prov. "adding manpower to a late software project makes it later" --- a result of the fact that the advantage from splitting work among n programmers is o(n) (that is, proportional to n), but the complexity and communications cost associated with coordinating and then merging their work is o(n^ ) (that is, proportional to the square of n). the quote is from fred brooks, a manager of ibm's os/ project and author of `the mythical man-month' (addison-wesley, , isbn - - - ), an excellent early book on software engineering. the myth in question has been most tersely expressed as "programmer time is fungible" and brooks established conclusively that it is not. hackers have never forgotten his advice; too often, {management} does. see also {creationism}, {second-system effect}. :brs: /b-r-s/ n. syn. {big red switch}. this abbreviation is fairly common on-line. :brute force: adj. describes a primitive programming style, one in which the programmer relies on the computer's processing power instead of using his or her own intelligence to simplify the problem, often ignoring problems of scale and applying na"ive methods suited to small problems directly to large ones. the {canonical} example of a brute-force algorithm is associated with the `traveling salesman problem' (tsp), a classical {np-}hard problem: suppose a person is in, say, boston, and wishes to drive to n other cities. in what order should he or she visit them in order to minimize the distance travelled? the brute-force method is to simply generate all possible routes and compare the distances; while guaranteed to work and simple to implement, this algorithm is clearly very stupid in that it considers even obviously absurd routes (like going from boston to houston via san francisco and new york, in that order). for very small n it works well, but it rapidly becomes absurdly inefficient when n increases (for n = , there are already , , , , possible routes to consider, and for n = --- well, see {bignum}). see also {np-}. a more simple-minded example of brute-force programming is finding the smallest number in a large list by first using an existing program to sort the list in ascending order, and then picking the first number off the front. whether brute-force programming should be considered stupid or not depends on the context; if the problem isn't too big, the extra cpu time spent on a brute-force solution may cost less than the programmer time it would take to develop a more `intelligent' algorithm. additionally, a more intelligent algorithm may imply more long-term complexity cost and bug-chasing than are justified by the speed improvement. ken thompson, co-inventor of unix, is reported to have uttered the epigram "when in doubt, use brute force". he probably intended this as a {ha ha only serious}, but the original unix kernel's preference for simple, robust, and portable algorithms over {brittle} `smart' ones does seem to have been a significant factor in the success of that os. like so many other tradeoffs in software design, the choice between brute force and complex, finely-tuned cleverness is often a difficult one that requires both engineering savvy and delicate esthetic judgment. :brute force and ignorance: n. a popular design technique at many software houses --- {brute force} coding unrelieved by any knowledge of how problems have been previously solved in elegant ways. dogmatic adherence to design methodologies tends to encourage it. characteristic of early {larval stage} programming; unfortunately, many never outgrow it. often abbreviated bfi: "gak, they used a bubble sort! that's strictly from bfi." compare {bogosity}. :bsd: /b-s-d/ n. [abbreviation for `berkeley system distribution'] a family of {{unix}} versions for the dec {vax} and pdp- developed by bill joy and others at {berzerkeley} starting around , incorporating paged virtual memory, tcp/ip networking enhancements, and many other features. the bsd versions ( . , . , and . ) and the commercial versions derived from them (sunos, ultrix, and mt. xinu) held the technical lead in the unix world until at&t's successful standardization efforts after about , and are still widely popular. see {{unix}}, {usg unix}. :buaf: // [abbreviation, from the alt.fan.warlord] n. big ugly ascii font --- a special form of {ascii art}. various programs exist for rendering text strings into block, bloob, and pseudo-script fonts in cells between four and six character cells on a side; this is smaller than the letters generated by older {banner} (sense ) programs. these are sometimes used to render one's name in a {sig block}, and are critically referred to as `buaf's. see {warlording}. :buag: // [abbreviation, from the alt.fan.warlord] n. big ugly ascii graphic. pejorative term for ugly {ascii art}, especially as found in {sig block}s. for some reason, mutations of the head of bart simpson are particularly common in the least imaginative {sig block}s. see {warlording}. :bubble sort: n. techspeak for a particular sorting technique in which pairs of adjacent values in the list to be sorted are compared and interchanged if they are out of order; thus, list entries `bubble upward' in the list until they bump into one with a lower sort value. because it is not very good relative to other methods and is the one typically stumbled on by {na"ive} and untutored programmers, hackers consider it the {canonical} example of a na"ive algorithm. the canonical example of a really *bad* algorithm is {bogo-sort}. a bubble sort might be used out of ignorance, but any use of bogo-sort could issue only from brain damage or willful perversity. :bucky bits: /buh'kee bits/ n. . obs. the bits produced by the control and meta shift keys on a sail keyboard (octal and respectively), resulting in a -bit keyboard character set. the mit ai tv (knight) keyboards extended this with top and separate left and right control and meta keys, resulting in a -bit character set; later, lisp machines added such keys as super, hyper, and greek (see {space-cadet keyboard}). . by extension, bits associated with `extra' shift keys on any keyboard, e.g., the alt on an ibm pc or command and option keys on a macintosh. it is rumored that `bucky bits' were named for buckminster fuller during a period when he was consulting at stanford. actually, `bucky' was niklaus wirth's nickname when *he* was at stanford; he first suggested the idea of an edit key to set the th bit of an otherwise -bit ascii character. this was used in a number of editors written at stanford or in its environs (tv-edit and nls being the best-known). the term spread to mit and cmu early and is now in general use. see {double bucky}, {quadruple bucky}. :buffer overflow: n. what happens when you try to stuff more data into a buffer (holding area) than it can handle. this may be due to a mismatch in the processing rates of the producing and consuming processes (see {overrun} and {firehose syndrome}), or because the buffer is simply too small to hold all the data that must accumulate before a piece of it can be processed. for example, in a text-processing tool that {crunch}es a line at a time, a short line buffer can result in {lossage} as input from a long line overflows the buffer and trashes data beyond it. good defensive programming would check for overflow on each character and stop accepting data when the buffer is full up. the term is used of and by humans in a metaphorical sense. "what time did i agree to meet you? my buffer must have overflowed." or "if i answer that phone my buffer is going to overflow." see also {spam}, {overrun screw}. :bug: n. an unwanted and unintended property of a program or piece of hardware, esp. one that causes it to malfunction. antonym of {feature}. examples: "there's a bug in the editor: it writes things out backwards." "the system crashed because of a hardware bug." "fred is a winner, but he has a few bugs" (i.e., fred is a good guy, but he has a few personality problems). historical note: some have said this term came from telephone company usage, in which "bugs in a telephone cable" were blamed for noisy lines, but this appears to be an incorrect folk etymology. admiral grace hopper (an early computing pioneer better known for inventing {cobol}) liked to tell a story in which a technician solved a persistent {glitch} in the harvard mark ii machine by pulling an actual insect out from between the contacts of one of its relays, and she subsequently promulgated {bug} in its hackish sense as a joke about the incident (though, as she was careful to admit, she was not there when it happened). for many years the logbook associated with the incident and the actual bug in question (a moth) sat in a display case at the naval surface warfare center. the entire story, with a picture of the logbook and the moth taped into it, is recorded in the `annals of the history of computing', vol. , no. (july ), pp. -- . the text of the log entry (from september , ), reads " relay # panel f (moth) in relay. first actual case of bug being found". this wording seems to establish that the term was already in use at the time in its current specific sense --- and hopper herself reports that the term `bug' was regularly applied to problems in radar electronics during wwii. indeed, the use of `bug' to mean an industrial defect was already established in thomas edison's time, and `bug' in the sense of an disruptive event goes back to shakespeare! in the first edition of samuel johnson's dictionary one meaning of `bug' is "a frightful object; a walking spectre"; this is traced to `bugbear', a welsh term for a variety of mythological monster which (to complete the circle) has recently been reintroduced into the popular lexicon through fantasy role-playing games. in any case, in jargon the word almost never refers to insects. here is a plausible conversation that never actually happened: "there is a bug in this ant farm!" "what do you mean? i don't see any ants in it." "that's the bug." [there has been a widespread myth that the original bug was moved to the smithsonian, and an earlier version of this entry so asserted. a correspondent who thought to check discovered that the bug was not there. while investigating this in late , your editor discovered that the nswc still had the bug, but had unsuccessfully tried to get the smithsonian to accept it --- and that the present curator of their history of american technology museum didn't know this and agreed that it would make a worthwhile exhibit. it was moved to the smithsonian in mid- . thus, the process of investigating the original-computer-bug bug fixed it in an entirely unexpected way, by making the myth true! --- esr] [ update: the plot thickens! a usually reliable source reports having seen the bug at the smithsonian in . i am unable to reconcile the conflicting histories i have been offered, and merely report this fact here. --- esr.] :bug-compatible: adj. said of a design or revision that has been badly compromised by a requirement to be compatible with {fossil}s or {misfeature}s in other programs or (esp.) previous releases of itself. "ms-dos . used \ as a path separator to be bug-compatible with some cretin's choice of / as an option character in . ." :bug-for-bug compatible: n. same as {bug-compatible}, with the additional implication that much tedious effort went into ensuring that each (known) bug was replicated. :buglix: /buhg'liks/ n. pejorative term referring to dec's ultrix operating system in its earlier *severely* buggy versions. still used to describe ultrix, but without venom. compare {aidx}, {hp-sux}, {nominal semidestructor}, {telerat}, {sun-stools}. :bulletproof: adj. used of an algorithm or implementation considered extremely {robust}; lossage-resistant; capable of correctly recovering from any imaginable exception condition. this is a rare and valued quality. syn. {armor-plated}. :bum: . vt. to make highly efficient, either in time or space, often at the expense of clarity. "i managed to bum three more instructions out of that code." "i spent half the night bumming the interrupt code." in {elder days}, john mccarthy (inventor of {lisp}) used to compare some efficiency-obsessed hackers among his students to "ski bums"; thus, optimization became "program bumming", and eventually just "bumming". . to squeeze out excess; to remove something in order to improve whatever it was removed from (without changing function; this distinguishes the process from a {featurectomy}). . n. a small change to an algorithm, program, or hardware device to make it more efficient. "this hardware bum makes the jump instruction faster." usage: now uncommon, largely superseded by v. {tune} (and n. {tweak}, {hack}), though none of these exactly capture sense . all these uses are rare in commonwealth hackish, because in the parent dialects of english `bum' is a rude synonym for `buttocks'. :bump: vt. synonym for increment. has the same meaning as c's ++ operator. used esp. of counter variables, pointers, and index dummies in `for', `while', and `do-while' loops. :burble: [from lewis carroll's "jabberwocky"] v. like {flame}, but connotes that the source is truly clueless and ineffectual (mere flamers can be competent). a term of deep contempt. "there's some guy on the phone burbling about how he got a disk full error and it's all our comm software's fault." :buried treasure: n. a surprising piece of code found in some program. while usually not wrong, it tends to vary from {crufty} to {bletcherous}, and has lain undiscovered only because it was functionally correct, however horrible it is. used sarcastically, because what is found is anything *but* treasure. buried treasure almost always needs to be dug up and removed. "i just found that the scheduler sorts its queue using {bubble sort}! buried treasure!" :burn-in period: n. . a factory test designed to catch systems with {marginal} components before they get out the door; the theory is that burn-in will protect customers by outwaiting the steepest part of the {bathtub curve} (see {infant mortality}). . a period of indeterminate length in which a person using a computer is so intensely involved in his project that he forgets basic needs such as food, drink, sleep, etc. warning: excessive burn-in can lead to burn-out. see {hack mode}, {larval stage}. :burst page: n. syn. {banner}, sense . :busy-wait: vi. used of human behavior, conveys that the subject is busy waiting for someone or something, intends to move instantly as soon as it shows up, and thus cannot do anything else at the moment. "can't talk now, i'm busy-waiting till bill gets off the phone." technically, `busy-wait' means to wait on an event by {spin}ning through a tight or timed-delay loop that polls for the event on each pass, as opposed to setting up an interrupt handler and continuing execution on another part of the task. this is a wasteful technique, best avoided on time-sharing systems where a busy-waiting program may {hog} the processor. :buzz: vi. . of a program, to run with no indication of progress and perhaps without guarantee of ever finishing; esp. said of programs thought to be executing tight loops of code. a program that is buzzing appears to be {catatonic}, but you never get out of catatonia, while a buzzing loop may eventually end of its own accord. "the program buzzes for about seconds trying to sort all the names into order." see {spin}; see also {grovel}. . [eta systems] to test a wire or printed circuit trace for continuity by applying an ac rather than dc signal. some wire faults will pass dc tests but fail a buzz test. . to process an array or list in sequence, doing the same thing to each element. "this loop buzzes through the tz array looking for a terminator type." :bwq: /b-w-q/ [ibm: abbreviation, `buzz word quotient'] the percentage of buzzwords in a speech or documents. usually roughly proportional to {bogosity}. see {tla}. :by hand: adv. said of an operation (especially a repetitive, trivial, and/or tedious one) that ought to be performed automatically by the computer, but which a hacker instead has to step tediously through. "my mailer doesn't have a command to include the text of the message i'm replying to, so i have to do it by hand." this does not necessarily mean the speaker has to retype a copy of the message; it might refer to, say, dropping into a {subshell} from the mailer, making a copy of one's mailbox file, reading that into an editor, locating the top and bottom of the message in question, deleting the rest of the file, inserting `>' characters on each line, writing the file, leaving the editor, returning to the mailer, reading the file in, and later remembering to delete the file. compare {eyeball search}. :byte:: /bi:t/ [techspeak] n. a unit of memory or data equal to the amount used to represent one character; on modern architectures this is usually bits, but may be on -bit machines. some older architectures used `byte' for quantities of or bits, and the pdp- supported `bytes' that were actually bitfields of to bits! these usages are now obsolete, and even -bit bytes have become rare in the general trend toward power-of- word sizes. historical note: the term originated in during the early design phase for the ibm stretch computer; originally it was described as to bits (typical i/o equipment of the period used -bit chunks of information). the move to an -bit byte happened in late , and this size was later adopted and promulgated as a standard by the system/ . the term `byte' was coined by mutating the word `bite' so it would not be accidentally misspelled as {bit}. see also {nybble}. :bytesexual: /bi:t`sek'shu-*l/ adj. said of hardware, denotes willingness to compute or pass data in either {big-endian} or {little-endian} format (depending, presumably, on a {mode bit} somewhere). see also {nuxi problem}. :bzzzt, wrong: /bzt rong/ [usenet/internet] from a robin williams routine in the movie "dead poets society" spoofing radio or tv quiz programs, such as *truth or consequences*, where an incorrect answer earns one a blast from the buzzer and condolences from the interlocutor. a way of expressing mock-rude disagreement, usually immediately following an included quote from another poster. the less abbreviated "*bzzzzt*, wrong, but thank you for playing" is also common; capitalization and emphasis of the buzzer sound varies. = c = ===== :c: n. . the third letter of the english alphabet. . ascii . . the name of a programming language designed by dennis ritchie during the early s and immediately used to reimplement {{unix}}; so called because many features derived from an earlier compiler named `b' in commemoration of *its* parent, bcpl. before bjarne stroustrup settled the question by designing c++, there was a humorous debate over whether c's successor should be named `d' or `p'. c became immensely popular outside bell labs after about and is now the dominant language in systems and microcomputer applications programming. see also {languages of choice}, {indent style}. c is often described, with a mixture of fondness and disdain varying according to the speaker, as "a language that combines all the elegance and power of assembly language with all the readability and maintainability of assembly language". :c programmer's disease: n. the tendency of the undisciplined c programmer to set arbitrary but supposedly generous static limits on table sizes (defined, if you're lucky, by constants in header files) rather than taking the trouble to do proper dynamic storage allocation. if an application user later needs to put elements into a table of size , the afflicted programmer reasons that he can easily reset the table size to (or even as much as , to allow for future expansion), and recompile. this gives the programmer the comfortable feeling of having done his bit to satisfy the user's (unreasonable) demands, and often affords the user multiple opportunities to explore the marvelous consequences of {fandango on core}. in severe cases of the disease, the programmer cannot comprehend why each fix of this kind seems only to further disgruntle the user. :calculator: [cambridge] n. syn. for {bitty box}. :can: vt. to abort a job on a time-sharing system. used esp. when the person doing the deed is an operator, as in "canned from the {{console}}". frequently used in an imperative sense, as in "can that print job, the lpt just popped a sprocket!" synonymous with {gun}. it is said that the ascii character with mnemonic can ( ) was used as a kill-job character on some early oses. :can't happen: the traditional program comment for code executed under a condition that should never be true, for example a file size computed as negative. often, such a condition being true indicates data corruption or a faulty algorithm; it is almost always handled by emitting a fatal error message and terminating or crashing, since there is little else that can be done. this is also often the text emitted if the `impossible' error actually happens! although "can't happen" events are genuinely infrequent in production code, programmers wise enough to check for them habitually are often surprised at how often they are triggered during development and how many headaches checking for them turns out to head off. :candygrammar: n. a programming-language grammar that is mostly {syntactic sugar}; the term is also a play on `candygram'. {cobol}, apple's hypertalk language, and a lot of the so-called ` gl' database languages are like this. the usual intent of such designs is that they be as english-like as possible, on the theory that they will then be easier for unskilled people to program. this intention comes to grief on the reality that syntax isn't what makes programming hard; it's the mental effort and organization required to specify an algorithm precisely that costs. thus the invariable result is that `candygrammar' languages are just as difficult to program in as terser ones, and far more painful for the experienced hacker. [the overtones from the old chevy chase skit on saturday night live should not be overlooked. (this was a "jaws" parody. someone lurking outside an apartment door tries all kinds of bogus ways to get the occupant to open up, while ominous music plays in the background. the last attempt is a half-hearted "candygram!" when the door is opened, a shark bursts in and chomps the poor occupant. there is a moral here for those attracted to candygrammars. note that, in many circles, pretty much the same ones who remember monty python sketches, all it takes is the word "candygram!", suitably timed, to get people rolling on the floor.) --- gls] :canonical: [historically, `according to religious law'] adj. the usual or standard state or manner of something. this word has a somewhat more technical meaning in mathematics. two formulas such as + x and x + are said to be equivalent because they mean the same thing, but the second one is in `canonical form' because it is written in the usual way, with the highest power of x first. usually there are fixed rules you can use to decide whether something is in canonical form. the jargon meaning, a relaxation of the technical meaning, acquired its present loading in computer-science culture largely through its prominence in alonzo church's work in computation theory and mathematical logic (see {knights of the lambda calculus}). compare {vanilla}. this word has an interesting history. non-technical academics do not use the adjective `canonical' in any of the senses defined above with any regularity; they do however use the nouns `canon' and `canonicity' (not *canonicalness or *canonicality). the `canon' of a given author is the complete body of authentic works by that author (this usage is familiar to sherlock holmes fans as well as to literary scholars). `*the* canon' is the body of works in a given field (e.g., works of literature, or of art, or of music) deemed worthwhile for students to study and for scholars to investigate. the word `canon' derives ultimately from the greek `kanon' (akin to the english `cane') referring to a reed. reeds were used for measurement, and in latin and later greek the word `canon' meant a rule or a standard. the establishment of a canon of scriptures within christianity was meant to define a standard or a rule for the religion. the above non-techspeak academic usages stem from this instance of a defined and accepted body of work. alongside this usage was the promulgation of `canons' (`rules') for the government of the catholic church. the techspeak usages ("according to religious law") derive from this use of the latin `canon'. hackers invest this term with a playfulness that makes an ironic contrast with its historical meaning. a true story: one bob sjoberg, new at the mit ai lab, expressed some annoyance at the use of jargon. over his loud objections, gls and rms made a point of using it as much as possible in his presence, and eventually it began to sink in. finally, in one conversation, he used the word `canonical' in jargon-like fashion without thinking. steele: "aha! we've finally got you talking jargon too!" stallman: "what did he say?" steele: "bob just used `canonical' in the canonical way." of course, canonicality depends on context, but it is implicitly defined as the way *hackers* normally expect things to be. thus, a hacker may claim with a straight face that `according to religious law' is *not* the canonical meaning of `canonical'. :card: n. . an electronic printed-circuit board (see also {tall card}, {short card}. . obs. syn. {{punched card}}. :card walloper: n. an edp programmer who grinds out batch programs that do stupid things like print people's paychecks. compare {code grinder}. see also {{punched card}}, {eighty-column mind}. :careware: /keir'weir/ n. {shareware} for which either the author suggests that some payment be made to a nominated charity or a levy directed to charity is included on top of the distribution charge. syn. {charityware}; compare {crippleware}, sense . :cargo cult programming: n. a style of (incompetent) programming dominated by ritual inclusion of code or program structures that serve no real purpose. a cargo cult programmer will usually explain the extra code as a way of working around some bug encountered in the past, but usually neither the bug nor the reason the code apparently avoided the bug was ever fully understood (compare {shotgun debugging}, {voodoo programming}). the term `cargo cult' is a reference to aboriginal religions that grew up in the south pacific after world war ii. the practices of these cults center on building elaborate mockups of airplanes and military style landing strips in the hope of bringing the return of the god-like airplanes that brought such marvelous cargo during the war. hackish usage probably derives from richard feynman's characterization of certain practices as "cargo cult science" in his book `surely you're joking, mr. feynman' (w. w. norton & co, new york , isbn - - - ). :cascade: n. . a huge volume of spurious error-message output produced by a compiler with poor error recovery. this can happen when one initial error throws the parser out of synch so that much of the remaining program text is interpreted as garbaged or ill-formed. . a chain of usenet followups each adding some trivial variation of riposte to the text of the previous one, all of which is reproduced in the new message; an {include war} in which the object is to create a sort of communal graffito. :case and paste: [from `cut and paste'] n. . the addition of a new {feature} to an existing system by selecting the code from an existing feature and pasting it in with minor changes. common in telephony circles because most operations in a telephone switch are selected using `case' statements. leads to {software bloat}. in some circles of emacs users this is called `programming by meta-w', because meta-w is the emacs command for copying a block of text to a kill buffer in preparation to pasting it in elsewhere. the term is condescending, implying that the programmer is acting mindlessly rather than thinking carefully about what is required to integrate the code for two similar cases. :casters-up mode: [ibm] n. yet another synonym for `broken' or `down'. usually connotes a major failure. a system (hardware or software) which is `down' may be already being restarted before the failure is noticed, whereas one which is `casters up' is usually a good excuse to take the rest of the day off (as long as you're not responsible for fixing it). :casting the runes: n. what a {guru} does when you ask him or her to run a particular program and type at it because it never works for anyone else; esp. used when nobody can ever see what the guru is doing different from what j. random luser does. compare {incantation}, {runes}, {examining the entrails}; also see the ai koan about tom knight in "{a selection of ai koans}" ({appendix a}). :cat: [from `catenate' via {{unix}} `cat( )'] vt. . [techspeak] to spew an entire file to the screen or some other output sink without pause. . by extension, to dump large amounts of data at an unprepared target or with no intention of browsing it carefully. usage: considered silly. rare outside unix sites. see also {dd}, {blt}. among unix fans, `cat( )' is considered an excellent example of user-interface design, because it outputs the file contents without such verbosity as spacing or headers between the files, and because it does not require the files to consist of lines of text, but works with any sort of data. among unix-haters, `cat( )' is considered the {canonical} example of *bad* user-interface design. this because it is more often used to {blast} a file to standard output than to concatenate two files. the name `cat' for the former operation is just as unintuitive as, say, lisp's {cdr}. of such oppositions are {holy wars} made.... :catatonic: adj. describes a condition of suspended animation in which something is so {wedged} or {hung} that it makes no response. if you are typing on a terminal and suddenly the computer doesn't even echo the letters back to the screen as you type, let alone do what you're asking it to do, then the computer is suffering from catatonia (possibly because it has crashed). "there i was in the middle of a winning game of {nethack} and it went catatonic on me! aaargh!" compare {buzz}. :cd tilde: /see-dee til-d*/ vi. to go home. from the unix c-shell and korn-shell command `cd ~', which takes one `$home'. by extension, may be used with other arguments; thus, over an electronic chat link, `cd ~coffee' would mean "i'm going to the coffee machine." :cdr: /ku'dr/ or /kuh'dr/ [from lisp] vt. to skip past the first item from a list of things (generalized from the lisp operation on binary tree structures, which returns a list consisting of all but the first element of its argument). in the form `cdr down', to trace down a list of elements: "shall we cdr down the agenda?" usage: silly. see also {loop through}. historical note: the instruction format of the ibm that hosted the original lisp implementation featured two -bit fields called the `address' and `decrement' parts. the term `cdr' was originally `contents of decrement part of register'. similarly, `car' stood for `contents of address part of register'. the cdr and car operations have since become bases for formation of compound metaphors in non-lisp contexts. gls recalls, for example, a programming project in which strings were represented as linked lists; the get-character and skip-character operations were of course called char and chdr. :chad: /chad/ n. . the perforated edge strips on printer paper, after they have been separated from the printed portion. also called {selvage} and {perf}. . obs. the confetti-like paper bits punched out of cards or paper tape; this was also called `chaff', `computer confetti', and `keypunch droppings'. historical note: one correspondent believes `chad' (sense ) derives from the chadless keypunch (named for its inventor), which cut little u-shaped tabs in the card to make a hole when the tab folded back, rather than punching out a circle/rectangle; it was clear that if the chadless keypunch didn't make them, then the stuff that other keypunches made had to be `chad'. :chad box: n. {iron age} card punches contained boxes inside them, about the size of a lunchbox (or in some models a large wastebasket), that held the {chad} (sense ). you had to open the covers of the card punch periodically and empty the chad box. the {bit bucket} was notionally the equivalent device in the cpu enclosure, which was typically across the room in another great gray-and-blue box. :chain: . [orig. from basic's `chain' statement] vi. to hand off execution to a child or successor without going through the {os} command interpreter that invoked it. the state of the parent program is lost and there is no returning to it. though this facility used to be common on memory-limited micros and is still widely supported for backward compatibility, the jargon usage is semi-obsolescent; in particular, most unix programmers will think of this as an {exec}. oppose the more modern {subshell}. . a series of linked data areas within an operating system or application. `chain rattling' is the process of repeatedly running through the linked data areas searching for one which is of interest to the executing program. the implication is that there is a very large number of links on the chain. :channel: [irc] n. the basic unit of discussion on {irc}. once one joins a channel, everything one types is read by others on that channel. channels can either be named with numbers or with strings that begin with a `#' sign, and can have topic descriptions (which are generally irrelevant to the actual subject of discussion). some notable channels are `#initgame', `#hottub', and `#report'. at times of international crisis, `#report' has hundreds of members, some of whom take turns listening to various news services and summarizing the news, or in some cases, giving first-hand accounts of the action (e.g., scud missile attacks in tel aviv during the gulf war in ). :channel hopping: [irc, genie] n. to rapidly switch channels on {irc}, or genie chat board, just as a social butterfly might hop from one group to another at a party. this may derive from the tv watcher's idiom `channel surfing'. :channel op: /chan'l op/ [irc] n. someone who is endowed with privileges on a particular {irc} channel; commonly abbreviated `chanop' or `chop'. these privileges include the right to {kick} users, to change various status bits, and to make others into chops. :chanop: /chan'-op/ [irc] n. see {channel op}. :char: /keir/ or /char/; rarely, /kar/ n. shorthand for `character'. esp. used by c programmers, as `char' is c's typename for character data. :charityware: /char'it-ee-weir`/ n. syn. {careware}. :chase pointers: . vi. to go through multiple levels of indirection, as in traversing a linked list or graph structure. used esp. by programmers in c, where explicit pointers are a very common data type. this is techspeak, but it remains jargon when used of human networks. "i'm chasing pointers. bob said you could tell me who to talk to about...." see {dangling pointer} and {snap}. . [cambridge] `pointer chase' or `pointer hunt': the process of going through a dump (interactively or on a large piece of paper printed with hex {runes}) following dynamic data-structures. used only in a debugging context. :check: n. a hardware-detected error condition, most commonly used to refer to actual hardware failures rather than software-induced traps. e.g., a `parity check' is the result of a hardware-detected parity error. recorded here because it's often humorously extended to non-technical problems. for example, the term `child check' has been used to refer to the problems caused by a small child who is curious to know what happens when s/he presses all the cute buttons on a computer's console (of course, this particular problem could have been prevented with {molly-guard}s). :chemist: [cambridge] n. someone who wastes computer time on {number-crunching} when you'd far rather the machine were doing something more productive, such as working out anagrams of your name or printing snoopy calendars or running {life} patterns. may or may not refer to someone who actually studies chemistry. :chernobyl chicken: n. see {laser chicken}. :chernobyl packet: /cher-noh'b*l pak'*t/ n. a network packet that induces {network meltdown} (the result of a {broadcast storm}), in memory of the april nuclear accident at chernobyl in ukraine. the typical scenario involves an ip ethernet datagram that passes through a gateway with both source and destination ether and ip address set as the respective broadcast addresses for the subnetworks being gated between. compare {christmas tree packet}. :chicken head: [commodore] n. the commodore business machines logo, which strongly resembles a poultry part. rendered in ascii as `c='. with the arguable exception of the amiga (see {amoeba}), commodore's machines are notoriously crocky little {bitty box}es (see also {petscii}). thus, this usage may owe something to philip k. dick's novel `do androids dream of electric sheep?' (the basis for the movie `blade runner'), in which a `chickenhead' is a mutant with below-average intelligence. :chiclet keyboard: n. a keyboard with small rectangular or lozenge-shaped rubber or plastic keys that look like pieces of chewing gum. (chiclets is the brand name of a variety of chewing gum that does in fact resemble the keys of chiclet keyboards.) used esp. to describe the original ibm pcjr keyboard. vendors unanimously liked these because they were cheap, and a lot of early portable and laptop products got launched using them. customers rejected the idea with almost equal unanimity, and chiclets are not often seen on anything larger than a digital watch any more. :chine nual: /sheen'yu-*l/ [mit] n.,obs. the lisp machine manual, so called because the title was wrapped around the cover so only those letters showed on the front. :chinese army technique: n. syn. {mongolian hordes technique}. :choke: v. . to reject input, often ungracefully. "nuls make system v's `lpr( )' choke." "i tried building an {emacs} binary to use {x}, but `cpp( )' choked on all those `#define's." see {barf}, {gag}, {vi}. . [mit] more generally, to fail at any endeavor, but with some flair or bravado; the popular definition is "to snatch defeat from the jaws of victory." :chomp: vi. to {lose}; specifically, to chew on something of which more was bitten off than one can. probably related to gnashing of teeth. see {bagbiter}. a hand gesture commonly accompanies this. to perform it, hold the four fingers together and place the thumb against their tips. now open and close your hand rapidly to suggest a biting action (much like what pac-man does in the classic video game, though this pantomime seems to predate that). the gesture alone means `chomp chomp' (see "{verb doubling}" in the "{jargon construction}" section of the prependices). the hand may be pointed at the object of complaint, and for real emphasis you can use both hands at once. doing this to a person is equivalent to saying "you chomper!" if you point the gesture at yourself, it is a humble but humorous admission of some failure. you might do this if someone told you that a program you had written had failed in some surprising way and you felt dumb for not having anticipated it. :chomper: n. someone or something that is chomping; a loser. see {loser}, {bagbiter}, {chomp}. :chop: /chop/ [irc] n. see {channel op}. :christmas tree: n. a kind of rs- line tester or breakout box featuring rows of blinking red and green leds suggestive of christmas lights. :christmas tree packet: n. a packet with every single option set for whatever protocol is in use. see {kamikaze packet}, {chernobyl packet}. (the term doubtless derives from a fanciful image of each little option bit being represented by a different-colored light bulb, all turned on.) :chrome: [from automotive slang via wargaming] n. showy features added to attract users but contributing little or nothing to the power of a system. "the d icons in motif are just chrome, but they certainly are *pretty* chrome!" distinguished from {bells and whistles} by the fact that the latter are usually added to gratify developers' own desires for featurefulness. often used as a term of contempt. :chug: vi. to run slowly; to {grind} or {grovel}. "the disk is chugging like crazy." :church of the subgenius: n. a mutant offshoot of {discordianism} launched in as a spoof of fundamentalist christianity by the `reverend' ivan stang, a brilliant satirist with a gift for promotion. popular among hackers as a rich source of bizarre imagery and references such as "bob" the divine drilling-equipment salesman, the benevolent space xists, and the stark fist of removal. much subgenius theory is concerned with the acquisition of the mystical substance or quality of `slack'. :cinderella book: [cmu] n. `introduction to automata theory, languages, and computation', by john hopcroft and jeffrey ullman, (addison-wesley, ). so called because the cover depicts a girl (putatively cinderella) sitting in front of a rube goldberg device and holding a rope coming out of it. the back cover depicts the girl with the device in shambles after she has pulled on the rope. see also {{book titles}}. :ci$: // n. hackerism for `cis', compuserve information service. the dollar sign refers to compuserve's rather steep line charges. often used in {sig block}s just before a compuserve address. syn. {compu$erve}. :classic c: /klas'ik c/ [a play on `coke classic'] n. the c programming language as defined in the first edition of {k&r}, with some small additions. it is also known as `k&r c'. the name came into use while c was being standardized by the ansi x j committee. also `c classic'. this is sometimes applied elsewhere: thus, `x classic', where x = star trek (referring to the original tv series) or x = pc (referring to ibm's isa-bus machines as opposed to the ps/ series). this construction is especially used of product series in which the newer versions are considered serious losers relative to the older ones. :clean: . adj. used of hardware or software designs, implies `elegance in the small', that is, a design or implementation that may not hold any surprises but does things in a way that is reasonably intuitive and relatively easy to comprehend from the outside. the antonym is `grungy' or {crufty}. . v. to remove unneeded or undesired files in a effort to reduce clutter: "i'm cleaning up my account." "i cleaned up the garbage and now have meg free on that partition." :clm: /c-l-m/ [sun: `career limiting move'] . n. an action endangering one's future prospects of getting plum projects and raises, and possibly one's job: "his halloween costume was a parody of his manager. he won the prize for `best clm'." . adj. denotes extreme severity of a bug, discovered by a customer and obviously missed earlier because of poor testing: "that's a clm bug!" :clobber: vt. to overwrite, usually unintentionally: "i walked off the end of the array and clobbered the stack." compare {mung}, {scribble}, {trash}, and {smash the stack}. :clocks: n. processor logic cycles, so called because each generally corresponds to one clock pulse in the processor's timing. the relative execution times of instructions on a machine are usually discussed in clocks rather than absolute fractions of a second; one good reason for this is that clock speeds for various models of the machine may increase as technology improves, and it is usually the relative times one is interested in when discussing the instruction set. compare {cycle}. :clone: n. . an exact duplicate: "our product is a clone of their product." implies a legal reimplementation from documentation or by reverse-engineering. also connotes lower price. . a shoddy, spurious copy: "their product is a clone of our product." . a blatant ripoff, most likely violating copyright, patent, or trade secret protections: "your product is a clone of my product." this use implies legal action is pending. . a `pc clone'; a pc-bus/isa or eisa-compatible x -based microcomputer (this use is sometimes spelled `klone' or `pclone'). these invariably have much more bang for the buck than the ibm archetypes they resemble. . in the construction `unix clone': an os designed to deliver a unix-lookalike environment without unix license fees, or with additional `mission-critical' features such as support for real-time programming. . v. to make an exact copy of something. "let me clone that" might mean "i want to borrow that paper so i can make a photocopy" or "let me get a copy of that file before you {mung} it". :clover key: [mac users] n. see {feature key}. :clustergeeking: /kluh'st*r-gee`king/ [cmu] n. spending more time at a computer cluster doing cs homework than most people spend breathing. :cobol: /koh'bol/ [common business-oriented language] n. (synonymous with {evil}.) a weak, verbose, and flabby language used by {card walloper}s to do boring mindless things on {dinosaur} mainframes. hackers believe that all cobol programmers are {suit}s or {code grinder}s, and no self-respecting hacker will ever admit to having learned the language. its very name is seldom uttered without ritual expressions of disgust or horror. see also {fear and loathing}, {software rot}. :cobol fingers: /koh'bol fing'grz/ n. reported from sweden, a (hypothetical) disease one might get from coding in cobol. the language requires code verbose beyond all reason; thus it is alleged that programming too much in cobol causes one's fingers to wear down to stubs by the endless typing. "i refuse to type in all that source code again; it would give me cobol fingers!" :code grinder: n. . a {suit}-wearing minion of the sort hired in legion strength by banks and insurance companies to implement payroll packages in rpg and other such unspeakable horrors. in its native habitat, the code grinder often removes the suit jacket to reveal an underplumage consisting of button-down shirt (starch optional) and a tie. in times of dire stress, the sleeves (if long) may be rolled up and the tie loosened about half an inch. it seldom helps. the {code grinder}'s milieu is about as far from hackerdom as one can get and still touch a computer; the term connotes pity. see {real world}, {suit}. . used of or to a hacker, a really serious slur on the person's creative ability; connotes a design style characterized by primitive technique, rule-boundedness, {brute force}, and utter lack of imagination. compare {card walloper}; contrast {hacker}, {real programmer}. :code police: [by analogy with george orwell's `thought police'] n. a mythical team of gestapo-like storm troopers that might burst into one's office and arrest one for violating programming style rules. may be used either seriously, to underline a claim that a particular style violation is dangerous, or ironically, to suggest that the practice under discussion is condemned mainly by anal-retentive {weenie}s. "dike out that goto or the code police will get you!" the ironic usage is perhaps more common. :codewalker: n. a program component that traverses other programs for a living. compilers have codewalkers in their front ends; so do cross-reference generators and some database front ends. other utility programs that try to do too much with source code may turn into codewalkers. as in "this new `vgrind' feature would require a codewalker to implement." :coefficient of x: n. hackish speech makes rather heavy use of pseudo-mathematical metaphors. four particularly important ones involve the terms `coefficient', `factor', `index', and `quotient'. they are often loosely applied to things you cannot really be quantitative about, but there are subtle distinctions among them that convey information about the way the speaker mentally models whatever he or she is describing. `foo factor' and `foo quotient' tend to describe something for which the issue is one of presence or absence. the canonical example is {fudge factor}. it's not important how much you're fudging; the term simply acknowledges that some fudging is needed. you might talk of liking a movie for its silliness factor. quotient tends to imply that the property is a ratio of two opposing factors: "i would have won except for my luck quotient." this could also be "i would have won except for the luck factor", but using *quotient* emphasizes that it was bad luck overpowering good luck (or someone else's good luck overpowering your own). `foo index' and `coefficient of foo' both tend to imply that foo is, if not strictly measurable, at least something that can be larger or smaller. thus, you might refer to a paper or person as having a `high bogosity index', whereas you would be less likely to speak of a `high bogosity factor'. `foo index' suggests that foo is a condensation of many quantities, as in the mundane cost-of-living index; `coefficient of foo' suggests that foo is a fundamental quantity, as in a coefficient of friction. the choice between these terms is often one of personal preference; e.g., some people might feel that bogosity is a fundamental attribute and thus say `coefficient of bogosity', whereas others might feel it is a combination of factors and thus say `bogosity index'. :cokebottle: /kohk'bot-l/ n. any very unusual character, particularly one you can't type because it it isn't on your keyboard. mit people used to complain about the `control-meta-cokebottle' commands at sail, and sail people complained right back about the `{altmode}-altmode-cokebottle' commands at mit. after the demise of the {space-cadet keyboard}, `cokebottle' faded away as serious usage, but was often invoked humorously to describe an (unspecified) weird or non-intuitive keystroke command. it may be due for a second inning, however. the osf/motif window manager, `mwm( )', has a reserved keystroke for switching to the default set of keybindings and behavior. this keystroke is (believe it or not) `control-meta-bang' (see {bang}). since the exclamation point looks a lot like an upside down coke bottle, motif hackers have begun referring to this keystroke as `cokebottle'. see also {quadruple bucky}. :cold boot: n. see {boot}. :come from: n. a semi-mythical language construct dual to the `go to'; `come from'